GT Designer 3 Manual (Unlockplc - Com)

http://unlockplc.com PLC,HMI,Scada System and more...
Integrated FA Software
GT Designer3
Version1
Screen Design Manual Functions 1/2 Functions 2/2
(For GOT1000 Series)
SW1DNC-GTWK3-E
Unlock Crack password PLC HMI...

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the
product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]
WARNING
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device value, a current or set
timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the relevant manual to fully understand the
operating procedures.
When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
A-1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE
(1) Required memory of a personal computer and the free capacity of the hard disk
For required memory and the free capacity of the hard disk, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.1 Operating environment
(2) Error messages displayed while starting and editing
"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to secure
at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.
(3) GT Designer3 and the GOT display
(a) Precautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line and others) in bold
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer.
However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line, line freeform, or polygon is displayed differently between
GT Designer3 and the GOT.
GT Designer3 On GOT
(c) Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different between
(d) Drawing of different type lines
The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
• The display position of the scale value displayed in the graph is different between GT Designer3 and the
GOT.
• Even if the display-start-line of a comment is set, the comment is displayed from the first line on GT
Designer3.
(f) Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the filled-paint
may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200% Display magnification: 100%
A-2
(4) Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system
environment (256 colors 2 colors)
• The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
• The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a red rectangle-figure is changed to [2(mono)], the red color remains.
• The colors of the image data (BMP file or JPEG file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is
closed and that image data is double-clicked.
(5) When device type is changed
Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device. The device flag
may be represented as "??", depending on the settings.
Example: D0.b0 D0D0.b5 ??
(6) OS setting
Set the font size to [Normal] when setting OS (Windows) screens.
If the font size is set to other than [Normal], the GT Designer3 dialog box and others cannot be displayed
correctly.
A-3
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ............................................................................................A - 2
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 4
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 4
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 15
QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 17
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 19
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 24
FIGURES
1. FIGURES
1.1 Line .................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2
1.2 Line Freeform .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 4
1.3 Rectangle......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
1.4 Polygon ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 8
1.5 Circle................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 9
1.6 Arc ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10
1.7 Sector ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 12
1.8 Scale .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 13
1.9 Piping ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14
1.10 Paint............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.11 Import Figure File........................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.1 Importing figure files ........................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data............................................................................................ 1 - 31
1.12 Capture .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 32
1.12.1 Capturing displays .............................................................................................................. 1 - 32
TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

2. TOUCH SWITCH
2.1 Types of Touch Switches................................................................................................................. 2 - 1
2.2 Setting Switch .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 4
2.3 Setting Bit Switch ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 30
A-4
2.4 Setting Word Switch ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 34

2.5 Setting Go To Screen Switch......................................................................................................... 2 - 37
2.6 Setting Change Station No. Switch................................................................................................ 2 - 47
2.7 Setting Special Function Switch .................................................................................................... 2 - 53
2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch .............................................................................................. 2 - 66
2.9 Setting Key Code Switch ............................................................................................................... 2 - 69
2.10 Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 2 - 71
2.10.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 2 - 71
2.10.2 GOT environmental setting (Screen switching/Window) .................................................... 2 - 71
2.10.3 GOT environmental setting (Key window)/Screen property ............................................... 2 - 71
2.10.4 GOT environmental setting (System information) .............................................................. 2 - 72
2.10.5 Sound file setting ................................................................................................................ 2 - 72
2.10.6 GOT internal device............................................................................................................ 2 - 72
2.11 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 2 - 73
3. LAMP
3.1 Setting Bit Lamp .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 2
3.2 Setting Word Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 11
3.3 Setting Lamp Area ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.4.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 3 - 24
3.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 3 - 25
NUMBERS, CHARACTERS
4. GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
4.1 Text.................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 1
4.2 Logo Text......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

5.1 Setting Numerical Display................................................................................................................ 5 - 3
5.2 Setting Numerical Input ................................................................................................................. 5 - 14
5.3.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 5 - 30
5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 33
6. ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

6.1 Setting ASCII Display ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.2 Setting ASCII Input .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.3.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 6 - 17
A-5

6.4 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.5 Useful Operations/Functions ......................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.5.1 Kana-kanji conversion function........................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 34
7. DATA LIST
7.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.2.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
7.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
7.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 15
8. HISTORICAL DATA LIST DISPLAY

8.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 2
8.2.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 8 - 13
8.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 8 - 13
8.3.1 Relationships with the logging function............................................................................... 8 - 13
8.3.2 Historical data list display setting........................................................................................ 8 - 14
8.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 19
9. DATE DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY

9.1 Setting Date Display ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
9.2 Setting Time Display ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
9.3 Relevant settings ........................................................................................................................... 9 - 10
9.3.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 9 - 10
9.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
10. COMMENT DISPLAY

10.1 Setting Bit Comment ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.2 Setting Word Comment ............................................................................................................... 10 - 14
10.3 Setting Simple Comment ............................................................................................................. 10 - 28
10.4 Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 10 - 29
10.4.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 10 - 29
10.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 10 - 30
ALARM
11. ALARM
11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms ...................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.1.1 Alarm function................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.1.2 Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................. 11 - 18
11.2 Advanced Alarm Common ........................................................................................................... 11 - 23
11.3 Advanced User Alarm Display ..................................................................................................... 11 - 24
A-6
11.3.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................... 11 - 25

11.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation ........................................................................ 11 - 45
11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display................................................................................ 11 - 57
11.3.4 Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 11 - 76
11.3.5 Useful operations and functions ....................................................................................... 11 - 77
11.3.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 100
11.4 Advanced System Alarm Display............................................................................................... 11 - 108
11.4.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................. 11 - 109
11.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings ................................................................ 11 - 125
11.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting ......................................................................... 11 - 129
11.4.4 Relevant settings ............................................................................................................ 11 - 144
11.4.5 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 11 - 145
11.4.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 156
11.5 Alarm History Display ................................................................................................................ 11 - 162
11.5.1 Alarm history settings ..................................................................................................... 11 - 164
11.5.2 Alarm history display setting ........................................................................................... 11 - 176
11.5.4 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 183
11.5.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 193
11.6 User Alarm Display .................................................................................................................... 11 - 195
11.6.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 196
11.6.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 204
11.6.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 214
11.7 System Alarm Display................................................................................................................ 11 - 216
11.7.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 217
11.7.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 220
11.7.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 221
11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display ................................................................................................ 11 - 222
11.8.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................. 11 - 223
11.8.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 227
11.8.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 249
11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display.............................................................................................................. 11 - 255
11.9.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 256
11.9.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 260
11.9.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 262
GRAPH, METER
12. LEVEL
12.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
12.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 12 - 11
A-7
12.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 13
13. PANELMETER
13.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
13.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 13 - 12
14. LINE GRAPH

14.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 2
14.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 14 - 13
14.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 13
14.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 14 - 14
15. TREND GRAPH

15.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
15.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 15 - 12
15.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 12
15.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 15
16. BAR GRAPH

16.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 1
16.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 16 - 11
16.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 11
16.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 16 - 12
17. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH

17.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 1
17.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 17 - 10
17.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 10
17.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 17 - 11
18. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

18.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 1
18.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 18 - 10
18.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 10
18.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 11
A-8
19. SCATTER GRAPH

19.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 2
19.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 19 - 13
19.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 13
19.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 19 - 17
20. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

20.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 2
20.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 20 - 16
20.2.2 GOT internal device.......................................................................................................... 20 - 16
20.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 16
20.3.1 Relationships with logging function .................................................................................. 20 - 16
20.3.2 Historical trend graph setting ............................................................................................ 20 - 17
20.4 Useful Operations/Functions ....................................................................................................... 20 - 19
20.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 20 - 25
PARTS
21. PARTS DISPLAY
21.1 Bit Parts Settigs ............................................................................................................................. 21 - 3
21.2 Word Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 21 - 10
21.3 Fixed Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 21 - 19
21.4 Parts Settings .............................................................................................................................. 21 - 24
21.5.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 21 - 25
21.5.2 Parts setting...................................................................................................................... 21 - 25
21.6 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 21 - 26
21.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 21 - 31
22. PARTS MOVEMENT

22.1 Bit Parts Settings ........................................................................................................................... 22 - 3
22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)............................................... 22 - 26
22.5.1 Parts setting...................................................................................................................... 22 - 28
22.6 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 22 - 29
22.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 36
A-9

DATA COLLECTION
23. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
23.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 3
23.2 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 23 - 6
23.2.1 Saving and managing recorded data.................................................................................. 23 - 6
23.2.2 Display and process ........................................................................................................... 23 - 7
23.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file.................................................................................... 23 - 15
23.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 23 - 16
24. LOGGING FUNCTION

24.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 24 - 2
24.1.1 Logging list.......................................................................................................................... 24 - 2
24.1.2 Logging setting ................................................................................................................... 24 - 3
24.2 Control of logging settings ........................................................................................................... 24 - 10
24.4 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 24 - 12
24.4.1 File save mode ................................................................................................................. 24 - 17
24.4.2 Buffer historical mode ....................................................................................................... 24 - 20
24.4.3 Display and process ......................................................................................................... 24 - 22
24.4.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file................................................................................. 24 - 25
24.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 24 - 27
RECIPE
25. RECIPE
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function ........................................ 25 - 5
25.2 Recipe Function ........................................................................................................................... 25 - 11
25.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 25 - 11
25.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 25 - 18
25.3 Advanced Recipe Function .......................................................................................................... 25 - 19
25.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 25 - 19
25.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting ................................................................................... 25 - 25
25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value.................................................................................... 25 - 28
25.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file............................................................. 25 - 32
25.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error................................ 25 - 43
25.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 25 - 46
TRIGGER ACTION
26. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION
26.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 2
26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting ................................................................................ 26 - 7
A - 10

26.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 10
26.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 26 - 12
27. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

27.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 27 - 2
27.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 27 - 7
28. TRIGGER ACTION FUNCTION

28.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 28 - 2
28.2 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 28 - 4
29. TIME ACTION FUNCTION

29.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 29 - 2
29.2 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 29 - 5
29.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 29 - 8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
30.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 30 - 1
30.1.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 30 - 1
30.1.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 30 - 5
30.2 Project Script, Screen Script........................................................................................................ 30 - 10
30.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 30 - 10
30.2.2 Relevant Settings ............................................................................................................. 30 - 22
30.2.3 Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 30 - 24
30.2.4 Actions and settings ......................................................................................................... 30 - 25
30.2.5 Control structure ............................................................................................................... 30 - 28
30.2.6 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 30 - 36
30.2.7 Program examples ........................................................................................................... 30 - 53
30.2.8 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 30 - 63
30.2.9 Precautions for using bmov .............................................................................................. 30 - 69
30.3 Object Script ................................................................................................................................ 30 - 72
30.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 30 - 73
30.3.6 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................. 30 - 101
30.3.7 Program examples ......................................................................................................... 30 - 102
30.3.8 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 30 - 107
30.4 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 30 - 110
30.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger .......................................... 30 - 110
30.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check ........................................................................ 30 - 114
30.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................. 30 - 117
A - 11
30.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script..................................................................................... 30 - 123
PERIPHERALS
31. BARCODE FUNCTION
31.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 31 - 2
31.2.1 GOT environmental setting (System information)............................................................... 31 - 5
31.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 31 - 6
31.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 31 - 11
32. RFID FUNCTION

32.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 32 - 2
32.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 32 - 7
32.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 32 - 19
33. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION FUNCTION

33.1 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Serial) ............................................................................. 33 - 1
33.1.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 33 - 2
33.1.2 Relevant Settings................................................................................................................ 33 - 5
33.1.3 Actions ................................................................................................................................ 33 - 5
33.1.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 33 - 7
33.2 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Ethernet) ........................................................................ 33 - 8
33.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 33 - 10
33.2.2 Actions .............................................................................................................................. 33 - 18
33.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 33 - 19
34. VNC(R) SERVER FUNCTION

34.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 34 - 3
34.1.1 GOT setting ........................................................................................................................ 34 - 4
34.1.2 Personal computer setting .................................................................................................. 34 - 5
34.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 34 - 8
34.3.1 Remote screen ................................................................................................................... 34 - 8
34.3.2 Authorization control ......................................................................................................... 34 - 10
34.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 34 - 12
35. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

35.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 35 - 2
35.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 35 - 6
A - 12
35.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 35 - 18
36. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

36.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 3
36.2 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 11
36.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool.......................................................................................................... 36 - 23
36.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 36 - 35
37. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

37.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 37 - 2
37.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 37 - 6
37.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 37 - 8
38. RGB DISPLAY FUNCTION

38.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 38 - 2
38.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 38 - 4
38.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 38 - 9
39. REPORT FUNCTION

39.1 Report screen creation (screen property) ...................................................................................... 39 - 2
39.2 Setting common to each report (report setting) ............................................................................. 39 - 6
39.3 Print layout setting ......................................................................................................................... 39 - 8
39.4.1 GOT environment settings (System information) ............................................................. 39 - 16
39.5 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 39 - 17
39.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 39 - 20
40. HARD COPY FUNCTION

40.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 40 - 2
40.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 40 - 5
41. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

41.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 41 - 1
41.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 41 - 2
A - 13
APPENDICES
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File .............................................................................App - 1
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board................................................................................App - 2
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT .................................................App - 3
Appendix4 Type of Data That Can Be Saved from the GOT to the Memory Card ................................App - 4
INDEX
REVISIONS
WARRANTY
A - 14
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
 Connection manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080868ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC2)
SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080860ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA9)
A - 15
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)
 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7M23)
 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D44801
(09R823)
 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D17501
(09R815)
JY997D20101
(09R817)
 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 16
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for
Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function) GT Works3
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 17
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

Operating the utility
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Functions) for GT Works3
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 18
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GOT1000 GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,
GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT104
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 19

GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
 Communication unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
A - 20
 Option
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
Protective Sheet GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11
GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 21
 Software
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA
GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller
GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2
MT Works2
(SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)
NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 22
 Others
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
MODBUS/RTU
communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 23
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The following symbols are used in this manual.
Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT14,

GT12, GT11, GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000
are applicable.
: Applicable
: Not applicable
[ ] : Shows the setting item displayed on

the software screen or the GOT screen.
: Refers to information
required for operation.
useful for operation.
Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual,

or others of relevant information.
(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)
(Functions): GT Designer3 Version1
(Functions)
Shows the operation steps.

Operate the steps from the step 1.

are applicable.
Black: Applicable
Gray: Not applicable
The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
A - 24
FIGURES


1. FIGURES 1
FIGURES
2
The following figures can be drawn in the screen using GT Designer3.
TOUCH SWITCH
Figure Drawing example Reference
Line 1.1 Line
Line Freeform 1.2 Line Freeform 3

Rectangle 1.3 Rectangle
Polygon 1.4 Polygon
LAMP
Circle
(including ellipse)
1.5 Circle
4
Arc
1.6 Arc
(including elliptic arc)
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Sector 1.7 Sector
Scale 1.8 Scale

5
Piping 1.9 Piping
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1-1

1.1 Line
This function enables to draw lines in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Line] from the menu.
2. Draw the line in the screen.

Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2).
The following shows a drawing example.
Draw while pressing the [Shift] key. Draw while pressing the [Ctrl] key.
1)
start point
1) 2) 45 degrees 1) 2)
2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45 degrees. A line can be drawn from the start point as a
center.
1-2 1.1 Line

1
3. Display the dialog box.
Double-click the line to be set to open the setting dialog box.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Item Description Model
LAMP
Line Style Select the style of the line.
Line Width *1 Select the width of the line. 4

Line Color Select the color of the line.
Select this item to assign a category to the line.
CHARACTERS
Category (Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
GRAPHIC
(Category list)
Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
*2 In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.
5
Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Check this to set the lamp attribute.
When the lamp attribute is set, the figure color can be changed when a bit device turns on in the
NUMERICAL
Use Lamp Attribute
same way as a lamp.
DISPLAY/
When the lamp attribute is set, it is handled as an object.
Device The device is set. (Bit specification)
Line Color Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on. 6
Blink Select the blink speed. (None/Low/Medium/High)
Valid when [UseLamp Attribute] is selected.

ASCII DISPLAY/
Object Name
ASCII INPUT
Up to 30 characters can be entered regardless of one or two-byte characters.
*1 A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
Adjust the figure position as necessary.
*2 By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.
7
POINT
Setting lamp attribute
DATA LIST
The display and operation on GT Designer3 are the same as those of an object.
However, the object ID is not assigned.
Maximum number of lamp attributes set on one screen is counted as lamp (an object).
For details of maximum number of objects set on one screen, refer to the following.
8
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.1 Line 1-3

1.2 Line Freeform
This function enables to draw freeform lines in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Line Freeform] from the menu.
2. Draw consecutive lines in the screen.

2) 4)
1) 3)
Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2) of Click at the end point of next line 3). Repeat the operation in 3) until a figure is
the first line. drawn. Double click end point 4) to complete
drawing.
Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.
1)
45 interval
2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45

interval.

Double-click the freeform line to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Refer to the following for setting details.
1.1 Line
1-4 1.2 Line Freeform

1
1.3 Rectangle
FIGURES
This function enables to draw rectangles in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Rectangle] from the menu.

2
2. Draw rectangles in the screen.
TOUCH SWITCH
1) 1)
3
start point
1)
2)
2) 2)
LAMP
A square can be drawn. A rectangle can be drawn from the start point as
the center.
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.3 Rectangle 1-5


Double-click the rectangle to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Line Style Select the line style of the rectangle.
Line Width*1*2 Select the line width of the rectangle.
Line Color Select the line color of the rectangle.
Pattern Filling pattern is selected.
Pattern Color Display color of filling pattern is selected.
Background Color Background color of filling pattern is selected.
*4 Select the type of the rectangle.(Ordinary/Rounded/Octagonal)

Type
Radius Radius is set when Rounded or Octagonal is selected from Type.
Select this item to assign a category to the rectangle.

(Category list)
Check this to set the lamp attribute.

User Lamp Attribute
same way as a lamp.
When the lamp attribute is set, it is handled as an object.
Device The device is set. (Bit specification)
Line Color Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Pattern Select the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Pattern Color Select the display color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Background Color Select the background color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Valid when [User Lamp Attribute] is selected.

Object Name
*1 A figure of which line width is 3 dots or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
*2 When other than [1 Dot] is selected for [Line Width] to draw a circle, only the line can be selected for [Line Style].
*4 For details of *4, refer to the following.
1-6 1.3 Rectangle

*4 Figure forms when selecting types

1
The type selection is available only for rectangles.
The following types can be selected.
When [Rounded] is selected for the type and a [Line Width] other than [1Dot] is selected, only the straight line can be
FIGURES
selected for [Line Style].
When Ordinary is selected When rounded is selected When Octagonal is selected
TOUCH SWITCH
POINT 3
LAMP
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3 4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.3 Rectangle 1-7

1.4 Polygon
This function enables to draw polygons in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Polygon] from the menu.
2. Draw polygons in the screen.

4)
3)
5)
1) 2)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) of the A dashed line is displayed. Click at the end point Repeat the operation in 3) until the desired
first side. of next side 3). figure is drawn. Double click 4) to complete
drawing.
1)
45 interval
2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45

interval.

Double-click the polygon to be set to open the setting dialog box.
1.3 Rectangle
1-8 1.4 Polygon

1
1.5 Circle
FIGURES
This function enables to draw circles in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Circle] from the menu. 2

2. Draw circles in the screen.
TOUCH SWITCH
1) 1) 3
start point
1)
2) 2) 2)
LAMP
A complete round circle can be drawn. A circle can be drawn from the start point as a
center.
4
Double-click the circle to be set to open the setting dialog box.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
1.3 Rectangle
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.5 Circle 1-9

1.6 Arc
This function enables to draw arcs in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Arc] from the menu.
2. Draw arcs in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example
2)
3)
4) 5)
1)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) to Click the left mouse button at the start point of arc Click end point 4) to complete drawing.
determine the radius of arc. 3), and move the cursor to end point 4).
A dashed line is displayed inside the circle.
1 - 10 1.6 Arc

1
Double-click the arc to be set to open the setting dialog box.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Select this item when creating a sector.
Checked Not checked

Sector
LAMP
Select the line style of the arc or sector.
Line Style
When other than [1 Dot] is selected for [Line Width], only the line can be selected for [Line Style].
4
*1 Select the line width of the arc or sector.
Line Width
Line Color Select the line color of the arc or sector.
CHARACTERS
Pattern Select the filling pattern. (Only available when [Sector] is selected)
GRAPHIC
Pattern Color Select the display color of the filling pattern. (Only available when [Sector] is selected)
Background Color Select the background color of the filling pattern (Only available when [Sector] is selected)
Select this item to assign a category to the arc or sector. 5

NUMERICAL INPUT
(Category list)
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
*1 A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen. 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.6 Arc 1 - 11

1.7 Sector
This function enables to draw sectors in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Sector] from the menu.
2. Draw sectors in the screen.

2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) to Click the left mouse button at the start point of Click end point 4) to complete drawing.
determine the radius of sector. sector 3), and move the cursor to the end point 4)
A dashed line is displayed inside the circle. .

Double-click the sector to be set to open the setting dialog box.
1.6 Arc
1 - 12 1.7 Sector

1
1.8 Scale
FIGURES
This function enables to draw scales in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Scale] from the menu. 2

2. Draw scales in the screen.
TOUCH SWITCH
1) 1)
start point 3
1)
2) 2) 2)
A scale with the same vertical and horizontal A scale can be drawn from the start point as a
sizes can be drawn. center.
LAMP
3. Display the dialog box. 4
Double-click the scale to be set to open the setting dialog box.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Scale Points Set the number of lines on the scale. (2 to 255)
Direction of the scale is selected.

6
Direction Horizontal: Vertical:
ASCII DISPLAY/
Position of the center line that makes a right angle to the scale is selected. ASCII INPUT
Center Line
Center: None:
Line Style Select the line type of the scale. 7

*1 Select the line width of the scale.
Line Width
Line Color Select the line color of the scale.
Select this item to assign a category to the scale.

DATA LIST
(Category list)
*2 In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed. 8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
*1 A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
1.8 Scale 1 - 13

1.9 Piping
This function enables to draw pipings in the screen.
1. Select [Figure] [Piping] from the menu.
2. Draw pipings in the screen.

1) 2)
3) 4)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) of the first Click at the end point of next line 3). Repeat the operation in 3) until a figure is drawn.
line. Double click at the end point 4) to complete
drawing.
1)
45 interval
2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45 interval.
POINT
Using piping
• The vertex editing is defined when the 100th vertex is set, and a message appears.
• Some piping may not be created, depending on the piping width and angle.
1 - 14 1.9 Piping

1
Double-click the piping to be set to open the setting dialog box.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
Piping Width Piping width of the figure is set in dot unit. (3 to 100)
GRAPHIC
Line Color Piping color of the figure is selected.
Pattern Line color of the figure is selected.
Piping Color Pattern of the figure is selected.

5
Background Color Background color pattern of the figure is selected.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Select this item to assign a category to the piping.
NUMERICAL
(Category list)
DISPLAY/
6
Check the box when setting lamp attribute.
ASCII DISPLAY/
Use Lamp Attribute
ASCII INPUT
same way as a lamp.
When the lamp attribute is set, the figure is treated an object.
Device Device is set. (Bit setting)
Line Color Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
7
Pattern Select the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Piping Color Select the display color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Background Color Select the background color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
DATA LIST
Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

Layer
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Superimposition setting 8
HISTORICAL DATA
Valid when [Use Lamp Attribute] is selected.

Object Name
LIST DISPLAY
1.9 Piping 1 - 15

POINT
1 - 16 1.9 Piping

1
1.10 Paint
FIGURES
This function enables to paint closed areas and polygons on the screen.
 Settings 2
1. Select [Figure] [Paint] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
Move the cursor to the area for painting and click within the paint area.
Click 3
2. The [Paint] dialog box appears. Set the attribute and click the [OK] button.
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
The boundary color of the area is selected.

Boundary Color
The line set here is the boundary line of the painted area. 5
Pattern Filling pattern is selected.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Pattern Color The color of filling pattern is selected.
NUMERICAL
Background Color Background color of filling pattern is selected.
DISPLAY/
Select this item to assign a category to the figure.
(Category list)
6
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
3. The paint mark is displayed at the click position and the figure is painted.
7
DATA LIST
The paint mark is displayed on the GT Desinger3 only and not on the GOT.
To edit the attribute of painting, double click the paint mark.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.10 Paint 1 - 17

 Actions
Before painting, draw the areas for painting as follows:
(1) Close the area to paint with solid lines.
Solid line Paint this area.
Solid line
Paint this Solid line
Paint a polygon.
area.
Solid line Solid line Solid line
(2) Use the same color for outlines of the area to be painted.
Paint this area.

Paint this area.
Draw with the same color. Draw with the same color.
POINT
(1) Precautions for figure to be painted
(a) Note that any opening of the outline leads to protrusion of paint from the edge of the figure.
(b) Inside of the figure drawn with the same boundary color as the background color cannot be painted.
Select a boundary color different from the background color.
(c) The figure may not be painted if the paint area is painted in Fill pattern and the pattern background color
is the same as the boundary color.
Shift the paint position.
(d) Arrange a figure to be painted on the rear of the paint mark.
If the figure is arranged on the front of the paint mark, the figure area cannot be painted.
(2) How to redisplay
Note that use of paint may cause some area to remain unpainted.
Executing redisplay can display the screen correctly.
Refer to the following section for redisplay.
(Fundamentals) 3.8 Basic Operation of Drawing Screen
HINT
Paint mark display
If a paint mark is not displayed on the screen, the marked figure is not painted.
When paint mark is displayed When paint mark is not displayed
Paint mark
1 - 18 1.10 Paint

1
1.11 Import Figure File
FIGURES
This function enables to import figure data in BMP/DXF (AutoCAD Data Exchange Format), IGES (Data exchange
format among CADs), and JPEG format to GT Designer3 and paste the figure on the screen.
2
1.11.1 Importing figure files
TOUCH SWITCH
1. Select the file to be imported with the following operations:
File format Description Operation Model
BMP A BMP file is imported as an image. Select [Figure] [Import Image] from the menu.
3
DXF A DXF file is imported as an image. Select [Figure] [Import DXF Data] from the menu.
IGES An IGES file is imported as an image. Select [Figure] [Import IGES Data] from the menu.
JPEG A JPEG file is imported as an image. Select [Figure] [Import Image] from the menu.
LAMP
2. The Open a File dialog box appears. 4
Select the file of the figure data to be imported and click the [Open] button.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
3. When selecting BMP, DXF or JPEG files, the specified figure data is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Move
the cursor to the area to place and click.
Refer to the following when selecting IGES files. 6
Using IGES files
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.11 Import Figure File 1 - 19

POINT
(1) Image quality of JPEG file
• Image quality parameter is settable only when a JPEG file is selected.
• The lower the image quality, the smaller the file size. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.
(2) Importing IGES Files
The following dialog box appears if some entity in the IGES file data cannot be imported.
Click [Yes] to abort processing.

Click [No] to continue processing, although unsupported entities which cannot be imported are not displayed
in the screen.
Refer to the following for the details about importable IGES data.
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data
Unimportable IGES data can be displayed on the GOT by capturing the image on the screen and importing it
with the Capture Image function.
1.12 Capture
HINT
Pasting a file by drag-and-drop
The BMP/JPEG/DXF file can be pasted onto the GT Desinger3 screen by drag-and-drop operation.
Drag-and-drop
 Using BMP files

(1) Importable BMP files
As BMP files, 2-color (monochrome), 16-color, 256-color, and 24-bit BMP files can be imported.
(2) The size of the figure to be imported
When the size of the figure to be imported is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to fit
the temporary area.
1 - 20 1.11 Import Figure File

1
POINT
(1) Importing BMP files to GT Designer3
FIGURES
The following shows how BMP files that include more colors than the color setting are displayed, when BMP
files are imported to GT Desiger3.
GOT Type Setting

BMP format data
2 (monochrome) Model
2
24bit 256-color 16-color
colors
TOUCH SWITCH
Displayed in 2
256 or 65536 colors are used Reduced to 65536 Displayed in 256 Displayed in 16
*1
(monochrome)
to display the image data colors colors colors
colors
Displayed in 2
Reduced to 256 Displayed in 256 Displayed in 16
256 colors
colors colors colors
(monochrome)
colors
3
Displayed in 2
Reduced to 16 Reduced to 16 Displayed in 16
16 colors (monochrome)
colors colors colors
colors
Displayed in 2
LAMP
Reduced to 16 Reduced to 16 Reduced to 16
16 (Grayscale)*2 (monochrome)
(Grayscale) (Grayscale) (Grayscale)
colors
4
Displayed in 2
Reduced to 2 Reduced to 2 Reduced to 2
2 (Mono) (monochrome)
(monochrome) (monochrome) (monochrome)
colors
CHARACTERS
*1 For GOTs that can display 65536 colors, refer to the following.
GRAPHIC
User’s Manual for the GOT used
*2 16 (Gray Scale) can be selected on the GT155 -Q, GT11, GT105 , and GT104 .
(2) The display when display color settings are changed

5
NUMERICAL INPUT
(a) When the number of colors on the GT16, GT15, GT14, or GT12 is reduced
The display is changed when [Color Setting] in the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box is changed to [256]
NUMERICAL
after BMP files are read. The display is also changed when the following operations are performed
DISPLAY/
without changing the screen editor display after [Color Setting] change in the [GOT Type Setting] dialog
box.
• Double click, image editing by changing properties
• Reopening a file after saving it 6
• Closing the screen and reopening it
(b) When the color setting is changed from 256-color to 2-color (16 (Grayscale)) on the GT11, GT105 , or
GT104 ASCII DISPLAY/
The above change made in the GOT type setting will be instantly reflected on the screen editor. ASCII INPUT
(c) BMP file which colors are reduced

The BMP file which colors are reduced once on GT Designer3 cannot be returned to the previous color
setting. Import the BMP file again. 7
(d) Display on the GOT
The color scheme of the original BMP file may differ from the color scheme of image data displayed on
GT Designer3 and GOT.
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(3) Editing graphic data in the BMP file

(a) Opening an image data file with Paint
1. Duble-click the image data file to be edited to
open the Bitmap Attribute Change dialog
box.
2. Select [Open image data in Paint]. (GT16,

GT15, GT14, GT12, and GT SoftGOT1000)
*If an image file is opened with Paint, the transparent color

setting becomes invalid.
3. The Paint starts up. Edit the image.
4. After editing, close the Paint and return to the

GT Designer3 screen.
To edit again, proceed from the step 2.

(b) Setting transparent colors(Not available for the GT1020 and the GT1030)
1
1. Duble-click the image data file to be edited to
open the Bitmap Attribute Change dialog
box.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
2. Select [Specify a transparent color for image
data].
LAMP
4
3. The [Transparent Setting] dialog box
appears.
CHARACTERS
Select the [Use Transparent Setting] to
display the preview image and to change the
GRAPHIC
cursor to .
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
4. Select the color to make transparent by 6
clicking it.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
(Continued to next page)
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

5. The selected color becomes transparent.

Click the [OK] button to save the setting and
close the dialog box.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog
without saving the setting box.
Item Description
Use Transparent Checking the checkbox enables transparent

Setting color setting.
+ button This button zooms in on the image.
- button This button zooms out of the image.
Specify Zoom Level Magnification setting
The color that is selected as the transparent

Transparent
color appears here.
The background color for the Preview window

Background Color
can be specified here.
6. The image that is made to be transparent

appears.
(4) Registering category

After imported, the BMP file is registered and stored as [Other].

1
 Using DXF files
(1) Compatible DXF data
(a) Version of DXF data that can be imported
FIGURES
DXF data with the following versions can be imported.
• R12 • R13 • R14
To use DXF data with any other than the above versions, change the version to any of the above versions.
(b) Notes on importing data
2
• The data with the layer off cannot be converted.
TOUCH SWITCH
• Only the shift JIS code text is compatible.
• Regardless of the unit, the dimension "1" is equivalent to one dot on GT Designer3.
• 10 minutes or longer may be required in some cases.
• If a DXF figure is larger than a dimension of 2048 1536 dots, the figure cannot be imported by using
GT Designer3.
Example) Figures that cannot be imported 3
The figure exceeds
a dimension of
2048×1536.
LAMP
1536
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
2048
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(c) Details of DXF data import

The following DXF data can be imported to GT Designer3.
If some figures or attributes cannot be imported, draw them or make the relevant settings on GT Designer3.
Before import After import

Remarks
(DXF data) (GTD3 data)
ARC Arc -
ATTDEF (Ignored) -
• The text size is converted to the nearest one (0.5 to 8 times) of GT Desiger3.
ATTRIB Text • The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
• The text style including slant angle is not supported.
CIRCLE Circle -
DIMENSION Group • The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block definition instead of the layer.
ELLIPSE Circle or Arc • The slanted figure is converted so that its main axis will be rotated horizontally or vertically.
• The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block definition instead of the layer.
INSERT Group
• The scale and rotation angle are not supported.
LEADER Line Freeform*1 • The figure is converted to a freeform line. (The end points are connected with a straight line.)
LINE Line -
Line Freeform or • The figure is converted to a freeform line or polygon. (The end points are connected with a straight line.)
LWPOLYLINE
Polygon*1 • The curved lines between the points are ignored.
• The MLINESTYLE is not supported.

MLINE Line Freeform*1 The colors and the line styles of all freeform lines are converted based on the layer definition.
• Cap processing is not supported.
• The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
MTEXT Text
• The form code is deleted.
• The text style is not supported.
Circle, Rectangle,
POINT -
Line
Line Freeform or • The figure is converted to a freeform line or polygon. (The end points are connected with a straight line.)
POLYLINE
Polygon*1 • The curved lines between the points are ignored.
SOLID Polygon*1 -
Line Freeform or
SPLINE • The figure is converted to a freeform line or polygon. (The fit lines are connected with a straight line.)
Polygon*1
TEXT Text • The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
• The text style including slant angle is not supported.
TRACE Polygon*1 -
*1 The GOT cannot display a figure with 1000 or more corners.

To display the figure on the GOT, change the number of the corners to 999 or less.
POINT
Converting data to be imported
GT Desginer3 converts only compatible characters when importing DXF data.
Therefore, some characters may appear differently from the original data.
Make sure to modify the figure after data import.
Example 1) "<IG>" cannot be imported.
As the "<IG>" in DXF data is not in the Shift JIS code, this character cannot be imported.
Example 2) The BLOCK created with rectilinear and circle figures on the AutoCAD
As the scale is set in the INSERT, the BLOCK cannot be correctly imported.

(d) Converting lines 1

The line width is converted to 1 dot.
The following shows how line types are converted.
Before import (DXF data) After import (GTD3 data)
FIGURES
CONTINUOUS Full line
DASHED Dotted line
HIDDEN Dotted line 2

CENTER Dashed line
TOUCH SWITCH
PHANTOM Dashed line
User definition Full line
Others Full line
(e) Converting colors 3

The following shows how colors are converted.
Before import (DXF data) After import (GTD3 data)
Red (0 01) Red (224)
Yellow (0 02) Yellow (252)
LAMP
Green (0 03) Green (28)
Light blue (0 04) Light blue (31)
Blue (0 05) Blue (3) 4
Purple (0 06) Purple (227)
White (0 07) White (255)
CHARACTERS
Black (0 08) Black (0)
GRAPHIC
Dark red (0 09) Dark red (160)
Dark yellow (0 0A) Dark yellow (180)
Dark green (0 0B) Dark green (20)
Dark-light blue (0 0C) Dark-light blue (22) 5
Dark blue (0 0D) Dark blue (2)
NUMERICAL INPUT
Dark purple (0 0E) Dark purple (162)
NUMERICAL
Dark white (0 0F) Dark white (109)
DISPLAY/
Others Others (255)
(2) Editing DXF figure data

To edit a grouped figure data on GT Desinger3, ungroup it once in [Ungroup]. 6
After the edition, group them again.
(3) Registering categories
After imported, the DXF files are registered and stored as [None]. ASCII DISPLAY/
(The ungrouped data will be also stored as [None].) ASCII INPUT
If necessary, register it again.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Using IGES files

(1) Preview display of IGES files
A preview of captured IGES files is displayed.
Preview screen can be magnified up to 1600  1200 dots (the same size as temporary area).
Figure data is pasted on the screen editor as displayed size.
Item Description
Save Saves the direction, size, and option setting.
Reset Resets the direction, size.
Option Displays the [Option] dialog box.
(a) Operation on the preview window

Determine the direction and size of the display data to make it fit on the preview screen by following
operation.
• Left drag: 3D model is rotated to the direction of dragging.
• Right drag: 3D model is moved to the direction of dragging.
• Right and Left drag: The size of 3D model is changed.
(Expansion: Move the mouse up, Reduction: Move the mouse down)
Display data cannot be saved while display data is located out of the preview screen.
(b) Setting Data conversion quality
Click the button to display the [Option] dialog box, and set the optimization level for converting
curves into lines.
• Low : Simplifies curves. Data size is decreased.
• High: Curve is drawn. Data size is increased.

(2) Pasting IGES files

1
Save the setting by clicking button.
Determine the position to paste the figure on the GT Designer3 screen by moving the cursor and paste the
FIGURES
figure by clicking the screen.
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Click
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
HINT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Editing imported IGES data
After importing the IGES data, click the [Ungroup] button in GT Designer3 to set and change the line type, width,
color, and others. 6
(Fundamentals) 5.2.3 Grouping multiple figures and objects
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
1.1 Line
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Using JPEG files

If the GT16, GT15, GT14, or GT12 series is selected as the GOT type, a JPEG file is selectable in [Import Image].
(1) Type of JPEG file format to be loaded
• JFIF
• EXIF
(2) The size of the figure to be imported
• When the size of the figure to be imported is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to
fit the temporary area.
POINT
Precautions for importing JPEG files
• The number of colors of the original JPEG file is kept as far as the loaded file remains unedited.
However, the image is displayed in the specified number of colors of screen display in GT Designer3.
• If the designatedJPEG file specified in the JPEG file loading is in the JFIF format other than the base line type,
or if the loaded JPEG image is edited, the image quality may deteriorate. If image quality deterioration is
substantial, use a bit map file.

1.11.2 Precautions for importing data 1
 Importable data
• Only wire frame format IGES files (*.igs/*.ige/*.iges file) manufactured by Autodesk, Inc with Autodesk Inventor
FIGURES
can be imported.
• When IGES data has unsupported entity, the part that comes after unsupported entity in IGES data cannot be
imported. When clicking [No] on the message indicating that the data has unsupported entities, the following
processes take place. 2
EX1) Parent entity (importable)-child entity (importable)-grandchild entity (not importable)
Parent entity and child entity are displayed. Grandchild entity is not displayed.
TOUCH SWITCH
EX2) Parent entity (importable)-child entity (not importable)-grandchild entity (importable)
Parent entity is displayed. Neither child entity nor grandchild entity is displayed.
EX3) Parent entity (not importable)-child entity (importable)-grandchild entity (importable)
None of them is displayed because parent entity is not importable.
 Entities to be imported
3
IGES import function allows the entities defined by JAMA-IGES to be imported. Importable entities are as
follows.
Entity name Entity ID
LAMP
Circular arc 100
Ellipse 104
Line 110
4
Transformation matrix 124
CHARACTERS
Rational B-spline curve 126
GRAPHIC
General note 212
Subfigure definition 308
Color definision 314
Subfigure entity 408

5
NUMERICAL INPUT
 Category of figures and characters imported with the IGES import function
NUMERICAL
The category of figures and characters imported with the IGES import function is [None].
DISPLAY/
 Nested format groups
When importing IGES data in nested format, only the bottom level folders are imported.
(Example) Before the IGES data is imported After the IGES data is imported 6
Group 1
Group 1
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Group 2
Group 3
Group 3
Group 4 Group 4
7
POINT
DATA LIST
Unimportable IGES data

Unimportable IGES data can be displayed on GOT by using Capture Image function.
1.12.1 Capturing displays
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

1.12 Capture
This function enables to capture images and import it to GT Designer3 as BMP or JPEG files.
1.12.1 Capturing displays
 Operation method
1. Activate the window to be captured by clicking it.
2. Select [Figure] [Capture] from the menu on GT Designer3 to define the capture area.
Once capture area is defined, the GT Designer3 window becomes minimized.
Only the function to specify capture area can be operated. To cancel this function, press the [ESC] key.
If the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, or GT SoftGOT1000 is selected for the GOT type, the JPEG file format is
selectable in [Specify Rectangle Range] or [Specify Window].
1 - 32 1.12 Capture

1
3. There are two ways to specify a capture area.
[Specify Rectangle Range]
Selecting [Specify Rectangle Range] minimizes the GT Designer3 window, and the cursor changes to a
[Specify Rectangle Range] dedicated cursor.
FIGURES
Drag the cursor from the starting point to the ending point to determine the range to be captured.
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Capture range
LAMP
4
[Specify Window]
CHARACTERS
Selecting [Specify Window] minimizes the GT Designer3 window and the cursor changes to , dedicated
GRAPHIC
for [Specify Window]. The area to be captured is framed with black line by moving into the client area.
Click the area to select it.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
Capture range
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
1.12 Capture 1 - 33

4. The captured figure is imported to GT Designer3 as BMP or JPEG data.
 How to edit
For editing imported BMP files or JPEC files, refer to the following.
1.11.1 Importing figure files
POINT
Precautions for capturing
• It may take some time for the screen to appear when a large captured figure is imported or when the screen on
which many figures are pasted is opened.
• When the size of the captured data is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to fit the
temporary area.
• Some files that are created with DirectX or animation application cannot be captured.
1 - 34 1.12 Capture

TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP


1
2. TOUCH SWITCH
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
2.1 Types of Touch Switches
 Switch
2.2 Setting Switch
3
Enables multiple actions of the touch switches.
• GT16, GT SoftGOT1000 : Max. 135 actions • GT15, GT14 : Max. 129 actions
• GT12, GT11 : Max. 123 actions • GT10 : Max. 122 actions
LAMP
 Bit Switch 4
2.3 Setting Bit Switch
Turns on or off the bit device.
CHARACTERS
• Turns on the specified bit device. (SET)
GRAPHIC
X0001:OFF X0001:ON X0001:ON X0001:ON X0001:ON X0001:ON
Stop Oper. Oper. Oper. Oper. Oper.

5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
• Turns off the specified bit device. (RESET)
DISPLAY/
X0001:ON X0001:OFF X0001:OFF X0001:OFF X0001:OFF X0001:OFF
Oper. Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
• Reverses (switches on or off) the current status of a specified bit device. (ALT)
X0001:OFF X0001:ON X0001:ON X0001:ON X0001:OFF X0001:OFF
Stop Oper. Oper. Oper. Stop Stop 7

DATA LIST
• Turns on the specified bit device while touch switch is pressed. (Momentary)
X0001:ON X0001:OFF
8
X0001:OFF X0001:OFF X0001:ON
Stop Oper. Stop Oper. Stop

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.1 Types of Touch Switches 2-1

 Word Switch
2.4 Setting Word Switch
Changes the value of word devices.
• Writes the set value to the specified word device. (Constant)
• Writes the set word device value to the specified word device. (Indirect device)
• Writes the set word device and the constant to the specified word device. (Constant + Indirect device)
380
Target 380
value
 Go to Screen Switch
2.5 Setting Go To Screen Switch
Switches the base screen and the windows screen.
• Switches to the screen of which base screen No. that was displayed previously.
• Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified.
• Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified according to specified bit device ON/OFF.
• When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison expression, switches to
the specified station No.
Base screen 1 Base screen 2
 Change Station No. Switch

2.6 Setting Change Station No. Switch
Switches the device of the actually monitored object to the same device in other station.
• Switches to the station No. specified as monitor target.
• Switches to the specified station No. when the bit device (of which monitor target is specified) turns ON/OFF.
• When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison expression, switches to
the specified station No.
Station1 Station2
50 130
Station1 Station2 Station1 Station2 50 130
Monitoring Switching the monitor target

the station No.1 to the station No.2
 Special Function Switch

2.7 Setting Special Function Switch
Switches to a screen such as the utility or a screen of the extended function or option function.
Test P0
187
M999
K
MO V
K
1
K
D1
window
- 1234 D100 MO V 2 D2
RST V
K
MO V 90 D162
K
MO V 110 D167
K
MO V 100 D172
List edit K K
SET M 9028
DUTY 35 0 400 M 9020
D1 D2 V D162 D167 D172
1 2 47 90 110 100
Ladder ª « © ¨ ðK
monitor
2-2 2.1 Types of Touch Switches

1
 Key Window DIsplay Switch
2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch
Displays the specified key window at the specified position.
FIGURES
Displays the cursor on the specified object.
150 150
2
TOUCH SWITCH
 Key Code Switch
2.9 Setting Key Code Switch
Controls numerical input, key input of ASCII input, alarm list display, data list display, alarm history, and advanced
alarm. 3
1 A 1 ABC
A B C D E F G DEL A B C D E F G DEL
H I J K - ESC H I J K - ESC
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.1 Types of Touch Switches 2-3

2.2 Setting Switch

For the switch overview, refer to the following.
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Switch] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Action tab
Action List The set actions will be displayed in list format.
Select the actions to add to the Action List.
Click this button to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for the switch.
(1) Bit
Click this button to set the word device value change for the switch
(2) Word
Click this button to make the settings in order that a screen such as the utility, the extended function or
option function is switched by the switch.
(3) SP Function
Add Action Click this button to make the settings in order that the base screen is switched by the switch.
(4) Screen Switching
Click this button to make the settings in order that the station number is switched by the switch.
(5) Station No.
Click this button to set the key code of the key for object input.
(6) Key Code
Click this button to set the key window display for the switch.
(7) Key Window Display
2-4 2.2 Setting Switch

1
Select an action to be utilized from the [Action List] and click the [Utilize] button to copy the selected action to the [Action
List].
FIGURES
Select an action to be edited from the [Action List] and click the [Edit] button to edit the action.
Select an action to be deleted from the [Action List] and click the [Delete] button to delete the action.
User ID for a
key input and
Specify the ID for designating an object for which the key code is input. (0 to 65535)
2
data change (8) User ID for a key input and data change
Click this button to change the order of the action.
TOUCH SWITCH
(9) Change Order
Select the method of switching touch switch images (ON shape, OFF shape).
To switch touch switch images using the lamp on/lamp off status in combination with the key touch on/key touch off
status, refer to the following.
Style tab 3
Key Touch The shape of the key touch on status is displayed when the touch switch is touched.
State The shape of the key touch off status is displayed when the touch switch is not touched.
When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is switched to the
shape of the lamp on status.
Bit-ON/OFF After selecting, set the device.
LAMP
Lamp (Timing (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
to change
shape/text) When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the shape of the 4
lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
CHARACTERS
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
• Device:Sets the word device.
GRAPHIC
Word Range • Data type
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32
• BCD16 • BCD32 • Real
• ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the switching range
between the shape of the lamp on status and the shape of the lamp off status.
5
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Trigger Setting
NUMERICAL INPUT
The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
NUMERICAL
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
Object Name
DISPLAY/
This object name is also displayed in other than [Action] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
Click this button to convert the object type to the lamp.

For the precautions of the conversion, refer to the following.
2.11 Precautions for drawing
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.2 Setting Switch 2-5

HINT
Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(1) Switching touch switch images according to the status whether it is touched or not
Select [Key Touch State]. Regardless of the device status, the shape of the key touch on status appears when
the touch switch is touched, and the shape of the key touch off status appears when the touch switch is not
touched. To show the device status, select [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range].
M100 M100
ON ON
Run Run
ON shape appears when the touch switch is OFF shape appears when the touch switch is
touched. released regardless of the device status.
(2) Switching touch switch images according to the device status
Select [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range].
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100 M100
ON OFF
Run Stop
ON shape appears when M100 is ON OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

(1) Bit
1
The followings can be set as the touch switch actions taken when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
Set the device of write destination. 3

Device
Select the corresponding function to the bit device as write destination when touched.
Momentary : Turns on bit while touched only.
Action Alternate : Switches bit on or off when touched.
LAMP
Set : Turns on bit when touched.
Reset : Turns off bit when touched.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(2) Word
The followings can be set for changing the word device value with the switch.
When [Mode] is set to [Data Addition]

or [Data Subtraction]
When [Mode] is set to [Custom]
Set the device of write destination.

Device
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Setting Value] and [Initial Value Condition].
(Fundamentals) 2.9 Available Numeric Data
Data Type
Set the writing mode of the destination word device.

• Data Addition:
Select this item to add the value set in [Variation] to the value in the destination word device.
Mode • Data Subtraction:
Select this item to subtract the value set in [Variation] from the value in the destination word device.
• Custom:
Select this item to write the value set in [Variation] into the value in the destination word device.
Set this item when [Data Addition] or [Data Subtraction] is selected for [Mode].
When [Mode] is set to [Data Addition], touching the word switch adds the set value to the value in the destination word
Variation device.
When [Mode] is set to [Data Subtraction], touching the word switch subtracts the set value from the value in the
destination word device.
Select the type of the value to be written to the set device.

Set this item when [Custom] is selected for [Mode].
• Constant:
Select this item to set a fixed value to the write destination word device. (-32768 to 32767)
• Indirect Device:
Setting Value
Select this item to set an indirect device to the write destination word device.
When Constant and Indirect Device are both selected, the value (Constant + Indirect Device) is written into the word
device.
This setting is available when [Constant] and [Indirect Device] are both set in the [Setting Value].
This item is also available when [Data Addition] or [Data Subtraction] is selected for [Mode].
If the value set for the destination word device and the value set for [Condition Value] are the same, the value set for
Initial Value [Reset Value] is written into the destination word device.
Condition • Conditioin Value:
Set the condition value to write the reset value into the destination word device.
• Reset Value:
Set the value to be written into the destination word device when the condition value is satisfied.

(3) SP Function
1
Click the [SP Function] button to display the following dialog box.
Set a function for [Switch Action] in the [Action (SP Function)] dialog box.
For the setting of switch actions and applicable models, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
(4) Screen Switching
Make the following settings to switch windows using the switch.
For details of window switching, refer to the following.
• Setting of Action (Screen Switching) dialog box

3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Screen Type Select the type of the window to be switched.
Select the action of switching screen. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Select this item to switch to the base or window screen specified by the screen number.
After selecting, set the base/window screen number of the switching destination.
Fixed
Click the [Browse] button to display the screen image dialog box.
NUMERICAL
Make the settings while checking the image of the currently edited screen on the dialog box.
DISPLAY/
Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen number which was displayed previously.
Back Select this item to switch to the base screen of which screen No. was displayed previously.
Next Screen (Previous/History) As GOT can store the displayed screen number including the current base screen, up to 10 base
screens can be switched based on the history. 6
Select this item to switch to the base or window screen specified by the screen number,
according to the ON/OFF status or the current value of the specified device.
ASCII DISPLAY/
Device
Before setting the device, select the data type of the monitor device. (Bit/Signed (BIN16)/BCD16)
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action. ASCII INPUT
Specify the target screen number when switching screens.
Screen No.
This item is available only when the screen to be switched is a base screen.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(5) Station No.

When setting the station No. switching function with the touch switch, set the following actions.
Select the action of switching station No.
Host Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.

Other
Next Station Set the network number and station number to be switched to in decimal.
Select this item to switch to the station, specified by the No., based on the ON/OFF status of
current value of the specified device.
Device
Select the data type of the device to be monitored. (Bit/Signed BIN16/BCD16)
After selecting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action.
Set the target to be switched.

Project : Select this item to switch the whole project by station number.
Mode Screen Type : Select this item to switch the specified screen by station number.
When selecting [Screen Type], set the following.
Screen Type : Select the screen to be switched.
2 - 10 2.2 Setting Switch

(6) Key Code

1
When setting a key code to the switch, specify the following action.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
Specify the key code.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.5 Key Code List
Numerical/ASCII Input : Select this item to input the key code for numeric value input/ASCII input.
3
Alarm/Data List : Select this item to input the key code for data list, user alarm list display, system
alarm list display, alarm history display, advanced user alarm display or advanced
Key Code Type system alarm display.
Historical Trend Graph/Historical Data List*1
: Select this item to input a key code to the historical trend graph or the historical
LAMP
data list display.
Document Display*1 : Select this item to input a key code in the document display.
For a single switch, only one of the key codes above can be set. 4
Select this item to input a numeric value or character using the key code.
ASCII After selecting this item, input the numeric value or character. Then, click the [Convert to Key
Code] button to automatically convert into the key code.
CHARACTERS
Code Setting
Select this item to set an action by a key code.
GRAPHIC
After selecting this item, select and set the action.
Action
*1 Not available for the GT11, GT10. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
POINT
NUMERICAL
(1) Specifying multiple key codes
DISPLAY/
Multiple key codes can be registered to one switch.
By registering multiple key codes, switches for inputting character strings at a time can be created.
6
004D : M
ASCII DISPLAY/
0049 : I
ASCII INPUT
MITSUBISHI
0054 : T
0053 : S
0055 : U
0042 : B
0049 : I
0053 : S 7
0048 : H
0049 : I
0000 : (Settle)
Input "MITSUBISHI" at a time.
DATA LIST
If a switch to which multiple key codes are registered is arranged on a usercreated key window, only the first
key code can be executed.
When inputting key codes in the advanced alarm, only the first key code can be executed.
(2) Character code reading/writing order 8
The reading/writing order of the character code set to the switch can be selected according to the specification
HISTORICAL DATA
of the controller to be monitored.

LIST DISPLAY
2.2 Setting Switch 2 - 11

(7) Key Window Display

When setting the key window display switch to a switch, specify the following action.
X coordinate
Specify the position (upper left coordinate value) where the key window
Key Window is displayed.
Position X : Specify the coordinate value of the X axis. (0 to 639)
Y coordinate
Y : Specify the coordinate value of the Y axis (0 to 479)
POINT
Setting the key window display target object and the key window
The object that has the same user ID as the one specified at [User ID for a key input and data change] in the Action
tab is taken as the target object.
The key window that is set in the key window setting in project or screen units is displayed.
(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting
(8) User ID for a key input and data change

This user ID specifies the object to be operated when operating advanced alarm, historical trend graph or others
with the key code.
Specify the same value for the [User ID for a key input and data change] of the switch and the [User ID] of each
object.
• Setting of switch and advanced alarm
Set the same value.

(9) Change Order

1
To change the order of action, specify as shown below.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Executes in the order from the action displayed at the top first.
Since the key code is executed first, the order of action may not be changed.
The third and later actions can be changed by the user.
LAMP
Click this button to change the order of the selected action to one earlier.
Order of
Action
Click this button to change the order of the selected action to one later. 4
Click this button to set the order created by the [Up] button/[Down] button.
(The item cannot be used with the operation panel.)
CHARACTERS
Click this button to clear the order created by the [Up] button/[Down] button.
GRAPHIC
(The item cannot be used with the operation panel.)
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Style tab
Preview list
When [Key Touch State] is selected

for [Lamp (Timing to change shape/text)]
When [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range] is selected

([Change a shape based on the key touch state] is not selected.)
When [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range] is selected

([Change a shape based on the key touch state] is selected.)
This item is available when [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range] is selected for [Lamp (Timing to change shape/text)].
Change a shape Select this item to set four different images using the lamp on/lamp off status in combination with the key touch on/key
based on the key touch off status.
touch state For the key touch on status and the key touch off status, the shapes can be switched. However, the texts cannot be
switched.
Displays the status when the device turns on or off, the touch switch is pressed twice, and the touch switch does not
operate.
Preview list [Press Twice] appears only when [Press Twice] is set for [Delay] on the [Extended] tab.
[When switch does not work] appears only when [Set the style and text settings for a switch in non-operating] is set on
the [Extended] tab.
Collectively set
ON/OFF shape This item is available when [Basic Figure] is selected for [Shape].
in the case of Select this item to collectively change the shapes of touch switches except [Press Twice].
Basic Figure
Shape Set the touch switch shape.
This item is available when [None] is selected for [Shape].

Select this item to reverse the touch switch display.
Reverse Switch This item cannot be selected when [Press Twice] is selected in the preview list. To select this item, select other items
Area than [Press Twice] in the preview list.
When [Change a shape based on the key touch state] is selected, the touch switch display is reversed by switching
between the key touch on status and the key touch off status.
Frame Color Select the frame color of the touch switch shape.
Switch Color Select the lamp color of the touch switch shape.
Background Select the background color and the pattern for the touch switch shape.
Color The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Shape Attribute Example: Background :
Pattern Pattern :
Switch :
Background
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the touch switch. (None/Low/Medium/High)
Blink Scope Select a blink area. (Shape and Text/Shape only)

1
HINT
Changing a shape based on the key touch state
FIGURES
The following shows examples when using a combination of switching images according to the device status and
the status whether the touch switch is touched or not.
Key Touch
OFF
Key Touch
ON
Preview list
The touch switch images set in the [Style] tab
2
Stop and the [Text] tab are displayed.
TOUCH SWITCH
Lamp
OFF Stop Stop
Run
Lamp
ON Run Run 3
(1) When M100 is off and (2) When M100 is off and
touch switch is not touched touch switch is touched
LAMP
M100 M100
OFF OFF
4
Stop Stop
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
(3) When M100 is on and (4) When M100 is on and
touch switch is not touched touch switch is touched
M100 M100
ON ON 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Run Run
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Text tab
For touch switches, the comment set for basic comment or comment group can be used as the texts displayed on the
object by selecting a text type.
The text types are described below.
Text Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.
Indirect Text
(Basic Set a comment of basic comment.
Comment)
Comment
Set a comment that has been set for comment group.
Group
For basic comment and comment group, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting
The setting items differ depending on text type.
Setting items of each text type are shown on the following pages.

(1) Text
1
FIGURES
Preview list
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Preview list
operate.
[Press Twice] appears only when [Press Twice] is set for [Delay] on the [Extended] tab. 4
the [Extended] tab.
CHARACTERS
OFF=ON Select this item to match the ON setting to the OFF setting.
GRAPHIC
Set the copy range.
Copy Range All Settings : Copies all text settings.
Text Only : Copies texts only.
Copy OFF
Used to copy the set attribute.
5
ON /
Copy OFF ON : The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Copy ON Copy ON OFF : The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.
OFF
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Font Select a font for the text to be displayed.
• 6 8dot font • 12-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic
• 12-dot standard font • 12-dot high quality Gothic • TrueType Mincho
• 16-dot standard font • 16-dot high quality Mincho • TrueType Gothic
Text Size • Stroke • Windows font 6
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Select a character set available for the specified font.
Script
Common settings Select an effect for the text.

of Display : Displays the text in italic characters.
Position
: Displays the text in underlined characters.
7
Text Color Select a color for the text to be displayed.
Select a display format to the text.

DATA LIST
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

The display format is not available for multiple settings. 8
Solid Color Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

T
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the
Display Position object. L C R
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right) B
Input the text to be displayed.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Text
Press the [Enter] key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Select the text position.

Text Settings
Alignment : Select the horizontal position.
: Select the vertical position.
Text
Offset to frame
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
Offset to Frame
object frame. (0 to 100)

(2) Indirect text (Basic comment)

1
FIGURES
Preview list
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Preview List
operate.
[Press Twice] appears only when [Press Twice] is set for [Delay] on the [Extended] tab. 4
the [Extended] tab.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Set the copy range.
Copy Range
All Settings : Copies all text settings.
Copy OFF ON
/
5
Copy ON OFF
Copy ON OFF : The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Select the character size
NUMERICAL
Text Size For details of the size, refer to the following.
DISPLAY/
Select a display format to the text. 6

Text Settings : Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in raised format. ASCII DISPLAY/

The display format is not available for multiple settings. ASCII INPUT
Set this item when changing the touch switch text display from the device value.
7
Device1
The comment (basic comment) of the same number as the value stored in the set device is
Offset*1 displayed.
Select this item when adding the value of another device to the [Device1] value.
DATA LIST
Device2 After selecting this item, set the device which stores the value to be added.
(Continued to next page) 8

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Select this item to add another value to the [Device1] value, depending on the display status (ON/
Constant OFF) of the touch switch.
After checking, set values to be added when the device is ON and OFF.
Offset Set a comment No. for the text of the touch switch displayed on the screen of GT Designer3.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed.
Preview No. Clicking the button displays the edit dialog box to edit the comment.
2.1 Text tab (2) (a) Edit Comment dialog box
HINT
Make the setting when changing the text displayed on the touch switch by a device value.
Device 1 10
Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
(1) When only the [Device1] is set.
The comment (basic comment) of the same number as
the value of [Device1] is displayed, regardless of the ON/
OFF status of the touch switch. Line A operation Line A operation
Comment No. 10 is displayed.
Device 1 10
Device 2 4
(2) When [Device1] and [Device2] are set. Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display

the addition value of [Device1] + [Device2] is displayed,
regardless of the ON/OFF status of the touch switch. Line E operation Line E operation
Comment No. 14 is displayed.
Device 1 10 Device 1 10
(3) When [Device1] and [Fixed] are set.
Fixed ON 1 Fixed OFF 0
Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
the addition value of [Device1] + [Constant ON] is
displayed when the touch switch is ON.
When the touch switch is OFF, the comment (basic
comment) of the same number as the addition value of Line B operation Line A operation
[Device1] + [Constant OFF] is displayed.

Comment No. 11 is displayed. Comment No. 10 is displayed.
Device 1 10 Device 1 10
(4) When [Device1], [Device2], and [Fixed] are set. Device 2 5 Device 2 5
The comment (basic comment) of the same number as Fixed ON 1 Fixed OFF 0
the addition value of [Device1] + [Device2] + [Constant Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
ON] is displayed when the touch switch is ON.
When the touch switch is OFF, the comment (basic
comment) of the same number as the addition value of Line G operation Line F operation
[Device1] + [Device2] + [Constant OFF] is displayed.
Comment number 16 is displayed. Comment number 15 is displayed.

(a) Edit Comment dialog box 1

Edit the displayed comments for the basic comment.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
Item Description Model 3
Edit the comment for the basic comment.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.
The numbers of characters, digits, and rows of the input comment are displayed on the upper right of the comment input
field.
LAMP
Comment • Number of characters: A one-byte or two-byte character is counted as one character. A line feed is counted as two
characters.
• Number of digits: A one-byte character is counted as one digit and a two-byte character is counted as two digits. The
number of digits of the row with the largest number of digits is displayed.
4
• Number of rows: The number of rows of the comment is displayed. When only a line feed is inserted without
characters, the line feed is counted as one row.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(3) Comment group
Preview list
operate.
Preview list [Press Twice] appears only when [Press Twice] is set for [Delay] on the [Extended] tab.
the [Extended] tab.
Set the copy range.

Copy OFF
ON /
Copy ON
OFF
Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3.

Preview (Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.
Column No.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting
Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.

Fixed
After selecting, set the number of the comment group to be used by directly inputting it.
Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
Device After selecting, set a device.
Comment
Group
Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
Adjust Text When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
Size After selecting this item, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots, default : 8)
Set the number of the comment to be used.

Fixed : Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.
Device : Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
Comment No. After selecting, set a device.
Text Settings
Clicking the button displays the Edit dialog box to edit the comment.
2.1 Text tab (3) (a) Edit Comment dialog box
Preview No. Set a comment No. to be displayed on the screen of GT Designer3.

1

• 12-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic • 12-dot standard font
• 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot standard font • 16-dot high quality Mincho
FIGURES
• Stroke
Text Size
Select this item to change the comment attribute.

2
Text Color: Select the display color of the text.
TOUCH SWITCH
Change
Attribute of : Displays the text in bold format.
Comment
Setting
Text Settings
Solid Color: Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.
The , , or button is not available for multiple settings. 3

LAMP
Offset to frame
4
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
Offset to Frame Text
the object frame.Up to 100 dots can be set.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
(a) Edit Comment dialog box
Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Column No. Select the row No. to edit the comment.
Edit the comment for the comment group.

The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte. 7
field.
characters.
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Extended tab
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
Security Level
(Display/Input) (Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Security setting
The number of [Input] must be larger than that for [Display].
Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

Use Offset After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Offset setting
Simultaneous Select this item to disable simultaneous press of a switch.

Press*1 After selecting this item, select the switch operation when simultaneous press is disabled.
Extended
Select the delay.
After selecting the delay, set the delay time. (1 to 5)
None : No delay time will occur.
ON : Select the item to turn on the device after pressing the touch switch for the set time.
This setting can prevent an incorrect operation from occurring.
Delay OFF : Select the item to turn off the device in the set time after operating the touch switch. The
device is on during the set time.
Press Twice : Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is touched once and then
touched for the second time within the set time.
After selecting this item, set the [Style] and [Text] for the simultaneous press occurrence.
Click the [to Style Tab] and [to Text Tab] buttons and set the [Press Twice] in [Preview list].

1
Select the time the buzzer is on when the touch switch is touched.
Always : The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Only if conditions are met : The sound is on only when the touch switch is touched and the trigger has
FIGURES
been satisfied.
Buzzer None : The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is touched.
When [Always] or [Only if conditions are met] is selected, set the followings.
One Shot : Select this item to output sound only at the moment the touch switch is
touched.
2
During Push : Select this item to keep outputting sound whie the touch switch is touched.
TOUCH SWITCH
Select this item to set a user ID (1 to 65535)
When the user ID is set, the following operation is enabled.
User ID • To specify the used object in the operation log.
Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 3
Japan : Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
China (Big5)-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.
Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

Extended KANJI Region
LAMP
[Japan] [China (GB) -Mincho]
This setting is available when any of the following fonts is selected.
4
• 12-dot standard • 16-dot standard • 12-dot high quality Mincho
• 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic
CHARACTERS
• Stroke
GRAPHIC
Operation Log Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
Target 23. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
Select this item to set how the touch switch is displayed when the trigger condition set on the [Trigger] tab is 5
not satisfied or the touch switch does not operate due to the unsatisfied security level.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Set the style : Displays the [Style] tab.
and text Set a shape displayed when the touch switch does not operate.
NUMERICAL
settings for a Style tab
DISPLAY/
switch in non-
: Displays the [Text] tab.
operating
Set a text displayed when the touch switch does not operate.
Text tab 6
Layer
ASCII DISPLAY/
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Superimposition setting
ASCII INPUT
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
Category
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1, refer to the following. 7

DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*1 Simultaneous Press (Prohibition)
The following list shows the actions of the touch switch when Simultaneous Press is set.
Touch switch action

Touch switch operation
On Preference Off Preference
1. Press the touch invalid area of the touch switch.

2. Slide the finger to the touch valid area of the touch switch.
3. Release the touch switch.
At operation 1. : Remains OFF. At operation 1. : Remains OFF.
At operation 2. : Turns ON. At operation 2. : Remains OFF.
At operation 3. : Turns OFF. At operation 3. : Remains OFF.
1. Press the touch valid area of the touch switch.

2. Slide to the invalid touch area of the touch switch.
3. Release the GOT screen.
At operation 1. : Turns ON. At operation 1. : Turns ON.
At operation 2. : Remains ON. At operation 2. : Turns OFF.
1. Touch the touch switch.

2. Touch an area where no object is located.
3. Release the touch switch.
At operation 1. : Turns ON. At operation 1. : Turns ON.
4. Release the area where no object is located.
At operation 3. : Remains ON. At operation 3. : Remains OFF.
1. Touch the touch switch A where Simultaneous Press is set.

2. Touch the touch switch B.
(The touch switch action when the simultaneous press prohibition is set is the <Action of A> <Action of A>
same as that when the simultaneous press prohibition is not set.) At operation 1. : Turns ON. At operation 1. : Turns ON.
A B A B
<Action of B> <Action of B>
1. Arrange the touch switch A (simultaneous press prohibition is set) on the front
layer and arrange the touch switch B (simultaneous press prohibition is not set)
on the back layer. Then, press the part where the touch switches overlap.
<Action of A>
A At operation 1. : Remains OFF.
B <Action of B>
At operation 1. : Turns ON.

1
POINT
When sliding the finger from the touch key invalid area to the touch key valid area across the screen, the GOT
FIGURES
recognizes the operation as touching multiple areas simultaneously.
The GOT cannot distinguish between sliding the finger across the areas and touching different areas
simultaneously.
Therefore, the GOT recognizes sliding the finger across the areas as touching multiple areas simultaneously. 2
When sliding the finger from the touch key valid area to the touch key invalid area, the GOT also recognizes the
operation as touching multiple areas simultaneously.
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Touch the touch key Slide the finger across
valid area and the touch key the touch key valid area and
invalid area simultaneously. the touch key invalid area.
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Trigger tab
Set conditions for displaying the object.
Select the trigger for displaying the object.

Trigger Type (Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting
• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Range • Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
Settings For details of each item, refer to the following.
OFF
Range
Bit Trigger
Select this item for repeat the set operation while the touch switch is touched.
Repeat the
Set the time from when the touch switch is touched until the start of operation repeat.
operation while Start Delay
This can be set in the range of 0.1 to 2 seconds (0.1 second units). (Default : 0.3)
the switch is
pressed Set a cycle for repeating the operation.
Cycle Period
This can be set in the range of 0.1 to 1 secondes (0.1 second units). (Default : 0.2)
POINT
Operations for which auto repeat while switch is pressed can be set.
For operations for which auto repeat can be set while switch is pressed, refer to the following.
2.11 Precautions

1
 Script tab
FIGURES
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
30.3 Object Script

2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
(1) Correspondence between object setting and property
GRAPHIC
Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
5
: Execution is possible for the object property.
NUMERICAL INPUT
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
NUMERICAL
Setting dialog box Object property
DISPLAY/
Tab name Setting item Property name Read Write*1
active 1)
x 4)
6
- - y 4)
width ASCII DISPLAY/

ASCII INPUT
height
Security Level
security 4)
(Display)
Security Level
7
input_security 2)
(Input)
Extended
Delay delay 2)
DATA LIST
Buzzer, One Shot/

beep 2)
During Push
*1 1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
30.3.5 Object properties
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


For the bit switch overview, refer to the following.
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Bit Switch] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the bit switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged bit switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Device tab
Set bit device as write destination.

Device
Select the function corresponding to the bit device as write destination.

Momentary : Turns on bit only when being touched.
Switch Action Action Alternate : Switches bit ON/OFF with each touch.
Set : Turns ON bit when touched.
Reset : Turns OFF bit when touched.
Click this switch to add actions to the switch function

2.2 Action tab
2.2 Style tab
The shape of the key touch on status is displayed when the touch switch is touched.
Lamp (Timing Key Touch State
The shape of the key touch off status is displayed when the touch switch is not touched.
to change
shape/text) When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is switched to
the shape of the lamp on status.
After selecting this item, set the device.
Bit-ON/OFF
Set this item to reflect the bit device of the bit switch to the bit device of the [Lamp (Timing to
change shape/text)].
2 - 30 2.3 Setting Bit Switch

1
When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the shape of
the lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
FIGURES
Device : Sets the word device.
Lamp (Timing (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

to change Word Range Data type
shape/text) • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 2
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the switching
TOUCH SWITCH
range between the shape of the lamp on status and the shape of the lamp off status.
The changed object name is displayed in GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
Object Name
This Object Name is also displayed in other than the [Device] tabs.
Up to 30 characters can be input. 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.3 Setting Bit Switch 2 - 31

POINT
(1) Touch switch operation when bit momentary is set
(a) If the following cases occur while a touch switch with bit momentary setting is being touched, the bit
device may remain ON even when the operator's finger is released from the switch.
• GOT hardware error
• GOT power-off
• Communication error with a controller
Set timeout time of consecutive ON time to the relevant device as appropriate and turn the bit device off
forcibly by controller at the occurrence of timeout.
(b) When base screen switching request is performed while the touch switch is touched, the screen switches
to a window screen after the operator's finger is released off the switch.
(c) When touching the touch switch while the targeted bit device is ON, the OFF timing of the device
depends on whether the execution condition is satisfied or not.
• When the execution condition is satisfied

Bit device turns off when the finger is released.
• When the execution condition is not satisfied
Bit device turns off when the finger is touched.
(2) Lamp
(a) Switching touch switch images according to the status whether it is touched or not
Select [Key Touch State]. Regardless of the device status, the shape of the key touch on status appears
when the touch switch is touched, and the shape of the key touch off status appears when the touch
switch is not touched. To show the device status, select [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range].
M100 M100
ON ON
Run Run
(b) Switching touch switch images according to the device status

By setting the same device as set in [Switch Action], the device status by touch switch operation can be
shown.
M100 M100
ON OFF
Run Stop
2 - 32 2.3 Setting Bit Switch

1
 Style tab
The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch. 2
TOUCH SWITCH
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
2.2 Extended tab
3
 Trigger tab
The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
LAMP
2.2 Trigger tab
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.3 Setting Bit Switch 2 - 33


For the word switch overview, refer to the following.
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Word Switch] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the word switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged word switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Device tab
When [Mode] is set to [Data Addition]

or [Data Subtraction]
When [Mode] is set to [Custom]

Set a word device where a value is written.
Device
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Setting Value].

Data Type • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32
Set the writing mode of the destination word device.
• Data Addition:
Select this item to add the value set in [Variation] to the value in the destination word
device.
Switch Action • Data Subtraction:
Mode
Select this item to subtract the value set in [Variation] from the value in the destination
word device.
• Custom:
Select this item to write the value set in [Variation] into the value in the destination
word device.
Set this item when [Data Addition] or [Data Subtraction] is selected for [Mode].
When [Mode] is set to [Data Addition], touching the word switch adds the set value to
Variation the value in the destination word device.
When [Mode] is set to [Data Subtraction], touching the word switch subtracts the set
value from the value in the destination word device.
2 - 34 2.4 Setting Word Switch

1
Select the type of the value to be written to the set device.

Set this item when [Custom] is selected for [Mode].
• Constant:
FIGURES
Select this item to set a fixed value to the write destination word device.
(-32768 to 32767)
Setting Value • Indirect Device:
Select this item to set an indirect device to the write destination word device.
2
When both [Constant] and [Indirect Device] are selected, the value (constant + indirect
TOUCH SWITCH
device) is written into the destination word device.
This setting is available when [Constant] and [Indirect Device] are both set in the
Switch Action [Setting Value].
This item is also available when [Data Addition] or [Data Subtraction] is selected for
[Mode].
Initial Value Condition

If the value set for the destination word device and the value set for [Condition Value]
are the same, the value set for [Reset Value] is written into the destination word device.
3
• Conditioin Value:
Set the condition value to write the reset value into the destination word device.
• Reset Value:
Set the value to be written into the destination word device when the condition value
is satisfied.
LAMP
2.2 Action tab
4
CHARACTERS
2.2 Style tab
GRAPHIC
Key Touch State
When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is
switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
5
Bit-ON/OFF After selecting this item, set the device
NUMERICAL INPUT
Lamp (Timing
NUMERICAL
to change
When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the
DISPLAY/
shape/text)
shape of the lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting 6
Data type
Word Range • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the ASCII DISPLAY/
switching range between the shape of the lamp on status and the shape of ASCII INPUT
the lamp off status.
The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use. 7
Object Name
This Object Name is also displayed in other than the [Device] tabs.

DATA LIST

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.4 Setting Word Switch 2 - 35

HINT
Lamp
M100 M100
ON ON
Run Run
By setting the same device as set in [Switch Action], the device status by touch switch operation can be
shown.
M100 M100
ON OFF
Run Stop
 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
2.2 Extended tab
 Trigger tab
2.2 Trigger tab
2 - 36 2.4 Setting Word Switch

1
For the go to screen switch overview, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
2. Click the position where the go to screen switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged go to screen switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Next Screen tab 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Select the screen type of switching destination.
Base Switches to base screen.

6
Overlap Window1 Switches to or display overlap window1 screen.
Overlap Window3 Switches to or display overlap window3 screen. ASCII DISPLAY/

ASCII INPUT
Screen Type Overlap Window5 Switches to or display overlap window5 screen.
Superimpose
Window1
Switches to or display superimpose window1. 7
Superimpose
Switches to or display superimpose window2.
Window2
DATA LIST
Dialog Window Switches to or displays dialog window screen.

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.5 Setting Go To Screen Switch 2 - 37

Select the action of switching screen.
Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number.
After selecting, set the base/window screen number of switching destination.
Fixed
Click the [Browse] button to display the [Screen Image List] dialog box.
Make the settings while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen number that was displayed previously.
Back This item is available only when switching base screen.
(Previous/History)*1 As GOT can store displayed screen numbers including the current base screen, up to 10 base
screens can be switched based on the history.
Next Screen
Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number according to
the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified device.
Device*2 Before setting device, select data type of monitor device.
• Bit • Signed BIN16 • BCD16
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set an action.
Specify the target screen number when switching screens.

Screen No.
This item is available only when the screen to be switched is a base screen.
Click this switch to add actions to the touch switch function.

2.2 Action tab
2.2 Style tab
Key Touch State
When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is switched to the
shape of the lamp on status.
Bit-ON/OFF
Lamp (Timing
to change When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the shape of
shape/text) the lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
Data type
Display range
Object Name
The object name is also displayed in other than [Next Screen] tab.

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
2 - 38 2.5 Setting Go To Screen Switch

1
HINT
Lamp
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
M100 M100
ON ON
Run Run
3

LAMP
By setting the same device as set in the [Next Screen] tab, the device status by touch switch operation can be
shown.
4
M100 M100
ON
CHARACTERS
OFF
GRAPHIC
Run Stop
OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

5
ON shape appears when M100 is ON
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*1 Back (previous/history)
Select the hierarchy mode or history mode using the specified touch switch.
This is fixed to history mode for GT10. (History preservation mode cannot be used.)
• Hierarchy mode (Upper tier switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch display, i.e., switches to the base screen set as the upper tier.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1) 2)
Base 1 Base 12 Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the base screen
12 is pressed, the base screen1, that is set as the upper tier, will be displayed.
• History mode (Previous screen switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch returns to the base screen that was previously displayed.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1) 2)
Base 1 Base 12 Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the base
screen12 is pressed, the base screen23, that was previously displayed, will be displayed again.
(After this, whenever the touch switch is pressed, the screen will return to base screen12 base screen1.)
POINT
Hierarchy/history mode information
If GOT is powered off, the hierarchy/history information become invalid.
Therefore, once GOT is powered off, and then on again, the screen will not be switched based on the previous
hierarchy/history.
For the details of how to save history information in a memory card, refer to the following.
(2) Storing the history information in a memory card in history mode
(1) Method of switching between the hierarchy mode and history mode
The hierarchy mode is set as default.

When using the "Previous" touch switch as history mode, carry out either of the following operations.
(a) Set the history mode on GT Designer3.
1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window] from the menu.
2. Select [History] for [Back Screen Switching].

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting
(b) Switching to history mode using the GOT internal device (GS450.b14)
Turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b14.
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application examples, refer to the following.
(2) (c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device

(2) Storing the history information in a memory card in history mode

1
FIGURES
When the history mode is used, up to 10 screens of history information can be stored in a memory card in the
GOT.
Even though the GOT is powered off and on again, using the stored history information returns you to the screen
displayed before the GOT is powered off.
2
(a) How to store the history information
TOUCH SWITCH
• Enabling the history information to be stored in a memory card with GT Designer3
1. In [Common], select [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window] from the menu.
2. Set [History] for [Back Screen Switching], and select the item [Store history to the memory card].
(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting 3
• Enabling the history information to be stored in a memory card with the GOT internal device
(GS450.b13)
When the history mode is set (GS450.b14 is on), turning on GOT internal device GS450.b13 enables
the history information to be stored in a memory card.
LAMP
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application examples, refer to the following.
(c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device
4
CHARACTERS
(b) Operation overview
The history information is stored in a memory card when the screens are switched.
GRAPHIC
After the GOT is powered on, the GOT reads the history information from the memory card at the first
screen switching.
Run Line A status Line ctrl status

Screen switching
5
Pro. target vol.
action
NUMERICAL INPUT
150
300
History mode action 1) After switching the screen, turn power

Pow. Run Stop Lad.
Password
OFF.
NUMERICAL
1)
DISPLAY/
2) After turning power ON, touch the
GOT powered OFF GOT powered ON Previous touch switch of history mode to
return to the screen before power-OFF.
Run Line A status Line ctrl status

Pro. target vol.
No.1 3) After turning power ON, screen can be 6
300
150
No.2 switched to the 10th screen before power-
Pow. Run Stop Lad.
Password OFF.
ASCII DISPLAY/
2) 3)
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device
Set the history mode at the first line of status observation function.
(After GOT is powered ON, it switches to the history mode instantly.)
When switching from the hierarchy mode to the history mode during monitoring, if screen change has been
done, the screen information within GOT might be lost.
In this case, it is impossible to return to the previous screens as the history.
When the history mode is used, it is recommended to switch to the history mode instantly after powering
GOT on.
Setting history mode
• Making the setting in the status

ocservation function of project
Setting for storing history
information in a memory card • Set the trigger observation cycle as
[Ordinary]
(3) Cautions
(a) If the history information is stored in a memory card, do not change the screen switching device value in the
controller while the GOT is off.
As the history information while GOT is off is not saved, it is impossible to switch back to the screen as
controlled in controller.
(b) Once changed from the hierarchy mode to the history mode, the mode cannot be returned to the hierarchy
mode even by turning GS450.b14 off.
To return to the hierarchy mode, power off the GOT.
This also applies to GS450.b13.
(c) When switching from the Hierarchy mode to the History mode using the GOT internal device (GS450.b14),
set the Hierarchy mode for GT Designer3.
If the History mode is set for GT Designer3, the ON/OFF of GS450.b14 ON/OFF is invalid.

*2 Device (Switch base/window screen according to ON/OFF status/current value of specified device.) 1
Set the following actions.
• Switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number according to the ON/OFF status of the
specified device.
FIGURES
• When the current value of specified device corresponds to the set comparison expressions, switch to the
base/window screen specified by the screen number.
(Up to 64 comparison expressions can be set.)
(1) When specifying bit device
2
After setting the bit device, click the [Detail Settings] button, and set the action when switching screens on the
TOUCH SWITCH
following dialog box.
Setting of Details of Action dialog box
LAMP
Item Description
Select this item for switching to the base/window screen specified by the screen number when the specified 4
No. device turns ON/OFF
ON/OFF Set the screen number of the switching destination screen.
CHARACTERS
Select this item when making the settings in order the screen will not be switched when the specified device
Hold
turns ON/OFF.
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(2) When specifying word device

After setting the word device, click the [Detail Settings] button, and set the action when switching screens on the
Setting of the Details of Action dialog box
Preview list
Item Description
Preview List Displays the set status for each state.
Creates a new state.
Deletes the state.
/ Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.
Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected state.
Range Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
No. : Switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number when the specified device value corresponds to the
set condition.
Set the screen number of the target screen on the Spin box.
Click the [Browse] button to display the screen image list dialog box.
Switching Type
Set the screen, while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
Indirect : Switch to the screen number corresponding to the specified word device when the specified device value corresponds
to the set conditional expression.
Hold : Do not switch screen when specified device value corresponds to the set conditional expression.
HINT
How to Switch Screens
Sequence program also can be used to switch screen.
Create a sequence program that writes the value of the device for switching each screen number by using the
value of the screen number to be switched.
By using this sequence program, the base/window screen can be switched without using the touch switch function.
Base Screen No.1 Base Screen No.10
M0 M0
M0VP K10 D100 M0VP K10 D100
No sequence program can be used to switch base/window screen when GOT internal devices (GB, GD, GS) are
used as base/window screen switching device.

1
POINT
(1) How to erase windows
FIGURES
When erasing window screens, touch the close button, or set the switching screen device value to "0" by
using the touch switch or sequence program. (Fixed: 0)
(2) Timing to switch screens
The switching timing for base/window screens can be selected with ON or OFF (synchronization mode). 2
For how to set this item, refer to the following.
TOUCH SWITCH
If the touch switch is kept touched for a long time, this will delay the timing when the actual screen is
displayed, and the screen may not appear as specified with the device value.
When using status observation function to monitor switching screen device, the value different from actually
displayed screen No. may be stored, depending on the timing of scanning.
Lift
3
Touch
LAMP
Switch to screen
No. 20
Touch switch
4
Switch screen
Device: GD10 10 20
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Base screen Base screen Base screen
Actual displayed No.10 No.10 No.20
screen 10 20 20
Do not switch Switch display screen

5
display screen. to base screen No.20
NUMERICAL INPUT
Monitor screen switching device
(Save the value of screen switching
NUMERICAL
device GD10 according to the status
DISPLAY/
observation function)
In this case, set the script function for each screen as the following, in order that the screen is displayed as
specified by the screen number.
6
Screen script
• Trigger : GB100 (Ordinary ON, Rise)
ASCII DISPLAY/
• Script : [w: GD87] = [w: GD10];
ASCII INPUT
Set the GOT special register GS386 (screen script initial action) to "0" to execute the script function after
switching screens.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
2.2 Extended tab
 Trigger tab
(The setting item [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is not available for this touch switch.)
2.2 Trigger tab

1
For the change station No. switch overview, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Change Station No. Switch] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
2. Click the position where the change station No. switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged change station No. switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Next Station tab 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Select the action of switching station No.
Host Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
6
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.
Other Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch
ASCII DISPLAY/
Next Station destination in decimal.
ASCII INPUT
Select this item to switch to the station specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or
current value of the specified device.
Device*1 Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
• Bit • Signed BIN16 • BCD16
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the actions.
7
All :Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.
Screen Type :Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
Mode
Click this switch to add actions to the switch function.
DATA LIST
2.2 Action tab
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.6 Setting Change Station No. Switch 2 - 47

2.2 Style tab
Key Touch State
When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is switched to
Bit-ON/OFF
Lamp (Timing
to change When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the shape of
shape/text) the lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
Data type
Display range
Object Name
This object name is also displayed in other than [Next Station] tab.

For details of *1, refer to the following.
POINT
The required settings for switching station No.
• Enabling/Disabling station No.switching for each screen
• Select [Screen] [Screen Property] from the menu, and set the [Switch Station No.] on the [Basic] tab in the
[Screen Property] dialog box.
• Setting the station No.switching device
(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting
2 - 48 2.6 Setting Change Station No. Switch

1
HINT
Lamp
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
M100 M100
ON ON
Run Run
3
LAMP
By setting the same device as set in [Next Station], the device status by touch switch operation can be shown.
4
M100 M100
ON OFF
CHARACTERS
Run Stop
GRAPHIC
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*1 Device (Switch station No. to be monitored according to the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified
device.)
Set the following actions.

• Switch station No. according to the ON/OFF status of the specified bit device.
• Switch to the screen specified by station No. when current value of specified word device corresponds to the
set state. (Up to 64 states can be set.)
(1) When specifying bit device
After setting the bit device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action for switching station No. on the
Setting of Details Of Action dialog box
Item Description
Host Select this item to monitor the controller connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch monitoring destination to other station.

Other Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch destination
ON/OFF
in decimal.
Select this item when making the settings in order that the screen will not be switched when the specified
Hold
device turns ON/OFF.

(2) When specifying word device

1
After setting the word device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action on switching screen according to
the device status.
Refer to the following for the details about setting method.
FIGURES
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 State setting
Details of action (word) dialog box

2
TOUCH SWITCH
Preview list
LAMP
Item Description
Preview list Displays the set status for each state.

4
Deletes the state.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Range Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
Select the displaying method for switching station No. when the specified word device value corresponds to the condition set in 5
Range.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Host : Monitor the controller connected with GOT when the specified device value corresponds to the set condition.
DISPLAY/
Switching Type Other : Switch the monitor destination to other station when the device value corresponds to the set condition.
Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch destination in
decimal.
Indirect Device : Switch to monitoring destination corresponding to the specified device when the specified device value corresponds
to the set condition. 6
Hold : Do not switch monitoring destination when the specified device value corresponds to the set condition.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
2.2 Extended tab
 Trigger tab
2.6 Trigger tab

1
For the special function switch overview, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Special Function Switch] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
2. Click the position where the special function switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged special function switch to display the setting dialog box.
 SP Function tab 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Select the extended function to be displayed.

Some functions do not operate even though the functions are set.
For the details, refer to the following manual. 6
GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3
Utility Displays the utility. ASCII DISPLAY/

ASCII INPUT
Communication
Displays communication settings screen
Settings
Switch Action 7
Key Window Displays the key window for numerical/ASCII input function.
DATA LIST
Start HardCopy Starts hard copy function. (Starts to collect screen data)
8
Abort HardCopy Aborts the hard copy function presently processed (Aborts to collect screen data).
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.7 Setting Special Function Switch 2 - 53

Setup Displays setup screen
Change Brightness Displays the change brightness screen.
Displays the screen for changing security levels.

Password The item is enabled when the security level authentication is selected in the system environment.
(Security Level)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Security setting
Clock Setting Displays clock setting screen.
Data Maintenance Displays data maintenance screen.
Advanced Recipe Displays the advanced recipe Information screen.
Logging Displays the logging information.
Preservation
Displays the debug screen.
Function
Operation Log Displays the operation log information.
Switch Action
System Monitor Displays the screen of system monitor function.
Device Monitor Displays the screen for the device monitor function.
Network Monitor Displays the network monitor screen.
Displays the screen of ladder monitor function.

Ladder Monitor
(1) Ladder monitor detail settings
Ladder Editor Displays the ladder editor screen.
Intelligent Module
Displays the intelligent unit monitor screen.
monitor
Servo Amplifier
Displays the servo amplifier monitor screen.
Monitor
Q Motion Monitor Displays the Q motion monitor screen.
Displays the CNC monitor screen.

CNC Monitor
(3) CNC monitor detail settings
Network Unit
Displays the network unit status display screen.
Display
System Alarm
Displays system alarm and resets GOT error.
Display
A List Editor Displays the screen of A list editor function.
Displays the screen of FX list editor function.

FX List Editor
This item is not available for the GT1030 and GT1020.
2 - 54 2.7 Setting Special Function Switch

1
GOT Start Time Displays the day/time the GOT has started, total run hour, and present time.
Displays the window for test function.

Test Window
FIGURES
(Fundamentals) 9.3 Switching ON/OFF Device (Test Function)
Self Check Displays self check screen.
2
Batch Self Check Displays the self check results menu screen.
TOUCH SWITCH
Maintenance Report Displays maintenance report screen.
Clean / Disable
Screen
Displays the screen for screen clear. 3
Starts PX Developer.
PX Developer A number for the function set in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box is set for [No.].
Function Call
(4) PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box
LAMP
Displays the CNC data I/O screen.
CNC Data Input/
Output (5) CNC data I/O detail settings
4
Displays the screen for the FX list monitor.
FX List Monitor
This item is not available for the GT1030 and GT1020.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Displays the operator setting menu screen.
Operator
The item is enabled only when the operator authentication is selected.
Information
Switch Action Management (Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the [Admin password authentication] screen.

5
Operator The item is enabled only when the operator authentication is selected.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Management
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
NUMERICAL
Displays the screens for login and logout.
Log-in/Log-out
DISPLAY/
(Operator
Authentication) (Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Password Change
Displays the operator management screen.
6
(Operator
Authentication) (Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the Fingerprint information management screen. ASCII DISPLAY/

Fingerprint The item is enabled for the operator authentication only. ASCII INPUT
Authentication
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Backup/Restore Displays the screens for backups and restorations. 7
Displays the SFC monitor screen.

SFC Monitor
(6) SFC monitor detail settings
DATA LIST
USB Device Display Displays the USB device status display screen.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
Displays the multimedia screen.

Multimedia
(7) Multimedia detail settings
LIST DISPLAY

PC Remote Displays a personal computer screen on the GOT.

Operation
(8) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) detail settings
(Ethernet)
MELSEC-L
Displays the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Troubleshooting
Displays the motion SFC monitor screen.

Motion SFC Monitor
(9) Motion SFC monitor detail settings
Switch Action Log Viewer Displays the log viewer screen.
Display Displays the [Display] screen of the utility.
Operation Displays the [Operation] screen of the utility.
Select Language Displays the [Language] screen of the utility.
Motion Program
Displays the motion program (SV43) editor.
(SV43) Editor
Motion Program
Displays the motion program (SV43) I/O screen of the utility.
(SV43) Input/Output
Object Name
This object name is also displayed in other than [Action] tab.

(1) Ladder monitor detail settings

The set device can be searched for automatically when the ladder monitor is started by using the special
function switch. (One-touch ladder jump function)
Selecting [Specify Connected Station] for

the search method.
Selecting [Specify Search Device] for the search method.


1
Select this item to search the set device at ladder monitor start.
Select the search method at the ladder monitor start.

Search Method • Specify Search Device : Searches for a program file or device.
FIGURES
• Specify Connected Station : Searches for a controller or program file.
Ladder Search Set a device to be searched for.

Device (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
2
Ladder Search
Select a search method. (Coil/Factor)
Mode
TOUCH SWITCH
Use One-touch CH No. Set the channel No. to be searched for when the controller or program file is searched for.
Ladder Jump
Set the network for the controller to be searched.
• Host : The GOT searches for the controller set as the host station.
After selecting this item, set the CPU No.
Network
• Other : The GOT searches for the controller set as another station.
After selecting this item, set the network No., station No., and CPU No. of the controller 3
to be searched.
Select this item to specify a program file to be searched.

This setting is valid only for the QCPU, LCPU, and QnACPU.
Specify Search File
After selecting the item, specify a file name.
(Up to eight characters can be set.)
LAMP
rr
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

POINT
When using ladder search settings
Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu.
Select the item [Enable GOT Setup] and then, select [Read out a sequence program automatically] in the [Ladder
Monitor] tab.
(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting
For the ladder monitor function, refer to the following.
(2) Ladder editor detail settings

The set device, controller, or program file can be searched for automatically when the ladder editor is started by
using the special function switch. (One-touch ladder jump function)
Selecting [Specify Connected Station] for

the search method.
Selecting [Specify Search Device] for the search method.
Select this item to search a set device, controller, or program file at the ladder editor start.
Select the search method at the ladder editor start.

Search Method • Specify Search Device : Searches for a program file or device.
• Specify Connected Station: Searches for a controller or program file.
Ladder Search Set a device to be searched.

Ladder Search Select a search mode for a device.

Mode (Coil/Factor)
Use One-touch Set a channel No. of the controller to be searched for when the controller or program file is
CH No.
Ladder Jump searched.
Set the network for the controller to be searched.

• Host : The GOT searches for the controller set as the host station.
Network
• Other : The GOT searches for the controller set as another station.
After selecting this item, set the network No., station No., and CPU No. of the controller
to be searched.
Select this item to set a program file to be searched.

This setting is valid only for the QCPU.
Specify Search File
After selecting this item, specify a file name.

1
POINT
When using ladder search settings
FIGURES
Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu.
Select the item [Enable GOT Setup] and then, select [Read out a sequence program automatically] in the [Ladder
Monitor] tab.
2
For the ladder monitor function, refer to the following.
TOUCH SWITCH
(3) CNC monitor detail settings

The GOT can monitor the specified CNC automatically when the CNC monitor is started by using the special
function switch. 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Select this item to automatically monitor the specified CNC when the CNC monitor is started.
CH No. Set the channel No. of the connected CNC.
Set the connected controller.

Specify the
destination to
• Host : The GOT monitors the CNC set as the host station.
7
connect the • Other : The GOT monitors the CNC set as the other station.
screen of CNC After selecting this item, set the network No., station No., and CPU No. of the
Network
Monitor connected controller.
For the Ethernet connection, set the station No. only.
DATA LIST
The settings of the network No. and the CPU No. are disabled.
For the bus connection with a QCPU, set the CPU No. only.
The settings of the network No. and the station No. are disabled.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(4) PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box

Set the PX Developer function to be called.
For the settings in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box, refer to the following manual.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
(5) CNC data I/O detail settings

The GOT can monitor the specified CNC automatically when the CNC data I/O screen is displayed by using the
special function switch.
Select this item to automatically monitor the specified CNC when the CNC data I/O screen is displayed.
CH No. Set the channel No. of the connected CNC.
Set the connected controller.

Specify the
• Host : The GOT monitors the CNC set as the host station.
destination to
connect the
• Other : The GOT monitors the CNC set as the other station.
screen of CNC
After selecting this item, set the network No., station No., and CPU No. of the
Data Input/ Network
connected controller.
Output
For the Ethernet connection, set the station No. only.
The settings of the network No. and the CPU No. are disabled.
For the bus connection with a QCPU, set the CPU No. only.
The settings of the network No. and the station No. are disabled.

(6) SFC monitor detail settings

1
By setting the following items, the GOT can display the set SFC program on the block list screen or SFC
diagram monitor screen when the SFC monitor is started using the special function switch.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Select this item to display the set SFC program on the block list screen or SFC diagram monitor screen when starting the
SFC monitor.
4
Select a screen to be displayed when starting the SFC monitor.
Display Screen Block List : The block list screen is displayed.
CHARACTERS
SFC Diagram : The SFC diagram monitor screen is displayed.
GRAPHIC
Select the channel No. of the controller to be monitored. (1 to 4)
Only the channel numbers with the following controller types set can be selected.
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
CH No.
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion
5
MELSEC-L
NUMERICAL INPUT
Use Block List/
Set the network for the controller to be monitored.
SFC Diagram
NUMERICAL
Network Host : The GOT monitors the controller set as the host station.
display function
DISPLAY/
Other : The GOT monitors the controller set as the other station.
Set the network No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 255)

N/W No.
This item can be set only when [Other] is set for [Network].
PC Station No.
Set the station No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 120) 6
CPU Machine Set the CPU No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 4)
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Specify the file name of the SFC program to be read from the controller.
File Name
Up to four two-byte characters or eight one-byte characters can be input.
Set the block No. of the block to be displayed when starting the SFC monitor. (0 to 319)
Block No.
This item can be set only when [SFC Diagram] is set for [Display Screen].
7
POINT
When using SFC monitor function
DATA LIST
For the SFC monitor function, refer to the following.

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(7) Multimedia detail settings

By setting the following items, the GOT can display the set multimedia screen when the multimedia function is
started using the special function switch.
Select a multimedia screen to be displayed when touching the switch.

Initial Display File Menu : The file menu screen is displayed.
Screen Video Image : The video image screen is displayed.
Video Playback : The video playback screen is displayed.
Set the file name and the extension (3GP or MP4) of the video file to be played.
File Name Set this item only when [Video Playback] is selected for [Initial Display Screen].
Set the file name with up to 70 one-byte alphanumeric characters.
Select this item to add the device value set for [Playback File Time Specification Device] (in the [Playback/External
Add date to
Notification] tab of the [Multimedia] dialog box displayed by selecting [Peripheral Setting] from the menu) to the file name
playback files
of the video file to be played as the recording date and time.
Displays the dialog box of multimedia setting.
POINT
Multimedia function
For the multimedia function, refer to the following.

(8) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) detail settings

1
By setting the following items, the GOT can display a set personal computer screen using the special function
switch.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Set a display size of the personal computer screen on the GOT.
Window Size
(Horizontal resolution of the GOT: 320 or more/Vertical resolution of the GOT: 240 or more)
CHARACTERS
Set a title to be displayed on the title bar for the personal computer screen on the GOT.
GRAPHIC
The following shows the items to be displayed.
Window • Standard: Displays [PC Remote Operation (Ethernet)].
Window Title
Display • IP Address: IP addresses for a personal computer connected
• Comment Group: Comments of the set comment No.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment of the set comment No. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Display Set the display magnification of the personal computer screen on the GOT.
Magnification (100%/50%/33%/25%)
NUMERICAL
Enable GOT touch
DISPLAY/
operation at the
Select this item to enable the touch operation while the personal computer screen on the GOT is
time of PC Remote
Operation displayed.
Operation
Setting (Ethernet)
Select a soft keyboard to be used for the personal computer screen on the GOT.
6
Soft Keyboard
(Japanese 106 Keyboard/English 101 Keyboard)
ASCII DISPLAY/
Set an IP address for the VNC server.
IP Address
ASCII INPUT
(0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)
Set a password to connect the GOT to the VNC server.

Set the password with up to 31 characters.
Password
One-byte alphanumeric characters, one-byte space, and the following symbols are available.
VNC Server
!“#$%&‘()*+,`-./:;<=>?@[\]^_{|}~ 7
Connection 
Set a port No. to connect the GOT to the VNC server. (1024 to 65535)
Setting Port No.
To use the terminal server, set the port No. to 5923.
Select this item to use the terminal server.

DATA LIST
Click the [Setting] button to display the setting dialog box.

Use Terminal To log on to the terminal server automatically, refer to the following, and set a user name and
Server Auto Logon password.
(a) Terminal Server Auto Logon Setting dialog box
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(a) Terminal Server Auto Logon Setting dialog box
Set a user name to connect the GOT to the terminal server.

User Name Set the user name with up to 20 characters.
One-byte alphanumeric characters, one-byte space, and symbols (excluding "/[]:; | =,+*? <>) are available.
Set a password to connect the GOT to the terminal server.

Set the password with up to 127 characters.
Password
One-byte alphanumeric characters, one-byte space, and the following symbols are available.
!“#$%&‘()*+,`-./:;<=>?@[\]^_{|}~
(9) Motion SFC monitor detail settings

By setting the following items, the GOT can display the set motion SFC program on the program batch monitor
window or SFC diagram monitor screen when the motion SFC monitor is started using the special function
switch.
Select this item to display the set motion SFC program on the program batch monitor window or SFC
diagram monitor screen when starting the motion SFC monitor.
Select a screen to be displayed when starting the motion SFC monitor.

Display Screen Program Batch Monitor Window: The program batch monitor window is displayed.
SFC Diagram: The SFC diagram monitor screen is displayed.
Use Program
Select the channel No. of the controller to be monitored. (1 to 4)
Batch Monitor
Only the channel numbers with the following controller types set can be selected.
Window/SFC CH No.
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
Diagram
MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion
display function
Set the network for the controller to be monitored.
Network Host : The GOT monitors the controller set as the host station.
Other : The GOT monitors the controller set as the other station.
Set the network No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 255)

N/W No.

1
Set the station No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 120)

Use Program PC Station No.
Batch Monitor
FIGURES
Window/SFC CPU Machine Set the CPU No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 4)
Diagram
Specify the file name of the SFC program to be read from the controller.
display function File Name
Up to 16 one-byte characters can be input.
2
POINT
TOUCH SWITCH
When using motion SFC monitor function
For details of the motion SFC monitor function, refer to the following.
3
 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
LAMP
 Text tab
4
CHARACTERS
2.2 Text tab
GRAPHIC
 Extended tab
The setting item [Use Offset] is not available for this touch switch.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
2.2 Extended tab
NUMERICAL
 Trigger tab
DISPLAY/
This item can be set when the Switch Action in the [SP Function] tab is set to [Key Windows].
The setting item [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is not available for this touch switch.
6
2.2 Trigger tab
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


For the key window display switch overview, refer to the following.
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Key Window Display Switch] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the key window display switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged key window display switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Key Input tab
User ID for a key Set the user ID of the object to display the cursor when the key window display switch is touched.
input (0 to 65535)
Key Window
Switch Specify the position (coordinate values) where the key window is displayed.
Position

2.2 Action tab
2.2 Style tab
Lamp (Timing
to change Key Touch State
shape/text)
When the bit device set in [Device] is turned on, the shape of the lamp off status is switched to
Bit-ON/OFF After selecting this item, set the device.
2 - 66 2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch

1
When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the shape of
the lamp off status is switched to the shape of the lamp on status.
FIGURES
Lamp (Timing
to change
shape/text)
Word Range
Data type
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 2
Display range
TOUCH SWITCH
Object Name
This object name is also displayed in other than [Key Input] tab. 3

LAMP
HINT 4
Lamp
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Select [Key Touch State]. To show the device status, select [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range].
M100 M100
ON ON 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Run Run
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Select [Bit-ON/OFF] or [Word Range]. 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
M100 M100
ASCII INPUT
ON OFF
Run Stop
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch 2 - 67

 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
(Setting items for [User ID] and [Operation Log Target] are not available in this switch.)
2.2 Extended tab
 Trigger tab
2.2 Trigger tab
2 - 68 2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch

1
For the key code switch overview, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
1. Select [Object] [Switch] [Key Code Switch] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
2. Click the position where the key code switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged key code switch to display the setting dialog box.
 Key Code tab 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Specify the key code type.
Numerical/ASCII Input
Alarm/Data List
: Select to input the key code for numeric value/ASCII input.
: Select to input the key code for data list, alarm list, alarm history or advanced alarm. 6
Key Code Type *1
Historical Trend Graph/Historical Data List
: Select this item to input a key code to the historical trend graph or the historical data
ASCII DISPLAY/
list display.
Document Display*1 : Select to input a key code in document display. ASCII INPUT
For a single touch switch, only one of the key codes above can be set.
Check this item to input the numeric value or character using key code.
ASCII After checking this item, input the numeric value/character and press [Conversion] to convert
automatically into the key code. 7
Check this item to set an action by a key code.
Code Set
After checking the item, select and set the action.
Action (Fundamentals) Appendix.5 Key Code List
DATA LIST
When [Switch window screens for ASCII (screen no. specification)] is selected, a spin box
appears. Specify the screen to be displayed. (1 to 10)
User ID for a
key input
Set the user ID of the object to display the cursor when the key code switch is touched.
8
Click this switch to add actions to the switch function.
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
2.9 Setting Key Code Switch 2 - 69

Object Name
This object name is also displayed in other than [Key Code] tab.

*1 Not available for the GT11, GT10.
 Style tab
2.2 Style tab
 Text tab
2.2 Text tab
 Extended tab
(Setting items for [User ID] and [Operation Log Target] are not available in this touch switch.)
2.2 Extended tab
 Trigger tab
2.2 Trigger tab
2 - 70 2.9 Setting Key Code Switch

1
2.10 Relevant Settings
The touch switch is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.
FIGURES
2.10.1 GOT type setting
2
Select [Common] [GOT Type Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box.
(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
TOUCH SWITCH
Function Setting item Model
Checking if objects are overlapping. [Check for overlapping objects within GOT]
Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects overlapped on [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in
GOT. GT Designer3] 3
2.10.2 GOT environmental setting (Screen switching/Window)
Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Windows] from the menu to display the
LAMP
[Environmental Setting] dialog box.

4
Setting the timing for switching the screen when the go to screen is touched.
[Operation Timing]
CHARACTERS
(ON/OFF)
GRAPHIC
2.10.3 GOT environmental setting (Key window)/Screen property
The following functions can be set for each project (GOT environmental setting) or each screen (screen property).
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
• Setting for each project (GOT environmental setting)
NUMERICAL
Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Key Window] from the menu to display the [Environmental
DISPLAY/
Setting] dialog box.
• Setting for each screen (screen property)
Select a screen editor to set a key window, and select [Screen] [Screen Property] from the menu to display the
[Screen Property] dialog box. 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/
ASCII INPUT
Displaying the key window when condition success. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Key Window]

Displaying the key window when switching screens. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Display the key window] 7
Displaying the cursor when switching screens. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Display the cursor]
DATA LIST

Displaying the cursor when condition success. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Cursor]

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
8
Deleting the key window and cursor when condition fails.
• [Clear the key window and the cursor] in [When
HISTORICAL DATA
operating conditions are not satisfied]

LIST DISPLAY
2.10 Relevant Settings 2 - 71

2.10.4 GOT environmental setting (System information)
Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [System Information] from the menu to display the [Environmental
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Notifying the key code which is assigned to the input key when a value is entered by
[Key Code Input]
the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)
Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: system signal 1-1.b9) [System Signal 1-1]
Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3) [System Signal 2-1]
2.10.5 Sound file setting
Select [Common] [Sound] [Sound Files] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
Setting a sound for when the touch switch is touched.

[Use a sound file for touch key tone]
(A sound file is required.)
Cancelling all running sound outputs and outputting the touch key sound when a
[Give top priority to sound output of a switch]
touch switch is touched.
HINT
Changing the touch key sound
For changing the touch key sound, a sound file must be registered in advance.
2.10.6 GOT internal device
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 GOT internal devices
Setting the operation timing of touch switches with overlapping bit alternate/bit set/bit
GS450.b12
reset and screen switching /station number settings.
Saving the screen switching history to a memory card GS450.b13
Switching the operation of switching to the previous screen of the touch switch.
GS450.b14
(Hierarchy/Historical)
2 - 72 2.10 Relevant Settings

1
2.11 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using touch switches
FIGURES
 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 1000 objects can be set. 2
(For the GT10, up to 50 objects can be set.)
TOUCH SWITCH
(2) Action of touch switch
Multiple functions can be set for one touch switch.
(Multiple functions cannot be set if special function switch is set.)
Action sequence
GT16, GT SoftGOT1000 GT15, GT14 GT12, GT11 GT10 for multiple
settings*1 3
Key window display : 1 Key window display : 1 Key window display : 1 Key window display : 1 High priority
Key code : 16 Key code : 16 Key code : 16 Key code : 16
Word set : 20 Word set : 20 Word set : 20 Word set : 20
Set : 20 Set : 20 Set : 20 Set : 20
Reset : 20 Reset : 20 Reset : 20 Reset : 20
LAMP
Alternate : 20 Alternate : 20 Alternate : 20 Alternate : 20
Momentary : 20 Momentary : 20 Momentary : 20 Momentary : 20
Base : 1 Base : 1 Base : 1 Base : 1 4
Overlap Window1 : 1 Overlap Window1 : 1 Overlap Window1 : 1 Overlap Window1 : 1
Overlap Window2 : 1 Overlap Window2 : 1 Overlap Window2 : 1 Overlap Window2 : 1
Overlap Window3 : 1 Superimpose1 : 1 Superimpose1 : 1 Superimpose1 : 1
CHARACTERS
Overlap Window4 : 1 Superimpose2 : 1 Superimpose2 : 1 Superimpose2 : 1
GRAPHIC
Overlap Window5 : 1 Station No. switching : 6 Dialog window : 1
Superimpose1 : 1 Dialog window : 1
Superimpose2 : 1
Station No. switching : 9 5
Dialog window : 1 Low priority
NUMERICAL INPUT
Total :135 Total :129 Total :123 Total :122
*1 The action sequence (except for the key window display, key code, and dialog window) can be changed on the [Action] tab.
NUMERICAL
When the multiple actions are set for one switch, the actions are executed in the above order by default.
DISPLAY/
For each touch operation, reading data from devices is performed collectively for all the actions, and then writing
data to devices is performed collectively for all the actions.
If an error occurs while the GOT reads data from a device, the GOT does not write data to devices.
If an error occurs while the GOT writes data to a device, the GOT writes data to the devices for the other actions. 6
Example 1) When the actions are set in the order as shown below, if an error occurs during the first key code
action, the process is interrupted.
Therefore, the second bit set action is not executed. ASCII DISPLAY/
1) Key code : FFBBH (Save alarm contents to memory card) ASCII INPUT
2) Bit set
7
Action
Error 1)Key code
DATA LIST
2)Bit set Not executed
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
2.11 Precautions 2 - 73

Example 2) When the actions are set in the order as shown below, if an error occurs while the GOT reads data
(previous value) from a device in the second bit alternate action, the process is interrupted.
Therefore, the first word set action and the third bit set action are not also executed.
1) Word set
2) Bit alternate
3) Bit set
Action
1)Word set Not executed
Error 2)Bit alternate
3)Bit set Not executed
Example 3) When the actions are set in the order as shown below, if an error occurs while the GOT writes data
(bit reversed value) to a device in the second bit alternate action, the process is not interrupted.
The first word set action and the third bit set action are executed.
1) Word set
2) Bit alternate
3) Bit set
Action
1)Word set Executed
Error 2)Bit alternate
3)Bit set Executed
(3) Minimum size of touch switches

The minimum size of touch switches differs depending on the GOT used.
GOT Minimum size of touch switches
GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12,

2 dots (vertical) 2 dots (horizontal)
GT SoftGOT1000, GT1020
Other than the above 16 dots (vertical) 16 dots (horizontal)
(4) Reducing basic figures in size

For the touch switch for which the basic figure is set, its shape may not be properly displayed when the touch
switch is reduced in size.
(5) Valid range of touch switch
The setting unit for touch switch valid area differs depending on the GOT used.
GOT Setting unit for valid area
GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12,

1-dot units
GT SoftGOT1000, GT1020
Other than the above 16-dot units
2 - 74 2.11 Precautions

By right-clicking the mouse on an object and setting [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region], the shape and valid area 1
size of the touch switch can be set individually.
For setting the [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region] with GT10, enable the [Specify the touch area].
(Fundamentals) 3.7.1 Creating a new screen
FIGURES
Also, the valid area of a touch switch can be fit in an object frame with [Touch Area Auto Adjustment].
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects
2
Screen 1 Touch switch shape
TOUCH SWITCH
Valid area of touch switch
(6) Character display when using indirect text setting

(a) When the indirect text (basic comment) is used, only the first line of the comment is displayed on the touch
switch. 3
For the indirect text (basic comment), create a comment in one line.
(b) When the character size is greater than the frame of the touch switch, no character is displayed.
Also, any comment part overflowing from the frame cannot be displayed.
LAMP
(7) Key codes multiple setting
The following key codes must be set last, as the other key codes will not be executed, if set after them.
4
Key Code*1 Description Key Code Type
000DH Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move the cursor Numerical/ Ascii Input
CHARACTERS
001BH Delete cursor Numerical/ Ascii Input
0080H Move cursor to the right Numerical/ Ascii Input
GRAPHIC
0081H Move cursor to the left Numerical/ Ascii Input
0082H Move cursor upward Numerical/ Ascii Input
0083H Move cursor downward Numerical/ Ascii Input 5
0084H Kanji Conversion Numerical/ Ascii Input
NUMERICAL INPUT
0085H The former candidate Numerical/ Ascii Input
0086H The next candidate Numerical/ Ascii Input
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
0087H Select/No Conversion Numerical/ Ascii Input
0092H User ID ascending order movement of cursor Numerical/ Ascii Input
0093H User ID descending order movement of cursor Numerical/ Ascii Input
FFB4H Display date/time of selected data Alarm/ Data List Control 6
FFB5H Display data/time of all data Alarm/ Data List Control
FFB6H Clear the selected alarm data Alarm/ Data List Control
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
FFB7H Clear all alarm data Alarm/ Data List Control
FFB8H Display detail/ Move to the lower hierarchy Alarm/ Data List Control
FFB9H Reset the selected alarm data Alarm/ Data List Control
FFBBH
FFC2H
Save alarm contents to memory card
Move to the upper hierarchy.
Alarm/ Data List Control
Alarm/ Data List Control
7
*1 For the obFor key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.

DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(8) Superimposing a touch switch with an object

(a) Touch switches that cannot be superimposed
Make sure that the following touch switches will not overlap with other ones.
If "Simultaneous Press" is not set, the simultaneous press (On Preference) settings are applied to them.
Therefore, they will not function when superimposed with other touch switches or objects that can be
touched.
Key Code*1 Description Key Code Type
FFBCH Display ladder Alarm/ Data List Control
- Special Function Switch -
*1 For key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.
(b) When superimposing the key window display switch and another touch switch
In the following cases, the touch switch superimposed with the key window display switch does not
operate.
• When a touch switch is set behind the key window display switch using the superimpose window or set
overlay screen function.
• When the object ID of the superimposed touch switch is longer than that of the key window display
switch.
If the touch switch fails to operate, set another touch switch over the key window display switch using the
superimpose window or the overlay screen function.
For details of superimposing using the superimpose window or set overlay screen function, refer to the
following.
(c) Go to screen switch or touch switch with screen switching setting
When the above switch is superimposed with any of the following objects, if [When a finger is touched (ON
synchronous)] is set for [Action of Go To Screen Switch] in the GOT environmental setting, place the
objects as below. Place each object so that the go to screen switch or the touch switch with the screen
switching setting operates last.
Even if any of the following objects is placed so that the object operates after screen switching, the object
does not function.
• Touch switch • Numerical input • ASCII input

For the operation order of the superimposed objects, refer to the following.
(9) When using a part as a touch switch shape

When the GOT has a project, if only an edited part is written to the GOT or a part in the GOT is deleted,
configure the touch switch shape setting again.
If the part size is changed, the GOT may not display the touch switch correctly.
If the part is deleted, the GOT does not display the touch switch shape but displays only the text set on the touch
switch.
When a part data is updated, the data of all touch switches and lamps that use the updated part must be
updated. Accordingly, it may take a longer time than usual when storing the project data or opening the
communication dialog.

(10) Setting [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed]

1
(a) Precautions for touch switches with operation repeat set.
Touch switch type Precaution
FIGURES
When operation repeat is set for a switch, do not set special functions, switching screens, or
switching station numbers to the action.
Switch
If special functions, switching screens, or switching station numbers is set, the operation repeat
setting is invalid. 2
Bit switch If bit momentary is set for the action, the operation repeat is invalid.
Word Switch None
TOUCH SWITCH
In the following cases, the operation repeat is aborted.
Key window display switch • A key window is displayed while the operation is repeated.
• A key window is already displayed.
If any dialog window is displayed while operation repeat is performed, the operation repeat is
Key code switch
aborted.
3
(b) Touching simultaneously multiple touch switches with operation repeat set
When multiple touch switches with operation repeat set are touched simultaneously, the operation repeat
setting is valid only for the last touched touch switch.
(11) Converting a touch switch to a lamp
LAMP
(a) Settings to be deleted
When the touch switch is converted to the lamp, some settings are deleted.
The deleted settings are set as the default setting of the lamp.
4
(b) Basic figure conversion
When the basic figure set for the touch switch can be set for the lamp, the touch switch is converted to the
CHARACTERS
basic figure of the lamp that corresponds to the basic figure of the touch switch. The touch switch is also
GRAPHIC
converted to the shape of the lamp, and the shape number is the same as that of the touch switch.
Example: Converting the touch switch to the lamp when [Square_3D_Fixed Width_Push] is set for the
basic figure of the touch switch 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Converting the touch switch to
the lamp that corresponds to the
NUMERICAL
Touch Switch Lamp
basic figure of the touch switch
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
Converting the touch switch to the
lamp whose shape number is
the same as that of the touch switch
DATA LIST
When the touch switch is converted to the lamp in the following cases, the default basic figure is set.
• The shape number of the basic figure set for the touch switch does not exist in the shape number of the
basic figure for the lamp. 8
• [Toggle] of the basic figure is set for the touch switch.
HISTORICAL DATA
• [Selector] of the basic figure is set for the touch switch.

LIST DISPLAY
Even when the shape number is the same between the touch switch and the lamp, the shapes may be
different. After the conversion, check the set shape before use.

(c) Restoring the lamp to the original touch switch after the conversion
To restore the original touch switch after the conversion, select [Edit] [Undo] from the menu.
When the lamp is converted to the touch switch again, the settings of the touch switch are not restored.
If the [OK] button is not clicked after the [Convert to Lamp] button is clicked, click the [Cancel] button to
abort the conversion.
(d) Types of lamps to be converted
According to items selected for [Lamp (Timing to change shape/text)], the types of the lamp to be
converted may differ.
• When selecting [Key Touch State] or [Bit-ON/OFF]
The touch switch is converted to a bit lamp.
• When selecting [Word Range]
The touch switch is converted to a word lamp.
• When [Lamp (Timing to change shape/text)] does not exist, the touch switch is converted to a bit lamp.
 Precautions for use

(1) Simultaneously press is disabled.
The following shows precautions for the simultaneous press on the GOT screen.
GOT Precautions
Do not touch the GOT screen at two or more points simultaneously.

Simultaneous touch of two or more points may cause a point that is not touched to respond.
To reduce malfunctions that occurs when more than two points are touched simultaneously,
GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 select [False Input Reduction] for [Touch Detection Mode] of GOT setup.
For touch detection mode, refer to the following.
GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, Simultaneous touch of touch switches is allowed at up to two points.
GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, This feature can be used, for example, to press two points on the GOT screen by both hands
GT1572-VN, GT1565-V, GT1562-VN, to ensure safe operation.
GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q If three points are touched simultaneously, touching of the third switch is disregarded.
(2) Delay setting

(a) When [Press Twice] is set
When [Press Twice] is set for the touch switch, do not execute other operation of the monitor screen before
the second touch. Otherwise, [Press Twice] does not function properly.
(b) When [Press Twice] and operation repeat are set
When [Press Twice] and the operation repeat are set for the touch switch, the operation repeat is invalid at
the first touch.
The operation repeat is enabled with the second touch.

(3) Setting overlapping actions (either of bit set/reset/alternate and either of screen switching/station
1
number switching) for a touch switch.
If overlapping actions (either of bit set/reset/alternate and either of screen switching/station number switching)
are set for a touch switch, the screen or station number switching timing varies as the following, according to the
FIGURES
ON/OFF of the GS450.b12.
Make sure to set GS450.b12 before first operation of the touch switch.
This can change the device status after screen switching.
2
GS450.b12
Setting item
ON OFF
TOUCH SWITCH
Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Set When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Reset When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +

When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Alternate
Screen switching/Station No. Switching + 3

When the touch switch is released
Momentary
Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Word When the touch switch is touched When the touch switch is touched
The following shows an example of how to make the settings so that the status observation function works to
automatically turn GS450.b12 ON after the GOT is powered ON.
LAMP
• Example of setting the status observation function
The GOT internal device (device that is always ON: GS0.b4) functions as a trigger. 4
GS450.b12 turns ON when the trigger is ON.
With this settings, the status observation function works and GS450.b12 turns ON after the GOT is powered ON.
CHARACTERS
For details of observation function, refer to the following.
GRAPHIC
NUMERICAL INPUT
• Make the settings in the Project tab within
the Status Observation screen
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
• Put the settings in the first line (GS450.b12
turns ON right after the GOT is powerd ON)
• Set Observe Cycle to [Ordinary] 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Example) When multiple actions including followings are set for a touch switch.
Bit Alternate : M100
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 2 when M100 turns ON.
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 1 when M100 turns OFF.
(a) Action when GS450.b12 is ON.

After the bit set/reset/alternate is executed, the screen or station number is switched when the touch switch
is released, and the GOT operates with the values after the bit set/reset/alternate is executed.
Base screen 50 Base screen 2 Base screen 2 Base screen 1
M100 M100 M100 M100

M100 turns ON when The screen changes when M100 turns OFF when the The screen changes when
the touch switch is touched. the touch switch is released. touch switch is touched again. the touch switch is released.
(b) Action when GS450.b12 is OFF.

The screen or station number is switched simultaneously to the execution of bit set/reset/alternate, and the
GOT operates with the values before the bit set/reset/alternate is executed.
Base screen 50 Base screen 1 Base screen 1 Base screen 2
M100 M100 M100 M100

M100 turns ON and the screen M100 turns OFF and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched. changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100: (The operation is based on the value (M100:
OFF) before the bit Alternate is executed.) ON) before the bit Alternate is executed.)

(4) When [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is set
1
(a) Operation repeat cycle disturbance
When communication time is longer than the set repeat cycle, the operation repeat cycle may be disturbed.
In such a case, take measures such as setting a longer time for start delay and repeat cycle, or reducing
FIGURES
monitor target devices.
Example: When the operation repeat is used for the touch switch adding "1" to a device value
Object used: Word switch
2
Setting item Setting
Device D100
TOUCH SWITCH
Constant 0
Indirect device D100
• When operations are repeated normally

The device value is added with 1 every time the touch switch operates. 3
First touch Second touch Third touch
0 1 2 3
LAMP
4
• When the operation repeat cycle is disturbed
The device value may not be added with the value even when the touch switch operates.
CHARACTERS
First touch Second touch Third touch
GRAPHIC
0 1 2 2
NUMERICAL INPUT
(b) Operation repeat abort
NUMERICAL
If a dialog window is displayed while operation repeat is performed, the operation repeat is aborted.
DISPLAY/
(c) Touch switch pressing time and device write time
While a value is written to the device, the touch switch is recognized as being touched.
Therefore, if writing to the device is not finished even when the finger is released from the touch switch
within the time set for start delay, the touch switch may be recognized as being touched for more than the
6
set start delay time, what activates operation repeat.
In such a case, set a longer time for start delay.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
(d) Switching operations while the touch switch is touched
While the touch switch is touched, security switching, language switching, and station No. switching are
performed.
When the trigger device value of security switching, language switching, or station No. switching is
changed while the touch switch is touched, the switching is performed when the finger is released from the 7
touch switch.
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


1
3. LAMP
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
 Bit lamp
3.1 Setting Bit Lamp
This function turns ON/OFF the lamp according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device.
X10 = ON X10 = OFF
3
Run Stop
LAMP
ON OFF
 Word lamp 4
3.2 Setting Word Lamp
This function enables changing lamp color according to the word device value.
CHARACTERS
D100 = 0 D100 = 1 to 99 D100 = over 100
GRAPHIC
Stop Run Error
NUMERICAL INPUT
OFF ON Flicker
 Lamp area
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
3.3 Setting Lamp Area
This function enables an exchange of two colors of the figures and objects (in the unit of dots) within the specified
area by turning on or off the bit device. 6
M100=OFF M100=ON
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
HINT
(1) To control a figure in the similar manner as a lamp
It is possible to change the color of a figure in response to turning ON of the bit device, like a lamp, by setting
DATA LIST
the lamp attribute to the figure.

For details, refer to the following.
1. FIGURES 8
(2) Differences between a lamp and a figure for which lamp attribute is set
HISTORICAL DATA
With the figure for which lamp attribute is set, only changing of the color is possible in response to turning ON
LIST DISPLAY
of a bit device.
To set a layer, text, etc. to an object, it is necessary to use a lamp.
3-1

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp
1. Select [Object] [Lamp] [Bit Lamp] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the bit lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged bit lamp to display the setting dialog box.
 Device/Style tab
Set the device to be monitored and the lamp figure (shape, color) to be displayed when the device is ON/OFF.
Preview list
Lamp Type Select the lamp type. (Bit/Word)
Set a device to be monitored.

Device
Preview List Displays the status set for On and OFF.
Shape Set a Lamp Figure.
Select this item for enabling the transparent setting of the image data set as a lamp figure.
If this item is not selected, the transparent setting is disabled.
Use Image This item can be selected only when a figure for the parts or library is set to the lamp figure.
Transparent*1 For details of enabling the transparent settings of an image data, refer to the following.
1. FIGURES
3-2 3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

1
Frame Color Select the color of the lamp shape.
Select the color of the lamp figure.

Lamp Color When a figure in the library (except my favorites) is set to [Shape], the set figure can be changed to
FIGURES
a figure in a different color registered in the library with changing the lamp color.
Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.

Background Color
The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
2
Shape Attribute Pattern + Lamp
Example: Background :
TOUCH SWITCH
Pattern
Pattern :
Lamp :
Background
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp. (None/Low/Medium/High)
Blink Scope Select a blink area. (Shape and Text/Shape only) 3

The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet)
Object Name
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Click this button to convert the object type to the touch switch.
LAMP
*1 Not available for the GT1030 and the GT1020.

4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
3.1 Setting Bit Lamp 3-3

 Text tab
For the bit lamp, any text directly input or comment set for Comment Group can be used as the text displayed in the
object, by making the selection for Text Type.
Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.

Text
(1) Text
Comment Set a comment that has been set for comment group.
Group (2) Comment group
For details of the comment group, refer to the following.


(1) Text
1
FIGURES
Preview list
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Set the copy range. 4

CHARACTERS
Copy OFF
GRAPHIC
ON /
Copy ON
OFF
Font Select a font for the text to be displayed. 5
• 6 8dot font • 12-dot high quality Mincho*1 • 16-dot high quality Gothic
NUMERICAL INPUT
Text Size • Windows font
NUMERICAL
• Stroke*2
DISPLAY/
Select an effect for the text.

: Displays the text in italic characters. 6
Common
: Displays the text in underlined characters.
Settings of
ASCII DISPLAY/
Display Select a character set available for the specified font.
Script
ASCII INPUT
Position (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

7

The display format is not available for multiple settings.
DATA LIST

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

T
Display Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the
L C R
Position object. (Center/Up/Down/Left/Right)
B
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)

Text Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.

Text Settings
Text
Offset to frame
Offset to Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
Frame object frame. (0 to 100)
*1 Not available for GT1020.

*2 Not available for GT11 and GT10.

(2) Comment group

1
FIGURES
Preview list 2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Copy Range
Set the copy range.
All Settings : Copies all text settings.
4
Copy OFF
CHARACTERS
ON /
GRAPHIC
Copy ON
OFF
Preview Column
(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.) 5
No.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Set the group No.
DISPLAY/
Fixed : Enter the comment group number directly. (1 to 255)
Group No.
Device : Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to be set.
After selecting it, set the device.
Commoent
Group
Select this item for adjusting the character size automatically along with the object area. 6
The character size after adjustment is the maximm size for fitting the text string in the object area.
Adjust Text Size
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Minimum Size Set the minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment. (8 to 128)
Set the comment No.

Fixed : Set by inputting directly the comment No. to be used. (0 to 32767)
Text Settings Comment No.

Clicking the button displays the [Edit Comment] dialog box, to edit the comment.
7
Device : Select the item to display the comment corresponding to the comment No. that is the
same as the value stored in the device to be set. After selecting the item, set the
device.
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Preview No. Displays the comment of the specified comment No. on the screen of GT Designer3.

• 12-dot standard font*1 • 16-dot standard font
• 12-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Mincho
Text Size • 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Gothic • Stroke*2

Text: Select a color for the text to be displayed.
Change Attribute
of Comment : Displays the text in solid format.
Setting : Displays the text in raised format.
Text Settings Solid: Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.
, , and cannot be set simultaneously.
Text
Offset to frame
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text
Offset to Frame
and object frame. (0 to 100)



field.
characters.

1
 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset value, kanji region, layer, and category.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Security Level When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Extended China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5)-Gothic
: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
KANJI Region
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
This setting is available only when any of the following fonts is selected in the [Text] tab.

6
• 1 2-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic
• Stroke
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Layer
Category
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Script tab

30.3 Object Script


active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Extended Security Level security 4)

3 - 10 3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

1
3.2 Setting Word Lamp
FIGURES
1. Select [Object] [Lamp] [Word Lamp] from the menu.
2
2. Click the position where the word lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3.
TOUCH SWITCH
Double click the arranged word lamp to display the setting dialog box.
Set the lamp figure (shape/color) corresponding to the device to be monitored or monitor device value.
LAMP
Preview list 4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Lamp Type Select the lamp type. (Bit/Word)
NUMERICAL INPUT
Device
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Data Type
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • BCD16
Preview List*2 Displays the set status for each state. 6

Sets the display format of the preview list to range.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Sets the display format of the preview list to text.
Deletes the state.
/ Changes the priority of the states in the preview list. 7

Bit Set the condition by which the display attribute is changed.

When a word device value is taken as a condition, click the [Exp] button to enter the conditional
DATA LIST
Range expression in the [Edit Range] dialog box for editing the display range.
Range

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
3.2 Setting Word Lamp 3 - 11

Set a lamp figure.

Shape Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box, or to select library shapes.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 Shape setting
Check the item for enabling the transparent setting of the image data set as a lamp figure.
Use Image If the item is not checked, the transparent setting is disabled.
This item is available only when shapes from [Parts]/[Library] are selected in the [Shape].
Transparent*1
1. FIGURES
Frame Color Select the frame color of the lamp figure.
Select the color of the lamp figure.

Lamp Color When a figure in the [Library] (Except my favorites) is set for [Shape], the set figure can be
changed to the same figure with a different color, by changing the lamp color.
Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.

Background
The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
Shape Attribute Pattern + Lamp

Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Lamp :
Background
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp. (No/Low/Middle/High)
Blink Scope Select a blink area. (Shape and Text/Shape only)
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
Object Name
Move to the [Text] tab.
Click this button to convert the object type to the touch switch.
*1 Not available for the GT1030 and the GT1020.

*2 For details of *1, refer to the following.
3 - 12 3.2 Setting Word Lamp

*2 state 1
For details of states, refer to the following.
FIGURES
(1) When state are overlapped
When state are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Example) Monitor device : D100
Data type : Signed BIN16 2
The operation
TOUCH SWITCH
priority for setting State No. Range Lamp Display text Blink
overlap state
High 1 M10 ON Red Stop No
2 60<=$V<=80 Yellow Caution No
3 81<=$V Red Alarm Low
Low
Normal case
(State 0)
- Blue Normal operation - 3
* $V is the monitor device value.
When M10 is ON, the lamp
LAMP
State 1 will be red and the displayed
text will be Stop. Stop
4
When the device value is
CHARACTERS
between 60 and 80
State 2 (60<=$V<= 80), the lamp will
GRAPHIC
be yellow and the displayed Caution
text will be "Caution"
5
When the monitor device
NUMERICAL INPUT
value is 81 or more (81<=$V),
the display (lamp color and Blink every
NUMERICAL
displayed text) on the state 3 second.
DISPLAY/
State 3
and the lamp color on the
state 0 blink alternately. The Alarm
text set on the state 0 is not
displayed.
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
When the condition is other
ASCII INPUT
than the state 1. 2, and 3, the
Normal case
lamp lights in blue and
(State 0)
"Normal operation" is Normal operation
displayed.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Text tab
For word lamp, texts directly input or comments set for Comment Group can be used as the texts displayed on the
object by selecting [Text Type].
Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.

Text
(1) Text
Comment Set a comment that has been set for comment group.
Group (2) Comment group
For comment group, refer to the following.

(1) Text
1
FIGURES
2
Preview list
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP

4
CHARACTERS
Deletes the state.
GRAPHIC
Font Select a font for the text to be displayed. 5

• 6 8dot font • 12-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Text Size • Stroke • Windows font
DISPLAY/
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

: Displays the text in italic characters. 6
Common : Displays the text in underlined characters.
Settings of
ASCII DISPLAY/
Display Select a character set available for the specified font.
Script
ASCII INPUT
Position (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

: Displays the text in bold format. 7

DATA LIST

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

T
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on
Select Position to
the object. L C R
Edit Text
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right) B
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)

Text Input Area Press the [Enter] key to input a new line of the end of the first line.

Text Settings
Text
Offset to frame
Set the number of dots for the distance between the
Offset to Frame
text and object frame. (0 to 100)
Move to the [Device/Style] tab.


(2) Comment group

1
FIGURES
2
Preview list
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP

4
CHARACTERS
Deletes the state.
GRAPHIC
Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3. 5

Preview (Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
NUMERICAL INPUT
Column No. This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Set the group No.
Fixed : Enter the comment group number directly. (1 to 255)
Group No.
Device : Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to be set.
Comment
After selecting it, set the device.
Select this item for adjusting the character size automatically along with the object area.
6
Group
Adjust Text Size The character size after adjustment is the maximm size for fitting the text string in the object area.
ASCII DISPLAY/
Minimum Size Set the minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment. (8 to 128) ASCII INPUT
Set the comment No.
Fixed : Set by inputting directly the comment No. to be used. (0 to 32767)
Clicking the button displays the [Edit Comment] dialog box, to edit the comment. 7
Comment No.
Text Settings (a) Edit Comment dialog box
Device : Select the item to display the comment corresponding to the comment No. that is the
same as the value stored in the device to be set. After selecting the item, set the
device.
DATA LIST
Preview No. Displays the comment of the specified comment No. on the screen of GT Designer3.

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


• 12-dot standard font*1 • 16-dot standard font
• 12-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Mincho
Text Size • 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Gothic • Stroke*2

Text: Select a color for the text to be displayed.
Change Attribute of : Displays the text in solid format.
Comment Setting
Text Settings Solid: Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.

Text
Offset to frame
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and the
Offset to Frame
object frame.(0 to 100)



field.
characters.

1
 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset value, kanji region, layer, and category.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Security Level When the security function is not used, set this value to 0. 4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
Extended China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
KANJI Region

This setting is available only when any of the following fonts is selected in the [Text] tab. 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
• 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Mincho • 16-dot high quality Gothic
ASCII INPUT
• Stroke

Layer
7
Category
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.
(1) Data operation
For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.9 Data operation setting
Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask
Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR : Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

1
(2) Script
FIGURES
30.3 Object Script
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
(a) Correspondence between object setting and property
CHARACTERS
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
GRAPHIC
the object setting dialog box is shown below.

: Execution is not possible for the object property. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Write*1
NUMERICAL
Tab name Setting item Property name Read
DISPLAY/
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4) 6
width
height ASCII DISPLAY/

ASCII INPUT

7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

3.3 Setting Lamp Area
1. Select [Object] [Lamp] [Lamp Area] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the lamp area is to be located.
3. Adjust the dotted frame to specify the applicable lamp area.
4. Double click the arranged lamp area to display the setting dialog box.

Device
Trigger As a condition to exchange colors, select either when the bit device is on or when the bit device is off. (ON/OFF)
Set the target two colors to be exchanged when the condition is established in [Color 1] and [Color 2].
Color Setting
The set colors are exchanged each time the condition is established.

Layer Select the same layer as target figures and objects for the lamp area.

Category
Object Name The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
3 - 22 3.3 Setting Lamp Area

1
POINT
(1) Arrangement conditions to enable the lamp area function
FIGURES
To enable the lamp area function, configure the following settings for the lamp area and the target figures/
objects for the lamp area.
(a) Specifying the area
The color exchange by the lamp area function is applicable within the lamp area regardless of the forms 2
of figures and objects.
When part of figures or objects are out of screen, the lamp area function is not applied to that part.
TOUCH SWITCH
Therefore, arrange the figures and objects within a dotted frame of the lamp area.
Example) When and are set for [Color Setting] for the lamp area
LAMP
(b) Setting on the same layer (other than GT10)
Arrange the lamp area and the target figures and objects for the lamp area function on the same layer.
(c) Changing the arrangement order 4
Arrange the target figures and objects for the lamp area function on the rear of the lamp area.
(Figures and objects arranged before the lamp area is set are arranged on the rear of the lamp area.)
CHARACTERS
To change the arrangement order of figures and objects, select and right click the figures or objects.
Then, change the arrangement order with [Stacking Order].
GRAPHIC
(d) Setting the display order of objects (other than GT10)
To enable the lamp area function for objects, set the display order of object.
Select [Common] [GOT Type Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box. 5
Select [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT Designer3].
NUMERICAL INPUT
(2) When the front layer transparent is set for colors to be exchanged (other than GT10)
When the lamp area function is used on the front layer, if the same color as [Front Layer Transparent] is set for
NUMERICAL
[Color 1] or [Color 2] in [Color Setting], the color set as [Front Layer Transparent] (the back layer is displayed)
DISPLAY/
and the other color are exchanged.
Not only the figures and objects in the lamp area but also the lamp area are targeted for the color exchange.
For details of [Front Layer Transparent], refer to the following. 6
(Fundamentals) 3.7 Creating/Opening/Closing Screen
ASCII DISPLAY/
Example) When and are set for [Color Setting] for the lamp area,
ASCII INPUT
and is set for [Front Layer Transparent]
Color of the lamp area including

figures and objects turn . 7
DATA LIST
(3) Actions of the lamp area on the preview window and screen editor
The color exchange by the lamp area function cannot be checked on the preview window and screen editor.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
3.3 Setting Lamp Area 3 - 23


The lamp is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects overlapped [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in
on GOT. GT Designer3]

1
3.5 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the lamp.
FIGURES
(1) Maximum number of objects settable on one screen
If lamps and figures for which a lamp attribute is set are placed on the same screen, the number of lamps that
can be set decreases by one for each figure placed.
TOUCH SWITCH
(2) Minimum size of lamps
The minimum size of lamps is 2 dots (vertical) 2 dots (horizontal).
(3) Reducing basic figures in size
For the lamp for which the basic figure is set, its shape may not be properly displayed when the lamp is reduced
in size. 3
(4) Display on GT Designer3 and GOT
With GT Designer3, only figures for which bit devices are ON are displayed. However, with GOT, a figure
corresponding to bit device ON may be displayed overlaying a figure that corresponds to bit device OFF state.
(When a bit device is ON, bit lamp display may differ between GT Designer3 and GOT.)
LAMP
In such a case, take appropriate measures so that the figure corresponding to bit device OFF will not be
displayed. Setting a lamp color or background color can be effective.
4
Example of a bit lamp displayed differently between GT Designer3 and GOT
Display
CHARACTERS
Item
Bit device ON Bit device OFF
GRAPHIC
Setting at GT Designer3 ON OFF
5
Display on GOT OFF
ON OFF
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
*The representation above is given only for the purpose of explanation and it differs from actual display.
DISPLAY/
(5) When using a part as a lamp figure
In the state the project is already written to the GOT, if only a part is modified and written to the GOT or if the part
written to the GOT is deleted, it is necessary to check the setting for the lamp figure again. 6
The lamp may not be displayed correctly if the part size is modified.
The lamp is not displayed if the part is deleted.
When updating a part data, the data of all switches and lamps that use the updated part must be updated. ASCII DISPLAY/
Accordingly, it may take a longer time than usual when storing the project or opening the communication dialog. ASCII INPUT
(6) Setting regarding lamp area when reading GT Designer2 format file for GOT-F900 series (other
than GT10)
When the GT Designer2 format file for GOT-F900 series is read to GT Designer3, the bit lamp areas are 7
converted into the lamp areas.
After the conversion, set the display order of objects to match the actions of the lamp areas with those of the bit
lamp areas.
DATA LIST
Select [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT Designer3].
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(7) Converting a lamp to a touch switch

(a) Settings to be deleted
When the lamp is converted to the touch switch, some settings are deleted.
The deleted settings are set as the default setting of the touch switch.
(b) Basic figure conversion
When the basic figure set for the lamp can be set for the touch switch, the lamp is converted to the basic
figure of the touch switch that corresponds to the basic figure of the lamp. The lamp is also converted to the
shape of the touch switch, and the shape number is the same as that of the lamp.
Example: Converting the lamp to the touch switch when [Square_3D_Fixed Width_Push] is set for the
basic figure of the lamp
Converting the touch switch to

the lamp that corresponds to the
Lamp Touch Switch basic figure of the touch switch
Converting the touch switch to the

lamp whose shape number is
the same as that of the touch switch
Even when the shape number is the same between the lamp and the touch switch, the shapes may be
different. After the conversion, check the set shape before use.
(c) Object size for the conversion
When the lamp that does not support the touch switch object size is converted, the lamp object size is
converted to the object size that supports the touch switch object size.
(d) Restoring the touch switch to the original lamp after the conversion
To restore the original lamp after the conversion, select [Edit] [Undo] from the menu.
When the touch switch is converted to the lamp again, the settings of the lamp are not restored.
If the [OK] button is not clicked after the [Convert to Switch] button is clicked, click the [Cancel] button to
abort the conversion.
(e) Types of touch switches to be converted
Regardless of a bit lamp or a word lamp, the lamp is converted to the touch switch.

NUMBERS, CHARACTERS


1
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
The following characters can be displayed on the screen using GT Designer3.
Graphic character Drawing example Reference
Text 4.1 Text

3
Logo text 4.2 Logo Text
LAMP
4.1 Text
4
CHARACTERS
This function enables to display texts on the screen.
GRAPHIC
 Settings
1. Select [Figure] [Text] from the menu. 5
2.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Display the text on the screen.
NUMERICAL
 How to display
DISPLAY/
Clicking on the screen displays the [Text] dialog box.
Enter the texts to be displayed, set their attributes and click the [OK] button. The entered texts are displayed.
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
When 16-dot standard font is selected When MS Mincho font is selected
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
4.1 Text 4-1

Enter the text to be displayed.

• Up to 512 characters can be entered as texts.
(A line feed occupies two characters.)
• A text can be entered on multiple lines.
To start a new line (line feed), press the Enter key at the end of the current line.
Entry example Display example
Text
Select the font for the text.

• 6 8dot • 12dot Standard • 6dot Standard • 12dot HQ Mincho
• 12dot HQ Gothic • 16dot HQ Mincho • 16dot HQ Mincho
Font*2
• True Type Mincho • True Type Gothic • Stroke
The GT1020 does not support 12-dot Standard and 16-dot Standard (Mincho).
The GT1030 does not support 16-dot Standard (Mincho).
Click the button to display the text in italic characters. Click the button to display the
text underscored (straight line).
Script Select the language.
Select the text size (width height magnification or dots).

Size*2
The applicable text size and magnification range change, depending on the font.
Text Color Select the text display color.


Background Color*3 Select this item to apply a background color to the text.
Select the text orientation (Horizontal/Vertical).

[Horizontal]AAA [Vertical] A
Direction
A
A
Click the button to select the position by which character strings on multiple lines
Alignment
are aligned.
(This item is available only when the [Direction] item is set to [Horizontal].)
AAA
Interval Set the interval, i.e., space between lines of character strings. Interval
BBB
4-2 4.1 Text

1
Select a Kanji region for the text.

Japan : Displayed in Japanese kanji character.
China (GB)-Mincho : Displayed in simplfied Chinese.
FIGURES
China (Big5)-Gothic : Displayed in traditional Chinese.
Example) Difference between Japan and China (GB)-Mincho
KANJI Region*2
[Japan] [China (GB)-Mincho]

2
This setting is available only when any of the following [Font] is selected in the Text tab.
TOUCH SWITCH
• 12dot Standard • 16dot Standard • 12dot HQ Mincho
• 12dot HQ Gothic • 16dot HQ Mincho • 16dot HQ Gothic
Select this item to assign a category to the text.

(Category list)
Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting. 3
*1
Convert to the logo text.
LAMP
4
*2 Setting the font and size.
The following shows the setting list of selected font and size.
CHARACTERS
(1) Width x Length (2) Dots
Width x Length Dots
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Size
Font (1) Width Length (2) Dots

6
Width Length
6 8dot N/A
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
12dot Standard 1 to 8 1 to 8
16dot Standard 0.5 to 8 0.5 to 8
12dot HQ Mincho 2, 4, 6, 8 2, 4, 6, 8 N/A
12dot HQ Gothic 2, 4, 6, 8 2, 4, 6, 8
7
16dot HQ Mincho 2, 4, 6, 8 2, 4, 6, 8
16dot HQ Gothic 2, 4, 6, 8 2, 4, 6, 8
True Type Mincho 24 to 128 dots (4-dot unit)

DATA LIST
True Type Gothic 24 to 128 dots (4-dot unit)

N/A

Font provided for Windows OS
8 to 128 dots (1 dot increment)
Stroke 8
The 12-dot standard font and 16-dot standard font use Unicode 2.1, and for part of the Traditional Chinese and
HISTORICAL DATA
Korean character sets, characters similar to the proper character may be displayed.
LIST DISPLAY
To display Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese characters on the GT16, GT15, or GT14, install the following
fonts (option OSs) so that the GOT displays the characters correctly.
4.1 Text 4-3

Set the kanji region for each object and install the following fonts.
Standard font [China GB] 12-dot characters)
The Simplified Chinese (GB) font is a GB2312-encoded font mainly used on mainland China.
Standard font [China GB] 16-dot characters
Standard font [China Big5] 12-dot

characters
The Traditional Chinese (Big5) font is a Big 5-encoded font mainly used in Taiwan.
Standard font [China Big5] 16-dot
characters
*3 Setting the background
When the [Background Color] and buttons are pressed simultaneously, the left or top of the text string
may be located out of the text background color.
POINT
(1) Precautions for vertical text
If the text is displayed in the vertical direction, the text is displayed as follows:
(Example 1) In the case of "-" (Example 2) In the case of "()"
Horizontal direction: Terminal Horizontal direction: (Caution)
Vertical direction:T Vertical direction : (
E C
R a
M u
I t
N i
A o
l n
)
(2) Texts supported the GOT
(a) The 6 8 dot font uses ASCII characters 20H to 7EH*.
When characters other than above are used, they are displayed differently between GT Designer3 and
GOT.
• For GT Designer3: Unsupported characters are displayed as " ".
• For GOT: Characters after unsupported ones cannot be displayed.
Example) A B C D 1 2 3
Display on GT Designer3 Display on GOT

A B C D 1 2 3 ABC
Not displayed.
* Alphanumeric: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9
Symbol : !,",#,$,%,&,',(,),*,+,-,,,.,/,:,;,
<,=,>,?,@,[,\,],^,_,`,{,|,},~,space
(b) The GOT and GT Designer3 supports common Unicode 2.1-compatible fonts. Therefore, they can
display fonts used in various countries, e.g. Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Pekingese), English, German
and French.
For multi-language input, refer to the following section.
4-4 4.1 Text

1
4.2 Logo Text
FIGURES
This function enables to display logo texts on the screen.
 Settings 2
1. Select [Figure] [Logo Text] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH
2. Display logo texts on the screen.
 How to display
Clicking the screen displays the [Logo Text] dialog box.
Enter the texts to be displayed, set their attributes and click the [OK] button. The entered texts are displayed. 3
(1) Basic tab
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
Enter the text to be displayed.
ASCII INPUT
• Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Text (A line feed is counted as two characters.)
• A text can be entered on multiple lines.
To start a new line (line feed), press the Enter key at the end of the current line.
Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting. 7
DATA LIST
Convert to the Text Figure.
Select the font for the text.
Font
• True Type Mincho
• True Type Gothic 8
• Windows Font
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
4.2 Logo Text 4-5

Click the button to display the font in Bold.
Display example:
Click the button to display the font in Italic.
Display example:
Click the button to display the font underscored (straight line).
Display example:
Select the position by which character strings on multiple lines are aligned.
X Set the horizontal size of the font. (1 to 800)

Size
Y Set the vertical size of the font. (1 to 800)
Text Color*1 Set the text color.
Background Color Select the background color for the text.
Select this item to assign a category to the logo text.

(Category list)

The following shows display examples.
(Outline) (Solid) (3D) (Stamp) (Neon)
Effect
4-6 4.2 Logo Text

(2) Advanced tab

1
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
Text Width Set the thickness of the text. (0 to 100)
CHARACTERS
Antialiasing Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the text. (0 to 100)
GRAPHIC
Text Interval Set the spacing between texts. (0 to 100)
Line Interval Set the spacing between the lines of texts. (0 to 16)
Select the effect on the [Basic] tab. 5

The setting items vary depending on the selected effect.
Effect
NUMERICAL INPUT
For details of setting items of the effects, refer to the following.
(2) Detail setting (a) to (e)
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
(a) Outline
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Outline Color*1 Set the color of the outline.

7
Outline Width Set the thickness of the outline. (0 to 100)
Outline
Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the outline. (0 to 100)
DATA LIST
Antialiasing
3D Display When this item is selected, the outline is displayed in a solid display.
Illuminant
Set the light-source direction in solid display.
Direction 8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
4.2 Logo Text 4-7

(b) Solid
Solid Color*1 Set the shade color.
Solid Width Set the thickness of the shade. (0 to 100)
Solid Antialiasing Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the shade. (0 to 100)
Relative (X) Set the X-axis relative coordinate of the shade.

Coordinate (Y) Set the Y-axis relative coordinate of the shade.
(c) 3D
*1 Set the color of the solid lateral surface.

Side Color
Depth Set the depth of the solid part. (1 to 20: dot)
3D Direction Set the solid direction.
(d) Stamp
Solid Color*1 Set the shade color of the stamp.
Solid Length Set the length of the stamp shade. (1 to 20: dot)
Illuminant Direction Set the light-source direction of the shade.
4-8 4.2 Logo Text

(e) Neon 1
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
Outline Color*1 Set the color of the outline.
Outline Width Set the thickness of the outline. (0 to 100)
Outline Antialiasing Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the outline. (0 to 100)
Neon Color Set the color of the neon.

3
Neon Width Set the thickness of the neon. (0 to 100)
Neon Antialiasing Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the neon. (0 to 200)
*1 When other color or the filling effect is selected in the color setting, the following windows are displayed for users to set.
Even when color settings are changed in the system settings, the setting of the color selected in [More Colors] is saved.
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
4.2 Logo Text 4-9

4 - 10 4.2 Logo Text

1
5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL
INPUT
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
 Numerical display
5.1 Setting Numerical Display 3
This function allows the data saved in PLC CPU devices to be displayed as numeric values on GOT.
D100 349 D100 722
LAMP
D100=349 D100=722 4
 Numerical input
5.2 Setting Numerical Input
CHARACTERS
This function enables writing any value from GOT to controller device.
GRAPHIC
(1) Inputting numeric values by input keys
Use input keys provided in the key window or touch switches assigned with key codes.
(a) Using touch switches on screen to input value 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
123 1234
NUMERICAL
1 2 3 4 5 C AC 1 2 3 4 5 C AC
DISPLAY/
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C 6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C
(b) Using a key window to input value

6
123 1234
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
*1 For key window types and operation, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting 7
(2) Inputting numeric values by barcode reader or RFID
Barcode
DATA LIST
123456789
123456789
1 2 3 4 5 C AC
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C 8
HISTORICAL DATA
Barcode reader Numeric values are input to

the touched numerical input object.
LIST DISPLAY
*1 For setting the barcode and RFID function, refer to the following.
Setting for the barcode function : 31.1 Settings
Setting for the RFID function : 32.1 Settings
5-1

Example
Displays numeric values in various patterns Displays/Inputs numeric value with decimal points
Device/Style tab Device/Style tab
125
24.4
321
Uses the numerical display/numerical input in combination

Changes display /background color depending on the value
with a level display.
Display Case tab 12. LEVEL
Present temperature Present temperature
58 125 25 98
5-2

1
5.1 Setting Numerical Display
FIGURES
1. Select [Object] [Numerical Display/Input] [Numerical Display] from the menu.
2
2. Click the position where the numerical display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
TOUCH SWITCH
3. Double click the arranged numerical display to display the setting dialog box.
Set the device, view format, frame format and preview.
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Type Select the function to use. (Numerical Display/Numerical Input) 6

Device
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Device].
Data Type
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32 • Real
Select the displayed data format of a monitored device.

•Signed decimal •Unsigned decimal • Hexadecimal • Octal • Binary • Real
Example:GOT display examples 7
Signed decimal : -12623 Binary : 0011000101001111
Display Format Format Unsigned decimal : 12623 Octal : 30517
Real : 1262.3 Hexadecimal : 314F
DATA LIST
The default of a handled data format is signed BIN.

To monitor by the other data format, change the setting in [Data Type].

8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
5.1 Setting Numerical Display 5-3

Font Select a numeric font.

• 6 8dot • 12-dot HQ Gothic • Stroke
• 12-dot Standard • 16-dot HQ Gothic
• 16-dot Standard • TrueType Gothic1
Number Size
Display the numerical

value to be shown on the Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.
screen with asterisk*1
Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.

The available number of digits varies depending on [Format].
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Digits Hexadecimal : 1 to 8 digits
Octal : 1 to 6 digits
Binary : 1 to 32 digits
Real : 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when the button is
selected in [Alignment].
Example (In the case of five digits)
Zero not displayed Zero displayed
Fill with 0
5 00005

Alignment
: Select the horizontal position.
When REAL is selected in [Format] of [Display Format], set the number of digits after the
Display Format
decimal point (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
If "0" is set, the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Example: Device value: 6.57
Number of digits after decimal point: 1
Decimal Point Rounded off

6.57
6.6 6.57
Select this item to display the device value of integer (when data format other than binary
floating point value is stored in monitor target devices) as a value with decimal point, when
Real is selected in the [Format] of [Display Format].
Example: Number of digits after Number of digits after
decimal point: 2 decimal point: 3
controller device controller device
value: 20 value: 20
Adjust Decimal Point 0.20 0.020

Range
0.20 is displayed on GOT. 0.020 is displayed on GOT.

The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:
Display range : $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the
specified device value
Data operation : $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value
5-4 5.1 Setting Numerical Display

1
Set this item when displaying characters (such as alphanumeric characters and symbols) with
device values.
• Input "#" for the part where a numeric is displayed.
Format String*2*3
FIGURES
Display Format
The "#" signs set with the format string setting are replaced by a device value when displayed.
• Numerics displayed are assigned from the ones place.
• The sign included in the device value is displayed same as numerics.
Set a shape for the object. 2

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
TOUCH SWITCH
When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot
correctly display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
Shape
GOT display
GT Designer3 setting Before updating data After updating data
3
A part of characters that A part of characters
Shape Settings Figure frame area overlaps with the figure displayed before updating
(Normal) frame area is not displayed. the data remains in
the figure frame area.
LAMP
Frame Color Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.
4
Frame
Plate Color Plate
CHARACTERS
Numerical Color Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
GRAPHIC
Reverse Select this item for reversing the numeric character.
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape. (None/Low/Medium/High)
Blink Scope Select a blink area. (Data only/ Data and Plate)
Preview Sample Value Set the numerical value to be displayed on the preview shape.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Description
This object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
*1 Precautions for asterisk display 6

The following shows precautions for using the asterisk display.
ASCII DISPLAY/
(1) Values that are displayed as asterisks
Numeric values, signs, and decimal points are displayed as asterisks. ASCII INPUT
When character strings (other than "#") are set for the format string, the character strings are not displayed as
asterisks.
Example of format string settings Without asterisk display With asterisk display 7
##m##cm 12m34cm **m**cm
(2) Stored values for operation log function

Even when the asterisk display is set, actual values (not asterisks) are stored for the operation log.
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*2 Precautions for format strings
The following shows precautions for using format strings.

(3) Setting items disabled when format strings are used
• When TrueType font is set, format strings cannot be used.
• Settings of [Digits] in the Device/Style tab is disabled.
• Setting of [Alignment] on the Device/Style tab is disabled and the right alignment is set.
(4) Characters that cannot be displayed for format string
If any character of other than ASCII code (0x20 to 0x7E) is included in the format string when 6x8 dot is set for
font, this character and the following characters are not displayed.
(Fundamentals) Appendix7 ASCII Code List
*3 Display example of format string settings
The following shows display examples where format string settings are used.
Example1: When other than [Real] is set to [Format]
Format string Decimal place Device value Display
1234 12m34cm
123 1m23cm
##m##cm -
12345 23m45cm
-123 -1m23cm
Example2: When [Real] is set to [Format]

0 m12cm
##m##cm
12m35cm
12.345
####cm 2 1235cm
##.##cm 12.35cm
POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area in

the specified figure.
Plate area : Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure.
Plate area
Figure frame area

1
 Display Case tab
Set the device range and shape.
For details of the states, refer to the following.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
Preview list
LAMP
4
Displays the set status for each state.
CHARACTERS
Preview list*1
Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case). (The state No. 0 indicates the normal case)
GRAPHIC
Deletes the state.

5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Select the condition for display change depending on the state.
DISPLAY/
Bit : Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit
device. Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Type
Word : Select this item to change the display based on a word device .
After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device value with
Range
the [Exp] button. 6
Set the value of the word device to change the display.
Device
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Condition Set the device status of the bit device. (ON/OFF)
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Plate Color Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Numerical Color Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied. 7
Shape Settings
Reverse Select this item for reversing the numerical display.

DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*1 States
(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Display case] tab
When the state is other than the one set at the [Display case] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on
the [Device/Style] tab.
(2) Display when states are overlapped
When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device : D100
Data Type : Signed BIN16
Priority level for

State No. Range Color
overlapped setting
High 1 M10 ON Red (Blink)
2 200<=$V<=300 Blue
3 1000<=$V Yellow (Reverse)
Normal case
- Green
Low (State 0)
* represents the monitor device value.
When M10 is ON, the numeric value will be displayed in red

State 1 150
(Blink).
When the device value is within a range of 200 to 300 (200<=$V<=

State 2 200
300), the numeric value will be displayed in blue.
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$V), the numeric

State 3 3000
value will be displayed in yellow (Reverse).
Normal case When the condition is out of the range of states 1 to 3, the numeric
150
(State 0) value is displayed in green.

1
 Extended tab
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Select the display mode when overlaying the numerical display with a level display.?
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
[Transparent]
NUMERICAL
Transparent : Displays a numeric value on the level.
98
DISPLAY/
XOR : To identify the level and numerical display easily, a numeric value is
Display Mode
displayed in color different from the level color based on XOR. This item is
valid when the GOT is the monochrome type. [XOR]
(Fundamentals) Appendix6 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
20 50 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Set a kanji region for the characters to be displayed when setting the format string on the Device/Style tab.
China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chinese characters.
KANJI Region

This setting is available when any of the following [Font] is selected in the [Device/Style] tab
• 12-dot standard • 16-dot standard
• 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Gothic
• Stroke

Layer

Category
5 - 10 5.1 Setting Numerical Display

1
 Trigger tab
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
Select trigger by which the object is displayed.
CHARACTERS
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Trigger Type
GRAPHIC
• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Sampling • Range,
• Rise • Fall • Bit Trigger
Ordinary 5
ON
NUMERICAL INPUT
OFF
NUMERICAL
Settings Rise For details of each item, refer to the following.
DISPLAY/
Fall (Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Trigger Setting
Sampling
Range 6
Bit Trigger
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
5.1 Setting Numerical Display 5 - 11

function.
(1) Data operation
Select this item to set the mask operation.After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern
value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
When the data type of the device is set to [Real], this setting is disabled.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts].
Bit Shift Left : Left shift
Right : Right shift
Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

Data Operation With GT10, the decimal point is rounded down with operations including the division or decimals when [Data Type] on
the [Device/Style] tab is set to other than the real number.
HINT
Division with adjusting decimal point range
With GT10, division up to values lower than the decimal point can be executed only when device values are divided
by 10n, by setting [Adjust Decimal Point Range] and [Decimal Point] on the Device/Style tab. (Numbers of decimal
place are not rounded down.)
Example) When using the data operation for GT10 When using the adjust decimal point range for GT10
Device: 1265 Device: 1265
Decimal point: 0 Decimal point: 2
Adjust decimal point range: No Adjust decimal point range: Yes
Data operation: $$ (Device value) /100 Data operation: No
12.00 12.65
The GOT displays 12.00. The GOT displays 12.65.
5 - 12 5.1 Setting Numerical Display

(2) Script
1
FIGURES
30.3 Object Script
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
Correspondence between object setting and property
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
active 1)
x 4)
y 4)
- -
width 6
height
ASCII DISPLAY/
decimal_point 3)
Numerical Color text_color 3) ASCII INPUT

Number Size (X) text_width 4)
Number Size (Y) text_height 4)
Blink blink 5) 7
Device/Style Reverse highlight 5)
Frame Color frame_color
Plate Color plate_color 5)

DATA LIST
Alignment arrange 3)
Blink Scope blink 5)
Extended
Security Level security 4) 8
Display Mode draw_mode 3)
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
5.1 Setting Numerical Display 5 - 13

1. Select [Object] [Numerical Display/Input] [Numerical Input] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the numerical input is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged numerical input to display the setting dialog box.
HINT
Key window setting
For the input by a key window, the user can select the standard key window or user-created key window in the
For the setting method, refer to the following.
Set the device, view format, frame format and preview.
Type Select the function to use. (Numerical Display/Numerical Input)

Device
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Device].

Data Type
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32 • Real
5 - 14 5.2 Setting Numerical Input

1

•Signed decimal •Unsigned decimal • Hexadecimal • Octal • Binary • Real
FIGURES
Example:GOT display examples
Signed decimal : -12623 Binary : 0011000101001111
Format
Unsigned decimal : 12623 Octal : 30517
2
The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format, change
the setting in [Data Type].
TOUCH SWITCH
• 6 8dot • 12-dot HQ Gothic • 1Stroke
• 12-dot Standard • 16-dot HQ Gothic
• 16-dot Standard • TrueType Gothic
Number Size
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following: 3
Display the
numerical value to
be shown on the Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.
screen with
LAMP
asterisk*1

The available number of digits varies depending on [Format]. 4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Display Format Real : 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when the button is
selected in [Alignment].
Example (In the case of five digits) 5
Zero not displayed Zero displayed
NUMERICAL INPUT
Fill with 0
NUMERICAL
5 00005
DISPLAY/
Alignment
: Select the horizontal position. 6
When REAL is selected in [Format] of [Display Format], set the number of digits after the decimal
point (1 to 32).
ASCII DISPLAY/
If "0" is set, the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off. ASCII INPUT
Decimal Point Rounded off 7

6.57
6.6
6.57
DATA LIST

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
5.2 Setting Numerical Input 5 - 15

Select this item to display the device value of integer (when data format other than binary floating
point value is stored in monitor target devices) as a value with decimal point, when Real is
selected in the [Format].
Example: Number of digits after Number of digits after

decimal point: 2 decimal point: 3
controller device controller device
value: 20 value: 20
Adjust Decimal 0.20 0.020

Point Range
Display Format
0.20 is displayed on GOT. 0.020 is displayed on GOT.
The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:

Display range : $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the specified
device value
Data operation : $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value
Set this item when displaying characters (such as alphanumeric characters and symbols) with
device values.
• Input "#" for the part where a numeric is displayed.
Format String*2*3
The "#" signs set with the format string setting are replaced by a device value when displayed.
• Numerics displayed are assigned from the ones place.
• The sign included in the device value is displayed same as numerics.

1
Set a shape for the object.

FIGURES
Shape
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap. 2
GOT display
TOUCH SWITCH
Figure frame area overlaps with the figure displayed before updating
Shape Settings frame area is not displayed. the data remains in
(Normal) the figure frame area.
Frame Color Select a frame color/plate color for the shape. 3

Frame
Plate Color
Plate
LAMP
Numerical Color Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
Reverse
Blink
Select this item for reversing the numeric character.
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape. (None/Low/Medium/High)

4
Blink Scope Select a blink area. (Data only/ Data and Plate)
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Description
This object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
*1 Precautions for asterisk display
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
(1) Values that are displayed as asterisks
Numeric values, signs, and decimal points are displayed as asterisks.
When character strings (other than "#") are set for the format string, the character strings are not displayed as
asterisks.
6
Example of format string settings Without asterisk display With asterisk display
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
##m##cm 12m34cm **m**cm
(2) Stored values for operation log function

Even when the asterisk display is set, actual values (not asterisks) are stored for the operation log.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*2 Precautions for format strings
The following shows precautions for using format strings.

(1) Setting items disabled when format strings are used
• When TrueType font is set, format strings cannot be used.
• Settings of [Digits] in the Device/Style tab is disabled.
• Setting of [Alignment] on the Device/Style tab is disabled and the right alignment is set.
(2) Characters that cannot be displayed for format string
If any character of other than ASCII code (0x20 to 0x7E) is included in the format string when 6x8 dot is set for
font, this character and the following characters are not displayed.
(Fundamentals) Appendix7 ASCII Code List
*3 Display example of format string settings

The following shows display examples where format string settings are used.
Example1: When other than [Real] is set to [Format]
1234 12m34cm
123 1m23cm
##m##cm -
12345 23m45cm
-123 -1m23cm
Example2: When [Real] is set to [Format]

0 m12cm
##m##cm
12m35cm
12.345
####cm 2 1235cm
##.##cm 12.35cm
POINT
Figure frame area
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area

in the specified figure.

Plate area
Figure frame area

1
 Input Case tab
Set the range.
FIGURES
2
Setting list
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Displays the set status for each state.
Setting list
Up to 64 conditions can be set (including the normal case). (The condition No. 0 indicates the normal case)
4
Deletes the state.
CHARACTERS
/ Changes the priority of the states in the setting list.
GRAPHIC
Range Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Display Case tab

The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of conditions, refer to the following.
Preview list
Displays the set status for each condition.

Preview list*1
Up to 64 conditions can be set (including the normal case). (The condition No. 0 indicates the normal case)
Deletes the state.
Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

Bit : Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.
Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Type
Word : Select this item to change the display based on a word device .
After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device
value with the [Exp] button.
Range
Set the value of the word device to change the display.
Device
Condition Set the device status of the bit device. (ON/OFF)
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Plate Color Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Numerical Color Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Shape Settings

*1 State 1
(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Display case] tab
When the state is other than the one set at the [Display case] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on
FIGURES
Example: Monitor device : D100
2
Priority level for
TOUCH SWITCH
State No. Range Color
overlapped setting
High 1 200<=$W<=300 Blue
2 1000<=$W Yellow (Reverse)
3 $W<=0 Red (Blink)
Normal case
Low (State 0)
- Green
3
* $V represents the monitor device value.
When the device value is 200 to 300 (200<=$W<= 300), numeric

State 1 200
LAMP
value will be displayed in blue.
CHARACTERS
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$W), the numeric
State 2 3000
value will be displayed in yellow (reverse).
GRAPHIC
5
When the device value is 0 or less ($W<= 0), the numeric value will
NUMERICAL INPUT
State 3 -200
be displayed in red (blink).
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Normal case
(State 0)
When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the numeric
value will be displayed in green.
150 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Extended tab
Security Level

Display input
When this item is checked, the numeric value input using such as the key window is immediately
value on
reflected to the object on the screen.
destination
(The input value is written to a device after the RET key is touched.)
object location
Select this item for writing the value input in Numerical Input to devices.
Write
When the data operation has been set, the data before operation can be saved.
Select this item for turning on the device after completion of numerical input.
After selecting this item, set the device.
When setting is completed, set the device operation.
ON : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on.
Write Check
Setting items of ON to OFF : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on, and it will be
Numerical turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed.
Input It is very convenient for the case that handshake on the controller side is difficult.
After selecting, set the time for which the bit device is on (0.5 to 3 seconds).
Select this item for setting the user ID number (1 to 65535).

Setting a user ID allows the following functions.
• The cursor position at screen switching can be determined.
User ID*1*2*3 • The numerical input function while the cursor is shown can be checked.
• To specify the used object in the operation log.

1
Select this item for moving the cursor to the specified user ID number numerical input after the
numerical input is completed.
After selecting this item, set the user ID number to where moving the cursor.
FIGURES
After checking, set the user ID No. to move the cursor for the next numerical input.
• Click the [Screen Property] button, and select the [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
Move Destination Select [Prioritize screen setting over project setting] in [Key Window/Cursor Movement].
ID*2 Select [Control the cursor] in [Defined key action]. Set [Move in order of User IDs (not move if it
cannot shift)] in [Cursor Move Destination].
2
• Select the [Advanced Setting] tab from [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Key
TOUCH SWITCH
Window].
Select [Control the cursor] for [Defined key action] in [Key Window/Cursor Movement].
Select [Move in order of User IDs (not move if it cannot shift)] in [Cursor Move Destination].
Setting items of
Numerical Operation Log Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
Input Target 23. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
3
Select this item to enable a numeric value input by barcode reader or RFID.
After selecting this item, select either a barcode reader or RFID to be used. (Bar Code/RFID)
For setting the barcode and RFID function, refer to the following.
Input data using Bar
LAMP
After the settings above, set the following items.
Code/RFID
• Start Position: Set from which byte of the read data is input.
When [Bar Code] is selected : 0 to 3997
When [RFID] is selected : 0 to 19997
4
• Number of Digits: Set the number of digits of the data to be read.
Up to the number of digits set in [Digits] on the [Device/Style] tab can be set.
CHARACTERS
Set a kanji region for the characters to be displayed when setting the format string on the [Device/Style] tab.
GRAPHIC
China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chinese characters.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
KANJI Region
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
This setting is available when any of the following [Font] is selected in the [Device/Style] tab
• 12-dot standard • 316-dot standard
• 12-dot high quality Gothic • 16-dot high quality Gothic
• Stroke 6
Layer
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Category
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following. 7

DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

*1 User ID
Set the [User ID] to enable the following operations.

• Setting of the cursor position for switching the screens
• Storing the numerical input confirmation timing to a device
(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)
• Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs
(2) Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs
(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)

When a input value is entered using the numerical input function, the user ID is written to [Numeric Value Input
Number] in [System Information] and the numeric value input signal (System signal 2-1.b4) turns on.
When clearing the user ID written to the numeric value input number (System signal 2-1.b4) or turning off the
Numeric value input signal (System signal 2-1.b4), turn on the Numeric value input read complete signal.
(After clearing, turn off the numeric value input read complete signal (System signal 1-1.b4). If the signal
remains ON, storing the user ID or turning on the bit device cannot be done even if the numerical value has
been input.)
Key input of numeric value 1 2 Confirm

ON
Numeric value input signal OFF
System signal 2-1. b4
Numeric value input number Stores user ID number Stores "0"

ON
Numeric value input read
OFF
complete signal
System signal 1-1. b4
System signal 2-1.b4 Numeric value input signal : Turn on when a value is entered using the numerical input function.
System signal 1-1.b4 Numeric value read complete signal : When this signal turns on, the numeric value input signal
(System signal 2-1.b4) turns off.
For the setting method of the [System Information], refer to the following.
(2) Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs
It is possible to move the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs by using the key code switches
indicated below.
(a) Cursor movement in the ascending order of user IDs (key code: 0092H)
10 0
1)
User ID: 1 User ID: 2 0
2) 3) User ID:4
0 0
User ID: 3 User ID:2
Cursor does not move to this object since the same

ID is used for another object.
If there is a duplication of user ID, the cursor moves
to the object having the smallest object ID.
The cursor moves in the order of 1) 2) 3).

After movement 3), the cursor does not move any more since there are no further user IDs.

(b) Cursor movement in the descending order of user IDs((key code: 0093H) 1
0 0
3)
10
FIGURES
User ID: 1 User ID: 2
2) 1) User ID:4
0 0
2
TOUCH SWITCH
The cursor moves in the order of 1) 2) 3). 3
*2 Relationship between user ID and move destination ID
The move destination ID number indicates the user ID number of the numerical input function to which the cursor
moves next.
LAMP
Example: Cursor movement by move destination ID
4
Move destination
Numerical input User ID
1) ID
A 10 B 0
CHARACTERS
2) A 1 2
GRAPHIC
B 2 3
4)
3) C 3 4
C 0 D 0
5
D 4 1
NUMERICAL INPUT
*3 Setting the user ID
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully so that the
user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
6
• When different user IDs are set for each object • When the same user ID are set for all If more
The cursor moves properly with the user ID than one object having the same user ID are
when the Set Overlay Screen function or identified on the screen (including the Set
superimposed window is used. Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window), the ASCII DISPLAY/
cursor may not move correctly with the user ID. ASCII INPUT
2 1
Window screen 1
1 1
Window screen 1
7
1 to 4 : User ID 1 to 2 : User ID
C 0 A 128 C 0 A 128
DATA LIST
3 4 2 2
D 0 B 0 D 0 B 0
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Trigger tab

Trigger Type (For GT10, [Range] and [Bit Trigger] cannot be selected.)
Ordinary
ON
Settings OFF For details of each item, refer to the following.
Range
Bit Trigger

1
function.
FIGURES
(1) Data operation
(Fundamentals) 5.3.9 Data operation setting 2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Select this item to set the mask operation.After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern
value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Right : Right shift
DISPLAY/
Select an operational expression format for data operation.

Data
Operation*1
Monitor Click on this and set the operational expression for monitoring device. (None/Data Expression) 6
Write Click on this and set the operational expression for writing to device. (None/Data Expression)
ASCII DISPLAY/
*1 With GT10, the decimal point is rounded down with the operation including the division or decimals when [Format] on the
ASCII INPUT
Extended tab is set to other than the real number.
HINT
Division with adjusting decimal point range
7
The device values in the GT10 are divided by 10n only when [Adjust Decimal Point Range] and [Decimal Point] are
set on the Basic tab. (Numbers of decimal place are not rounded down.)
Example) When using the data operation for GT10 When using the adjust decimal point range for GT10
DATA LIST
Device: 1265 Device: 1265

Decimal point: 0 Decimal point: 2
Adjust decimal point range: No Adjust decimal point range: Yes
Data operation: $$ (Device value) /100 Data operation: No
8
12.00 12.65
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
The GOT displays 12.00. The GOT displays 12.65.

(2) Input object script
For details of input script settings, refer to the following.

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
y 4)
- -
width
height
decimal_point 3)
Numerical Color text_color 3)
Blink blink 5)
Security Level(Display) security 4)

Extended
Security Level(Input) input_security 2)


(3) Display object script

1
FIGURES
For details of settings made on the display object script, refer to the following
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
active 1)
x 4)
- -
y 4) 6
width
ASCII DISPLAY/
height
ASCII INPUT
decimal_point 3)
Numerical Color text_color 3)

7
Blink blink 5)
Device/Style
Reverse highlight 5)
DATA LIST
8
Extended Security Level(Display) security 4)
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY


The numerical display/numerical input is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.

Checking the input range when a numerical value is input.
• [Check the input range while entering numerical
values]

Displaying the input range when a numeric value out of input range is input.
• [Display the valid input range when an invalid
value is input in Numerical Input]

• [Cursor]


Enabling/disabling the key window for each screen.
• [Automatically move the key window when it
overlaps with an input object]
Set in the following item in [Basic Setting] tab/[Key

Check this option when displaying the value being input on the key window. Window Basic Setting] tab.
• [Display value during input]

Check this option when displaying the applicable data input range on the key window. Window Basic Setting] tab.
• [Display input function range]

Displays the dialog for confirming input data when the RTN key is pressed. (Specific [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
to numeric value input or ASCII input) • [Display the cursor with a touch on the Enter/
arrow key when the cursor is hidden]

1

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
FIGURES
input, by touching the RTN key. • [Display the input confirmation dialog when
setting the function of Numerical/ASCII Input]

• [Key Window]
2
TOUCH SWITCH
• [Display the key window]

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/ 3

Selecting the cursor display method for numeric input and ASCII input. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Cursor Type]

Displaying the key window as soon as the touch input is detected; erasing key [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
window when the RET key is touched. • [Key Window]
LAMP
• [Defined key action]

Setting the input order when multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input
are provided.
[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab. 4
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area automatically.
• [Reference for determining cursor destination]
CHARACTERS
Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and
Window Basic Setting] tab.
GRAPHIC
ASCII input.
• [Key Window]
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Clearing the cursor information such as cursor display object ID and cursor display [Clear the cursor information when deleting the
user ID when the cursor is deleted. cursor]
Notifying the value before changed by the the numeric value input function (32 bits).
[Previous Numeric Value Input(32bit)]
(Write device)
Notifying the value determined by the numeric value input function (32 bits).
[Current Numeric Value Input(32bit)]
(Write device)
Notifying the determined numerical value input.

[system Signal 2-1]
(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b4)
Notifying the user ID of the determined numeric value input.

[Numeric Value Input Number]
(Write device)
Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
[Previous Cursor Display Object ID]
previous time. (Write device)
Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the previous
[Previous Cursor Display User ID]
time. (Write device)
Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered by
[Key Code Input]
Notifying that the key window is on the screen.

[system Signal 2-1]
Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3) [system Signal 1-1]
Turning off the numerical value input signal

[system Signal 1-1]
(Read device: System Signal 1-1.b4)
Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently. (Write
[Current Cursor Display Object ID]
device)
Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently. (Write
[Current Cursor Display User ID]
device)
Notifying that the cursor is being displayed by the numeric/ASCII value input. (Write
[system Signal 2-2]
device: System Signal 2-2.b11)
Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9) [system Signal 1-1]
Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3) [system Signal 2-1]
Notifying that a value out of the range is stored.

[system Signal 2-1]

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are input
GS450.b0
by touching the RTN key. (Read device)
Checking the input range when a numerical value is input

GS450.b1
(Read device)
Storing “0” at the current cursor position of the system information when the cursor
GS450.b3
disappears. (Read device)
Notifying that the object is in the ready state for the data read by barcode reader or
GS243.b15
RFID to be directly input. (Write device)

1
5.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the numerical display/numerical input function.
FIGURES
(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on 1 screen
• Number of numerical display objects : 1000 2
• Number of numerical input objects : 1000
(2) Overlaying numerical display with level display
TOUCH SWITCH
• Arrange the numerical display on the same layer as the level.
• When overlaying the numerical display with the level display, refer to the precautions for the level.
12. LEVEL
(3) Numerical input arrange position (Other than GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12, GT1020, and GT 3
SoftGOT1000)
Depending on the arranged position of the numerical input, there are cases the input operation is not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the numerical input by the
data check function of GT Designer3.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
LAMP
(Fundamentals) 3.13 Data Check
4
If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1. Change the grid to 16 dots pitch in the screen of GT Designer3.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
2. Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer3
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
1234 ASCII INPUT
1234
7
Input operation is not possible Arrange an object so that it includes the

unless the center point of 16-dot grids center point of 16-dot grids.
DATA LIST
is included in the position where an

object is arranged.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


(1) When numerical input is set on window screen
When the numeric input objects are simultaneously displayed on the base screen and overlap window, the input
cursor that is displayed by other than touch operation (key window display by special function switch, etc.) will
appear on the overlap window.
D10 150
D10 20 0
D30 0
D40 0
To display the cursor on the numerical input of the base screen, touch the numerical input of the base screen.
(2) When special function switch (key window) is set

If a key window is displayed using a special function switch when an input cursor is not displayed at a numerical
input, the key window will be displayed as follows;
(a) For standard key window
A standard key window for decimal input is displayed.
(b) For user-created key window
The screen set at [Window Screen No. for DEC] is displayed.
When [Window Screen No. for DEC] is not set (or is set to "0"), a standard key window for decimal input is
displayed.
(3) Blink display

The input cursor will stop blinking temporarily when it is displayed.
(4) [ON and OFF] is set in [Write Check]

(a) Don't turn on twenty-one devices above simultaneously.
Or not, the 22nd device or later cannot be turned off automatically.
(b) At using the same write completed device for multiple numerical inputs, set the numerical input to not be
able to input the value while the write completed device is ON.
Setting example : Set the operation condition to trigger type "OFF" and the device "M10"

At inputting before turning OFF, the write completed device will not turn OFF at normal timing. 1
Example : Write completed device: M10 (which turns OFF in 3 seconds after it turned ON)
Numerical input A 0 400
FIGURES
Numerical input B 0 100
OFF timing of numerical input B 2
ON Actual OFF timing
Write completed
OFF
TOUCH SWITCH
device (M10)
3 seconds
(c) The write completed device will not turn OFF if screen switching (including switching to the utility) occurs
while the write completed device is ON. It keeps ON for the specified period of time.
3
 Executing the range check during numerical value input
For precautions of executing range check during numerical value input, refer to the following.
(1) Precautions for screen design
LAMP
(a) When more than two states are set, the range check will be disabled during the numerical value input. The
check is executed when the input is determined. 4
(b) Use any of the following patterns to set the range formula for states.
If the pattern other than below is used to set the range formula, the range check will be executed when the
CHARACTERS
input is determined.
GRAPHIC
• $W<A, $W<=A
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
A : Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
• A<$W<B, A<=$W<B, A<$W<=B, A<=$W<=B 5
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
NUMERICAL INPUT
A : Fixed value or other device
B : Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
(c) When input range and display range are set separately
Only the input range will be checked.
(2) Precautions for operation
(a) Inputting negative value (-) 6
Enter the minus sign (-), and then the numerical value.
(b) The lower limit value check
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
The lower limit value check is executed when the input is determined.
(c) Comparison with device
When the value of the comparison target device cannot be read, a message will appear.
(d) Cursor movement
When cursor is moved within the object during numerical value input, the range check will not be executed
7
during input.
The range check will be executed when the input is determined.
To enable the range check during input, hide the cursor (after the numerical input mode is released) and
DATA LIST
input a numerical value again.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Precautions for input confirmation message display

(1) Number of digits for numeric value available for message
Depending on GOT types, the numeric value digits available for display is different.
The digits after the following will not be displayed on the message. Make sure that the digits of the input value
are within the following.
• GT16, GT15 (excluding GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q), GT SoftGOT1000 : 35 digits
• GT15 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT14, GT12, GT11 : 23 digits
Example) GT11
Do you want to change
to the following value?
12345678901234567890123 4567890
The 24th digits or later
OK Cancel are not displayed.
* Any input confirmation message is displayed for GT10.
(2) Message position

The message position will be different depending on the key window type.
(a) When using standard key window
The message is displayed on the key window.
(b) When using user-created key window or no key window
The message is displayed on the center of the screen.
 Precautions for using barcode reader and RFID

(1) Required setting
To enable the numerical input function by barcode reader or RFID, setting for the barcode or RFID function is
required.
32. RFID FUNCTION
(2) When data are read by barcode reader or RFID during numeric value input using key window
The read data are input or are not input depending on the operation as follows.
(a) The data read by the barcode reader or RFID are not input during displaying a dialog box.
(b) Numeric values currently being input by the key window are discarded, and the data read by the barcode
reader or RFID are input except during displaying a dialog box.
(3) When the key is touched during input process of data read by barcode reader or RFID
The key touch operation becomes invalid and the data read by barcode reader or RFID are input while an input
of the data read by barcode reader or RFID is in process.
(4) When data are not numerical, or when the number of bytes in data is less than the specified start
position
When the data read by barcode reader or RFID are not numerical (including when [Format] is not applicable to
the read data), or when the number of bytes in the read data is less than the one set for [Start Position], the read
data are not input.

1
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
 ASCII display
6.1 Setting ASCII Display
The ASCII display is the function that processes the data stored in a word device as a text code (ASCII code, GB
code, and KS code) to display a text string.
3
QX 40 QX 42
LAMP
D12 5851H (XQ) D12 5851H (XQ)
D13 3420H (4 ) D13 3420H (4 ) 4
D14 0030H (0) D14 0032H (2)
 ASCII input
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
6.2 Setting ASCII Input
The ASCII input is the function that writes an input text into a word device in a text code (ASCII code, GB code, and
KS code).
(1) Inputting text by input keys
5
Use input keys provided in the key window or touch switches assigned with key codes.
NUMERICAL INPUT
(a) Input from the touch switches arranged on the screen
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
ABC ABCD
6
A B DEL A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CC C D E F - ESC
CCCC
(b) Input from the key window

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
ABC ABCD
7
Input a text Using the Write key (key code: 000DH),
write the input text in text code
D10 0000H D10 4241H (BA)
DATA LIST
D11 0000H D11 4443H (DC)

*1 For key window types and operation, refer to the following.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
6-1

(2) Inputting text by barcode reader or RFID

Barcode
ABCDE
ABCD E
A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CC
Barcode Reader Text is input to

the touched ASCII input object.
*1 For setting the barcode and RFID function, refer to the following.
HINT
Text code change
For text codes used for the ASCII display and ASCII input, the text codes are changed by the text code format
control (GS456).
For details of the text code format control (GS456), refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS)
6-2

1
6.1 Setting ASCII Display
FIGURES
1. Select [Object] [ASCII Display/Input] [ASCII Display] from the menu.
2
2. Click the position where the ASCII display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
TOUCH SWITCH
3. Double click the arranged ASCII display to display the setting dialog box.
This tab is used to select ASCII display or ASCII input, and set the device and view format (font, text size, digits,
display frame, shape) 3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Type Select the function to be used (ASCII Display/ASCII Input)
Device Set the head bit device where text code is stored 6
Set the number of digits (1 to 100) for the text to be displayed/input.
Digits The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:
ASCII DISPLAY/
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Select the text position. ASCII INPUT

Alignment
Font Select a font.

• 6 8dot font • 12 dot standard font*1 • 16 dot standard font
• Stroke*2 7
Text Size
Text Settings
Text Color Select the color of text to be displayed.
DATA LIST
Display the text to

be shown on the
Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.
screen with
8
asterisk

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
6.1 Setting ASCII Display 6-3

Blink Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High)
Text Settings Blink Scope Select the range to blink.(Text only/Text and Plate)
Reverse Select this item for reversing the text.

By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures
can be selected as shape.
Shape
GOT display
Shape Settings

frame area is not displayed. the data remains in
Select the frame color and plate color.

Frame Color
Frame color
ABCDEFG
Plate color
Plate Color
Preview Text Select the text to be displayed on the preview shape.
Object Name
POINT
Figure frame area


Plate area
Figure frame area
6-4 6.1 Setting ASCII Display

1
 Extended tab
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
Security Level
4
CHARACTERS
Extended
GRAPHIC
Display in order of
Select this item for displaying text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.
High -> Low
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Layer
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Category
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Trigger tab
This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.

Trigger Type When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Rise • Fall • Sampling • Range • Bit Trigger
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
6-6 6.1 Setting ASCII Display

1
 Script tab
FIGURES
30.3 Object Script
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
: Execution is possible for the object property. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
6
width
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
height
Text Size (X) text_width 4)
Text Size (Y) text_height 4)
Text Color text_color 3) 7

Blink blink 5)

DATA LIST

8
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY


1. Select [Object] [ASCII Display/Input] [ASCII Input] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the ASCII input is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged ASCII input to display the setting dialog box.
HINT
Key window setting
For the input by a key window, the user can select the standard key window or user-created key window in the
This tab is used to select ASCII display or ASCII input, and set the device and view format (font, text size, digits,
display frame, shape)
Type Select the function to be used (ASCII Display/ASCII Input)
Device Set the head bit device where text code is stored
Set the number of digits (1 to 100) for the text to be displayed/input.

Digits The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Display Select the display position for the text to be displayed.

6-8 6.2 Setting ASCII Input


1
Select the display position for the text to be input.
Input Alignment
FIGURES
For inputting character strings, if the number of input characters is less than the number specified for [Digits] in the
[Device/Style] tab, it is possible to select the ASCII code that fill the blank area from the followings.
Space (0x20) : Secures the blank area as space.
If this option is selected, and of [Display Alignment] cannot be selected.
2
Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for [Digits] is "7"
TOUCH SWITCH
Character string A B C (SP) (SP) (SP) (SP)
Input Character
ASCII code (0x41) (0x42) (0x43) (0x20) (0x20) (0x20) (0x20)
String Terminal
NULL (0x00) : Stores NULL (0x00) at the first digit place following the input character string.
The character string preceding the NULL is taken as valid data and characters that follow
NULL are indefinite and thus disregarded.
Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for [Digits] is "7"
3
Character string A B C (NULL) - - -
ASCII code (0x41) (0x42) (0x43) (0x0) - - -
Font Select a font.
LAMP
(When [16dot Standard] is selected, [Text Size] cannot be set to [0.5].)
• 6 8dot font • 12 dot standard font • 16 dot standard font • Stroke
Text Size For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following: 4
Text Color Select the color of text to be displayed.
CHARACTERS
Text Settings Display the text to
GRAPHIC
be shown on the
Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.
screen with
asterisk*1
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High) 5

Blink Scope Select the range to blink.(Text only/Text and Plate)
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures
can be selected as shape.
6
When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly
display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Shape Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
GOT display
Shape Settings

Figure frame area overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.
displayed before updating
the data remains in 7
Frame Color Select the frame color and plate color.
Frame color
DATA LIST
Plate Color ABCDEFG Plate color
Preview Text Select the text to be displayed on the preview shape.
Object Name
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
6.2 Setting ASCII Input 6-9

*1 Precautions for asterisk display

Values that are displayed as asterisks
String characters and control characters (other than "NULL") are displayed as asterisks.
Because control characters are displayed as asterisks, the number of displayed asterisks differs according to
the input character string terminal settings.
Example: When the number of digits is set to six for [Digits], and the is set for [Display Alignment].
Input character string terminal

Without asterisk display With asterisk display
settings
Space (0x20) ABCD ******
NULL (0x00) ABCD ****
(1) Stored character strings for operation log function

Even when the asterisk display is set, actual character strings (not asterisks) are stored for the operation log.
(2) Kana-kanji conversion function
When the asterisk display is used, the Kana-kanji conversion function is not available.
Even when GS450.b4 turns on, the function is not available.
POINT
Figure frame area


Plate area
Figure frame area
6 - 10 6.2 Setting ASCII Input

1
 Extended tab
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
Display input value When this item is checked, the numeric value input using such as the key window is immediately
on destination reflected to the object on the screen.
object location (The input value is written to a device after the RET key is touched.)
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Security Level

5
After selecting this item, set the offset device.
NUMERICAL INPUT
Use Offset
NUMERICAL
Display in order of
DISPLAY/
Select this item for displaying text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.
High -> Low
Select this item for setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535)

By setting the user ID, the following operations are available.
Extended
• Decides the cursor display position when switching screen. 6
User ID*1*2 • Confirms the ASCII input definition timing using PLC CPU.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting ASCII DISPLAY/
• To specify the used object in the operation log. ASCII INPUT
Select this item for moving the cursor to the ASCII input specified by the user ID no. after an
Move Destination
ID *1*3
ASCII input is defined. 7
After selecting the item, set the user ID No. for the ASCII input to which the cursor is moved.
DATA LIST
Select this item to use the Kanji conversion function.

KANA KANJI 6.6 Precautions
Conversion This item is not available when [Display the text to be shown on the screen with asterisk] on the
[Device/Style] tab is selected. 8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
6.2 Setting ASCII Input 6 - 11

Select this item to enable / an input of the text read by barcode reader or RFID / a text input by
barcode reader or RFID.
For setting the barcode and RFID function, refer to the following.
Input data using Bar
Extended After the settings above, set the following items.
Code/RFID
• Start Position: Set from which byte of the read data is input.
When [Bar Code] is selected : 0 to 3997
When [RFID] is selected : 0 to 19997
• Number of Digits: Set the number of digits of the data to be read.
Up to the number of digits set in [Digits] on the [Device/Style] tab can be set.

Layer

Category
*1 Relation between User ID and Move Destination ID
The destination ID No. indicates the user ID No. of ASCII input function to which the cursor will move.
Example: Cursor movement to the destination ID
Move Destination
ASCII input User ID
1) ID
A AB C B DEF
2) A 1 2
B 2 3
4)
3) C 3 4
C GHI D JKL
D 4 1
*2 Moving the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs
It is possible to move the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs by using the key code switches
indicated below.
(a) Cursor movement in the ascending order of user IDs (key code: 0092H)
AB C DEF
1)
User ID: 1 User ID: 2 JKL
2) 3) User ID:4
GHI DEF


Cursor movement in the descending order of user IDs (key code: 0093H) 1
ABC DEF
3)
User ID: 1 User ID: 2 JKL
FIGURES
2) 1) User ID:4
GHI DEF
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
*3 Setting the user ID
To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully so that the
LAMP
user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
• When different user IDs are set for each object • When the same user ID are set for all If more 4
The cursor moves properly with the user ID than one object having the same user ID are
when the Set Overlay Screen function or identified on the screen (including the Set
superimposed window is used. Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window), the
CHARACTERS
cursor may not move correctly with the user ID.
GRAPHIC
Base screen 1
Base screen 1
Window screen 1
2 1 Window screen 1
1 to 4 : User ID
C DEF A AB C
1 1
1 to 2 : User ID 5
C DEF A AB C
NUMERICAL INPUT
3 4
NUMERICAL
2 2
D GHI B JKM
DISPLAY/
D GHI B JKM
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

 Trigger tab
This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.

Trigger Type
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Range
Bit Trigger

1
 Script tab
FIGURES
For details of input script settings, refer to the following.
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Write*1
DISPLAY/
Tab name Setting item Property name Read
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
6
width
ASCII DISPLAY/
height
Text Size (X) text_width 4) ASCII INPUT
Text Color text_color 3)
Blink blink 5)
7

DATA LIST
Security Level (Display) security 4)

8
Extended
HISTORICAL DATA
Security Level (Input) input_security 2)

LIST DISPLAY


For details of settings made on the display object script, refer to the following
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Blink blink 5)


1
The ASCII display/ASCII input are available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FIGURES

2
TOUCH SWITCH
on GOT GT Designer3] 3
LAMP
4
[Output object ID of ASCII Input to the system

Outputting the input signal/input number when ASCII characters are input.
CHARACTERS
information device]
GRAPHIC
Clearing the cursor information such as cursor display object ID and cursor display [Clear the cursor information when deleting the
user ID when the cursor is deleted. cursor]
Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3) [System Signal 1-1]
Turning off the numeric value input signal. (Read device: System signal 1-1.b4) [System Signal 1-1] 5
Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9) [System Signal 1-1]
NUMERICAL INPUT
Notifying the key input. (Write device: System Signal 2-1.b3) [System Signal 2-1]
NUMERICAL
Notifying the determined numerical value input.
[System Signal 2-1]
DISPLAY/
(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b4))
Notifying that the key window is on the screen.

[System Signal 2-1]
Notifying that the cursor is being displayed by the numeric/ASCII value input. (Write
[System Signal 2-2]
6
device: System Signal 2-2.b11)
Notifying the user ID of the determined numeric value input. (Write device) [Numeric Value Input Number]
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Notifying the ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently.
[Current Cursor Display Object ID]
(Write device)
Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
[Previous Cursor Display Object ID]
previous time. (Write device)
Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently. (Write
[Current Cursor Display User ID]
7
device)
Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the previous
[Previous Cursor Display User ID]
time. (Write device)
DATA LIST
Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered by
[Key Code Input]
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


• [Key Window]

• [Display the key window]


• [Cursor]


Selecting the cursor display method for numeric input and ASCII input. [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
• [Cursor Type]

Displaying the key window as soon as the touch input is detected; erasing key [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
window when the RET key is touched. • [Key Window]
Set the following item in the [Key Window

Setting the input order when multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are
Advanced Setting] tab.
provided.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area automatically.
• [Reference for determining cursor destination]
Set the following item in the [Basic Setting] tab/

Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and ASCII
[Key Window Basic Setting] tab.
input.
• [Key Window]

Enabling/disabling the key window for each screen.
• [Automatically move the key window when it
overlaps with an input object]

It is possible to set whether the cursor is displayed or remains hidden when the RET [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
key or an arrow key is pressed while the cursor is hidden. • [Display the cursor with a touch on the Enter/
arrow key when the cursor is hidden]

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are input, [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
by touching the RTN key. • [Display the input confirmation dialog when
setting the function of Numerical/ASCII Input]

6.3.4 GOT internal device 1
FIGURES
Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are input
GS450.b0
by touching the RTN key. (Read device)
Storing "0" at the current cursor position of the system information when the cursor
2
GS450.b3
disappears. (Read device)
TOUCH SWITCH
Converting the Kana text input in ASCII to Kanji. (Read device) GS450.b4
GS243.b15
Changing text codes to be used for the ASCII display and ASCII input.
GS456
(Read device)
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

6.4 Actions
 Text code reading/writing order
The text code reading/writing order can be selected according to the specifications of the controller to be monitored.
(1) Reading/writing in order from lower byte to higher byte
Text codes are read/written in reverse order of every 8 bits.
(Default setting)
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII codes "41 (A)", "42 (B)" are displayed)
Set device ASCII display
L 41H AB
D10
H 42H
(4142H)
(4241H)
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte
(2) Reading/writing in order from higher byte to lower byte

Text codes are read or written in the order from the higher byte to the lower byte.
(Select the item [Display in order of High -> Low] in the [Extended] tab.
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII code "41(A)","42(b)" are displayed)
Device ASCII display
L 41H AB
D10
H 42H
(4142H) (4142H)
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte
 Number of display digits and available devices

One word device is used for ASCII display/ASCII input every two display digits.
Example: Set device (head device) : D1
Number of display digits : 3
Two word devices D1 and D2 are used.
6 - 20 6.4 Actions

1
 Examples of the ASCII display and the ASCII input
The following shows the examples when displaying and entering the shift JIS codes 8E4H( 三 ) and 9548( 菱 ).
Example 1) ASCII display
FIGURES
Displaying the ASCII display in order of the lower byte to the higher byte
1) Set device : D1
2) Number of displayed digits : 3
Set device
ASCII display 2
L 8EH The character is
三
TOUCH SWITCH
D1 (三) not displayed
H 4FH
L 95H
D2 (菱)
H 48H
L: Lower byte 3
H: Higher byte
Example 2) ASCII input
Displaying the ASCII input in order of the lower byte to the higher byte
1) Set device : D1
LAMP
2) Number of displayed digits : 3
An error message is
Set device
ASCII display displayed and the
character cannot be input.
4
L 8EH
D1 三
(三)
H 4FH
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
L 20H(Space)
D2
(The value is
H not stored.)
L: Lower byte
H: Higher byte 三菱 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Key code 4F8EH 4895H
（三）（菱）
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
6.4 Actions 6 - 21

6.5 Useful Operations/Functions

6.5.1 Kana-kanji conversion function
This function converts hiragana characters entered with the ASCII input into kanji characters.
To convert hiragana characters into kanji characters, touch the touch switch that the key code for the kana-kanji
conversion is set.
せいさんせいさん生産
変換変換変換
Enter hiragana characters Touch the [変換] switch. The hiragana characters are
with the ASCII input. converted into the kanji characters.
 Before using the Kana-kanji conversion function

The Kana-kanji conversion function has the following two types.
Function Description
Converts a chain phrase (a group of two or more words).

Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version)
Displays the conversion option in the option selection window.
Kana-kanji conversion Converts only minimal phrase.
Before using the Kana-kanji conversion function, check the setting of the required equipment, the OS, and the GOT.
(1) Required equipment and OS
For the required equipment and the OS of the Kana-kanji conversion function, refer to the following.
6.6 Precautions
(2) GOT setting
To use the Kana-kanji conversion function, touch the [Language] button on the main menu of the utility and
select [ 日本語 ] on the [Select Language] screen.
For how to start and operate the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual for the GOT used
<Example of the message display setting>
Touch the upper left corner of the screen. Touch the [Language] button on Set [日本語] for the message display.
the main menu of the utility.(GT16)
6 - 22 6.5 Useful Operations/Functions

1
 Specifications of the Kana-kanji conversion function
The following shows the specifications of the Kana-kanji conversion function.
(1) Specification list of the Kana-kanji conversion function
FIGURES
Specifications
Item
Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version) Kana-kanji conversion
Applicable GOT GT16, GT15 GT15 2

Hiragana input (Phrases that include katakana Hiragana input (Katakana characters and Roman letters
Input mode
TOUCH SWITCH
characters and Roman letters cannot be converted.) cannot be converted.)
Input method of
Entering characters with a touch switch (Key code switch)
characters
Converting characters when the characters entered as a Converting characters when the characters entered as a
Conversion method minimal phrase or a chain phrase match with the minimal phrase match with the dictionary data
dictionary data completely. completely.*1 3
Displaying one conversion option for the first conversion,
Display method of
and displaying the conversion options in the option Displaying the conversion option in the ASCII input one
the conversion
selection window for the second or subsequent by one
*2
option
conversion*3
Character Two-byte character, one-byte character
LAMP
Number of input
Up to 80 bytes (40 characters)
bytes and characters
4
Number of bytes and
characters for Up to 40 bytes (20 characters) Up to 24 bytes (12 characters)
conversion
CHARACTERS
Dictionary data Supporting JIS 1st level Kanji and JIS 2nd level Kanji
GRAPHIC
Learning function Available Not available
*1 :A chain phrase (a group of two or more words) cannot be converted.
*2
Words that are not in the dictionary data cannot be converted.
:This method displays the conversion option. 5
The following shows the differences between the Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version) and the Kana-kanji
NUMERICAL INPUT
conversion function.
Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version)
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
みつびし三菱三菱
三菱
ミツビシ
6
みつびし
次ﾐﾂﾋﾞｼ
次
One conversion option is The option selection window is

ASCII DISPLAY/
displayed for the first conversion. displayed for the second or
ASCII INPUT
subsequent conversion.
Kana-kanji conversion function
みつびし三菱ミツビシ
7
次次次
DATA LIST
Touch the [次] switch to display the option selections

one by one. (The option selection window is not displayed.)
*3 :The option selection window is not available for the GT1555-Q and the GT1550-Q.
The conversion options are displayed in the ASCII display one by one.
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
6.5 Useful Operations/Functions 6 - 23

(2) Specifications of the operation switch

A touch switch used for the Kana-kanji conversion function operates when the key code is assigned to the
switch.
To create the touch switch by the user, refer to the following key codes shown as below.
Specifications
Item Key code
Hiragana
Hiragana input Shift JIS code
characters
Moves the cursor to the left by one character to shorten Moves the cursor to the left by one
＜ 0091
the phrase. character.
Moves the cursor to the right by one character to expand Moves the cursor to the right by one
＞ 0090
the phrase. character.
DEL Deletes the rightmost character of the entered character string. 0008
CLR Deletes characters being entered. 0088
変換 Converts the hiragana characters into kanji characters. 0084
Displays one conversion option for the first conversion,

前 and displays the conversion options in the option selection Displays the preceding conversion option. 0085
window for the second or subsequent conversion.

次 and displays the conversion options in the option selection Displays the next conversion option.
0086
候補 and displays the conversion options in the option selection -
選択 - Confirms characters being entered.

0087
＞＞ Selects the next phrase. -
＜＜ Selects the preceding phrase. - 0089
確定 Writes the confirmed characters into a device. 000D
POINT
Touch switches for the Kana-kanji conversion function
In the GT Designer3 library, the touch switches that the key code switches assigned are registered.
Use the touch switches to easily create a screen for the kana-kanji conversion.
Character input switch
Operation switch
Library

(3) Specifications of the learning function

1
The Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version) enables the GOT to learn the conversion results.
Therefore, the user enters character strings efficiently. (No setting is required for the learning function.)
The GOT keeps the learning results until the GOT is turned off or reset.
FIGURES
Item Specifications
Word length available for the learning function Up to 40 bytes (20 characters)
Number of words available for the learning

Up to 1000 words (The number of words varies according to the word length.)
2
function
TOUCH SWITCH
 Settings required for the Kana-kanji conversion function
The following shows the settings required for the Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version) and the Kana-
kanji conversion function.
: Applicable : Not applicable
Function 3
Setting Kana-kanji conversion Reference
Kana-kanji conversion
(enhanced version)
Selecting [KANA KANJI Conversion] of the

6.2 Extended tab
[Extended] tab in the [ASCII Input] dialog box*1
LAMP
[Option Selection Window] in the
[Environmental Setting] dialog box*2
[Option Selection] tab in the [Display Properties]

(2) Setting item 4
dialog box*2
CHARACTERS
*1 If [KANA KANJI Conversion] of the [Extended] tab in the [ASCII Input] dialog box is not selected, the Kana-kanji conversion
function is available by turning on GS450.b4.
GRAPHIC
Example) By using the status observation function, turning on the GOT and then turning on GS450.b4
Set the GOT internal device (Always on device: GS0.b4) for the trigger condition by using the status observation function.
Set GS450.b4 to on while the device of the trigger condition is on.
After the GOT turns on, the status observation function turns on GS450.b4.
• Configure the setting on the [Project] tab in the [Status
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Observation] dialog box.
• Configure the setting in the first row of the setting field in the
[Status Observation] dialog box. (GS450.b4 turns on
NUMERICAL
immediately after the GOT turns on.)
DISPLAY/
• Set [Observation Cycle] to [Ordinary].
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
*2 Configure the setting only when using [Option Selection Window] for the Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version).
(1) Setting
(a) When setting the option selection window per project 7
1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [KANA KANJI Conversion] from the menu.
2. The setting dialog box appears. Configure the setting by referring to (a) in (2).
DATA LIST
(b) When setting the option selection window per screen
1. Select the screen and then select [Screen] [Display Properties] from the menu.
2. The setting dialog box appears. Click the [Option Selection] tab to configure the setting by referring to
8
(b) in (2).
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(2) Setting item

(a) When setting the option selection window per project
Item*1 Description
Use the option selection window Select this item to set the option selection window.
Background Color Select the background color of the option selection window. (White, Black)
Select the keys displayed on the option selection window.

Scroll • Page + Line Scroll: Displays the keys to scroll windows by page and row.
• Page Scroll: Displays the keys to scroll the window by page.
Preview Previews the items selected for [Background Color] and [Scroll].
*1 Not available for the GT1555-Q and the GT1550-Q.
(b) When setting the option selection window per screen
Item*1 Description
Prioritize screen setting over project setting Select this item to set the option selection window per screen.
This item is available when [Prioritize screen setting over project setting] is selected.
Use the option selection window
Select this item to use the option selection window.
Background Color Select the background color of the option selection window. (White, Black)
Select the keys displayed on the option selection window.

Scroll • Page + Line Scroll: Displays the keys to scroll windows by page and row.
• Page Scroll: Displays the keys to scroll the window by page.
Preview Previews the items selected for [Background Color] and [Scroll].
*1 Not available for the GT1555-Q and the GT1550-Q.

1
 Operation switch actions for the conversion
The following shows the examples and the actions of the operation switches for the conversion.
Image Action*1
FIGURES
(Key code)
Converts the character string.
みつびし三菱
2
変換
変換
TOUCH SWITCH
(0084) Undoes the preceding character string after the conversion.
三菱みつびし
変換
Displays the preceding conversion option after the conversion.

前 3
電機電気
(0085) 前
Displays the next conversion option after the conversion. (Only the first touch for the Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced
version))
LAMP
電機伝記
次
Displays the option selection window during the conversion. 4

(Configure the setting for the option selection window.
Settings required for the Kana-kanji conversion
CHARACTERS
次 / 候補 function (2) Setting item)
(0086)
GRAPHIC
三菱三菱
候補
-
三菱
ミツビシ
5
みつびし
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Confirms the entered character string for the minimal phrase and enters the next character string.
三菱三菱
選択
＞＞ / 選択
6
Selects the next phrase for the chain phrase.
(0087) (The confirmed phrase cannot be selected.)
ASCII DISPLAY/
-
三菱でんき三菱でんき
ASCII INPUT
＞＞
Selects the preceding phrase.

(The confirmed phrase cannot be selected.)
＜＜
(0089) 三菱でんき三菱でんき
- 7
＜＜

DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

Image Action*1
(Key code)
Writes only entered characters into the device while the character string is entered.
みつびしみつびし
確定
Writes the displayed character string into the device during the conversion.
確定
三菱三菱
(000D) 確定
Writes the character string into the device after the string is confirmed or selected.
三菱三菱
確定
Deletes the rightmost character and shifts the entire characters to the right by one character while the character string is
entered.
みつびしみつび
DEL
Undoes the preceding character string during the conversion.

DEL
三菱みつびし
(0008) DEL
Deletes the rightmost character and shifts the entire characters to the right by one character after the character string is
selected or confirmed.
三菱三
DEL
Deletes all characters while the character string is entered.
三菱でんき
CLR
Deletes only character string during the conversion.

CLR
三菱電機三菱
(0088) CLR
Deletes all characters after the character string is confirmed or selected.
三菱電機
CLR
Moves the cursor to the left by one character after the character string is confirmed or selected.
三菱三菱
(0091) Shortens the phrase by one character during the conversion.
みつびしみつびし -
Moves the cursor to the right by one character after the character string is confirmed or selected.
三菱三菱
(0090) Extends the phrase by one character during the conversion.
みつびしみつびし -
*1 The character string enclosed with the dotted line shows that the character string is being entered or converted.
The highlighted character string is ready for conversion.

1
 Conversion method on the GOT and precautions
(1) Conversion of a chain phrase
(a) Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version)
FIGURES
The Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version) converts a chain phrase.
Example) To enter " 生産ライン "

Enter " せいさんらいん " and convert the character string. 2
TOUCH SWITCH
せいさんらいん生産ライン
変換変換
Touch the 変換 switch. Convert "せいさん"

and "らいん" separately.
3
(b) Kana-kanji conversion
The Kana-kanji conversion only converts a minimal phrase.
Example) To enter " 生産ライン "
LAMP
Convert " せいさん " and " らいん " separately.
4
せいさん生産生産らいん生産ライン
変換変換変換変換
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Enter "せいさん" and The character string is converted Enter "らいん" and Convert the character string into
touch the 変換 switch. into the kanji character string. touch the 変換 switch. the katakana character string.
5
* When " せいさんらいん " is entered
NUMERICAL INPUT
Since " せいさんらいん " consists of two words " せいさん " and " らいん ", all the characters are converted into
katakana characters.
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
せいさんらいんセイサンライン
変換変換
6
All the characters are converted
ASCII DISPLAY/
Touch the 変換 switch.
into the katakana characters.
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(2) Number of input digits set for the ASCII input

Enter the characters that include the number of digits equivalent to or less than the number of digits set for the
ASCII input.
Example) Number of input digits: 10 bytes (5 characters)
生産らいん生産ライン生産ライン
変換確定変換確定変換確定
Convert "らいん". Touch the 選択 switch The character string is confirmed

or the 確定 switch. or the string is written into a device.
* When the number of input digits exceeds the number of digits that can be input
When the number of input digits exceeds the number of the digits set for the ASCII input, the GOT cannot confirm the character
string and cannot write the string into the device.
Example) Number of input digits: 8 bytes (4 characters)
産らいん産ライン産ライン

最大入力桁をオーバーしました。
OK
変換確定変換確定変換確定
After "生産" is entered, Touch the 選択 switch The character string cannot
enter "らいん" and convert or the 確定 switch when be confirmed and the string
the character string. is not written into the device.
the number of the input
(The error dialog appears.)
digits exceeds the number
of set digits.
(3) Adding or deleting a character while the character string is entered

To add or delete a character while the character string is entered, backspace over the character with the DEL
switch. Doing so moves the cursor to the target position.
生産いん生産生産らいん
DEL DEL DEL
"いん" is entered instead Delete "いん" with Enter "らいん".

of "らいん" by mistake. the DEL switch.

(4) Conversion of a word (minimal phrase) that is not in the dictionary data
1
A word that is not in the dictionary data cannot be converted.
(a) Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version)
FIGURES
Example) To enter " 温調 "
Enter " おんちょう " and convert " おん " and " ちょう " separately.
2
おんちょう温長温長温調
TOUCH SWITCH
次 >> 変換次 >> 変換次 >> 変換次 >> 変換
Enter "おんちょう" and Touch the >> switch. Touch the 次 switch. "温調" is entered.
touch the 変換 switch.
(b) Kana-kanji conversion

3
Example) To enter " 温調 "
Enter " おん " and " ちょう " separately, and convert the character string.
LAMP
おん温ちょう温調
変換変換変換 4
CHARACTERS
Enter "おん" and Enter "ちょう" and "温調" is entered.
touch the 変換 switch. touch the 変換 switch.
GRAPHIC
* When " おんちょう " is entered
Since " おんちょう " is not in the dictionary data, " おんちょう " cannot be converted.
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
おんちょうオンチョウおんちょう
NUMERICAL
変換次変換次変換次
DISPLAY/
Enter "おんちょう" and Touch the 次 switch. The character string is not
touch the 変換 switch. converted into "温調". 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(5) Example when entering the chain phrase " 生産ラインの稼働状況 " by using the Kana-kanji
conversion
While the Kana-kanji conversion function (enhanced version) converts the chain phrase, the Kana-kanji
conversion function converts each minimal phrase.
The following shows how to correctly enter the chain phrase by using the Kana-kanji conversion.
1) せいさん Enter " せいさん ".
Convert the character string into the kanji character string with the [ 変換 ]
switch and confirm the kanji character string with the [ 選択 ] switch.
2) 生産 To cancel the displayed kanji character string, touch the
[ 前 ] switch or the [ 次 ] switch to display each character string option.
3) 生産らいん Enter " らいん ".
Convert the character string into the katakana character string with the [
4) 生産ライン変換 ] switch and confirm the katakana character string with the [ 選択 ]
switch.
5) 生産ラインの Enter " の " with the [ 選択 ] switch and confirm the hiragana character.
6) 生産ラインのかどう Enter " かどう ".
7) 生産ラインの稼動 switch and confirm the kanji character string with the [ 選択 ] switch.
8) 生産ラインの稼動じょうきょう Enter " じょうきょう ".
9) 生産ラインの稼動状況 switch and confirm the kanji character string with the [ 選択 ] switch.
10) 生産ラインの稼動状況 Write the character string into the device with the [ 確定 ] switch.
(6) Example when the character string is changed from " 外部入力信号 " to " 外部出力信号 "
By moving the cursor, a character of the entered character string can be deleted or new characters are added.
1) 外部入力信号 Touch the character to display the cursor.
2) 外部入力信号 Move the cursor to the character to be deleted with the switch.
3) 外部信号 Delete the character string with the [DEL] switch.
4) 外部しゅつりょく信号 Enter " しゅつりょく ".
5) 外部出力信号 switch and confirm the kanji character string with the [ 選択 ] switch.
6) 外部出力信号 Write the character string into the device with the [ 確定 ] switch.

1
POINT
Skipping the [ 選択 ] switch during the character string conversion
FIGURES
When the next character string is entered during the conversion, the string is confirmed automatically, and the
operation of the [ 選択 ] switch is skipped.
The character string to be converted blinks.
2
せいさん生産生産ライン
TOUCH SWITCH
Enter "せいさん". Convert the character When "らいん" is entered, "生産"
string with the 変換 switch. is confirmed automatically. 3
(7) Changing the text code by using the text code format control (GS456)
The Kana-kanji conversion function is available only when the text code is set to the shift JIS code.
To use the text code format control (GS456), set any of the following.
LAMP
• Store 0 (ASCII code and shift JIS code) in the text code format control (GS456).
Set [System Language] to [ 日本語 ].
• Store 1 (Shift JIS code) in the text code format control (GS456). 4
For the details of the text code format control (GS456), refer to the following.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

6.6 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using ASCII display/ASCII input function.

(1) Maximum Number of ASCII display/input objects that can be set in one screen
1000
(2) ASCII input arrange position (Other than GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12, GT1020, and GT
SoftGOT1000)
Depending on the arranged position of the ASCII input, there are cases the input operation is not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the numerical input by the
data check function of GT Designer3.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 3.13 Data Check
If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1. Change the grid to 16 dots pitch in the screen of GT Designer3.
2. Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer3
ABCD
ABCD
Input operation is not possible Arrange an object so that it includes the
unless the center point of 16-dot grids center point of 16-dot grids.
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.
 Precautions for OS
(1) Kana-kanji conversion function
To use the Kana-kanji conversion function, install the option OS on the GOT.
The following shows the option OS required according to the type of the Kana-kanji conversion function to be
used.
Function Option OS
Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version) KANA KANJI(JPN)(Enhanced Version)
Kana-kanji conversion KANA KANJI(JPN)

(2) Limitations by the standard font of the text code format control
1
According to the used standard font, the value settable for the text code format control (GS456) is limited.
When the used standard font and the value that cannot be set for the text code format are set in combination as
shown below, the GOT cannot distinguish between one-byte and two-byte characters correctly.
FIGURES
Therefore, with the ASCII input, the cursor may not move correctly
Value that cannot be set for the text code format control
Used standard font
(GS456)
2
Japanese, Chinese (Simplified) 2 (ASCII code)
Japanese (supporting Europe), Chinese (Simplified)(supporting Europe),
TOUCH SWITCH
3 (GB code)
Chinese (Traditional)(supporting Europe)
 Precautions for hardware

To use the Kana-kanji conversion function with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GT16, no option function board is required.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following. 3
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

(1) When unavailable ASCII codes are stored
LAMP
If any of the following text codes are included in data for the ASCII display, characters after the text code are not
displayed.
• 0000H to 001FH
4
• 0080H
• 00F0H to 00FFH
CHARACTERS
Example: If a control code 09H (tab) is included
GRAPHIC
Control code "40," which is located after the
09H (Tab) control code, is not displayed.
5
(QX 40)
D10 5851H "X" "Q"

D11 3409H "4" "09H(Tab)"
NUMERICAL INPUT
D12 0030H "0"
NUMERICAL
(2) System message and ASCII input/display
DISPLAY/
The character code to be displayed differs depending on the language that is set for the system message (utility
or [System Language] in [GOT setup]).
• Other than English: Treated as the Shift JIS code.
• English : Treated as the ASCII code (Characters such as Kana are not displayed.) 6
 Precautions for using barcode reader and RFID
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
(1) Required setting
To enable the ASCII input function by barcode reader or RFID, setting for the barcode or RFID function is
required.
32. RFID FUNCTION 7
(2) When data are read by barcode reader or RFID during ASCII input using key window
The read data are input or are not input depending on the operation as follows.
(a) The data read by the barcode reader or RFID are not input during displaying a dialog box.
DATA LIST
(b) Numeric values currently being input by the key window are discarded, and the data read by the barcode
reader or RFID are input except during displaying a dialog box.
(3) When the key is touched during input process of data read by barcode reader or RFID 8
The key touch operation becomes invalid and the data read by barcode reader or RFID are input while an input
HISTORICAL DATA
of the data read by barcode reader or RFID is in process.

LIST DISPLAY
(4) When the number of bytes in data is less than the specified start position
When the number of bytes in the data read by barcode reader or RFID is less than the one set for the specified
[Start Position], the read data are not input.


1
7. DATA LIST
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
This section explains the data list function that displays multiple word device values in list form.
With this function, line No. and ruled lines of the list are displayed automatically.
No. Line Plan Output Fault
3
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0

3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
LAMP
D10:1000 D11:800 D12: 2
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
D20: 500 D21:250 D22: 0
4
2 Line 2 500 250 0
D30: 800 D31:600 D32: 1
3 Line 3 800 600 1
D40: 900 D41:850 D42: 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3
CHARACTERS
Example:
GRAPHIC
Sort lines according to the values of the prior setting item. Display the list with statistics graph on the same screen
17. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH,
7.1 Device tab
18. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
2 Line 2 500 250 0
NUMERICAL
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
3 Line 3 800 600 1
DISPLAY/
2 Line 2 500 250 0
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3
The lines will be displayed in ascending order of "Output"
Device status can be displayed effectively.
6
values.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
POINT
Comments displayed by using data list
7
Comments must be registered in advance for displaying in data list.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
7-1

 Methods of setting data list

Set the basic functions of data list on the [Device] tab.
(1) Set the number of columns and lines for data list.
Fixed Comment
text column Data column (No. of columns)
No. Line Plan Output Fault Setting item name is displayed.
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0

Number of lines (rows, displayed rows)
3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
Component Comment is Device value is

displayed. displayed.
(2) Set devices, comments, label color or similar on each dialog box.
Set devices, comments,
element color to be displayed
in lines.
Set the view format of

comment columns.
1) 1)
2) 2)
3) 3)
4) 4)
Set the view format of data

columns.
Continuous : Set continuous comments and devices.

Set the head comment and device in 1).
Random : Set comments and continuous devices for each line.
Set comments and the head device in 1) to 4).
7-2

1
7.1 Settings
1. Select [Object]→[Data List Display]→[Data List Display] from the menu.
FIGURES
2. Click the position where the data list is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged data list to display the setting dialog box.
2
 Device tab
TOUCH SWITCH
This tab screen is used to set the device value to be monitored and the list form to display a comment.
LAMP
Title, device and comment can
be input directly.
4
Title
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
Comment No. Device
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Rows Set the number of lines for monitoring devices using the data list. (1 to 128)
Set the number of lines to be displayed on the screen. (1 to 27)
NUMERICAL
The lines out of the screen can be displayed with scroll up/scroll down key.
DISPLAY/
Display Rows
7.3 Actions
Columns Set the number of columns to be displayed. (2 to 6)
Set the text (title, comment, numeric value) to be displayed and ruled line space of the list (0
6
to 32 dots).
ASCII DISPLAY/
Space
ASCII INPUT
No. Result Output
List Form
Font Select a font.
Text Size
• 16 dot standard • 16 dot HQ Mincho
7
Set the method of arranging (sort) lines.

No. order : Display in line number column order.
DATA LIST
Sort Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.

Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
Without sort : Not sort.
Sort/Attribute
Column
Set the sort basis column. 8
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
7.1 Settings 7-3

Click this button to set the display attribute of comment column.

(1) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box
Click this button to set the display attribute of data column.

to
(2) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box
Click this button to set the contents to be displayed in rows. (device, comment, label color)
to
(3) Edit Rows dialog box
Select a device setting method.

Continuous : Set devices of continuous No. through all rows.
Random : Set devices in each row.
Set initial device Set initial device in each row

Device No.
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4
Row 1 1 D10 D11 D12 Row 1 1 D10 D11 D12
Row 2 2 D13 D14 D15 Row 2 2 D20 D21 D22
Row 3 3 D16 D17 D18 Row 3 3 D30 D31 D32
Select a comment setting method.

Comment No. Continuous : Set comments of continuous No. through all rows.
Random : Set comments of continuous No. in each row.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the
Object Name operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device] tab.
(1) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box

Set the number of characters of the comment column, and set the title and title color of the comment column.
Digits Set the number of comment characters to be displayed. (Up to 80 characters can be set.)
Select this item for using components.

Element Width
After selecting the item, set the component width. (1 to 6)
Title Input the title of comment column.
Color Select the title color.
7-4 7.1 Settings

(2) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box

1
(a) Format tab
This tab is used to set the number of digits for device value, view format/data type of the device to be
monitored, title and title color of the column.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
Select the view format of the monitor device value.
CHARACTERS
Format
• Signed decimal • Unsigned decimal • Hexadecimal • Octal • Binary • Real
GRAPHIC
Select the position based on the width of data column.
Alignment
Set the number of digits for the device value to be displayed in data column.
The available number of digits is different depending on the [Format]. 5
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits(including minus (-))
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Fill with 0 Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when is selected in the [Alignment].
Decimal Point When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits for the decimal point. (0 to 32)
6
Select the data type of the word device.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Title Input the title of data column.
Color Select the title color.
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
7.1 Settings 7-5

(b) Data operation tab

This tab is used to set the expression to operate the device value and display the results.
For details of data operation, refer to the following.

After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask

Right : Right shift
Data
Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)
Operation
7-6 7.1 Settings

(3) Edit Rows dialog box

1
This dialog box is used to set the device to be monitored, comments to be displayed, and display attributes of
the components.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH

Device
Comment No. Set the comment No. to be displayed in the selected line.
Element Pattern This item is available when [Element Width] is selected for [Edit Columns (Comment Column)] is selected.
Set the component pattern, color and background.
Element Pattern
Color Example: Element Pattern + Element Pattern Color
LAMP
Element Pattern :
Element Element Pattern Color :
Background Color Element Background Color : 4
Element Background Color
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
7.1 Settings 7-7

 Style tab
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
For details of the states, refer to the following.
Preview list

When [None] is selected, no shape will be displayed.
Shape
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library
figures can be selected as shape.
Shape Settings Frame*1 Set the frame color of the data list display.
Title*1 Set the title color of the data list display.
*1 Set the line color of the data list display.

Ruled Line
Plate Set the plate color of the data list display.
*2 Displays the set status for each state.

Preview list
Deletes the state.
Range Range Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
Text Color*1 Select a text color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Row Background
Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Color*1
7-8 7.1 Settings

*1 Setting each color displayed in the the data list 1

For the parts that color changes when setting colors in the data list, refer to the following.
Title
(The color of each title) Frame
FIGURES
No. Line Output Fault
1
2
Line 1
Line 2
25
30
3
3 Text 2
3 Line 3 32 5
4 Line 4 41 3
TOUCH SWITCH
5 Line 5 38 0 Plate
Ruled Line
*2 State
3
(1) Display attribute when the range of the conditions does not match
When the range of the conditions does not match, the display attribute conditions set for the state 0 are
displayed.
LAMP
(2) Display when states are overlapped.
When states are overlapped, a state with smaller number has priority.
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
7.1 Settings 7-9

(3) State settings of data list

In a data list, the $V value of a state (monitor device) is the device value set in the second column.
Example:
D10, D20, D30 and D40 are treated as $V value.
Example: Device : D10, D20, D30, D40


1 Line 1 D10 D11
2 Line 2 D20 D21
3 Line 3 D30 D31
4 Line 4 D40 D41
Action priority
when setting State No. Range Text color Plate color
overlaps
High 1 1000<=$V White Green
2 900<=$V<=999 Yellow White
Normal case
Low - Black White
(State 0)

When monitor device value is over 1 Line 1 1000 2
State 1 1000 (1000<=$V), the plate color will be 2 Line 2 1000 0
changed to green. 3 Line 3 950 1
4 Line 4 980 3

When monitor device value is 900 to 999 1 Line 1 890 2
State 2 (900<=$V<=999), the text color will be 2 Line 2 880 0
changed to yellow. 3 Line 3 920 1
4 Line 4 910 3

When monitor device value is out of the 1 Line 1 890 2
Normal case
range (below 899), the text color will be 2 Line 2 880 0
(State 0)
black and the plate color will be white. 3 Line 3 820 1
4 Line 4 810 3
7 - 10 7.1 Settings

1
 Extended tab
Set the security and offset.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
When the security function is used, set the security level (1 to 15).
CHARACTERS
Extended
GRAPHIC

5
Layer
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Category
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
7.1 Settings 7 - 11

 Trigger tab
Select the condition to display or activate the object.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
7 - 12 7.1 Settings

1
The data list is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

7.3 Actions
 Data list function
(1) Scroll function
In data list, the number of screen display lines (display rows) can be set separately from the number of
corresponding set lines (rows).
When scroll up/scroll down key is set, data list can be scrolled up and down
Lines displayed on screen

Lines monitored actually
No. Line Plan Output Fault No. Line Plan Output Fault
1 Line 1 1000 800 2 1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0 Display 2 Line 2 500 250 0
3 Line 3 800 600 1 rows: 4 lines 3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3 4 Line 4 900 850 3 Rows:

8 lines
5 Line 5 1000 900 1
Scroll up Scroll down
6 Line 6 1000 950 2
Create scroll keys by setting key code in touch switch.
7 Line 7 800 300 0
Scroll up: 00F2H
Scroll down: 00F3H 8 Line 8 900 700 0
5 Line 5 1000 900 1
6 Line 6 1000 950 2
7 Line 7 800 300 0
8 Line 8 900 700 0
Scroll up Scroll down
Touch scroll up/scroll down key to switch the screen

display by one screen.
(2) Sort function

Lines can be sorted based on device status of specified columns (ascending/descending order of device value).
Example: Sort the lines in descending order of device values of the third column.
Make the settings on the [Device] tab as follows:
Rows : 8 lines Sort : Desending
Display rows : 4 lines Sort/Attribute column : 3 columns
The lines will be sorted in descending order of "Output" values.
No. Line Plan Output Fault No. Line Plan Output Fault
1 Line 1 1000 800 2 6 Line 6 1000 950 2

Display 2 Line 2 500 250 0 5 Line 5 1000 900 1
rows
3 Line 3 800 600 1 4 Line 4 900 850 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3 1 Line 1 1000 800 2
5 Line 5 1000 900 1 8 Line 8 900 700 0
Lines not 6 Line 6 1000 950 2 3 Line 3 800 600 1

displayed 7 Line 7 800 300 0 7 Line 7 800 300 0
8 Line 8 900 700 0 2 Line 2 500 250 0
7 - 14 7.3 Actions

1
7.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the data list function.
FIGURES
One object can be set. 2
(2) Applicable screen
TOUCH SWITCH
Only base screen can be set.
(3) Precautions for using together with other object

(a) The object that cannot be set on the same screen
Alarm history cannot be set on the same screen. 3
(b) The object restricted on the applicable function
For restrictions when using the alarm list on the same screen, refer to the following.
11.6.5 Precautions
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
5
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


1
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
This function lists the device data collected by using the logging function in chronological order.
Normally displays the
latest data Display of the past data Display of the latest data
Date Plan Output Fault Date Plan Output Fault Date Plan Output Fault
3
2010/10/8 13:35:00 100 60 2 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 2010/10/08 13:50:00 100 65 2
2010/10/8 13:40:00 100 71 1 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2 2010/10/08 13:55:00 100 55 3
2010/10/8 13:45:00 100 64 0 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1 2010/10/08 14:00:00 100 52 3
Show Hide Cursor Cursor Show Hide Cursor Cursor Show Hide Cursor Cursor
Cursor Cursor Up Down Cursor Cursor Up Down Cursor Cursor Up Down
Latest Latest Latest
Data Data Data
Data collected
by the logging
function Past data Past data Past data
2010/10/08 12:25:00 100 57 3
LAMP
2010/10/08 12:25:00 100 57 3 2010/10/08 12:25:00 100 57 3
2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8 2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8 2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 Rows of 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3
4
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1 the list 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5 2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5 2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4 2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4
displayed 2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4
2010/10/08 13:05:00
2010/10/08 13:10:00
100
100
62
88
6
2
2010/10/08 13:05:00
2010/10/08 13:10:00
100
100
62
88
6
2
on the GOT 2010/10/08 13:05:00
2010/10/08 13:10:00
100
100
62
88
6
2
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 7 2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 7 2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 7
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 5 2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 5 2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 5
CHARACTERS
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 4 2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 4 2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 4
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 3 Rows of 2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 3 2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 3
2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 2
the list 2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 2 2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 2
GRAPHIC
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 1 2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 1 2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 1
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 0 displayed 2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 0 2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 0 Rows of
2010/10/08 13:50:00 100 65 2
Latest data on the GOT Latest data 2010/10/08 13:55:00 100 55 3 the list
2010/10/08 14:00:00 100 52 3
displayed
Latest data on the GOT
5
POINT
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Before using the historical data list display
DISPLAY/
To use the historical data list display, the logging function must be set in advance.
For the setting of the logging function, refer to the following.
24. LOGGING FUNCTION 6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
8-1

8.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Data List Display] [Historical Data List Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the historical data list display is to be placed to complete the placement.
3. Double-click the placed historical data list display to display the setting dialog box.
 Display tab
Set the number of rows displayed on the list, the display method, and devices.
Display Rows Set the number of rows, excluding the title row, displayed on one screen. (1 to 47)
Display
Set the number of columns (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the historical data list display. (1 to 32)
Columns
Sort Setting Select the data display order of the historical data list display. (Latest/Oldest)
Select a setting method of the text displayed on the title. (Direct/Comment)
Set the comment group No. to be used.

Group No.
When a nonexistent comment group No. is set, no comment is displayed.
Select this item to automatically adjust the text size.

When this item is not selected, a line feed is automatically performed for the text string.
Title Adjust Text
After selecting this item, set the minimum text size for the automatic text size adjustment.
Size
(8 to 128 dots)
Minimum
Specify the minimum text size for the automatic text size adjustment.
Size
Select the logging ID used for [Historical Data List Display].

Logging ID
Selection is possible from the logging ID and the logging name.
Click this item to display the [Logging] dialog box.

The selected logging contents can be edited in the [Logging] dialog box.
Device
Select the setting method for [No. Logging Device].

Device
Continuous: The continuous devices starting from the set device are automatically set.
Setting
Random: Set the devices one by one equivalent to the number of devices.
8-2 8.1 Settings

1
Inserts a new column to the left of the selected data column.
Cuts the selected text string.
FIGURES
Copies the selected text string.
Pastes the copied or cut text string.

2
TOUCH SWITCH
Deletes the selected text string.
Date/Data
Displays the date and the data column numbers equivalent to the value set in [Display Columns].
Column No.
Set the number of digits for each column. (Digits of date: 5 to 100, Digits of column number of column: 1
Digits
to 100)
When selecting [Direct] for [Title], enter the title in the text box.
3
Title Text
When selecting [Comment] for [Title], set the comment No. or comment data.
Displays whether the title alignment, the title color, and the title style are changed
Title
Change Status from the default setting. (Changed/Not changed)
(Text) Click this item to display the [Text Format] dialog box.
(1) Text Format dialog box
LAMP
Click this item to display the [Device List] dialog box.
(2) Device List dialog box 4
Lists the logging devices set in the logging setting of the selected logging ID.
Select the device used for the historical data list display.
On a cell, the selected device and the setting order of the logging device are
CHARACTERS
displayed.
GRAPHIC
No. Logging
Contents Device Device
Setting order of the logging device
Represents the order the device is displayed
in the device list dialog box. 5
This allows the confirmation of the order
NUMERICAL INPUT
number of the device being set in the device
list dialog box.
NUMERICAL
The number is conveniently used for
DISPLAY/
confirming the setting change.
Select the device type of the devices to be monitored.

Device Type • Bit • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32
Data
• Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32 • Real*1 6
Click the date column to display the [Date/Time Setting] dialog box.
After the setting, the date display is changed to the data set in the [Date/Time
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
Display Setting (3) Date/Time Setting dialog box
Click the data column to display the [Display Setting] dialog box.
This item cannot be set when [Bit] is selected for [Device Type].
(4) Display Setting dialog box
Displays the display format set for the [Display Setting] dialog box.
7
Display Format
The display format cannot be set with this item.
Click the data column to display the [Edit Data Expression] dialog box.
When the operational expression is input in the data column, the operation
DATA LIST
Data Operation expression is displayed. When no operational expression is input in the data column,
[None] is displayed.
Change Status
Displays whether the text alignment, the text color, and the text style are changed in
the data column from the default setting. (Changed/Not changed)
8
(Text) Click this item to display the [Text Format] dialog box.
HISTORICAL DATA

LIST DISPLAY
*1 When the displayed data cannot be processed as the real number, if all values are 0, [Inf] is displayed and if the values are other
than 0, [NaN] is displayed.
8.1 Settings 8-3

Item Description
Alignment Click to select the position where text strings of multiple rows are aligned.
Text Color Select the text display color.


(2) Device List dialog box

The dialog box lists the logging devices set in the logging setting of the selected logging ID.
Select the device used for the historical data list display.
A [*] symbol is displayed for the selected device.
8-4 8.1 Settings

(3) Date/Time Setting dialog box

1
Preview area
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
Item Description
Preview
The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.
area
Select a display type of date and time.
LAMP
Contents
Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.
Sort Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

4
Select asorting type of date.
Type Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a week.
CHARACTERS
Date Setting
GRAPHIC
Delimiter Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example) To display September 1, 2009
Fill with 0
Selected :09/09/01 5
Not selected :09/9/1
NUMERICAL INPUT
When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time] for [Contents], set the following items.
NUMERICAL
Select the display type of time.
Type
DISPLAY/
Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
Time Setting
Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example) At 10:1
Fill with 0
Selected :10:01
Not selected :10:1
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
8.1 Settings 8-5

(4) Display Setting dialog box
Item Description

• Signed Decimal • Unsigned Decimal • Hexadecimal • Octal • Binary • Real
Example) GOT display examples
Display Format Signed decimal : -12623 Binary : 0011000101001111
Unsigned decimal : 12623 Octal : 30517
The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format, change the setting in [Data Type].

The available number of digits varies depending on [Display Format].
When [Real] is selected for [Display Format], set the number of digits after the decimal point (1 to 32).
If 0 is set, the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Rounded off
Decimal Point
6.57
6.6 6.57
Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value.
Example) In the case of five digits
Fill with 0
Zero not displayed : 5
Zero displayed : 00005
8-6 8.1 Settings

1
 Style tab
FIGURES
2
TOUCH SWITCH
3
LAMP
4
CHARACTERS
• 6 8 • 12dot Standard • 16dot Standard
GRAPHIC
Text Size For the details of each font and size, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 5
Japan: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
NUMERICAL INPUT
China(GB)-Mincho: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
KANJI China(Big5)-Gothic: Displays traditional Chinese characters.
NUMERICAL
Region Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"
DISPLAY/
Japan China (GB) -Mincho
6
Cursor Color Select a color of the cursor for selecting the alarm.
Single Touch
ASCII DISPLAY/
Select this item to display the cursor at the touched position.
Operation
Up/Down ASCII INPUT

Scroll List Set the number of rows when scrolling the list by inputting the key code [Up/Down Scroll List Displacement] (FFF4H/
Displacemen FFF5H).
t
Style Select a ruled line type for the historical data list display.
7
Draw Ruled
Width Select a ruled line width for the historical data list display. (1/2/3/4/5/7)
Line
Color Select a ruled line color for the historical data list display.
DATA LIST
Set how much space is left between the ruled line of the list and the characters, the
time display, or others.
Y: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
X: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
Space According to the setting of [Text Size] (magnification of the text size), the actual Occurrence date/time 8
horizontal space is as follows:
HISTORICAL DATA
Magnification of text size set value in [Space]

Example)
LIST DISPLAY
When [Text Size] is set to 2 and [Space] is set to 8, a space of 16 dots is ensured.
8.1 Settings 8-7


Shape
Click the [Shape] button to select a shape other than the shapes in the list box.
Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Shape
Settings Frame Color Plate color
Plate Color
Frame color
 Extended tab
Set the security, time device.
User ID*1 Set the user ID for the historical data list display. (1 to 65535)
Select this item to write the cursor position to a device. (The values are stored as BCD data.)
After selecting this item, set the device where the time is stored.
Cursor Position
Time device*2 (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Time
Four points (year and month, date and hour, minute and second, day of week) of devices are set
consecutively starting from the set device.
Select this item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function)*3
After selecting the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
Display Position Display Position
Time Device Time (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Three points (year and month, date and hour, minute and second) of devices are set

Layer
Select a category to be assigned to an object.

Category
8-8 8.1 Settings

*1 User ID 1
(1) When the user ID setting is required
If more than one object that are operated using the touch switch of the same key code exists on the screen,
touching the touch switch may fail to call the intended operation.
FIGURES
In such a case, it is possible to assign an ID (user ID) to individual objects by setting the user ID so that the ID
(object) to be operated by the touch switch can be specified. Thus, intended touch switch operation can be
called by touching the touch switch.
2
When user ID is not set When user ID is set
TOUCH SWITCH
Historical data Historical data
Historical data Historical data list display A list display B
list display A list display B (User ID: 1) (User ID: 2)
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 68 5 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 68 5 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 55 3 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 55 3 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 72 6 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 72 6 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2
3
Display cursor Display cursor Display cursor Display cursor
Up Down
Hide cursor Hide cursor Hide cursor Check Delete
Latest list Latest list Latest list Hide cursor
LAMP
Touch switch for Touch switch for Touch switch for Touch switch for
the historical data the historical data the historical data
list display A
the historical data
list display B
4
list display A list display B
(User ID: 1) (User ID: 2)
The touch switch that must act as the
CHARACTERS
historical data list display A acts as the Even if the same key code is used, the target
of operation is specified by an ID, making it
GRAPHIC
historical data list display B.
possible to call the intended operation.
(2) Touch switch setting

Input the user ID, which has been set in this step, to [User ID for a key input and data change]. 5
For the details of the key code switch, refer to the following.
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
Touch switch setting ([Action] tab)
DISPLAY/
6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
Set the user ID that has been set for an object. 8

HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
8.1 Settings 8-9

*2 Time device
(1) How the data is stored in the time devices

Time data is stored in upper and lower 8 bits of the set devices.
Example) When D100 is set
D100 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Year) (Month)
D101 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Day) (Hour)
D102 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Minute) (Second)
D103 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Not used) (Day of week)
(0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)
To monitor the above devices by using the numerical display and others, execute mask processing and shift
processing using the data operation function as shown below.
Since the value is stored as BCD data, set the data type of the numerical display ([Device/Style] tab) to [BCD16]
or [BCD32].
Example) Setting example of the numerical display ([Operation/Script] tab)

• Displaying the year (upper 8 bits)
Set the numerical display to execute mask

processing for lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of D100
and to shift upper 8 bits (b15 to b8) of D100 to
the right by 8 bits.
• Displaying the month (lower 8 bits)
In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for upper 8 bits
(b15 to b8) of D100.
8 - 10 8.1 Settings

(2) Value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

1
(a) Value storing timing
The value is stored to the device when:
• The cursor is displayed on the list.
FIGURES
• The displayed cursor is moved.
• The historical data list display is operated by using a touch switch while the cursor is displayed.
(b) Value to be stored

2
While the cursor is displayed on the list, the list is not updated.
TOUCH SWITCH
The value when the list is not updated is stored in the device.
Example) When storing the time to a device
The time that corresponds
to this cursor position is stored.
Date Plan Output Fault Date Plan Output Fault
Displaying The data of the list when the list
3
2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8 2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4
the cursor 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 drawing processing stops is stored in
2010/10/08 12:45:00
2010/10/08 12:50:00
100
100
67
77
2
1
2010/10/08 12:45:00
2010/10/08 12:50:00
100
100
67
77
2
1
the device at the timing of cursor
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5
Moving 2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5 display / movements.
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4 2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4
The time that corresponds the cursor

to this cursor position is stored.
LAMP
*3 Displaying data at specified time (Time specification jump function)
With the display position time device and the touch switch, logging data at the specified time can be displayed on the
center of the historical data list display. (The cursor is displayed at the position of the logging data at the specified 4
time.)
If no logging data at the specified time exists, logging data at the time closest to the specified time is displayed.
CHARACTERS
(1) Before using the time specification jump function
GRAPHIC
(a) Specifications for time to be specified
Item Description
Data format BCD16 (Binary coded decimal)

5
NUMERICAL INPUT
Data range From January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2037
NUMERICAL
(b) Required settings
DISPLAY/
Place and set the following objects on the screen.
Object Setting
The switch or the key code switch can be read from the library on GT Designer3. 6
Switch / Key code switch By setting the key code (FFD4H) of the display position time specification jump for [Code Set] in the
ASCII DISPLAY/
switch or the key code switch, the user can create a switch or a key code switch.
2. TOUCH SWITCH ASCII INPUT
Select [Display Position Time] on the [Extended] tab, and set a device.
Historical data list display
Extended tab
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY
8.1 Settings 8 - 11

(2) Operation example

The following shows an example of operating the time specification jump function.
Example) When setting the display position time device to D1000 and displaying data at 12:45:00 on
October 8, 2010
Display position time devices Date Plan Output Fault
15 bits 0 bits 2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8
Year and month 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4
(D1000) 0x10 0x10 Time 2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3
specification 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2
Date and hour 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1
(D1001) 0x08 0x12 jump
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5
Minute and 0x45 0x00 2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4
second (D1002)
Set time for the display position time devices. Touch the touch switch that The data at the specified time
the key code (FFD4H) is set. (12:45:00, October 08, 2010)
is displayed in the center of the list.
POINT
Precautions for the time specification jump function
(1) When using the time specification jump function
When using the time specification jump function, the list is not updated.
To update the list again, touch the touch switch with the key code (FFEFH).
(2) When performing other operations during the time specification jump
While the GOT searches for data at the specified time, the other operations with the historical data list display
are unavailable.
(3) When multiple logging data at times close to the specified time exist
When no logging data at the specified time exists, the logging data at the time closest to the specified time is
displayed.
When multiple data at times closest to the specified time exist, the data that the GOT detects first is displayed.
(4) When displaying the data in the neighborhood of the oldest/latest logging data
When the logging data at the specified time is in the neighborhood of the oldest/latest data, the data may not
be displayed on the center of the historical data list display.
(5) When executing the time specification jump without specified time
When the time is not specified (all the display position time devices store 0) and the time specification jump is
executed, the list is not updated and the latest data is displayed.
To update the list again, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is set.
(6) When no logging data to be displayed on the historical data list display exists
When no logging data to be displayed on the historical data list display exists, the time specification jump is
not executed.
(7) When logging data is not in chronological order
When the logging data is not in chronological order because the GOT clock time is changed, the data at the
time closest to the specified time may not be displayed.
8 - 12 8.1 Settings

1
The historical data list display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FIGURES
2
(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting
TOUCH SWITCH
on GOT. GT Designer3] 3
8.3 Actions
LAMP
8.3.1 Relationships with the logging function
4
 Contents displayed on the historical data list display
The historical data list display lists the data collected and stored in the buffering area and/or a memory card by using
CHARACTERS
the logging function.
GRAPHIC
Since the stored data is used, the current and past information can be displayed on the list.
Logging data
5
Date Plan Output Fault
NUMERICAL INPUT
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3 12:35:00
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2 12:40:00
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1 12:45:00
12:50:00
12:55:00
NUMERICAL
13:00:00
:
DISPLAY/
18:05:00
Displaying the stored data in the list 6

 Data collected by the logging function and displayed on the historical data list display
A historical data list display can display the data for only one logging ID. ASCII DISPLAY/
To display multiple logging IDs, set multiple historical data list displays. ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

8.3.2 Historical data list display setting
The following explains the general procedure to set the historical data list display.
Example) Historical data list display that lists the data of the planed and actual production
The GOT collects the data in D10, D20, and D30 with the trigger cycle (300000ms).
24.1.2 Logging setting
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1) Date : Displays the date and time when the logging data is
Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage
tion of productivity of defectives collected.
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7 2) Planned quantity : Monitors the value of D10.
2010/10/08 12:45:00
2010/10/08 12:50:00
100
100
67
77
67.0
77.0
2
1
3.0
1.3
3) Production : Monitors the value of D20.
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0 4) Percentage of productivity : Displays the value calculated by the
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7 expression (Production quantity/Planned quantity*100).
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1 (0 to 100.0%)
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
5) Defectives : Monitors the value of D30.
2010/10/08 13:30:00
2010/10/08 13:35:00
100
100
85
60
85.0
60.0
3
2
3.5
3.3
6) Percentage of defectives: Displays the value calculated by the
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4 expression (Defectives quantity/Production quantity*100).
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0
(0 to 100.0%)
1. Set the displayed rows, the displayed columns, monitor devices, and displayed items on the [Display] tab.
A B
Old logging Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage

tion of productivity of defectives
A: Date column
data 2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9 Displays the date stored in the logging data.
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0 B: Data column
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7
Displays any device value according to the device setting.
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 85.0 3 3.5
New logging 2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 60.0 2 3.3
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4
data 2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0
2. Set the font, text size, ruled line drawing, display space, and shape on the [Style] tab.
Font, Text size Shape
Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage Draw ruled line
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0 Up/Down scroll
2010/10/08 13:00:00
2010/10/08 13:05:00
100
100
75
62
75.0
62.0
4
6
5.3
9.7
list displacement
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3 Set the number of rows to be scrolled.
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 85.0 3 3.5
2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 60.0 2 3.3
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0
3. To specify the security level, the cursor position time, and the display position time, set the items on the [Extended]
tab.

2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
The time at the cursor position is
2010/10/08 13:00:00
2010/10/08 13:05:00
100
100
75
62
75.0
62.0
4
6
5.3
9.7
stored to the device and the display
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3 position time is specified and displayed.
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 85.0 3 3.5
2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 60.0 2 3.3
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0
8 - 14 8.3 Actions

1
 Useful information
FIGURES
The following explains the useful functions for using the historical data list display.
(The functions are provided only for the historical data list display and the functions cannot be set with the data list
display.)
(1) Cursor display
2
It is possible to display and move the cursor on the list using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Setting the single touch operation can display or move the cursor at the touched position.
TOUCH SWITCH
When [Time Device] is set on the [Extended] tab in the [Historical Data List Display] dialog box, the selected
date is stored in the set device.
8.1 Display tab
While the cursor is displayed, the list is not updated.
Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage
3
tion of productivity of defectives tion of productivity of defectives
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0 2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0 2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3 2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7 2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3 2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1 2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
LAMP
[Time Device]
Device value : 2010/10/08 13:00:00
4
(2) Displaying the grid
CHARACTERS
8.1 Display tab
GRAPHIC
With a touch switch that the key code is assigned, data at the specified time can be displayed.
When [Display Position Time Device] is set on the [Extended] tab in the [Historical Data List Display] dialog box,
the data at the specified time is displayed at the center of the historical data list display.
While the data at the specified time is displayed, the list is not updated. 5
NUMERICAL INPUT
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
Specified time 2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
NUMERICAL
13:00:00, October 12, 2008 2010/10/08 13:00:00
2010/10/08 13:05:00
100
100
75
62
75.0
62.0
4
6
5.3
9.7
DISPLAY/
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
The data at the specified time is displayed in the center.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT
7
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

(3) Interaction with the historical trend graph

8.1 Extended tab
Set the same device for the time device of the historical data list display and for the display position time device
of the historical trend graph. Doing so displays the data at the specified time selected with the historical data list
display on the historical trend graph.
The following shows the setting method.
Object Setting
• Select [Single Touch Operation] on the [Style] tab.

• Set [Time Device] on the [Extended] tab.
• Set the same device for [Display Position Time Device] on the [Extended] tab and for [Time Device] on
Historical trend graph
the [Extended] tab for [Historical Data List Display].
Example) Displaying the data at the specified time by using the historical data list display on the historical trend
graph
Configure the following setting.
• Set [Time Device] of the historical data list display to D1000.
• Set [Display Position Time Device] of the historical trend graph to D1000.
1. Display the cursor on the historical data list display, and then move the cursor to the data to be displayed
on the historical trend graph.
The time is stored to the time device (D1000). (Device value: Specified time)
Historical data list display Historical trend graph

tion of productivity of defectives 100 10
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9 Production
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7 Defective
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 85.0 3 3.5 0 0
2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 60.0 2 3.3
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4 13:20 13:25 13:30 13:35 13:40
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0
The time data is stored

D1000
to the time device.
13:00:00, October
12, 2008
2. When the key code (FFD4) of the display position time specification jump is input by using the touch switch,
the historical trend graph display displays the data stored in the display position time device (D1000).
Historical data list display Historical trend graph

Date Plan Produc Percentage Defective Percentage 100 10
tion of productivity of defectives Production
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3 Defective
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1 Specified
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
0 Jump
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5 0
2010/10/08 13:30:00 100 85 85.0 3 3.5
2010/10/08 13:35:00 100 60 60.0 2 3.3 12:50 12:55 13:00 13:05 13:10
2010/10/08 13:40:00 100 71 71.0 1 1.4
2010/10/08 13:45:00 100 64 64.0 0 0.0 D1000
13:00:00, October
12, 2008 Displaying the time stored to the
display position time device

1
POINT
Interaction of the historical trend graph with the historical data list display
FIGURES
Set the same device for the time device of the historical trend graph and for the display position time device of the
historical data list display. Doing so displays the data at the specified time selected with the historical trend graph
on the historical data list display.
The following shows the setting method. 2
Object Setting item
TOUCH SWITCH
Historical trend graph • Set [Cursor Position Time] on the [Extended] tab.
• Set the same value for [Display Position Time Device] on the [Extended] tab and for [Cursor Position
Time] on the [Extended] tab for [Historical Trend Graph].
For the setting procedure, refer to the following.
8.4 Useful Operations/Functions 3
 Touch switch for displaying the historical data list display

The touch switch for the historical data list display can be read from the library on GT Designer3.
Also, a text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
LAMP
By setting a key code to a touch switch, the user can create a touch switch for the historical data list display.
4
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 68.0 4 5.9
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 53.0 3 5.7
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 67.0 2 3.0
CHARACTERS
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 77.0 1 1.3
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 83.0 5 6.0
GRAPHIC
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 75.0 4 5.3
2010/10/08 13:05:00 100 62 62.0 6 9.7
2010/10/08 13:10:00 100 88 88.0 2 2.3
2010/10/08 13:15:00 100 86 86.0 7 8.1
2010/10/08 13:20:00 100 87 87.0 5 5.7
2010/10/08 13:25:00 100 73 73.0 4 5.5
Touch switch for the
5
historical data list display
NUMERICAL INPUT
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
Touch switch Key code Description
Show Cursor
FFF0H
6
Displays/Hides the cursor.
Hide cursor The cursor is displayed on the center of the list.
FFF1H ASCII DISPLAY/

ASCII INPUT
List Cursor Up
FFF2H
7
Moves the cursor to upward or downward.
List Cursor Down
FFF3H
DATA LIST
8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY

List Displacement
Scroll Up
FFF4H
Moves the list rows to upward or downward.

Setting [Up/Down Scroll List Displacement] changes the number of rows to be scrolled.
List Displacement
8.1 Style tab
Scroll Down
FFF5H
List Page Scroll Up
FFF6H
List Page Scroll Moves the list to upward or downward according to the number of displayed rows.
Downl
FFF7H
Jump to the top of

the list
FFD0H Moves the cursor to the top of the list.
Jump to the bottom

of the list
FFD1H Moves the cursor to the bottom of the list.
Latest Data
FFEFH Displays the latest data.
Time Specification
Jump
Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices on the center of the list. (Time
FFD4H
specification jump function)

1
8.5 Precautions
FIGURES
Up to 8 objects can be set.
For the GT12, one object can be set.
(2) Changing the set logging device or using other project data
2
If the set logging device is changed or other project data is used after the historical data list display is set, the
TOUCH SWITCH
device in the logging setting and the device in the historical data list display may not match.
In this case, set a device of the historical data list display again.
If the device type does not match between the logging setting and the historical data list display, the device data
is not displayed on the list.
(3) Consistency check with the logging setting
The consistency between the device of the logging setting and the device of the historical data list display is 3
checked when:
• The [Historical Data List Display] dialog box is opened.
• The data check is performed when the device of the historical data list display is enabled.
(4) Device set for the time device
LAMP
Set GOT internal devices for [Time Device].
If a device of a controller is specified, the monitoring speed may be lowered.
(5) Logging setting when the historical data list display is used
4
When the historical data list display is used, setting for [Number of Logs a File] in the logging setting must be
larger than the value set for [Display Columns] of the historical data list display.
CHARACTERS
GRAPHIC
8.1 Display tab
(6) Position of the historical data list display when the single touch operation is set
When [Single Touch Operation] is set on the [Style] tab in the [Historical Data List Display] dialog box, position 5
the historical data list display under the following conditions.
NUMERICAL INPUT
If the conditions are not satisfied, the GOT may display the cursor at the position out of the touched position or
the GOT may respond nothing even with the touch operation.
NUMERICAL
• For the GT15, each X and Y coordinate of the data list display range must be a multiple of 16.
DISPLAY/
• The width and the height of the data list display range must be a multiple of 16.
8.1 Style tab
If the position out of the multiple of 16 is touched, the GOT may display the cursor at the position out of the 6
touched position.
ASCII DISPLAY/
(7) Display of objects when the bit is selected in the device type
ASCII INPUT
When the bit is selected as the device type, the display of the historical data list display on the screen editor is
always off even if the historical data list display is changed from on to off.
The GOT displays the on or off status of the monitor device correctly.
 Precautions for OS 7
To use the historical data list display, install the option function OS (Logging) to the GOT.

DATA LIST
To use the historical data list display with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT. (No option function
board is required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)
For the GT16, no option function board is required.
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board 8
HISTORICAL DATA
LIST DISPLAY


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Date display
9.1 Setting Date Display
Date display is the function for displaying a date on GOT.
Year display is the function for displaying the last 2 digits of the year.
11
09/11/25
ALARM
 Time display 12
9.2 Setting Time Display
Time display is the function for displaying the time on GOT.
The hour is displayed in 24-hour display format.
LEVEL
13:48
13
PANELMETER
POINT
Displayed clock data
The GOT clock data is displayed in the date display/time display.
For details of the GOT clock, refer to the following. 14
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
9-1

9.1 Setting Date Display
1. Select [Object] [Date/Time Display] [Date Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the date display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged date display to display the setting dialog box.
 Date Setting tab

Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.
Select whether to display the date or time

Type Date: Displays the Year/Month/Day
Time: Displays the time
Select the date display.

Date Type The selectable items vary depending on the contents selected in [Sort] and [Font] of the [Display
Format].
Select this item for displaying "0" before month and day.
Example: To display September 1, 2009
Fill with 0
Selected :09/09/01
Sort Set the sorting of year, month, and day.

Display Format
Delimiter Set the delimiter for year, month, and day.

•6 8dot font • 12 dot standard font*1 • 16 dot standard font
• 12 dot high quality Gothic • 16 dot high quality Gothic • TrueType Numerical
• Stroke*2
Size
9-2 9.1 Setting Date Display

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 Shape settings
Shape
GOT display
COMMENT DISPLAY
Shape Settings
Frame Color 11
Plate Color
Plate
Frame color
ALARM
Text Color Select the color for displaying numbers.
Object Name
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log. 12
The object name is also displayed in other than [Date Setting] tab.
LEVEL
POINT
13
Figure frame area
PANELMETER


14
Plate area
Figure frame area
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
9.1 Setting Date Display 9-3

 Extended tab
Set the security, layer, and category.

Layer

Category
9-4 9.1 Setting Date Display

9
 Script tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30.3 Object Script
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
14
width
height
LINE GRAPH
Date Setting Text Color text_color 3) 15

TREND GRAPH

16
BAR GRAPH
9.1 Setting Date Display 9-5

9.2 Setting Time Display
1. Select [Object] [Date/Time Display] [Time Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the time display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged time display to display the setting dialog box.
 Time Setting tab

Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.
Select whether to display the date or time

Type Date: Displays the Year/Month/Day
Time: Displays the time
Select the time display format.

Time Type
Items selectable for [Time Type] differ depending on the contents set for [Font] of [Display Format].
Fill with 0
Selected :09/09/01
Display Format Font Select a numeric font.

•6 8dot font • 12 dot standard font*1 • 16 dot standard font
• 12 dot high quality Gothic • 16 dot high quality Gothic • TrueType Numerical
• Stroke*2
Number Size
9-6 9.2 Setting Time Display

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Shape
COMMENT DISPLAY
GOT display
Shape Settings
Frame Color 11
Plate Color
Plate
Frame color
ALARM
Text Color Select the color for displaying numbers.
Object Name
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log. 12
The object name is also displayed in other than [Time Setting] tab.
LEVEL
POINT
13
Figure frame area
PANELMETER

Plate area : Area that displays the color set 14

Plate area
LINE GRAPH
Figure frame area
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
9.2 Setting Time Display 9-7

 Extended tab
Set the security, layer, and category.

Layer

Category
9-8 9.2 Setting Time Display

9
 Script tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30.3 Object Script
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
-
: Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
13
PANELMETER
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
14
width
LINE GRAPH
height

15
Time Setting Text Color text_color 3)

TREND GRAPH

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following. 16
BAR GRAPH
9.2 Setting Time Display 9-9

9.3 Relevant settings

The date display/time display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
9 - 10 9.3 Relevant settings

9
9.4 Precautions
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the precautions for using the date display/time display function.
DISPLAY
Up to two objects can be set. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(1) GOT clock
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock used for date display/time display, refer to the following.
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


9
10. COMMENT DISPLAY
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Bit comment
10.1 Setting Bit Comment
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
11
X10=OFF X10=ON
Pro. line con. Pro. line con.

Conv. st. During oper.
ALARM
Comment when bit Comment when bit
device is OFF device is ON
 Word comment 12
10.2 Setting Word Comment
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to word device value.
D100 1 D100 10 D100 100
LEVEL
Pro. line con. Pro. line con. Pro. line con.
During oper. Conv. st. Completed 13
Display comment of Display comment of Display comment of
PANELMETER
comment No.1 comment No.10 comment No. 100
 Simple comment
10.3 Setting Simple Comment
The function enables the GOT to display the comment without setting the device. 14
Comment No.1
Pro. line con.

LINE GRAPH
Always display comment

of comment No.1
15
TREND GRAPH
POINT
Comment displayed by comment display
The comment to be displayed by comment display needs to be registered in advance.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration 16
BAR GRAPH
10 - 1

Example
Switch all the comment on the screen Used with a level display
(Comment display (bit/word)) (Comment display (bit/word))
Comment tab Extended tab
Production
Production Production
Actual
50 Line 1 50 Targ. 1 comp. Targ. 2 comp.
150 Line 2 150
POINT
Comment display
(1) How to adjust objects in which shape is set.
Adjust the display position of the object and shape after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
D10
Object outline frame

Shape

(2) Displaying comments out of the display range
(a) Wrapping the text
When the comment is out of the horizontal display range, display the remaining part in the next line.
Comment
Please check the frame.
Please check
the frame.
Comment display
When the comment is out of the vertical display range, only the part within the display range is displayed.
Comment
OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
NG: Res. aft. switch. NG

OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
Comment display
(b) Not wrapping the text.

If the item [Adjust Text Size] is selected, the font size changes automatically.
For details of setting methods, refer to the following.
10.1 Comment tab (2) Comment Group
10.2 Comment tab(2) Comment Group
10.3 Setting item
HINT
Display of the numbers of digits and rows of the comment
When the comment display is selected on the screen editor, the status bar displays the maximum numbers of digits
and rows of the comment according to the object size.
Selecting the stroke font does not display the maximum numbers of digits and rows on the status bar.
10 - 2

9
10.1 Setting Bit Comment
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
1. Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] from the menu.
10
2. Click the position where the bit comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.
COMMENT DISPLAY
3. Double click the arranged bit comment to display the setting dialog box.
Set the shapes and devices to be monitored.
11
ALARM
12
Preview list
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Comment
Select the bit.
Display Type

Preview List Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF. 14
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 Shape setting LINE GRAPH
When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly display the
overlapped characters when updating data.
Shape GOT display

15
TREND GRAPH
A part of characters that A part of characters displayed

overlaps with the figure before updating the data remains
Figure frame area
frame area is not displayed. in the figure frame area.
16
BAR GRAPH
10.1 Setting Bit Comment 10 - 3

Shape Attribute Frame color

Plate Color ABCDEFG Plate color
Object Name
POINT
Figure frame area


Plate area
Figure frame area
10 - 4 10.1 Setting Bit Comment

9
 Comment tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select [Comment Type] in the comment display to use comments set in the basic comment and comment group.
The following shows the [Comment Type].
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Set the [Basic Comment] as the comment to be displayed.

Basic Comment
(1) Basic Comment
LEVEL
Comment Type
Set the [Comment Group] as the comment to be displayed.
Comment Group
(2) Comment Group
13
For Basic Comment and Comment Group, refer to the following.
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(1) Basic Comment
Preview list
Comment string
Preview List Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.
OFF=ON Select this item to configure the same settings for ON and OFF.
Set the copy range.

OFF -> ON Used to copy the set attribute.

/
Copy OFF ON :The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.
ON -> OFF
Copy ON OFF :The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.
HQ Type Select a font.

• 16dot HQ Gothic • 16dot HQ Mincho
Text Size
Common (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Settings (ON/
OFF) Select the text position.
Select the method for displaying the comments.

Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Display Type
Text : Input characters, and set the contents to be displayed on the GT Designer3
screen.
Comment
Set the comment number of the comment to be displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box
Comment No. appears, and the comment can be edited.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Change Attribute of
Comment Setting : Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected. 10
Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None/Low/Medium, High)
COMMENT DISPLAY
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Comment string
Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
Comment
Use High Quality Select this item to use the HQ font set in [HQ Type] of [Common Settings (ON/OFF)]. 11
Font When this item is not selected, the content will be displayed in 16-dot standard font.

ALARM
The display format is not available for multiple settings. 12
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the comment/shape. (None/Low/Medium/High)
LEVEL
Edit the displayed comments for the basic comment. 13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed.
The numbers of characters, digits, and rows of the input comment are displayed on the upper right of the comment input 15
field.
characters.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Comment Group
Preview list
Set the copy range.


OFF → ON /
ON → OFF

(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
Preview Column No.

Fixed
Comment Group
When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
Adjust Text After selecting, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
Size (8 to 128 dots)
Font Select a font.

• Stroke
Text Size
Common Settings
(ON/OFF) (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display Type
Text : Input characters, and set the contents to be displayed on the GT Designer3
DISPLAY
screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears,
Comment No. and the comment can be edited. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Change : Displays the text in solid format.
Attribute of
Comment : Displays the text in raised format.
Setting Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected. 11
Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Comment , , and cannot be set simultaneously.
ALARM
Comment Up to 512 characters can be entered.
string Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
Use High Select this item to use the HQ font set in [HQ Type] of [Common Settings (ON/OFF)].
12
Quality Font When this item is not selected, the content will be displayed in 16-dot standard font.

LEVEL
13
PANELMETER

14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH

field. 16
characters.
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab
Set the method for displaying security, offset and comment (such as Display Mode/Display Start Row).
Security Level

Select the display mode when overlaying a comment with a level display.
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level.
Extended
FULL
XOR : Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.

Display Mode
20% 40%
The level can be distinguished from the comment.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.6 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select this item to change the line number of display start when multiple comments are set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device value to
DISPLAY
be set.
After selecting, set the device.
Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT

10
Display Start
COMMENT DISPLAY
Insp.1 Device: D10 1
Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp.
Row Start displaying from the
Line2 Conv. insp. first line of comment.
Line3 Insp.2 Device value
Line4 Proc. prod. insp. changes from 1 to 3
Line5 Insp.3
Line6 Line insp. Insp.2 Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
Start displaying from the
third line of comment.
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
11
Device : Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the device value
to be set.
ALARM
Extended (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Number of Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT

12
Display Rows Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp. Display 2 lines of comment.
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line5 Insp.3
LEVEL
Conv. insp. Display 4 lines of comment.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment is not displayed. 13

PANELMETER
China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.
KANJI Region
14
LINE GRAPH
Layer
Category
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

9
 Script tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30.3 Object Script
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12

LEVEL
PANELMETER
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4) 14
width
height
Frame Color frame_color LINE GRAPH

Device/Style

15
Comment
TREND GRAPH
Blink blink 3)
Security Level security 4)

16
Extended Display Mode draw_mode 3)

BAR GRAPH

10.2 Setting Word Comment
1. Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Word Comment] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the word comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click on the arranged word comment to display the setting dialog box.
Set the shapes and devices to be monitored.
Preview list
Comment Display
Select the word.
Type

Device

Data Type
Preview list*1 Displays the set status for each state.
/ The display of the [Preview List] is switched.
Deletes the state.
10 - 14 10.2 Setting Word Comment

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly display the
overlapped characters when updating data.
COMMENT DISPLAY
GOT display
Shape
11
A part of characters that A part of characters displayed
Figure frame area overlaps with the figure before updating the data remains
frame area is not displayed. in the figure frame area.
Shape Attribute Frame color

Plate Color ABCDEFG
ALARM
Plate color
Object Name
12
*1 State
LEVEL
(1) Display for state other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is other than the one set on the [Device/Style] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on
the [Extended] tab. 13
When states are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
PANELMETER
Example: Monitored device : 100
Data format : Signed BIN16
Registered comment : Comment No.1• • • • • • The production volume is 1 set
Comment No.100• • • • Over 100 sets
Comment No.101• • • • Production completed 14
Operation priority for
LINE GRAPH
State No. Range Comment
repeated setting
High 1 $V<=0 Not displayed
2 1<=$V<=100 Indirect
3 101<=$V<=199 No.100
Normal case
- No.101
15
Low (State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
10.2 Setting Word Comment 10 - 15

Comment is not displayed when the monitor device

State 1
value is 0 or lower. ($V<=0)
Comment corresponding to the monitor device value

State 2 is displayed when monitor device value is between 1 Production volume Over 100 sets
is 1 set.
and 100 (1<=$V<=100).
Comment No.100 is displayed when monitor device

State 3 Over 100 sets
value is between 101 and 199 (101<=$V<=199).
Normal case Comment No.101 is displayed when state is other Production is

(State 0) than state 1 to 3. completed.
POINT
Figure frame area


Plate area
Figure frame area

9
 Comment tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select [Comment Type] in the comment display to use comments set in the basic comment and comment group.
The following shows the [Comment Type].
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Preview list
11
ALARM
12
Set the [Basic Comment] as the comment to be displayed.

Basic Comment
(1) Basic Comment
Comment Type
Set the [Comment Group] as the comment to be displayed.
LEVEL
Comment Group
(2) Comment Group
For Basic Comment and Comment Group, refer to the following. 13

PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(1) Basic Comment
Preview list
/ The display of the [Preview List] is switched.
Deletes the state.
Text Size Select the text size to be displayed.

Common Select the text position.
Settings of
State

Hold : Select this item to hold current comment display.
Display Type Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Indirect Device: Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to monitor device
value.
Comment
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box
Comment No. appears, and the comment can be edited.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Change Attribute of
COMMENT DISPLAY
Comment Text Color Select a color for the text to be displayed.

: Displays the text in solid format. 11
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the comment/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High)
ALARM
12
Edit the displayed comments for the basic comment.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed. 14
field.
LINE GRAPH
characters.
characters, the line feed is counted as one row. 15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Comment Group
Preview list
Preview list Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.
/ The display of the [Preview list] is switched.
Deletes the state.

Fixed
Comment Group
Font Select a font.

• Stroke
Text Size
Common Settings
of State (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Hold : Select this item to hold current comment display.
Display Type
DISPLAY
Indirect Device: Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to monitor device value.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears,
Comment No. and the comment can be edited. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Change : Displays the text in solid format.
Attribute of
Comment
Setting Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected. 11
Comment Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
Input the text to be displayed. Up to 512 characters can be entered.

Comment
ALARM
Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
string

12
LEVEL
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the comment/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High) 13

Set the comment No. of the comment to be virtually displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
PANELMETER
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears, and the comment
Preview No. can be edited.

14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH

field. 16
characters.
BAR GRAPH
• Number of rows: The number of rows of the comment is displayed. When only a line feed is inserted without characters,
the line feed is counted as one row.

 Extended tab
Set the method for displaying security, offset and comment (such as Display Mode/Display Start Row).

Select the display mode when overlaying a comment with a level display.
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level.
Extended
FULL
Display Mode XOR : Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.
20% 40%
The level can be distinguished from the comment.


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device value
DISPLAY
to be set.
Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT

10
Display Start
COMMENT DISPLAY
Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp.
Row Start displaying from the
Line2 Conv. insp. first line of comment.
Line5 Insp.3
Proc. prod. insp.
Start displaying from the
third line of comment.
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
11
Extended
Device : Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
ALARM
Number of Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT

12
Display Rows Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp. Display 2 lines of comment.
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line5 Insp.3
LEVEL
Conv. insp. Display 4 lines of comment.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment is not displayed. 13

Switches the layer to allocate the object.(Front/Back)
Layer
PANELMETER
Category
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigge

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
None Select this item to not execute [Data Operation]/[Script].
Data Operation Select this item to execute [Data Operation].
LEVEL
Operation Type
Script Select this item to execute [Script].

13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(1) Data operation


After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in
[Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask

Bit Shift
Left : Left shift
Right : Right shift

(2) Script
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30.3 Object Script
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box 13
PANELMETER
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
14
width
height
LINE GRAPH
Device/Style
Text Size (Y) text_height 3) 15

Comment
TREND GRAPH
Blink blink 3)
Security Level security 4)
Extended Display Mode draw_mode 3)

16

BAR GRAPH

10.3 Setting Simple Comment
1. Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Simple Comment] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the simple comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged simple comment to display the setting dialog box.
 Setting item
Set the comment No. to be displayed in [Simple Comment Display], and the view format for the comment.
Comment Group Set the comment group No. to be used.

No. When a nonexistent comment group No. is set, no comment is displayed.
Preview Column
Displays the comment of specified column No. on GT Designer3.
No.
Set the comment No. to be displayed.

Comment No.
When the comment No. is set to "0", no comment is displayed.
Set the font and displayed position of the comment.
Font Select a font.

• 12dot Standard*1 • 16dot Standard • 12dot HQ Mincho
Text Size • Stroke*2


Size/Alignment Alignment : Select the horizontal position.

Minimum
Specify a minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment.
Size
10 - 28 10.3 Setting Simple Comment

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Change Attribute of
COMMENT DISPLAY

: Displays the text in solid format. 11
ALARM
Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back) 12

Layer (Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Superimposition setting

Category
LEVEL
*1 These object functions cannot be set for GT1020.
*2 These object functions cannot be set for GT10. 13
PANELMETER
The comment display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects
[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT Designer3]
TREND GRAPH
overlapped on GOT.
16
BAR GRAPH

10.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using comment display function.

(2) Comment to be used
For comment display, the comment that is created by Basic Comment or Comment Group is used.
(3) Object arrangement
When switching language, some comments registered may not be displayed within the comment display range.
Examine the number of characters of the comments registered before setting the object display range.
The comment display range can be confirmed on the GT Designer3 screen by changing the Preview Column
No.
(4) Using comment group
When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, a comment is not
displayed.
(5) Overlaying with level display
When overlaying a comment with a level display on the same layer or overlaying them using the front/back layer,
some restrictions are present as follows.
(a) Restrictions on overlaying a comment with a level display on the same layer
• Only one comment can be overlaid on each level display.
At arranging two or more comments, the second or later comments are not displayed.
• Comment cannot be set to blink (flickering display).
• Comment cannot be reversed.
• The comment out of the level display frame is not XOR-displayed.
• When a shape is set to a comment, the level is displayed only inside the shape.
• The display is updated only at changing the monitor device value of the level.
The display is not updated at changing the monitor device value set to the comment display.
• When the comment is set to display in bold, solid, or raised style, some characters may not be displayed
or the character color may be incorrect.
(b) Restrictions on overlaying a comment with a level display by arranging them on the front layer and back
layer separately
• The comment display is not XOR-displayed.

ALARM


9
11. ALARM
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
This chapter explains the functions that display following alarms.
 Alarm types
The GOT can detect the alarms as shown below.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(1) Displaying the user-created comment as an alarm message
It is possible to display the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
(Specific to advanced user alarm observation, advanced user alarm display, and user alarm display)
This feature is suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
M100: OFF
M101: OFF
ON
ON
11
M100 Temp. error M100Temp. error

Replace the fuse
ALARM
M101 Fuse error of theFuse
M101 powererror
module with
new one.
Detail Detail
Touch!
12
(2) Displaying an error of GOT, controller or network as an alarm

It is possible to display the error code and error message when an error occurs on the GOT, controller or
LEVEL
network.(Specific to advanced system alarm monitoring, advanced system alarm display, and system alarm
display)
This feature is suitable for the case in which the GOT, controller or network error needs to be displayed. 13
PANELMETER
Error
occurance
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30
9 AC down error
803 Transient error

14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11 - 1

 Functions for displaying alarms

The functions for displaying alarms are as shown below.
• Alarm function 11.1.1 Alarm function
• Advanced alarm function 11.1.2 Advanced alarm function
POINT
(1) When using GT11 or GT10
The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, and GT SoftGOT1000 only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
11.1.1 Alarm function
(2) Comment displayed when an alarm occurs

To display the user-created comments as alarm messages, it is necessary to register the comments in
advance.

Function Display comment
User alarm display, System alarm display Register to the basic comment.
Register to the basic comment or

Alarm function Alarm history display
the comment group.
Scrolling alarm display
Advanced user alarm list, Register to the comment group.

Advanced alarm function Advanced system alarm list,
Advanced alarm popup display
11 - 2

9
11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the alarm-relevant functions, and differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm
function.
DISPLAY
Select the alarm by referring this section.
Specific to Advanced
Description with Alarm Function applies to the advanced alarm function only.
Description without icon is common to the alarm function and advanced alarm function.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Displaying preset comments at alarm occurrence
Any comment can be registered for displaying as a user alarm.
M100 : OFF ON
Set a comment M101 : OFF ON Display
11
Detailed display
Temp. error Temp. error

Replace the fuse
Fuse error of theFuse
powererror
module with
new one.
Detail Detail
ALARM
Touch!
Alarm Function
12
(1) Displaying the comments for each hierarchy
For the advanced user alarm function, The different comments for an alarm can be displayed on the three
hierarchies (higher, middle and general), respectively.
LEVEL
11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
Therefore, it is possible to provide the alarm information ranging from simple to details, in the hierarchical order.
13
Display of higher
hierarchy alarms
Factory Occurred Comment
PANELMETER
04/6/1 Line1 error
Line1 04/6/1 Line2 error The alarms occurred
Upper
hierarchy
on the factory lines
Lower
hierarchy Check are displayed.
Line2
Touch! 14
Switching from higher hierarchy
to middle hierarchy
LINE GRAPH
Display of middle
Occurred Comment hierarchy alarms
04/6/1 Equipment A error
04/6/1 Equipment B error The alarms occurred
Equipment A Equipment B Upper
on line 2 are
displayed.
15
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy Check
TREND GRAPH
Touch!
Switching from middle

hierarchy to general hierarchy
Display of general
Occurred Comment
alarm
Power
module
Driving
module
Control
module
Power
module
Driving
module
Control
module
04/6/1
04/6/1
Pwr. module error
Control module error The module on which 16
Upper the alarm occurred
hierarchy
Lower
Check actually is displayed
Error Error Error hierarchy
with details.
BAR GRAPH
occurrence occurrence occurrence
11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms 11 - 3

Alarm Function
(2) Switching the language

Switch the language of the comment displayed on the screen by the device value (language switching device)
Comment group settings
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error 04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error 04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error 04/6/1 05:22:35
Japanese English Japanese English
Language Switching Device : 1 2
POINT
(1) Settings for displaying the comment on each of three hierarchies.
The comments can be set in a single group or divided into multiple groups.
Therefore, it is possible to classify comment groups for each hierarchy, by dividing the comments into multiple
comment groups.
Setting the comments of higher, middle and Setting and dividing the comments of
general hierarchies in a comment group. higher, middle and general hierarchies
into multiple comment groups.
(2) Hierarchy displayed when an alarm occurs

The hierarchy of the comments displayed at alarm occurrence (initial display hierarchy) can be set.
Use the touch switch or similar to move to upper or lower hierarchy.
HINT
Language switching
11 - 4 11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

9
 Confirming device status by displaying information on alarms occurred (occurrence time
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
and so on)
The alarm function can display the following items (6 types).
DISPLAY
• Occurred time • Comment • Restored time
• Checked time • Cumulative time*1 • Occurred frequency
The above information help to confirm the device statuses and determine the cause of productivity deterioration. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Alarm Function
In addition, the following items are available.

• Alarm status • Down time*2 • Level*3 • Group*3
*1 Total alarm occurrence time (including the time when alarms occurred in the past)
*2 Time from alarm occurrence to restoration
11
*3 It is possible to decide the contents to be displayed for each level and group by setting these items for each alarm.
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Alarm display operation

(1) Change the display order by the settings
Set the order in which alarms will be displayed.
It can be set in the ascending/descending order of the occurrence date or device.
When displaying alarms in the descending order of occurrence date
Occurred Comment The display items can be

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
changed by the settings.
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
The display order can be set.
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
Alarm Function
The display content can be sorted in the ascending/descending order of occurred date, comment, alarm status,
restored date, checked date, occurred frequency, cumulative time, down time, level, or group.
D10 : 0 D10 : 1
Occurred Comment Restore Occurred Comment Restore

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 04/6/1 11:50:57 04/6/1 02:30:16 Motor error 04/6/1 19:18:20
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error 04/6/1 13:30:14 04/6/1 04:33:12 In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error 04/6/1 09:30:18 04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error 04/6/1 13:30:14
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error 04/6/1 11:35:52 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 04/6/1 11:50:57
04/6/1 04:33:12 In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49 04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error 04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 02:30:16 Motor error 04/6/1 19:18:20 04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error 04/6/1 09:30:18
Displaying alarms in the order of occurrence date Displaying alarms in the order of recovery date
HINT
Using the device value to change the display order
The display order can be changed by using the device value as well.
(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display
(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display

(a) Displaying/Hiding an alarm
An alarm can be displayed or hidden using the device.
M100 : OFF ON M100 : ON OFF
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error
Alarms are displayed. Alarms are hidden.

9
Alarm Function
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(b) Refining the display content
It is possible to refine and decide the display content using the device.
(Display content can be refined according to the hierarchy, level, group, display order and the alarm ID and
DISPLAY
comment group set in the advanced user alarm.)
When refining to the alarms of group 2
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred Comment Group
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 2

04/6/1 09:45:30 Oil error 2
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuel error 2
11
Example)
Set device A to group 1,
ALARM
and device B to group 2.
As level or group can be set for alarms, the display content can be refined for each level or group. (Also,
two or more items can be specified as refinement conditions.) 12
(3) Setting the display color according to alarm types

The alarm types and others can be identified visually when different font colors are displayed on each alarm
comment.
LEVEL
Font color settings for the each alarm function are shown below.
Alarm Status (Occur, Check,

13
Function Group comment
Restored), Level, Group
User alarm display
PANELMETER
System alarm display
Advanced alarm
Advanced user alarm display
Advanced system alarm display 14
function
LINE GRAPH
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45
Fuse error
Oil error
Alarm types and so on can
be identified visually!
15
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Display alarm only when alarm occurs

By using the advanced alarm popup display function and the scrolling alarm display function, the GOT can display an
alarm without alarm display objects. (only when the alarm occurs.)
The GOT displays alarms even some objects are placed on the alarm display position on the screen.
Alarm Function
For the advanced alarm function, the screen switching, stage hierarchy switching, and detailed display are possible
when touching the advanced alarm popup display that is displayed on the screen.
X1 : OFF ON
Alarm Processing Screen

A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
Occurred Comment
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
04/6/1 Temp. error
04/6/1 Fuse error
Upper hierarchy Check

Error Error occurrence
Displaying an alarm regardless of Touch! Screen Switching/

the screen (scrolled from right to left) Stage hierarchy switching is possible.
POINT
Availability of this function
(1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, and GT SoftGOT1000
Only the advanced alarm popup display function can display alarms regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the advanced alarm popup display function.
(2) For GT11 and GT10
Only the scrolling alarm display function can display alarms regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the scrolling alarm display function.
 Scrolling comments on screen

Comments can be scrolled across the screen from right to left when an alarm occurs.
This floating alarm display is suitable when displaying an alarm in small area, as all the parts of the comment can be
scrolled and completely displayed on the screen.
Occurred Comment Restore Occurred Comment Restore Check Occurred Comment Restore Check
04/6/1 P/S 04/6/1 Error occurred on 04/6/1 P/S module
04/6/1 Drive 04/6/1 Error occurred on 04/6/1 drive module
04/6/1 Control 04/6/1 Error occurred on 04/6/1 control module
Scrolling comments across the screen from left to right.

For each alarm function, whether or not to set the scrolling alarm display is shown below.
Function Scrolling alarm display
User alarm display

System alarm display
Alarm function
Alarm history display *1,
Advanced user alarm display,

Advanced alarm function Advanced system alarm display,
*1 GT10 is available only.

9
 Writing alarm data into device
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The total No. of alarms which occurred so far and which are currently occurring can be output to the device.
D200 : 15
DISPLAY
D201 : 3
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 Temp. error 10
04/6/1 Fuse error
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/6/1 Oil error
Details
Total alarms : 15
Current alarms : 3
11
Alarm Function
ALARM
The alarm information can be written to the device by touching the corresponding part.
The following shows the information (15 types) that can be written.
• Alarm ID • Occurred Time • Level 12

• Comment Group No. • Restored Date • Group
• Comment No. • RestoredTime • Occurred Frequency
• Alarm Status • Checked Date • Cumulative Time
• Occurred Date • Checked Time • Down Time
LEVEL
This enables the detailed message on the selected alarm to appear as a comment.
The data, which cannot be displayed due to insufficient screen area, can be written in the device.
13
Switching the comment on the screen
PANELMETER
according to the value written in the
Alarm on line 1 being selected device (comment display is used.)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
14
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
LINE GRAPH
Touch!
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 User-Setting of alarm monitoring device

The alarm monitoring device can be set freely by the user.
In the alarm function, the monitoring device and alarm display can be set on a single setting screen. (The monitoring
device can be set for each object placed.)
Monitoring device settings
Alarm display settings

Display
M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error
Alarm Function
In the advanced alarm function, the monitor device (advanced user alarm observation, advanced system alarm
observation) and alarm display (advanced user alarm display, advanced system alarm display) are set on the
respective screens.
This enables the following settings to be made.
Advanced alarm observation Advanced alarm display Display
Alarm ID1 Make the settings so that

the alarm will be displayed Occurred Comment
Alarm ID2 as alarm ID1. 04/6/1 Temp. error
04/6/1 Fuse error
Alarm ID3 04/6/1 Oil error
In addition, set the switching
Switch
device of alarm ID (advanced
user alarm observation) to
GD0.
GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.
Advanced user alarm: up to 255 GD0=2: The alarm of alarm ID2 is displayed.
Advanced system alarm: up to one GD0=3: The alarm of alarm ID3 is displayed.
Make multiple monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation), and switch the alarms on the screen.
Display
Advanced alarm observation Advanced alarm display Occurred Comment

04/6/1 Temp. error
Alarm ID1 Make the settings so that the

alarm will appear as alarm
ID1 (single-line display).
Make the settings so that Single-line display

the alarm will appear as
alarm ID1 (multiple-line
display).
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 Temp. error
04/6/1 Fuse error
04/6/1 Oil error
Multiple-line display
Providing different displays based on the same monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation).

9
 Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure) and utilization of stored data
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure)
By storing the alarm data as an alarm log file, the alarm history can be retained when GOT is powered off.
DISPLAY
(a) Storing the data in a memory card
The user alarm history can be stored in a memory card.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
Alarm data can be stored

in the memory card.
11
Alarm Function
The advanced alarm function supports the following operations.
ALARM
• Storing the histories of user alarms and system alarms in a memory card
• Selecting whether to store alarm data or not for each monitoring device setting (advanced user alarm
observation, advanced system alarm observation) 12
• Setting a folder to store alarm data and the file name for each monitoring device setting (advanced user
alarm observation, advanced system alarm observation)
• Storing alarm data at an arbitrary timing using the device (rise, fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF
Sampling).
• Automatically reading alarm data from a memory card when the GOT is powered on (if the memory card
LEVEL
has an alarm log file)
13
Alarm Function
(b) Storing the data in the SRAM user area (GT16 and GT14 only)
PANELMETER
The history of advanced user alarm or advanced system alarm can be stored in the SRAM user area.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
14
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
LINE GRAPH
15
SRAM
TREND GRAPH
Alarm data can be stored

in the SRAM user area.
• Always storing the latest alarm data.

• Selecting whether to store alarm data or not for each monitoring device setting (advanced user alarm
16
observation, advanced system alarm observation)
• Automatically reading alarm data from the SRAM user area that includes an alarm log file when the GOT
is power off and on.
BAR GRAPH

(2) Output to a CSV file

Alarm data can be output to a CSV file.
The alarm data output to a CSV file can be displayed by on PC and so on.
Occurred Comment
04/6/10 14:52:52 Battely error
CSV file
04/6/10 15:05:30 Internal pressure error
04/6/10 15:05:45 Fuel error
Store the output data within a PC in either of the following methods.

• Reading resource data by GT Designer3
(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data
• Reading the CSV file stored in the memory card by using a personal computer
Alarm Function
Alarm data can be converted into a text file as well.

(3) Converting an alarm log file in the memory card
Alarm log files can be converted to CSV files or Unicode text files.
The following methods are available.
• Converting with GOT utility
• Converting with Convert Trigger

11.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
• Converting with GT Designer3
11.3.1 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by using GT Designer 3

9
Alarm Function
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(4) Utilizing the alarm data in the memory card
The stored alarm data can be displayed in graph form on the GOT.
DISPLAY
Historical graph Total graph
The history of alarm occurrence is displayed in a historical graph.

Alarm history is displayed as the symbols below. The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed in a total graph.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
: Occurred time : Checked time : Restored time
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

This section explains alarm functions by the type and differences among the functions.
 Alarm function types

The alarm functions are classified as shown below.
Alarm function
User alarm display System alarm display Alarm history display Scrolling alarm display
User System User User
User System User User

alarm alarm alarm alarm
Select an alarm function from the display alarms, the display items, and the features.
Function Display alarm Display item Feature Reference
User alarm display User alarm Comment, Occurred (1) User alarm display
Error code, Display each object that is

System alarm display System alarm Error message, monitored by each device. (2) System alarm display
Occurred Time
Comment, Occurred,
Displaying an alarm history and
Restored, Checked,
Alarm history display User alarm storing the data into a memory (3) Alarm history display
Cumulative Time,
card are available.
Occurred Frequency
With or without objects, alarms

Scrolling alarm display User alarm Comment, Occurred (4) Scrolling alarm display
can be displayed on the screen.

(1) User alarm display

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The function that displays the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
Suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
DISPLAY
M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
M100 Temp. error M100Temp. error
Replace the fuse
M101 Fuse error of theFuse
M101 powererror
module with
new one.
Detail Detail
Touch!
(2) System alarm display

11
The function that displays the error code and error message when an error occurs on the controller, GOT or
network.
Use this function when displaying an error on the controller, GOT or network.
ALARM
Error
occurance 12
9 AC down error
803 Transient error
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(3) Alarm history display

When a user alarm occurs, this function stores the user-created comments, occurred time, restored time,
checked time, cumulative time (time from alarm occurrence to fixing), and occurred frequency and displays the
alarm history in list.
Occurred Message Restore Check

1. Alarm
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
Occurred 04/06/01 12:05 Fuse error
Up Down Check
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are
displayed when X0 turns ON.
M100 : OFF ON
Replace the fuse of Alarm details, error measures and

2. Alarm Detail the power module in so on are displayed.
Display Line1 with new one.
Up Down Check
Alarm details are displayed on the comment window, base screen or window screen.

3. Alarm 04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
Checked 04/06/01 12:05 Fuse error 12:10
Up Down Check
Time
Alarm checked time is
displayed by the touch switch.
Create the touch switch by setting a key code on it.
System Restoration

4. After System 04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
Restoration 04/06/01 12:05 Fuse error 12:45 12:10
Up Down Check
The restoration time
is displayed.
M100 : ON OFF

(4) Scrolling alarm display

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This function displays the user-created comments and the occurred time when a user alarm occurs.
Even if the alarm display object is not allocated on the screen, the GOT can display long comments that extend
the alarm display area.
DISPLAY
X1:OFF ON
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Error Error occurrence occurrence
11
POINT
(1) Comments need to be set
The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
ALARM
Function Display comment
User alarm display, System alarm display Register to the basic comment. 12
Register to the basic comment or
the comment group
Scrolling alarm display Register to the comment group.
(2) Alarms that can be stored in a memory card
LEVEL
Alarms can be stored by the alarm history display function only.
Since the system alarm cannot be set in the alarm history display setting, the system alarm history cannot be
stored in a memory card.
13
Use the advanced alarm function when storing the system alarm history.
(3) Using the user alarm display and alarm history display, or the system alarm display and alarm history
PANELMETER
display together.
The user alarm display and alarm history display, or the system alarm display and alarm history display can be
used together.
14
HINT
LINE GRAPH
(1) Details and usage of each function
For the details and usage, refer to the following.
11.5 Alarm History Display
15
11.6 User Alarm Display
11.7 System Alarm Display
TREND GRAPH
11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

(2) Differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm function
For the differences, refer to the following.
11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms 16
BAR GRAPH

11.1.2 Advanced alarm function
The advanced alarm functions are more advanced than the alarm functions.
POINT
When using GT11 or GT10
The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, and GT SoftGOT1000 only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
 Advanced alarm function types

Make the settings of the advanced alarm function in the advanced alarm observation and advanced system alarm
observation.
The set alarms are displayed as the advanced user alarm display, advanced system alarm display, or advanced
alarm popup display.
Advanced alarm function
Advanced alarm settings
Advanced user Advanced system

alarm observation alarm observation
System
User
Advanced Advanced
user alarm system alarm
Advanced alarm display

User System
Advanced user Advanced system Advanced Advanced

alarm display alarm display user alarm system alarm
User System
User System
Advanced Advanced
user alarm system alarm Advanced Advanced
user alarm system alarm
A series of operations from advanced alarm settings to display is shown below.

9
1. Setting the advanced alarm observation
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced User Alarm Observation] or [Advanced System Alarm Observation]
from the menu.
DISPLAY
Advanced user alarm Advanced system alarm
observation settings observation settings
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
10
Advanced System Alarm
COMMENT DISPLAY
Advanced user alarm observation can be set for Only one advanced system alarm observation object
multiple user IDs. (Up to 255 objects) can be set.
11
2. Object Placement
Place the [Advanced User Alarm Display] and [Advanced System Alarm Display] for displaying the alarm set in
the step 1.
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced User Alarm Observation] or [Advanced System Alarm Observation]
ALARM
from the menu.
To display alarms regardless of the presence/absence of the object (regardless of the display screen), place
[Advanced Alarm Popup Display].
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced Alarm Popup Display] from the menu. 12
Placement as advanced Placement as advanced system Setting of advanced
user alarm display *1 alarm display *2 alarm popup display
Base screen 1 (The occurrence date, Base screen 3 (The system alarms of all Alarms are displayed on the screen
LEVEL
comment, and restoration date of the alarm statuses are displayed.) regardless of the presence/absence of the
set as alarm ID1 are displayed.) object for the advanced alarm display.
Occurred Comment Restore Occurred Comment Restore A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348
13
PANELMETER
Make the settings so that Make the settings so that advanced An error has occurred
alarm ID1 will appear. system alarms will appear.
Base screen 2 (The occurrence date, Window screen 2 (The system alarms that Set the method for displaying alarms from
comment, and restoration date of the alarm are currently occurring are displayed.) the following.
set as alarm ID2 are displayed.) Display advanced user alarms only

Display advanced system alarms only
Display advanced user alarms or 14
advanced system alarms
LINE GRAPH
Make the settings so that Make the settings so that advanced
Window screen 1 (The comment, level, and

group of the alarm set as alarm ID1 are
displayed.)
15
Comment Level Group
TREND GRAPH
Make the settings so that

alarm ID1 will appear.
Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
Multiple objects, which are based on the
settings made in the advanced alarm
To display advanced alarms on the screen
regardless of the presence/absence of 16
observation, can be placed. observation, can be placed. display objects for advanced alarms, make
Different settings such as display content Different settings such as display the settings of advanced alarm popup
can be set for each object. content can be set for each object. display.
BAR GRAPH
*1 Select the advanced user alarm display when displaying alarms set in the advanced user alarm observation.
*2 Select the advanced system alarm display when displaying alarms set in the advanced system alarm observation.

POINT
Alarm ID
As the multiple sets of alarm settings can be made on the advanced alarm observation, each of the sets can be
identified by the alarm ID.
Specify the alarm ID for each set when placing the object as the advanced alarm display; the alarms appears
based on specified alarm IDs.
Advanced alarm observation settings
Advanced user alarms Advanced system alarms
Alarm ID1 Alarm ID2
Multiple sets of alarm settings!
Place as advanced alarm display
Occurred Comment Restore Occurred Comment Restore Occurred Comment Restore
Make the settings so that Make the settings so that Make the settings so that advanced
alarm ID1 will appear. alarm ID2 will appear. system alarms will appear.
Base screen 1 (The occurrence Base screen 2 (The occurrence Base screen 3 (The system alarms
date, comment, and restoration date, comment, and restoration of all statuses are displayed.)
date of the alarm set as alarm date of the alarm set as alarm
ID1 are displayed.) ID2 are displayed.)
Comment Level Group Occurred Comment Restore
Make the settings so that Make the settings so that advanced

Window screen 1 (The comment, Window screen 2 (The system

level, and group of the alarm set as alarms that are currently occurring
alarm ID1 are displayed.) are displayed.)

9
 Relation between advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display/advanced
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
alarm popup display
The advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display/advanced alarm popup display can be set separately.
The following setting patterns are available.
DISPLAY
(1) Placing different display contents based on a set of advanced alarm observation settings

10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Settings in Placement as
Occurred Comment
04/ 6/1 Temp. error
the advanced alarm advanced alarm display
observation
Display on a line according to the

Alarm ID1
settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object 11
placed as advanced alarm display) Single-line display
Display on multiple lines according
to the settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object Occurred Comment
ALARM
placed as advanced alarm display) 04/ 6/1 Temp. error
04/ 6/1 Fuse error
04/ 6/1 Oil error
12
Multiple-line display
Different settings can be made for each display
object! (initial display hierarchy, touch mode,
LEVEL
display item, display condition and so on)
13
(2) Switching the display on the object according to the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation.
PANELMETER
Settings in Placement as
the advanced alarm Advanced alarm display
advanced alarm display
observation
Alarm ID1 Set the switching device

14
Occurred Comment
(settings in the advanced of alarm ID (advanced user 04/6/1 Temp. error
alarm observation) alarm observation) to GD0 04/6/1 Fuse error
04/6/1 Oil error
LINE GRAPH
Alarm ID2
(settings in the advanced Switch
alarm observation)
GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.

GD0=2: The alarm of alarm ID2 is displayed. 15
Switching the display on a screen according to
the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
TREND GRAPH
advanced alarm observation!
16
BAR GRAPH

(3) Settings for whether to popup or hide advanced alarms
Settings in Settings in the

the advanced alarm Advanced Alarm Popup Display
advanced alarm popup display
observation
Alarm ID1
(Popup)
Settings of advanced alarm A 1254 A 1254
Alarm ID2 popup display B 348 B 348
(Hide) (Settings in the advanced

alarm popup display) 04/6/1 13:20 Advanced a
Only the errors of alarm ID1 and

Alarm ID3 alarm ID3 are popped up.
(Popup)
Whether to popup or hide can be

set for each set of advanced alarm
observation settings!
POINT
(1) When only advanced alarm observation settings are made
When only advanced alarm observation settings are made, no alarm is displayed.
However, the device is monitored and saved based on the advanced alarm observation settings.
To display alarms, select either advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup display.
Make the settings for each screen Use a set of settings throughout the project
Advanced Alarm Display Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display 10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 13:20 Power module
Occurred Message Restore Check Pop up generated alarms

04/6/1 10:25 Temp. error
04/6/1 8:05 Fuse error
regardless of the screen.
11:25 10:45
Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm
the details of the alarms and take measures.
(2) Comments displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object

The comments that will be displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object must be registered in
advance.
(Register the comments as a comment group.)
HINT
Details and usage of advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display
For details and usage, refer to the following.
11.3 Advanced User Alarm Display
11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

9
11.2 Advanced Alarm Common
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced Alarm Common] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Advanced Alarm Common
Set this item to control alarm log file conversion with a device.
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Convert alarm logs into Unicode
Select this item to set the device control for alarm log file conversion.
Text/CSV (project common)
Convert Trigger Device Set trigger device for file conversion.

13
The file to be converted is created with the advanced alarm observation. Set the device that specifies
Alarm ID Device
the ID for the advanced alarm observation.
PANELMETER
Convert-in-motion Notification
Select this item to set a device for notifying that a file is during conversion.
Device
Set a column No. for comment group used for file conversion.
Work with Language Switching Device : Switches the column No. using the language switching
File Convert Language
device.
(Advanced User Alarm)
Fixed Column No. : Fixes the column No. to be used. 14
After the selection, set a column No. to be used. (1 to 10)
Set system language used for file conversion.

Work with System Language Switching : Select this item to convert a file in system language
File Convert Language
LINE GRAPH
displayed on the GOT.
(Advanced System Alarm)
Fixed Language : Select this item to convert a file in specified language.
After the selection, specify the language.
POINT 15
To control alarm log file conversion with a device
TREND GRAPH
(1) When using Advanced User Alarm Observation

To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is required in the File Save tab of
[Advanced User Alarm Observation].
(2) When using Advanced System Alarm Observation 16
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is required in the File Save tab of
[Advanced System Alarm Observation].
BAR GRAPH
11.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings
11.2 Advanced Alarm Common 11 - 23

The advanced alarm observation is the function that saves the alarm occurrence time when the condition of the device
set for alarm detection is met (the bit turns OFF to ON/word device range) and the comments in the GOT internal
memory, and displays these information as alarm history in list format.
POINT
Before setting advanced user alarms
This section explains the advanced user alarm observation and advanced user alarm display of the advanced
alarm function.
Read the following before setting the advanced user alarm observation or advanced user alarm display.

System
User
Advanced user Advanced
alarm system alarm

User System
Advanced user Advanced system Advanced user Advanced
alarm display alarm display alarm system alarm
System
User
System
Advanced user Advanced User
alarm system alarm Advanced user Advanced

alarm system alarm
11 - 24 11.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

11.3.1 Before setting 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes the settings and function needed for using the advanced user alarm.
 Advanced user alarm observation
DISPLAY
(1) Alarm detection conditions and range
(a) Detection conditions
• Rising (OFF ON) or falling (ON OFF) of the bit device
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
• Value of the word device
(b) Collection timing (watch cycle)
Alarms are collected in the GOT buffering area and updated in the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s),
regardless of the screen displayed.
(c) Setting range
• Number of device points that can be monitored (alarm (device) points): 32767 max.
• Alarm collection pattern (alarm ID) 11
For advanced user alarms, multiple sets of alarm collection settings are made for each alarm purpose.
Up to 255 alarm collection patterns (alarm IDs) can be stored. (Up to 8 patterns for the GT12 only)
Set the alarm condition and collection timing (watch cycle)
ALARM
/alarm (device) points for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID : 10
(Alarms for maintenance) 12
Settings
D10 40 "Oil refill"
D20 500 "Fuel refill" Alarm condition : Word device value
Watch cycle : 3600s
Alarm (Device) points : 50
LEVEL
Alarm ID : 50
(Alarms for emergency use)
Settings Alarm ID: 255 max. (8 max. for GT12 only)
13
M10:OFF ON "Line A error stop"
Alarm condition : Bit device Alarm ID number can be set in the range
M20:OFF ON "Line B error stop"
of 1 to 32767.
M30:OFF ON "Line C error stop" Watch cycle : 2s
PANELMETER
M40:OFF ON "Line D error stop" Alarm (Device) points : 4 Alarm (Device) Points : 32767 max.
(Total number of alarm (device) points set
to alarm IDs)
14
Alarm ID : 900
Settings
M80:OFF ON "Confirm the battery"
M81:OFF ON "Confirm hydraulic pressure" Alarm condition : Bit device
LINE GRAPH
M82:OFF ON "Confirm internal pressure" Watch cycle : 60s
M83:OFF ON "Confirm the fuse" Alarm (Device) points : 4
15
POINT
TREND GRAPH
Settings for each alarm ID

The functions set for the advanced user alarm operate for each alarm ID.
When displaying alarms and saving the history simultaneously, set them with an alarm ID.
16
BAR GRAPH
11.3 Advanced User Alarm Display 11 - 25

(2) Collection flow and collection mode

(a) Collection flow
Advanced user alarms are collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory) in the
cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s) regardless of the screen displayed.
The collected user alarm data are temporarily saved in the buffering area, and then displayed as alarms on
the GOT.
Alarm data are collected in the buffering area in
the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s), regardless
User area of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
(C drive + add-on memory)
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
Buffering area
The advanced user alarm data

collected in the buffering area
are displayed as alarms.
HINT
(1) Clearing data in the buffering area
(3) Retention and clear of collected advanced user alarm data
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory)
Data to be collected differ depending on the collection mode.

(b) Alarm collection modes 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select the collection mode from three options: historical mode, cumulative mode, and only current alarm.
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
DISPLAY
Example: When displaying data by advanced user alarm display
Occurred Comment Status Restore Check OccurFreq DownTime Cum.Time Level Group
04/06/01 20:00 P/S module error 1 1 2 10
04/06/01 18:30 Hydraulic pressure error Chk 18:50 2 1 1
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 16:10 Drive moduIe error Chk 16:30 16:20 2 00:20 00:40 2 1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)
Description
Info displayed
Historical mode Cumulative mode Only Current Alarm 11
1) Occurred The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Comment The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
The status of the alarm on the screen is displayed.

Ocr: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
ALARM
3) Status
Chk: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr: Alarm has been restored
4) Restore The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed. 12

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.
Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
11.3.5 Useful operations and functions
5) Check
Comment Restore Check Comment Restore Check
LEVEL
Pwr. module error
Check Pwr. module error 19:00
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H) 13

The number of alarm occurrence times is
6) Occur Freq - -
displayed.
PANELMETER
Time from alarm occurrence to restoration is
7) Down Time - -
displayed
Total alarm occurrence time including the past

alarm occurrence time (total down time) is
displayed.
14
Cumulative Time
A/O A/O A/O
LINE GRAPH
8) Cum. Time - (1st) (2nd) (3rd) -
A/O ON ON ON
status
(M10) OFF OFF OFF
D/T A D/T B D/T C
A/O : Alarm occurrence status

D/T : Down time
time
15
The level set to the alarm is displayed.
TREND GRAPH
Alarms can be classified according to the alarm level.

9) Level Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or alarms at particular level only can be displayed.
The group set on the alarm is displayed.
10) Group
Alarms can be classified into some groups according to the content. 16
Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or alarms in a particular group only can be displayed.
BAR GRAPH

• Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the user area (C drive + add-on memory) every time an
alarm occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
• Cumulative mode
In this mode, the information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and
the cumulative alarm occurrence time collected for each alarm type.
• Only Current Alarm
In this mode, only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed.
The display disappears when the alarm is restored.

(c) Examples of alarm display 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section shows examples of advanced user alarm display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)

ON ON
DISPLAY
"Temp. error" OFF OFF
(M10 : OFF ON)
ON
10
"Fuse error"
COMMENT DISPLAY
(M20 : OFF ON)
11:30 12:00 15:30 18:25 19:00
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Alarm confirmation
by the user *1
*1 Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.( 11.3.5 Useful operations and functions)
11
• Historical mode
The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
Not collected in the historical mode.
ALARM
1) "Temp. error" occurs.
Occurred Comment Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error "Temp. error" occurs! 12
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
2) "Temp. error" is checked.
LEVEL
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 "Temp. error" is
Fuse error checked.
13
04/06/01 10:25
Check
3) Restored from "Temp. error"

(Key code: FFB4H)
PANELMETER
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 Restoration date/time
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is displayed.
14
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error A new line is added
LINE GRAPH
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 and displayed.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
5) "Temp. error" restored

Occurred Comment Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time 15
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 Restoration date/time
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 is displayed.
TREND GRAPH
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
16
BAR GRAPH

• Cumulative mode
The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the cumulative
alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 1 00:00 "Temp. error" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 1 00:00
2) "Temp. error" is checked

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 1 00:00 "Temp. error" is
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 1 00:00 checked
Check
3) Restored from "Temp. error" (Key code: FFB4H)

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 1 04:00 04:00 Restoration date/time,
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 12:00 1 00:00 down time, and cumulative
time are displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred Comment Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time The occurrence time when
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 2 04:00 the alarm occurred again is
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 12:00 1 00:00 displayed on the same line of
the alarm. Frequency is
increased by one.

Occurred Comment Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time Restoration date/time and
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 2 00:35 04:35 down time are displayed.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 12:00 1 00:00 The time when the alarm
occurred is added to
the cumulative time.

• Only Current Alarm 9

Only the alarms that are currently occurring are collected.
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Alarms are not collected in the no alarm collection.
DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error "Temp. error" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 "Temp. error" is
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error checked.
Check
11
3) Restored from "Temp. error" (Key code: FFB4H)
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error The restored alarm
is cleared.
ALARM
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurs again.
12
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error The alarm that occurred
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error again is displayed.
LEVEL
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
The restored alarm
is cleared.
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(3) Retention and clear of collected advanced user alarm data

Advanced user alarm data are saved in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory).
Advanced user alarm data are cleared at the following timings.
(a) Power-off or reset of GOT
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities
Item Description
Communication setting [Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]
Display [Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]

GOT setup
Operation [Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]
Program/data control OS and project writing
Debug & self

Self check [I/O check]
check
Main menu Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button
(c) OS and project data write, drive information delete and drive format
(d) Setting and operations by the user
Any history of restored alarms can be cleared by the user.
• Clear by device
All restored alarm data are cleared by turning on [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device].
• Clear by touch switch
One or all restored alarm logs can be cleared.
04/06/01 11:30 Hydraulic error 15:30 04/06/01 10:25 Drive module error
Delete
04/06/01 10:25 Drive module error 04/06/01 09:10 Control module error
04/06/01 09:10 Control module error
(Key code: clear one log FFB6H

clear all logs FFB7H)

(4) Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(a) Outline of data retention under power failure
By saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card or SRAM user area as alarm log files, the data are
retained even when the GOT is powered off.
DISPLAY
When the GOT is powered on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card or SRAM user area, the
GOT reads the alarm log file automatically and restores the history of the advanced user alarm saved
before the GOT is powered off.
Memory card
10
The timing of saving data in the memory card can be set freely.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Data (Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling)
are Data can be saved by pressing the touch switch as well.
stored
AAA BBB CCC AAA BBB CCC The status saved

AAA BBB CCC AAA BBB CCC before power-off
DDD EEE FFF
DDD EEE FFF
Current status 11
Power off Power on
The status saved before power-off
and the current status are displayed.
ALARM
SRAM user area
Data
12
are Alarm data saved in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
stored
LEVEL
DDD EEE FFF
Current status
DDD EEE FFF
Power off Power on

13
PANELMETER
POINT
Precautions for starting up the GOT 14
When restoring the advanced user alarm data by reading it from a memory card, insert the memory card to the
GOT before turning on the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned on, the data in the memory card cannot be restored.
LINE GRAPH
Also, when the memory card is inserted after the GOT is turned on, saving an advanced user alarm data to the
memory card overwrites the advanced user alarm data already stored in the memory card.
15
HINT
TREND GRAPH
Advanced user alarm data saved in the memory card

Advanced user alarm data are created in the memory card for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID File name (can be changed freely)
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
AAM00001.G1A
AAM00002.G1A
16
Alarm ID3 AAM00003.G1A
BAR GRAPH

(b) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced user alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
monitored using the device.
writing
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
Writing :
Write error :
Save
Status during writing can be monitored.
(c) File name to be saved and saving timing

A file can be named freely for each alarm ID.
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
(d) Method of data retention under power failure

Using a memory card
Configure the setting including a file name in the [File Save] tab, and then perform either of the following
operations.
• Save by the store trigger device
• Save by the touch switch
• Save by buffer flash forced saving signal(GS520.b0)
Using the SRAM user area

Configure the setting in the [Basic] tab as follows.
• Save in the SRAM user area
(e) Required memory capacity

For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure, refer to
the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.2 Capacity of Data Stored in a Memory Card
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.3 Capacity of data to be saved in the SRAM user area

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
HINT
(1) Information to be saved
DISPLAY
The alarm log file information to be saved in a memory card or the SRAM user area varies depending on the
collection mode.
11.3.1 Before setting
10
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in a memory card
COMMENT DISPLAY
After the advanced user alarm data is stored as an alarm log file in a memory card, the file can be utilized as
follows:
• The occurrence history of advanced user alarms can be displayed as a graph.
In the historical mode : Displayed as a historical graph
In the cumulative mode: Displayed as a total graph
• For a display on a personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to Unicode text file/CSV file with 11
the GOT utility or convert trigger device.
• Data are saved in the Unicode text file/CSV file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file saved in a memory card
ALARM
By selecting [Auto Backup at Save] on the [File Save] tab, the alarm log file just before a saving can be saved
as a backup file.
For details, refer to the following. 12
(4) Back up or restore of the data saved in the SRAM user area
Data saved in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored with [SRAM control] in the utility.
LEVEL
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(5) Converting alarm log files

The alarm log files created with the advanced user alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to Unicode text files or CSV files for displaying and editing the files on a personal
computer.
The following explains how to convert alarm log files.
(a) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with utility.
Convert binary files (*.G1A) saved in a memory card to Unicode text files or CSV files with the utility.
1. Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch the G1A->CSV button or
the button for converting the file.
2. Store the converted Unicode text file/CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
• Transferring files with GT Designer3
The resource data is read from the GOT. For the procedure, refer to the following.
• Storing files in memory card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a memory card or USB memory, and read the data from the memory card or
USB memory by using the personal computer.
Alarm log file Memory card/ Memory card/ Alarm log file
USB memory USB memory
3. Display and edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.
POINT
How to operate utility
Refer to the following manual for the details.

(b) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with device. 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a memory card to Unicode text files or CSV files by turning on the
specified device.
When converting the files to Unicode text files or CSV files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the convert
DISPLAY
trigger device.
• Advanced Alarm Common
11.2 Advanced Alarm Common 10
• File conversion (the File Save tab in the Advanced User Alarm Observation screen)
COMMENT DISPLAY
POINT
(1) Precautions for file conversion with external control device
Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced user alarm observation that creates a file to 11
be converted into the alarm ID device. (For the advanced user alarm observation: 1 to 32767)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the advanced user alarm
observation, the alarm log file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(2) GOT operation with external control device
ALARM
With the external control device, the GOT operates as shown below.
Make sure to turn off the convert trigger device after the alarm log file conversion is started.
The convert-in-motion notification device turns off when the alarm log file conversion is completed and the
convert trigger device turns off.
12
Therefore, even though the alarm log file conversion is completed, if the convert trigger device is not turned
off, the convert-in-motion notification device does not turn off.
1. Turn on the convert trigger device to start the file conversion.
LEVEL
2. Starting the file conversion turns on the convert-in-motion notification device.
3. Turn off the convert trigger device by the user and others. 13
4. Completing the file conversion turns off the convert-in-motion notification device.
PANELMETER
Convert trigger device 1. Completing the conversion and
turning off the convert trigger
device turn off the convert-in-motion
3. notification device.
Convert-in-motion
notification device
2. 14
Alarm log file conversion 4.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(6) Contents of a Unicode text file or CSV file

(a) Historical mode
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18)
No. Description
1) Collection mode
2) Number of alarms
3) Alarm ID
4) Alarm name
5) Comment group No.
6) Number of alarms
7) Number of alarms that have not been restored
8) Number of alarms that have not been checked
9) Higher hierarchy comment No.
10) Middle hierarchy comment No.
11) General comment No.
12) General alarm comment
13) Alarm status (O: Has occurred, R: Has been restored, C: Has been checked)
14) Date and time of the alarm
15) Date and time that the alarm was restored
16) Date and time that the alarm was checked
17) Level set for the alarm
18) Group set for the alarm

(b) Cumulative mode 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
DISPLAY
6)
7)
8)
9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21)
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
No. Description
1) Collection mode
2) Number of alarms
3) Alarm ID
4) Alarm name 11
5) Comment group No.
6) Number of alarms
ALARM
9) Higher hierarchy comment No.
10) Middle hierarchy comment No.
11) General comment No.

12
12) General alarm comment
LEVEL
17) Level set for the alarm 13

18) Group set for the alarm
19) Frequency of the alarm
PANELMETER
20) Total alarm occurrence time including the past alarm occurrence time (Total down time)
21) Time from the alarm occurrence to the alarm restoration
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Setting the advanced user alarm display

(1) Method of displaying alarm
(a) Types of alarm displayed
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
• All alarms : Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
• Occurring alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Alarm status
(Occurred) (Comment) (Restored) (Checked)
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error -- --
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error -- 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 Oil error 12:05 11:50
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error -- 10:55
04/06/01 09:30 Internal pressure error 10:14 09:48
04/06/01 08:58 Light error 09:45 09:15
In case of [All alarms] In case of [Occurring alarm]

Occurred Comment Restored Checked Occurred Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error 04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error 12:25 04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 Oil error 12:05 11:50 04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error 10:55
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error 10:55
04/06/01 09:30 Internal pressure error 10:14 09:48
04/06/01 08:58 Light error 09:45 09:15
Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light
displayed. error are deleted because these alarms have been restored.
(b) Comment display methods

The display methods below can be selected. ( 11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)
• Fixed
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
• Flow
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left. If display the comment by
flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width or a comment in multiple lines can
be displayed.
Comment contents displayed
1)Comment No.1 (comment group)
Occurred Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 12:10 Pwr. module Pwr. module temp. error. Comment over
04/06/01 11:45 Check oil pre 12:25 Check fuse. multiple lines
04/06/01 11:30 Motor error 12:05 11:50
Displayed as a flow from right to left. 2)Comment No.2 (comment group)
Check oil pressure.

04/06/01 12:10 temp. error.
3)Comment No.3 (comment group)
04/06/01 11:45 ssure. 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 error 12:05 11:50 Motor error

04/06/01 12:10 error. Check
04/06/01 11:45 Check 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 Motor 12:05 11:50
A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.

(c) Alarm display order 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:
1. Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.

The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
DISPLAY
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest
Sort in the descending order of occurrence date/time 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time Down Time Level Group
04/06/01 20:00 Pwr. module error Ocr. -- -- 1 -- -- 1 2
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error Chk. -- 18:50 2 00:20 -- 1 1
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error Chk. 16:30 16:20 5 04:10 00:20 2 1
04/06/01 14:00 Motor error Chk. 15:00 14:10 4 02:30 01:00 2 1
04/06/01 13:30 Light error Chk. 14:30 13:50 1 01:00 01:00 2 1
11
Setting example: Specify the settings on the [Display] tab as follows:
ALARM
12
Items displayed by the advanced
user alarm display
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Select an item for sort Select a display order
(Occurred). (descending or ascending).
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

2. By setting the [Switching Device], the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
For details of [Switching Device], refer to the following.
Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency
Sort alarms in the descending order of the frequency of occurrence
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error Chk. 16:30 16:20 5 04:10 00:20 2 1
04/06/01 14:00 Motor error Chk. 15:00 14:10 4 02:30 01:00 2 1
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error Chk. -- 18:50 2 00:20 -- 1 1
04/06/01 20:00 Pwr. module error Ocr. -- -- 1 -- -- 1 2
04/06/01 13:30 Light error Chk. 14:30 13:50 1 01:00 01:00 2 1
Setting example) Set the items on the [Extended] tab as follows.
Switching device
D100 9
The sort condition can be changed by the value
of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).
0 : Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)

1 : Occurrence date/time
2 : Restoration date/time
3 : Check date/time
4 : Comment (displayed comment No.)
5 : Level
6 : Group
7 : Alarm Status
(Ascending:check restore occur)
(Descending:occur restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
11 : Down Time
POINT
Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified at the same time
If both [Display Order] on the [Display] tab and [Priority Display Attribute] in [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
tab are set, the data are displayed in the order specified in [Priority Display Attribute].

(2) Operations by touch switches

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Various operations are possible for alarms displayed by touch switches for the advanced user alarm display.
Touch switches for the advanced user alarm display can be arranged easily by the library.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
Touch switches for advanced user alarm display
ALARM
HINT
Details of the touch switches for advanced user alarm display
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by using GT Designer 3

The binary file (*.G1A) saved in a memory card can be converted into a Unicode text file or a CSV file by using GT
Designer3.
Since GT Designer3 converts the data, no extra load is imposed on the GOT.
1. Store the binary file to a personal computer by one of the following methods.
• Transferring data with GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu to transfer the file to the personal computer.
• Storing data in memory card or USB memory
Save the advanced alarm data in a memory card or USB memory, and read the data from the memory card or
2. Select [Tools] [File Conversion] [Advanced Alarm File Conversion] from the menu on GT Designer3 to
display the setting dialog box.
Configure the following setting and convert the binary file into a Unicode text file or a CSV file.
Type Displays the type of a conversion source file.
Path Specify the directory path of the conversion source file.
Log File Generation Location Select the location where the log file is created.
Select this item to target all the files (G1A files only) in the same path for conversion.
Source of
When this item is selected and a file is converted, the conversion log is created in the
Conversion
Target files in the same path specified path automatically.
The conversion log shows the full path of the converted file, the conversion result (OK/
NG), and the file creation date.
Project Data (where log file is

Select the project data used for creating the advanced alarm log file to be converted.
created)
Type Specify the type of the conversion destination file. (CSV/UnicodeText)
Displays the path (same as the path of the conversion source file) where the conversion
Path
destination file is saved.
Comment
Destination Column No. Select the comment column No. when the conversion source file includes the advanced
File (Advanced User user alarm.
File
Conversion Alarm)
Language Language
Select the language when the conversion source file includes the advanced system
(Advanced
alarm.
System Alarm)

11.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
 Advanced alarm common
For the settings of the [Advanced Alarm Common Setting] dialog box, refer to the following. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Advanced user alarm observation list

Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced User Alarm Observation] from the menu, to display the setting dialog box.
Make the settings of advanced user alarms (devices, watch cycle, and collection mode) for each alarm ID.
Up to 255 alarm IDs can be set. (Up to 8 alarm IDs can be set for the GT12 only.) 11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Click this button when setting a new alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
Advanced User Alarm Observation
Click this button to when editing the selected alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear. 14
Advanced User Alarm Observation
Click this button to copy the selected alarm ID.
Click this button when pasting the copied alarm ID to the alarm ID list. LINE GRAPH
The destination of the alarm ID can be set.
Click this button to delete the selected alarm ID.
Click this button to delete all alarm IDs. 15

TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Advanced User Alarm Observation

Double click [Alarm] [Advanced User Alarm Observation] [New] in the project tree to display the setting dialog
box.
(1) Basic tab
Set the collection mode and buffering for saving the alarm history.
Alarm ID Set the alarm ID No. (1 to 32767) and name of the advanced user alarm.
Alarm Name Up to 32 characters can be entered for the alarm name.
Select a mode to collect advanced user alarms.

Historical : Data of advanced user alarms are collected as history. Historical data is
added every time an advanced user alarm occurs.
Collection Mode Cumulative : The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each
alarm type.
Only Current Alarm : Only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed. The history of
restored alarms is not saved.
Check this item when displaying collected advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm popup
Popup Display display function.
Basic 11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
Check this item when storing the total number of advanced user alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of
History Number occurrence, check, and restoration.
Storage This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing that number.
Check this item when storing the number of advanced user alarms that are currently occurring in
Generated Number the word device.
Storage After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing that number.
(Continued to the next page)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the buffering for saving the history of collected advanced user alarms.
DISPLAY
Retain data in the

embedded
memory in GOT
The alarm data in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
10
even when the
COMMENT DISPLAY
11.3.5 Function that retains log data in the SRAM user area under power failure
power goes off
(The battery will
be required)
Set the number of advanced user alarms to be saved as history (32767 max.).
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].
Stored Number
Set a number greater than or equal to the [Alarm Points] on the Device tab.
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored. 11
Select the operation to be performed when the number of the advanced user alarms stored in the
buffering area reaches the [Stored Number]
Action when
Buffer is Full Delete old data : Among the restored alarms, the oldest restored advanced user alarm is deleted
ALARM
and the latest advanced user alarm is added.
Add no item : The collection of advanced user alarms is interrupted. Even if a new
advanced user alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Select this item to notify externally that the number of advanced user alarms that can be stored is
12
Buffering
lower than the number set in [Notification Number].
Full Notification
Signal Device
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the full alert signal device.
LEVEL
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area has
decreased (storable advanced user alarms: 0 to 255).
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical] and the item [Full Notification
Signal Device] is set. 13
Notification When the number of storable advanced user alarms is equal to or less than the number set in
Number [Notification Number], the [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.
PANELMETER
Example: Setting [Stored Number] to 1000 and [Notification Number] to 10.
The [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on when the number of total saved
advanced user alarms is 990 or more.
Select this item to delete the restored advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area by the
Buffering Data
Clear Trigger
device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device.
14
Device
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Buffering Data After selecting this item, click the [...] button t o set the Buffering Data Clear Completion Signal LINE GRAPH
Clear Completion Device.
Signal Device (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This item is available only when [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device] is selected.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Device tab

Set the timing for collecting advanced user alarms and make the settings of advanced user alarms (device
settings for advanced user alarms, comments displayed when advanced user alarms occur, resetting of
advanced user alarms, and the level/group settings).
Comment group
Alarm setting list
Watch Cycle Set a cycle to monitor the device (1 to 3600s).
Set the number of device points (1 to 32767 points).

Alarm Points
The maximum points (32767) are the total alarm (device) points set on all alarm IDs.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.

Device Type • Bit • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32
Select a method to set the device No.

Continuous : Devices are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Device Setting Random : Devices are numbered at random.
Identical : When other than [Bit] is selected in the [Device Type], multiple occurrence ranges are set by the
same word device.
Set the comment group No. and the setting method for comment groups displayed with the comments of general
alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detailed display.
Comment Group
Set the comment group No.
No.
Comment group
Select the setting method for comments.
Continuous : The comment groups are numbered consecutively from the comment No. of
Comment Type
the comment group to be set.
Random : The comment No. of comment groups are set at random.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display Column Select the items to be displayed on the alarm setting list.
*6 Copies and pastes the contents of the alarm setting list.
DISPLAY
*5 Reads out the advanced user alarm observation settings edited in an Unicode text file/CSV file to GT Designer3.
*5 Saves the advanced user alarm observation settings set by GT Designer3 as an Unicode text file/CSV file.
Set up a device for the alarm and comments displayed when an alarm occurs.
Set up a device for the alarm.

10
Device
COMMENT DISPLAY
Set the device value condition for displaying an alarm.

When [Device Type] is set to [Bit].
ON : Alarms are displayed by the rising (OFF ON) of the bit device.
Alarm Range OFF : Alarms are displayed by the falling (ON OFF) of the bit device.
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit].
Click the [Exp] button to set up the range of the values of the word device to display the alarm.
11
General
Comment No. *1
*2 Set the comment to be displayed when the alarm occurs by the comment No. of the comment
group.
ALARM
Middle
For an alarm, specify the comment Nos. of the comment groups used for the higher alarm,
Comment No. *1
middle alarm, and general alarm, respectively.
*2
12
Specify "0" when not displaying the middle or higher alarm.
Upper Comment
No. *1 *2
Select a method of detailed display.

Set the comment No., base screen No., and window screen No. of the comment group displayed
Alarm setting list in [Detail No.]
Not Display : Details are not displayed.
LEVEL
Detail Display *3 Comment Window *3 : Details are displayed on the window for detail display. Registered
*4 comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen : The base screen is displayed as detail display. The base screen set to 13
the detail No. of the device is displayed.
Window Screen : The window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed as detail display.
The window screen set to the device's detail No. is displayed.
PANELMETER
Set the comment No., window screen No., and base screen No. of the comment group displayed
Detail No.
in details when an alarm occurs.
Select whether or not to enable the reset operation of alarm (turn off or reset the device specified
for the alarm by the touch switch for resetting).
Reset
11.3.5 Useful operations and functions 14
YES :The device specified for the alarm will be turned off or set to the reset value.
If device is a word device, set a reset value after selecting this option.
NO :The device specified for the alarm will not be turned off or set to the reset value.
Set a level (1 to 255) to the alarm. LINE GRAPH

Level Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or only the alarms at the
particular level can be displayed.
Set a group (1 to 255) on the alarm.

Group Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or only the alarms of the particular group can be 15
displayed.
*7 Click this button to set the searching for selected alarm device at the ladder monitor start.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 Method of setting the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs
A setting example for displaying comments in comment groups as higher alarms, middle alarms, general alarms, and
detail display is provided below.
1. Register the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs as a comment group.
Comment group No.1

(for higher alarms)
Register a comment group for

each alarm hierarchy.
Comment group No.2

(for middle alarms)
Comment group No.3

(for general alarms)
Comment group No.4

(for detail display)
2. 1. Set the comments registered at step 1 as follows by the advanced user alarm observation function.
1) Set the comment group No. to be displayed for each hierarchy.
2) Set the comments to be displayed for each hierarchy (general alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detail display) of the alarm.
Comment displayed
for alarm M10
Comment displayed
for alarm M11
Comment displayed
for alarm M12
Set the comment No. of Set the comment No. of Set the comment No. of Set the comment No. of
comment group No.3. comment group No.2. comment group No.1. comment group No.4.
Example) Comment display when alarm M10 occurs

Display of general alarms Display of middle alarms Display of higher alarms Detail display
Pwr. module error Equipment A error Line1 error Line1 error

Equipment B error Oil supply
Control module error Line2 error Equipment B error
Drive module error Equipment C error Equipment C error
Upper Upper Upper Upper
hierarchy hierarchy hierarchy hierarchy
Lower Lower
Lower
hierarchy Check hierarchy Check hierarchy Check Lower
hierarchy Check

*2 When "No Message" is displayed as comment 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs is set as follows, "No Message" is displayed when an alarm
occurs.
• Comment settings have not been performed (comment No. remains "0.")
DISPLAY
• No comment has been registered for the comment No.
When alarms are hierarchized and comments are not set for all hierarchies, set blank comments (enter space only) so
that "No Message" is not displayed. 10
Example 1: When no comment is specified
COMMENT DISPLAY
No comment is set.
11
Pwr. module error Equipment A error Line1 error
Control module error No message No message "No message"
Drive module error No message No message is displayed.
Upper Upper Upper
ALARM
hierarchy hierarchy hierarchy
Lower Lower Lower
hierarchy Check hierarchy Check hierarchy Check
Display of general alarms Display of middle alarms Display of higher alarms

12
Example 2: When a blank comment is specified
Set a blank comment
(comment No.2).
LEVEL
13
" " Enter a space character.
Register a blank comment as shown
PANELMETER
above.
Pwr. module error Equipment A error Line1 error

Control module error A blank comment is displayed.
Drive module error
14
Upper Upper Upper
Lower Lower Lower
hierarchy Check hierarchy Check hierarchy Check
Display of general alarms Display of middle alarms Display of higher alarms
LINE GRAPH
*3 Detail type settings
All alarms are displayed on the same destination specified on [Detail Display] (Not Display, Comment Window, Base
Screen, or Window Screen) when [Comment Type] is set to [Continuous]. 15
To change the [Detail Display] for each alarm, set the [Comment Type] to [Random].
In addition, when changing the settings of [Comment Type] from [Random] to [Continuous], the destinations of all
TREND GRAPH
alarms set on the [Detail Display] are changed to the same destination as the top alarm.
16
BAR GRAPH

*4 Method of displaying the comment window
1) Display the detail display screen 2) Display the detail display screen
by the one-touch operation by the touch switch
Occurred Message Restore Check Occurred Message Restore Check
02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45 02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45
02/02/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28 02/02/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28
02/02/01 12:35 Line 3 error 02/02/01 12:35 Line 3 error
Details
Display on the comment window Display on the window screen Display on the base screen
(overlap window)
Check line 2 Check line 2

Check line 2
Alarm historical display Alarm historical display
The specified comment is displayed. The specified base screen and window screen are displayed.
(a) Number of characters available for comment window

• 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
(b) The comment window is displayed on the base screen.

The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
(c) Comment text is displayed as follows

• Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
• The setting reverse, blink and HQ fonts are not supported, regardless of the comment registration
settings.
(d) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
• Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
• If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new line.
• To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed for the
comment.
Preparing for operation

Preparing for operation Please wait for about 6 minutes.
Please wait for about 6 minutes.
When a comment is registered Comment window display

*5 Import/Export 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
An exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited using spreadsheet software and others.
After editing, the Unicode text file or CSV file can be read out to GT Designer3 by importing the file.
DISPLAY
Example: Import/export of a CSV file
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
Exported in CSV file
12
Add the setting using applications

Editing the exported file R
such as Microsoft Excel.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Importing to GT Designer2
14
The added contents
are displayed.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
POINT
Import/export in multilingual environment
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment. 16
Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.
BAR GRAPH

*6 Copy Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box
Source No. Set the row number to be copied.
Destination No. Set the row number to paste the copied contents.
Set the number of times to paste the copied contents.

Number of Copy
From the row numbers set in [Destination No.], the number of rows set in [Number of Copy] are pasted sequentially.
Select the content to be copied.

When the [Comment Type] of [General], [Middle], [Upper], or [Detail] in the [Comment group] is set to [Continuous], the
Copy Item
followings cannot be selected.
• General Comment No. • Middle Comment No. • Upper Comment No. • Detail No.
*7 Starting ladder monitor
To start ladder monitor, touch switch setting is required.

Ladder Search Settings dialog box
Ladder Search
Select a search method. (Coil / Factor)
Mode
Select this item to specify the program file to be searched.

Specify the This setting is valid only for the QCPU, LCPU, and QnACPU.
search file After selecting this item, specify a file name.

(3) File save tab

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the memory card.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Select this item to write the advanced user alarm history saved in the buffering area to the memory card as an alarm
Save alarm log log file.
files*2 The data is written to the memory card as a binary file (*.G1A). 13
This item can be selected only when [Historical] or [Cumulative] is selected for [Collection Mode].
Drive Name The destination drive is displayed.
PANELMETER
Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.
Folder Name *1 Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.
File Access By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common] [GOT Type Setting] is preset.
Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
File Name *1 Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
By default, the file name is set to AAM .
14
Select a timing at which the advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the
memory card.
LINE GRAPH
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to
Trigger Type
1440 minutes).
Store Trigger • Rise • Sampling • OFF Sampling
• Fall • ON Sampling
Device
Specify the store trigger device.
15
Writing Notification Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Writing Error
Notification Device
This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is restored.
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
Auto Backup at For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
Save *2 displayed on the GOT utility.)
Ex.: AAM00001.G1A AAM00001.G1A.BAK
Make the settings to convert files.

When converting files, the [Advanced Alarm Common] must be set.
Set this item in the [Advanced Alarm Common] dialog box, by clicking the [Advanced Alarm Common] button.
Conversion
File Convert Select a file format after conversion. (Unicode text/CSV)
Format
Add date
information to Select this item to add the date information to the converted file name.
file name
Destination Select the location where the converted file is saved. ([Same as log file] or [Change])
*1 For details of folder names and file names used in GOT, refer to the following.
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

*2 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file
When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the following status,
system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs. In this case, reading out of the
alarm log file is cancelled.
• When the alarm log file is broken
• When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file is present (check [Auto Backup at Save]), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no system alarm
occurs.)
HINT
Whether to store alarm data in a memory card
When the set store trigger is established, the alarm data are stored in a memory card only when the last stored
alarm data are changed.
When the alarm data are the same as the last stored alarm data, the alarm data are not stored in the memory card.

11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
1. Select [Object] [Alarm Display] [Advanced User Alarm Display ] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the advanced user alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
3. Double click the arranged advanced user alarm display to display the setting dialog box.
 Alarm tab
Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed, message display method, and operation when the
screen is touched.
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Display Alarm
Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function. (User Alarm/System Alarm) 14
The [User Alarm] is selected in this section, for explaining the advanced user alarm display.
Set the alarm ID of the advanced user alarm observation to be displayed.

Click the [Edit] button to display the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
LINE GRAPH
Alarm ID
Select how to display collected alarms.

Display Target
All Alarm : Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is displayed. 15
Generating Alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm.

TREND GRAPH

Fixed: Displays the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs in a line.
Display Type Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the comment
is not displayed.
Flow : Scrolls the comment from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed. 16
After selecting this item, select a speed to scroll the comment in [Speed].

BAR GRAPH


Select a speed for the flowing display when [Flow] is set for [Display Type].
High : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per
second.
Display Type Speed Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per
second.
Low : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per
second.
Initial Display Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed by the advanced user alarm display function.
Hierarchy (General/Middle/Upper)
Select the operation when the advanced user alarm display screen is touched.
None : No operation even when touched.
Selection : The touched alarm is selected.
Operation : Alarm hierarchies are switched or the detailed screen is displayed for the touched alarm.
Touch Mode Operations differ depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
• When higher/middle alarm is displayed : The alarm hierarchy is switched to the lower one.
• When general alarms are displayed : The touched alarm is selected.
When touching the selected alarm again, the detailed screen is
displayed.
Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).
Example: When setting the number of rows to 3
Number of Occurred Comment Restored Checked
Rows 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45

Number of rows
04/11/05 12:05 Fuel error 12:25 12:28 (not including the title row)
04/11/06 08:30 Motor error 09:45 09:40
Set which alarm is displayed in the top row when the number of alarms exceed the number of rows set in [Number of
Rows].
• When the number of alarms exceeds the value set for [Display Start Row].
The alarm corresponding to the value set for [Display Start Row] is displayed in the top row.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 2, and the number of alarms is 5.
Alarm occurrence
1. Temp. error Occurred Comment
Display order 2. Fuse error 04/06/01 17:00 Fuse error
of alarms 3. Oil error 04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
4. Fuel error 04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error
5. Internal pressure error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number
specified on "Display Head Row."
• When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Display Start Row].
The last alarm is displayed in the bottom row.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 10, and the number of alarms is 5.
Display Start Alarm occurrence
Row *1 1. Temp. error
Display order 2. Fuse error Occurred Comment
of alarms 3. Oil error 04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
4. Fuel error 04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error
5. Internal pressure error 04/06/01 14:25 Internal pressure error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.

• When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Number of Rows].
The setting for [Display Start Row] becomes invalid, and all the alarms are displayed.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set ti 3, and the number of alarms is 2.
Alarm occurrence
Occurred Comment
Display order 1. Temp. error 04/06/01 17:00 Temp error
of alarms 2. Fuse error 04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
Displays all occurred alarms.
Object Name
The object name is also displayed in other than [Alarm] tab.

*1 Display Start Row 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
If the number of alarms becomes higher than the number set to [Display Start Row] while the advanced user alarm is
displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the advanced user alarm
DISPLAY
display screen.
HINT 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Application example of Display Start Row
If different [Display Start Row] are set on screens, different advanced user alarm display can be displayed for each
screen.
Alarm occurred number Screen 1

1st (Display start row: 1)
1st 2nd
2nd
3rd
4th
3rd
11
5th Screen 2
6th 4th (Display start row: 4)
7th 5th
8th 6th
9th
Screen 3
ALARM
7th (Display start row: 7)
8th
9th
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Display tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (contents and display order).
Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.
Direct Select this item to enter characters displayed on the title from [Title].
Select this item to display characters displayed on the title in the comment of comment group.
After the selection, set the group No.
Group No. : Set the comment group where characters displayed on the title has been
registered.
Title Adjust Text Size : Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
Comment
If this item is not selected, a new line is automatically started, and the
character string is adjusted.
After the check, set the minimum character size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
Hide Select this item to hide the title.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display Select the items displayed for advanced user alarm display.
"Occurred" "Status" "Checked" "Cum.Time" "Level"
DISPLAY
"Comment" "Restored" "OccurFreq" "Down Time" "Group"
04/06/01 20:00 Oil pressure error Chk.

04/06/01 18:30 Temp. error Chk.
--
--
--
18:50
1
2
--
--
--
--
1
1
2
1
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 16:10 Oil pressure error Rstr. 16:30 16:20 2 00:40 00:20 2 1
Occurred : Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment : Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Status : Select when displaying alarm status.
The alarm status is displayed as follows.
Ocr. : An alarm is occurring
Rstr. : The alarm is restored
Chk. : Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
11
Checked: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the alarm
Attribute was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is displayed.
ALARM
Comment Restored Checked Comment Restored Checked
Motor error
Check Motor error 12:00
12
(Key code : FFB4H)
*1
Frequency : Select this item when displaying the number of alarm occurrences.
Cum.Time*1 : Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm
Contents
occurrences in the past (total down time).
LEVEL
Down Time*1 : Select this item when displaying the time from the alarm occurrence to
restoration of it.
Level
Group
: Select this item when displaying the level specified on the alarm.
: Select this item when displaying the group specified on the alarm. 13
Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.
Example: When the message width is set to 12
PANELMETER
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25 10:45
Displayed in a width of 12 digits
The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Occurred : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
14
Width
Comment : 10 to 80 digits
Status : 6 to 80 digits
Restored : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
LINE GRAPH
Checked : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Frequency : 5 to 80 digits
Cum.Time : 8 to 80 digits
Down Time : 8 to 80 digits
Level
Group
: 3 to 80 digits
: 3 to 80 digits
15
Set the characters displayed on the title of advanced user alarm display.
When [Direct] is selected in [Title] : Characters for the number specified by [Width] can be
TREND GRAPH
Title input.
When [Comment] is selected in [Title] : Set the comment No. or the comment to be displayed.
When [Hide] is selected in [Title] : The [Title] cannot be set.

16
BAR GRAPH

Set the display for date and time when alarm occurs (Occurred/Restored/Checked).
Contents Date/Time Format
Set the display order in the advanced user alarm display.

The items of [Attribute] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select the item to change the order and set the order with the and buttons.
Example) When [Occurred], [Comment], [Status], [Checked], and [Cum.Time] are selected in [Display].
Display Order
The items selected in [Display]

are reflected.
Select an item and method to sort alarm display.

Select one of the following 2 methods.
Ascending : Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending : Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.
Sort When selecting [Date/Time Format] for the item to be sorted, the items are sorted as follows.
Ascending : Old New
Descending : New Old
For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following.
*1 The GOT displays the value set for this item when only [Cumulative] is selected for [Collection Mode] in the advanced user alarm
observation setting.
When any other than [Cumulative] is selected, the item name is displayed, but the set value is not displayed.


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.
DISPLAY
Preview area
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
Item Description
Preview area The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.
ALARM
Contents
When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items. 12

Type Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a
week.
Date Setting
LEVEL
Fill with 0
Selected :09/09/01
13
PANELMETER
Type
Time Setting
Fill with 0
Example) At 10:1
Selected :10:01 14
Not selected :10:1
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Text tab
Set the font to display the alarm.

• 16dot HQ Gothic • Stroke
Text Size (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Set the format of characters displayed on the title of advanced user alarm display.

Style : Displays the text in solid format.
Solid Color Select a color of the shadow when the [Style] is set to button or button.
Title Format Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.
KANJI Region
Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"

DATE DISPLAY/TIME

DISPLAY
Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Fixed : Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Status : Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occurred,
Switching
Table Format restored, or checked).
Level : Select this item when using different colors depending on level.
Group : Select this item when using different colors depending on group.
Fixed Select the character color when [Fixed] is selected in [Switching].
Status
Select the character color for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked) when [Status] is
selected for [Switching].
11
Level Select the character color for each level number when [Level] is selected for [Switching].
Group Select the character color for each group number when [Group] is selected for [Switching].
ALARM
POINT
12
Displaying alarm status, level color, and group color for higher/middle alarms.
For higher/middle alarm, the character colors specified on [Table Format] are displayed in the following character
colors, regardless of alarm status or level/group.
[Fixed] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Fixed].
LEVEL
[Status] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Occurred].
[Level] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Level 1].
[Group] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Group 1]. 13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Style tab
Set the ruled line type and shape of advanced user alarm display.
Style Select a ruled line type for the advanced user alarm display.
Draw Ruled
Width Select a ruled line width for the advanced user alarm display. (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 dots)
Line
Color Select a ruled line color for the advanced user alarm display.
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the characters such as
time display.
Y : 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
X : 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
Space According to the setting of [Text Size] (magnification of the character size), the actual Occurrence date/time
Magnification of character size set value in [Space]
Example:
When [Text Size: 2] and [Space: 8] are set, a space of 16 dots is ensured.

Shape Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

Shape Settings Plate color
Plate Color
Frame color

9
 Extended tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the switching of the data displayed by the advanced user alarm display using a device.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Check the item whose display is switched by the device. 13

Select this item to switch the alarm hierarchy to display by the value of the device.
PANELMETER
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
*1
Hierarchy After selecting this item, set the switching device.
Select this item to display alarms of the specified level number only.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. 14
Level Store the level number of the advanced user alarm to be displayed in the device.
• To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
LINE GRAPH
Switching Device However, if a nonexistent level number is specified, any advanced user alarm is displayed.
• To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Select this item to display alarms of the specified group number only.
After selecting this item, set the switching device.
Group Store the group number of the advanced user alarm to be displayed in the device.
• To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
TREND GRAPH
However, if a nonexisting group number is specified, any advanced user alarm is displayed.
• To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Select this item to switch the sort key by the value of the device.
Priority Display After selecting this item, set the switching device.
Attribute*2
16
BAR GRAPH

Select this item to display the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
After selecting this item, set the switching device. ( (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)
Advanced User
Alarm • Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Observation • When storing "0" in this device, the alarm with the alarm ID set on the [User Alarm] item of
[Display Alarm] on the [Alarm] tab is displayed.
• If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
General
Switching Device
Comment Select this item to switch the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarms, middle
Group/ alarms, or higher alarms by the value of the device.
Middle
After selecting this item, set the switching device. ( (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)
Comment
Group/ • When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group set by advanced user alarm observation is
Upper displayed.
Comment If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, [No message] is displayed.
Group
User ID *3 Set a user ID for advanced user alarm display.
Display To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).

• Set "0" when not setting the security function.
Security Level • Be sure to set a number for security [Operation] larger than the number for security [Display].
Operation
Select this item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function) *4
After selecting the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
Display Position Display
Time Device Position Time (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Three devices (year and month, day and hour, minute and second) are set consecutively starting
from the set device.
Layer

Category
*1 Hierarchies
Store values in the device to switch hierarchies.
b15 b14 to b2 b1 b0
b1 to b0 : Specifis the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0): General alarms
01(1): Middle alarms
10(2): Higher alarms
b14 to b2: Not usable
b15 : Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, set this bit to "0."
0: Switching by the switching device
1: Switching by touching the display area
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
11.3.6 Precautions

*2 Priority display attribute 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15 b14 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DISPLAY
b3 to b0 : Specifies a sort key.( : Reserved)
0H: Regular (Occurred) 4H: Comment No. 9 H: OccurFreq

1H: Occurred Date/Time 5H: Level A H: Cum.Time
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
2H: Restored Date/Time 6H: Group B H: Down Time
3H: Checked Date/Time 7H: Alarm Status
b15 : Specifies ascending order or descending order.( : Reserved)
0 H : Descending order
8 H: Ascending order 11
Occur Freq, Cum. Time and Down Time are effective only when the collection mode of advanced user alarm
observation is [Cumulative].
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
*3 User ID
ALARM
• When user ID setting is required
If the advanced user alarm display and alarm history display/alarm display are set on the same screen, the
touch switches set for the advanced user alarm display may not operate.
12
To make the touch switches for advanced user alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced
user alarm display.
02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error Alarm list display
LEVEL
02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error

13
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 Light error 12:28 Advanced user alarm display
04/11/05 12:35 Oil pressure error
PANELMETER
Cursor ON Up Check Touch switch for advanced
Cursor OFF Down Delete user alarm display
If the same user ID is set for advanced user alarm display and touch switches, 14
the operations of the touch switches for advanced user alarm display are
effective for advanced user alarm display.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

• Setting method
Set a user ID for advanced user alarm display.
Set the touch switches for advanced user alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
Setting of touch switch (Action tab)
Set the same user ID as for advanced user alarm display
With the display position specification device and a touch switch, a general alarm at the specified time can be
displayed.
(The cursor is displayed at the position of the alarm at the specified time.)
If no alarm at the specified time exists, the alarm at the time closest to the specified time is displayed.
(1) When [Priority Display Attribute] is set for the time specification jump function
When [Priority Display Attribute] is set, this function displays an alarm according to the order set in [Priority
Display Attribute].
The alarm is displayed in order of the restoration date/time, the check date/time, and the occurrence date/time.
When [Priority Display Attribute] is not set, the alarm is displayed regardless of the order of the restoration date/
time, the check date/time, and the occurrence date/time.
(2) Before using the time specification jump function
(a) Specifications for time to be specified
Item Description

(b) Required settings 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Object Setting
The switch or the key code switch can be read from the library on GT Designer3.
DISPLAY
Switch/Key code switch By setting the key code (FFBEH) of the display position time specification jump for the code setting
in the switch or the key code switch, the user can create a switch or a key code switch. 10
2. TOUCH SWITCH
COMMENT DISPLAY
Extended tab
Advanced system alarm display
11.4.3 Extended tab
(3) Operation example 11

Example) When setting the display position time device to D1000 and displaying data at 21:05:30 on April 12,
2011
ALARM
Display position time devices
15 bits 0 bits
Year and month Occurred Comment Restored Checked
12
(D1000) 0x11 0x04 Time 11/4/12 21:05:40 Motor error
Date and hour specification 11/4/12 21:05:30 Light error 21:35:45
(D1001) 0x12 0x21 jump
11/4/12 21:05:40 Oil pressure error 21:05:40 21:35:45
Minute and 0x05 0x30
second (D1002)
LEVEL
the key code (FFBEH) is set. (21:05:30, April 12, 2011) is displayed.
For the precautions of the time specification jump function, refer to the following.
11.3.6 Precautions
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab
Select a condition to display/activate the object.

Trigger Type
• Ordinary • ON • OFF
Ordinary
ON
OFF

9
 External Output tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Perform the settings for writing the information about the alarm selected on the advanced user alarm display into the
device.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
If this item is selected, the information about the touched alarm can be written into the device.
LEVEL
Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary : Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
13
ON : When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
Trigger Type
Use device.
OFF : When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
PANELMETER
External
Output device.
Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected for [Trigger Type].
Trigger Device
When cursor is
Set the external output when the cursor is hidden. 14
Clear External Output Device : The external output device value is cleared.
hidden
Output alarm information of the top row : The alarm information displayed in the top row is output.
Set the device to which alarm data are written.
Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written. LINE GRAPH
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
Device Head Device automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)
Alarm ID If this item is selected, the alarm ID of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

Comment Group If this item is selected, the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm can be
No. written into the device.
If this item is selected, the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm can be written
Comment No.
into the device.
If this item is selected, the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
The following values are written.
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored 1: Occurring
Alarm Status*1
b1 : Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.
0: Not checked 1: Checked
b2 : Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not.
0: Not effective 1: Effective
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
b15 to b3 : Not usable
Occurred Date
If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred date can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Device
Occurred Time
If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred time can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Restored Date
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored date can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Restored Time
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored time can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Checked Date
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked date can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Checked Time
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked time can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Level *1 If this item is selected, the touched alarm level number can be written into the device.
Group *1 If this item is selected, the touched alarm group number can be written into the device.
Frequency of
If this item is selected, the number of times the touched alarm occurred can be written into the device.
Occurrences *1
Cumulative Time
If this item is selected, the cumulative time of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
*1,*2
Down Time *1,*2 If this item is selected, the down time of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
*1 Condition for writing
(1) Alarm hierarchy to which the alarm data can be written.

Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment group No., and
comment No.).
In addition, if the alarm is restored, "0" is written into the down time.
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode

The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode set in the advanced user alarm
observation.

9
*2 Writing format of date and time
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Date and time are written in word data of two words.
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
DISPLAY
(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
10
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
COMMENT DISPLAY
D254 Month (1 to 12) Day (1 to 31)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of
D255 dominical year dominical year
(2) Time 11
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D256 Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)
ALARM
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D257 00H Hour (0 to 23)
12
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
LEVEL
D254 07H 01H
(Month) (Day)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 13
D255 20H 04H
(Dominical year)
PANELMETER
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D256 24H 56H
(Minute) (Second)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 14
D257 00H 12H
(Hour)
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.3.4 Relevant settings
The advanced user alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
 GOT type setting

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in
overlapped on GOT. GT Designer3]
 GOT environmental setting (System information)

Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [System Information] from the menu to display the
*1*3
Notifying the status of access to the drive.
[System Signal 2-2]
(Write device: System signal 2-2. b0, b1)
Notifying the that the drive is short of capacity.*1*3

[System Signal 2-2]
Notifying that access to the drive failed.*1*2*3

[System Signal 2-2]
Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
[Key Code Input]
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)
*1 The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full, however, operate
differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
10.3.6 Precautions for use (8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
*2 The File access error reset signal (read device: System signal 1-2, b7, b8) resets the Drive A/B file access error signal (write
device: System signal 2-2, b7, b8).
*3 The GT14 and the GT12 cannot use the following system information.
• System signal 2-2: b1, b5, b8
 GOT internal device

Saving the data in the buffering area to a memory card *1 GS520.b0
*1 Only saved when [Save alarm log files] in the File Savetab is selected.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
10.3.2 Advanced User Alarm Observation (3) File save tab

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains some useful functions when using advanced user alarms.
 Advanced user alarm observation
DISPLAY
(1) Hierarchical alarm example
The figure below shows an example of the system in which alarms are hierarchized. The comment registration
required for the system and the application example are explained in this section. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Line1 Line2 Higher Alarm
Middle Alarm
Equipment A Equipment B Equipment A Equipment B
11
Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control General Alarm
module module module module module module module module module module module module
ALARM
Setting example
Set comments that will be displayed at alarm occurrence for each hierarchy (Higher hierarchy, Middle hierarchy,
and General hierarchy) as shown below.
12
Settings in the Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box (device tab)
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
Device Alarm Range General Comment No. Middle Comment No. Higher Comment No.
1 M10 ON 1 Pwr. module error 1 Equipment A error 1 Line1 error
2
3
M11
M12
ON
ON
2 Drive module error
3 Control module error
1 Equipment A error
1 Equipment A error
1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error
15
4 M13 ON 1 Pwr. module error 2 Equipment B error 1 Line1 error
TREND GRAPH
5 M14 ON 2 Drive module error 2 Equipment B error 1 Line1 error
Detail Type Detail No. Reset Level Group
1 Comment Window 1 Hydraulic pressure error YES 0 1 1

16
2 Base Screen 0 YES 0 1 2
3 Window Screen 0 YES 0 1 2
4 Comment Window 4 Low coolant water pressure YES 0 2 1
BAR GRAPH
5 Comment Window 5 Refill fuel YES 0 2 2

(a) Alarm location refinement

The alarm information can be displayed ranging from summary to details in the hierarchical order.
Switching from higher hierarchy to middle hierarchy Switching from middle hierarchy to general
Lower Lower
hierarchy hierarchy
Line1 error (FFB8H) Equipment A error (FFB8H) Pwr. module error

Line2 error Equipment B error Control module error
Upper Upper Upper

Lower
Lower
hierarchy Check Upper Lower
hierarchy Check Upper hierarchy Check
hierarchy hierarchy
(FFC2H) (FFC2H)
Switching from middle hierarchy to higher hierarchy Switching from general to middle hierarchy
Display higher hierarchy alarms Display middle hierarchy alarms Display general alarms
(Alarm status in factory (Alarm status in line 2 is displayed.) (The faulty module in system B
line is displayed.) and the details are displayed.)
(b) Simultaneous execution of the operations of Check (FFB4H) and Delete (FFB6H) for multiple alarms
The following operations can be executed simultaneously for multiple alarms included in the lower
hierarchy.
Operation Description
Check The time when the alarm occurrence was confirmed is recorded.
Delete The history of restored alarms is cleared.
• When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for higher hierarchy alarms
A batch of alarms of the middle and general hierarchies, located below the higher hierarchy can be
operated.
Line2 error
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2 Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy Delete Touch Delete
(FFB6H)
Display middle
hierarchy alarms Equipment A error
Equipment A Equipment B Equipment B error
Display
Pwr. module error
Powe Drive Control Power Drive Control general alarms Drive module error
module module module module module module Control module error
Restored alarm
Occurred alarm
Line2 error
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2 Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy Delete
Display middle
hierarchy alarms Equipment B error
Equipment A Equipment B
Display
Drive module error
Powe Drive Control Powe Drive Control general alarms
module module module module module module
A batch of restored alarm
logs is cleared.

• When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for middle hierarchy alarms
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
A batch of general alarms located below the middle hierarchy can be operated.
DISPLAY
Line2
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Equipment A error
Display middle Equipment B error
hierarchy alarms
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy Delete Touch Delete
(FFB6H)
Display
Power Drive Control Power Drive Control general alarms Pwr. module error 11
module module module module module module Drive module error
Control module error
Restored alarm
Posted alarm
ALARM
12
Line2
Equipment A error
Display middle
LEVEL
Equipment B error
hierarchy alarms
hierarchy
13
Lower
hierarchy Delete
Display
Power Drive Control Power Drive Control general alarms Drive module error
PANELMETER
module module module module module module
A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.
14
HINT
LINE GRAPH
Reset operation
The reset operation of restoring an alarm manually (ON OFF/reset value) by the Reset (FFB9H) button is not
usable for a batch of alarms.
Perform reset operation when general alarms are displayed.
Occurred Comment Restore Check Occurred Comment Restore Check
15
04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error 04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error 13:00
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error 04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
TREND GRAPH
04/06/01 12:35 Control module error 04/06/01 12:35 Control module error
Reset (FFB9H)
Perform the reset operation for each alarm.

16
BAR GRAPH

(c) Alarm Classification according to the level or group

Alarms can be classified according to the level or group.
The contents displayed at alarm occurrence can refined according to the level or type.
Example: Refine the alarms to be displayed by changing the switching device (level switching: D32, group
switching: D33).
Display in order of alarm occurrence

Occurred Comment Level Group Level
04/06/01 16:51 Hydraulic pressure error 1 1 switching device
(D32) 0
04/06/01 14:25 Low coolant pressure 2 1
04/06/01 12:25 Oil refill 1 2 Group
04/06/01 09:40 Little material remaining 1 2 switching device
04/06/01 07:35 Fuel refill 2 2 (D33) 0
Display level 1 alarms only

switching device
04/06/01 16:51 Hydraulic pressure error 1 1
(D32) 1
04/06/01 12:25 Oil refill 1 2
04/06/01 09:40 Little material remaining 1 2 Group
switching device
(D33) 0
Display level 2 alarms only

04/06/01 12:25 Oil refill 1 2 switching device
(D32) 1
04/06/01 09:40 Little material remaining 1 2
Group
switching device
(D33) 2
HINT
Switching device
Set the switching device by the advanced user alarm display function.
Example:

(2) Display example of general alarms (Detailed display)

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
General alarm's details such as causes or corrective actions can be displayed on another screen (comment
window, base screen or window screen).
Setting example
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(a) Comment window
Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the comment window.
11
Example) Advanced user alarm display
Oil pressure error.
ALARM
Occurred Comment Occurred Comment
04/06/01 16:13 Pwr. module error 04/06/01 16:13 Pwr. module error 12
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error 04/06/01 10:25 Control module error
Base Screen1 Base Screen1 Comment Window
LEVEL
(b) Base screen
The specified base screen is displayed.
Example) Advanced user alarm display 13
Tank control screen
Tank A Tank B Tank C
PANELMETER
Occurred Comment
04/06/01 16:13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 15:51 Drive module error
90 40 60
14
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error Run Stop Run Stop Run Stop
Base Screen1 Base Screen5
(c) Window screen LINE GRAPH

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
Example) Advanced user alarm display
15
Feed material from the
feed opening.
TREND GRAPH
Feed opening
Occurred Comment Occurred Date
04/06/01 16:13 Pwr. module error 04/06/01 1 6: 13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error 04/06/01 10:25 Control module error 16
Base Screen1 Base Screen1 Window Screen10
BAR GRAPH

(3) Action when buffer is full

If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or almost
reaches the [Stored Number] on the [Basic] tab, the status can be notified using a device.
(a) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored and
confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be confirmed.
Historical Full
number: 1254 notification:
Occurring
number: 2
Confirm the historical number Occurred Comment
and occurring number 04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
(b) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
• Issuing the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in [Full Notification Signal Device]
on the [Basic] tab.)
• Selecting the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in [Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic]
tab.)
Historical Full
Occurring
number: 2 Full notification
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
HINT
(1) Settings
(2) Buffering area

(c) Buffering size 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The buffering size required for advanced user alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the user area (C drive + add-on memory) of the GOT, decreases. Adjust
buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the user area.
DISPLAY
• Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode Settings relevant to buffering area size
Historical
• Number of device points set for the alarm ([Alarm Points] on the [Device] tab)
• Total number of alarms saved ([Stored Number] on [Basic] tab)
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Cumulative
• Number of device points set for the alarm ([Alarm Points] on the [Device] tab)
Only Current Alarm
• Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced user alarms
The buffering area size for the alarm ID being set can be confirmed on the [Basic] tab.
11
ALARM
Buffering Area Size
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Advanced user alarm display

(1) Switching alarm hierarchies
For advanced user alarm display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods. However,
the display scope differs depending on the switching methods
• Touch the advanced user alarm display directly or switch the hierarchy by the touch switches
• Use the device specified in [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.
Higher Alarm
Line1 Line2

Middle Alarm
Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control General Alarm
"Pwr. module error" "Control module error" "Control module error" "Pwr. module error" "Control module error"
(group 1) (group 3) (group 3) (group 4) (group 6)
: The alarm is occurring

: No alarm (normal run)
(a) Switch alarm hierarchies by touching the advanced user alarm display directly or using the touch switches.
Display the hierarchies below the selected alarm.
The following is the case that [Initial Display Hierarchy] on the [Alarm] tab is specified as higher alarms.
1)The alarm hierarchy specified for initial display

hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed. All higher alarms are displayed
Line1 abend
Line2 abend Line1 Line2
Equipment A Equipment B Equipment B
2)Select an alarm to switch to middle alarms.

Occurred Comment Restored Checked Power Control Control Power Control
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
Display scope
3)The middle alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Equipment A error Equipment A Equipment B
Equipment B error
Power Control Control
4)Select an alarm to switch to general alarms.

Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display scope
5)The general alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.

Power Control
04/06/01 12:10 Control module error 12:25

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
POINT
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being
displayed
DISPLAY
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an alarm belonging to the higher/
middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is not displayed.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
A specified scope is being displayed. Display scope
Power Control
11
Display scope
ALARM
Power Control
The new alarm is not displayed!

12
An alarm belonging to another
higher/middle hierarchy has occurred!
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

• Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified hierarchy.
LEVEL
(b) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy] in [Switching Device] on the
Extended tab.
• Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm. 13
• And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy] in [Switching Device] on the Extended tab.
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device.
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms

-- -- Line1 abend -- --
-- -- Line2 abend -- --
Line1 Line2
GD110 2
Equipment A Equipment B Equipment B
Power Control Control Power Control
Displays all middle alarms
Display scope

-- -- Equipment A error -- --
-- -- Equipment B error -- -- Equipment A Equipment B Equipment B
GD110 1 -- -- Equipment B error -- --
Power Control Control Power Control
Displays all general alarms
Display scope

GD110 0 04/06/01 10:00 Control module error 11:00 Power Control Control Power Control
04/06/01 09:15 Pwr. module error 10:10 09:55
04/06/01 08:35 Control module error 10:20 09:40
POINT
(1) Switching method to the upper alarm hierarchy
To switch the hierarchy to the upper alarm hierarchy (general alarms middle alarms higher alarms),
operate the touch switches for advanced user alarm display.
(6) Description on touch switches for advanced user alarm display
(2) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm hierarchy as the initial display
hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are displayed with the vertical
hierarchies ignored.
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms

04/06/01 12:10 Drive module error 12:25
All the alarms belonging to the general hierarchy are displayed.

(3) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of the hierarchy being
displayed
When the advanced user alarms (alarm ID) to be displayed are switched or language switching is performed,
all the alarms of the hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy are displayed.

(2) Switching displays by device (set in [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
The display shown below is available. ( 11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)
• Refined display of data by level, group, and alarm ID
DISPLAY
• Change the comments displayed according to the target user or purpose.
• Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and so on).
(a) Items to which a switching device can be set 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Switching device setting usable
Description
item
Hierarchy*1 All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
*1 Alarms at the specified level are displayed.

Level
Group*1 Alarms of the specified group are displayed.
The display order is changed between ascending order and descending order.
11
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time, check date/time, comment No., level,
Priority Level Attribute
group, alarm status (occurred, checked, or restored), occurrence frequency, cumulative time, or
down time can be selected.
The setting of advanced user alarm observation (alarm ID) displayed by advanced user alarm
Advanced User Alarm
ALARM
display can be changed.
Observation
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced user alarm display window.
General Comment Group

The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be changed for each comment group.
12
Middle Comment Group
The comment displayed can be changed according to the user or purpose.
Higher Comment Group
*1 The hierarchy, level, and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (level) is set to D102 and the switching device
(priority level attribute) to D103.
Assume that the alarms below occurred.
Occurred Comment Status Level Switch the display depending on the level.
04/06/01 16:50 Temp. error Ocr. 1 All levels Displays all alarms (D102: 0)
04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3 Major Displays alarms at level 1 (D102: 1)
04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3
Rstr. 3 Middle Displays alarms at level 2 (D102: 2)
04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error
04/06/01 08:10 Internal pressure error Rstr. 3 Minor Display alarms at level 3 (D102: 3)
04/06/01 07:40 Fuse error Rstr. 2
Select display Change items for sorting alarms.
All levels Major Middle Minor
level Occurred Displays alarms in the order of occurrence
Select sort item Occurred Level Alarm date (descending order) (D103: 1)
Level Displays alarms in the order of level
(descending order) (D103: 5)
Touch switch for switching the alarm display data
Alarm Displays alarms in the order of alarm status
Minor "3" is written into D102. Alarm "7" is written into D103
(1) (2)
Only level 3 alarms are displayed.
Switching device
(level): D102 0 3
Switching device
(priority level 0 7
attribute): D103
Alarm display is sorted
by alarm status.
Display of general alarms

Occurred Comment Status Level Occurred Comment Status Level Occurred Comment Status Level
04/06/01 16:50 Temp. error Ocr. 1 04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3 04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3
04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3 04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3 04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Rstr. 3
04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3 04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Rstr. 3 04/06/01 08:10 Internal pressure error Rstr. 3
04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Rstr. 3 04/06/01 08:10 Internal pressure error Rstr. 3 04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3
04/06/01 08:10 Internal pressure error Rstr. 3
04/06/01 07:40 Fuse error Rstr. 2
Only level 3 alarms are displayed. Alarm display is sorted in the order of
alarm status (occur restore check).
POINT
Changing the alarm sorting order by [Priority Level Attribute]
Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot be changed while higher alarms
or middle alarms are displayed.

(3) Setting of display colors for each alarm status, level, and group
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The advanced user alarm display function allows visually identification of alarms by setting display colors for
each item as the following. ( 11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)
• Alarm status (occurrence, restore, and check)
DISPLAY
• Level
• Group
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error Identifies alarm
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error status visually!
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(4) Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely

(a) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)
A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.
Occurred Comment Setting available for text color,

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
style, and kanji region!
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
(b) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the language
switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
Occurred Comment Language switching

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 04/6/1 11:35:52
is available for the
table title since the
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error 04/6/1 09:45:30
comment specified
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error 04/6/1 08:15:45 in a comment
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error 04/6/1 05:22:35 group can be used
for the table title!
Language
switching device 1 2

(5) Writing alarm data into device

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The alarm data touched on the advanced user alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
(a) Alarm data written into the device
DISPLAY
Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (15 types).
• Alarm ID • Occurred Time • Level
• Comment Group No. • Restored Date • Group 10
• Comment No. • Restored Time • Frequency of Occurrences
COMMENT DISPLAY
• Alarm Status • Checked Date • Cumulative Time
• Occurred Date • Checked Time • Down Time
(b) Alarms to be written
The data of the alarm touched on advanced user alarm display are written.
D200: 0601H 11
D201: 2004H
Occurred Comment
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 12:10 Motor error
ALARM
12
The occurred date of the selected alarm
(04/06/01) is output to the device.
LEVEL
POINT
Touch mode when data are written in the device 13
When writing alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab to [Selection] or [Operation].
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(6) Description on touch switches for advanced user alarm display

Touch switches for displaying advanced user alarm can be read from the library of GT Designer3.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced user alarm
display.
Touch switches for advanced user alarm display
Show/Hide the Cursor.
Show cursor Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
FFB0H
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error Ocr.
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
Hide cursor Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
FFB1H
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
Show the cursor!


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
• If the cursor is hidden:
The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).
DISPLAY
Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
Move cursor upward 04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error Ocr.
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
FFB2H
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 13:54 Fuel error Rstr. 14:00
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error Chk. 13:15
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error Ocr.
Move to the next page!
• If the cursor is shown:

The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).
11
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
Move cursor downward 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
ALARM
FFB3H
Occurred Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
Status
Ocr.
Restored Checked
12
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
Move the cursor!
LEVEL
The alarm status is changed to "checked."
Display date/time of selected data (check) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
FFB4H 04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Ocr.
Ocr. 13
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Ocr.
PANELMETER
Display date/time of all data (check all) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
FFB5H
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"! 14
A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
Clear the selected alarm data (delete) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
LINE GRAPH
FFB6H 04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Rstr. 17:15
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
15
Clear all alarm data (delete all) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
FFB7H 04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error Ocr.
TREND GRAPH
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
The restored alarm is deleted!
16
BAR GRAPH

If touched while general alarms are displayed, the detailed screen of the selected
alarms is displayed.

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
Display detail
Status Restored Checked

Ocr.
Temp. error on power Ocr.
module. Chk. 15:10 14:50
Check power module.
FFB8H The detailed screen is displayed!
If touched while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, alarms displayed are
switched to the lower hierarchy.
-- Pwr. module error -- -- --
-- Drive module error -- -- --
Move to the lower hierarchy

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
The hierarchy is moved to the lower one!
The selected alarm is reset.

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
Reset the selected alarm data*1

FFB9H
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Rstr. 17:11
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
The selected alarm is reset!
The device value is changed to OFF status/reset value specified on the [Device]
tab.Resetting is performed only for general alarms.


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
An advanced user alarm data is saved in the memory card as an alarm log file.

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
DISPLAY
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
FFBBH
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
The data are saved into the memory card!
A device is automatically searched in specified program file by coil-search/defect

search, and the result is displayed on the ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder
jump function)
Specify the search mode and program file to be searched in the setting dialog box of the
Advanced User Alarm Observation.
11

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
ALARM
Display ladder 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error Chk. 15:10 14:50
FFBCH
12
M999
MOV 1 D1
MOV 2 D2
LEVEL
Displays the ladder monitor screen
(displays the ladder including the specified device) 13
The hierarchy of the alarms displayed is switched.
PANELMETER
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Ocr.
Move to the upper hierarchy

FFC2H
14
-- Pwr. module error -- -- --
-- Drive module error -- -- --
The hierarchy is moved to the upper one! LINE GRAPH
Time Specification Jump
Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices.
FFBEH
(Time specification jump function) 15
TREND GRAPH
For the details of *1 refer to the following.
*1 Resetting of advanced user alarms
To turn off or reset the device value by the touch switch, set [YES] for [Reset] in the [Device] tab of the [Advanced
User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
(1) Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status
The touch switches for advanced user alarm display operate differently depending on the display status.
• Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).
• Display detail (FFB8H) / Move to the lower hierarchy (FFB8H)
This touch switch operates in 2 ways for a key code.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, the display is moved to the lower hierarchy.
When general alarms are displayed, details are displayed on the comment window.
(2) Operation method by directly touching Advanced User Alarm Display

The following operations can be performed by setting [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab.
• Selection of an alarm (Set [Touch Mode] to [Selection])
Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced user alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error 04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50 04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
The touched alarm is selected. The alarm is deselected by touching it

(2) Change of cursor color again.
The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor]
on the [Style] tab.
• Hierarchy switching and detail display of alarms (Set [Touch Mode] to [Operation])
Alarm hierarchies can be switched and detail screen can be displayed by touching the advanced user alarm
display directly. (equivalent operation to displaying detail or moving to the lower hierarchy)
Occurred Comment Restored Checked Occurredthe fuse ofComment Restored Checked

Change
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error 04/06/01
the 16:51 Fuse error
power supply
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50 04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
module.
When the selected alarm is touched again, display is moved

to the lower alarm hierarchy and detail screen is displayed.
(3) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor] on the [Style] tab.
(4) Setting method of touch switches


9
 Function that retains log data in the SRAM user area under power failure
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Log data collected in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
The log data saved in the SRAM user area can be retained under power failure.
The following functions are available for saving the log data and retaining log data under power failure.
DISPLAY
• Advanced user alarm display
• Advanced system alarm display
• Logging function
To use log data as a file, configure the setting for saving the file, and for retaining log data in the SRAM user area
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
under power failure.
(1) Saving data in the SRAM user area
The data are saved in the SRAM user area at almost the same timing when log data are collected in the
buffering area.
The user cannot set timing for saving the log data.
When log data are saved in the SRAM user area, the GOT automatically reads the log data when the GOT is
turned on. 11
GOT
User area
(C drive + Extension memory)
ALARM
Buffering area
Logging 12
data
If trigger conditions of each controller are

established, the log data are saved
in the buffering area.
LEVEL
SRAM
SRAM user area

Saved data
in the SRAM user area
13
The log data collected
in the buffering area are saved ID1:100KB
PANELMETER
in the SRAM user area Log ID2:100KB
under power failure. data 500KB
ID3:200KB
Free area
14
(a) Specifications of retaining log data under power failure
Function that can retain log Number of
LINE GRAPH
Capacity
data under power failure settings
Advanced user alarm Up to 10
Advanced system alarm Up to 1 500KB in total
Logging function Up to 10 15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) Priority order for using the SRAM user area

When free area of the SRAM user area is used, the priority order exists for using the SRAM user area.
To use functions regardless of the priority order, set the total data size of each function to be less than
500KB.
• Priority order of each function
Priority order for using

Function
SRAM user area
High
Low
Logging function
• Priority order of IDs

When multiple IDs are set by one function, log data are saved in ascending ID order.
(c) Clearing or backing up data in the SRAM user area
The log data saved in the SRAM user area are cleared at the following timing.
• When project data and OSes are written or installed on the GOT while [Initialize SRAM user area when
writing project data/OS] in the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box is selected
• When data in the SRAM user area are initialized by [SRAM control] in the utility
• When a clear trigger set in [Buffering] for each function is established
To keep the saved log data in the SRAM user area, backup or restore the data in the utility.
For details of the backup/restoration, refer to the following.

(2) Precautions for retaining data in the SRAM user area under power failure
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When the setting for retaining data in the SRAM user area under power failure is configured, the data may not
be saved due to the setting change in each function, the SRAM user area damage, and others.
(a) Normal status
DISPLAY
The collected data of each function are saved in the SRAM user area.
ID1:100KB
ID2:100KB
500KB
10
ID3:200KB
COMMENT DISPLAY
Free area
(b) Changing setting

When the data size of data to be collected is changed in each function, the log data saved in the SRAM
user area are initialized.
• Reducing data size: The data are saved in the initialized area again, and the unnecessary area is
changed to the free area. 11
• Increasing data size: The area in use is initialized, and the data are saved in another free area.
If the free area for saving data is insufficient, an error occurs.
When an error occurs, initialize the SRAM user area, set the data size to be 500KB or less.
Example) Increasing data size of ID1 from 100KB to 200KB
ALARM
ID1:100KB Free area
ID2:100KB ID2:100KB Initialize the save area.
500KB
ID3:200KB ID3:200KB
An error occurs because the data of ID:1
cannot be saved in another area.
12
Free area Free area The initialized area is changed to the free area.
(c) Deleting setting

When the setting for each function is deleted, the SRAM user area used for saving data is changed to the
LEVEL
reserved area. The reserved area is available after the area is initialized.
For initialization of the SRAM user area, refer to the following.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) 13
Example) Deleting ID1 setting
Reserved area
PANELMETER
ID1:100KB
The save area of ID:1 is changed to the reserved area.
ID2:100KB ID2:100KB
When the setting of ID:1 is set again,
500KB
ID3:200KB ID3:200KB the saved data can be retained and reused.
Free area Free area
(d) Others
14
An error occurs if data retained in the SRAM user area under power failure are not restored when the GOT
turns on.
LINE GRAPH
When the error occurs, check the battery.
• Normal status: Part of the SRAM user area may be damaged.
Initialize the SRAM user area.
• Voltage drop: Change the battery.
If the data are not restored even when the battery is changed, initialize the SRAM user 15
area.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.3.6 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the advanced user alarm.

Up to 8 advanced user alarm displays can be set on each base screen, overlap window, or superimpose
window.
The GOT can display up to 8 advanced user alarm displays.
Do not copy multiple advanced user alarm displays on the project created with version 1.48A or later and paste
them to a project created with version earlier than 1.48A.
The GOT displays one advanced user alarm display only.
When using multiple advanced user alarm displays, use GT Designer3 with version 1.48A or later.
(2) Initial display hierarchy and hierarchy switching device
The advanced user alarm display and the advanced alarm popup display write the hierarchy specified for [Initial
Display Hierarchy] to the hierarchy switching device at the following timing.
Therefore, the displayed hierarchy is switched.
• When the screen is switched (Advanced user alarm display only)
• When the GOT first displays the objects after the GOT turns on
• When the displayed alarm observation ID is switched by using its switching device
For the setting of [Initial Display Hierarchy], refer to the following.
11.3.3 Alarm tab
For the settings of the switching devices for the hierarchy and the advanced user alarm ID, refer to the following.

(3) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the [Extended] tab) is changed to 1 by
touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
DISPLAY
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Value of hierarchy switching device Corresponding comment No. Comments displayed
0 0 General alarms being displayed. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
1 1 Middle alarms being displayed.
2 2 Higher alarms being displayed.
(a) When masking is applied
Value of hierarchy
switching device
11
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2
Higher alarms being displayed The comment of comment No.2
ALARM
is displayed since the value of the
Occurred
-- --
Comment
Line1 error
hierarchy switching device is 2.
-- -- Line2 error
Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
12
Touch!
middle hierarchy
Masking
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
LEVEL
AND
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mask value (7FFFH)
13
PANELMETER
Value of hierarchy
switching device
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1
14
Middle alarms being displayed The comment of comment No.1
LINE GRAPH
Occurred Comment hierarchy switching device is 1.
-- -- Equipment A error
-- -- Equipment B error
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) When masking is not applied
Value of hierarchy
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
switching device
2
Higher alarms being displayed The comment of comment No.2

Occurred Comment hierarchy switching device is 2.
-- -- Line1 error
-- -- Line2 error

Touch! from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767
The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
Occurred Comment
the uppermost bit is set to
-- -- Equipment A error 1 and the value is -32767.
-- -- Equipment B error
(4) Settings for saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card
To place the button for saving advanced user alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced user alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the [File Save] tab described in the following to save the advanced user
alarm data.
(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced user alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced user alarm display on the screen where advanced user alarm display
was specified to save the data.
(5) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the target text color
is set to Black with [Switching] on the [Text] tab. (Characters are hidden since the text color and the cursor color
are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to other than
Black.

(6) Precautions for setting

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(a) Setting number
The object setting size cannot exceed the GOT user area.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
DISPLAY
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method for the setting size of the advanced user alarm display, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
For the free user area available for the GOT, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer
(b) Saving a file

The memory card capacity must be larger than the size of the file to be saved.
For the size of the file to be saved in the memory card, refer to the following. 11
(7) Precautions for using comment group

When an inexistent value (column No.) is set at the language switching device, "No message" is displayed.
ALARM
(1) If the same data exists in the memory card 12
Overwritten!
LEVEL
Save
13
Occurred Comment Status
04/06/01 Temp. error Ocr. AAM00000.G1A AAM00000.G1A
PANELMETER
04/06/01 Fuse error Ocr.
04/06/01 Oil error Ocr.
Save
Touch
14
Key code: FFBBH
or
LINE GRAPH
store trigger device
The data in the memory card is overwritten. Therefore, to keep the data unchanged, move the data from the
memory card to a personal computer by either of the following methods.
• Read out resource data by GT Designer3. 15
TREND GRAPH
• Read the CSV file saved in the memory card by using a personal computer.
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file

While an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the observation of the advanced user alarm with the alarm
ID corresponding to the log file is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced user alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Example: When saving advanced user alarm data with alarm ID1
While an alarm log file is saved in the memory

Saving... card, the observation of the advanced user
alarm with the alarm ID corresponding to the
log file is interrupted temporarily!
Alarm ID1
GOT internal memory
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
Alarm ID2
Buffering area
Save
Alarm ID3
(3) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms to be saved as
alarm log files (set on the [File Save] tab) are saved in the memory card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
• Set a trigger for each advanced user alarm observation settings and save the data.
• Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced user alarm display and save the data.
(4) When turning off the CF/SD card access switch of the used drive
When the CF/SD card access switch is turned off while the memory card is ejected from the drive, the data in
the memory card are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the memory card from the drive until the following LED or signal is turned off and the file saving is
completed.
• The CF/SD card access LED of the used drive is turned off.
• Drive status notification signal of the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and advanced
system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set in the [File Save] tab).
(5) When restoring alarm history while the GOT is turned on

If the alarm log file in the memory card is not one created in the project in the GOT, the GOT cannot read the file
from the memory card. (The GOT cannot restore the alarm history saved before the GOT is turned off.)
• [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
• System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.

(6) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed according to settings made in the
[Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic] tab.
• Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.
• Not collect advanced user alarms.
DISPLAY
To avoid the operations above, set [Full Notification Signal Device] on the [Basic] tab, and clear the restored
alarm when the device turns on.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Action When Buffer is Full
Full Notification Signal Device 11
(7) Error when the alarm log file is saved
If an error occurs when a file is saved, [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
Make sure that the following status is made.
ALARM
• The CF/SD card access switch on the GOT is not set to "transfer prohibited".
• The memory card is not full.
(8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2) 12
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification signal,
operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
Operation (difference)
Item
LEVEL
Advanced user alarm observation Drive status notification signal
Difference between [Full Notification Signal Turns on when the number of saved alarms
Device] set by advanced user alarm observation
and drive status notification signal (system signal
reaches the [Stored Number] set on the [Basic]
tab. (When the buffering area reserved for
Turns on when the memory card is full. 13
2-2.b4, b5) advanced user alarms is full)
Difference between [Writing Notification Device]
PANELMETER
Turns on while data (including data other than
set by advanced user alarm observation and Turns on while advanced user alarm data are
advanced user alarms) are written into the
drive status notification signal (system signal 2- written into the memory card.
memory card.
2.b0, b1)
• Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm

log file in the memory card is accessed. (For
example, the alarm log file in the memory
14
Difference between [Writing Error Notification Turns on when the memory card cannot be
card is not one created in the project in the
Device] set by advanced user alarm observation accessed. (For example, the memory card is
GOT.)
and drive status notification signal (system signal not installed in the GOT, or the CF/SD card
• Turns on when the memory card cannot be
LINE GRAPH
2-2.b7, b8) access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".)
accessed. (For example, the memory card is
not installed in the GOT, or the CF/SD card
access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".)
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(9) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to the following.
(10) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.

For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File
(11) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including MicrosoftExcel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer3.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.
(12) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored
If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in advanced user
alarm observation, it may take a few minutes to display the data.
(13) Priority of alarm display

(a) When the displayed alarms are not changed by the [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
(b) When the displayed alarms are changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.
(14) Display of the comment window and key window
When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
When try to open the detail display (comment

window display) while the key window is displayed.
Key window 7 8 9 AC
4 5 6 Del
1 2 3 +/-
0 Enter
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35 Control module error
Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!

(15) Advanced user alarm display when using the set overlay screen function
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When setting the advanced user alarm display on the called screen, do not set the advanced user alarm display
on the base screen.
The called screen cannot display the advanced user alarm display when the advanced user alarm display is set
on the base screen.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred Comment Restored
04/06/01 17:24 Fuel error
on called screen
04/06/01 16:15 Internal pressure error 16:10

04/06/01 17:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error Advanced user alarm display
04/06/01 14:27 Oil error 15:10 on base screen 11
For settings of the set overlay screen, refer to the following.
ALARM
(Fundamentals) 9.2 Changing Screen According to Situation (Set Overlay Screen)
(16) Precautions for the time specification jump function

• When performing other operations during the time specification jump
12
While the GOT searches for data at the specified time, the other operations for the advanced user alarm
display are unavailable.
• When multiple alarm data at times close to the specified time exist
When no alarm data at the specified time exists, alarm data at the time closest to the specified time is
LEVEL
displayed.
• When displaying the data in the neighborhood of the oldest/latest alarm data 13
When the alarm data at the specified time is in the neighborhood of the oldest/latest data, the data may not be
displayed on the center of the advanced user alarm display.
• When no alarm data to be displayed on the advanced user alarm display exists
PANELMETER
When no alarm data displayed on the advanced user alarm display exists, the time specification jump is not
executed.
• Alarm hierarchy available for the time specification jump function
Only general alarms are available for the time specification jump function.
The function is not available with higher alarms and middle alarms.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

When an error occurs in the GOT, controller or network, the advanced system alarm responding error code and message
are displayed.
POINT
Before setting advanced system alarms
This section explains the advanced system alarm observation and advanced system alarm display of the advanced
alarm function.
Read the following before setting the advanced system alarm observation and advanced system alarm display.

System
User
alarm system alarm

User System
Advanced user Advanced system Advanced user Advanced
alarm display alarm display alarm system alarm
User System
System

alarm system alarm
11 - 108 11.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced system alarm.
 Advanced system alarm observation
DISPLAY
(1) Monitored alarm types and settings
(a) Alarm types
The following alarms can be monitored in the advanced system alarm.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
• CPU error : A controller error is displayed as an alarm.
• GOT error : A GOT error is displayed as an alarm.
• Network error : A network module error is displayed as an alarm.
The types of the system alarms monitored can be selected by the setting.
Because only particular alarm types can be displayed, alarm details can be observed quickly.
(b) Necessary settings to use advanced system alarms 11

To use advanced system alarms, select the [Use System Alarm] item and specify the target.
1) Check "Use System Alarm."
ALARM
2) Check the target of monitoring.
12
In the advanced system alarm (advanced system alarm observation), set the types of the collected alarms
and the collection method.
LEVEL
Advanced System Alarms Observation
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
· Types of advanced system alarms monitored
· Collection mode
· Setting for history saving (alarms collected in the User
area)
· Setting for the retention of advanced system alarms
15
under power failure (saving in the memory card)
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.4 Advanced System Alarm Display 11 - 109

(2) Collection flow and collection mode

(a) Collection flow
• CPU errors and network errors
CPU errors and network errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory) in cycles of 3 seconds regardless of the displayed screen. (Watch cycle cannot be changed.)
In the buffering area, collected advanced system alarm data are temporarily saved as historical data,
and they are displayed on the GOT as alarms.
Alarm data are collected into the buffering area every 3 s,

regardless of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
User area
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confirm c
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa
Buffering area
Displays advanced system alarm

data collected into the buffering
area as alarms.
• GOT errors
GOT errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory) when an
alarm occurs.
HINT
(1) Deletion of data in the buffering area
(3) Alarm restoration
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area

Data to be collected differ depending on the history collection mode.

(b) Alarm collection modes 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The history collection mode is selected from two options: historical and only current alarm.
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
DISPLAY
Example) When displaying data by advanced system alarm display
10
Occurred Message Status Restore Check
04/06/01 20:00 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr.
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 18:30 70 Battery voltage low or equipment f Chk. 18:50
04/06/01 16:10 803 Transident error Chk. 16:30 16:20
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Info. displayed
Description
11
Historical Only Current Alarm
1) Occurred The date/time of the alarm occurrence is displayed.
An error code and an alarm message are displayed when an alarm occurs.
For error codes and corrective actions, refer to the following.
2) Comment
ALARM
Alarm messages registered in GOT in advance are displayed.
The status of the alarm is displayed.

Ocr. : Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
12
3) Alarm status
Chk. : Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr. : Alarm has been restored
4) Restore The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed. -
LEVEL
5) Check
13
Message Restore Check Message Restore Check
402 Communication timeout. Confirm
Check 402 Communication timeout. Confirm 19:00
PANELMETER
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)
• Historical
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs.
(The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
14
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
• Only current alarm

In this mode, the latest alarms only are displayed. LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(c) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced system alarm display for each collection mode.
Alarm Alarm
occurred occurred
"402 Communication timeout. Restoration*2
Confirm communication
pathway or modules." Alarm
occurred
"500 Warning! Built-in battery
voltage is low."
11:30 12:00 15:30 16:00 18:25
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Alarm checked Alarm resetting
by user*1 by user*2
*1 Alarms are checked with the touch switch for confirmation.

*2 For the GOT error, the alarm status is not changed to "Restored" even when the cause of the alarm is eliminated.
• Historical
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr. "Communication
timeout" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.
2) "Communication timeout" is checked.

Occurred
Occurrence Message Status Restore Check
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 12:00 "Communication
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. timeout" is
checked.
Check
3) Restored from "Communication timeout" (Key code: FFB4H)

"Restoration" is
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 12:00 not indicated in
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. the alarm status
on the GOT.
4) The alarm is reset. "The alarm is

reset".
Reset
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 16:00 12:00
(Key code: FFB9H)
The alarm status
is changed to
"Restored" on the
GOT and the
5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again restored time is
Occurred Message Status Restore Check displayed.
04/06/01 18:25 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr. A new line
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 16:00 12:00 is added and
displayed.

• Only current alarm 9

Only the latest alarms of GOT errors, CPU errors, and network errors are displayed.
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Not collected in the only
current alarm mode.
DISPLAY
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.
"Communication
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. timeout" occurs! 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
2) "Communication timeout" is checked.
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 12:00 "Communication
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. timeout" is checked
Check 11
(Key code: FFB4H)
3) Restored from "Communication timeout"
"Restoration" is
ALARM
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk. 12:00
not indicated in
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. the alarm status
on the GOT.
12
4) The alarm is reset.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. Data are deleted
when the alarm
status is changed
LEVEL
to "Restored."
5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again. 13

04/06/01 18:25 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr. The generated
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr. alarm is displayed.
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


The following shows how to change the alarm status of each error to "Restored".
(a) CPU error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the CPU error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a CPU error will
be changed to "Restored".
When using the multi-channel function, all alarm statuses will be changed to "Restored" by eliminating
causes of alarms of all channels.
(b) Network error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the network error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a network error
will be changed to "Restored".
(c) GOT error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the GOT error.
The alarm status of a GOT error will not be changed to "Restored". Perform either of the following
operations.
Error Cause
occurred eliminated
Occurred Message Status
04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equipm Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error Ocr.
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller, The display on the GOT shows alarm
or network are eliminated. occurrences even if the alarm causes
on the GOT, controller and network
are eliminated.
• Change the selected alarm status to "Restored"

Change the selected alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored" by the touch switch (key code:
FFB9H).
Occurred Message Status Occurred Message Status

04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr. 04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr. Reset 04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr.
04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr. 04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr.
(Key code: FFB9H)
• Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored" (using the system information)
Turn ON the GOT error reset signal (System Signal 1-1.b13) of the system information to change all the
GOT error alarm statuses from "Occurred" to "Restored".
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr. 04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr. Reset 04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.
04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr. 04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Rstr.
(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)
• Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored" (using the utility)
At the system alarm display of the utility, change all the GOT error alarm statuses from "Occurred" to
"Restored".

(4) Clearing alarm data

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The "Restored" status alarms can be cleared from the history.
To clear alarm data, perform either of the following operations.
(a) Clear by device
DISPLAY
Turning on the device set for [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device] clears all the "Restored" alarm data.
Occurred Message Status Occurred Message Status 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr. 04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr. Delete
04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr.
Turn on "Buffer Clear"
(b) Clear by touch switch

By using a touch switch, one or all the "Restored" alarm data are cleared.
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr. 04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.
Delete
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr. 04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error Ocr.
ALARM
(Key code: Clear one FFB6H
Clear all FFB7H)
12
POINT
(1) Before changing the alarm status of a GOT error from "Occurred" to "Restored"
LEVEL
Eliminate the alarm causes of the GOT error.
If the alarm status of a GOT error is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored" without eliminating the alarm
cause, the same alarm will occur again.
13
Example) When the alarm is reset while "460 Communication unit error" is occurring
PANELMETER
04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error Ocr.
Reset
14
Reset the alarms
(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)

04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error Rstr. All the alarms are
LINE GRAPH
04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error Rstr. changed to the status
of "Restored."
Occurred Message
04/06/01 12:00 460 Communication unit error
Status
Ocr.
The same alarm occurs 15
after resetting.
04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error Rstr.
04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error Rstr. Displays the date and
TREND GRAPH
time where the alarm is

detected again after it
is reset.
(2) Clearable alarms on the GOT

Only the "Restored" status alarms can be cleared.
When clearing an alarm, change the alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored".
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
Clearing alarm data
The following methods can also be used for clearing alarm data.
• Powering off or resetting the GOT
Powering off or resetting the GOT deletes the alarm data.
However, when the advanced system alarm data are saved in the memory card, the data can be retained even
if the GOT is powered off.
• When the following settings are made within utilities
Item Description
Communication
[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]
setting

GOT setup
Program/data control OS and project writing
Debug & self check Self check [I/O check]
• OS and project writing, drive information delete and drive format

(5) Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(a) Data retention under power failure
By saving advanced system alarm data in the memory card or SRAM user area as alarm log files, the data
are retained even when the GOT is powered off.
DISPLAY
When the GOT is powered on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card or SRAM user area, the
GOT reads the alarm log file automatically and restores the history of the advanced system alarm saved
before the GOT is powered off.
Memory card
10
The timing to save the data in a memory card can be set.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Data (Rising / Falling / Sampling / ON Sampling / OFF Sampling)
are Data can be saved by pressing the touch switch as well.
stored

DDD EEE FFF
DDD EEE FFF
Current status
11
Power off Power on
ALARM
SRAM user area
Data 12
are Alarm data saved in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
stored
LEVEL
DDD EEE FFF
Current status
DDD EEE FFF
Power off Power on 13

PANELMETER
(b) Status observation during writing
Status while advanced system alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
monitored using the device.
14
Writing
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipmen
Writing :
Write error :
16
Save
BAR GRAPH
Status during writing can be monitored.

(c) File name to be saved and saving timing

• Save in a memory card
Any file name can be given.
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
A file name cannot be given.
The alarm data is saved in the SRAM user area at almost the same timing as the data is saved in the
buffering area.
(d) Method of data retention under power failure
Using a memory card
Configure the setting including a file name in the [File Save] tab, and then perform either of the following
operations.
• Save by the store trigger device
• Save by the touch switch
• Save by the buffer flash forced save signal (GS520.b0)
Using the SRAM user area
Configure the setting in the [Basic] tab as follows.
(e) Required memory capacity
For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure, refer to
the following.
HINT
(1) Information to be saved
The alarm log file information to be saved in a memory card or the SRAM user area varies depending on the
collection mode.
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in a memory card
After advanced user alarm data is stored as an alarm log file in a memory card, the file can be utilized as
follows:
• The history of advanced system alarms can be displayed as a historical graph.
• For a display on personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to CSV file/Unicode text file with
GOT utility or Convert Trigger.
• Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file saved in a memory card
By checking [Auto Backup at Save] on the [File Save] tab, the alarm log file just before saved can be saved as
a backup file.
(4) Back up or restore of the data saved in the SRAM user area
Data saved in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored with [SRAM control] in the utility.

(6) Converting alarm log files

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The alarm log files created with the advanced system alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to Unicode text files or CSV files for displaying and editing the files on a personal
computer.
The following explains how to convert alarm log files.
DISPLAY
(a) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with utility.
Convert binary files (*.G1A) saved in a memory card to Unicode text files or CSV files with the utility.
10
1. Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch G1A->CSV button or
COMMENT DISPLAY
G1A->TXT button for converting the file.
11
ALARM
12
2. Store the converted Unicode text file/CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
LEVEL
• Transferring files with GT Designer3
The resource data is read from the GOT. For the procedure, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 7.1.4 Writing and installing on GOT 13
• Storing files in memory card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a memory card or USB memory, and read the data from the memory card or
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
Memory card/ Memory card/
Alarm log file USB memory USB memory Alarm log file
15
3. Display and edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.
TREND GRAPH
POINT
How to operate utility
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with device.
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) in a memory card to Unicode text files or CSV files by turning on the
specified device.
When converting the files to Unicode text files or CSV files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the convert
trigger device.
• Advanced Alarm Common
• File conversion (the File Save tab in the Advanced User Alarm Observation screen)
POINT
Precautions for file conversion with external control device
Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced system alarm observation that creates a file to be
converted into the alarm ID device. (For the advanced system alarm observation: 0)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the advanced system alarm
observation, the alarm log file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(c) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files by using GT Designer3
Convert the binary file (*.G1A) in a memory card to a Unicode text file or a CSV file by using GT Designer3.
For details of this procedure, refer to the following.
(7) Contents of a Unicode text file or CSV file
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9) 10) 11) 12) 13)
No. Description
1) Collection mode
2) Number of alarms
Alarm ID
3)
For the advanced system alarm, this field is fixed to 65535.
Alarm name
4)
For the advanced system alarm, this field is blank.
Comment group No.

5)
For the advanced system alarm, the field is fixed to 0.
6) Number of alarms
9) Message of system alarm
(8) Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes

9
 Advanced system alarm display settings
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Method of displaying alarm
(a) Types of alarm displayed
DISPLAY
11.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
• All alarms : Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
• Occurring alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Alarm status
(Occurred) (Comment) (Restored) (Checked)
04/06/01 12:10 402 Communication -- --
04/06/01 11:45 70 Battery voltage lo -- 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 460 Communication 12:05 11:50
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
803 Transient error
500 Warning! Built-in
--
10:14
10:55
09:48
11
04/06/01 08:58 330 Insufficient memo 09:45 09:15
In case of [All alarms] In case of [Occurring alarm]
ALARM
04/06/01 12:10 402 Communicati 04/06/01 12:10 402 Communicati
12
04/06/01 11:45 70 Battery voltage 12:25 04/06/01 11:45 70 Battery voltage 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 460 Communicati 12:05 11:50 04/06/01 10:47 803 Transient err 10:55
04/06/01 10:47 803 Transient err 10:55
04/06/01 09:30 500 Warning! Bui 10:14 09:48
04/06/01 08:58 330 Insufficient m 09:45 09:15
Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light
displayed. error are deleted because these alarms have been restored.
LEVEL
(b) Comment display methods
The display methods below can be selected. 13
• Fixed
PANELMETER
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
• Flow
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left. If display the comment by
flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width or a comment in multiple lines can
be displayed. 14
Comment contents displayed
1)
LINE GRAPH
04/06/01 12:10 330 Insufficient m 330 Insufficient memory media capacity. Comment over
04/06/01 11:45 460 Communicati 12:25 Confirm M-card capacity. multiple lines
04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient err 12:05 11:50
Displayed as a flow from right to left. 2) 15

460 Communication unit error
TREND GRAPH

04/06/01 12:10 emory media c
3)
04/06/01 11:45 on unit error 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 or 12:05 11:50 803 Transient error
Occurred Comment Restored Checked 16

04/06/01 12:10 apacity.Confiir
04/06/01 11:45 460 Com 12:25
04/06/01 11:30 803 T 12:05 11:50
BAR GRAPH
A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.

(c) Alarm display order

Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:
1. Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.

The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest
Sort alarms in the descending order of the frequency of occurrence

04/06/01 20:00 402 Communication tim Ocr -- --
04/06/01 18:30 70 Battery voltage low o Chk. -- 18:50
04/06/01 16:10 460 Communication unit Chk. 16:30 16:20
04/06/01 14:00 803 Transient error Chk. 15:00 14:10
04/06/01 13:30 322 Dedicated device is Chk. 14:30 13:50
Setting example) Specify the settings on the [Display] tab as follows.
Items displayed by the advanced

system alarm display
Select an item for sort Select a display order

(Occurred). (descending or ascending).

9
2. By setting the [Switching Device], the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
For details of [Switching Device], refer to the following.
DISPLAY
Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency
Change the item for sorting to the occurrence frequency (descending order).
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 16:10 402 Communication tim Chk. 16:30 16:20
04/06/01 14:00 70 Battery voltage low o Chk. 15:00 14:10
04/06/01 18:30 460 Communication unit Chk. -- 18:50
04/06/01 20:00 803 Transient error Ocr. -- --
04/06/01 13:30 500 Warning! Built-in ba Chk. 14:30 13:50
Setting example) Set the items on the [Extended] tab as follows.

11
Switching device
D100 9
ALARM
The sort condition can be changed by the value
of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).
12
0 : Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)
1 : Occurrence date/time
2 : Restoration date/time
3 : Check date/time
4 : Comment (displayed comment No.)
LEVEL
5 : Level
6 : Group
7 : Alarm Status
(Ascending:check restore occur) 13
(Descending:occur restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
PANELMETER
11 : Down Time
14
POINT
LINE GRAPH
Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified at the same time
If both [Display Order] on the [Display] tab and [Priority Display Attribute] in [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
tab are set, the data are displayed in the order specified in [Priority Display Attribute].
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Operations by touch switches

Various operations are usable for displayed alarms by the touch switches for advanced system alarm display.
These touch switches can be arranged easily by the library.
Touch switches for advanced system alarm display
HINT
Details of the touch switches for advanced system alarm display

11.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
 Advanced Alarm Common
For setting items of the Advanced Alarm Common dialog box, refer to the following. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
 Advanced System Alarm Observation
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advanced System Alarm Observation] from the menu to display the setting dialog
box.
(1) Basic tab
Set the types of the advanced system alarms monitored, the collection mode, and the buffering details for saving
11
historical data.
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
Use System
LINE GRAPH
Set whether to enable the advanced system alarm function or not.
Alarm
Select the system alarms to be observed. (CPU error, GOT error, and network error)
Target
Select a method for handling advanced system alarms. 15

Historical : Data of advanced system alarms are collected as history.
TREND GRAPH
Collection Mode Historical data is added every time an advanced system alarm occurs.
Only Current Alarm : Only the latest alarms of GOT error, CPU error, and network error are
collected. When advanced system alarm statuses are changed to
Basic "Restored" on GOT, they are deleted.
Select this item to store the total number of advanced system alarms in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of 16
History Number occurrence, check, and restoration.
Storage This item is available when [Historical] is selected in [Collection Mode].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing the number.
BAR GRAPH

When this item is selected, the number of advanced system alarms whose alarm status is
Generated Number "Occurred" is stored in the word device.
Basic After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing the number.
Storage
Make buffering settings for saving the collected advanced system alarms.
This item can be set when [Historical] is selected in .
Retain data in the

embedded memory
in GOT even when The alarm data in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
the power goes off 11.4.5 Function that retains log data in the SRAM user area under power failure
(The battery will be
required)
Set the number of advanced system alarms to be saved. (512 to 32767)

Stored Number
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation performed when the number of advanced system alarms stored in the
buffering area reaches the [Stored Number].
Action When Buffer

Delete old data : Among the restored alarms, the oldest restored advanced user alarm is
is Full
deleted and the latest advanced user alarm is added.
Add no item : The collection of advanced system alarms is stopped. Even if a new
advanced system alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Select this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable
Buffering Full Notification advanced system alarms becomes lower than the number set in [Notification Number].
Signal Device After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Full Notification Signal Device.
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area becomes
small (No. of storable advanced system alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when [Full Notification Signal Device] is selected.
When the number of storable advanced system alarms is equal to or less than the number set in
Notification
[Notification Number], the [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.
Number
Example : Setting [Stored Number:1000] and [Notification Number:10]

The [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on when the number of total saved
advanced system alarms is 990 or more.
Select this item to delete the restored advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area by the
Buffering Data device.
Clear Trigger After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device.
Device
Select this item to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Buffering Data After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Completion Signal
Clear Completion Device.
Signal Device (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This item can be set only when [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Devicer] is selected.

(2) File Save tab

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the memory card.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Select this item to write the advanced system alarm history saved in the buffering area to the memory card as an alarm
Save alarm log log file.
LEVEL
files*2 The data are written to the memory card as a binary file. (*.G1A)
This item can be selected only when [Historical] is selected in [Collection Mode].
Drive Name The destination drive is displayed. 13

Folder Name*1 Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.
PANELMETER
File Access
By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common] [GOT Type Setting] is preset.
File Name*1 Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
By default, the file name is set to AAM00000.
Select a timing at which the advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to 14
the memory card.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1
Trigger Type to1440 minutes)
Store Trigger
• Rise • Sampling • OFF Sampling LINE GRAPH
• Fall • ON Sampling
Specify the store trigger device.

Device
Writing Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
Notification
TREND GRAPH

Device
16
BAR GRAPH

Writing Error Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Notification (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Device This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is restored.
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
Auto Backup at For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
Save*2 displayed on the GOT utility.)
Example: AAM00000.G1A AAM00000.G1A.BAK
Make setting to convert a file.

When setting [File Convert], the [ Advanced Alarm Common] must be set.
Click the [Advanced Alarm Common Setting] button and make the settings in the [Advanced Alarm Common Setting]
dialog box.
File Convert Conversion

Select a file format after conversion. (Unicode Text/CSV)
Format
Add date
information to file Select this item to add the date information to the converted file name.
name
Destination Select the location where the converted file is saved. ([Same as log file] or [Change])
*1 For details, refer to the following.

*2 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file
When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the following status,
system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
• When the alarm log file is broken
• When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file exists (select [Auto Backup at Save]), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no system alarm
occurs.)
HINT
Whether to store alarm data in a memory card
When the set store trigger is established, the alarm data are stored in a memory card only when the last stored
alarm data are changed.
When the alarm data are the same as the last stored alarm data, the alarm data are not stored in the memory card.

11.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
1. Select [Ocject] [Alarm Display] [Advanced System Alarm Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the advanced system alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement. 10
3.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Double click the arranged advanced system alarm display to display the setting dialog box.
 Alarm tab
Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed (advanced user alarm / advanced system alarm),
message display method and operations when the screen is touched.
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function. (User Alarm / System Alarm)
[System Alarm] is selected because this section explains the system alarm display.
Display Alarm Click the [Edit] button to display the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
14
Select how to display collected alarms.
Display Target 11.4.1 Before setting
Status
LINE GRAPH
All Alarm : Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is displayed.
Generating Alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.

Fixed : Displays the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs in a line. 15
Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the comment
is not displayed.
TREND GRAPH
Flow Z: Displays the comment flowing it from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
Display Type After selecting this item, select a speed to display the comment as a flow in [Speed].
When selecting [Display Type] to [Flow], select a speed for flowing display.
High : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per
Speed
second.
Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per
16
second.
Low : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per
second.
BAR GRAPH

Select the operation when the advanced system alarm display is touched.
Touch Mode None : No operation even when touched.
Selection : The touched alarm is selected.
Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).

Example) When setting the number of rows to 3
Number of Occurred Comment Restored Checked

Rows 04/11/05 10:25 402 Communi 11:25 10:45
Number of rows
04/11/05 12:05 70 Battery volt 12:25 12:28 (not including the title row)
04/11/06 08:30 460 Communi 09:45 09:40
Select which alarm is displayed in the top row when the number of alarms exceeds the number of rows set in [Number of
Rows].
• When the number of alarms exceeds the value set for [Display Start Row].
The alarm corresponding to the value row number set in [Display Start Row] is displayed in the top row.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 2, and the number of alarms is 5.
Alarm occurrence
1. 402 Commun••• Occurred Comment
Display order 2. 70 Battery vo••• 04/06/01 17:00 70 Battery volt
of alarms 3. 460 Commun••• 04/06/01 16:51 460 Communic
4. 803 Transien••• 04/06/01 15:20 803 Transient e
5. 500 Warning!•••
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number
specified on [Display Start Row].
• When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Display Start Row].
The last alarm is displayed in the bottom row.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 10, and the number of alarms is 5.
Display Start Alarm occurrence
Row*1
1. 402 Commun•••
Display order 2. 70 Battery vo••• Occurred Comment
of alarms 3. 460 Commun••• 04/06/01 16:51 460 Communication u
4. 803 Transien••• 04/06/01 15:20 803 Transient error
5. 500 Warning!••• 04/06/01 14:25 500 Warning! Built-in b
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.

• When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Number of Rows].
The setting for [Display Start Row] becomes invalid, and all the alarms are displayed.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 3 and the number of alarms is 5.
Alarm occurrence
Occurred Comment
Display order 1. 402 Commun••• 04/06/01 17:00 402 Communic
of alarms 2. 70 Battery vo••• 04/06/01 16:51 70 Battery volta
Displays all occurred alarms.
Object Name
The object name is also displayed in other than [Alarm] tab.

*1 Display Start Row 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
If the number of alarms becomes higher than the number s set to [Display Start Row] while the advanced system alarm
is displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the advanced system alarm
displays screen.
DISPLAY
HINT 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
If different [Display Start Row] are set on screens, different advanced system alarm display can be displayed for
each screen.

1st (Display Start Row: 1)
1st 2nd
2nd
11
3rd
3rd
4th
5th Screen 2
6th 4th (Display Start Row: 4)
7th 5th
8th 6th
9th
Screen 3
ALARM
7th (Display Start Row: 7)
8th
9th
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Display tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (contents and display order).
Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.
Direct Select this item to enter characters displayed on the title from [Title].
Select this item to display characters displayed on the title in the comment of comment group.
After the selection, set the group No.
Group No. : Set the comment group where characters displayed on the title has been
Title registered.
Adjust Text Size : Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
Comment If this item is not selected, a new line is automatically started, and the
character string is adjusted.
After the check, set the minimum character size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
Display Set the items displayed for the advanced system alarm display.
[Occurred] [Status] [Checked]
[Comment] [Restored]
04/06/01 20:00 402 Communicati Chk. -- --

04/06/01 18:30 70 Battery voltage Chk. -- 18:50
04/06/01 16:10 460 Communicati Rstr. 16:30 16:20
Occurred : Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment : Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Status : Select when displaying alarm status.
The alarm status is displayed as follows.
Ocr. : An alarm is occurring
Contents Rstr. : The alarm is restored
Attribute
Chk. : Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checked : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the alarm
was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is
displayed.

402 Comm
Check 402 Comm 12:00
(Key code : FFB4H)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME

Example: When the message width is set to 12
DISPLAY
04/11/05 10:25 402 Communic 11:25 10:45
Width
Displayed in a width of 12 digits 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Occurred : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Comment : 10 to 80 digits
Contents Status : 6 to 80 digits
Restored : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Checked : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Set the characters of the title of advanced system alarm display.
Title
When [Direct] is selected in [Title] : The number of characters set in [Width] can be input.
When [Comment] is selected in [Title] : Set the comment No. or the comment to be displayed.
11
When [Hide] is selected in [Title] : The [Title] cannot be set.
Set the display for date and time when alarm occurs (Occurred / Restored / Checked).
Date/Time Format
ALARM
Set the display order for the advanced system alarm display.
Example: When [Occurred], [Comment], [Checked], and [Cum.Time] are selected in [Display].
12
Display Order
LEVEL
13
The items selected in [Display]
are reflected.
PANELMETER
Select an item and method to sort alarm display.
Select one of the following 2 methods.
Ascending : Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending : Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.
When selecting [Date/Time Format] for the item to be sorted, the items are sorted as follows.
14
Sort
Ascending : Old New
Descending: New Old
For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following. LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


Preview area
Item Description

Contents

week.
Date Setting

Fill with 0
Selected : 09/09/01
Not selected : 09/9/1

Type
Time Setting
Example) At 10:1
Fill with 0
Selected : 10:01
Not selected : 10:1

9
 Text tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the font to display the alarm.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
Select a font for the text to be displayed. 12

Font • 12dot Standard • 16dot Standard • 16dot HQ Mincho
If high quality font is set for the advanced system alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
Text Size
LEVEL
Set the format of characters displayed on the title of advanced system alarm display.
Text Color Select a color for the text to be displayed. 13

PANELMETER
Solid Color Select a color of the shadow when the [Style] is set to button or button.
Title Format Select a kanji region of the characters displayed. 14
LINE GRAPH
KANJI Region

15
TREND GRAPH

Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
Table Format
Switching
Fixe : Select this item when displaying characters in a color only. 16
Status : Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occurred,
restored, or checked).
Fixed Select the character color when [Fixed] is selected in [Switching].

BAR GRAPH
Select the character color for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked) when [Status] is
Status
selected for [Switching].

 Style tab
Set the ruled line type and shape of advanced system alarm display.
Style Select a ruled line type for the advanced system alarm display.
Draw Ruled
Width Select a ruled line width for the advanced system alarm display. (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 dots)
Line
Color Select a ruled line color for the advanced system alarm display.
time display.
Y: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
X: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
Space According to the setting of [Text Size] (magnification of the character size), the actual Occurrence date/time
"Magnification of character size set value in Space"
Example:


Shape Settings Plate color
Plate Color
Frame color

9
 Extended tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the switching of the data displayed by advanced system alarm display using a device.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Check the item whose display is switched by the device. 13

Switching Device
Priority Display Select this item to switch the sort key by the value of the device.
PANELMETER
Attribute *1 After selecting this item, set the switching device. ( (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)
User ID*2 Set a user ID for advanced system alarm display.
Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
Operation Log
Target 23. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION 14
Display
LINE GRAPH
To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).
• Set "0" when not setting the security function.
Security Level • Be sure to set a number for security [Operation] larger than the number for security [Display].
Operation
15
Select this item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function)
TREND GRAPH
Display Position Display Position After selecting the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
Three devices (year and month, date and hour, minute and second) are set consecutively starting
from the set device.
Layer
16

Category
BAR GRAPH

*1 Priority display attribute
Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15 b14 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b3 to b0 : Specifies a sort key.( : Reserved)
0 H: Regular (Occurred) 2 H: Restored Date/Time 4 H: Alarm No.

1 H: Occurred Date/Time 3 H: Checked Date/Time 7 H: Alarm Status
b15 : Specifies ascending order or descending order.( : Reserved)
8 H : Ascending order
*2 User ID
• When user ID setting is required
If the advanced system alarm display and alarm history display/user alarm display/system alarm display are set on the
same screen, the touch switches set for advanced system alarm display may not operate.
To make the touch switches for advanced system alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced system
alarm display.
02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error Alarm list display

02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error

04/11/05 10:25 402 Comm 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 70 Battery v 12:28 Advanced system
04/11/05 12:35 460 Commu alarm display
Cursor ON Up Check Touch switch for advanced

Cursor OFF Down Delete system alarm display
If the same user ID is set for advanced system alarm display and touch switches,
the operations of the touch switches for advanced system alarm display are
effective for advanced system alarm display.

• Setting method 9
Set a user ID for advanced system alarm display.
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the touch switches for advanced system alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
DISPLAY
Setting of touch switch (Action tab)
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Set the same user ID as for advanced system alarm display
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab

Trigger Type
• Ordinary • ON • OFF
Ordinary
ON
OFF

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Make the settings for writing the information about the alarm selected in the advanced system alarm display into the
device.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
If this item is selected, the information about the touched alarm can be written into the device.
LEVEL
Ordinary : Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
13
Trigger Type
Use device.
PANELMETER
External OFF : When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
Output device.
Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected for [Trigger Type].
Trigger Device
When cursor is
Set the external output when the cursor is hidden. 14
Clear External Output Device : The external output device value is cleared.
hidden
Output alarm information of the top row : The alarm information displayed in the top row is output.
LINE GRAPH
Device
Comment No. Select this item to write the error code displayed by the touched alarm into the device.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

If this item is selected, the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

Alarm Status*1 0: Restored 1: Occurring
b1 : Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.
0: Not 1: Checked
b2 : Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not.
0: Not effective 1: Effective
Occurred
Device If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred date can be written into the device.
Date*1,*2
Occurred
If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred time can be written into the device.
Time*1,*2
Restored
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored date can be written into the device.
Date*1,*2
Restored
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored time can be written into the device.
Time*1,*2
Checked
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked date can be written into the device.
Date*1,*2
Checked
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked time can be written into the device.
Time*1,*2
*1 Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode set in the advanced system alarm observation.

9
*2 Writing format of date and time
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
DISPLAY
(1) Date
10
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
COMMENT DISPLAY
D254 Month (1 to 12) Day (1 to 31)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(2) Time 11
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
ALARM
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D257 00H Hour (0 to 23)
12
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
LEVEL
D254 07H 01H
(Month) (Day)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 13
D255 20H 04H
(Dominical year)
PANELMETER
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D256 24H 56H
(Minute) (Second)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 14
D257 00H 12H
(Hour)
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

The advanced system alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.


Resetting the system alarm or system information (GOT error code, GOT error
[System Signal 1-1]
detecting signal). (Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)
Notifying the status of access to the drive.*1*3

[System Signal 2-2]
Notifying the that the drive is short of capacity.*1*3

[System Signal 2-2]
Notifying that access to the drive failed.*1*2*3

[System Signal 2-2]
[Key Code Input]
*1 The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full, however, operate
differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
10.4.6 Precautions for use (11) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
*2 The File access error reset signal (read device: System signal 1-2, b0) resets the Drive A/B file access error signal (write device:
System signal 2-2, b7, b8).
*3 The GT14 and the GT12 cannot use the following system information.
• System signal 2-2: b1, b5, b8

*1 GS520.b0
Saving the data in the buffering area to a memory card
Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (GOT error) occurred.
GS262
(Write device)
Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (CPU error) occurred.
GS263
(Write device)
Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (Network error) occurred.
GS264
(Write device)
*1 Saved only when [Save alarm log files] is selected in the File Save tab.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
10.4.2 Advanced System Alarm Observation (2) File Save tab

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes some useful functions to know when using the advanced system alarms.
 Advanced system alarm observation
DISPLAY
(1) Action when buffer is full
If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or almost
reaches the [Stored Number] on the [Basic] tab, the status can be notified using a device. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(a) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored and
confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be confirmed.
Historical Full
11
Occurring
Confirm the historical number: 2
number and occurring Occurred Comment
number 04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi
ALARM
12
(b) When the buffering area is full
In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
LEVEL
• Issuing the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in [Full Notification Signal Device]
on the [Basic] tab.)
• Selecting the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in [Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic] 13
tab.)
PANELMETER
Historical Full
Occurring
number: 2
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi
Full 14
notification
LINE GRAPH
HINT 15
(1) Settings
TREND GRAPH

(2) Buffering area
16
BAR GRAPH

(c) Buffering size

The buffering size required for advanced system alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the area in the GOT internal memory applicable for other objects, decreases.
Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the internal memory.
• Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode Setting related to buffering area size
Historical Total No. of alarms saved (Stored Number)
Only Current Alarm -
• Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced system alarms
The size can be confirmed at [Buffering Area Size] on the Basic tab.
Buffering Area Size
(2) Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
For details, refer to the manual below.
 Advanced system alarm display

(1) Switching displays by device (set in [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)
Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
(a) Items to which a switching device can be set
Switching device setting usable

Description
item
The display order is changed between ascending order and descending order.
Priority Display Attribute For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time, check date/time, error code, or alarm
status (occurred, checked, or restored) can be selected

(b) Display example 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (priority display attribute) is set to D103.
DISPLAY
10
04/06/01 16:50 330 Insufficient mem 17:10 17:20
04/06/01 14:25 383 Unable to overw 14:42 14:50
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:20 449 Dedicated device 12:05 15:20
04/06/01 10:00 354 Recipe file write e 15:00 15:05 Change items for sorting alarms.
04/06/01 08:10 361 Specified device 08:25 08:30 Occurred Displays alarms in the order of occurrence date
04/06/01 07:40 402 Communication ti 07:58 08:45
Restored Displays alarms in the order of restored date
(descending order). (D103: 2)
Select sort item Occurred Restored Checked Checked Displays alarms in the order of checked date
(descending order). (D103: 3)
Touch switch for switching the alarm display data 11

Checked "3" is written into D103. Restored "2" is written into D103
ALARM
Switching device 12
(priority level
attribute): D103
3 2
The alarm display is sorted in the order The alarm display is sorted in the order
of the checked date. of the restored date.
LEVEL
Display of general alarms
Occurred Comment Restored Checked Occurred Comment Restored Checked Occurred Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:50 330 Insufficient mem 17:10 17:20 04/06/01 16:50 330 Insufficient mem 17:10 17:20 04/06/01 16:50 330 Insufficient mem 17:10 17:20
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 11:20
383 Unable to overw
449 Dedicated device
14:42
12:05
14:50
15:20
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 10:00
449 Dedicated device 12:05
354 Recipe file write e 15:00
15:20
15:05
04/06/01 10:00 354 Recipe file write e
04/06/01 14:25 383 Unable to overw
15:00
14:42
15:05
14:50
13
04/06/01 10:00 354 Recipe file write e 15:00 15:05 04/06/01 14:25 383 Unable to overw 14:42 14:50 04/06/01 11:20 449 Dedicated device 12:05 15:20
04/06/01 08:10 361 Specified device 08:25 08:30 04/06/01 07:40 402 Communication ti 07:58 08:45 04/06/01 08:10 361 Specified device 08:25 08:30
04/06/01 07:40 402 Communication ti 07:58 08:45 04/06/01 08:10 361 Specified device 08:25 08:30 04/06/01 07:40 402 Communication ti 07:58 08:45
PANELMETER
The alarm display is sorted in the order The alarm display is sorted in the order
of the checked date. of the restored date.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Setting of alarm status display color

Set display colors for each alarm status (Occurrence, restore, and check) in the advanced system alarm display
to visually identify alarms. ( 11.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting)
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 402 Communication tim
04/6/1 09:45:30 70 Battery voltage low Identifies alarm
04/6/1 08:15:45 460 Communication un status visually!
04/6/1 05:22:35 500 Warning! Built-in b
(3) Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely

(a) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)
A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.
Occurred Comment Setting available for text color,

04/6/1 11:35:52 402 Communication tim
style, and kanji region!
04/6/1 09:45:30 70 Battery voltage low
04/6/1 08:15:45 460 Communication un
04/6/1 05:22:35 500 Warning! Built-in b
(b) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the language
switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 402 Communication tim 04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30 70 Battery voltage low 04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 460 Communication un 04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 500 Warning! Built-in b 04/6/1 05:22:35
Language
switching device 1 2

(4) Writing alarm data into device

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The alarm data touched on the advanced system alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
(a) Alarm data written into the device
DISPLAY
Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (8 types).
• Comment No. • Occurred Time • Checked Date
• Alarm Status • Restored Date • Checked Time 10
• Occurred Date • Restored Time
COMMENT DISPLAY
(b) Alarms to be written
The data of the alarm touched on advanced system alarm display are written.
D200: 0601H
D201: 2004H
Occurred Comment
11
04/06/01 14:25 402 Communic
04/06/01 12:10 70 Battery volt
ALARM
The occurred date of the selected alarm 12
(04/06/01) is output to the device.
POINT
LEVEL
Touch mode when data are written in the device
When writing alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab to [Selection].
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(5) Description on touch switches for advanced system alarm display

Touch switches for displaying advanced system alarm can be read from the library of GT Designer3.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced system alarm
display.
Touch switches for advanced system alarm display
Show/Hide the Cursor.
Show cursor Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked

FFB0H 04/06/01 16:51 402 Communicati Ocr.
04/06/01 15:20 70 Battery voltage Ocr.
Hide cursor Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked

04/06/01 16:51 402 Communicati Ocr.
FFB1H
Show the cursor!

The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).
Move cursor upward 04/06/01 15:20 70 Battery voltage Ocr.
FFB2H 04/06/01 14:25 803 Transient error Chk. 15:10 14:50

04/06/01 13:54 500 Warning! Bui Rstr. 14:00
04/06/01 12:23 330 Insufficient m Chk. 13:15
04/06/01 11:11 322 Dedicated de Ocr.
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).
Move cursor downward 04/06/01 14:25 803 Transient error Chk. 15:10 14:50
FFB3H

Move the cursor!


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display date/time of selected data (check) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
FFB4H 04/06/01 16:51 402 Communicati Ocr.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Display date/time of all data (check all) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
FFB5H
04/06/01 14:25 803 Transient error Chk. 14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
11
FFB6H 04/06/01 16:51 402 Communicati Rstr. 17:15
ALARM
Clear all alarm data (delete all) Occurred Comment Status Restored Checked
FFB7H 04/06/01 15:20 70 Battery voltage Ocr.
12

LEVEL
Reset the selected alarm data
FFB9H
13
04/06/01 16:51 402 Communicati Rstr. 17:11
PANELMETER
An advanced system alarm data is saved in the memory card as an alarm log file.
Restored Checked
14
FFBBH
LINE GRAPH
The data are saved to the memory card! 15

Time Specification Jump
Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices.
TREND GRAPH
FFBEH
(Time specification jump function)
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
(1) Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status
The touch switches for advanced system alarm display operate differently depending on the display status.
• Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).
(2) Operation method by directly touching Advanced System Alarm Display

The following operations can be performed by setting [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab.
• Selection of an alarm (Set [Touch Mode] to [Selection])
Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced system alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)
04/06/01 16:51 402 Comm 04/06/01 16:51 402 Comm
04/06/01 14:25 70 Battery 15:10 14:50 04/06/01 14:25 70 Battery 15:10 14:50
The touched alarm is selected. The alarm is deselected by touching it

(2) Change of cursor color again.
The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor]
on the Table tab.
(3) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor] on the [Style] tab.
(4) Setting method of touch switches


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
buffering area.
turned on. 11
GOT
User area
ALARM
Buffering area
Logging 12
data

LEVEL
SRAM
SRAM user area

Saved data
in the SRAM user area
13
PANELMETER
ID3:200KB
Free area
14
LINE GRAPH
Capacity
Logging function Up to 10 15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) Priority order for using the SRAM user area

500KB.

Function
SRAM user area
High
Low
Logging function

When multiple IDs are set by one function, log data are saved in ascending ID order.
To keep the saved log data in the SRAM user area, backup or restore the data in the utility.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(a) Normal status
DISPLAY
ID1:100KB
ID2:100KB
500KB
10
ID3:200KB
COMMENT DISPLAY
Free area

changed to the free area. 11
ALARM
ID1:100KB Free area
500KB
ID3:200KB ID3:200KB
An error occurs because the data of ID:1
cannot be saved in another area.
12

LEVEL
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) 13
Reserved area
PANELMETER
ID1:100KB
ID2:100KB ID2:100KB
500KB
Free area Free area
(d) Others
14
turns on.
LINE GRAPH
If the data are not restored even when the battery is changed, initialize the SRAM user 15
area.
For how to change the battery or to initialize the SRAM user area, refer to the following.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.4.6 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the advanced system alarm.

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen.
Up to 8 advanced user alarm displays can be set on each base screen, overlap window, or superimpose
window.
The GOT can display up to 8 advanced user alarm displays.
Do not copy multiple advanced user alarm displays on the project created with version 1.48A or later and paste
them to a project created with version earlier than 1.48A.
The GOT displays one advanced user alarm display only.
When using multiple advanced user alarm displays, use GT Designer3 with version 1.48A or later.
(2) Settings for saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card
To place the button for saving advanced system alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced system alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save the advanced system
alarm data.
(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced system alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced system alarm display on the screen where advanced system alarm
display was specified to save the data.
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the target text color
is set to Black with [Switching] on the [Text] tab. (Characters are hidden since the text color and the cursor color
are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to other than
Black.
(4) Precautions for setting
(a) Setting number
The object setting size cannot exceed the GOT user area.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method for the setting size of the advanced system alarm display, refer to the following.
For the free user area available for the GOT, refer to the following.
(b) Saving a file

The memory card capacity must be larger than the size of the file to be saved.
For the file size of memory cards, refer to the following.

When an inexistent value (column No.) is set at the language switching device, "No message" is displayed.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Controllers for which advanced system alarms are not displayed on GOT
CPU errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the advanced system alarm of
the GOT.
DISPLAY
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
• SIEMENS PLC CPU
• AZBIL control equipment 10
• RKC temperature controller
COMMENT DISPLAY
• Inverter
(2) Alarm resetting

The alarm status of a GOT error is not changed to "Restored" even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
11
Error Cause
occurred eliminated
04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Ocr.
04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equi Ocr.
ALARM
12
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller, Even if alarm causes on the GOT,
or network are eliminated. controller, and network are eliminated,
LEVEL
the status of alarm occurrence is still

PANELMETER
(3) Network error restoration and clear
The alarm status of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit, MELSECNET/10
communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be changed to "Restored" until the GOT is
powered OFF or reset even after the alarm cause is eliminated.
When clearing an alarm of the "Restored" status, refer to the following. 14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(4) If the same data exists in the memory card
Overwritten!
Save

04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. C Ocr. AAM00000.G1A AAM00000.G1A
04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equip Ocr.
Save
Touch
Key code: FFBBH
or
Store Trigger device
The data in the memory card is overwritten. Therefore, to keep the data unchanged, move the data from the
memory card to a personal computer by either of the following methods.
• Upload resource data by GT Designer3
(Fundamentals) 7.1.4 Writing and installing on GOT
• Read the CSV file saved in the memory card by using a personal computer.
(5) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file

While an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the observation is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced system alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Saving...
User area
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment
Buffering area While the data is saved
in the memory card, the
observation is interrupted
Save temporarily!

(6) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms to be saved as
alarm log files (set on the [File Save] tab) are saved in the memory card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
• Set a trigger for each advanced system alarm observation settings and save the data.
DISPLAY
• Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced system alarm display and save the data.
(7) When turning off the CF/SD card access switch of the used drive 10
When the CF/SD card access switch is turned off while the memory card is ejected from the drive, the data in
COMMENT DISPLAY
the memory card are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the memory card from the drive until the following LED or signal is turned off and the file saving is
completed.
• The CF/SD card access LED of the used drive is turned off.
• Drive status notification signal of the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting 11
The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and advanced
system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set in the [File Save] tab).
(8) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
ALARM
If the alarm log file in the memory card is not one created in the project in the GOT, the GOT cannot read the file
from the memory card. (The GOT cannot restore the alarm history saved before the GOT is turned off.)
• [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on. 12
• System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.
(9) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed according to settings made in the
LEVEL
[Action When Buffer is Full] on the [Basic] tab.
• Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.
• Not collect advanced user alarms. 13
To avoid the operations above, set [Full Notification Signal Device] on the [Basic] tab, and clear the restored
alarm when the device turns on.
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
Action when buffer is full
Full notification signal device
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(10) Error when the alarm log file is saved

If an error occurs when a file is saved, [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
• The CF/SD card access switch on the GOT is not set to "transfer prohibited".
• The memory card is not full.
(11) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification signal,
operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced system alarm observation function.
Operation (Differences)
Item
Advanced system alarm observation Drive status notification signal
Difference between [Full Notification Signal Turns on when the number of saved alarms
Device] set by advanced system alarm reaches the value set in [Stored Number] on the
Turns on when the memory card is full.
observation and drive status notification signal [Basic] tab. (When the buffering area reserved for
(system signal 2-2.b4, b5) the advanced system alarm is full.)
Difference between [Writing Notification Device]

Turns on while data (including data other than
set by advanced system alarm observation and Turns on while advanced user alarm data are
advanced user alarms) are written into the
drive status notification signal (system signal 2- written into the memory card.
memory card.
2.b0, b1)
• Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm log

file in the memory card is accessed. (For
Difference between [Writing Error Notification example, the alarm log file in the memory card Turns on when the memory card cannot be
Device] set by advanced system alarm is not one created in the project in the GOT.) accessed. (For example, the memory card is not
observation and drive status notification signal • Turns on when the memory card cannot be installed in the GOT, or the CF/SD card access
(system signal 2-2.b7, b8) accessed. (For example, the memory card is switch is set to "transfer prohibited".)
not installed in the GOT, or the CF/SD card
access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".)
(12) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
(13) System language at advanced system alarm file conversion

When [Work with System Language Switching] is set for [File Convert Language (Advanced System Alarm)] in
the advanced alarm common setting, the advanced system alarm file is not converted into a file in the language
specified with the system language switching device.
The advanced system alarm file is converted into a file in the system language set by the utility.
(14) Alarm log file conversion by the utility

When alarm log files (*.G1A) are converted to CSV files or Unicode text files by the utility, convert the alarm log
files one by one.
Multiple files cannot be converted at one time.
(15) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.

For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.

(16) Priority of alarm display

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(a) When the displayed alarms are not changed by the [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
DISPLAY
Occurred Comment 10
04/6/1 11:35:52 402 Communicati
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/6/1 09:45:30 70 Battery voltag
04/6/1 08:15:45 803 Transient err
(b) When the displayed alarms are changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab. 11
ALARM
12
Key window 7 8 9 AC
4 5 6 Del
1 2 3 +/-
LEVEL
0 Enter
04/06/01 10:25 402 Communication timeo
13
04/06/01 12:05 70 Battery voltage low or e
04/06/01 12:35 803 Transient error
PANELMETER
(18) Advanced system alarm display when using the set overlay screen function
When setting the advanced system alarm display on the called screen, do not set the advanced system alarm
display on the base screen. 14
The called screen cannot display the advanced system alarm display when the advanced system alarm display
is set on the base screen.
LINE GRAPH
Occurred
Advanced system alarm
Comment Restored
04/06/01 17:24 402 Communi
70 Battery volta 16:10
display on called screen
15
04/06/01 16:15
TREND GRAPH

04/06/01 17:25 803 Transient
04/06/01 16:51 500 Warning! Advanced system alarm
04/06/01 14:27 330 Insufficien 15:10 display on base screen
16
For settings of the set overlay screen, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 9.2 Changing Screen According to Situation (Set Overlay Screen)
BAR GRAPH

11.5 Alarm History Display
The times and comments of the alarms occurred are stored in the GOT incorporated memory and displayed as a history
list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit OFF to ON/word device range).

1. Alarm 04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
occurred
Up Down Check 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are
displayed when X0 turns ON.
X0:OFF ON
Supply oil to the Alarm details, error measures and

2. Alarm arm of Line 1. so on are displayed.
detail
Up Down Check
display
The window for detail display is any of the comment window,

base screen, or window screen.

3. Alarm 04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
checked 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error 12:10
Up Down Check
time
With the touch switch for alarm history
display, the alarm check time is displayed.
To create the touch switch for alarm history display, set a key code to the touch switch.
System Restoration

4. After 04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
system 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error 12:45 12:10
Up Down Check
restoration
The restoration time
is displayed.
X0:ON OFF
11 - 162 11.5 Alarm History Display

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
HINT
Comments displayed on the alarm history display
DISPLAY
Comments displayed on the alarm history display must be registered in advance.
Register comments in the basic comment or comment group.
(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Examples
Display alarm data on PC Display number of alarm that have been historical
11.5.1 Alarm history settings 11.5.1 Alarm history settings
Date Time Message

CSV file
Date Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
11
Date Time Message Date Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
04/02/01 10:25 Temp.Err. 04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
04/02/01 10:25 Atm Err.
Memory card Alarm his. number 1 Alarm his. number 2
ALARM
Spreadsheet software reads the alarm history data saved
The number of all alarms historical is displayed in alarm history.
as a CSV file from the memory card.
Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm history display

and searching a device automatically
12
(One-touch ladder jump function)
LEVEL
M999 K
Date Time Message
MOV 1 D1
02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error K
MOV 2 D2
13
Ladder
display
Ladder monitor function is Device corresponding to the alarm

displayed by touch switch displayed on alarm history display
PANELMETER
is automatically searched.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.5 Alarm History Display 11 - 163

11.5.1 Alarm history settings
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Alarm History] from the menu, for displaying the setting dialog box.
 Basic tab
Set the collecting method of alarm data and the device.
Alarm setting list
Select a collection mode of the alarm history display function.

Historical : Corrects alarm data as history.
If an alarm in the restored status occurs again, the alarm data is collected as a new alarm.
Cumulative : The latest alarm status, the cumulative period of time the alarm has been generated, and the
cumulative number of times of the alarm occurrences are calculated.
If any alarm in the restored status occurs again, the cumulative time and the number of alarm
occurrences increase, and the latest alarm information (occurred time, restored time, checked time) is
Mode
collected.
For the previous alarm information (occurred time, restored time, checked time), by the setting on the
[Option] tab, whether to delete information or to retain the information as a history can be selected.
Option tab
For differences in the collection modes, refer to the following.
11.5.4 Actions
Set the points of the device to be monitored.

The number of the device points you can specify differs depending on the type of the device monitored.
(For GT10, the bit of word, word device (16 bits), word device (32 bits) cannot be set.)
Bit device : 1 to 3072 Points (GT10: 1 to 1000 Points)
Number of
Bit device or bit specification of word device : 1 to 3072 points
Alarms
Word device (16 bits) : 1 to 1024 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Word device (32 bits) : 1 to 512 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Set the cycle in which the GOT monitors the specified devices of the controller.
Watch Cycle
Cycle can be set from 600ms to 80s in the units of 100ms.
Select a data type of the device monitored.

(For GT10, [Bit of Word], [Signed BIN16], [Unsigned BIN16], [Signed BIN32], [Unsigned BIN32], [BCD16], [BCD32], and
[Real] cannot be selected.)
Data Type
• Bit • Bit of Word • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16
• Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32
• Real

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select a device setting method.

(For GT10, [Random] and [Identical] cannot be selected.)
DISPLAY
Continuous : Set devices continuously starting from the device specified.
Random : Set devices one by one.
Device Setting Identical : This item can be selected when the followings are selected in [Data Type]. Set multiple alarm ranges
in the same word device.
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
When [Random] is selected, it is not allowed to set a bit device and word device bits together as monitoring devices.
Select how to set the comment No. corresponding to the specified device.
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)
Comment No.
Continuous : Set continuous comment numbers starting from the comment No. specified.
Random : Set comment numbers one by one.
Select the type of the comment to be displayed. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)

Comment Type
When [Comment Group] is selected, the used comment group No. is displayed. 11
This item is available only when selecting [Comment Group] for [Comment Type].
When sending a mail, select the comment column No. from the comment group to be used for the
comment.
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the mail comment row No. to 3.
Comment
ALARM
3 4
Comment group No.2
Mail Comment
Column No. Comment No.
Comment column No. 12
1 2 3 4 5
1 Product 1-1 Product 1-2 Product 1-3 Product 1-4 Product 1-5
LEVEL
Use this comment row No. when sending a mail.
Select a method for displaying alarm details. 13

Set the comment No., base screen No., or window screen No. for [Detail] in the alarm setting list.
(For GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
Not Display : No details are displayed.
PANELMETER
Display Destination
Comment Window*1 : Created comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen : The detailed information is displayed on the base screen.
Window Screen : The detailed information is displayed on the window screen (Overlap
Detail window 1).
Select how to set the comment window, window screen, or base screen for detail display.
Continuous : Set continuous numbers starting from the comment No., window screen No.,
14
Detail No.
or base screen No.
Random : Set numbers one by one.
LINE GRAPH
Select the comment types. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)
Comment Type
When selecting [Comment Group], set the comment group No.
*2 Reads out the alarm history settings edited in a CSV file to GT Designer3.
*2 Saves the alarm history settings set by GT Designer3 as a CSV file.

15
When copying the set data to another field, click the [Copy] button to set the copy contents.
(1) Copy Alarm History dialog box
TREND GRAPH
Set the devices specified for alarms, conditions for alarm occurrences, and operation when an alarm occurs.

Device
Alarm setting (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
list
Alarm Range*2
When setting [Data Type] as the word device, click the [Exp.] button to set the range of the word
device values for the alarm data display.
16
(2) Edit Alarm Range dialog box

BAR GRAPH

Set a comment No. used for the device specified.

Comment No. 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error 12:25 12:28
Set a comment No. of the message to be displayed in this area.
The comment corresponding to [Comment No.] is displayed.

Comment Selection Any comment registered can be selected. If a comment is selected here, the "Cmnt. No." is
switched automatically.
Set the comment No., window screen No., or base screen No. for displaying detailed data when
Detail
an alarm occurs (when specified device conditions are satisfied).
Select whether or not to enable the alarm resetting (turning off or resetting the specified device
Alarm setting by the touch switch for resetting).
list RST After selecting [ON], set up the [RST Value] if the device is a word device.
Set a value written into the word device (reset value) when the GOT is reset by the touch switch
RST Value
for alarm history display. (Fixed to "0" for GT10)
Select a mail-sending mode.

None : No mails are sent.
Occur : The occurred date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm occurs (when the conditions of the device are met).
Mail
Restore : The restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm is restored (when the conditions of the device are not met).
Both : The occurred or restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email
when an alarm occurs or an alarm is restored.

*1 Displaying the comment window 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
1) Display the detail display screen by 2) Display the detail display screen by
one touch operation key input from the touch switch
Occurrence Message Restore Check Occurrence Message Restore Check
DISPLAY
02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45 02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45
02/02/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28 02/02/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28
02/02/01 12:35 Line 3 error 02/02/01 12:35 Line 3 error
Details
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Comment window is displayed Window screen is displayed Base screen is displayed.
(Window screen for alarm history). (Overlap window).
11
Check Line 2 Check Line 2
Check Line 2
Alarm history display Alarm history display
ALARM
The specified comment is displayed. The specified base screen or window screen is displayed.
(1) Number of characters available for comment window 12

GOT Number of characters available for comment window
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655,

GT16 Handy GOT,GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
LEVEL
GT155 (GT1555-V only), GT1275, GT1265, GT SoftGOT1000
GT155 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT1455, GT1450,

23 characters 7 lines (161 characters)
GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104
13
GT1030, GT1020 18 characters 3 lines (54 characters)
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
PANELMETER
(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
(a) When using the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, or GT11
When the basic comment selected, the setting of [Reverse] and [Blink] are not reflected regardless of the
14
comment registration setting.
When the comment group is selected, the setting of [Blink] is not reflected regardless of the comment
LINE GRAPH
registration setting.
(b) When using the GT10
The comment is reflected according to the registration setting of the basic comment and the comment
group.
15
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
TREND GRAPH
comment.
16
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Check the power module Check the power module
BAR GRAPH

*2 Import/Export
The exported CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Exported in CSV file
Editing the exported file Add the setting using applications

R
The added contents

are displayed.
POINT
When using languages other than Japanese and English
For using languages other than Japanese and English for comments, do not import or export CSV files.
When CSV files are imported or exported, data stored in the files may not be correctly displayed.

(1) Copy Alarm History dialog box

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains how to copy the set alarm history items to other place.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Item Description
Source No. Set the alarm history No. that will be copied. 11
Destination No. Set the alarm history No. that will be a copy destination.
Number of Copy Set the number of copies.
Check the relevant items.
ALARM
Comment No. Copies comment No. (Basic comment) of the source.
Detail No. Copies the detailed display No. of the source.

Copy Item
Device Reset Copies the device reset settings of the source. 12
Alarm Range Copies the range setting of the source.
Send Mail Copies the send mail settings of the source.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Edit Alarm Range dialog box

Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms.
Item Description
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms using a conditional expression.
• Select any of the following conditional expressions.

Set a conditional expression by a combination of a device value ($V) and constants.
Constant Device value for alarm display ($V)

Relational operator
• To set an expression other than the above 3 patterns, select [Other] and then click the [Exp] button.
When the [Edit Range] dialog box appears, set any conditional expression.
In a conditional expression set by a user, the value of another word device can be set as a condition.
Alarm Range
(Constant) Enter a value in decimal.
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.

< : The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
(Relational operator) == : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!= : The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
$V Indicates the value of the device used for alarm display.
Select this item to display the [Edit Range] dialog box.

(a) Edit Range dialog box

(a) Edit Range dialog box 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Input Each Term (A-C)
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Item Description
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.

For setting three types (A, B, and C), select a relational operator other than [None] between B and C.
None : No relational operator is set.
< : The value of the left term is less than that of the right term 11
== : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!= : The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
Constant Data
Select the data type of the fixed value to be set. (Hex/Dec/Oct)
Type
ALARM
Set each of the terms of the conditional expression.
Constant : Set a constant.
Input Each Term $V : Set the word device by which an alarm is displayed. 12
(A-C) Other Device : Set s value of device other than the word device set for alarm display as a term of the
conditional expression.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Option tab
Configure the history retention setting (clearing history, saving data to a memory card) for the alarm history display.
The settings on this tab will be reflected in all alarm history display.
Select this item to store the number of alarms currently occurred and restored to a word device.
Number of After selecting this item, click the [...] button and set the storing device.
Histories (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the [Basic] tab.
Select this item to enable forced deleting of the restored-state alarm data by changing the specified device status from
OFF to ON.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device to be used as a history clear trigger.
History Clear (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Trigger
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the [Basic] tab.
Alarm data can be cleared by the touch switch (the switch for history clearance) as well.
Select this item to save alarm history data to the memory card.
After selecting this item, select the timing to store the data to the memory card.
• Cycle : The alarm history is stored by the set sampling cycle, respectively.
After checking, select the storage cycle in one-minute unit within a range from 1 minute to
Store to Memory maximum 60 minutes.
Card *3 • On the Occurence of Alarm : When alarms occur, store the alarm history.
The data can also be saved to the memory card by using a touch switch for the alarm history
display.
Store to Memory
Card Select the name of drive where the alarm data are saved.
Drive Name*2 (For the GT105 , GT104 , and GT1030, the item is fixed to [D: Built-in SRAM]. For the
GT1020, the item is fixed to [C: Built-in Flash Memory].)
Enter the name of the folder in which the CSV file is stored. (Up to 62 characters)
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
The following shows the procedure to add folder names that can be selected.
Folder Name 1) Select [Common] [GOT Type Setting] from the menu.
2) Set the project name in [Project Folder].

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The file name is displayed.

The displayed content varies depending on the selection or not of [Create a CSV file
DISPLAY
File Name simultaneously].
When selected: Displayed as ALARMHST.CSV
When not selected: Displayed as ALARMHST.G1H
Create a CSV file

Select this item to save the alarm data in CSV format in the memory card. 10
simultaneously*1
COMMENT DISPLAY
This item can be set when selecting [Create a CSV file simultaneously], and then [Comment
Group] in [Comment Type] on the [Basic] tab.
Select the comment column No. from the comment group to be used for the CSV file when an
alarm history is stored in the memory card.
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the CSV file comment column No. to 3.
4
Store to Memory
CSV Storage
Comment group No.2 3
11
Comment Column
Card
No. Comment column No.
Comment No.
1 2 3 4 5
ALARM
Use this comment column No. when the CSV file is output.
12
Writing Set the device to be on while alarm data are written to the memory card.
Notification
Device
Set the device that notifies an error when the GOT fails to write alarm data to the memory card.
Writing Error
LEVEL
Notification
Device This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the
error is restored.
Clear the oldest Select this item to delete the oldest alarm history data and to add a new alarm data when the number of occurred 13
history when the alarms reaches or exceeds the upper limit (GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: 3072; GT14, GT12, GT11: 2048; GT10:
number of 1000) and the conditions for the specified device are met.
PANELMETER
histories exceeds 11.5.6 Precautions
the specified If this item is not selected, new alarm data are not added when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds the
value upper limit.
Display the same Select this item to list the same alarms separately in different lines in the cumulative mode.
alarm occurred
two or more
The previous alarm information is retained as a history.
Deselect this item to list the same alarms jointly in one line in the cumulative mode. 14
times as an The previous alarm information is deleted since the information is overwritten with the latest alarm information.
another item 11.5.4 Actions
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 Saving data in the CSV format
(1) Data stored

Alarm data are converted into a CSV file data as follows.
The CSV file can be read and displayed on a PC by spreadsheet software.
Number of alarms occurred Not collected in

Number of restored-state alarms historical mode
Number of checked alarms
Occurrence date/time Comment Restoration Check Cumulative Occurrence

(may be displayed differently date/time date/time time frequency
(e.g. "2004/5/29") depending
on the spreadsheet software
setting.)
(2) Updating stored data

Data collected on the alarm history display are overwritten to the CSV file at the user-specified cycles (1 to
60min).
Because the alarm data deleted on the alarm history display are deleted in the CSV file as well, do not delete
the alarm to be kept in the CSV file.
HINT
When all of alarm history data are deleted
If the alarm history is stored to a CSV file after all data have been deleted with the touch switch Delete (FFB7H)
or [History Clear Trigger], the CSV file is left blank.
Stored to a CSV file with alarm history deleted Nothing is stored.
*2 Storage drive
The following shows the applicable storage drives for each GOT type.
GOT Applicable storage drive
GT16, GT15,
A : Standard CF Card, B : Extended Memory Card
GT SoftGOT1000
GT14 A : Standard SD Card, D : Built-in SRAM
GT12, GT11 A : Standard CF Card, D : Built-in SRAM

*3 Storing erroneous alarm information data 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
If the memory card is faulty or the files to be saved differ from those in the memory card, the GOT internal device
(Error detection common information: GS252.b0) turns on and the alarm information is not stored. (The GOT
continues collecting device data.)
DISPLAY
If the storage operation is done in this situation, the system alarm will occur.
If GS252.b0 turns on, replace the memory card or check the data in the memory card.
Turning ON the GOT internal device (error detection common control: GS452.b0) will turn GS252.b0 OFF. This allows
the file storage to be resumed. 10
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Turn GS452.b0 ON using

If an alarm information While GS252.b0 is ON, touch switch or similar, Alarm information
file is faulty, the alarm information as this causes GS252. after monitoring
GS252.b0 turns ON.. file is not stored. b0 to turn OFF. starts is stored.
11
Power ON.
Monitoring Reading alarm Alarm information Alarm information
ALARM
start information files storage storage
GOT operation
Error status
Alarm information
is not stored.
Alarm information
is stored. 12
Alarm information
status Normal status
Error detection common ON

information (GS252.b0) OFF
LEVEL
Error detection common ON
control (GS452.b0) OFF
13
HINT
PANELMETER
Application of error detection common information
An overlap window (for file error detection) can be displayed by detecting GS252.b0 with script function.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.5.2 Alarm history display setting
1. Select [Object] [Alarm Display] [Alarm History Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the alarm history display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged alarm history display to display the setting dialog box.
 Display tab
Set the display details (e.g. style, order of display).
Click this button to display the [Alarm History] dialog box.
Set the number of rows displayed for each screen. (Up to 27 rows)
Example: When this is set to 3
Number of Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
Rows 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error 12:25 12:28

Display rows
(not including the title line)
04/11/06 08:30 Fuel error 09:45 09:40
Set the alarm row No. from which alarm display starts in the order of occurrence (1 to 1024) when the conditions of
more than one specified device are met.
If the number of generated alarms is lower than the value set in [Display Start Row], the display is left blank.
Example: 4 is set as head row.
Display Start Alarms occurred

1) M0 is ON Order of alarm
Row*1 2) M1 is ON occurrence
Occurrence Message Restore Check 3) M2 is ON
04/11/05 10:25 M3 ON 11:25 10:45 4) M3 is ON
04/11/05 12:05 M4 ON 12:25 12:28 5) M4 is ON
Alarms of the No.4 and later are displayed.
Select the setting method of the title color and title name.
Title Color : Select the title color.
Title Direct : Select this item to input the title name in [Title] of [Contents].
Comment Group : Select this item to display the title name with a comment set for the comment group.
After selecting, set the comment group No. for the comment displayed in the title name.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display Select the items to be displayed on the alarm history display.

[Occurred] [Restored] [Cum. Time]
DISPLAY
[Message] [Checks] [Frequency]
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count

02/11/05 10:25 Conveyer 1 error 11:25 10:45 01:00 1
Occurred
02/11/05 12:05 Conveyer 2 error 12:25 12:28 00:20
: Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.

5
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Message : Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Restored : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checks : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the
alarm was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is
displayed.
Attribute
11
Motor error
Check Motor error 12:00
(Key code : FFB4H)
ALARM
Cum.Time : This item is available when [Cumulative] is selected for [Mode] on the [Basic] tab
in the [Alarm History] dialog box.
Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm 12
occurrences in the past (total down time).
(Not available for GT10)
Frequency : Select this item to display how many times alarms were generated.
Contents
Example: When message width is set to 12
LEVEL
13
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25 10:45
Displayed in a width of 12 digits

Occurred : Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20)
PANELMETER
Width
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time
Format].
Message : 10 to 80 digits
Restored : Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20)
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]
Checks : Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20) 14
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]
Cum.Time : Fixed to 8 digits
Frequency : Fixed to 8 digits
LINE GRAPH
Set the characters to be displayed on the alarm history display title.
When [Direct] is selected for [Title] : Characters for the number specified by [Width]
Title can be input.
When [Comment Group] is selected for [Title] : Set the comment No. or the comment to be
displayed.
15
Set the view format for date, time and characters of alarm occurrence (Occurred/Restored/
Date/Time Format Checks).
TREND GRAPH
Alarm Text
Select a character color for each alarm status (Occurrences/Restorations/Checks).
Color
Sort Setting Select the display order for the alarm. (Latest/Oldest)
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
Object Name log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Display] tab.
BAR GRAPH
For details of *1 refer to the following.

*1 Display Start Row
If the number of alarms becomes higher than the numbers set to [Display Start Row] while the alarm history is
displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the alarm history display
screen.
HINT
If different line No. of display start are set on plural screens, different alarm history can be displayed for each
screen.

Item No. 1 Item No. 1 (Line No. of display start: 1)
Item No. 2 Item No. 2
Item No. 4
Item No. 5
Item No. 6 Screen 2
Item No. 7 Item No. 4 (Line No. of display start: 4)
Screen 3
Item No. 7 (Line No. of display start: 7)
Item No. 8
Item No. 9

Preview area
Item Description

Contents Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
• Date/Time • Date • Time • Text
Date Setting Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

Sort • yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/4/1) • mm/dd/yy (Example: 4/1/09) • dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/4/09)
• mm/dd (Example: 4/1)
Time Setting Select the display type of time.

Type Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
• 10 : 1 • 10 : 1 : 27 • 10 : 1(AM)
This item is available when selecting [Text] in [Contents].

Text
Set the contents to be displayed on [Date Format] in the [Display].

9
 Style tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the shape and the ruled line/vertical line for the alarm history display.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12

•6 8dot font • 12-dot standard font*1 • 16-dot standard font
Text Size For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
LEVEL
Select this item to display the characters in HQ (high-quality) Mincho font.

(Only when the character magnification (X: horizontal, Y: vertical) is set to 2, 4, 6, or 8.)
13
Use HQ Mincho To display the characters in HQ Mincho font, set the HQ font in the comment list setting also.
12-dot HQ Mincho font is not applicable for the basic comment. Therefore, when the 12-dot font is selected in [Font], a
PANELMETER
comment set in the basic comment cannot be displayed in HQ Mincho font.
time display.
Y : 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
X : When selecting [6×8dot] or [12dot Standard] for [Font] : 0/6/12/18/24 (dots)
Space
When selecting [16dot Standard] for [Font] : 0/8/16/24/32 (dots)
Occurrence date/time
14
According to the setting of [Text Size] (the magnification of character size), the actual
Magnification of character size set value in [Space]
LINE GRAPH
Example)
When this item is selected, the detailed display screen can be displayed by touching any row of the alarm history.
The details of the touched row are displayed.
Single Touch Touch a row you want to view the details
15
Operation
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45 Check Line 1
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error 12:25 12:28
TREND GRAPH
Use comment
scrolling
depending on When this item is selected, the comment to be displayed in the message field can be scrolled from right to left.
the message
width
16
BAR GRAPH



Shape Settings
Plate
15963
Plate Color
Frame
When this item is selected, ruled lines can be drawn for the alarm history.
After selecting this item, select a color for the ruled line.
Draw Ruled Line Occurred date Time Message Restore Check

04/11/05 10:25 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 10:25 11:25 10:45

9
 Extended tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the dialog box.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Select this item to set the user ID (1 to 65535)
When the user ID is set, the following operation is enabled.
User ID • To specify the used object in the operation log.
13
PANELMETER
Specify the device where the comment number of an alarm with the cursor displayed is stored.
Use the following operation to store a comment number by displaying the cursor on an alarm.
Comment No.
Device
• Select the [Display the cursor in a selected row] item.
• Use the touch switch (key code switch (cursor display)) for alarm history display. 14
Display the When this item is selected, the cursor can be displayed by touching the displayed alarm.
LINE GRAPH
cursor in a (This allows displaying of the cursor for the alarm without setting a touch switch.)
selected row Set the [Comment No. Device] item to store the comment number of touched alarms to the device.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

The alarm history display function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
 GOT type settings

Function Set description Model
 GOT environment settings (System information)

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3) [system Signal 1-1]
Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3) [system Signal 2-1]
[Key Code Input]

11.5.4 Actions 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Collected alarms are displayed as history.
Register messages to be displayed in the basic comment or comment group in advance.
DISPLAY
 Alarm collection mode
Select either of the two collection modes, historical mode or cumulative mode.
When an alarm occurs, the following information can be collected and displayed. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 20:00 Pwr. module error - - - 1
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error - 18:50 - 2
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error 16:30 16:20 00:20 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
(In the example above, 3), 4), and 5) indicate time only.) 11
Description
Info displayed
Historical mode Cumulative mode
ALARM
1) Occurred The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Message The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
3) Restore The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

12
4) Check
Message Restore Check Message Restore Check
LEVEL
Pwr. module error
Check Pwr. module error 19:00
(FFB4H)
13
Displays the total amount of time for which alarms were
generated in the past.
PANELMETER
Cumulative time = t1 + t2 + t3
5) Cumulative t1 t2 t3
- Status of alarm
time occurrence
(X0: OFF ON) Alarm Alarm Alarm
14
occurred occurred occurred
(1st) (2nd) (3rd)
Time
6) Count - The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed.
LINE GRAPH
• Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs. (The data are
added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
• GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000 : 3072 15
• GT14, GT12, GT11 : 2048
• GT10 : 1000
TREND GRAPH
• Cumulative mode
In this mode, the latest alarm status and the cumulative count and time of the alarms that occurred in the past are
calculated and displayed for each alarm type.
16
BAR GRAPH

Example) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of alarm history display for each collection mode.

ON ON
"Temp. error" OFF OFF

(M10:OFF ON) ON
"Fuse error"
(M20:OFF ON)
11:30 12:00 15:30 18:25 19:00
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Alarm confirmation
by the user*1
*1 Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.
(1) Historical mode

Not collected in the historical mode.

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error "Temp. error"
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error occurs!

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 "Temp. error" is checked.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error Check (FFB4H)

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 Restoration date/time
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error A new line is added
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 and displayed.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 Restoration date/time
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 is displayed.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

(2) Cumulative mode

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The information on the latest alarm status,the number of alarms that have occurred and the cumulative alarm
occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
The operation differs according to the alarm history setting.
DISPLAY
11.5.1 Option tab
(a) Operation for listing the same alarms jointly in one line
1) "Temp. error" occurs 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 00:00 1 "Temp. error" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 00:00 1

Occurred Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
Restore Check Cumulate Count
12:00 00:00 1 "Temp. error" is checked.
11
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 00:00 1
Check (FFB4H)
ALARM
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 04:00 1 Restoration time and
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error cumulative time are
displayed. 12
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count The occurrence time when
the alarm occurred again
LEVEL
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 04:00 2
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is displayed on the same
line of the alarm frequency is
increased by one. 13
5) Restored from "Temp. error" Restoration time is
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count displayed.
PANELMETER
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 04:35 2 The time during which
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error the alarm has been
generated is added to
the cumulative time.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(b) Operation for listing the same alarms separately in different lines
1) "Temp. error" occurs
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 00:00 1 "Temp. error" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 00:00 1

"Temp. error" is checked.
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 00:00 1
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 00:00 1 Check (FFB4H)

04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 04:00 1 Restoration time and
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error cumulative time are
displayed.
The time when the same

alarm occurred again is
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again displayed in the next line.
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count The number of alarm
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 2 occurrences increases by one.
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 04:00 1 The previous alarm is
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error retained as a history.

04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 04:35 2 The time during which
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 04:00 1 the alarm has been generated
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is added to the cumulative time.
 Collecting and holding alarm data

(1) Collecting alarm data
The GOT collects alarm data at any time and saves the data in the GOT internal memory.
Alarm data are constantly collected and updated even while the monitor screen not including alarm history
display is displayed.
AAA BBB CCC No. 25 D1 10 AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC D2 20 AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC
Switch to another screen The alarm data updated while

the other screen was displayed
are shown.

(2) Deleting alarm data

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Alarm data are deleted at the following timing.
(a) Power-off or reset of the GOT
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities
DISPLAY
Item Description
Communication
setting
[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply] 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
GOT setup
Program/data
OS installation, project writing.
control
Debug & self

Self check [I/O check]
check
11
(c) Project data writing and OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
(d) Clear trigger device
Turning on the device specified at [History Clear Trigger] (Set on the [Option] tab) deletes all the alarms in
ALARM
the restored status.
(e) Key operations of the touch switches for alarm history display.
Alarms in the restored status can be deleted using the following touch switches.
12
• Delete (FFB6H) : Delete the alarms in the restored status one by one.
• Delete All (FFB7H) : Delete all the alarms in the restored status.
LEVEL
(f) When the number of alarms occurred exceeds the upper limit
When [Clear the oldest history when the number of histories exceeds the specified value] is selected on the
[Option] tab in the [Alarm History] dialog box, if the number of occurred alarms exceeds the upper limit, the
13
older alarms are deleted starting from the oldest one.
Upper limit in total number of alarms occurred
PANELMETER
• GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000 : 3072
• GT14, GT12, GT11 : 2048
• GT10 : 1000
(3) Holding alarm data under power failure 14

By saving alarm data to a memory card, the data can be held even if the GOT is powered off.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Detail display
(1) Usable screens ( 11.5.3 Relevant settings)
To display alarm causes and corrective actions in details, any of the following 3 screen types can be selected.
(a) Comment window
Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the comment window.
Temperature error
of the line 1's
power module
Occurred Message Occurrence Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 Base screen 1 + Comment window
(b) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
Tank control screen

Occurred Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
90 40 60
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Run Stop Run Stop Run Stop
(c) Window screen

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
Feed material from the opening.
Occurred Message Feed opening

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 Base screen 1 + Window screen 10

(2) Display method

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select either of the following 2 methods for detail display.
(a) One touch ( 11.5.2 Alarm history display setting)
Display the detail display by touching the alarm history display item directly.
DISPLAY
10
Temperature error of
COMMENT DISPLAY
the line 1's power
module
Occurrence Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
11
(b) Touch switch ( 11.5.5 Useful operations and functions)

Create a touch switch for alarm history to display the detailed data.
ALARM
Occurred Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Occurred Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Occurrence
Replace
Message
the fuse of
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
line 1's power
12
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
module.
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Display Up Detail Display Up Detail Display Up Detail
Delete Down Delete Down Delete Down
LEVEL
Display the cursor Move the cursor (using Up or Down) Make the details displayed
to the target alarm.
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Description on touch switches for alarm history display

Touch switches for displaying alarm history can be read from the library for GT Designer3.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying alarm history.
Touch switches for alarm history display
Show/Hide the cursor
Show cursor Occurred Message Restore Check

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
FFB0H
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Hide cursor Occurred Message Restore Check

FFB1H 04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Show the cursor!
If the cursor is hidden:

The cursor moves to the previous/next page. (page by page)
Occurrend Message Restore Check
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Move cursor upward 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
FFB2H

04/06/01 13:54 Fuse error 14:00
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error 13:15
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error
Moved to the next page!
If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line)
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Move cursor downward
FFB3H

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Move the cursor!

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Display date/time of selected data (check) Occurred Message Restore Check

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
DISPLAY
FFB4H
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Display date/time of all data (check all) Occurred Message Restore Check
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
FFB5H
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!
Clear the selected alarm data (delete) Occurred Message Restore Check 11
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error 17:15
FFB6H
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
ALARM
Clear all alarm data (delete all)
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
FFB7H 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50 12
The detailed screen of the selected alarms is displayed.

LEVEL
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Display detail
13
FFB8H
Occurrence Message Restore Check
PANELMETER
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
Temp.15:20
04/06/01 error at
Fusepower
error
module.
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Check power module.
The detailed screen is displayed!

14
Resets the selected alarm data. (Changes the device value to off or the reset value
according to the setting on the device tab)
LINE GRAPH
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Reset the selected alarm data *1
FFB9H
15
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error 17:15
TREND GRAPH
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error

04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50

16
BAR GRAPH

Stores alarm data in the memory card.

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Save alarm contents to memory card 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
FFBBH
The data are saved into the memory card!
Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in the
ladder monitor screen.AiOne-touch ladder jump function)
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999 K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
*1 Resetting user alarms
To change the device value to the OFF status or the reset value by a touch switch, set "ON" in [RST] on the [Basic]
tab.
11.5.1 Alarm history settings
HINT
(1) Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function differently depending on the
display status.
• If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per page basis).
• If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).
(2) Directly touching alarm history display data
The detailed screen of the selected alarm can be displayed by setting [Single Touch Operation] on the [Style]
tab.
11.5.2 Alarm history display setting
Occurrence Message Restore Check Occurrence Message Restore Check

04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error Replace
04/06/01 the fuseTemp.
16:51 on error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error the power15:20
04/06/01 module.
Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50 04/06/01 14:25 Oil error 15:10 14:50
The detailed screen is displayed.
(3) Touch switch setting method


11.5.6 Precautions 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes precautions to be taken when using alarm history display.
DISPLAY
One object can be set.
10
(2) Usable comments
COMMENT DISPLAY
The alarm history display uses comments registered in the basic comment or comment group.
(3) Usable screen

The alarm history display can be set on the base screen only.
(4) Devices to be set

Only one set device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but set devices have to be the
11
same.
(5) The comment window cannot be displayed while the key window is displayed.
Erase the key window to display the comment window.
ALARM
Window screen
for alarm history 12
Key window
1000
Numerical input Alarm history display
LEVEL
(6) When using other objects at the same time
(a) The following objects cannot be set on the screen where the alarm history function has been set.
• Data list function object 13
• User alarm display function object with the up/down scroll function setting
(b) Precautions for the case when the alarm history and alarm display are displayed simultaneously
PANELMETER
If the touch switches for user alarm display are set for the user alarm display and any other screen, they
may function for the alarm history.
Example: When the touch switches for alarm list are set for the other screen (overlap window2)
14
Delete Up
Cursor ON Down
04/12/01 10:25 Internal pressure error Alarm display LINE GRAPH

04/12/01 13:25 Oil pressure error (set to overlap window 1)
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
Message
Temp. error
Rest. Check
11:25 10:45
Alarm history display 15
(set to base screen)
04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 12:28
04/11/05 12:35 Oil error
TREND GRAPH
As the base screen has higher precedence,

the touch switches function for alarm history.
16
BAR GRAPH

(7) Display of occurred time, checked time, and restored time

For the occurred time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions on the clock function that is controlling GOT's clock data, refer to the
following.
(8) The character display of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the pattern color of
the screen background color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab is set to white.
(Characters are hidden since the color of the text and cursor is the same with the screen color.)
To display the characters of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the pattern color of the
screen background color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab to other than white.
11.5.2 Style tab
(9) Timing when alarm history file is newly created (overwritten)

If the alarm history setting screen is opened and then closed with the [OK] button, writing the project data to the
GOT disables the view of past alarm history. (Whether the setting is changed or not on the screen, the past
alarm history cannot be viewed by the operation above.)
Furthermore, when the alarm history is stored to the memory card with the above GOT, the history data is
cleared. (The file is newly created (overwritten).)
Then, the CSV file is also overwritten.
To view alarm history after the setting is changed, make setting before the operation above so that the alarm
history data is stored to CSV file for backup.
By the backup, the alarm history can be viewed on personal computer even after alarms on the GOT are
cleared/overwriteen.
(To prevent data mismatch, the alarm history data file (Extension: DAT) cannot be displayed on the GOT to
which new project data are written.)
(10) When using GT10

Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application functions
for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
editors.

9
11.6 User Alarm Display
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
User alarm is a function that displays user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
COMMENT DISPLAY
When multiple devices turn on, the comments are displayed as alarm messages in the set display order.
M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON
M100 Temp. error M100

M100 Temp. error
11
Replace the fuse of
M101 Fuse error M101
M10
the 1 Fuse
power error
module
with new one.
Detail Detail
ALARM
HINT 12
(1) Comments to be displayed as user alarm
The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register the comments that will be displayed on the user alarm as basic comment.
LEVEL
(2) Display of the numbers of digits and rows
When the user alarm display is selected on the screen editor, the status bar displays the maximum numbers 13
of digits and rows of the alarm according to the object size.
PANELMETER
Example:
Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm list display and Displaying the number of alarms occurred
searching a device automatically
(One-touch ladder jump function) 14
2.9 Setting Key Code Switch 11.6.1 Settings
LINE GRAPH
Alarm Status
M999 K
02/02/01 10:25 Machine error
MOV 1 D1 M100 ON Temp. error
02/02/01 13:25 Line 1 error K Temp. error M101 ON Fuse error
MOV 2 D2
Fuse error M102 ON Oil error
Ladder
display M103 ON Fuel error
Alarm event count 6 M104 ON Internal pressure error
15
M105 ON Timing belt error
Displays the ladder monitor A device corresponding

function by touch switch The number of all alarms occurred is
to a cause of an alarm is
operation. automatically searched. displayed on the alarm list display.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.6 User Alarm Display 11 - 195

11.6.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Alarm Display] [User Alarm Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the user alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged user alarm display to display the setting dialog box.
 Device tab
Set the number of monitor devices and view format (Number of Comments/Device).
Set the number of monitor devices.

The number of devices that can be set varies according to the settings in [Device No.] in [Device] tab.
Alarm Points
• In [Continuous] setting : 8192 points (Up to 512 points for GT10)
• In [Random] setting : 512 points ([Random] cannot be set for GT10.)
Select the type of the comment to be displayed. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)

Comment Type
When [Comment Group] is selected, the used comment group No. is displayed.
Set the number of comments to be displayed.

Number of
Plural : Display plural comments in frame.
Comments
Single : Display only one comment in frame.
Set the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs. (Setting range: 1 to 32767)
The comment No. (Basic comment) set here is assigned in head device of device tab.
Continuous comment No. will be set respectively according to the number of monitor devices
Comment from the comment No. of head comment No. (Basic comment)
Example) Head device: M100, head comment No.: 1

Head Comment
No. Monitor device Comment No.(Basic comment)
M100 1 Temp. error Head comment No.
M101 2 Fuse error The comment of continued

No. is set from head comment No.
M102 3 Oil error
11 - 196 11.6 User Alarm Display

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select the method of displaying the detailed alarm comment information.

This item is available only when [Plural] is selected in [Number of Comments].
DISPLAY
(For GT10, [Window Screen] is not available.)
Not Display : No detailed information to be displayed.
Comment Window*1: A comment window is displayed to provide detailed information.
Display Destination
A registered comment is used for the window.
(Register comments as basic comment.)
10
Base Screen : The detailed information is displayed on a base screen.
COMMENT DISPLAY
The base screen specified by detailed displayed No. of the alarm device
is used.
Window Screen : Display the window screen (Overlap window1) by details display.
Detail
Display the window screen that is set in the detailed No. of alarm
device.
This item is available when [Comment Window], [Base Screen], or [Window Screen] is selected
Detail Display No.

in [Display Destination] of the [Device].
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered starting from the set comment
11
No.(Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No.
Random : Devices are numbered at random.
This item is available when [Comment Window] is selected in [Display Destination] of [Device].
Comment Type Select the type of the comment to be displayed. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)
ALARM
When [Comment Group] is selected, the used comment group No. is displayed.
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.
Device No.
(For GT10, [Random] is not available.)
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered from the set device.
12
Random : Devices are numbered at random.
Select this item to write the number of occurred alarms (the number of devices that turned ON)
Generated Number into the word device.
Storage After selecting this item, set the device to store alarms.
LEVEL
Device in [Display Destination] of [Device]. 13
Select this item to switch the detailed information on the screen according to the value of one
device.
Detail No. Offset The comment No. (Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No. set as the detailed No.
PANELMETER
of alarm device is added to the device (offset device) value set here.
(The data size of the set device is fixed to 16 bits)
For the details about offset function, refer to the following.
Single Touch
in [Display Destination] of the [Device].
14
Operation
Select this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the user alarm.
LINE GRAPH
Object Name log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device] tab.

TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 Display Method of Comment Window
(1) Number of characters available for comment window

GOT Number of characters available for comment window
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662,

GT1655,GT16 Handy GOT, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
GT155 (GT1555-V only), GT1275, GT1265, GT SoftGOT1000
GT155 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT115 , GT1455,

23 characters 7 lines (161 characters)
GT1450, GT11 Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104
GT1030, GT1020 18 characters 3 lines (54 characters)
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
(a) When using the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, and GT11
When the basic comment selected, the setting of [Reverse] and [Blink] are not reflected regardless of the
comment registration setting.
When the comment group is selected, the setting of [Blink] is not reflected regardless of the comment
registration setting.
(b) When using the GT10
The comment is reflected according to the registration setting of the basic comment and the comment
group.
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
comment.
Preparing for operation

Preparing for operation Please wait for about 6 minutes.
Please wait for about 6 minutes.

9
 Style tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the view format (Number of comments/sort/shape).
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Shape
LEVEL
Shape Settings
Plate Color
Frame Color
Plate Color
13
PANELMETER
•6 8dot font • 12-dot standard font*1 • 16-dot standard font
Text Size (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Display Format To display a comment in HQ (high-quality) font, set the HQ font in the basic comment, and set the
text size to the multiple of an even number.
If the text size is set to the multiple of an odd number, the comment is not displayed in HQ font.
14
Alignment
(Continued to next page) LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

Select the sort of comment.

(For GT10, [Oldest] and [Latest] are not available.)
Ascending : display according to the order of the smallest to the biggest.
Descending : display according to the order of the biggest to the smallest.
Oldest : display according to the order of the oldest to the latest.
Latest : display according to the order of the newest to the oldest.
When monitor is set randomly, [Ascending] and [Descending] are based on the setting order of
the device.
Example) When making following settings in device tab.
Display comment
Sort Temp. error

Fuse error
Oil error
Display Format
Displayed in [Ascending] Displayed in [Decending]
M100 ON Temp. error M102 ON Oil error

M101 ON Fuse error M101 ON Fuse error
M102 ON Oil error M100 ON Temp. error
When [Oldest] or [Latest] is selected, set the [Store Memory] on the [Trigger] tab for collecting
data of the alarm occurrence date.
Select this item to display the date when an alarm occurs.

Date is displayed in the form of "yy/mm/dd: hh: mm: ss"
(Year is displayed with the last 2 digits, and hour is displayed in the 24-hour system.)
Date Display (yy/
mm/dd hh: mm: 04/06/01 09:30:40 Temp. error
ss) Space Space
20 digits Comment
Select this item to specify the display start line when setting multiple-line comments. After selecting this item, set the
number of each line.
Fixed : Set by direct input (1 to 32767)
Device : Select this option to set the device value to the start line No.
Display Start Row
Then, set the device.
When comment appears as blank, check if the value set as the start line No. is within the number of created comment
lines.
This item is available only when [Single] of [Number of Comments] is displayed in the [Device] tab.
Select this item to specify the number of displayed lines when setting multiple-line comments.
After selecting this item, set the values of each line.
Number of Display
Fixed : Set by direct input. (1 to 32767)
Rows
Device : Select this option to set the device value to the number of comment lines.
Then, set the device.

9
 Extended tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the security, offset.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Security Setting
LEVEL
Select this item to switch the comment on the user alarm according to the device value.
The device value set here is added to the comment No. (Basic comment) that has been set in [Head Comment No.]
Comment No.
on the [Device] tab.
(The data size of the device is fixed to 16 bits.)
13
Offset
For details on offset function, refer to the following.
PANELMETER
Select this item to operate the user alarm by using a touch switch for which the key code is set for the user alarm.
After selecting this item, arrange the above touch switch.
Scroll ON
Note that this item is not available in the following cases:
• The data list and alarm history are set to be displayed on the same screen
14
• Multiple user alarms including the one with [Scroll ON] selected are placed on a single screen.
Specify the device to store the comment No. of the alarm.
LINE GRAPH
For one comment only, the comment No. of the displayed alarm is stored.
For multiple comments, the comment No. of the alarm at the cursor position is stored.
To display the cursor in the row of the occurred alarm, the following settings are required.
Comment No.
• Select [Display the cursor in a selected row].
Device
15
• Place the touch switch for the alarm display (Key code switch (Cursor display)) on the screen that the alarm display
is set.
For how to set the touch switch, refer to the following.
TREND GRAPH
This item is available when [Single] is selected for [Number of Comments] on the [Device] tab.
Display the cursor When this item is selected, the cursor can be displayed by touching the displayed alarm.
in a selected row (This allows displaying of the cursor for the alarm without setting a touch switch.)
Set the [Comment No. Device] item to store the comment number of touched alarms to the device,
Layer
16
Category
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab
Select this item to collect the alarm occurrence time even when a screen where the user alarm is not set is displayed.
( 11.6.3 Store memory)
Store Memory
The alarm occurrence status are always monitored and stored to the GOT internal memory.
After selecting this item, set the cycle to collect data in [Trigger Type]. (1 to 3600 s)

When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 s) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Sampling • Range
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

11.6.2 Relevant settings 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The user alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
COMMENT DISPLAY
[Carry out check for overlapping objects within

Checking if objects are overlapping.
GOT]
11
ALARM
Function Setting item Model 12

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device : System Signal 1-1.b3) [System Signal 1-1]
Disabling all key inputs. (Read device : System Signal 1-1.b9) [System Signal 1-1]
Notifying the key input. (Write device : System Signal 2-1.b3) [System Signal 2-1]
LEVEL
[Key Code Input]
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.6.3 Actions
This function displays alarm occurrence time and user-registered comments as alarm messages.
The comments used as alarm messages must be registered as the basic comment in advance.
 Number of displayed alarms

Select whether to display multiple alarm occurrences (with plural comments) or only one (with single comment).
Display range Display range

Number of comment: "Plural" Number of comment: "Single"
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove 04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Cancel [Supply stops] and restart supply.
One alarm is displayed in one line. The texts will be continuously displayed in the second
The text out of the line will not be displayed. line.
If a comment is longer than two lines, only the first Even if the comment size exceeds two lines, the texts
line is displayed. from the second line can be displayed, providing it does
not exceed the display range.
HINT
Display method for multi line comment ( 11.6.1 Settings)
Any line of the multi line comment can be specified to display.
Example) Display any line of the 6-line comment that has been registered
Multi line comment contents
Inspection1
Conv. insp. Method of displaying comment

Inspection2 Start line of display : 3rd
Proc. prod. insp. Number of display lines : 2(only when the number of
comment is set as "one")
Inspection3
Line insp.
04/6/1 13:52:20 Inspection2 04/6/1 13:52:20 Inspection2

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error Processed products inspection
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Only one line can be randomly specified to be displayed. The range of lines to be displayed can be specified.

9
 Sort
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the order to display alarm occurrences.
It can be set by the device No. order (ascending/descending) and alarm occurrence order (Oldest /Latest).
DISPLAY
Example) Display alarms by "Latest" sort
Alarm Status
M2 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 10
M4 04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
COMMENT DISPLAY
M0 04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
M3 04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
M5 04/6/1 04:33:12 Internal pressure error
M1 04/6/1 02:30:16 Timing belt error

11
ALARM
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
12
 Scroll on
LEVEL
Checking if the alarm comment exceeds the display range is done by scrolling the user alarm with touch switches
Create the touch switches for user alarm.
13
PANELMETER
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove 04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
heat
Cancel [Stop Supply] and restart the supply.
14
Scroll up Scroll down Scroll up Scroll down
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error Display 1 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

Switch to
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
line by the next
each alarm display.
scrolling.
Scroll up Scroll down Scroll up Scroll down
16
BAR GRAPH

 Details of display (only for [Plural] number of comment)

(1) Applicable screen ( 11.6.1 Settings)
To display the cause and corrective action of alarm in details, select a screen from the following three types.
(a) Comment window
Display the user-registered comment in a comment window.
The comment different from that in user alarm comment can be displayed as a detailed comment.
Temp. error at the

power supply module
on Line 1

Base Screen1 Base Screen1+Comment Window
(b) Base screen

Display the specified base screen.
Tank control screen
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 90 40 60
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP
Base Screen1 Base Screen5
(c) Window Screen

Display the specified window screen (overlap window 1).
Feed material from the feed

opening.
Feed opening

Base Screen1 Base Screen1+Window Screen10

(2) Screen that includes user alarm and the corresponding detailed alarm type screen.
9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Detailed alarm display type screen
Screen that includes user alarm
Comment window Window screen Base screen
DISPLAY
Base screen Simultaneous display Switch
Overlap window 1 Switch
Overlap window 2 10
Overlap window 3
COMMENT DISPLAY
Simultaneous display
Overlap window 4 Simultaneous display
Simultaneous display
Overlap window 5
Superimpose window 1
Switch : Switch the screen that includes user alarm to the corresponding detailed alarm display type screen.
Simultaneous display : Display the detailed alarm display type screen keeping the screen that includes user alarm on the display.
11
(3) Specifying a comment No. to be displayed or offset value for screen No. (Offset for Datailed No.)
By setting [Detail No. Offset] on the [Device] tab, an offset value for the following details display can be
ALARM
specified. ( 11.6.1 Settings)
• No. of the basic comment that will be displayed on the comment window
• No. of the Base screen and Window screen
While monitoring by the GOT, the comment No. or screen No. can be switched using the device. 12
Example) When the device for [Detail No. Offset] is set to "D0", and the following comments are registered.
Comment No. (Basic comment) Comment
LEVEL
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 1.
1
Check the power supply module.
2 Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 1.

13
• •
• •
• •
PANELMETER
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 2.
11
Check the power supply module.
12 Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 2.
14
D0 0 D0 10
LINE GRAPH
Temperature error at the power Temperature error at the power
supply module on Line 1. supply module on Line 2.
Check the power supply module. Check the power supply module.

15
TREND GRAPH
Comment No.1 is displayed Comment No.11 is displayed
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
To match the user alarm display with details screen:
The comment on the user alarm cannot be changed by using [Detail No. Offset].
The offset value for comment No. (Basic comment) on the user alarm is specified in [Comment No. Offset] on the
[Extended] tab. ( 11.6.1 Settings)
Match display the user alarm with the comment on the details screen by using [Detail No. Offset] and [Comment
No. Offset].
(4) Display method

Select the method for details display from the following two types.
(a) Single Touch Operation ( 11.6.1 Settings)
Touch the user alarm directly to display the detailed information.
Temperature error at
the power supply
module on Line 1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:26 Oil error
(b) Touch switch ( 11.6.4 Useful operations and functions)

Create touch switches for user alarm to display the detailed information.
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Replace the fuse at
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1
the 15:51:38
power Fuse error
supply
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16
module on LineOil
1. error
Cursor ON Up Detail Cursor ON Up Detail Display Up Detail
Delete Down Delete Down Delete Down
Display the cursor Move (up/down) the cursor to Display the detailed information
the alarm for details display.

9
 Store memory
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select [Store Memory] when collecting the information on alarm occurrence date/time even when a screen where the
user alarm is not set is displayed.
The GOT monitors the alarm occurrence status at all times and stores the information in the GOT internal memory.
DISPLAY
[Store Memory] is provided on the [Trigger] tab.
11.6.1 Settings
10
With the settings in [Store Memory], the alarm occurrence date/time is displayed as follows:
COMMENT DISPLAY
Store Memory enabled : The alarms are displayed with the date and time when the alarm actually occurred.
Store Memory disabled : The alarms are displayed with the time and date when the screen is displayed.
Example: The following shows differences of the user alarm display with store memory setting enabled or disabled,
when the screen switches and the alarm devices turn ON/OFF at the timing below.
04/6/1 12:10:15
11
Display on the screen Display Screen Display Screen Display Screen
including alarm list No.10 No.20 No.10
display
ON (04/6/1 10:15:35)
ALARM
M100 OFF
ON (04/6/1 11:38:08)
Alarm 12
Device M101 OFF
ON (04/6/1 09:00:22)
M102 OFF
LEVEL
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error 04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error
13
04/6/1 10:15:35 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:38:08 M101 Fuse error
Display Screen No.10
PANELMETER
(Store Memory enabled)
14
Alarm occurrence date and time can be
displayed correctly.
LINE GRAPH
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error 04/6/1 12:10:15 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M101 Fuse error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M102 Oil error 15
Display Screen No.10
(Store Memory disabled)
TREND GRAPH
Alarm occurrence time shows date and time

when the screen has changed to Screen No.10
(all alarms show the same date and time)
16
BAR GRAPH

POINT
(1) The timing when the data stored in memory is cleared.
The data stored in memory is cleared when the GOT is reset or powered off.
(2) The timing when the alarm occurrence date/time is cleared with the Store Memory disabled.
When "Store Memory" is disabled, alarm occurrence time information is not collected at any of the timings
below, causing the collected alarm occurrence time to be cleared:
• The screen including the user alarm is hidden and then displayed again.
• The screen is switched to the base screen while the user alarm is on the superimpose window.
• The security switching is made.
• The language switching is made.
• The machine No. switching is made.
• The offset switching is made.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Touch switches for displaying the user alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer3.
DISPLAY
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying user alarm.
Screen example 1 Screen example 2 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
Scroll the display up/down one line.
Scroll up by one line

This function is available only when the cursor is hidden.
12
00F2H 04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
LEVEL
Scroll down by one line
13
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
00F3H 04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
04/06/01 13:54:45 Fuel error
Scroll down by one line!
PANELMETER
Show/Hide the cursor.
Show cursor
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
FFB0H 04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
14
Hide cursor 04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
LINE GRAPH
FFB1H 04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Show the cursor!

TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


The cursor moves to the previous/next page.(page by page)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Move cursor upward
FFB2H
04/06/01 13:54:45 Fuel error

04/06/01 12:23:11 Internal pressure error
04/06/01 11:11:12 Motor error

The cursor moves up/down one line. (line by line)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Move cursor downward
FFB3H
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Move the cursor!
Display the screen for providing details on the selected alarm.
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Display detail
FFB8H
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01
Abnormal 15:20:41 Fuseaterror
temperature
04/06/01
the power14:25:17 Oil error
supply module.
Check the power supply
module.
Display detail!
Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in the
ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder jump function)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999 K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
POINT
Enabling the touch switch to be used for displaying user alarm:
DISPLAY
Select [Scroll ON] on the [Extended] tab to use the touch switch for displaying the user alarm.
11.6.1 Settings
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
HINT
(1) Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function differently depending on the
display status.
• If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per page basis). 11
• If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).
(2) Directly touching alarm history display data

The detailed screen of the selected alarm can be displayed by setting [Single Touch Operation] on the
[Device] tab.
ALARM
11.6.1 Settings

12
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error Replace
04/06/01 the fuse at the
15:20:41 Fuse error
power supply module.
Display detail
LEVEL
(3) Touch switch setting method
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.6.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions to be taken when using user alarm.

• GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 24 objects can be set on one screen.
• GT10: One object can be set on one screen.
(2) When [Store Memory] is selected
(a) The following shows the maximum number of user alarm objects with the [Store Memory] setting that can
be set for one project.
• GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 16 user alarm objects can be set for one
project.
• GT10: One user alarm object can be set for one project. (For the GT1020, only the user alarm object
with 64 or less alarms can be set.)
(b) Up to 8192 alarm list objects can be set in the whole projects as the devices applicable for monitoring by
[Store Memory], regardless of the preset number of user alarms.
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the pattern color of
the screen background color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab is set to white.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the pattern color of the
screen background color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab to other than white.
11.6.1 Style tab
(4) When using GT10

Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.
(5) Precautions when selecting [Random] for [Device No.]
When selecting [Random] for [Device No.], set the same quantity of [Alarm Device] as the value specified for
[Alarm Points].
If the number of set [Alarm Device] is less than the value specified for [Alarm Points], the user alarms are not

(1) Display of comment window
Comment
window
Key window
1000
Value input User alarm
(2) Displaying the alarm occurrence time

To check alarm occurrence time, display the GOT clock data.
For precautions on the clock function that controls GOT time data and relevant restrictions, refer to the following.

(3) When used with other objects

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When [Scroll ON] on the [Extended] tab is selected, the following objects cannot be set in the same screen.
• Data list function object
• Alarm history function object
DISPLAY
(4) Touch switch for user alarm
(a) Setting screen
Make sure to set the touch switch for user alarm and user alarm in the same screen.
If not, the touch switch may operate instead of the user alarm, when both alarm history and data list are
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
displayed.
(b) Setting only the touch switch on another screen
To set only the touch switch for user alarm on another screen, make the setting by referring to the following
priority order:
• Priority order corresponding to the touch switch screen

Screen for which touch switch has been set 11
Base screen
High
Call screen 1 to 5
ALARM
Priority Order
Overlap window 1
Overlap window 2
12
Overlap window 3
Overlap window 4
Low
Overlap window 5
LEVEL
Example) When touch switch has been set for other screens (overlap window 2)
13
PANELMETER
Cursor OFF Up
Cursor ON Down
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error

04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error
User alarm 14
(Set in the overlap window1)
Alarm history
LINE GRAPH
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error 13:30 (Set in the base screen)
04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error 12:28
04/6/1 10:45:30 Oil error 11:26 11:15
15
As the base screen has higher priority,
operates it as the touch switch of alarm history.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

System alarm is a function used to display error codes and error messages when error occurs in the GOT, controller or
the network.
Displaying system alarm allows a user to check how the error occurred and its cause.

Error 9 AC down error
occurance 803 Transient error
HINT
Comments to display
Comments to display in system alarms do not need registration (Registered in GOT).
11 - 216 11.7 System Alarm Display

11.7.1 Settings 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
1. Select [Object] [Alarm Display] [System Alarm Display] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the system alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.
DISPLAY
3. Double click the arranged system alarm display to display the setting dialog box.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
POINT
Display field adjusting method
To prevent than an alarm message from being truncated on display, adjust the display field as follows.
If the GOT screen size is smaller than the value described below, adjust the font size.
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30 Set in 3 rows. 11

9 AC down error (Use 48 dots as vertical size in 3 rows
803 Transient error when text size is 1 1 times.)
Error message (maximum 64 digits) Occurrence time (fixed to 8 digits)

Display with 576 dots when text size is 1 1 times.
ALARM
Increase the size to display the occurrence time at the right end.
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.7 System Alarm Display 11 - 217

 System Alarm Display dialog box

Set the view format (shape and text size) and the security level of the system alarm.
Text Size Select the text size of the error message to be displayed. (0.5 to 8)

Shape Settings
Frame Color
Plate Color
Plate Color

Layer
(Fundamentals) 3.8.2 Layer display switching operation

Category
Object Name This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The system alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM

12
[System Signal 1-1]
LEVEL
13
GS262
PANELMETER
(Write device)
GS263
(Write device)
GS264
(Write device)
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.7.3 Actions
 Types of system alarm

System alarm has the following three types:
• GOT error : A GOT error is displayed as an alarm
• CPU error : A controller error is displayed as an alarm
• Network error : A network error is displayed as an alarm
 Method of collecting data

Even while the screen that does not include system alarm is displayed, data are always collected every 3 seconds
and stored into GOT.
 Displayed information
The error code, error message as well as error time will be displayed in system alarm.
The error code and error message for display are provided by default within GOT. Therefore, they do not need to be
created by user.

9 AC down error
803 Transient error
Error code Error message Occured time

(Only for GOT error display)
 Method of displaying alarm

(1) Maximum number of alarms can be displayed
Each system alarm is displayed in one line type; up to 3 lines can be displayed.
The alarm display is updated when new alarm is detected.
Example: When new alarm (Parameter error) is detected by controller
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30 400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30
9 AC down error 104 Parameter error
803 Transient error 803 Transient error
Error display of controller is refreshed.(9 104)
(2) Display priority

When the display range is lower than 2 lines, alarms will be displayed in the following order.
1) GOT error
2) CPU error
3) Network error
When the number of alarm occurrence exceeds the display range, the lower priority alarms will not be displayed.
The error code, error message and error time beyond a single line will not be displayed.
 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions for error code
For the details, refer to the following manuals.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the precautions for using the logging function.
DISPLAY
Maximum number of object which can be set on one screen.
One object can be set.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(1) Controllers for which system alarms are not displayed on GOT
Errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the system alarm of GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
• SIEMENS PLC CPU
• AZBIL control equipment
• RKC temperature controller
• Inverter
11
(2) Deletion of system alarms on GOT
(a) The GOT error will not be cleared even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
To clear the message, make sure to turn the following device of system information function ON.
ALARM
• GOT error reset message (system signal 1-1. b13)
(b) The message of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit, MELSECNET/10 12
communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be cleared until the GOT is powered
OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
(3) Displaying alarm occurred time
For alarm occurred time, displays the GOT clock data.
LEVEL
For precautions and restrictions for the clock function that manages GOT clock data, refer to the following.
13
(4) Text and background color
As the text color for system alarm is fixed to white, set the plate color to non-white.
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
Alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not
(regardless of the display screen).
Since the display can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
POINT
Before setting advanced alarm popup display
This section explains the advanced alarm popup display of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced alarm popup display.

System
User
alarm system alarm

User System
alarm display alarm display
alarm system alarm
User System
System

alarm system alarm
11 - 222 11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes the setting and function needed for using the advanced alarm popup display.
 Displayable alarm types and settings
DISPLAY
(1) Alarm types
For advanced alarm popup display, advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms can be displayed.
Advanced alarm popup display is set as follows. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(a) Setting of advanced alarm popup display
Select the alarm type displayed by advanced alarm popup display.
11.8.2 Settings
Select the alarm type displayed

11
ALARM
12
(b) Auxiliary setting for each screen
Set whether to display popup display and the position of the popup display for each base screen.
Set the advanced alarm popup display in the [Screen Property] dialog box.
For details of this procedure, refer to the following.
LEVEL
13
HINT
PANELMETER
(1) When the display position overlaps other objects
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot be
operated. Therefore, set the object so that it does not overlap other objects.
(2) Switching of display position by touch operation
The position of advanced alarm popup display can also be switched by touch operation. 14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display 11 - 223

(2) Settings required for using advanced alarm popup display

Set the alarm displayed on the advanced user alarm observation screen.
(a) To display advanced user alarms

Select [Popup Display] in the advanced user alarm observation screen.
11.3.2 Advanced User Alarm Observation
Displays the alarm of the alarm ID on

which "Popup Display" is checked
HINT
The purpose of selecting [Popup Display]
This setting is to select whether to use popup display when displaying the advanced user alarms of multiple alarm
IDs.
The advanced user alarms can be displayed with one alarm ID refined by using a device.
(b) To display advanced system alarms

Select [Target] on the advanced system alarm observation screen.
11.4.2 Advanced System Alarm Observation
Displays the advanced system

alarm to which "Target" is checked

9
 Alarms displayed by popup display
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
With the advanced popup display, an alarm of the "Occurred" status (including "Chk") is displayed.
When the alarm becomes "Restored" (including the recovered alarm) status, the display disappears.
DISPLAY
Alarm status Alarm status
Occurred Comment Status Occurred Comment Status
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error Ocr. 04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error Rstr. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Restore
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
11
ALARM
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
12
The restored alarm is not displayed.
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Selection of display method

The following display methods are available. ( 11.8.2 Settings)
(1) Fix
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed in a fixed row.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms can be switched and displayed automatically.
(Set the [Display Number] on the [Basic] tab to [Multiple])
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error 04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
The occurring alarms are switched and displayed!

(The cycle for switching display can be set by "Switching Cycle" on the basic tab)
(2) Flow
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed as a flow from right to left.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms are displayed in order.
(Set the [Display Number] on the [Basic] tab to [Multiple])
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error 04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error 9:45 Fuse error
The occurring errors are displayed as a flow from right to left

(The flow speed can be specified on "Floating Speed" on the basic tab.)
POINT
(1) Display priority (display order) when multiple alarms occur
11.8.5 Precautions
(2) When more than one comment rows are specified
Fix : Only the comment of the first row is displayed.
Comments on and after the second row cannot be displayed.
Flow: Displays the comment of the second row as a flow after the comment of the first row.
(The same applies to the third row and after.)

11.8.2 Settings 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Advance Alarm Popup Display] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
 Basic tab
DISPLAY
Set the displayed advanced alarm popup display type, display contents and touch modes.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Use Advanced
LEVEL
Alarm Popup Select this item to use the advanced alarm popup display
Display
Select an alarm type to be displayed. 13

For the display priority when multiple alarms occur, refer to the following.
11.8.5 Precautions
Display Alarm
PANELMETER
• User Alarm : Displays advanced user alarm only.
• System Alarm : Displays advanced system alarm only.
• User Alarm + System Alarm : Displays advanced user alarm or advanced system alarm
Select the number of alarms displayed.

For the alarm display priority, refer to the following.
Display Number 11.8.5 Precautions 14
• Multiple : Displays more than one advanced alarms in order.
• One : Displays the alarm with the highest display priority.
LINE GRAPH
Fix : Displays the comment in a line when an alarm occurs.
Display Type Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the
comment over multiple lines is not displayed.
Flow : Displays the comment as a flow from right to left when an alarm occurs.
15
For the comment including multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting [Flow], select a speed to display the comment as a flow by [Flow Rate].
TREND GRAPH
This item is available when [Fix] is set for [Display Type].

Switching Cycle
Set a cycle to switch the alarm displayed while more than one alarm has occurred (1 to 60s).
This item is available when [Flow] is set for [Display Type].

Select a speed for the flowing display.
Flow Rate High : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per second.
Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per second.
16
Low : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per second.

BAR GRAPH

Set whether to enable or disable the display position switching of the advanced alarm popup display.
Display Position 11.8.4 Useful operations and functions
Switching • Switch : The display position switching is enabled.
• None : The display position switching is disabled.
Display Select the items to be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display.
Date of Occurrence : Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Attribute Comment : Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Contents
Select format in which occurred date/time of alarm is specified.
Date Format Select the [...] button to set the display format for date or date/time.
Set the display order in the advanced alarm popup display.

Display Order The items of [Attribute] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed when an advanced user alarm occurs.
Initial Display General : General alarms are initially displayed.
Hierarchy Middle : Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Upper : Higher alarms are initially displayed.
This item can be set only when [Display Alarm] is [User Alarm] or [User Alarm + System Alarm].
Select the operation when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
None : No operation even if touching the popup display.
Screen Switching : If touch the advanced alarm popup display, displays the base screen
of the No. specified on [Destination Screen] or overlap window 1.
Touch Mode Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display : Switches the alarm hierarchy of the touched alarm or displays the
detailed screen.
Operations vary depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
• When displaying higher/middle alarm: The alarm hierarchy is
switched to the lower one.
• When displaying general alarm : The detailed screen is displayed.
This item is available when [Screen Switching] is selected for [Touch Mode].
Set the screen displayed when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
Destination
Select [Base Screen ] or [Overlap Window1], and set a screen number (1 to 32767).
Screen
Only overlap window 1 is usable for advanced alarm popup display.
When [Overlap Window1] is selected, set the number of the window screens.


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
Preview area
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
Item Description
ALARM

Contents
Confirm the set display type in the preview area. 12

Type
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a week.
LEVEL
Date Setting
Fill with 0
Example) To display September 1, 2009 13
• Selected : 09/09/01
• Not selected : 09/9/1
PANELMETER

Type
Time Setting
Fill with 0
Example) At 10:1
• Selected : 10:01
14
• Not selected : 10:1
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Text Style tab

Set the text format of alarms.
Select a font of the characters displayed.

Font • 12dot Standard • 16dot Standard • 16dot HQ Mincho
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
Size

Solid Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.
Select the target for applying color-coding.

• None (Fix) : Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Set the color after selecting [None(Fix)].
• At each level : Select this item when using different colors depending on levels.
• For each group : Select this item when using different colors depending on groups.
• Comment Color (System Alarm: Fix) : Select this item to display the comments with the color specified for the
comment groups when displaying the advanced user alarm. (The font, size
and style are specified at the style setting on this setting. The setting of the
comment group except for [Text Color] is not effective.) For advanced For
Alarm Text Color the advanced user alarm display, alarms are displayed in the color specified
Switching*1 by [Fixed/Defaoult Color].
• When [None(Fix)] is selected for [Alarm Text Color Switching]:

Select the character color when displaying text in a color only.
Fixed/Default
• When [Comment Color (System Alarm: Fix)] is selected for [Alarm Text Color Switching]:
Color*1
Select a character color to be used when there is no comment for advanced user alarms.
Select a character color of advanced system alarms.
Select character colors for each level number.

Level*1
(Enabled only for the advanced user alarm display)
Select character colors for each group number.

Group*1
(Enabled only for the advanced user alarm display)
Display When this item is selected, the background color of the advanced alarm popup display can be selected.
Background After selecting this item, select the background color.

*1 Relation between the specified character color and actually displayed character color 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Switch target setting
Alarms displayed
Fix Level Group Comment Color
Displayed in the color
DISPLAY
Displayed in the color Displayed in the color specified for comment
specified in [Level]. specified in [Group]. group.
Advanced user alarm Higher alarms and middle Higher alarms and middle If there is no comment, the
alarms are displayed in the alarms are displayed in the comment area is displayed 10
color specified as [Level] 1. color specified as [Group] 1. in the color specified by
COMMENT DISPLAY
[Fixed/Default Color].
specified in [Fixed/Default
Color].

Displayed in the color Displayed in the color
Advanced system alarm specified as [Fixed/Default
specified as [Level] 1. specified as [Group] 1.
Color].
11
Level, group and comment are effective only when [User Alarm] or [User Alarm + System Alarm] is selected in
[Display Alarm] on the [Basic] tab.
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab
Perform the setting for switching the displayed contents of the advanced alarm popup display by using a device.
Select the item whose display is switched by the device.

Select this item when switching the displayed alarm hierarchy using the value of the device.
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
Hierarchy *1 After selecting this item, set the switching device.
This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.
Select this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
After checking this item, set the switching device.
Level Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
• To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
Switching Device However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
• To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
• This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
Group Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
• To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
• To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.
• This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.
Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.
Priority Display
*2
Attribute

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select this item to display the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
After selecting this item, set the switching device.
DISPLAY
Advanced User • Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Alarm • The alarm of the stored alarm ID is displayed regardless of the setting of [Popup Display] of
Observation advanced user alarm observation.
• If store "0" in this device, displays only the alarms of which [Popup Display] item of advanced
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
user alarm observation is checked.
• If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
Switching Device • This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.
Select this item to switch the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarm, middle
General alarm or higher alarm by the value of the device.
Comment After checking the item, set the switching device.
11
Group/Middle (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Comment • When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group specified for advanced user alarm
Group/Upper observation is displayed.
Comment Group If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.
• This item can be selected only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
To set the security function, specify a security level (1 to15).
ALARM
Display
• Specify "0" when not setting the security function.
Securiyu Level • Be sure to specify a number for security (Operation) that is larger than the number for security
Operation
(Display).
12
*1 Hierarchies
LEVEL
Store values in the device as follows to switch hierarchies.
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
13
b1 to b0 : Specify the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.
PANELMETER
00(0) : General alarms
01(1) : Middle alarms
xxx10(2): Higher alarms
b14 to b2 : Not usable
b15 : Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control identifier). 14
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, be sure to set this bit to "0".
0 : Switching by the switching device
1 : Switching by touching the display area
LINE GRAPH
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
11.8.5 Precautions
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*2 Priority display attribute
Store values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15 b14 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b3 to b0 : Specifies a sort key. ( : Reserved)

0H: Regular (Date of Occurrence)
1H: Date of Occurrence
5H: Level
6H: Group
b14 to sb4 : Not usable
b15 : Specifies ascending order or descending order. ( : Reserved)
8 H: Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of the date of occurrence.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm touched on the advanced alarm popup display area into
the device.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
13
Ordinary : When touched, the alarm data are written into the device.
Enable
External Trigger Type
PANELMETER
device.
Output
OFF : When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.
Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type].
Trigger Device
14
Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
LINE GRAPH
First Device automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)
Select this item to write the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
Device Alarm ID
This item can be used only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
Select this item to write the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm into the
15
Comment Group
device.
No.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
TREND GRAPH
Select this item to write the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm into the
Comment No. device.
When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.

16
BAR GRAPH

Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
b0: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored. (0: Restored, 1: Occurring)
Alarm Status*1
b1: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not. (0: Not checked, 1: Checked)
b2: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not. (0: Not
effective, 1: Effective)
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
Date of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.
Occurrence*1 *2
Time of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.
Occurrence*1 *2
Date of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.
Device Restoration*1 *2
Time of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.
Restoration*1 *2
Date of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.
Confirmation*1 *2
Time of
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.
Confirmation*1 *2
Level*1 Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.
Group*1 Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.
Frequency of
Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the device.
Occurrence*1
Cumulative Time
Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
*1 *2
Downtime*1 *2 Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.
*1 Condition for writing
(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarms are displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment group No., and
comment No.).
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.

*2 Writing format of date and time 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(This section describes with date of occurrence as D254 (2 points) and time of occurrence as D256 (2 points).)
(1) Date
DISPLAY
10
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D254 Month (1 to 12) Day (1 to 31)
COMMENT DISPLAY
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(2) Time 11
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
ALARM
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D257 00H Hour (0 to 23)
12
Example) July 1, 2004 12:24:56
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
LEVEL
D254 07H 01H
(Month) (Day)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
13
D255 20H 04H
PANELMETER
(Dominical year)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D256 24H 56H
(Minute) (Second)
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
14
D257 00H 12H
(Hour)
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

The advanced alarm popup display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
 Screen property
The following function can be set for each screen (screen property).
Select the screen editor to change its setting. Select the [Screen] [Screen Property] from the menu to display the
(Fundamentals) 3.9 Changing Screen Property
Setting whether to enable or disable the advanced popup display for each
Set in the following items on the [Basic] tab.
screen.
• [Popup the display of advanced alarm]
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
• [Display Position]
row.
 GOT environment settings (System information)

[System Signal 1-1]
 GOT internal devices

GS262
(Write device)
GS263
(Write device)
GS264
(Write device)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section describes some useful functions to know before using advanced alarm popup display.
 Operations when touching popup display directly
DISPLAY
The following operations are available.
(1) Screen switching
Touching the alarm display can switch the screen to the base screen of the specified No. or overlapping window 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
1.
This function allows displaying the detailed alarm process screen when the popup display is touched.
( 11.8.2 Settings)
A 1254 A 1254 Alarm details display/process screen 11

B 348 B 348 Occurred Comment
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
04/6/1 8:15 Oil error
ALARM
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch!
12
Displays the base screen of the specified No.
or overlapping window 1
(2) Stage hierarchy switching/detail display
LEVEL
The display hierarchy of comments can be switched (only when advanced user alarms are displayed)
( 11.8.2 Settings)
13
Displays higher alarms Displays middle alarms Displays general alarms
PANELMETER
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
- Line abend - Pwr. module error 04/6/1 Temp. error
Touch!
Switches higher
middle hierarchy
Touch!
Switches middle
general hierarchy Touch!
14
Switches general
hierarchy detail
LINE GRAPH
display
Detail display
A 1254 A 1254
B on
Temp. error
power module
348 B 348
15
Check temperature
04/6/1 Temp. error

TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

POINT
(1) Hierarchies that can be switched by touch operation
By touch operation, hierarchies can be switched only to the lower ones.
To switch to the upper hierarchy, set [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab, and store the
hierarchy value in the device.
11.8.2 Settings
(2) Difference of display scope depending on the switching hierarchies method
Display scope is different between the case that hierarchies are switched by touch operation and by switching
device. For details, refer to the following.
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms are displayed))

(3) Switching of display position

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
If any other object is hidden by an advanced alarm popup display, the display position can be switched by touch
operation. (When [Display Position Switching] is set to enabled on the [Basic] tab in the Advanced Alarm Popup
Display dialog box)
DISPLAY
Displayed on bottom of the screen Displayed on top of the screen Displayed on center of the screen
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp.
A 1254 error
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
A 1254Temp.
04/6/1 10:30 A 1254
error
Touch the leftmost of
Display the display area*1 Display
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error position position
switching switching the display area*1

the display area*1
Display position switching
11
For the details of *1, refer to the following.
By touching the leftmost of the advanced alarm popup display area, the display position is switched
to the top, center and bottom of the screen in order.
ALARM
*1 Screen area for switching display position
The touch operation area for switching display position is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
12
Leftmost 16 dots
Mesh on the GOT screen
LEVEL
A 1254 A 1254
13
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
PANELMETER
POINT
Display position during screen switching
14
When screen is switched during the popup display, the popup is displayed at the position before switching. (It is not
displayed at the position specified on the [Basic] tab in the [Screen Property] dialog box.)
LINE GRAPH
A 1254 A 1254 38
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error 04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Screen
15
Switching
TREND GRAPH
Displayed at the position before switching

regardless of the display position setting
The display position set in the [Screen Property] becomes effective when a net popup display is displayed.
16
BAR GRAPH

 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms are displayed)
For advanced alarm popup display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods. However, the
display scope differs depending on the switching method.
• Touch the popup display directly.
• Use the device specified in [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching method.
Higher Alarm
Line1 Line2
Middle Alarm
General Alarm
Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control Power Drive Control
supply supply supply supply
"Pwr. module "Control "Control "Pwr. module "Control

error" module error" module error" error" module error"
: The alarm is occurring

: No alarm (normal run)
(1) Touch the popup display directly.

Displays the lower hierarchy of the touched alarm.
The following shows the case that the [Initial Display Hierarchy] on the [Basic] tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1) The alarm hierarchy specified for initial

display hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed. All higher alarms are displayed
A 1254 A 1254
Line1
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
- Line1 error
Power
Touch!
Switches to middle alarms

2) The middle alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 Equipment A
Power
- Equipment A error
Touch!
Switches to general alarms

3) The general alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254 Line1

B 348 B 348
Display scope
Equipment A
04/6/1 Pwr. module error

Power

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
POINT
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being
displayed
DISPLAY
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being displayed
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Display scope
A specified scope is
Power Control
being displayed
11
Display scope
ALARM
The new alarm is
Power Control
not displayed!
An alarm belonging to
another higher/middle 12
hierarchy has occurred!
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

• Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified hierarchy.
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy ] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
LEVEL
tab.
• Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy ] of [Switching Device] on the
[Extended] tab.
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device. ( 11.8.2 Settings)
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms
A 1254 A 1254
Line1
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 2
- Line1 error
Power
Displays all middle alarms
Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 1
- Equipment A error
Power
Displays all general alarms
A 1254 A 1254 Line1

B 348 B 348
Display scope
GD110 0 Equipment A
04/6/1 Pwr. module error

Power

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
POINT
(1) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
DISPLAY
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm hierarchy as the initial display
hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are displayed with the vertical
hierarchies ignored. 10
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
COMMENT DISPLAY
All general alarms are
displayed!
11
(2) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of the hierarchy being
displayed
In the following example, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the initial display hierarchy are displayed.
• All the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored.
ALARM
• The advanced user alarm (alarm ID) to be displayed by the device is switched
Display switching by device
Example) When all the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored
12
When the initial display hierarchy is specified as the middle hierarchy
LEVEL
All the alarms of the
displayed hierarchy 13
are restored.
PANELMETER
All the alarms of the
initial display hierarchy 14
are displayed.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

Specifying a font, text color and background color can prevent from overlooking popup display.
In addition, although level and group cannot be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display function, level and
group can be identified visually by setting a display color. ( 11.8.2 Settings)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
By specifying a background color,

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error oversighting popup display can be prevented.
In addition, by specifying a text color for each
level or group, alarm's level and group can be
identified visually.
 Display switching by device

Display data can be switched by the device value.
The display shown below is available. ( 11.8.2 Settings)
• Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarm only) specified by users
• Change the comment displayed according to the target user or purpose
• Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and soon)
(1) Items to which a switching device can be set
Available Available switching device settings

switching device
settings Advanced user alarm Advanced system alarm
All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are

Hierarchy*1
displayed.
-
Level*1 Alarms at the specified level are displayed.
Group*1 Alarms of the specified group are displayed.
The display order is changed between ascending order and The display order is changed between ascending order and
Priority Display descending order. descending order.
Attribute For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can be For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can be
selected. selected.
The setting of the advanced user alarm observation (alarm

Advanced User ID) displayed by advanced user alarm display can be
Alarm changed.
Observation Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced
user alarm display window.
General Comment -
Group
The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be
Midium Comment changed for each comment group.
Group The comment displayed can be changed according to the
user or purpose.
Upper Comment
Group
*1 The hierarchy, level and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.

(2) Display example

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device.
This section shows an example that the switching device (level) is set to GD10 and the switching device (group)
to GD11.
DISPLAY
Occurred Message Status Level Group
04/06/01 16:50 Temp. error Ocr. 1 1 10
04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3 1
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3 2
04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Ocr. 3 2
04/06/01 08:10 Internal pressure error Ocr. 2 1
"Restored" alarm is not displayed by
04/06/01 07:40 Fuse error Rstr. 1 1 advanced alarm popup display.
GD10 3 11
GD11 0
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
ALARM
04/06/01 14:25 Motor error Ocr. 3 1
12
04/6/1 14:25 Motor error 04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3 2
04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Ocr. 3 2
LEVEL
GD10 3
GD11 2
13
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
(Alarms to be displayed)
PANELMETER
04/6/1 11:20 Oil error 04/06/01 11:20 Oil error Chk. 3 2
04/06/01 10:00 Fuel error Ocr. 3 2
14
POINT
(1) Display priority when not switching the display data by the device
For details, refer to the following. LINE GRAPH
11.8.5 Precautions
(2) Changing the alarm sorting order by [Priority Display Attribute]
Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot be changed while higher
15
alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
TREND GRAPH
(3) Advanced user alarm (alarm ID) displayed

Alarms are displayed even when its alarm ID is not checked on the [Popup Display] item of the advanced user
alarm observation window. (Alarms are displayed regardless of whether the item is checked or not.)
When specify an alarm ID with the [Popup Display] item checked, only the alarm ID is displayed.
16
BAR GRAPH

 Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm popup display can be written into the device (word device).
Data that cannot be displayed by advanced alarm popup display (down time and others) can also be written into the
device. ( 11.8.2 Settings)
(1) Alarm data written into the device (15 types)

• Alarm ID • Time of Occurrence • Level
• Comment Group No. • Date of Restoration • Group
• Comment No. • Time of Restoration • Frequency of Occurrence
• Alarm Status • Date of Confirmation • Cumulative Time
• Date of Occurrence • Time of Confirmation • Downtime
(2) Alarms to be written
The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm popup display are written.
D200: 0601H
A 1254 A 1254 D201: 2004H
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch!
The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device
POINT
Touch mode when data are written into the device
To write alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the [Basic] tab to [Screen Switching] or [Stage Hierarchy
Switching/Detail Display].

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the precautions for using the advanced alarm popup display.
 Precaution for Drawing
DISPLAY
(1) Initial display hierarchy and hierarchy switching device
The advanced user alarm display and the advanced alarm popup display write the hierarchy specified for [Initial
Display Hierarchy] to the hierarchy switching device at the following timing. 10
Therefore, the displayed hierarchy is switched.
COMMENT DISPLAY
• When the screen is switched (Advanced user alarm display only)
• When the GOT first displays the objects after the GOT turns on
• When the displayed alarm observation ID is switched by using its switching device
For the setting of [Initial Display Hierarchy], refer to the following.
11.8.2 Basic tab
For the settings of the switching devices for the hierarchy and the advanced user alarm ID, refer to the following. 11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device is changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value
with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
Example) When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Value of hierarchy switching device Corresponding comment No. Comments displayed
0 0 General alarms being displayed.
1 1 Middle alarms being displayed.
2 2 Higher alarms being displayed.
(a) When masking is applied
Value of hierarchy
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 switching device
2
The comment of comment No.2

Higher alarms being displayed
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
hierarchy switching device is 2.
- Line abend Touch to switch the display

Touch! middle hierarchy
Masking
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
AND
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mask value (7FFFH)
Value of hierarchy
switching device
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1
Middle alarms being displayed The comment of comment No.1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 hierarchy switching device is 1.
-Pwr. module error

(b) When masking is not applied 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Value of hierarchy
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
switching device
2
DISPLAY
The comment of comment No.2
Higher alarms being displayed
A 1254
B 348
A 1254
B 348
hierarchy switching device is 2. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
- Line abend
Touch!
middle hierarchy
Value of hierarchy
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
switching device
-32767
11
The comment cannot be
displayed correctly since
A 1254
B 348
A 1254
B 348
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.
-Pwr. module error
ALARM
(3) Settings for saving advanced alarm data in the memory card 12
The touch switch for saving alarms cannot be assigned for advanced alarm popup display.
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the store trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the [Store Trigger] device on the [File Save] tab described in the following to save advanced alarm
LEVEL
data.

13
(b) When store data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
PANELMETER
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm display was
specified, and store the data.

14
LINE GRAPH
When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, [No message] is
displayed.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


(1) When an object is overlapping another object
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot be
operated.
In such a case, change the position of the advanced alarm popup display area.
Changes the display position
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch the leftmost

of the display area!
(2) When the advanced alarm popup display is not performed

Refer to the following to check the setting.
(3) Alarm display priority

(a) When the displayed contents are not changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab
For advanced user alarms, only the alarm of the alarm ID to which [Popup Display] of advanced user alarm
observation is checked is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Alarms being occurred
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error Displayed first
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error Displayed second

04/6/1 11:35 Temp. error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error Displayed third
(b) When the displayed data is changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.

(c) When [User Alarm + System Alarm] is selected in [Display Alarm] on the [Basic] tab 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
If an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm have occurred simultaneously, only the
advanced system alarm is displayed.
The advanced user alarm is displayed when all the advanced system alarms are restored.
DISPLAY
When an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm occur
simultaneously
Posted advanced user alarms

Occurred Comment
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error *1
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
A 1254 A 1254 *1 Not displayed until all the advanced
system alarms are restored.
B 348 B 348
Posted advanced system alarms
Occurred Comment 11
04/6/1 10:46:49 400 Unable to communication with CPU Displayed first
04/6/1 10:46 400 Unable to communicate with CPU 04/6/1 10:30:30 9 AC down error Displayed second
04/6/1 07:11:15 803 Transident error Displayed third
ALARM
Advanced system alarms are
displayed prior to others.
12
POINT
Restoration method of advanced system alarms
LEVEL
13
(4) When switching the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device
PANELMETER
If switch the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device with [Display Type] on the [Basic] tab
specified to [Fix], the display is updated at the intervals specified by [Switching Cycle].
Therefore, note that display may not be switched soon after switching the hierarchy.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(5) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in the advanced user
alarm observation, it may take a few minutes to display the data.
11.8.4 Display switching by device


Key window 7 8 9 AC
4 5 6 Del
A 1254 A 1254
1 2 3 +/- B 348 B 348
0 Enter
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
(7) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time

For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
(8) Clearing of advanced alarm popup display (Network error)

The advanced alarm popup display for a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit,
MELSECNET/10 communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be cleared until the GOT
is powered OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.

9
11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
The function enables user-created comments to scroll across the screen from right to left when an alarm occurs.
COMMENT DISPLAY
A comment is repeatedly displayed until causes of the alarm are removed.
The comment display position can be selected from among the top, center, and bottom of the base screen.
 When only one alarm occurs

The comment corresponding to the occurred alarm scrolls across the screen from right to left.
11
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
Error Error occurrence occurrence
ALARM
12
 When multiple alarms occur
The comments corresponding to the occurred alarms scroll across the screen from right to left in order of alarm
occurrence.
LEVEL
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 13
Error Error1 occurrence Error2 Error2 occurrence
PANELMETER
Scrolling alarm display The second or later alarm is The GOT stops displaying comments
displayed following the first alarm. corresponding to the alarms that causes
are removed.
14
HINT
Comments to be displayed with scrolling alarm display LINE GRAPH
Comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.

Register comments to be displayed with the scrolling alarm display in the comment group.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration 15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display 11 - 255

11.9.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Alarm] [Alarm Flow] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
 Basic tab
Set the timing of collecting alarm data, devices to be specified for alarms, comments to be displayed with alarm
occurrences, and others.
Use Alarm Flow Select this item to use the scrolling alarm display.
Alarm (Device)
Set the number of device points to be monitored (GT11: 1 to 3072, GT10: 1 to 512).
Points
Watch Cycle Set the cycle of monitoring set devices (1 to 3600 seconds).
Select a device type of devices to be monitored. (For GT10, only [Bit] can be selected.)
Device Type • Bit • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32
• Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32 • Real
Select a method to set devices. (For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)

Device Setting Continuous : Select the item for setting consecutive devices starting from the set device.
Random : Select the item for setting devices one by one.
Select a method to set comments of the comment group to be displayed. (For GT10, [Random]
cannot be selected.)
Comment No. Continuous : Select the item for setting consecutive comment numbers of the comment group
Comment starting from the set comment number.
Random : Select the item for setting comment numbers one by one.
Group No. Set the number of the comment group.
Set devices to be specified for alarms and comments to be displayed when alarms occur.
Device Set devices to be specified for alarms.( (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Set the ranges of the devices for displaying alarms. (For GT10, [Bit] and [ON] are fixed.)
When [Device Type] is set to [Bit]
ON : When a bit device turns on, an alarm is displayed.
Alarm setting list
Alarm Range OFF : When a bit device turns off, an alarm is displayed.
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit]
Click the [Exp] button, and then set the range of the word device value for displaying an alarm.
Comment No. Set comment numbers of the comment group for displaying comments when alarms occur.
Select this item to store the number of alarm occurrences in the word device.
Generated After selecting this item, set the device to store the number of alarm occurrences.
Number Storage
11 - 256 11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

9
 Format tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
Select a scrolling speed of alarms.
Flow Rate
High : Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character
Medium : Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character
13) per second.
7) per second. 12
Low : Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character 3) per second.
Display Position
Select whether to switch the display position of the alarm.
Switching
Display Select an item to be displayed for the scrolling alarm display.
LEVEL
Date of Occurrence : Select the item to display the date and time of alarm occurrences.
Attribute Comment : Select the item to display comments corresponding to alarms.
Contents Select whether to display both date and time, or either of date and time when [Attribute] is set to 13
[Occurred].
Date Format Select the [...] button to set the display format for date or date/time.
PANELMETER
Set the display order for the scrolling alarm display.
Display Order The items of [Contents] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Font Select a font of characters. (For GT10, [12dot Standard] is not available.)
14
• 16dot HQ Gothic
Size For details of fonts and the size, refer to the following.
LINE GRAPH
: Displays the text in raised format. 15
Solid Select the color of the shadow when the button or the button is selected.
TREND GRAPH
Select a color of characters to be displayed.

Fixed : Select the item to display characters in one color only.
Alarm Text Color After selecting [Fixed], set the character color.
Comment Color : Select the item to display comments for the scrolling alarm display in comment colors set in the
comment group.
When [Fixed] is selected in [Alarm Text Color]

16
Fixed/Default Select a character color to display characters in one color only.
Color When [Comment Color ] is selected in [Alarm Text Color]
Select a character color to be displayed when comments are not registered.
BAR GRAPH
Display When this item is selected, the scrolling alarm display background color can be selected.
Background After selecting this item, select the background color.


Preview area
Item Description

Contents

Type
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a week.
Date Setting

Example : To display September 1, 2009
Fill with 0
Selected : 09/09/01
Not selected : 09/9/1

Type
Time Setting
Example) At 10:1
Fill with 0
Selected : 10 : 01
Not selected : 10 : 1

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The scrolling alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
 Screen property
The following function can be set for each screen (screen property). 10
Select the screen editor to change its setting. Select the [Screen] [Screen Property] from the menu to display the
COMMENT DISPLAY
(Fundamentals) 3.9 Changing Screen Property
Setting whether to display or not the scrolling alarm display for each screen. Set in the following items on the [Basic] tab.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
row.
[Display alarm flow]
[Display Position]
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.9.3 Actions
 Alarm types and alarm display

(1) Alarm types
The GOT can display user alarms only.
(2) Alarm display
(a) Display timing
When an alarm occurs, the scrolling alarm display appears on the GOT.
When causes of all the alarms are removed, the scrolling alarm display disappears from the screen.
(b) Displaying multiline comment
The second line of a comment is displayed following after the first line of the comment. (The same
operation is applied to comments with three or more lines.)
(c) Displaying alarms with font, character color, and background color set
By setting the font, character color, and background color, the user can visibly notice the scrolling alarm
display.
11.9.1 Settings
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/110:30 Temp. error By setting the background color,

the user can visibly notice the scrolling alarm display.
 Operations when directly touching scrolling alarm display

When objects and window screens are hidden under the scrolling alarm display, the scrolling alarm display position
can be switched by the touch operation.
By touching the leftmost part of the scrolling alarm display area, the display position is switched to the top, center,
bottom of the screen, in that order.
When [None] is set for [Display Position Switching] on the [Format] tab in the [Alarm Flow] dialog box, the display
position is not switched.
A 1254 A 1254 10:30 Temp. error

A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
Temp. error
Display the display area*1 Display
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error position position
switching switching the display area*1
the display area*1
For details of *1, refer to the next page.

*1 Screen area for switching display positions

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The touch operation area for switching display positions is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
Leftmost 16 dots
DISPLAY
Mesh on the GOT screen 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
The vertical touch operation area for switching display positions depends on the size of characters to be displayed. 11
The size of the vertical touch operation area changes in 16-dot units.
Example 1) When the character size (vertical) is 16 dots
Vertical touch operation area: 16 1 = 16 dots
Example 2) When the character size (vertical) is 24 dots
ALARM
Vertical touch operation area: 16 2 = 32 dots
POINT 12
Display position when switching screens
When a screen is switched to another screen during the scrolling alarm display, the GOT displays the scrolling
alarm display at the same position as before screen switching. (It is not displayed at the position specified on the
LEVEL
[Basic] tab in the [Screen Property] dialog box.)
A 1254 A 1254 38 13
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error 10:30 Temp. error
PANELMETER
Screen
Switching
Displayed at the position before switching

regardless of the display position setting
The display position set in [Screen Property] is enabled when the GOT displays the scrolling alarm display for an 14
newly occurred alarm.
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

11.9.4 Precautions

Only one scrolling alarm display setting is available for one project.
The GOT can display the same scrolling alarm display on multiple base screens.
Whether or not to display the scrolling alarm display can be set for each base screen.

(1) When scrolling alarm display overlaps with placed objects
The user cannot operate objects, including touch switches, and window screens hidden under the scrolling
alarm display.
Change the display position of the scrolling alarm display.
11.9.3 Actions
When alarm does not occur When alarm occurs The GOT does not display a part of the
window screen hidden under the scrolling
alarm display area.
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
When a part of the touch switch is hidden
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
under the scrolling alarm display area,
the touch switch may not operate by
touching the touch switch.
Error occurrence
When the touch switch is completely hidden
under the scrolling alarm display area, the
touch switch does not operate by touching
the touch switch.
(2) Displaying occurred time

The GOT clock data is used for displaying the occurred time.
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock data for the clock function, refer to the following.

GRAPH, METER


9
12. LEVEL
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
This function fills the specified range equivalent to the device value, with the percentage of the difference between the
upper/lower limit values.
With this function, the device value can be shown as a level in any closed figure.
D100=0 D100=50 D100=100
100
75
100
75
100
75
11
50 50 50
25 25 25
0 0 0
ALARM
Example:
When combined with the numerical display When combined with the comment display
5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT 10. COMMENT DISPLAY
12
Comment
Numerical
display
display
Decrease
LEVEL
Level
Level
D100=25 D100=50 D100=25 D100=50

The text of the comment display is changed
13
Numeric value is displayed in the XOR-combined color.
according to the level value, and the color is
XOR-combined.
PANELMETER
12.1 Device/Style tab
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
12 - 1

12.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Level] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the level is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. To display the level within a figure, adjust the dotted frame to be fitted to the figure.
If the internal position mark( ) is overlapped with the figure, and the figure is highlighted, the level arrangement is
completed.
Level
Inter. pos.
mark data
Figure
4. Adjust the dotted frame of the level to be fitted to the figure.
5. Double click the arranged level to display the setting dialog box.
12 - 2 12.1 Settings

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
HINT
When internal position mark ( ) is not overlapped with figure
DISPLAY
When the internal position mark is not overlapped with a figure, move the internal position mark as follows.
The level is invalid if the internal position mark is not overlapped with the figure.
When level is invalid When level is valid 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Figure of level
display
Frame for level

display area 11
1. Right-click the dotted frame of the level and click [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region] [Edit
ALARM
Touch Area/Frame Region].
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
"Internal position mark changes from to ."
2. Drag the internal position mark to the position where it is overlapped with the figure.
15
TREND GRAPH
16
Figure is highlighted, and level becomes valid.
BAR GRAPH
12.1 Settings 12 - 3

Preview list
Set the device to be monitored.

Device
Select the data type for monitor device.

Deletes the state.

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select the direction the color changes when the monitor device value increases.
Up Down Left Right

Direction
DISPLAY
Set the frame line color of the figure for level display. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Figure frame line
When the frame line color is not set for the figure, the level is not displayed inside the frame line.
Example 1) When the boundary color is the Example 2) When the boundary color differs from
Display Format Boundary Color same as the frame line color the frame line color of the figure
(Common) of the figure
11
Figure Figure
Level frame Level frame
ALARM
Level display is valid. Level display is invalid.
Lower Limit Select whether the device value range (lower/upper limit) for the level is displayed based on the
setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
12
Device : Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.
Upper Limit
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be
monitored.
LEVEL
Range Set a condition expression for a word device range.
Level Color Select a color to fill in the level.
Pattern Select a pattern and background color for the level.

13
Background The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Color
Level pattern + Level color
Color Settings
PANELMETER
Example: Pattern background :
color
Level Pattern Level pattern :
Level color : Pattern background color
Object Name
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 State
(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Device/Style] tab
When the state is other than the one set on the [Device/Style] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on
the [Extended] tab.
(2) When states are overlapped
Example) The level and comment are combined.

Set the same condition (Range) to the level and comment display, and change the level color and
display comment simultaneously.
Level setting Comment display setting Display result
Increase Increase
• Level • Comment display

Monitor device : D100 Monitor device : D100
Direction : Up Display mode : Transparent
Upper limit : 100 Register comment : Comment No. 1 Increase
Lower limit :0 Comment No. 2 Decrease
Comment No. 3 Proper
Operation priority for Level Comment display

State No. Range
setting overlap state Level color Display comment
1 71<=$V Red Increase

High
2 $V<=30 Yellow Decrease
Low Normal case

- Light blue Proper
(State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value
When the device value is 71 or greater (71<=$V), the level color will appear
State 1 Increase
as red and the text, "Increase", will be displayed.
When the device value is 30 or less ($V<=30), the level color will appear as Decrease
State 2
yellow and the text, "Decrease" will be displayed.
Normal case Under states other than the states 1 and 2, the level is displayed in light blue Proper
(State 0) and the text is displayed in "Proper".

9
 Extended tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15) 12
Extended
LEVEL

Layer
Category
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
function.
DISPLAY
(1) Data operation
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in 13
[Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask AND : Carries out logical AND.
PANELMETER

Right : Right shift
14
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Level Color graph_color 3)
Device/Style Level Pattern pattern 3)
Pattern Background
back_color 3)
Color

12 - 10 12.1 Settings

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The level is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
12.3 Actions
ALARM
 How to set the level 12
The following explains the general procedure to set the level.
Example: Level for tank injection
Tank capacity : 0 to 500 liter
LEVEL
Injection volume : D10
Injection rate : 0 to 100%
Set by combining multiple Numerical display 13

objects and figures. Displayed in XOR-combined
500 100 50 color according to the level.
PANELMETER
Figure, scale
50
50 100
50
The level is displayed within
a figure frame.
Draw a scale when required.
0 0
0 14
Level
Set a level display
LINE GRAPH
range according to
a figure frame.
Injection volume
D10 value is monitored. 15
Upper/lower limit
Set a tank capacity.
TREND GRAPH
1. Make the settings for figure, scale and numerical display before arranging the level.
Scale
100
Numerical display
Set the numerical value to be XOR-reversed. 16
50 5.2 Setting Numerical Input
Figure
BAR GRAPH
0 Draw the figure overlaid with the level as follows.

Use the boundary color set in the level.
Draw the figure in enclosed shape.

Example) Figure drawn for level display
Drawn by vertex,
circular or oval figure Drawn by line
When the figure is
The figure in of the enclosed type,
different color from the level is displayed.
the boundary color
is filled.
Level frame Level frame
2. Overlay the level with the figure.

100 Figure
Numerical display
50
Level
The figure and numerical display must be enclosed within the level frame.
0 Arrange the level frame and figure to the same length.
If the lengths of the level and figure are different, an actual value is not displayed.
When lengths are the same When lengths are different

Upper limit: 100 Level frame
Level frame
D10: 80
Upper limit: 100
D10: 80
Direction Direction
Lower limit: 0 Lower limit: 0

80% filled. Completely filled.
3. Set the direction, boundary color and upper/lower limit of level.
500 100
Direction (Up)
50 Monitor device (D10)
Boundary color (set the same color as the figure frame line)
0 0
Lower/Upper limit (lower limit: 0, upper limit: 500)
HINT
Display the value out of the lower/upper limit
When the monitor device value falls below the lower limit, it is not displayed.
When exceeding the upper limit, it is displayed as the new upper limit.
Upper limit: 500
Lower limit: 0
D10:-100 D10:600
12 - 12 12.3 Actions

9
12.4 Precautions
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the precautions for using the level.
DISPLAY
 Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
 Precautions when overlaying the numerical display or comment display on the level 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(1) Precautions for arrangement
The displayed screen varies depending on whether the layer is used or not.
(a) To display XOR-combined level and numerical display/comment display
Layer Description Display example Result 11

If the numerical display or comment
display is arranged on the back layer and Numerical display
the level is arranged on the front layer,
the level is not displayed correctly.
Level
ALARM
Used
If the numerical display or comment
display is arranged on the front layer and
the level is arranged on the back layer, Numerical display
Impossible
12
the numerical display or comment display
is not inverted (XOR display not
Level
possible).
The XOR-combined numerical display

and comment display is displayed with
LEVEL
XOR display mode. Numerical display
Not used
Level Possible
13
The numerical display and comment
PANELMETER
display extended off the level range are
Numerical display
not XOR-combined.
Level Impossible
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected
(b) To display numerical value/comment unaffected by level

14
Layer Description Display example Result
If the numerical display or comment LINE GRAPH

display is arranged on the back layer and Numerical display
the level is arranged on the front layer,
the level is not displayed correctly. Impossible
Used
Level
15
Thenumerical display or comment
display is free from effects of the level if
TREND GRAPH
the numerical display or comment display

is arranged on the front layer and the
level is arranged on the back layer. Possible
50 Numerical display
The numerical display/comment display

Not used in the transparent mode is not affected by
Level
16
the level.
Possible
BAR GRAPH
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected

(c) To display multiple numerical displays/comment displays over the level
Numerical display
More than one numerical display or 123 :Displayed.
comment display are displayed if they Injection
Used
are arranged on the front layer and the
level is arranged on the back layer. Comment display Possible
:Displayed.
Level
Numerical display
Only one numerical display/comment 45 :Displayed.
display is displayed.
Not used
The second or later numerical displays/
comment displays are not displayed. Comment display Impossible
:Not displayed.
Level
: Can be displayed as expected , : Cannot be displayed as expected
(d) To add a shape to the numerical display/comment display
The shape is free from effects of the level

if it is specified in the numerical display or
Used comment display and arranged on the
50 Numerical display
front layer and if the level is arranged on
the back layer. Level Possible
Not used
Normal display may not be displayed 50 Numerical display
normally.
Level Impossible
: Can be displayed as expected , : Cannot be displayed as expected
(2) Precautions for use

(a) The numerical/comment display is not updated when the level is updated.
The settings (trigger) to update the display for numerical display/comment display is not relevant.
To update the numerical display or comment display at a different timing from the level, arrange each of
them on separate layers.
(b) Numerical display/Comment display is not blinked or reversed.
 Display on the drawing screen

If the internal position mark is not displayed on the drawing screen, the level is not filled.
Internal
position
mark

9
13. PANELMETER
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
This function enables meter display (needle display) of the word device value relative to the preset lower/upper limit
value.
D100 = 1000 D100 = 2000 D100 = 3000
10 10 10
11
0 20 0 20 0 20
Ammeter Ammeter Ammeter
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
13 - 1

13.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Panelmeter] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the panelmeter is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged panelmeter to display the setting dialog box.

Device

Lower Limit Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by fixed values or specified
device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values.
Device : Sets the device values.
Upper Limit
The setting range of the lower and upper limit is specified by the data type of the monitored device.
Select the panelmeter type.
Top¼ Bottom¼ Left¼ Right¼ Top-left¼ Top-right¼ ¾
Meter Format Type
Bottom-left¼ Bottom-right¼ Top½ Bottom½ Left½ Right½ Full circle

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position
where device lower limit value is displayed) for the meter needle.
90°
DISPLAY
Base Point
0° 180°
270°
10
Select the direction of the needle will move according to the monitor device value. (Clockwise/
COMMENT DISPLAY
Direction Counterclockwise)
The base point of the panelmeter changes depending on the direction.
Select the type of panelmeter display. (Needle/Fill/Needle and Fill)

(For GT10, only Needle is available.)
After the selection, click the color setting button and set [Needle Color], [Fill Color], [Background
Color], and [Pattern].
Meter Attribute Needle Fill Needle and Fill 11
ALARM
Needle Color Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.
Meter Format
Fill Color Pattern + Fill Color
Background Color
(Example) Fill Color : 12
BG Color :
Pattern Pattern : BG Color
Meter frame
LEVEL
Select this item to display the meter frame.
Meter Frame Line width of the frame is fixed to 1 dot, and the color fixed to
white.
13
Select this item to color the enter panel face.
Meter panel
PANELMETER
After selecting this item, set the color.
Meter Panel
This item is available only when the meter frame is displayed
by selecting [Meter Frame].
Core
Select this item to display the core.
Radius
14
After the check, click the Color button to set the core color.

LINE GRAPH
Shape By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures can
be selected as shape.

15
Shape
Plate
TREND GRAPH
Plate Color Frame

Needle color
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet)
Object Name
BAR GRAPH

 Scale/Text tab
Set the scale and scale value to the panelmeter.

Example)
0 0
-100 100 -100 100

Scale Scale value Scale in combination
(Scale points: 5) (Value number: 3) scale value
Scale Select this item to display the scale.
Scale Points After selecting [Scale], set the number of scale points (2 to 101) and the scale color.
Color Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Scale Value Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.
Value
After selecting [Scale Value], set the number (2 to 101) and color of numeric values.
Color
When changing the scale value, set the lower/upper limit values.
Example) Change the lower limit value.
Scale Settings
Changes automatically
0 50
Scale Value
-100 100 0 100
Lower limit change of scale value

-100 0
Font Set the scale font and numeric value size (0.5 to 8)
The following fonts are available.
The available numeric size depends on the selected font.
6 8 dot : 1 0.5(Fixed)
12-dot Standard : 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10)
16-dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8
Number Size
When changing the numeric value, set the lower limit and the upper limit values for [Scale
Value].

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Font Select a font.
• 6 8dot font • 12-dot HQ Mincho • 16-dot HQ Gothic • 12-dot standard font
• 12-dot HQ Gothic • TrueType Mincho • 16-dot standard font • 16-dot HQ Mincho
DISPLAY
Common Text Size • TrueType Gothic • Stroke (Not available for GT12 and GT11) • Windows font
Settings of For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
Display (Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity
Position
Select a character set available for the specified font.
10
Script
COMMENT DISPLAY
Text Color Select the font display color.
Display Position This selects the display position of text. (Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

Five patterns of text can be displayed simultaneously.
The following positions (A to E) can be set by combining display positions and edit text positions.
Alignment
Select Position to Edit Text
A: Center
B
DA
B
A
B
AE 11
B: Up DA A AE
C: Bottom
D: Left DA A AE
E: Right C C C
Text Settings
Input the text to be displayed on the panelmeter. (Up to 32 characters)
ALARM
Text
Press the [Enter] key to input a new line at the end of the first line.
Text
12
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and the
Text
Text
Offset to Frame object frame.
Up to 100 dots can be set.
Text
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Range tab
Preview list
Deletes the state.
Range Set the condition for word device range.
Needle Color Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.
Fill Color Pattern + Fill Color

Needle/Fill Background Color (Example) Fill Color :
Attribute
BG Color :
Pattern Pattern :
BG Color

*1 State 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Range] tab
When the state is other than those set on the [Range] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on the
[Devive/Style] tab.
DISPLAY
Example) Monitor device : D100

10
COMMENT DISPLAY
State No. Range Needle Color
setting overlap state
1 21<=$V<=60 Yellow
High
2 $V<=20 Red
Normal case
11
Low
- Blue
(State 0)
* $V indicates the monitored device value.
ALARM
50
When the device value is between 21 and 60 25 75
State 1
(21<=$V<=60), the needle color will be yellow.
12
0 100
50
When the device value is 20 or below 25 75
State 2
LEVEL
($V<=20), the needle color will be red.
0 100
13
50
PANELMETER
Normal case When the state is other than state 1,2 the needle color will be 25 75
(State 0) blue.
0 100
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab


Extended China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
China (Big5)-Gothic : Displays traditional Chinese characters.

KANJI Region

This setting is available only when the following fonts are selected on the [Scale/Text] tab.
• 12-dot standard • 16-dot standard • 12-dot HQ Mincho
• 12-dot HQ Gothic • 16-dot HQ Mincho • 16-dot HQ Gothic
Scale/Text tab

Layer

Category

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
function.
DISPLAY
(1) Data operation
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask 13
Pattern].
PANELMETER

Bit Shift Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION


active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Needle Color graph_color 3)
Meter Panel back_color 4)
Pattern of Meter Panel pattern 4)
BG Color of Meter Panel pattern_bg_color 4)
Fill Color fill_color 3)

Device/Style
BG Color of Fill fill_bg_color 3)
Pattern of Fill fill_pattern 3)
Core color core_color 4)
BG Color of Core core_bg_color 4)
Core pattern core_pattern 4)
Lower Limit scale_min[0] 4)
Upper Limit scale_max[0] 4)

13 - 10 13.1 Settings

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The panelmeter is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
13.3 Actions
ALARM
 Panelmeter setting method
The following explains the general procedure to set the panelmeter. 12
Example) Panelmeter that indicates analog/digital conversion value for 12mA
Current input range : 0 to 20mA
Digital output range : 0 to 4000
Conversion value : D10
LEVEL
Conversion value
10 Monitors the value of D10.
13
0 20 Scale value
Ammeter
PANELMETER
Indicates current input range.
0 4000
Lower/upper limit
Sets digital output range.
14
1. Set the meter type, needle color, shape, lower limit, upper limit, and the data format of the device to be monitored on
LINE GRAPH
Figure frame
Monitored device (D10)
Direction (Clockwise)
15
Needle color
TREND GRAPH
Meter type (top½)

0 4000
Lower/upper limit
(Lower limit: 0, Upper limit: 4000)
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
If the monitor device value exceeds the lower/upper limit value, the graph shows it as the lower/upper limit value.
Lower limit: 0 Upper limit: 4000
D10: -50 D10: 4200
2. Set the panelmeter scale, scale display, and text on the [Scale/Text] tab.
0
Scale (Scale points: 5)
-100 100 Scale display (Scale points: 3)

Ammeter
: Default value displayed.
0 4000 Text (Inputs directly)
13.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the panelmeter.


9
14. LINE GRAPH
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
This function enables multiple word device data to be collected in batch and displayed in a line graph.
400 400
200
0
200
0
11
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
D10 = 100 D10 = 150

D11 = 50 D11 = 100
D12 = 200 D12 = 250
ALARM
D13 = 150 D13 = 350
Example) 12
Compare the data with the ones previously collected. (Display the locus)
14.1 Extended tab
Updated line
LEVEL
400 400 400 400
13
200 200 200 200
0 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Every time cascade Clears the displaying graph by
PANELMETER
the collected data with clearing the trigger. Displays the
the new graph. graph with the new collected
data.
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
14 - 1

14.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Line Graph] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the line graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged line graph to display the setting dialog box.
 Data tab
List
Graph Type Select the graph to be set. (Line Graph/Trend Graph/Bar Graph)
Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

Number of Pens
1 to 8 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)
Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 500 points can be set. (For GT10, 2 to 50 points)
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.
Points : 5
Points
Space between
points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
Select the setting direction for the graph.
To right To left
Value of the Value of the

monitored device monitored device
Direction
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Direction of the set Direction of the set

monitored device monitored device

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME

DISPLAY
Set the graph attributes.

Device Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Device : Click the [Edit] button to set a word device to be monitored.
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
List (1) Edit Device dialog box
Graph : Select the line color of graph.
Style : Select the line style of graph.
Width : Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)
Lower Limit Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for line graph is displayed based on the setting by fixed
values or specified device values.
Upper Limit
Fixed
Device
: Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
: Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values. 11
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the [Data Type] of the device to be monitored.
ALARM
Object Name log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
12
(1) Edit Device dialog box
LEVEL
13
Device list
PANELMETER
14
Select the setting method for devices in the device list.

(For GT10, only [Continuous] is available.) LINE GRAPH
Device Settings Continuous : The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head device, and any
other device will be consecutively assigned to the second and later points.
Random : Devices to be monitored are set at random.
Check this item to display a point using 2 devices. 15

Display 2
devices by
TREND GRAPH
one point.
2 Device/Point
1 device/point 2 devices/point
16
Click on the desired item in the list to set the monitor device by direct input or clicking on the [...] button.
Device list
BAR GRAPH

 Style tab


Shape
Settings Plate
Plate Color
Frame

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the scale and scale value to the line graph.
100 100
DISPLAY
50 50
0 0
Scale display
0 50 100
Scale value display
0 50 100
Combine the scale display
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(X: 5) (X: 3) and scale value display
Example)
(Y: 5) (Y: 3)
Select this item to display the scale.
Color Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points,
Scale Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
Scale When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Points possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only. 11
Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.
Color Set the numeric color, numeric value (0, 2 to 101), lower limit value, upper limit value, font
and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
Value
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X
ALARM
Lower axis) lines.
Limit Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Scale
Settings
Upper
Limit
Upper limit 100 Changed
automatically
100 12
Font 50 250
Lower limit 0 0
Scale Value 0 50 100 0 50 100
LEVEL
Change the scale value of Y.
Upper limit : "100" "500"
Number
In [Font], the following items can be selected.
Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
13
Size 6 8dot : 1 0.5 (Fix)
12dot Standard : 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)
PANELMETER
16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8
For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.
The scale is not displayed when [Scale Points] is set to 0. Therefore, a scale can be
displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Select this item to display a frame for the graph.

14
Rectangle frame
Rectangle
LINE GRAPH
Frame
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab

Select this item to display the updated line graph cascading on the previous graph.
The previous graph is stored in the GOT internal memory.
Display at the first time Display at the second time Display at the third time
100 100 100
50 50 50
Locus 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Extended Display the cascaded 1, 2, 3 data contents.
Select the timing of clearing locus after the check.
No Clear Trigger : Does not erase the locus.
Clear On Trigger Rise : Erases the locus with the rise (turns ON) of bit device.*1
Clear On Trigger Fall : Erases the locus with the fall (turns OFF) of bit device.*1
When selecting [Clear On Trigger Rise] or [Clear On Trigger Fall], set the bit device to be used for
the clear trigger.
Check this item when setting the value without line connection.
After checking, set the not-displayed value.
Example) When not setting the not-displayed value When setting 300 to the not-displayed value.
Hidden Value 300 300

200 200
300
100 100
00 0
1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
The line connecting 1 to 3 is not displayed.

Layer

Category

*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The timing of recognizing clear trigger in the GOT is the same as the timing set in [Trigger Type] ([Trigger] tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set for clear
the trigger must be retained longer than the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
DISPLAY
Example of data retention for a period longer than that set in [Trigger Type].
Clear Trigger : Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type
Touch Switch
: Set to sampling (3 s)
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear trigger (M10)
turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
100 100
50 50
0
1 2 3 4 5
0
1 2 3 4 5
11
Touch the touch switch The graph displayed
set for the clear trigger previously is erased.
ALARM
Erases
the graph
12
Sampling OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

(3 s)
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Trigger tab

When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in seconds. (1 to 3600 s)
Trigger Type
The trigger is displayed as follows, when [Locus] is selected on the [Extended] tab.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600 s) in seconds.*1
• Rise • Fall • Sampling • ON Sampling • OFF Sampling
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Settings Fall For details of each item, refer to the following.
Sampling (Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Trigger Setting
Range
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
Collect data only
This item is available when [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected.
when trigger
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
conditions are
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
satisfied
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced. *2

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Update timing for ON Sampling or OFF Sampling
When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], the graph may not be updated at the set sampling cycle in
some cases.
DISPLAY
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type]. 10
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
COMMENT DISPLAY
(When setting [Trigger Type] to [ON Sampling] and the cycle to 1 second.)
one one one

second second second
Sampling set using "Trigger Type"
ON
11
OFF
Status of device set using "Trigger Device"
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
ALARM
At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling. 12
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
(b) Countermeasures
The cycle set by [Trigger Type] is independent of the status of the device. (The cycle is not changed even
LEVEL
turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1. Select [Rise] or [Fall] in the [Trigger Type].
13
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the sequence program.
PANELMETER
(2) Update timing for Sampling, ON Sampling or OFF Sampling.
When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating timing varies depending on
whether to use the locus setting. 14
(a) Without setting locus
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
LINE GRAPH
• At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
• At language switching
• At security level change
The display is updated when the set cycle comes during any of the procedures above,
15
(b) With setting locus
TREND GRAPH
• At starting GOT
• When the project is written
• When the drive information is displayed
• At execution of an operation in which GOT is restarted in the utility.
16
BAR GRAPH

*2 When settings for [ Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied ] are effective
The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.
Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type : Set at [Rise] Trigger Type : Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied : Checked conditions are satisfied : Not checked
Object : Line graph Object : Trend graph
100 100
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Displayed (communicated) at the rise Communication is made in the set cycle and
and communication is not made thereafter. the display is updated accordingly.
100 Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.
50
0
1 2 3 4 5
14 - 10 14.1 Settings

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
function.
DISPLAY
(1) Data operation
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL

[Mask Pattern].
PANELMETER

Right : Right shift
14
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
14.1 Settings 14 - 11

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Upper Limit (X) scale_max[0] 4)

Style
Upper Limit (Y) scale_max[1] 4)
Lower Limit (X) scale_min[0] 4)
Lower Limit (Y) scale_min[1] 4)

14 - 12 14.1 Settings

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The line graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
14.3 Actions
ALARM
 Method for line graph setting
The following explains the general procedure to set the line graph.
12
Example) Line graph for displaying production quantity of multi production line.
Achievement ratio : 0 to 100%
Production quantity : 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (line 1) : D10
LEVEL
(line 2) : D11
(line 3) : D12
(line 4) : D13 13
(line 5) : D14
Production quantity (D10 to 14)
6000
PANELMETER
100 of each production line(1 to 5).
Scale value
50 Vertical : Indicates the completion ratio.
Horizontal: Indicates the No. of the production
0 line whose production quantity is
0 1 2 3 4 5 monitored.
Lower/upper limit
14
Set the production quantity.
1. Set the monitored devices, number of graphs, lower limit value, upper limit value and number of points on the [Data] LINE GRAPH
tab.
Graph number (1) Monitored device

(D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)
15
6000
Points (5)
TREND GRAPH
Direction (to right)

: The setting procedure of device.
0 Shape
Lower/Upper limit
(Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 6000)
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the lower/upper limit, it is displayed numerically on the graph.
D10: 7000
Upper limit : 6000
Lower limit : 0
D10: -1000
2. Set the shape, scale and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape
6000
Scale
Vertical (scale points: 5)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
0
Scale value
Horizontal (upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
Vertical (upper limit: 50, lower limit: 0)
14.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the line graph.

• GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 32 objects can be set on one screen.
(2) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting
Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are
satisfied] is set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System
alarm occurs).
(3) When using GT10
The line graph and trend graph cannot be set on the same screen.

9
 Precautions for the line graph which locus has been set.
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
(1) Maximum number line graphs that can be set in one project
Only one object can be set for the whole project.
When the base screen arranged with line graph is multi-displayed in other base screen with the Set overlay
DISPLAY
screen function, only the first line graph can be displayed and the second and later will not be displayed.
(2) Screens where the line graph can be arranged
The setting is available for the base screen only. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(3) Windows that cannot be set on the base screen
When arranging the trend graph on the base screen, some windows cannot be displayed on the base screen.
The following shows the windows that cannot be displayed on each GOT.
GOT Windows that cannot be displayed
GT16, GT SoftGOT1000 Overlap window 5
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 Overlap window 2, test window

11
(4) Functions that cannot be used
The offset function and the station number switching function are not available.
(5) When using GT11
ALARM
When [Format] is set to [Vertical] in the [System Environment], the line graph cannot be used.
(Not displayed on the GOT even when arranged on the screen.)
(6) When overlaying shapes 12
Pay attention to the following when a line graph is overlaid on a shape.
(a) The BMP/JPEG file pasted to the screen cannot exceed the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the area that is not overlapped in the line graph frame will not be displayed.
Example)
LEVEL
Line graph frame BMP/JPEG files
for shape
13
PANELMETER
Arrange BMP/JPEG files BMP/JPEG files exceed
in the line graph frame the line graph frame.
14
(b) When using shapes filled with color, arrange the frame of the shape (the boundary line of paint area) within
the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the shape will not be painted normally. LINE GRAPH
(c) Since the shape set in the overlay screen is not displayed, it must be directly placed over and as the
background for the line graph.
(d) Do not use the superimpose window because shapes within the superimpose window will not be displayed 15
as background.
Example)
TREND GRAPH
16
Base screen Window screen Set locus display Do not set locus display
BAR GRAPH


9
15. TREND GRAPH
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
This function is used to collect word device data continuously and display it in trend graph.
D10 = 100 D10 = 200 D10 = 150

D11 = 50 D11 = 100 D11 = 100
11
200 200 200
100 100 100
0 0 0
Graph1 ( ): D10 Displays to the end of Continues to collect data

Graph2 (------): D11 graph display range in when the following graph
ALARM
order. is displayed by scrolling.
12
HINT
Differing from the trend graph function described in this section, historical trend graph accumulates the collected
LEVEL
data and displays them in time sequence.
Since it displays the accumulated data, both the current and past information can be displayed as graphs.
20. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH 13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
15 - 1

15.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Trend Graph] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged trend graph to display the setting dialog box.
 Data tab
Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

Number of Pens
1 to 8 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)
Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 100 points can be set. (For GT10, 2 to 50 points)
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.
Example:
Points: 5
Points
Space between points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
Select the direction of the graph line to be drawn.

Right Display mode: Display mode: Left Display mode: Display mode:
Pen Record Next Point Movement Pen Record Next Point Movement
Direction
Elapsed time Elapsed time Elapsed time Elapsed time


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Select the graph drawing mode.
• Pen Record: Functions as a chart recorder. The graph line is drawn by moving the graph background (a paper for the
chart recorder) to the direction set with [Direction].
The latest value point is always displayed at the graph edge.
DISPLAY
Graph edge
The latest value 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Elapsed time Elapsed time
Display Mode (Direction: Right)
• Next Point Movement: The graph line is drawn to the direction set with [Direction].
The latest value point moves to the set direction.
After the latest value point reaches the graph edge, the point is always displayed at the graph edge.
The latest value Graph edge

The latest value 11
Elapsed time Elapsed time
(Direction: Right)
ALARM
Data Type
12
When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
Device Device ([Random] is not available for GT10)
LEVEL
Setting Continuous : The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random : One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
Set the graph attributes. Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
13
Device : Click the [...] button to set the word device to be monitored.
List Graph : Select the line color of graph.
PANELMETER
Style : Select the line style of graph.
Width : Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)
Lower Limit Select whether the device value range (Lower/upper limit value) for the trend graph is displayed based on the setting by
fixed values or specified device values.
Upper Limit
Device : Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values. 14
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be monitored.
Select this item to continually collect data even when a screen in which the trend graph is not set is displayed.
The data as many as the number of points for the graph are stored in the GOT internal memory. LINE GRAPH
Select the timing to erase the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
No Clear Trigger : Does not clear the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
Store Memory Clear on Trigger Rise : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device rises (turns ON).
Clear on Trigger Fall : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device falls (turns OFF). 15
When [Clear on Trigger Rise] or [Clear on Trigger Fall] is selected, set the bit device for the clear trigger.
TREND GRAPH
Object Name
16
BAR GRAPH

 Style tab


Shape
Settings Plate
Plate Color
Frame


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Set the scale and scale value to the trend graph.
Example)
100 100
DISPLAY
50 50
0 0
Scale
0 50 100
Scale value
0 50 100
Scale is displayed in
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(X: 5) (X: 3) combination with scale
(Y: 5) (Y: 3) value.
Color Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points,
Scale When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Points possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.
11
Value
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X
Lower axis) lines.
ALARM
Scale Limit Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Settings Upper
Limit
Upper 100 Changed
automatically
500
12
Font 50 250
Scale Value
Lower 0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
LEVEL
Change scale value on Y
Upper: "100" "500"
Number
Size
Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font. 13
6 8dot : 1 0.5 (Fix)
PANELMETER
Rectangle frame
Rectangle 14
Frame
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab
Extended

Layer

Category

9
 Trigger tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Trigger Type Set sampling (0.1 to 3600 s) with 100ms as unit when selecting [Sampling] [ON Sampling] [OFF Sampling].
• Rise • Fall • Sampling • ON Sampling • OFF Sampling
LEVEL
Rise
Fall
13
Sampling
PANELMETER
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Collect data only Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
14
when trigger
conditions are By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
satisfied communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced. *2
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle

some cases.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type].
one one one

ON
OFF
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
(b) Countermeasures
The cycle set by [Trigger Type] is independent of the status of the device. (The cycle is not changed even
turning on or off the device.)
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.

When using memory store while selecting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating
timing varies.
(a) Without setting store memory
• At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
• At station No. switching
(b) With setting store memory

• At starting GOT
• At displaying the drive information
• At executing operations that require the GOT restart in the utility

*2 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective 9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
is efficient.
DISPLAY
the display. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY

11
100 100
50 50
ALARM
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.
Communication is made in the set cycle and
the display is updated accordingly. 12
LEVEL
13
50
0
1 2 3 4 5
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

function.
(1) Data operation

[Mask Pattern].

Right :Right shift
15 - 10 15.1 Settings

9
(2) Script
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
PANELMETER
active 1)
x 4)
14
- - y 4)
width
LINE GRAPH
height
Plate Color plate_color 4) 15

TREND GRAPH
Style

16

BAR GRAPH
15.1 Settings 15 - 11


The trend graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
15.3 Actions
 Setting method of trend graph
The following explains the general procedure to set the trend graph.
Example) Trend graph for the comparison between Plan and Actual
Productivity : 0 to 100%
Time : 0 to 3
Production : 0 to 1000
Plan (Graph 1) : D10
Actual (Graph 2) : D11
Actual
Monitors the value of D10.
1000 100 Plan
50 Scale value
X: Represents productivity.
0 Y: Represents elapsed time.
0 -3 -2 -1 0
Lower/Upper limit
Sets production.
1. Set the number of graphs, lower limit value, upper limit value, number of points, device to be monitored, and line
attributes on the [Data] tab.
Number of graphs (2)

1000
Monitored device (D10, D11)
Points (6)
Direction (Right)
0
Lower/Upper limit

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
HINT
DISPLAY
Upper limit: 1000 D10: 1500

10
COMMENT DISPLAY
Lower limit: 0
D10: -50
11
1000 Shape
Line attribute (Graph color, line type, line width)
ALARM
Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
0
Scale value: Displays default value.
12
X (Scale points: 3)
Y (Scale points: 3)
3. Set the timing to collect data on the [Trigger] tab.
LEVEL
The default timing of collecting data is set in 1 second (1000ms) cycle.
13
 Store memory
Executing the following operations clear the graph on the screen or collected data (device value: 0).
PANELMETER
Therefore, set [Store Memory] so that the collected data is held.
[Store Memory] is set on the [Data] tab.
Item When Store Memory is not set When Store Memory is set
Switching screens or switching to utility 14

Switching language switching device
Switching the base screen when a trend graph is displayed on the Display is cleared. Display is retained.
superimpose window The device value is reset to zero. The device value is retained.
LINE GRAPH
Switching the security level*1
Switching the station No. device
*1 When the store memory is not set, if the security level or the device value set for the level device is switched in [Common]
15
[GOT Environmental Setting] [Security] from the menu , the display is erased and the device value is changed to 0.
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH
15.3 Actions 15 - 13

Operations when switching screens

Monitored device: D10, D11
Base screen 1
Device value
100
D10 50 D11 25
50
0
0 60 120
Switch display screen Change device value

Base screen 5
D10 50 D11 25
Produce menu
Line 1
D10 25 D11 50
Line 2
D10 75 D11 90
Display base screen 1 again
Store memory Do not store memory
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 60 120 0 60 120
Display the device value Display current device value

before switching to other only after collecting and displaying
screen, as well as the one new data.
displayed on other screen (The trend graph is displayed when
on the graph. the conditions are met again and the
device value is monitored.)
POINT
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory
The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
• When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
• When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
• Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility
15 - 14 15.3 Actions

9
15.4 Precautions
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
This section explains the precautions for using the trend graph.
DISPLAY
• GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 24 objects can be set on one screen. 10
COMMENT DISPLAY
(2) Maximum number of trend graph objects with the [Store Memory] setting that can be set for one
project
• GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 16 trend graph objects can be set for one project.
• GT10: One trend graph object can be set for one project.
(3) When setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
Do not make a setting in which the trigger is met simultaneously for 257 or more objects for which [Collect data 11
only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met and are not displayed correctly (causing system
alarm).
(4) When using GT10
ALARM
Both the trend graph and line graph cannot be set on one screen.
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH


9
16. BAR GRAPH
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
This section explains the function for collecting word device data and displaying them as a bar graph.
11
D10 100 D10 -200
D20 400 D20 200
D30 200 D30 400
ALARM
12
16.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Bar Graph] from the menu.
LEVEL
2. Click on the position where the bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged bar graph to display the setting dialog box. 13
PANELMETER
14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Data tab
Number of Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

Pens 1 to 500 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)

Y direction: X direction:
In the set
Direction Monitor order of
device value the device
In the set order of the device Monitor device value


When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be set.)
Device Setting
Continue : The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random : One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
Device
Select each item on the list to make the settings.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device for
monitoring.
Graph : Select the graph color.
Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph.
List BG : Select the background color of the graph.
Example: Pattern + Graph

Graph :
Pattern :
BG : BG

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Lower Limit Select whether the device value range (Lower/upper limit value, base value) for the bar graph is displayed based on the
setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Upper Limit
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the lower limit value, the upper limit value, and the base value.
DISPLAY
Device : Sets the device values as the lower limit value, the upper limit value, and the base value.
Base Value (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be monitored.
Object The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
COMMENT DISPLAY
Name This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
 Style tab
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL
13
PANELMETER

(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 Shape setting 14
Shape Frame Color Select the frame color and plate color.
Plate
Settings
Plate Color LINE GRAPH
Frame

TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

Set the scale and scale values to the bar graph.

Example :
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Scale display Scale value Scale is displayed in combination
(X: 5) (X: 3) with scale value
(Y: 5) (Y: 3)
Color Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale
points.
Scale When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed.
Points Therefore, it is possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical
direction only.

Scale Color Set the color of numeric display, number of numeric values (0, 2 to 101), lower limit
Settings value, upper limit value, font of numeric display, and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
Value
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal
Lower Limit (X axis) lines.
Example : Change the upper limit of the scale value on Y
Upper Limit
Upper 100 100
Font
Sets lower limit of the
scale value to "0"
0 50
Scale Value
Changes
automatically
Lower -100 0

Number
Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
Size
6x8dot :1 0.5(Fix)
12dot Standard :1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)


9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
Rectangle frame
Rectangle
Scale Settings
DISPLAY
Frame
Set the graph width. (1 to 500 dots)

The width of bar graph includes the 1 dot on the boundary line (Vertical bar: left side; horizontal bar:
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
upper side).
Graph Width
Boundary line (1 dot) Boundary line (1 dot) 11

Graph width: including the boundary line
Set the space between graph origin and the selected position to edit the text bar in the bar graph that
is near to the origin. (0 to 100 dots)
ALARM
Offset to
Graph Frame
Distance from
12
graph frame
Distance from graph frame
Bar Graph Set the space between bar graphs. (1 to 500 dots)
Attribute The bar width is counted in the setting value.
LEVEL
Vertical graph Horizontal graph
Width + Space
13
Space (including graph width)
PANELMETER
Select this item to select the sorting of the graphs.
(None/Ascending/Descending)
[Ascending]
Y direction X direction
14
Sort
[Descending]
LINE GRAPH
Y direction X direction
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

 Extended tab
Extended

Layer

Category

9
 Trigger tab
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
Trigger Type
• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Rise
• Fall • Sampling • Range • Bit Trigger
LEVEL
Ordinary
ON
13
OFF
PANELMETER
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
14
Collect data only
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
when trigger
conditions are
LINE GRAPH
satisfied
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*1
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

*1 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective
is efficient.
the display.

100 100
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

50
0
1 2 3 4 5

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
function.
DISPLAY
(1) Data Operation
COMMENT DISPLAY
11
ALARM
12
LEVEL

[Mask Pattern].
PANELMETER

Right :Right shift 14
LINE GRAPH
15
TREND GRAPH
16
BAR GRAPH

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height
Upper Limit(X) scale_max[0] 4)

Style
Upper Limit(Y) scale_max[1] 4)
Lower Limit(X) scale_min[0] 4)
Lower Limit(Y) scale_min[1] 4)

16 - 10 16.1 Settings

9
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
The bar graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
DISPLAY
10
COMMENT DISPLAY
16.3 Actions
ALARM
The following explains the general procedure to set the bar graph.
Example: Bar graph displaying production quantity of multiple lines 12

Achievement ratio : 0 to 100%
Production quantity : 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (Line 1) : D10
(Line 2) : D11
(Line 3) : D12
LEVEL
(Line 4) : D13
(Line 5) : D14
The production of each line 13

6000 (1 to 5)(D10 to 14)
Scale value
PANELMETER
X: Indicates achievement ratio.
Y: Indicates line No.
0
Draws with figure and text.
Lower/Upper limit 14
Sets production.
1. Set the number of graphs, devices to monitor, graph color, lower limit value, upper limit value, and base value on the
LINE GRAPH
[Data] tab.

6000
Monitor device (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)

15
Graph color
0 Base value
TREND GRAPH
Lower/Upper limit
16
BAR GRAPH

HINT
If the monitor device value exceeds the lower/upper limit value, the graph shows it as the lower/upper limit value.
D13 = 7000
Upper limit: 6000
Lower limit: 0
D11 = 1000
6000
Shape
Scale (Scale points: 5)

Scale value (Numerical value number: 3)
16.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the bar graph.

alarm occurs).
(3) Display limit of the number of displayed bars
In the setting dialog box of the bar graph, when [Number of Pens] on the [Data] tab is set to 9 or more, if [Line
Graph] or [Trend Graph] is selected for [Graph Type], 8 is specified for [Number of Pens] on the [Data] tab.
Only first 8 devices in the device list are displayed on the graph. The devices following the 8 devices are
deleted.

17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
The statistics bar graph enables to display the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total value.
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
D10 33 D10 12
D20 33 D20 76
D30 34 D30 12
 Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen

Device status can be displayed more effectively by including the line graph legend. 20
HISTORICAL TREND
7. DATA LIST
No. Ma. name Target vol. Prod. vol.
GRAPH
1 Ma. 1 5000 2000
2 Ma. 2 5000 1200
3 Ma. 3 5000 1000

21
PARTS DISPLAY
 Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to device values
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending order of device values.
17.1 Style tab
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
17.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Statistics Bar Graph] from the menu.
2. Click the position where the statistics bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged statistics bar graph to display the setting dialog box.

 Data tab
Graph Type Select the graph to be set. (Bar (Rectangle)/Pie (Circle))
Number of
Set the number of word devices to be monitored. (2 to 32)
Divisions

Up Down Right Left
Direction D12 D10
D11 D11
D10 D12 D10 D11 D12 D12 D11 D10



Device Setting
Continuous : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.

Device
Click each item of the list to change its attribute.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device for
monitoring.
Example: Pattern + Graph color

Graph :
Pattern :
BG : BG color
Object Name
This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.

17
 Style tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
HISTORICAL TREND
Shape
GRAPH
Shape Frame Color Select the frame color and plate color.
Settings
21
Plate
Plate Color Frame
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

Set the scale and scale values of the statistics bar graph.
Example)
100 100
75 75
50 50
25 25
Scale points: 9 Scale value: 5 Combined display of

scale and scale value
Scale points.
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
Scale Scale Points When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Settings
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.
Color Set the numerical value color, number of numerical values (0, 2 to 101), font, and
numerical value size (0.5 to 8).
Value
Font Also, the values available for the numerical value size vary depending on the selected
font.
Scale Value 6 8dot : 1 0.5 (Fix)
Number Size For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None : Sort is invalid.
Ascending : Arrange from the small device value to large device value.
Descending : Arrange from the large device value to the small device value.
[Ascending] [Descending]
Sort

17
 Extended tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
HISTORICAL TREND
Extended
GRAPH

Layer
21
PARTS DISPLAY
Category
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Collect data only
when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

STATISTICS BAR
is efficient.
GRAPH
the display. 18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
100 100
SCATTER GRAPH
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
50
PARTS DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

function.
(1) Data Operation

[Mask Pattern].

Right :Right shift

17
(2) Script
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
width
height

Style



The statistics bar graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
17.3 Actions
The following explains the general procedure to set the statistics bar graph.
Example: Statistics bar graph displaying the production ratio by model

Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model 100
75
50
Scale value
Display scale value 25
0
1. Set the graph type, division number, monitor device, and graph color on the [Data] tab.
100
Graph type, division number, Graph color
75
50
Device (D10, D11, D12) 25

0
2. Set the shape, scale, and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape 100
75
Scale (scale number: 4)
50
25
Scale value (value number: 4) 0

17
17.4 Precautions
STATISTICS BAR
This section explains the precautions for using the statistics bar graph.
GRAPH
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
alarm occurs).
 Precautions for use 19

(1) When device values are negative
For statistics bar graph, the absolute value is displayed when monitor device value is a negative number.
SCATTER GRAPH
When D101 is "30"
D100=20 D101=-30 D102=50
20
HISTORICAL TREND
0 20 40 60 80 100
Displayed as 30
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT


17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
The statistics pie graph enables to display the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total value.
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
D10 33 D10 12
D20 33 D20 76
D30 34 D30 12
Example:
Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to device
20
HISTORICAL TREND
values
7. DATA LIST 18.1 Extended tab
No. Ma. name Target vol. Prod. vol.
GRAPH
1 Ma. 1 5000 2000
21
2 Ma. 2 5000 1200
3 Ma. 3 5000 1000
PARTS DISPLAY
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending order of
Device status can be displayed more effectively by including
device values.
the line graph legend.
22
18.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Statistics Pie Graph] from the menu. PARTS MOVEMENT
2. Click the position where the statistics pie graph is to be located to complete the arrangement
3. Double click the arranged statistics pie graph to display the setting dialog box.

 Data tab
Graph Type Select the graph to be set. (Bar (Rectangle)/Pie (Circle))
Number of
Set the number of word devices to be monitored. (2 to 32)
Divisions



Device Setting
Continuous : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.

Device
Click each item of the list to change its attribute.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device
for monitoring.
Example: Pattern + Graph color

Graph :
Pattern :
BG : BG color
Object Name log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.

17
 Style tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH

Shape
Shape
Settings
Frame Color Select the frame color and plate color. 20
HISTORICAL TREND
Plate
Plate Color Frame
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

Set the scale and scale value of statistics pie graph.

Example)
0 0
75 25 75 25
50 50
Scale points: 8 Scale value: 4 Combined display of
scale and scale value
Scale points.
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
Scale Scale Points When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Settings
Color Set the numerical value color, number of numerical values (0, 2 to 101), font, and
numerical value size (0.5 to 8).
Value
Font Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected
font.
Scale Value 6 8dot : 1 0.5 (Fix)
Number Size For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box. (None/Ascending/Descending)
None : Sort is invalid.
Ascending : Arrange from the small device value to large device value.
Descending : Arrange from the large device value to the small device value.
Sort [Ascending] [Descending]

17
 Extended tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
HISTORICAL TREND
Extended
GRAPH

Layer
21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Collect data only
when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

STATISTICS BAR
is efficient.
GRAPH
the display. 18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
100 100
SCATTER GRAPH
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
50
PARTS DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

function.
(1) Data Operation
(Fundamentals)5.3.9 Data operation setting

[Mask Pattern].

Right :Right shift

17
(2) Script
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
x 4)
22
- - y 4)
PARTS MOVEMENT
width
height

Style



The statistics pie graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
18.3 Actions
The following explains the general procedure to set the statistics pie graph.
Example: Statistics pie graph displaying the production ratio by model

Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model
0
Scale value
75 25 Display scale value
50
1. Set the graph type, division number, monitor device, and graph color on the [Data] tab.
Graph type, division number, Graph color
Device (D10, D11, D12)
2. Set the shape, scale, and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape
Scale (scale number: 4)
Scale value (value number: 4)

17
18.4 Precautions
STATISTICS BAR
This section explains the precautions for using the statistics pie graph.
GRAPH
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
alarm occurs).

(1) When device values are negative
For statistics pie graph, the absolute value is displayed when the monitor device value is a negative number.
SCATTER GRAPH
When D101 is "30"
D100=20
D102=50
D101=-30 20
HISTORICAL TREND
Displayed as 30
GRAPH
(2) Filling
When handling extremely small data in a statistics pie graph, the start point may coincide with the end point. 21
If this occurs, no filling is performed.
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT


17
19. SCATTER GRAPH
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
By taking the values of 2 word devices as X and Y coordinates, the graph is displayed with points/lines.
The following two types of scatter graphs are available.
GRAPH
 Sample
Two word device values are collected, and then displayed as a point on the graph.
This graph is updated to the new one with the previously displayed point(s) remained. (Locus) 19
(1) When point is set as graph display attribute
SCATTER GRAPH
(50, 300) (300, 200) (200, 100)
X device: D100 400 400 400
Y device: D200 300 300 300

200 200 200
100 100 100
0
0 100 200 300
0
0 100 200 300
0
0 100 200 300 20
HISTORICAL TREND
(2) When line is set as graph display attribute
(50, 300) (300, 200) (200, 100)
GRAPH
400 400 400
300 300 300
21
200 200 200
100 100 100
0 0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
PARTS DISPLAY
 Batch
Multiple data of 2 word device values are collected together and displayed as corresponding points.
When refreshing the data, the previously displayed point(s) can be either kept or erased depending on the setting
selection.
(1) When point is set as graph display attribute
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
X device: D100
400 400 400
300 300 300
D109 200 200 200
Y device: D200 100 100 100
0 0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
D209
(2) When line is set as graph display attribute
X device: D100
400 400 400
300 300 300
D109 200 200 200
Y device: D200 100 100 100
0 0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
D209
19 - 1

19.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Scatter Graph] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the scatter graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged scatter graph to display the setting dialog box.
 Data tab
Set the graph type, device and lower limit/upper limit.
Graph Type Select the graph to be set. (Sample/Batch)
Points Set the points to be displayed when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type]. (2 to 500)
Select how to update the graph display when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type].
Display Mode Replace : Only displays the graph of the latest data.
Locus : Displays the latest data with the previous displayed graph overlapped.


Device Select the setting method for monitoring devices when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type].
Continuous : The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head
Device Setting
device.
Random : Devices to be monitored are set at random.
X-Device Input the device directly for each of X and Y axes, or click the [...] button to set the monitoring word
Y-Device device.
Lower Limit Select whether to set the range (lower limit/upper limit) of the device displayed in the scatter graph in fixed values or in
the value of the specified device.
Upper Limit
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the [Data Type] of the device to be monitored.
Object Name log.

17
 Style tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH

Shape Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box. 20
HISTORICAL TREND

Shape
Settings Plate color
GRAPH
Plate Color
21
Frame color
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

Set the scale and scale values for the scatter graph.
Example)
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Scale display Scale value display Combine the scale display
(X:5, Y:5) (X:3, Y:3) and scale value display
Color
Scale Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points.
Points
Value
When changing a scale value, set the lower limit/upper limit values.
Lower Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and/or horizontal (X axis) line.
Scale Limit Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Settings
Upper Upper limit 100 100
Limit
0 Change the scale value 0
Font of the horizontal axis
Upper limit: "100" to "200"
Scale Value Lower limit -100 -100
-100 0 100 -100 50 200
Lower limit Upper limit
Changed automatically

Number Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
Size 6 8dot : 1 0.5 (Fix)
For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.

Graph frame
Rectangle
Frame

17
 Point/Line Attribute tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
Preview list
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Select how to switch display attributes for the scatter graph (Type, size and color of point/line)
Fixed : The display attribute is not switched. The display attribute set on the [Style] tab is used.
Bit : The display attribute is switched depending on the bit device conditions ON/OFF.
Signed BIN16 : The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word device value (16-
bit binary value).
BCD16 : The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word device (16-bit 20
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)).
HISTORICAL TREND
Example1) Attribute switching: [Bit], Switching device: M10
GRAPH
Attribute
Switching
M10: ON M10: OFF
Points are Points are 21
displayed as . displayed as .
Example2) Attribute switching: [Signed BIN16], Switching device: D10
PARTS DISPLAY
D10 = 1 D10 = 10 D10 < 100
Points are Points are Points are
displayed as . displayed as . displayed as . 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Set the device for display switching.
Switching Device
Display Attribute Select the display attribute of the scatter graph. (Point/Line)
State Deletes the state.
/ Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.
Set the condition for word device range.

Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
Type of point :
Type
Type of line :
Attribute
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.
Size Select the size of the point (Large, Medium, Small)/line (1 to 7).
Color Select the display color of the point/line.
Range Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
*1 State
(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab
When the state is other than those set on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute
set on the [Style] tab.
Graph type : Sample

Switching device : D10
State No. Range Type Size Color
setting overlap state
High 1 8<=$V<=12 Big White
2 13<=$V<=18 Small Black
Low Normal case

- Big Black
(State 0)
* $V indicates the monitored device value.
40
30
When the value of the switching device is between 8 and 12
20
State 1
(8<=$V<=12), it will appear as big white quadrangle ( ). 10
0
0 10 20 30 40
40
30
When the value of the switching device is between 13 and 18, it
State 2 20
will appear as small black triangle ( ). 10

0
0 10 20 30 40
40
30
Normal case When other conditions except for the conditions of state 1 to 3
20
(State 0) happen, it will appear as big black circle ( ). 10
0
0 10 20 30 40

17
 Extended tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices. 20

HISTORICAL TREND
Select this item to enable data collection during display of the screen without a scatter graph.
Store Memory
Data of the points displayed in the graph are stored in the internal memory of GOT.
GRAPH
Select this item when setting the not-displayed value for X and/or Y of the scatter graph.
Example: [0] is set as [Hidden Value] for X and Y
Not-displayed
value
Not-displayed
value
21
400 400
(0, 400) (0, 400)
Hidden Value 300
(50, 0)
300
(50, 0)
PARTS DISPLAY
200 200
100 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
Extended
Graph displayed with points Graph displayed with lines
Cumulative/ Select this item when writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and
Average minimum value of collected data into devices. 22
Then, set the interval of writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and
PARTS MOVEMENT
minimum value into devices by specifying the number of update times.
The value set as not displayed value in the scatter graph display is not included.
Device When writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and minimum value, and
the interval of memory storage or trigger (sampling) is set to short, this may cause the object to
refresh the display considerably slower.
In this case, set a longer writing interval.
Select the operation when the following functions exceed the maximum sampling number.
• Store Memory : When exceeding the maximum display points (2000 points).
• Accumulation frequency, Average value, Maximum value, Minimum value:
Operation at
When accumulation frequency exceeds 65535 (9999).
frequency over
Interrupt : Interrupts the data collection, and does not update the graph display.
time
Initialize and Continue : Continues the data collection after erasing the graph display, and
initializing the memory storage, accumulation frequency, average
value, maximum value, and minimum value.

Layer

Category

 Trigger tab

Trigger Type*1 When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in seconds. (1 to 3600 s)
• Ordinary • Rise • Fall • Sampling • ON Sampling • OFF Sampling
Ordinary
Rise
Settings Fall For details of each item, refer to the following.
Sampling (Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Trigger Setting
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Collect data Select this item to collect data only when the display conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
only when This item is available when [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected.
trigger For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
conditions are By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
satisfied communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*2
Select this item to set the trigger for erasing the display of graphs.
After selecting the item, select the timing of erasing graph display.
Clear Trigger*3 Rise : Erases the graph at rise (turns ON) of bit device.
Fall : Erases the graph at fall (turns OFF) of bit device.
The [Clear Trigger] also clears the graph display stored in memory, the accumulation frequency and average value.
Assigning a device to function as a clear trigger.

Clear Trigger (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Device When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected in [Trigger Typ], make sure to hold the clear trigger
device status for more than the sampling cycle set in [Trigger Type].

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle 17

STATISTICS BAR
some cases.
GRAPH
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type]. 18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
one one one
ON 19
OFF
SCATTER GRAPH
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
(b) Countermeasures
The sampling set using the [Trigger Type] is not depending on the status of the device. (The sampling is
GRAPH
not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
21
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the sequence
PARTS DISPLAY
program.
2
When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating timing varies depending on
whether to use the locus setting. 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
(a) Without setting store memory
• At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
(b) With setting store memory

• At starting GOT
• Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility

*2 Clear ON trigger recognition timing
The timing of recognizing clear trigger in the GOT is the same as the timing set in [Trigger Type] ([Trigger] tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set for clear
the trigger must be retained longer than the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Example of data retention for a period longer than that set in [Trigger Type].
Clear Trigger : Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type : Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch : Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear trigger (M10) turns off
by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
Erase
400 400
300 300 the graph
200 200
100 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
Touch the switch set for The graph displaed previously Sampling OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
the clear trigger erased. (3 s)
*3 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective
is efficient.
the display.

100 100
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

50
0
1 2 3 4 5
19 - 10 19.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
function.
GRAPH
(1) Data operation
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

[Mask Pattern].
PARTS DISPLAY

Right :Right shift
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
19.1 Settings 19 - 11

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
x 4)
- - y 4)
width
height

Style

Data

19 - 12 19.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
The scatter graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
overlapped on GOT. GT Designer3] 19
SCATTER GRAPH
19.3 Actions
 Setting method of scatter graph
The following explains the general procedure to set the scatter graph.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Example) A scatter graph to display power consumption and temperature during line operation
Digital output range for temperature : 0 to 600
Digital output range for power consumption : 0 to 10000
Power consumption variation range : 0 to 5000W
GRAPH
Temperature variation range : -10 to 50
Conversion value (Digital output value of temperature) : D100
Conversion value (Digital output value of power consumption) : D200 21
Monitor conversion value
PARTS DISPLAY
X: D100 (temperature digital output value)
10000 5000 Y: D200 (power consumption digital output value)
Display attribute
2500 Switch according to operation mode.
Operation mode A: , operation mode B:
0
0 -10 20 50 Scale value
Vertical : Indicates power consumption
22
0 600 Horizontal: Indicates temperature
PARTS MOVEMENT
Lower/Upper limit
X: Indicates temperature digital output range
Y: Indicates power consumption digital output range
1. Set the graph type, data type, lower limit value and upper limit value in the [Data] tab.
Graph type (sample)

10000
Monitor device (X: D10, Y: D11)
0 600
Lower/upper limit for X

(Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 600)
Lower/upper limit for Y
(Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 10000)

HINT
(800, 11000)
Upper limit: 10000
Lower limit: 0
Lower limit: 0 Upper limit: 600

(-1000, -1500)
10000 100
Shape
0
Scale
(Scale points Horizontal: 7, Vertical: 5)
-100
0 -100 0 100
Scale value
0 600 (Value number Horizontal: 3, Vertical: 3)
: Default value (Upper limit: 100, Lower limit: -100)
is displayed
3. Set the graph display method and graph attribute switch on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab.
(a) Display method
Display attribute (point)

10000 100 : Select either of point or line.
Point
0
Straight line
-100
0 -100 0 100
0 600
(b) Attribute switch
Attribute switch (bit, switching device: M10)

10000
: Switch between 2 types of display attributes
Set the display attribute in the following [Attribute].
ON/OFF attribute (ON: OFF: )

0 : Set display attribute when M10 is ON or OFF.
0 600
Point is displayed as Point is displayed as

when M10 is ON. when M10 is OFF.
19 - 14 19.3 Actions

17
 Store memory
Executing the following operations clears the graph on the screen or the collected data (device value: 0).
STATISTICS BAR
Therefore, enable [Store Memory] to hold the collected data.
[Store Memory] is provided on the [Extended] tab.
GRAPH
Item When Store Memory not set When Store Memory set
Screen with scatter graph set

Screen with scatter graph not set
Stores the device value Stores the device value 18
Screen switching/Switching to
the utility Screen with scatter graph not set
STATISTICS PIE
Screen with scatter graph set
Use Language Switching
GRAPH
Erases the display. Stores the display.
Switching base screen when scatter graph is displayed on a superimpose
Changes the device value to 0. Stores the device value.
window
Switching security level*1 19

Switching station No. switching device
SCATTER GRAPH
*1 When the store memory is not set, if the security level or the device value set for the level device is switched in [Common] [GOT
Environmental Setting] [Security] from the menu , the display is erased and the device value is changed to 0.
Example) Screen switching operation
Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101
Store memory
20
100
HISTORICAL TREND
Device value 50
D100 50 0
0 50 100
Device value changes
D101 50
D100 50 100 0 Base screen 1
GRAPH
Display both the device value (before being
100 D101 50 25 100
switched to other screen) and the device value
50 in the display of other screen.
21
0
0 50 100
Switch to Display base
and display screen 1 again. Do not store memory
Base screen 1
base screen 5.
100
PARTS DISPLAY
50
0
Production menu 0 50 100
Line 1
Line 2
Base screen 1
Only graph display current device value
after collecting and displaying new data.
22
Base screen 5
(1) The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory
PARTS MOVEMENT
Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph (sample, batch).
Sample 2000 times
2000
Batch times (Round off the part after decimal point)
Points
For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for [Operation at frequency over
time] on the Extended tab.
• Interrupt...........................Interrupts data collection
• Initialize and continue.....Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter graph display and collects data again.
HINT
When the maximum number of sampling results is reached
An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has reached the maximum.
19.3 Actions 19 - 15

(2) Conditions for when the stored memory data is erased

(a) When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
(b) When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the maximum number at
selecting [Initialize and Continue] on [Operation at frequency over time]
(c) When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF
(d) When the project is written
(e) When the drive information is displayed
(f) When an operation in which the GOT is restarted is executed in the utility setup.
 Cumulative/Average
The accumulation frequency and the average value, maximum value, or minimum value of the data collected in the
scatter graph can be written to devices.
Example) X-device: D100, Y-device: D200

Value that has been
Contents to be written
written
400 400 400 400
300 300 300 300 Accumulation Frequency 4
200 200 200 200
Average Value 200
100 100 100 100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X Maximum 300
100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 300
Minimum 50
D100 50 300 200 250
D200 250 200 100 200 Average Value 187
Y Maximum 250
Minimum 100
HINT
(1) Average value
(a) The fractions below the decimal point of the average value are rounded off for setting [Average].
If the data type (set on the [Data type] ([Data] tab)) of the monitor device is real, however, fractions below
the decimal point are written.
(b) Since the average value is calculated based on the average value of every sampling, some errors may
be observed.
(2) Maximum and minimum values
When the value of the monitor device exceeds the upper or lower limit of the scatter graph, the upper or lower
limit value will be written as the maximum or minimum accordingly.
(1) Upper limit of sampling number available for accumulation frequency/average value
The upper limit of the sampling number that can be counted as accumulation frequency/average value varies
according to the [Data Type] ([Data] tab) of the device.
[Data Type]
• Signed BIN16, Unsigned BIN16, Signed BIN32, Unsigned BIN32, 32BCD, Real : 65535
• BCD16 : 9999
When the accumulation frequency exceeds the upper limit, please set the operation in
[Operation at frequency over time] of the [Extended] tab.
• Interrupt.................................Interrupts the sampling of data.
• Initialize and continue...........Clears the interal memory and deletes the scatter graph display, and then
recollects data.
HINT
Displaying an error message when the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit
When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit, an error message can be displayed in the alarm
list (system alarm).
19 - 16 19.3 Actions

(2) Initialization timing of accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value, and minimum
17
value
STATISTICS BAR
The value "0" is written to the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value, and minimum value.
The initialization is performed in the following timings.
(a) When the conditions for the [Clear Trigger] (set in the [Trigger] tab) are satisfied
GRAPH
(b) When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit when setting [Operation at frequency over
time] to [Initialize and Continue].
(c) When switching the screen
18
• When switching the screen (base screen, window screen) with scatter graph arranged
STATISTICS PIE
When switching the screen with scatter graph arranged to other screens, the current accumulation
frequency/average value will be held. However, when the screen is switched back to the previous
screen, the data will be initialized.
GRAPH
• When switching the base screen
The scatter graph arranged in superimpose window will be initialized when the base screen is switched
over. 19
(d) When the security level is changed
SCATTER GRAPH
(e) When the station number is changed
HINT
Executing "the accumulation frequency/average value write" and the "store memory" simultaneously 20
If the [Cumulative/Average] and [Store Memory] are used simultaneously, the data of accumulation frequency/
HISTORICAL TREND
average value is collected even when the screen is switched to others.
However, accumulation frequency/average value can be written until the time that the sampling number for store
memory reaches the maximum.
Refer to the following for the maximum sampling number of store memory.
GRAPH
Store memory
21
PARTS DISPLAY
19.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the scatter graph.
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
(2) When using store memory
For the scatter graph with [Store Memory] set, up to 16 graph objects can be set in a whole project.
(3) Cautions when displaying superimpose window
Set the superimpose window not to overlap with a scatter graph.
The scatter graph area where the superimpose window is overlapped is not displayed.
Setting [Store Memory] enables full display of the scatter graph.
Superimpose
window Base screen Scatter graph is not The area overlapping with
displayed fully when superimpose window is also
[Store Memory] is not set. displayed when [Store Memory] is set.

alarm occurs).

17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
This function displays the device data collected by the logging function in trend graph in time sequence.
GRAPH
Usually, the collected data Display of the past data Display of the latest data
is displayed in trend graph.
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Graph Update Graph Update Graph Update
Graph display range Graph display range Graph display range

Data collected by
the logging function 20
HISTORICAL TREND
POINT
Before using the historical trend graph
GRAPH
To use a historical trend graph, the logging function must be set in advance.

21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
20 - 1

20.1 Settings
1. Select [Object] [Graph] [Historical Trend Graph] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the historical trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged historical trend graph to display the setting dialog box.
 Data tab
Set the number of graphs, display method and device.
Number of Select the graph to be set.

Pens (GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000: 1 to 32, GT14 and GT12: 1 to 8)
Set the number of points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
(GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000: 3 to 1024, GT14 and GT12: 3 to 300)
The space between point is automatically determined by the set number of points and the display range of X.
Example:
Display Points: 5
Format
Points
Space between points = 20 dots
X 100 dots

17
STATISTICS BAR
Select the direction for graph.
Right Left
Monitored Monitored
GRAPH
device device
value value
Direction Elapsed time Elapsed time

18
Up Down
STATISTICS PIE
Elapsed Elapsed
time time
GRAPH
Monitored device value Monitored device value
Select the graph drawing mode (Pen Record/One by One).

19
Pen Record : The present value is displayed at the opposite side of display direction.
SCATTER GRAPH
When the graph moves beyond the display range, data is deleted from the older
one and the graph displays the latest data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
Display
Format Direction
20
Present value Present value Present value
HISTORICAL TREND
Display Mode
One by One : The present value is displayed in the same side as the display direction.
When the graph moves beyond the display range, the graph presently displayed is
cleared and the graph is drawn starting from the succeeding data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
GRAPH
Direction
21
Present value Present value Present value
PARTS DISPLAY
Set the point type (Line/Point/Line + Point)
Point Type
(Line) (Point) (Line + Point) 22

Set the logging ID of the data to be displayed in the historical trend graph.
PARTS MOVEMENT
The logging ID can be specified by entering the fixed value or using a device.
• Fixed
Select this item to set the logging ID by entering the fixed value.
Logging ID After the selection, set the logging ID. (1 to 32767)
The logging ID can be set by using the logging name that corresponds to the logging ID.
• Device
Select this item to specify the logging ID by using a device.
Device After the selection, set a word device for storing the logging ID.
Click this item to display the [Logging] dialog box.

The selected logging contents can be edited in the [Logging] dialog box.
Select the setting method for [No. Logging Device].

Device Setting Continuous : The set continuous device points are set from head device automatically.
Random : Set the devices one by one for the specified number of points.

Select this item to monitor the logging device, which is specified by the value of the offset device,
among logging devices set for the logging ID.
For the multiple lines in the graph, the monitor device differs according to the item set in [Device
Setting]. After the selection, set the offset device.
Example) Number of lines in the graph: 2, Offset device value: 3
• Device setting: Continuous • Device setting: Random (No.1 and No.5)
Logging device Logging device
Use Graph No.1 D100 (0th) Selected device No.1 D100 (0th)
Offset No.2 D101 (1st) No.2 D101 (1st) Selected device
No.3 D102 (2nd) When the No.3 D102 (2nd)
No.4 D103 (3rd) selected device is No.4 D103 (3rd) When the
the zeroth device, selected device
No.5 D200 (4th) No.5 D200 (0th)
two devices is the zeroth
No.6 D201 (5th) starting from the No.6 D201 (1st) device,
No.7 D203 (6th) third device are No.7 D203 (2nd) the third device
No.8 D204 (7th) monitored. No.8 D204 (3rd) is monitored,
respectively.
Click this item to display the [Device List] dialog box.

Lists the logging devices set in the logging setting of the selected logging ID.
Select the device used for the historical trend graph.
On a cell, the selected device and setting order of the logging device are displayed.
No. Logging
Device
Device
Setting order of the logging device
Represents the order the device is displayed in the
Device device list dialog box.
This allows the confirmation of the order number of
the device being set in the device list dialog box.
The number is conveniently used for confirming
the setting change.
Select whether to perform or not the data operation. (Yes/No)

Data Operation When [Yes] is selected, click the [Exp] button on the right column and set the calculation expression.
Click the button to display the [Line Attribute] dialog box.

Line Attribute This setting is available only when the setting for [Point Type] on the [Data] tab is [Line] or [Line + Point].
(2) Line Attribute dialog box
Click the button to display the [Point Attribute] dialog box.

This setting is available only when the setting for [Point Type] on the [Data] tab is [Point] or [Line +
Point Attribute
Point].
(3) Point Attribute dialog box
Click this item to display the [Graph Information] dialog box.

Graph (4) Graph Information dialog box
Information The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value,
minimum value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
Select this item to display the graph in the step mode.
Step Mode
Graph display without Graph display with

Step Mode checked Step Mode checked


17
STATISTICS BAR
Select whether the device value range (Lower limit / Upper limit) for historical trend graph is set by fixed values or
Lower Limit specified device values.
GRAPH
Upper Limit (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range that can be set for lower and upper limit values depends on the [Data Type] of the device to be monitored.
18
STATISTICS PIE
Object Name
GRAPH
The dialog box lists the logging devices set in the logging setting of the selected logging ID.
Select the device to be used for historical trend graph.
19
A "*" symbol is displayed for the selected device.
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
(2) Line Attribute dialog box
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Item Description
Style Select the line style of graph.
Width Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)
Color Select the line color of graph.

(3) Point Attribute dialog box
Item Description
Type Select the point type of graph.
Size Select the point size (Large/Medium/Small/Minimum/Point) of graph.
Color Select the point color of graph.
(4) Graph Information dialog box

The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value, minimum
value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device. The graph line can be
switched between displayed and hidden states.
Item Description
Device Data When a device is set, the devices are automatically set for the following items consecutively.
Storage Check only the items to be used. (The unchecked items will not be set.)
Select the data type of the device value that stores the graph information.
Cursor Position
Stores the device value where the cursor is displayed.
Data
Maximum Data Stores the maximum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Minimum Data Stores the minimum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Average Data Stores the average value of the device displayed in the display range.
Set the device to externally control the graph line.
Select this item to use the graph line clear device.

Graph Line After selecting this item, set the bit device used as the graph line clear device.
External Control Graph Line Clear Device The graph line clear device is used to display or hide the graph line.
Turning on the graph line clear device hides the graph line, and turning off the device displays
the graph line.

17
POINT
STATISTICS BAR
Types to be selected for data type
Select the same type as the device type of the logging device. When the data type of the logging device is bit,
GRAPH
select any of signed [BIN16], unsigned [BIN16] and [BCD16].
When the selected type differs from the device type of the logging device, the system alarm (307 Monitor device is
not set) occurs and the graph information is not stored in the device. 18
STATISTICS PIE
(a) The timing to be stored in a device
A value is stored in a device when the historical trend graph is operated by the touch switch for the
historical trend graph. (With exceptions of the timing at which the cursor is deleted or the latest data is
GRAPH
displayed.)
(b) Graph information when the graph line is hidden
When the graph line is hidden, the graph information is not stored in the devices.
19
To obtain the graph information, turn off the graph line clear device.
SCATTER GRAPH
(c) The value to be stored in a device
When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
[Data Operation] is set with a historical trend graph, values to be stored in the devices for [Graph
Information] are values before data operations.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Example: When storing the cursor displayed position value to a device
Displaying the cursor Moving the cursor

100 100
75 75
GRAPH
50 50 The data of the graph when the graph
drawing processing stops is stored in
25 25
the device at the timing of cursor
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 display / movements. 21
This value is stored. This value is stored.
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Style tab
Select the position at which the [Main Scale] and/or [Scale Value] settings are changed. (Left/Right/Top/Bottom)
Different setting is possible for each axis position.
Up
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Axis 500 50
400
Position
Left 300 25 Right
200
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Down
Scale After selecting this item, set the scale color and the number of scales (2 to 11).
Points Select [Sub Scale] to display sub scales between the set scales.
After selecting this item, set the sub scales color and the number of sub scales (1 to 9).
The scale intervals are automatically set according to the number of scales.
Main
Scale Example: [Scale Points] of [Main Scale]: 4, [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale]: 5
Scale
Settings Color
Without sub scales With sub scales
Color
After selecting this item, set the color of numerical values (2 to 11), number of numerical values,
Value
lower value limit, upper value limit, font, and the size of numerical values (0.5 to 8).
Lower The following fonts are available.
Scale Limit Also, the value that can be set for the numerical value size varies depending on the selected [Font].
Value • 6 8 dot : 1 0.5 (Fixed)
Upper
• 12dot Standard : 1 1 to 8 8
Limit
• 16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8
Font For details of each font and size, refer to the following.
Number (Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Size

17
STATISTICS BAR
Check these items to display the vertical/horizontal grid.
After checking, select the grid color.
Vertical Grid
GRAPH
Grid is displayed according to the setting of [Scale Points] for [Main Scale] and [Sub Scale].
When the setting is made for [Top] / [Bottom], and [Left] / [Right], the setting for [Bottom] and [Left] has priority.
Vertical grid 18
Horizontal grid
STATISTICS PIE
Horizontal
Grid
GRAPH
Rectangle frame
19
Rectangle
SCATTER GRAPH
Frame
Single Touch
Select this item to display the cursor at the touched position.
Operation
Set a shape for the object. 20

HISTORICAL TREND

Shape
GRAPH
Settings Frame Color Plate color
21
Plate Color
Frame color
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Auxiliary Line/Cursor tab

Set the graph assistance line, time device and cursor attribute.
Select this item to display the corresponding lines on the graph. ( Reference Line, Lower Limit Line,
Upper Limit Line)
Reference Line After selecting this item, select whether the display position is set by a fixed value or a value of the
specified device.
Fixed : A constant is displayed as the [Reference Line], [Lower Limit Line], [Upper Limit Line].
Device : A value of the device is displayed as the [Reference Line], [Lower Limit Line], [Upper
Limit Line].
Graph Lower Limit Line (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Auxiliary After that, set [Style], [Width] and [Color].
Line Each of the reference line, upper limit line and lower limit line is displayed according to the values set in
[Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit] on the [Data] tab.
Upper limit value 100 Upper limit line (80)
Upper Limit Line Reference line (50)

Lower limit line (20)
Lower limit value 0
Style Select the cursor line type.

Cursor
Width Select the cursor line width. (1 to 7 dots)
Attribute
Color Select the cursor line color.
20 - 10 20.1 Settings

17
 Extended tab
Set the security, time device.
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
User ID*1 Set the user ID of historical trend graph. (1 to 65535)
Cursor Position Select the items to write the time of the cursor displayed position and the display range beginning/
21
Time end position time to a device. (The values are stored in BCD data.)
After selecting the item, set the device where the time is stored.
PARTS DISPLAY
Time Device*2 Beginning
Position Time (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Four points (Y/M, D/H, M/S, Day of week) of devices are set consecutively starting from the set
End Position Time device.
Always update
Beginning
Position Time/
Select this item to always store the latest values in the time devices (beginning position time, end position time).
Selecting this item stores the beginning position time and the end position time in the time devices every time the latest
22
End Position values are plotted on the graph.
PARTS MOVEMENT
Time
Select the item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function)*3
After checking the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
Display Position Display Position
Three points (year and month, date and hour, minute and second) of devices are set

Layer

Category
(Fundamentals)8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
20.1 Settings 20 - 11

*1 User ID
(1) When user ID setting is required

If more than one object that is operated using the touch switch of the same key code exists on the screen,
touching the touch switch may fail to call the intended operation.
In such a case, it is possible to assign an ID (user ID) to individual objects by setting the user ID so that the ID
(object) to be operated by the touch switch can be specified. Thus, intended touch switch operation can be
called by touching the touch switch.
When user ID is not set When user ID is set
Historical Historical
trend graph A trend graph B
Historical Historical
trend graph A trend graph B (User ID: 1) (User ID: 2)
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500 50 100 500 50 100
400 400
300 25 300 25
200 200
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10
Display cursor Display cursor Display cursor Display cursor

Up Down
Hide cursor Hide cursor Hide cursor Check Delete
Latest graph Latest graph Latest graph Hide cursor
Touch switch for Touch switch for Touch switch for Touch switch for
historical historical historical historical
trend graph A trend graph B trend graph A trend graph B
(User ID: 1) (User ID: 2)
The touch switch that should be used for Even if the same key code is used, the target
of operation is specified by an ID, making it
historical trend graph A acts for historical possible to call the intended operation.
trend graph B.
(2) Touch switch setting

Input the user ID, which has been set in this step, to the [User ID for a key input and data change] item in the
Key Code Switch dialog box.
For details of key code switch, refer to the following.
Touch switch setting ([Action] tab)
Set the user ID that has been set for an object.
20 - 12 20.1 Settings

*2 Time device 17
(1) How the data is stored in the time devices
STATISTICS BAR
Time data is stored in upper and lower 8 bits of the set devices.
Example) When D100 is set.
GRAPH
D100 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Year) (Month)
18
D101 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Day) (Hour)
STATISTICS PIE
D102 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Minute) (Second)
GRAPH
D103 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Not used) (Day of week)
(0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)

19
SCATTER GRAPH
To monitor the devices above by numerical display.
To monitor the above devices by the numerical display and others, execute mask processing and shift
processing using the data operation function as shown below.
For the data type of Numerical Display ([Device/Style] tab), set [BCD16]/[BCD32] since the value is stored in
BCD data.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Example: Setting example of numerical display ([Operation/Script] tab)
• Displaying "year" (upper 8 bits)
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
Set the numerical display to execute mask
processing for lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of D100
22
and to shift upper 8 bits (b15 to b8) of D100 to
PARTS MOVEMENT
the right by 8 bits.
• Displaying "month" (lower 8 bits)
In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for upper 8 bits
(b15 to b8) of D100.
20.1 Settings 20 - 13

(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

(a) Value storing timing
The value is stored to the device at the following timing.
• When the cursor is displayed on the graph.
• When the displayed cursor is moved.
• During the display of the cursor, when the historical trend graph is operated using a touch switch.
(b) The value to be stored

When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
Example: When storing the time to a device

Displaying the cursor Moving the cursor
100 100
75 75
50 50 The data of the graph when the graph
drawing processing stops is stored in
25 25 the device at the timing of cursor
0 0 display / movements.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
The time that corresponds The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored. to this cursor position is stored.
With the display position time devices and a touch switch, logging data at the specified time can be displayed in the
center of a historical trend graph. (The cursor is displayed at the position for the logging data at the specified time.)
If no logging data at the specified time exists, logging data at the time closest to the specified time is displayed.
(1) Before using time specification jump function
(a) Specifications for settable time
Item Description
(b) Required settings

Item Description
The switch or the key code switch can be read from the library on GT Designer3.
Switch / Key code switch By setting the key code (FFD4H) of the display position time specification jump for [Code Set] in the
switch or the key code switch, the user can create a switch or a key code switch.
2. TOUCH SWITCH
Extended tab
20 - 14 20.1 Settings

(2) Operation example

17
STATISTICS BAR
Example) When setting the display position time device to D1000 and displaying data at 21:05:30 on November
12, 2008
GRAPH
Display position time devices
15 bits 0 bits
Year and month
(D1000) 0x08 0x11 Time
specification
18
Date and hour
(D1001) 0x12 0x21 jump
STATISTICS PIE
Minute and 0x05 0x30
second (D1002)
GRAPH
the key code (FFD4H) is set. (21:05:30, November 12, 2008)
is displayed in the center of the graph.
19
POINT
SCATTER GRAPH
Precautions for time specification jump function
(1) When using time specification jump function
When using the time specification jump function, the graph drawing processing stops.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is set.
(2) When performing other operations during the time specification jump 20
HISTORICAL TREND
While the GOT searches for data at the specified time, the other operations for the historical trend graph are
unavailable.
(3) When multiple logging data at times close to the specified time exist
When no logging data at the specified time exists, the logging data at the time closest to the specified time is
GRAPH
displayed.
(4) When displaying the data at around the starting/ending point of the graph 21
When the logging data at the specified time is at around the starting or ending point of the graph, the data may
not be displayed in the center of the graph.
PARTS DISPLAY
(5) When executing the time specification jump without specified time
When the time is not specified (all the display position time devices are 0) and the time specification jump is
executed, the graph drawing processing stops and the latest data is displayed.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is set.
(6) When no logging data exists 22
With no logging data, the time specification jump is not executed.
PARTS MOVEMENT
(7) When logging data is not in chronological order
When the logging data is not in chronological order because the GOT clock time is changed, the data at the
time closest to the specified time may not be displayed.
20.1 Settings 20 - 15


The historical trend graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects overlapped on [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in
GOT. GT Designer3]
GOT internal device

Retaining the state of the historical trend graph displayed before screen switching
and displaying the same graph state after switching back to the graph screen
(Historical trend graph display mode signal: Read device) [Check for overlapping objects within GOT]
Useful information (8) Retaining the state of the graph

displayed before screen switching
20.3 Actions
20.3.1 Relationships with logging function
 Contents displayed in historical trend graph

The historical trend graph displays the data collected and stored in the buffering area and/or a memory card by the
logging function in graph.
Since the stored data are used, the present and past information can be displayed in graph.
Logging data
Displaying the stored data in graph
 The data collected by the logging function and displayed in historical trend graph
A historical trend graph can display the data set at only one logging ID.
To display multiple logging IDs, set multiple historical trend graphs.

20.3.2 Historical trend graph setting 17
STATISTICS BAR
The following explains the general procedure to set the historical trend graph.
Example) Historical trend graph for comparison between the planned and actual quantity
Productivity : 0 to 100%
GRAPH
Time : 0 to 3
Production : 0 to 1000
Planned quantity (Graph 1) : D10 18
Actual quantity (Graph 2) : D11
Actual quantity
STATISTICS PIE
Planned quantity
GRAPH
Scale value
Vertical: Represents productivity.
19
Horizontal: Represents elapsed time.
Lower/upper limit value

Sets the number of production.
SCATTER GRAPH
1. Set the number of graphs, number of points, devices to be monitored, lower limit value, and upper limit value on the
[Data] tab.
1000 Device value to be monitored
Points (6)
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Direction (Right)
0
Lower/upper limit value
(Lower limit value: 0, upper limit value: 1000)
GRAPH
HINT 21
PARTS DISPLAY
When the value of the monitor device is outside the lower/upper limit, the graph displays ▲ equivalent to the
number of sampling points outside the lower/upper limit.
Upper limit value：1000 D10:1200
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Lower limit value： 0
D10:-400
2. Set the main scale display, scale value display, and shape on the [Style] tab.
1000 100 Shape
50 Main scale display

X (Scale points: 5)
0 Y (Scale points: 7)
0 0 1 2 3
Scale value display
X (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 100)
Y (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 3)
20.3 Actions 20 - 17

3. Set the graph auxiliary line and cursor attribute in the [Auxiliary Line/Cursor] tab.
Graph auxiliary line

(Reference line, lower limit line, upper limit line)
Cursor attribute
(Style, width, color)
20 - 18 20.3 Actions

17
STATISTICS BAR
 Useful information
The following explains the useful functions for using the historical trend graph.
GRAPH
(These functions are provided only for historical trend graph and setting them is not possible for trend graph.)
(1) Displaying the cursor
It is possible to display and move the cursor on the graph using the touch switch for which a key code is 18
assigned.
Setting the single touch operation can display or move the cursor at the touched position.
STATISTICS PIE
The device value at the cursor position can also be output to the device set in the [Graph Information] dialog
box.
GRAPH
20.1 Data tab
Graph display is stopped while the cursor is displayed.
19
D100
SCATTER GRAPH
D120
D100 258
D120 231
20
(2) Displaying the grid
HISTORICAL TREND
20.1 Data tab
It is possible to display the grid on the graph.
Without grid With grid
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
(3) Displaying the reference line, lower limit line, upper limit line
20.1 Auxiliary Line/Cursor tab
It is possible to display the lines that are used as reference, such as the lower limit line, upper limit line and
reference line on the graph.
Without With
Upper limit line
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Reference line
Lower limit line

(4) Expanding / contracting the time axis
It is possible to expand or contract the time axis using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the graph is expanded/contracted.
Expansion
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Contraction 15 20 25 30

(5) Outputting the date data to a device

By selecting [Always update Beginning Position Time/End Position Time] on the [Extended] tab in the [Historical
Trend Graph] dialog box, the latest beginning position time and the latest end position time can be output to the
time devices.
By using the touch switches with key codes assigned, the beginning position time, the end position time, and the
cursor position time can also be output to the time devices.
Graph display is stopped while the time data is output to a device.
19:00 21:00 23:00
Beginning position time Cursor position time End position time
(6) Displaying data at the specified time

With a touch switch that the key code is assigned, data at the specified time can be displayed.
The graph display is stopped while the data at the specified time is displayed.
Specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008
The data at the specified time is displayed in the center.
(7) Interaction with the historical data list display

The data at the cursor position on a historical trend graph can be displayed with the historical data list display.
(8) Retaining the state of the graph displayed before screen switching
The GOT retains the state of the historical trend graph displayed before screen switching and displays the same
graph state after switching back to the graph screen.
To use this setting, make sure to set the logging count device.

Set the historical trend graph display mode by using the Historical trend graph display mode signal (GS450.b9).
• ON: The GOT retains the graph state displayed before screen switching.
• OFF: The GOT does not retain the graph state displayed before screen switching.
The GOT checks the signal every time a screen switches.

(a) GOT operation when a screen switches 17

When GS450.b9 is on, if the screen switches, the GOT operates as shown below.
STATISTICS BAR
1. From the screen with the historical trend graph to another screen
The GOT retains the state of the historical trend graph before screen switching.
GRAPH
Retaining the graph
Base screen 2 state displayed before
Base screen 1
the screen switching 18
STATISTICS PIE
200
Screen 戻る
switching
GRAPH
2. From the screen to the screen with the historical trend graph
19
The GOT restores and displays the state of the historical trend graph displayed before the first screen
switching based on the retained graph state.
SCATTER GRAPH
When the GOT has additional logging data after the first screen switching, the graph displays the data
with the additional logging data.
When the GOT does not retain the graph state, the graph displays the latest logging data.
Displaying the logging

Base screen 2 Retained Base screen 1
graph state
data with the logging
data collected after 20
the first screen switching
HISTORICAL TREND
200
Back Screen switching
GRAPH
Graph display range
21
Logging data Start point of
PARTS DISPLAY
Page 1 Page 2 ... the graph when
after the screen
switching returning to
base screen 1
(b) GOT operation example

The following shows an operation example when base screen 1 (with the historical trend graph) is switched
to base screen 2 and then the screen returns to base screen 1.
22
(Display mode: One by one, Direction: Right)
PARTS MOVEMENT
• When GS450.b9 is on (when the latest data is being displayed)
The graph displays the retained graph state with additional logging data collected after the first screen
switching.
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 1 Displaying the logging data
with the logging data collected
after the first screen switching
200
Screen Back
Screen
switching switching
Graph display range Graph display range
Additional logging Start point of the graph

Page 1 Page 2 ... Page 1 Page 2 ... when returning to
data after the first
screen switching base screen 1

• When GS450.b9 is on (when the past data is being displayed)

The graph displays its state displayed before the first screen switching.
The graph does not display the logging data collected after the first screen switching.
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 1 Displaying the graph state before
the first screen switching based
on the retained graph state
200
Screen Back
Screen
switching switching
Page 2 ... The logging data added after

Page 1 Page 1 Page 2 ...
the first screen switching is
not displayed.
• When GS450.b9 is off

The graph starts with the latest logging data when the screen returns to base screen 1.
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 1 Starting with the latest logging
data when the screen returns
to base screen 1
200
Screen Back Screen
switching switching
Page 1 Page 2 ... Start point of the graph

Page 1 Page 2 ... when returning to
base screen 1
(c) Restrictions
When specifying the logging ID monitored with the historical trend graph by using a device, be careful of
changing the logging ID.
Once the GOT retains the graph state and the monitored logging ID is changed, the GOT discards the
retained graph state.
Therefore, even though you return to the screen with the historical trend graph, the graph does not display
the graph state that is before the first screen switching and displays the latest logging data.

17
 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be read out from the library of GT Designer3.
STATISTICS BAR
Also, the text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be created by the user by setting a key code to a
GRAPH
touch switch.
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
Touch switches used for historical trend graph operation
SCATTER GRAPH
Show Cursor Shows / hides the cursor.

The cursor is displayed at the center of the graph.
FFF0H
20
HISTORICAL TREND
100 100
75 75
50 50
Hide Cursor 25 25
GRAPH
FFF1H 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Displays the cursor.
21
Moves the cursor in the direction toward the new / past data.
Example) When [Display Mode] is set to [Pen Record] and [Direction] is set to [Right]
PARTS DISPLAY
Cursor Next
100 100
FFF2H 75 75
50 50
25
0
25
0 22
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
PARTS MOVEMENT
Moves the cursor
New data side toward the new data.
100 100
Cursor Previous
75 75
FFF3H 50 50
25 25
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Moves the cursor
toward the old data. Old data side

Graph Next Scrolls the graph left or right.

Example) When [Display Mode] is set to [Pen Record] and [Direction] is set to [Right]
FFF4H
100 100
75 75
50 50
Graph Previous
25 25
FFF5H 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph
Graph Next Page Scrolls the graph left or right by one page.
Scroll Example) When [Display Mode] is set to [Pen Record] and [Direction] is set to [Right]
FFF6H
100 100
75 75
Graph Previous 50 50
Page Scroll 25 25
FFF7H 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph
Expands (2 times) or reduces (1/2 times) the time axis of the graph taking the axis of the new data as
Time Axis
the reference.
Expansion
FFF8H
100 100
75 75
50 50
25 25
Time Axis
0 0
Reduction
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30
FFF9H
Reference
Displays the latest data.
Latest Data 100 100

75 75
FFEFH
50 50
25 25
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Displays the latest data.
Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices in the center of the graph.
(Time specification jump function)
100 100
Time Specification
75 75
Jump
FFD4H 50 50
25 25
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Specified time
The data at the specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008
is displayed in the center.

17
20.5 Precautions
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
Up to 8 historical trend graph objects can be set.
For the GT12, one object can be set.
(2) Changing the set logging device or using other project data
18
If the set logging device is changed or other project data is used after setting the historical trend graph,
STATISTICS PIE
consistency between the device set for logging and the device in historical trend graph may be lost.
In such a case, it is necessary to set the device for historical trend graph again.
The historical trend graph is not displayed unless the device type agrees with each other.
GRAPH
(3) Consistency check with the logging setting
The consistency between the device of the logging setting and the device of the historical trend graph is
checked when: 19
• The [Historical Trend Graph] dialog box is opened.
SCATTER GRAPH
• The data check is performed when the device of the historical trend graph is enabled.
(4) Setting the graph assistance lines by a device
Since the [Graph Auxiliary Line] are displayed only for reference, abnormal state such that the lower limit value
exceeds the upper limit value or the upper limit value becomes smaller than the lower limit value does not cause
an error.
20
Lower limit line
HISTORICAL TREND
Upper limit line Upper limit line
Reference line Reference line
Lower limit line
GRAPH
(5) Devices set for time device and graph information]
For devices to be set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information], use GOT internal devices. 21
If a device of a controller is specified, the monitoring speed may be lowered.
(6) Logging setting when historical trend graph is used
PARTS DISPLAY
When historical trend graph is used, setting for [Number of Logs a File]
in logging setting must be larger than a value set for [Points]
of historical trend graph.
20.1 Data tab 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
(7) Historical trend graph position with the single touch operation setting
When [Single Touch Operation] is set on the [Style] tab in the [Historical Trend Graph] dialog box, position the
historical trend graph object under the following conditions.
If the conditions are not satisfied, the GOT may display the cursor at the position out of the touched position or
the GOT may respond nothing even with the touch operation.
• For the GT15, each X and Y coordinate of the data list display range must be a multiple of 16.
• The width and the height of the graph display range must be multiples of 16.
20.1 Style tab
If the position out of the multiple of 16 is touched, the GOT may display the cursor at the position out of the
touched position.
(8) Devices used for the time devices
When [Always update Beginning Position Time/End Position Time] is selected on the [Extended] tab in the
[Historical Trend Graph] dialog box, use GOT internal devices for the time devices.
Since data are written to the devices with each graph drawing, the drawing performance may decline without the
GOT internal devices.

(9) Precautions for specifying a logging ID by using a device

(a) Specifying nonexistent logging ID
Set a device so that only an existing logging ID is specified.
When the data of nonexistent logging ID is tried to be displayed in the historical trend graph, a system
alarm occurs.
20.1 Data tab
(b) Configuring the same logging device setting
When specifying a logging ID by using a device, configure the logging settings so that logging settings
have the same logging device setting, including the number of blocks, the number of points, and the device
type. If logging settings do not have the same logging device setting, the GOT may not correctly display
data in the historical trend graph or a system alarm may occur when logging IDs are switched.
24.1.2 Device tab
(10) Specifying a logging device by using the graph offset function
When using the graph offset function, configure the setting so that only an existing logging device is specified.
When the data of nonexistent logging device is tried to be displayed in the historical trend graph, a system alarm
occurs.
20.1 Data tab
When historical trend graph is used, install the Option OS (Logging) to the GOT.

When using the historical trend graph with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.

PARTS


17
21. PARTS DISPLAY
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
This function displays the registered parts and base screen/window screen according to the device status.
GRAPH
 Parts switching method
(1) Bit parts display
21.1 Bit Parts Settigs 19
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to bit device ON/OFF.
SCATTER GRAPH
X10: OFF X10: ON
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Parts corresponding Parts corresponding
to bit device OFF are to bit device ON are
(2) Word parts display
GRAPH
21.2 Word Parts Settings
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to the word device value.
21
D100: 1 D100: 10 D100: 100
PARTS DISPLAY
No. 1 part is displayed. No. 10 part is displayed. No. 100 part is displayed.
22
(3) Fixed parts display
PARTS MOVEMENT
21.3 Fixed Parts Settings
This function displays the parts/base screen/window screen at rising/falling edge of a bit device.
Only one type of part can be displayed, but the part can be overlaid on the other parts display.
Part of parts display A Part of parts display B
Rising edge
X1
ON
OFF
Parts display B is Parts display B is overlaid

displayed at rising on parts display A.
edge of X1.
21 - 1

POINT
Parts displayed by Parts Display
There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts Display. The parts to be displayed by Parts
Display needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by GT Designer3 (registered parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a memory card
 Applicable parts types

Type Description Remarks
The figures registered as parts are displayed.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
• Parts must have been

Parts
registered in advance.
Figures Text BMP/JPEG file
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the device
value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be • BMP/JPEG format parts
displayed by a single part. cannot be used.
• Draw the color-changed area
White Blue Red in white.
Mark • During the fixed parts
movement, the color change
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
D100 = 0 D100 = 50 D100 = 100 Only one color is used.
The color changing is displayed in the white area.

The figures on any base screens and window screens are displayed.
Base screen
Line A operation Line A operation
• The objects set on the base

screens and window screens
are not displayed.
Base Screen 1 Base Screen 20
Window screen Screen display
The figure on Base Screen 20
is overlaid on Base Screen 1.
Application example
Display different images of the same part Cascade multiple parts.
(Parts display (bit/word)) (Parts display (fixed))

21.3 Style tab
X10=OFF ON X30=OFF ON
Part No. 1 (X10)
Part No. 2 (X20)
Part No. 3 (X30)
Three parts are

arranged in
cascaded way. Part No. 1 is displayed Part No. 3 is displayed
Only the white part of parts changes.
21 - 2

17
21.1 Bit Parts Settigs
STATISTICS BAR
1. Select [Object] [Parts Display] [Bit Parts] from the menu.
2.
GRAPH
Click on the position where the part to be located to complete the arrangement.
3. Double click the arranged part to display the setting dialog box.
18
STATISTICS PIE
In basic tab, the [Parts Type] and [Parts No.] during ON/OFF are set.
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Preview list
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
Item
Parts Switching Select the method for switching parts. (Bit/Word)

Description Model
21
Parts Switching Set a device to be monitored.
PARTS DISPLAY
Select the type of part to be displayed.
Parts Data*1 The registered part is displayed.
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Mark Data*1 Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part types.
For the parts displayable as mark data, refer to the following.
Parts Type
Base Screen Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen Displays the registered window screen as part.
Displays an image file saved in the memory card as a part.

After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
Image File
(1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Displays the full path of the specified image file.
21.1 Bit Parts Settigs 21 - 3

Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.

Replace : The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.
This item is not available when [Parts Type] is set to [Base Screen] or [Window Screen].
Display Switch
parts parts
Shape Parts New parts
XOR : Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping portion of
the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
Display Switch
Display Mode parts parts
Shape (Blue) Overlapped part Part No. 1 Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow. (White) changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape + XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1 color of part No. 2
Overwrite : Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display Switch
parts parts
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Top-Left Center
Alignment
Set display position Set display position
21 - 4 21.1 Bit Parts Settigs

17
STATISTICS BAR
Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.
Parts No. Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
GRAPH
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Mark Color
Type].
Screen No.
Specify the screen No. when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set in [Parts Type].
The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking the [Screen] button.
18
Can specify image file No.
STATISTICS PIE
Parts Details The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
GRAPH
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
Image File No.
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9 19
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.
To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".
SCATTER GRAPH
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)
This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).
Object Name
For details of *1 refer to the following. 20
HISTORICAL TREND
*1 How to enable transparent setting of parts
GRAPH
When setting the transparent color to the image data set for [Parts Type], the transparent setting for [Parts Type] is
enabled.
The following shows how to enable the transparent setting of parts.
21
1.
PARTS DISPLAY
Set a transparent color to the image data.
(The transparent color can be set to image data in the BMP format only.)
2. Register the image data to which a transparent color is set in the parts or library.
3. Set the registered part or library to the part.

22
For the methods to set a transparent color to the image data, refer to the following.
PARTS MOVEMENT
(Fundamentals) 5. EDITING AND SETTING FIGURES AND OBJECTS

(1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Set an image file to be displayed.
Item Description
Display the full path of the specified image file.

Image File Path If "0" is set to the image file No., the path is not displayed.
Make setting so that the whole path can be within 78 characters.
Drive Name Select a drive where an image file is to be stored.
Folder Name Select a folder where an image file is to be stored.
File Name Specify a part of image file name (head character except for image file No.).
Digits Specify the number of digits for [Image File No.] to an image file. (from1 to 5)
Check the item for setting the transparent color to the specified image file.
The transparent color can be set to BMP files.
After checking the item, click the [From Image] button, and then the [Open a File] dialog box is displayed. Select the
file that the transparent color is set.
After selecting the file, the [Transparent Setting] dialog box is displayed. Specify the area that the transparent color is
set.
Transparent
Transparent : Displays the set transparent color.

Background Color : Change background colors for the preview.
Preview : Displays the selected image file.
Click the preview, and then the color of the clicked part is specified as the transparent color.

17
 Extended tab
Set the security, offset, layer or category.
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Extended
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Security setting 20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
Layer

21
Category
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Trigger Type
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

17
 Script tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
- - x 4)
y 4)
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Parts No. part_no 3)
Device/Style
Mark Color mark_color 3)
Blink blink 3)
*1 1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.For the object property feedback timing to the
screen, refer to the following.


1. Select [Object] [Parts Display] [Word Parts] from the menu.
2. Click on the position where the part to be located to complete the arrangement.
Here the parts type and parts No. displayed corresponding to word device value is set.
Preview list

Parts Switching (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Device The default of a written data format is signed [Signed BIN16].
To write by the other data format, change the setting in [Data Type].

Data Type
Preview List*2 Displays the set status for each state.
Deletes a state.
21 - 10 21.2 Word Parts Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
change.
Mark Data*1 The registered part can be checked by clicking on [Parts] button.
18
STATISTICS PIE
Parts Type
GRAPH
19
Image File*1
SCATTER GRAPH

Replace : The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.
This item is not available when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set to [Parts Type].
Display
parts
Switch
parts 20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
XOR : Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping portion of
the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following. 21
PARTS DISPLAY
Display Switch
Display Mode
parts parts
Shape (Blue) Overlapped part

changes to yellow.
Part No. 1
(White)
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to white. (Red) 22
XOR combination of shape + XOR combination of shape +
PARTS MOVEMENT
color of part No. 1 color of part No. 2
Overwrite : Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display Switch
parts parts

21.2 Word Parts Settings 21 - 11


Top-Left Center
Alignment
Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device. Then, set the bit
Bit
device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Range
Select this item to change the display based on a word device. After selecting this item, set a
Word
conditional expression for the word device value with the [Range] button.
Displays the [Parts No.] corresponding to the parts switching device.

When the parts switching device stores 0, the part is erased.
To erase the part, set $V==0 in [Range].
Example:
Indirect Device
D200: 100
Display the parts Monitor device value

with parts No. 100

Parts No. Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Detail Settings of Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Mark Color
Parts*3 Type]
Screen No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
Image File No.
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to 0, the parts are deleted.
Set 0 for [Image File No.] of power off, to display images only during power on.
Preview No. Display the part of specified No. on the GT Designer3 screen.
Object Name

For details of *2, *3 refer to the following.

*2 State 17
STATISTICS BAR
Example: Parts Switching Device : D100
GRAPH
Part No.1 Part No.10 Part No.100 Part No.101
18
Registered parts : 1 set 10 sets Over 100 sets Complete
STATISTICS PIE
The operation
priority for setting State No. Range Display parts
overlap states
GRAPH
High 1 $V<=0 No.0
2 1<=$V<=100 Indirect
0
3 101<=$V<=199 Hold
19
- No.101
Low (Normal case)
SCATTER GRAPH
* $V indicates monitor device value
When monitor device value is equal to or less than 0 ($V<=0),

State 1
the parts will not be displayed.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
When monitor device value is between 1 and 100
GRAPH
State 2 (1<=$V<=100), the parts corresponding to device value will be
displayed. 1 set Over 100 sets
21
PARTS DISPLAY
When monitor device value is between 101 and 199
State 3
(101<=$V<=199)s, parts display will not be switched.
Over 100 sets
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
State 0
In the case of states other than 1 to 3, the part No. 101 is displayed.
(Normal case)
Complete

*3 Parts switching method
State settings are required when other than [Indirect Device] is set for [Detail Settings of Parts].
The following describes how displayed parts are changed depending on the [Detail Settings of Parts] and state
settings.
Detail Settings of State setting

Parts type Set Not set
The part is displayed as the following depending on the set

state
Set the state if required.
• When trigger is satisfied
The displayed part is changed depending on the monitored
Indirect Device The part set in the state is displayed.
device value.
• When trigger is not satisfied
Set the state to change the part except the above condition.
The displayed part is changed depending on the value of
parts switching device.

Parts No.
state
The state must be set.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without state settings.
The part set in the state is displayed.
It cannot be switched to any other part.
Mark Color
The part set in [Detail Settings of Parts] is displayed.

state
• When trigger is satisfied The state must be set.
Hold
The part set in the state is displayed. Nothing is displayed without state settings.
The part set at the state is kept display
Example: When Detail Settings of Parts is set to Parts No.

Make the following settings.
Part State
[Parts Switching Device]: D10 State 1 State 2
[Parts Type]: Parts Data [Range]: 1<=D10<=100 [Range]: 100<D10
[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 1 [Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 2 [Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 3
(Displayed part)
Part No. 1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3
D10 = 0 D10 = 40 D10 = 150
Part set at Part set at state 1 is Part set at state 2 is

[Detail Settings of Parts] displayed (Part No. 2). displayed (Part No.3).
is displayed (Part No. 1).
For details of state, refer to the following.


17
 Extended tab
Set the security and offset
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
Security Level
HISTORICAL TREND
Extended
GRAPH

Layer
PARTS DISPLAY
Category
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Trigger Type
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

17
STATISTICS BAR
function.
GRAPH
(1) Data Operation
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
Select this item to enable the bit mask operation.

21
[Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
PARTS DISPLAY
Select this item to enable bit shift operation.

Bit Shift
Left
Right
: Left shift
: Right shift 22
PARTS MOVEMENT

(2) Script

30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

active 1)
- - x 4)
y 4)

Device/Style
Blink blink 3)


17
STATISTICS BAR
1. Select [Object] [Parts Display] [Fixed Parts] from the menu.
2.
GRAPH
Click on the position where the part to be located to complete the arrangement.
18
 Style tab
Directly specify and set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

21
change.
PARTS DISPLAY
Parts Type
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Image File*1 After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
21.3 Fixed Parts Settings 21 - 19


XOR : The parts/base screen/window screen by XOR combination is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is erased at the disabled display condition.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.

Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100
When display condition When display condition

is enabled is disabled
(M100: OFF ON) (M100: ON OFF)
Shape (Blue) Overlapped part Part No. 1 Part is erased.

Display Mode
changes to yellow. (White)
XOR combination of figure
+ part No. 1 colors
Overwrite : The parts/base screen/window screen is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is kept displaying without regarding to the display condition.
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100
When display condition When display condition

is enabled is disabled
(M100: OFF ON) (M100: ON OFF)
Shape Parts Part is kept displayed.

Top-Left Center
Alignment
21 - 20 21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Parts No. Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Set the [Parts No. ] when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
GRAPH
device bit is ON.
Mark Color
Type]. 18
Screen No.
STATISTICS PIE
Detail Settings of The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
GRAPH
Parts box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
Image File No.
3 digits : 001 to 999 19
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9
SCATTER GRAPH
Select the trigger by which data is displayed. (Rise/Fall)

20
Trigger Type
HISTORICAL TREND
Trigger
Click on the [...] button to specify the device to be set as trigger.
Trigger Device
GRAPH
Object Name
The object name is also displayed in other than [Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input. 21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Extended tab
Set the security level.
Extended Security Level

Layer

Category

17
 Script tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box 21
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
- - x 4)
y 4)

22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Style
Blink blink 3)


21.4 Parts Settings
Select [Common] [Parts] [Parts Setting] from the menu to display the [Parts Setting] dialog box.
HINT
Functions affected by the setting
The setting contents of some common settings, used in different projects, may affect multiple functions in the GOT.
For the relation between each setting and GOT functions, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.8 Relevant Settings
Show overlapping areas of shapes in XOR when Display Select this item to collectively combine grouped figures in XOR when the
Mode of Parts Display is XOR. display mode of the parts display is set to XOR.
Show image files in the memory card at the time of Select this item to display the BMP/JPEG files in the memory card on the
specifying Parts No. 9001-9999 parts display or parts movement as parts.
HINT
Operation from the project tree
The [Parts Setting] dialog box can also be displayed by double-clicking [Parts Setting] in the project tree.
21 - 24 21.4 Parts Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
The parts display function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
Checking if objects are overlapping [Check for overlapping objects within GOT]
21.5.2 Parts setting
SCATTER GRAPH
21.4 Parts Settings
Function Setting item Model 20
HISTORICAL TREND
When the display mode of the parts display is XOR, grouped figures are collectively [Show overlapping areas of shapes in XOR when
combined in XOR. Display Mode of Parts Display is XOR.]
GRAPH
Setting whether to use image files in the memory card for the parts display or parts [Show image files in the memory card at the time
movement of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999]
21
PARTS DISPLAY
Using the image files in the memory card as parts for the parts display or parts
movement.
(Read device)
GS450.b8
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

21.6 Actions
 Display method of a BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card
BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.
(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)
(a) Using a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
In each object setting of the parts display, specify the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card for display.
1. Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as a part in the memory card.

2. After the display condition of the part is satisfied in the parts display, the BMP/JPEG file part in the
specified memory card is displayed.
Set the following items in the [Device/Style] tab (only for word part) of the parts display for use.
• Image File Setting
• Image File No. setting
(b) Display example

The following shows a display example when BMP file parts are stored in the memory card.
IMG0001.BMP IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)
When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the corresponding BMP file
part is displayed.
• Word device for parts display : D100
D100 0 D100 1 D100 500 D100 999
If specifying "0" to the Displays BMP file part Displays BMP file part Displays BMP file part
part number, BMP file (IMG0001.BMP). (IMG0500.BMP). (IMG0999.BMP).
parts are hidden.
21 - 26 21.6 Actions

(2) Display method in units of projects

17
A BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a part number ranging from
STATISTICS BAR
9001 to 9999.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card when a part number ranging from 9001 to 9999 is
specified, make the setting in the following procedure.
GRAPH
This method displays the BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card when the part number ranging from 9001
to 9999 is specified. 18
STATISTICS PIE
2.
GRAPH
Select [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] in the
[Parts Setting] dialog box, and write the setting to the GOT.
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
3. The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is displayed when the part display condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the parts display.
PARTS DISPLAY
The settings of [Image File Setting] and [Image File No.] are not required.
(b) Displaying a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card by using GS450.b8
This method switches between a part registered with GT Designer3 and a BMP/JPEG file part stored in the
memory card for display when a part number ranging from 9001 to 9999 is specified.
Part No. When GS450.b8 is ON When GS450.b8 is OFF

22
PARTS MOVEMENT
The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is The part registered with GT Degisner3 is
9001 to 9999

2. Turn on GS450.b8.
3. The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is displayed when the part display condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the parts display.
21.6 Actions 21 - 27

(c) Display example

IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in the parts display (Word part)
When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in the word device, the corresponding BMP file part
is displayed.
• Word device for parts display: D100
D100 9000 D100 9001 D100 9500 D100 9999
When a part No.of 0 or 9000 BMP file part BMP file part BMP file part
is specified, no BMP file (IMG0001.BMP) (IMG0500.BMP) (IMG9999.BMP)
part is displayed. is displayed is displayed. is displayed.
21 - 28 21.6 Actions

17
POINT
STATISTICS BAR
(1) When specifying a part number out of the range from 9001 to 9999
Even though the setting for displaying BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card is configured, specifying a part
GRAPH
number out of the range from 9001 to 9999 displays a part registered on GT Designer3.
(2) When switching a part to the same part number of BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card (Only using
GS450.b8) 18
While the GOT displays a part, whose part number is within the range from 9001 to 9999, registered on GT
Designer3, to switch the part to the same part number of BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card, follow the
STATISTICS PIE
procedure as shown below.
1.
GRAPH
Turn on GS450.b8.
2. Specify part No. 0 or 9000 to hide the part currently displayed.

19
3. Specify the part number of the BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card to be displayed.
SCATTER GRAPH
(3) Example of turning on GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on
The following shows an example of turning on GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on by using
the status observation function.
Using GS450.b8 comes in handy when the GOT displays a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card after the
GOT is powered on.
20
1. In the status observation function setting, set the GOT internal device (Always ON signal: GS0.b4) as
HISTORICAL TREND
a trigger condition so that GS450.b8 stores 1 while GS0.b4 is on.
2. After the GOT is powered on, the status observation function makes GS450.b8 store 1.
GRAPH
Configure the setting on the [Project]
tab in the [Status Observation] dialog
box. 21
Configure the setting in the first row
PARTS DISPLAY
of the setting field in the
[Status Observation] dialog box.
(Immediately after the GOT is
powered on, GS450.b8 stores 1.)*1
Set [Observation Cycle] to [Ordinary].

22
*1 At the GOT startup, the parts used for the parts display may not be switched to the PARTS MOVEMENT
BMP/JPEG file parts.(Switching the screen switches the parts.)
Consider the above point, and design screens.
21.6 Actions 21 - 29

 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
With the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts Without the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
in the memory card parts in the memory card
Parts No.
Parts registered by BMP/JPEG file parts in the Parts registered by BMP/JPEG file parts in the
GT Designer3 memory card GT Designer3 memory card
0 -*1 -*1 -*1
1 to 8999
9000 -*1
9001 to 9999 *2
10000 to 32767
: Displayable : Not displayable - : Hidden

*1 When [Indirect Device] in [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement is selected, the parts are not hidden. (The current
display is retained.)
For hiding parts with the word parts movement, refer to the description of [Detail Settings of Parts] for the word parts movement.
*2 The parts cannot be displayed even if they are registered by GT Designer3.
Example) When a part registered with GT Designer3 is registered for part No. 9123
The part registered with GT Designer3

The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed. (part No. 9123) is displayed.
With the setting for displaying Without the setting for displaying
the BMP/JPEG file parts in the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
the memory card memory card
21 - 30 21.6 Actions

17
21.7 Precautions
STATISTICS BAR
This section explains the precautions for using the parts display.
GRAPH
(2) When setting the parts to be inverted (XOR display)
(a) Inverting the parts to a figure
STATISTICS PIE
Set the parts on the back layer.
(b) Inverting overlapped parts
GRAPH
• Only the parts with the "fixed part" attribute can be overlapped.
• Place all parts on the same layer.
• If parts are placed on the front layer, the area that is not overlapped is inverted to the [Transparent] of 19
the screen.
SCATTER GRAPH
(c) Inverting parts including characters
If the parts include objects with [Bold]/[Solid]/[Raised] text style set, characters of the displayed part may be
chipped or the character color may be incorrect.
(3) Setting of Parts Display
Do not set the display position with which any part of the BMP/JPEG file part will be out of the screen.
If such a display position is set, the part is displayed as follows. 20
Check the display position on the preview display of GT Designer3.
HISTORICAL TREND
(a) BMP/JPEG file part registered with GT Designer3
The part is not displayed.
GRAPH
21
The BMP/JPEG file part is not displayed.
PARTS DISPLAY
(b) BMP/JPEG file part registered in the memory card
Only displayable portion is displayed.
22
Only displayable portion is displayed.
PARTS MOVEMENT
The result of inverse (XOR display) can be viewed by using the preview function of GT Designer3.
For details of the layer, refer to the following.
(4) When parts overlap with other objects
Make sure to place parts so that they will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped objects may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, place the parts on the layer different from the other objects.
Also, note that the following cases may cause a similar problem.

When the "Parts type" is "Part" When the "Parts type" is "Base screen"
The objects overlap

Display area with parts display.
Display area The objects overlap
with parts display.
Part (Part No. 1 is displayed.) Part (Base screen 10 is displayed.)
Part No. 1 Base screen 10
(5) When screen is set as the parts type and "XOR" is set as the display mode
(a) If the base screen or window screen is specified as the parts type for parts display (bit part/word part) and
XOR is set as the display mode, the parts on the screen are deleted and a new screen is displayed.
(b) The area to be deleted ranges from the drawing point (screen (center/upper left)) of the parts display to the
base/window screen.
(c) If the base/window screen area including objects is deleted, the objects are hidden.
To display the objects, change the parts type from screen to part and adjust the position to avoid overlap
with other objects, or leave the screen parts type and change the display mode to "Overwrite."
However, if "Overwrite" is set, the previously displayed parts remain. Therefore, make sure to adjust the
parts so that they will be the same in size.
(d) If the target base screen or window screen includes objects with [Bold]/[Solid]/[Raised] text style set,
characters of the displayed part may be chipped or the character color may be incorrect.

(1) Erasing parts
To erase the part, use the [Parts Data] or [Mark Data] setting in [Parts Type].
Parts set to [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] in [Parts Type] are not erased even if 0 is specified.
(The part can be erased by redisplaying the current screen after switching to another screen.)
(2) Reading the BMP/JPEG file
The monitor screen pauses during a file reading.
(3) The partway-displayed BMP/JPEG file parts
In the process of a file displaying, the display may be paused with the image partway-displayed.
In such a case, display the parts again or check the BMP/JPEG file.
(4) While the GOT displays a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
While the GOT displays a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card, do not remove the memory card from the
GOT.
(5) When stopping the use of the BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
Perform either of the following operations.
• Change the [Parts Setting] of the GT Designer3 and then write the project data.
• Turn the GOT internal device (GS450.b8) off.
Even if the memory card is removed without the operations above, the BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
may be displayed. The following explains the reason.
The BMP/JPEG file part displayed on the GOT is retained in the GOT built-in memory. (Only one BMP/JPEG file
part can be retained.)
If a BMP/JPEG file part with the same parts No. is specified subsequently, the BMP/JPEG file part retained in
the GOT built-in memory is displayed. Therefore, the part registered by the GT Designer3 is not displayed.
(6) Priority between GT Designer3 setting and GS450.b8
When [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] is selected in the
part setting, the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card are displayed, regardless of GS450.b8.

17
22. PARTS MOVEMENT
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
It is the function to change parts position and display (movement) according to the value of word device.
Parts movement can be displayed by the following 2 types of devices.
GRAPH
• Position device : The device storing parts move destination.
22.6 Move way of parts (Control with position device)
• Parts switching device : The device to switch the types of parts to be displayed. 19
 Parts switching method (Control with parts switching device)
SCATTER GRAPH
The following 3 switching methods can be selected.
(1) Bit parts movement
Switches to display 2 types of parts. 20
(a) Switch different parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
HISTORICAL TREND
[Parts switching
bit device]
GRAPH
: M10
M10: ON M10: OFF
(b) Displays/hides parts according to ON/OFF of bit device. 21
PARTS DISPLAY
[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON M10: OFF
(2) Word parts movement 22

PARTS MOVEMENT
Switches to display more than 3 types of parts.
(a) Switch to display parts of which parts No. is the same as the word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
D10 1 D10 2 D10 3 D10 4
(b) Switch parts type according to the range and condition of word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
[Display condition]
1) 50 D10 100 Part No.1 1) D10 1 2) D10 250 3) D10 4
2) D10 < 100 Part No.2
3) Parts No.0 (not displayed) at

normal case (other than above
conditions)
22 - 1

(3) Fixed parts movement

22.3 Style tab
Only one type of parts is displayed.
[Parts Switching Device] is not set.
[Parts switching
word device]
: need not to be set
HINT
Parts displayed by Parts movement
The following two types of parts are available to be displayed by Parts movement, and need to be registered in
advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by GT Designer3 (Registered parts)

(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
 Applicable parts types

Type Description Remarks
The figures registered as parts are displayed.

Example: Registrable figures as parts
• Parts must have been registered in advance.
Parts (Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/
JPEG file parts in a memory card
Figures Text BMP/JPEG file
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the
device value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.
• BMP/JPEG format parts cannot be used.
White Blue Red • Draw the color-changed area in white.
Mark • During the fixed parts movement, the color
change (multiple-color display) is disabled.
Only one color is used.
D100 = 0 D100 = 50 D100 = 100

The color changing is displayed in the white area.
22 - 2

17
22.1 Bit Parts Settings
STATISTICS BAR
Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Bit Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
GRAPH
Set the parts move way, the parts to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF, and the condition.
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
Preview list
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.

With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
GRAPH
Parts Switching
Example:
21
Device X10: ON X10: OFF
PARTS DISPLAY
Display part No.1 Display part No.10
Select the movement type when moving parts.

Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
After setting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
Move Format Device From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X • Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
Line : Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point : Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device.
Data Type (Fixed to [Unsigned BIN16] when selecting [Position]/[Point])
• Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16
22.1 Bit Parts Settings 22 - 3

Select the move way.

Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X and Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position.
From the set device, two device points are set continuously for X and Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
Move Way
Move Format Line *1 : Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
Point : Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
After selecting this item, set the parts move route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)
Route No. Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29)
Preview list Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.
Select the type of the part to be moved.
Parts Data*2 Displays the registered part
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts
switching device change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed. The registered part can be checked by clicking
Mark Data*2 on [Parts] button.
Parts Type

After the selection, clicking the [Setting] button displays the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
Image File*2
20.1 Bit Parts Settigs (1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.

Movement : Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Locus : Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:
When selecting [Movement]
Display Mode
Erase the previous display Erase the previous display

When selecting [Locus]
The previous display The previous display
22 - 4 22.1 Bit Parts Settings

17
STATISTICS BAR
Select the base point to display the part.
Top-Left : Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center : Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
GRAPH
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)
Device for X coordinate Device for X coordinate

18
Device Device
for Y for Y
STATISTICS PIE
coordinate coordinate
GRAPH
Top-left Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
19
Starting Destination Starting Destination
SCATTER GRAPH
point point
Top-left Center
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
Alignment 2 4 2 4
20
HISTORICAL TREND
1 3 1 3
Top-left Center
GRAPH
Set the pat No. to be displayed.
Parts No. Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
21
Mark Color
Type].
PARTS DISPLAY
The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
Image File No. 3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Blink Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)
Object Name log.

*1 Line
Set the line to be the parts move range when [Line] is set for [Move Way].
Execute the following operations after making the settings in the [Bit Parts Movement] dialog box.
1. Click the start position in the drawing screen.
2. Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking the destination.
*2 How to enable transparent setting of parts
When setting the transparent color to the image data set for [Parts Type], the transparent setting for [Parts Type] is
enabled.
The following shows how to enable the transparent setting of parts.
1. Set a transparent color to the image data.

(The transparent color can be set to image data in the BMP format only.)
2. Register the image data to which a transparent color is set in the parts or library.
3. Set the registered part or library to the part.
For the methods to set a transparent color to the image data, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5. EDITING AND SETTING FIGURES AND OBJECTS

17
 Extended tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Extended
GRAPH
Layer
Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back) 21
PARTS DISPLAY
Category
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

17
 Script tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
- - x 4) 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
y 4)
Device/Style Blink blink 3)



Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Word Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
Set the move way of parts, the parts displayed by the device value, and states.
Preview list
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.

With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
Parts Switching Example:

Device D10: 1 D10: 2 D10: 3
Display part No.1 Display part No.2 Display part No.3

After setting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
The setting items varies according to the setting in [Move Way].
Move Format Device From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X • Y position storage.
ending point.
When selecting [Line] from [Device], select the data type of word device.

17
STATISTICS BAR
Select the move way.
Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word devicevalues as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position.
GRAPH
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X . Y position storage.
Move Way
Move Format Line*2 : Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
STATISTICS PIE
After selecting this item, set the parts move route No. (0 to 29).
GRAPH
Route No. Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29) 19
*3 Displays the set status for each state.
Preview list
SCATTER GRAPH
Deletes the state.
Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected state. 20
HISTORICAL TREND
Changes the white part of the part into the different color according to the parts switching device
GRAPH
change.
Parts Type
For the parts displayable as mark data, refer to the following. 21
PARTS DISPLAY
Image File*1

Movement
Locus
: Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Example:
Display Mode




Example:
Device Device
for Y for Y
Top-left Center
Alignment

point point
Top-left Center
2 4 2 4
1 3 1 3
Top-left Center

Bit : Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device. Then, set the bit device and the
Range device status (ON/OFF).
Word : Select this item to change the display based on a word device.
After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device value with the [Range] button.
Displays the [Parts No.] corresponding to the parts switching device.

When the parts switching device stores 0 (0 or 9000 when a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory
card is specified), the current display is held.
To erase the part, set $V==0 in [Range].
Example:
Indirect Device
D200: 100
Display the parts Monitor device value

with parts No. 100

Detail Settings of Parts No. Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Parts*4 Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Mark Color
Type].

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
Image File No. 4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9

17
STATISTICS BAR
Detail Settings of Hold Select this item to hold current parts display.
Parts*4 Blink Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)
GRAPH
Object Name log.
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
*2 Line
Execute the following operations after making the settings in [Word Parts Movement]. 19
1.
SCATTER GRAPH
Click the start position in the drawing screen.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
2. Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking the destination.
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

*3 State

Example) Parts Switching Device : D100
Parts No. 1 Parts No. 10 Parts No. 11 Parts No. 12
Registered parts :
The operation
priority for setting State No. Range Display parts
overlap states
High 1 M10 ON No.11
2 1<=$V<=9 Indirect
3 10<=$V Hold
0
- No.12
Low (Normal Case)
*$V indicates the value of monitor device.
State 1 Display parts No.11 when M10 is ON.
Display the parts corresponding to parts switching device value when

State 2
the value is between 1 and 9 (1<=$V<=9).
Do not switch parts display when parts switching device value is 10 or

State 3
greater (10<=$V).
State 0
Display parts No. 12 in states other than 1 to 3.
(Normal Case)

*4 Parts switching method 17

State settings are required when other than [Indirect Device] is set for [Detail Settings of Parts].
STATISTICS BAR
The following describes how displayed parts are changed depending on [Detail Settings of Parts] and the state
settings.
GRAPH
Detail settings of State setting
parts type Set Not set
The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state

18
• When trigger is satisfied Set the state if required.
The part set in the state is displayed. The displayed part is changed depending on the monitored
STATISTICS PIE
Indirect Device
• When trigger is not satisfied device value.
The displayed part is changed depending on the value of parts Set the state to change the part except the above condition.
switching device.
GRAPH
Parts No The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state
The part set in the state is displayed.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without state settings.
19
• When trigger is not satisfied It cannot be switched to any other part.
SCATTER GRAPH
Mark Color The part set in [Detail Settings of Parts] is displayed.
The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state

Hold The part set in the state is displayed.
Nothing is displayed without state settings.
The part set at the state is kept display
20
Example: When [Detail Settings of Parts] is set to [Parts No.]
HISTORICAL TREND
Make the following settings.
Part State
GRAPH
[Parts Switching Device]: D10 State 1 State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data] [Range]: 1 <= D10 <= 100 [Range]: 100 < D10
[Detail Settings of Parts]: [Parts No. 1]
(Displayed part)
[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 2 [Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 3
21
PARTS DISPLAY
Part No. 1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3
D10 = 0 D10 = 40 D10 = 150

22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Part set at "Attribute" Part set at State 1 is Part set at State 2 is

is displayed (Part No. 1). displayed (Part No. 2). displayed (Part No. 3).
For details of the state, refer to the following.

 Extended tab
Extended

Layer

Category

17
 Trigger tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Trigger Type
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Ordinary
GRAPH
ON
OFF
Settings Rise For details of each item, refer to the following. 21

PARTS DISPLAY
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

function.
(1) Data Operation
For setting details of data operation, refer to the following
Select this item to enable the bit mask operation.

[Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
Select this item to enable the bit shift operation.

Bit Shift
Left : Left shift
Right : Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

(2) Script
17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
- - x 4)
y 4)
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Device/Style Blink blink 3)



Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Fixed Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
 Style tab
Set the parts move way and the displayed parts.

After selecting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
The setting items varies according to the setting in [Move Way].
Device From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X • Y position storage.
ending point.
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device.
Move Format • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16
Select the movement type.

Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinator points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X • Y position storage.
Move Way
Line *2 : Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).

17
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts
switching device change.
Parts Type
Mark Data*1 The registered part can be checked by clicking on [Parts] button.
18
STATISTICS PIE
After the selection, clicking the [Setting] button displays the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
Image File*1
GRAPH

Movement : Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen. 19
Locus : Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
SCATTER GRAPH
Example:
Display Mode
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
PARTS DISPLAY
Example:

22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Device Device
for Y for Y
Top-left Center
Alignment

point point
Top-left Center
2 4 2 4
1 3 1 3
Top-left Center


Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Parts No. Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
(Set the [Parts No.] when the device is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the device
is ON.)
Mark Color
Type].
Detail Settings of Can specify image file No.
Parts The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
Image File No.
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9
Object Name log.
The object name is also displayed in other than the [Style] tab.

*2 Line
Execute the following operations after making the settings in the [Fixed Parts Movement ] dialog box.
1. Click the start position in the drawing screen.
2. Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.

17
 Extended tab
Set the security level.
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
Extended Security Level When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
20
HISTORICAL TREND
Layer
GRAPH
Category
21
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT

 Trigger tab

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

17
 Script tab
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
PARTS DISPLAY
active 1)
- - x 4) 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
y 4)
Style Blink blink 3)


22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting

for Each Screen)
When [Point] is selected for [Move Way], set the parts move route for the positions where parts are to be displayed.
Up to 30 parts move routes can be set in one screen.
The parts move route can be used for multiple parts movement.
1. Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Parts Move Route] from the menu.
2. The [Parts Move Route] dialog box is displayed. Make the following settings and click the [OK] button.
Item Description
Points Set the number of points of the movement position. (1 to 100)
Select this item to move parts in a line.

When arranging in a line, points proportion set in [Points] will be arranged automatically according to the setting of
starting point and destination.
Example: Points: Set to 5

Arrange in a Line
1 2 3 4 5
Set the start point and destination point

(2 to 4: automatic arrangement)
Object Name
log.
22 - 26 22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

17
3. Click the mark (+) that appears on the screen to arrange the point 1.
Click on the positions as many as the number of set points for arrangement.
STATISTICS BAR
Click
GRAPH
Click
18
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH
4. The point number is displayed at the set position after the setting is completed.
19
SCATTER GRAPH
20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
HINT
Correction of parts move route
21
(1) Change the point position
1. Click to select the parts move route, right click the route and select [Edit Points].
PARTS DISPLAY
2. The route is now in Edit Vertex mode. Drag a point of the selected route to the destination position to
change the point position.
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
Edit vertex mode Drag to change point position
(2) Change the number of points and route No.

Double click the parts move route to display the setting dialog box. Then change the [Points] and [Route No.]
in the corresponding items.
22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen) 22 - 27


The parts movement function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
22.5.1 Parts setting
21.4 Parts Settings
Setting whether to use image files in the memory card for the parts display or parts [Show image files in the memory card at the time
movement of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999]
Using the image files in the memory card as parts for the parts display or parts
movement GS450.b8
(Read device)

17
22.6 Actions
STATISTICS BAR
 Move way of parts (Control with position device)
The following three types of move ways can be selected.
GRAPH
(1) Position
Display parts at the position (dot notation).
Specify the display position using 2 points indicated by the word device values in X/Y axis, respectively. 18
The display position can be changed in dot unit by changing the value of position device.
STATISTICS PIE
2) (200, 16)
1) (30, 90)
GRAPH
3) (130, 170)
19
SCATTER GRAPH
1) 2) 3)
Position device (X coordinate): D100 30 200 130
Position device (Y coordinate): D101 90 16 170
(a) Datum position

A part displayed on the overlap window has the datum position at the upper left corner of the overlap 20
window.
HISTORICAL TREND
Example: Overlap window
GRAPH
Datum position
(origin)
21
In other cases (base screen, superimpose window, etc.), the upper left corner of the displayed base screen
is taken as the datum position.
PARTS DISPLAY
Example: Base screen Example: Set overlay screen, superimpose window, etc.
Datum position Datum position

(origin) (origin)
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
22.6 Actions 22 - 29

(2) Line
Move parts along lines between starting point and destination point that have been set.
Set the start point as minimum value, and the maximum value for the destination position, in order to display the
parts using this method.
<Setting image> <Movement image>
Destination (maximum: 100)

80%
20%
D100: 100
Starting point (minimum: 0) D100: 20

D100: 0
Position device: D100
(3) Point
Display parts at preset display position (point).
Point setting is made by registering a line connecting multiple points (parts move route).
Parts are displayed at the place indicated by the point No. that is the same as the value of position device.
<Setting image> <Movement image>
1 4
3
6
2 5
Parts move route Position device: D100 5 1 2

Point
Up to 30 Parts move routes can be set in one screen. This setting is made for each screen.
The parts move route can be used for moving multiple parts.
Route No. 1------For parts movement A

Parts movement A
Parts movement B
Route No. 2------For parts movement B
Parts movement C
Parts movement D
Route No. 3------For parts movement C, D
HINT
Locus
Movement locus that keeps the locus can be set in each move way.

22.3 Style tab
22 - 30 22.6 Actions

17
 Parts movement example
Execute parts movement display by position device and parts switching device as the following.
STATISTICS BAR
1) [Position device] : D10 2) [Parts switching device] : D15
[Move way] : [Point] [Switching way] : Parts movement
GRAPH
Point1 Point2 Point3 Part No. 50 :
Part No. 100 : 18

Part No. 150 :
STATISTICS PIE
Changes into the parts
GRAPH
Changes into the parts of part No. 150
Move to point2 of part No. 100 Move to point3
19
SCATTER GRAPH
1) [Position device]
1 2 2 3
: D10
2) [Parts switching
50 50 100 150
device] : D15
20
 Setting order of parts movement
HISTORICAL TREND
When setting the object of parts movement, select [Parts Switching] and then, [Move Way].
1. Select the parts switching method on the [Device/Style] tab (For fixed parts, select on the [Style] tab).
GRAPH
The switching method cannot be changed after setting the object of parts movement.
2. Select the parts moving method on the [Device/Style] tab (For fixed parts, select on the [Style] tab).
21
The move method can be changed even after setting the object of parts movement.
PARTS DISPLAY
POINT
When Point is specified as the type for the parts movement
Set [Parts Move Route] before setting the object of parts movement.
22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen) 22
PARTS MOVEMENT
22.6 Actions 22 - 31

 Display method of a BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card

BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.
(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)
In each object setting of the parts movement, specify the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card for
display.

For the storage method, refer to the following.
2. After the display condition of the part is satisfied in the parts movement, the BMP/JPEG file part in the
specified memory card is displayed.
Set the following items in each [Device/Style] tab and [Style] tab (Only for fixed parts) for use.
• Image File Setting
• Image File No. setting
(2) Display method in units of projects
A BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a part number ranging from
9001 to 9999.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part stored in the memory card when a part number ranging from 9001 to 9999 is
specified, make the setting in the following procedure.
(a) When displaying the parts by GT Designer3 settings
2. Select [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] on the
[Parts Setting] dialog box, and then write the setting to the GOT.
3. When the display condition of the parts (Parts No.:9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the parts movement,
the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card are displayed.
22 - 32 22.6 Actions

(b) When displaying parts by using GS450.b8 17
STATISTICS BAR
Part No. When GS450.b8 is ON When GS450.b8 is OFF
The BMP/JEPG file parts in a memory card are The parts registered with GT Designer3 are
9001 to 9999
GRAPH
1. Store the BMP/JPEG files to be displayed as parts in a memory card.
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a memory card 18
STATISTICS PIE
3. When the display condition of the parts (Parts No.:9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the parts movement,
the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card are displayed.
GRAPH
HINT 19
GT Designer3 setting when using GS450.b8
SCATTER GRAPH
Clear [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] for the [Parts Setting]
dialog box.
When the check box is selected, BMP/JPEG files in a memory card are used as parts regardless of the on or off
status of GS450.b8.
(3) Display example (display method in units of projects)

20
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
21
IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the corresponding BMP file part is
PARTS DISPLAY
displayed.
• Word device for parts display: D100
D100 9000 D100 9001 D100 9500 D100 9999
22
When a part No.of 0 or 9000 BMP file part BMP file part BMP file part PARTS MOVEMENT
is specified, no BMP file (IMG0001.BMP) (IMG0500.BMP) (IMG9999.BMP)
part is displayed. is displayed is displayed. is displayed.
22.6 Actions 22 - 33

POINT
(1) When specifying a part number out of the range from 9001 to 9999
Even though the setting for displaying BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card is configured, specifying a part
number out of the range from 9001 to 9999 displays a part registered on GT Designer3.
(2) When switching a part to the same part number of BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card (Only using
GS450.b8)
While the GOT displays a part, whose part number is within the range from 9001 to 9999, registered on GT
Designer3, to switch the part to the same part number of BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card, follow the
procedure as shown below.
2. Specify part No. 0 or 9000 to hide the part currently displayed.
3. Specify the part number of the BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card to be displayed.
(3) Example of turning on GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on
The following shows an example of turning on GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on by using
the status observation function.
Using GS450.b8 comes in handy when the GOT displays a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card after the
GOT is powered on.
1. In the status observation function setting, set the GOT internal device (Always ON signal: GS0.b4) as
a trigger condition so that GS450.b8 stores 1 while GS0.b4 is on.
2. After the GOT is powered on, the status observation function makes GS450.b8 store 1.
Configure the setting on the [Project]
tab in the [Status Observation] dialog
box.
Configure the setting in the first row

of the setting field in the
[Status Observation] dialog box.
(Immediately after the GOT is
powered on, GS450.b8 stores 1.)*1
Set [Observation Cycle] to [Ordinary].
*1 At the GOT startup, the parts used for the parts display may not be switched to
the BMP/JPEG file parts. (Switching the screen switches the parts.)
Consider the above point, and design screens.
22 - 34 22.6 Actions

17
 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
STATISTICS BAR
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
GRAPH
With the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts Without the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
in the memory card parts in the memory card
Parts No.
Parts registered by
GT Designer3
BMP/JPEG file parts in the
memory card
Parts registered by
GT Designer3
BMP/JPEG file parts in the
memory card 18
0 -*1 -*1 -*1
STATISTICS PIE
1 to 8999
9000 -*1
GRAPH
9001 to 9999 *2
10000 to 32767
19
: Displayable : Not displayable - : Hidden
*1 When [Indirect Device] in [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement is selected, the parts are not hidden. (The current
SCATTER GRAPH
display is retained.)
For hiding parts with the word parts movement, refer to the description of [Detail Settings of Parts] for the word parts movement.
*2 The parts cannot be displayed even if they are registered by GT Designer3.
Example) When a part registered with GT Designer3 is registered for part No. 9123
The part registered with GT Designer3 20

The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed. (part No. 9123) is displayed.
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH
With the setting for displaying Without the setting for displaying
the BMP/JPEG file parts in
21
the BMP/JPEG file parts in
the memory card the memory card
PARTS DISPLAY
22
PARTS MOVEMENT
22.6 Actions 22 - 35

22.7 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the parts movement function.

(2) Display position of parts
If parts are set in a display position out of the screen in GT Designer3, those parts are not movement-displayed,
and the previous display is held.
Example: In the case of movement type [Point]
Parts out of the screen will not be displayed.
(3) When parts overlap with other objects

Make the settings so that the part destination position do not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped object may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, set the moving part on a layer different from the other object.
When the "Move way" is "Point"
Display area
The object overlap with

the part destination position.
Part movement (Part No. 1 is displayed.)
Part No.1

(1) The value stored in position device
If the value stored in the position device exceeds the display range (position, out of the range of maximum to
minimum, point No.), parts are not movement-displayed, and the previous display is held.

INDEX
INDEX
[A] Devices for executing device data
Advanced alarm function ................................... 11-18 transfer function ................................................. 26-10
Advanced recipe Devices for executing logging function .............. 24-12
Basic tab ........................................................ 25-21 Devices for executing time action function .......... 29-5
Device tab ...................................................... 25-22
External notification device ............................ 25-43 [E]
Advanced recipe common setting ..................... 25-19 Error codes ...................................................... 11-146
Advanced recipe file .......................................... 25-32 Execution sequence of scripts ................. 30-25,30-87
Advanced recipe file conversion........................ 25-34
Advanced recipe function .................................. 25-19 [F]
Advanced recipe list .......................................... 25-20
Alarm ................................................................... 11-1 Figures................................................................... 1-1
Alarm classification according to level Setting lamp attribute ........................... 1-3,1-7,1-16
or group.......................................................... 11-80 Using BMP files................................................ 1-20
Alarm ID ................................... 11-20,11-25,11-247 Using DXF files ................................................ 1-25
Comment No. offset ..................................... 11-208 Using IGES files ............................................... 1-28
Detail No. Offset........................................... 11-207 Using JPEG files .............................................. 1-30
Hierarchical alarm .......................................... 11-77
Switching alarm hierarchies ............... 11-84,11-242 [G]
Touch switch for displaying user alarm........ 11-211 Graphic characters ................................................ 4-1
Touch switches for advanced system Setting the font and size..................................... 4-3
alarm display................................................ 11-150 Texts supported the GOT................................... 4-4
Touch switches for advanced user
alarm display.................................................. 11-92 [H]
Touch switches for alarm history display ..... 11-190
Hard copy function............................................... 40-1
Alarm function.................................................... 11-14
Hard Copy ........................................................ 40-2
Alarm history display ......................................... 11-16
ASCII display/ASCII input...................................... 6-1 Historical data list display ...................................... 8-1
User ID............................................................. 6-12 Historical data list display setting ..................... 8-13
Touch switches for historical data list
display operation .............................................. 8-18
[B]
Historical trend graph........................................... 20-1
Bar graph............................................................. 16-1 Historical trend graph display mode setting ... 20-20
Bar graph setting............................................ 16-11 Historical trend graph setting ......................... 20-16
Barcode function.................................................. 31-1 Time specification jump function .................... 20-14
Bar Code.......................................................... 31-2 Touch switches for historical trend graph
Header/terminator ............................................ 31-7 operation ........................................................ 20-23
Barcode reader detail settings............................. 31-4
Buffering area .................................................. 11-110
[L]
[C] Lamp...................................................................... 3-1
Setting a lamp attribute for a figure .................... 3-1
Comment display................................................. 10-1 Using a part as a lamp figure ........................... 3-25
Comment displayed ......................................... 10-1 Level .................................................................... 12-1
Overlaying with level display.......................... 10-30 Level setting ................................................... 12-11
Line graph............................................................ 14-1
[D] Line graph setting........................................... 14-13
Data list.................................................................. 7-1 Logging file convert............................................ 24-26
Methods of setting data list .............................. 7-14 Logging function .................................................. 24-1
Date display/Time display...................................... 9-1 Basic tab .......................................................... 24-3
Clock data .......................................................... 9-1 Date and time settings ..................................... 24-9
Device data transfer function............................... 26-1 Device tab ........................................................ 24-5
Basic tab .......................................................... 26-3 File save tab..................................................... 24-7
Device tab ........................................................ 26-4 Logging List ......................................................... 24-2
Offset device .................................................... 26-6 Logging mode .................................................... 24-12
Device data transfer list ....................................... 26-2
Index-1
[M] Error code list ............................................... 30-118

Multimedia function.............................................. 36-1 Offset specification ......................................... 30-47
Error messages.............................................. 36-33 Option tab....................................................... 30-20
File Server Setting tab...................................... 36-8 Project tab ...................................................... 30-10
Playback/External notification tab .................... 36-6 Screen tab ...................................................... 30-17
Recording setting tab ....................................... 36-3 Script symbol.................................................. 30-18
Video input signal or display size ........... 36-5,36-11 Temporary device area .................................. 30-45
[N] [R]
Numerical display/numerical input ......................... 5-1 Recipe file ............................................................ 25-1
Executing the range check during Recipe function .................................................. 25-11
numerical value input ....................................... 5-35 Recipe ............................................................ 25-12
User ID ............................................................. 5-24 Recipe List ..................................................... 25-11
Record attribute ................................................. 25-25
Recording video image ...................................... 36-13
[O] Remote personal computer operation function .... 33-1
Object internal variables ........................ 30-86,30-101 Remote personal computer operation
Object properties ......................... 30-86,30-91,30-102 (Ethernet) ......................................................... 33-8
Object script....................................................... 30-72 Remote personal computer operation
Argument........................................................ 30-98 function driver................................................... 33-3
Display object script ....................................... 30-75 Remote personal computer operation (Serial)
Error code ........................................ 30-115,30-120 ......................................................................... 33-1
Input object script ........................................... 30-74 Terminal server .............................................. 33-15
Object script symbol....................................... 30-80 Touch status communication control signal
Switch object script ........................................ 30-76 ................................................................. 33-3,33-5
Operation log file ................................................. 23-6 VNC(R) server................................................ 33-13
Operation log file conversion ............................. 23-15 Report function .................................................... 39-1
Operation log function ......................................... 23-3 Basic tab .......................................................... 39-2
Basic tab .......................................................... 23-3
Data collection tab............................................ 39-5
File Convert tab................................................ 23-5
Printing tab ....................................................... 39-3
Log Target tab.................................................. 23-4
RFID detail settings ............................................. 32-4
Operation panel ................................................... 37-2 RFID function ....................................................... 32-1
Action tab ......................................................... 37-3 Header/terminator ............................................ 32-9
Trigger tab........................................................ 37-5 Protocol .......................................................... 32-11
Operation panel function/external I/O function .... 37-1 RFID ................................................................. 32-2
Settings ............................................................ 32-2
[P] RGB display function ........................................... 38-1
Panelmeter .......................................................... 13-1 Displaying the RGB screen .............................. 38-4
Panelmeter setting ......................................... 13-11 Video/RGB input .............................................. 38-2
Parts display ........................................................ 21-1
Applicable parts types ...................................... 21-2 [S]
Display method in units of objects.................. 21-26
Scatter graph ....................................................... 19-1
Display method in units of projects ................ 21-27
Scatter graph setting ...................................... 19-13
Parts No. ........................................................ 21-30
Screen save......................................................... 38-6
Parts movement .................................................. 22-1 Script editor.............................................. 30-13,30-77
Applicable parts types ...................................... 22-2 Script function ...................................................... 30-1
Display method in units of objects.................. 22-32 Object script ..................................................... 30-4
Display method in units of projects ................ 22-32 Project script .................................................... 30-3
Parts No. ........................................................ 22-35 Screen script .................................................... 30-3
Parts switching method .................................... 22-1 Sound file setting ................................................. 41-2
Playing video file................................................ 36-31 Sound Files.......................................................... 41-1
Print ..................................................................... 39-8 Sound output function .......................................... 41-1
Bit comment print ........................................... 39-12 Sound recorder .................................................... 41-3
Numerical print ............................................... 39-10 Statistics bar graph .............................................. 17-1
Text .................................................................. 39-9 Statistics bar graph setting ............................. 17-10
Word comment print....................................... 39-13 Statistics pie graph .............................................. 18-1
Print format ........................................................ 39-18 Statistics pie graph setting ............................. 18-10
Project script/Screen script ................................ 30-10 Status observation function ................................. 27-1
Argument........................................................ 30-38 Action tab ......................................................... 27-4
Data type conversion function........................ 30-52 Trigger tab ........................................................ 27-3
Index-2
[T]
Time action function ............................................ 29-1
Action tab ......................................................... 29-4
Time tab ........................................................... 29-3
Time action list..................................................... 29-2
INDEX
Touch switch.......................................................... 2-1
Action of touch switch ...................................... 2-73
Back (previous/history) .................................... 2-40
Key codes multiple setting ....................... 2-11,2-75
Precautions when superimposing touch
switches ........................................................... 2-76
Simultaneous Press (Prohibition)..................... 2-26
Trend graph ......................................................... 15-1
Trend graph setting........................................ 15-12
[U]
User alarm display
Offset for datailed No. .................................. 11-207
Store memory .............................................. 11-209
[V]
Video display function.......................................... 35-1
Displaying a video window............................... 35-6
Output format or display size ................. 35-8,35-19
Video/RGB input .............................................. 35-2
Index-3
Index-4
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080867ENG-A First printing: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.01B
Nov., 2009 SH(NA)-080867ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.05F

• Script function with system labels supported
Jan., 2010 SH(NA)-080867ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.10L

• Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) supported
• One-touch ladder jump function for the ladder editor with special function switches supported
• Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with special function switches supported
• Logging a forced logout record of a login user with the operation log function supported
• For the GT10, the status observation function with the word range specification supported
• Remote personal computer operation (Serial) with a USB mouse supported
• Deleting GOT alarm lists or alarms with the multimedia interaction tool supported
• Connection with LCPUs supported
• MELSEC-L troubleshooting function for the special function switch supported
May, 2010 SH(NA)-080867ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.14Q

• GOT multi-drop connection for the GT16 and GT 15 supported
• Character display in smaller size for the user alarm display and alarm history display enabled
• OS installation via Ethernet supported
• Holding project data and special data during the OS installation supported
Jun, 2010 SH(NA)-080867ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.17T

• GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, and GT1662-VN supported
• Connection with C Controller modules supported
• Connection with MELSEC-WS series supported
• Connection with IAI robot controllers supported
• Connection with SICK safety controllers supported
• Connection with PANASONIC servo amplifiers supported
• Connection with a serial printer supported
• Switching images of shapes according to the status whether or not a touch switch is touched
enabled
• Motion SFC monitor and log viewer function for special function switch supported
• Lamp area supported
• Data input by barcode reader or RFID for numerical input or ASCII input enabled
• Retaining data in the SRAM user area under power failure for the advanced user alarm,
advanced system alarm, and logging function enabled
• Editing a device comment for the advanced recipe function enabled
• Data browser supported
• Importing and exporting the setting of default values for objects enabled
• Standard key window for ASCII characters supported
• CF card formatting with FAT32 format type enabled
• Intensity adjustment of backlight by the GOT special register (GS) enabled
REVISIONS - 1

Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080867ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.19V

• Opening a project without a workspace management file and a project management file
supported
• Overwriting compressed files supported
• GB code and KS code for the ASCII display and the ASCII input supported
• GB code and KS code of the ASCII display and the ASCII input for the operation log function
supported
• Switching between a lamp and a switch supported
• Selecting whether to execute the system label update/check supported
• Channel setting of the MODBUS communication control function supported
• Notifying a network number and a station number by the GS devices with the Ethernet
connection supported
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080867ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.23Z

• Connection with the IAI ROBO CYLINDER supported
• Connection with the TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv supported
• Connection with the YAMATAKE DMC50 supported
• Size range of the TrueType numerical font changed
• Type of the device displayed on an object changed
• Checking the operations of objects and window screens in the preview window supported
• System language switching with the system language switching device supported
• Disabling the utility call key setting in the GOT setup enabled
• Authorization setting of the SoftGOT-GOT link function in the GOT setup supported
• Changing settings of selected multiple objects in the property sheet supported
• Batch change of colors in the data browser supported
• Notifying a network number and a station number by using the GS devices with the Ethernet
connection supported
• The GT11 and the GT10 support the transparent setting of an image data.
• The special function switch supports displaying screens of the utility.
• Displaying the same alarms jointly in one line for the advanced alarm display enabled
• Fixing the display position of the scrolling alarm display enabled
• Display mode for the trend graph supported
• Single touch operation on the historical trend graph supported
• Saving an operation log at the system language switching supported
• Trigger action function supported
• The GT11 and the GT10 support storing the time action setting as a file.
• [Continuous] and [Separate] of the external control device setting for the time action setting
added
• The script function supports the file line read function for the file operation function.
• The script function supports the string operation function.
• Acquiring the touch position color for the RGB display function enabled
• GT16 Handy GOT supported
REVISIONS - 2

Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080867ENG-H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.28E

• GT1655-V supported
• [GT165*-V(640×480)] for the GOT type added
• Historical data list display supported
• The key code supports the operation of the historical data list display.
• With the data check, the historical data list display devices are checked.
• File transfer function (FTP client) supported
• With the GS devices, the control or the status notification of the file transfer function (FTP client)
supported
• GT Designer3 Help supported
• GT SoftGOT1000 supports the barcode function and the RFID function.
• Ethernet connection with SIEMENS PLCs supported
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080867ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.31H

• GT Works3 Version1 supports the 64-bit version of Windows® 7.
• The GOT operator management information conversion tool supports the 64-bit version of
Windows® 7.
• Document Converter supports the 64-bit version of Windows® 7.
• For the GT10, the range of the GOT internal devices (GB and GD) is extended.
• The input range displayed on the key window is changed to the input range that can be entered.
• ON shape display on the key window supported
• Displaying the input comment information in the status bar and the [Edit Comment] dialog box
supported
• Template supported
• The data browser supports searching for common settings and templates.
• The data browser supports copying and pasting multiple cells.
• Utility operation with the USB mouse or keyboard supported
• Multilingualization of special data supported
• Exporting and importing the communication parameters for the GT01-RS4-M supported
• The setting of [Use the system information of Multidrop] supported
• The special function switch supports displaying the motion program (SV43) edit screen.
• The advanced user alarm display and the advanced system alarm display support the display
position time specification jump.
• The comment group setting for the user alarms supported
• The number of bars for a bar graph is extended.
• The multimedia function supports displaying a video image on a user-created screen.
• The RGB display function supports the extended control.
• The device ranges for the MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, and CRnD-700 are extended.
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection supported
• Connection with PANASONIC servo amplifiers (MINAS A5) supported
• Connection with YOKOGAWA temperature controllers (UTAdvanced) supported
Converting an operator management information file with a command line supported
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080867ENG-J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.37P

• GT14 supported
• GT12 added
• The file transfer function (FTP client) supports notifying the numbers of transfer target files and
transfer completion files by using the GS devices.
• Stopping background processing during the backup/restore function execution by using the GS
device supported
• VNC® server function supported
REVISIONS - 3

Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080867ENG-K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.40S

• Canceling the screen saver when screens are switched supported
• For the GT14, GT11, GT105 , and GT104 , selecting the size of the key window for
decimal/hexadecimal values supported
• Displaying the guidelines (auxiliary lines) on the boundary between the screen display area and
the temporary area supported
• Creating and editing a template supported
• The templates for the XGA and QVGA GOTs are added to the system library.
• 5V power supply setting supported
• Setting enabled when the touch switch does not operate supported
• Data addition and data subtraction settings of the word switch supported
• Specifying the logging ID of the historical trend graph by using devices supported
• The numbers of settable script symbols and object script symbols are increased.
• The device range for MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS,MELDAS C6* is expanded.
• Notifying the GOT IP address by using GS devices supported
• Disconnecting/connecting a station on the network by using the GS devices supported
Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080867ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.45X

• The project security supports the security for each screen.
• Specifying the CPU No. at the backup supported
• The screen switching supports specifying the screen number of a screen displayed at the GOT
startup and displaying a screen with the screen number incremented by one.
• Library data (AV, crystal, soft, retro, real, metal, and clock) with templates are added to the
system library.
Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080867ENG-M Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.54G

• The company name of Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd. is changed to Panasonic
Corporation.
• The company name of Yamatake Corporation is changed to Azbil Corporation.
• The numbers of settable advanced user alarm displays and advanced system alarm displays
are changed from 1 to 8.
• Some menu names and function names are partially changed.
• Generating the route information for MELSOFT Navigator supported
• MELSERVO J4- A supported
• The GT14 supports the printer output.
• The GT10 supports the hard copy function.
• The GT14 supports iQ Works.
Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080867ENG-N Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.58L

• The GT14 supports the operator authentication.
• The offset setting is not available for the special function switch, the parts display (fixed parts),
and the parts movement (fixed parts).
• Setting the communication timeout time for the file transfer function (FTP client) by using the
GS device supported
• Retaining the state of the historical trend graph displayed before screen switching by using the
GS device supported
• The device ranges for [MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-QnA/Q/
QS, MELDAS C6*], [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion], and [MELSEC-L] are expanded.
REVISIONS - 4

Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080867ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.63R

• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
• The device range for [MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] is expanded.
• Shortcut keys added
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be
held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 5

REVISIONS - 6

WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.

GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
This product uses Arphic Mobile Font.

VSFlexGrid8 LEADTOOLS(r) DLL for Win32
(c)ComponentOne LLC. All rights reserved Copyright(c) 1991-2003 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
SH(NA)-080867ENG-O-1/2


GT Designer3 Version1
MODEL SW1-GTD3-R(DRAW2)-E
MODEL 1D7MC1
CODE
SH(NA)-080867ENG-O 1/2(1211)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in Japan, November 2012.
GT Designer3
Version1
SW1DNC-GTWK3-E

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the
product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]
WARNING
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device value, a current or set
timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the relevant manual to fully understand the
operating procedures.
When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
A-1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE
(1) Required memory of a personal computer and the free capacity of the hard disk
For required memory and the free capacity of the hard disk, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.1 Operating environment
(2) Error messages displayed while starting and editing
"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to secure
at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.
(3) GT Designer3 and the GOT display
(a) Precautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line and others) in bold
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer.
However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line, line freeform, or polygon is displayed differently between
GT Designer3 On GOT
(c) Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different between
(d) Drawing of different type lines
The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
• The display position of the scale value displayed in the graph is different between GT Designer3 and the
GOT.
• Even if the display-start-line of a comment is set, the comment is displayed from the first line on GT
Designer3.
(f) Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the filled-paint
may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200% Display magnification: 100%
A-2
(4) Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system
environment (256 colors 2 colors)
• The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
• The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a red rectangle-figure is changed to [2(mono)], the red color remains.
• The colors of the image data (BMP file or JPEG file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is
closed and that image data is double-clicked.
(5) When device type is changed
Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device. The device flag
may be represented as "??", depending on the settings.
Example: D0.b0 D0D0.b5 ??
(6) OS setting
Set the font size to [Normal] when setting OS (Windows) screens.
If the font size is set to other than [Normal], the GT Designer3 dialog box and others cannot be displayed
correctly.
A-3
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ............................................................................................A - 2
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 4
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 4
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 15
QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 17
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 19
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 24
FIGURES
1. FIGURES
1.1 Line .................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2
1.2 Line Freeform .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 4
1.3 Rectangle......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
1.4 Polygon ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 8
1.5 Circle................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 9
1.6 Arc ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10
1.7 Sector ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 12
1.8 Scale .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 13
1.9 Piping ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14
1.10 Paint............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.11 Import Figure File........................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.1 Importing figure files ........................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data............................................................................................ 1 - 31
1.12 Capture .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 32
1.12.1 Capturing displays .............................................................................................................. 1 - 32
TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

2. TOUCH SWITCH
2.1 Types of Touch Switches................................................................................................................. 2 - 1
2.2 Setting Switch .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 4
2.3 Setting Bit Switch ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 30
A-4
2.4 Setting Word Switch ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 34

2.5 Setting Go To Screen Switch......................................................................................................... 2 - 37
2.6 Setting Change Station No. Switch................................................................................................ 2 - 47
2.7 Setting Special Function Switch .................................................................................................... 2 - 53
2.8 Setting Key Window Display Switch .............................................................................................. 2 - 66
2.9 Setting Key Code Switch ............................................................................................................... 2 - 69
2.10.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 2 - 71
2.10.5 Sound file setting ................................................................................................................ 2 - 72
2.11 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 2 - 73
3. LAMP
3.1 Setting Bit Lamp .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 2
3.2 Setting Word Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 11
3.3 Setting Lamp Area ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.4.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 3 - 24
3.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 3 - 25
NUMBERS, CHARACTERS
4.1 Text.................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 1
4.2 Logo Text......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

5.1 Setting Numerical Display................................................................................................................ 5 - 3
5.2 Setting Numerical Input ................................................................................................................. 5 - 14
5.3.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 5 - 30
5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 33

6.1 Setting ASCII Display ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.2 Setting ASCII Input .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.3.1 GOT type setting ................................................................................................................ 6 - 17
A-5

6.4 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.5.1 Kana-kanji conversion function........................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 34
7. DATA LIST
7.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.2.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
7.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
7.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 15

8.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 2
8.2.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 8 - 13
8.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 8 - 13
8.3.1 Relationships with the logging function............................................................................... 8 - 13
8.3.2 Historical data list display setting........................................................................................ 8 - 14
8.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 19

9.1 Setting Date Display ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
9.2 Setting Time Display ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
9.3.1 GOT type setting................................................................................................................. 9 - 10
9.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
10. COMMENT DISPLAY

10.1 Setting Bit Comment ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.2 Setting Word Comment ............................................................................................................... 10 - 14
10.3 Setting Simple Comment ............................................................................................................. 10 - 28
10.4.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 10 - 29
10.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 10 - 30
ALARM
11. ALARM
11.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms ...................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.1.1 Alarm function................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.1.2 Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................. 11 - 18
11.2 Advanced Alarm Common ........................................................................................................... 11 - 23
11.3 Advanced User Alarm Display ..................................................................................................... 11 - 24
A-6
11.3.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................... 11 - 25

11.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation ........................................................................ 11 - 45
11.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display................................................................................ 11 - 57
11.3.5 Useful operations and functions ....................................................................................... 11 - 77
11.3.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 100
11.4 Advanced System Alarm Display............................................................................................... 11 - 108
11.4.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................. 11 - 109
11.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings ................................................................ 11 - 125
11.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting ......................................................................... 11 - 129
11.4.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 156
11.5 Alarm History Display ................................................................................................................ 11 - 162
11.5.1 Alarm history settings ..................................................................................................... 11 - 164
11.5.2 Alarm history display setting ........................................................................................... 11 - 176
11.5.4 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 183
11.5.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 193
11.6 User Alarm Display .................................................................................................................... 11 - 195
11.6.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 196
11.6.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 204
11.6.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 214
11.7 System Alarm Display................................................................................................................ 11 - 216
11.7.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 217
11.7.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 220
11.7.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 221
11.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display ................................................................................................ 11 - 222
11.8.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................. 11 - 223
11.8.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 227
11.8.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 249
11.9 Scrolling Alarm Display.............................................................................................................. 11 - 255
11.9.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 11 - 256
11.9.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 11 - 260
11.9.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 11 - 262
GRAPH, METER
12. LEVEL
12.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
12.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 12 - 11
A-7
12.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 13
13. PANELMETER
13.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
13.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 13 - 12
14. LINE GRAPH

14.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 2
14.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 14 - 13
14.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 13
14.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 14 - 14
15. TREND GRAPH

15.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
15.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 15 - 12
15.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 12
15.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 15
16. BAR GRAPH

16.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 1
16.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 16 - 11
16.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 11
16.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 16 - 12

17.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 1
17.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 17 - 10
17.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 10
17.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 17 - 11

18.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 1
18.2.1 GOT type setting............................................................................................................... 18 - 10
18.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 10
18.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 11
A-8
19. SCATTER GRAPH

19.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 2
19.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 19 - 13
19.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 13
19.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 19 - 17

20.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 2
20.2.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 20 - 16
20.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 16
20.3.1 Relationships with logging function .................................................................................. 20 - 16
20.3.2 Historical trend graph setting ............................................................................................ 20 - 17
20.4 Useful Operations/Functions ....................................................................................................... 20 - 19
20.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 20 - 25
PARTS
21. PARTS DISPLAY
21.1 Bit Parts Settigs ............................................................................................................................. 21 - 3
21.4 Parts Settings .............................................................................................................................. 21 - 24
21.5.1 GOT type setting .............................................................................................................. 21 - 25
21.5.2 Parts setting...................................................................................................................... 21 - 25
21.6 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 21 - 26
21.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 21 - 31
22. PARTS MOVEMENT

22.1 Bit Parts Settings ........................................................................................................................... 22 - 3
22.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)............................................... 22 - 26
22.5.1 Parts setting...................................................................................................................... 22 - 28
22.6 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 22 - 29
22.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 36
A-9

DATA COLLECTION
23.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 3
23.2 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 23 - 6
23.2.1 Saving and managing recorded data.................................................................................. 23 - 6
23.2.2 Display and process ........................................................................................................... 23 - 7
23.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file.................................................................................... 23 - 15
23.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 23 - 16

24.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 24 - 2
24.1.1 Logging list.......................................................................................................................... 24 - 2
24.1.2 Logging setting ................................................................................................................... 24 - 3
24.2 Control of logging settings ........................................................................................................... 24 - 10
24.4 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 24 - 12
24.4.1 File save mode ................................................................................................................. 24 - 17
24.4.2 Buffer historical mode ....................................................................................................... 24 - 20
24.4.3 Display and process ......................................................................................................... 24 - 22
24.4.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file................................................................................. 24 - 25
24.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 24 - 27
RECIPE
25. RECIPE
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function ........................................ 25 - 5
25.2 Recipe Function ........................................................................................................................... 25 - 11
25.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 25 - 11
25.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 25 - 18
25.3 Advanced Recipe Function .......................................................................................................... 25 - 19
25.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 25 - 19
25.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting ................................................................................... 25 - 25
25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value.................................................................................... 25 - 28
25.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file............................................................. 25 - 32
25.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error................................ 25 - 43
25.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 25 - 46
TRIGGER ACTION
26.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 2
26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting ................................................................................ 26 - 7
A - 10

26.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 10
26.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 26 - 12

27.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 27 - 2
27.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 27 - 7

28.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 28 - 2
28.2 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 28 - 4

29.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 29 - 2
29.2 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 29 - 5
29.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 29 - 8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
30.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 30 - 1
30.1.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 30 - 1
30.1.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 30 - 5
30.2 Project Script, Screen Script........................................................................................................ 30 - 10
30.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 30 - 10
30.2.6 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 30 - 36
30.2.7 Program examples ........................................................................................................... 30 - 53
30.2.8 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 30 - 63
30.2.9 Precautions for using bmov .............................................................................................. 30 - 69
30.3 Object Script ................................................................................................................................ 30 - 72
30.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 30 - 73
30.3.6 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................. 30 - 101
30.3.7 Program examples ......................................................................................................... 30 - 102
30.3.8 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 30 - 107
30.4 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 30 - 110
30.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger .......................................... 30 - 110
30.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check ........................................................................ 30 - 114
30.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................. 30 - 117
A - 11
30.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script..................................................................................... 30 - 123
PERIPHERALS
31.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 31 - 2
31.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 31 - 6
31.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 31 - 11
32. RFID FUNCTION

32.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 32 - 2
32.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 32 - 7
32.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 32 - 19
33. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION FUNCTION

33.1 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Serial) ............................................................................. 33 - 1
33.1.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 33 - 2
33.1.2 Relevant Settings................................................................................................................ 33 - 5
33.1.3 Actions ................................................................................................................................ 33 - 5
33.1.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 33 - 7
33.2 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Ethernet) ........................................................................ 33 - 8
33.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 33 - 10
33.2.2 Actions .............................................................................................................................. 33 - 18
33.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 33 - 19

34.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 34 - 3
34.1.1 GOT setting ........................................................................................................................ 34 - 4
34.1.2 Personal computer setting .................................................................................................. 34 - 5
34.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 34 - 8
34.3.1 Remote screen ................................................................................................................... 34 - 8
34.3.2 Authorization control ......................................................................................................... 34 - 10
34.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 34 - 12
35. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

35.1 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 35 - 2
35.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 35 - 6
A - 12
35.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 35 - 18

36.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 3
36.2 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 11
36.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool.......................................................................................................... 36 - 23
36.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 36 - 35
37. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

37.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 37 - 2
37.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 37 - 6
37.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 37 - 8

38.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 38 - 2
38.3 Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 38 - 4
38.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 38 - 9
39. REPORT FUNCTION

39.1 Report screen creation (screen property) ...................................................................................... 39 - 2
39.2 Setting common to each report (report setting) ............................................................................. 39 - 6
39.3 Print layout setting ......................................................................................................................... 39 - 8
39.4.1 GOT environment settings (System information) ............................................................. 39 - 16
39.5 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 39 - 17
39.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 39 - 20
40. HARD COPY FUNCTION

40.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 40 - 2
40.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 40 - 5

41.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 41 - 1
41.3 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 41 - 2
A - 13
APPENDICES
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File .............................................................................App - 1
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board................................................................................App - 2
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT .................................................App - 3
Appendix4 Type of Data That Can Be Saved from the GOT to the Memory Card ................................App - 4
INDEX
REVISIONS
WARRANTY
A - 14
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
 Connection manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080868ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC2)
SH-080869ENG
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080860ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA9)
A - 15
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
(09R821)
 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D44801
(09R823)
 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D17501
(09R815)
JY997D20101
(09R817)
 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 16
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for
Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function) GT Works3
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 17
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

Operating the utility
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 18
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GOT1000 GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,
GT105
GT104
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 19

GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
 Communication unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
A - 20
 Option
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
Protective Sheet GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11
GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 21
 Software
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA
GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller
GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2
MT Works2
(SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)
NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 22
 Others
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
MODBUS/RTU
communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 23
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The following symbols are used in this manual.

are applicable.
: Applicable
: Not applicable
[ ] : Shows the setting item displayed on

the software screen or the GOT screen.
required for operation.
useful for operation.
Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual,

or others of relevant information.
(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1
(Fundamentals)
(Functions): GT Designer3 Version1
(Functions)
Shows the operation steps.

Operate the steps from the step 1.

are applicable.
Black: Applicable
Gray: Not applicable
The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
A - 24
DATA COLLECTION


23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
Operations performed on the GOT can be saved to a memory card as the operation history.
If a trouble occurs at the production site, the operation history can be used to locate the cause of the trouble.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The saved history can be confirmed by the operation indicated below.
23.2.2 Display and process
• Displaying the operation history using the GOT utility 25
• Saving the operation history in a CSV file or Unicode text file and displaying it on a personal computer
PRODUCTION LINE
RECIPE
LINE A 558
Switching the screen to Base screen 10
LINE B 197
26
Date Screen Details Before After
switching switching
10:40 --- Switching --- Base
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
the screen screen 10
FUNCTION
Change Target
LINE A 600
LINE B 300 Changing the value by entering numerical value
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Change Target
LINE A 700
Set the changed value
LINE B 300
28
TRIGGER ACTION
switching switching
FUNCTION
10:45 Base Entering 600 700
Change Target
screen 10 numeric value
LINE A 700
LINE B 300 Switching the screen to Base screen 20
29
switching switching
TIME ACTION

FUNCTION

10:45 Base Entering 600 700
PRODUCTION LINE screen 10 numeric value
LINE A 563
LINE B 199
10:50 --- Switching
the screen
--- Base
screen 20
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
23 - 1

 Items that can be recorded by the operation log function

The operation log function can record the items indicated below.
Item Recording timing
Operation log is recorded at the timing when the GOT is started up. (The log of GOT startup is always recorded.)
GOT startup
Operation log is not recorded for the restart of GOT by reset operation.
Operation log is recorded when the screen is switched to any of the following.
• Monitor screen (project data)
•Utility
Application switching • Logging information, advanced recipe information and operation log information of the utility
• Monitor functions such as system monitor and ladder monitor, Backup/restore
Operation log is recorded when an OS is installed or the project data is downloaded.
Operation log is recorded when [Adjust] is executed on the GOT.

Clock data changing
Operation log is recorded when the clock of the GOT is set by the utility.
System language switching Operation log is recorded when the language used for displaying the system message is switched by the utility.
Displaying system language After system language switching, the applied system language is displayed.
Operator authentication Operation log is recorded when logging in or logging out of the GOT.
Operation log is recorded when the security level is changed with the security level authentication selected.
Password Authentication
(Changing the password and/or security level device)
Screen switching Operation log is recorded when the base screen is switched or a window screen is displayed.
Station No. switching Operation log is recorded when the station No. is switched.
Language switching Operation log is recorded when the language (language switching device) is switched.
Operation log is recorded at the timing when a touch switch is touched.

Touch (Operation log is not recorded for the key code switch and key window display switch.)
switch When auto repeat setting is made, operation log is recorded immediately before and after
completion of operation.
Operation log is recorded at the timing when a numerical input is executed.

Numerical
Operation log is recorded at the timing when a value is written to a write device.
input
Object Operation log is recorded at the timing when the write check device turns ON.
ASCII input Operation log is recorded at the timing when an ASCII input is executed.
Alarm Operation log is recorded when an alarm or all alarms are deleted.
history Operation log is recorded when an alarm is reset.
Advanced Operation log is recorded when an alarm or all alarms are deleted.
alarm
display Operation log is recorded when an alarm is reset.
Operation log is recorded at the timing when an operation panel key is touched.
(Operation log is not recorded for the key code switch and key window display switch.)
Operation panel
When the auto repeat is set, operation log is recorded immediately before the operation and after the completion
of the operation.
Object script Operation log is recorded when an object script operates.
If an operation log could not be recorded due to some reason (such as an access failure to a CF card or
Log discard information
insufficient free space), this operation log is recorded when the recording of the operation log is enabled.
23 - 2

23
23.1 Settings
OPERATION LOG
1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Operation Log] from the menu to display the [Environmental
FUNCTION
2. Select [Collect operation logs] and set the following items.
24
 Operation log
(1) Basic tab
Set items such as save location, collection start time, or saving period.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Select the save destination drive name.

27
Set the name of the folder where a file is saved.
Folder Name Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT
OBSERVATION
The default folder name is set at [Project Folder] of the [GOT Type Setting]dialog box
displayed by selecting [Common] from the menu.
FUNCTION
Save to
STATUS
Set the name of a file to be saved.
File Name Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT
Default file name is OPELOG.
Date and sub-number are automatically appended to a file name.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
Select the switching mode for the save destination file of an operation log.
When selecting [Weekly], select [Day] to specify the day of the week to start the collection.
After selecting, set the following.
FUNCTION
Log File Switching Switching Time Set the collection start time for the operation log.
Mode
Set the operation log file keeping period.
Log File Save
29
• When selecting [Daily], set the number of days (7 to 100).
Period*1 • When selecting [Weekly], set the number of weeks (4 to 53).
Files having been stored exceeding the keeping period are deleted.
Specify the total log Set the total size of the operation log files to be stored in a CF card (10 to 256).
TIME ACTION
file size*1 If the size of operation log files stored in a CF card exceeds the set value, the oldest operation log file is deleted.
FUNCTION
Select the processing to be taken when the size of free space in a CF card is insufficient.
Behavior when Delete an existing

memory card runs Log and continue to Continuously collects the operation log by deleting the oldest log file.
out of space collect*1 30
Stop to collect Ends collection of the operation log.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Notify the operation

Set the device to notify the operation log collecting status.
log status*2

*1 When operating with the utility (file copy, file rename, file move), log files are not automatically deleted.
*2 This function notifies the specified device of the status of the operation log function in bit units.
Bit number Description
Turns ON if operation logs cannot be collected.

b0
This automatically turns OFF when collecting of operation logs is enabled.
b1 to b7 Must not be used.
Turns ON when operation log file is being converted from binary file to CSV/Unicode text file.
b8
Turns OFF automatically when the conversion terminates.
Turns ON when operation log file is being converted with Log File Auto Convert.
b9
Turns OFF automatically when the conversion terminates.
b10 to b15 Must not be used.
(2) Log Target tab

The target items for recording the operation log are selected.
Function list Displays the list of functions for which operation logs are recorded.
Operation Log Target list Displays the target items of the operation log.
Specifies the target items for the operation log to be recorded.

Select an item from [Function list]. Click this button to move the selected item to [Operation Log
Target list].
Cancels the items selected for the operation log to be recorded.

Select an item from [Operation Log Target list]. Click this button to move the selected item to
[Function list].
Click this button to move all items in [Function list] to [Operation Log Target list].
Click this button to move all items in [Operation Log Target list] to [Function list].
Description Displays the explanation for the selected item.

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
When recording the operation log for objects
FUNCTION
Select [Object] in function list to record the operation logs of all objects used for one project.
To record only the specific operation logs, select [Operation Log Target] in each object setting (without selecting
[Object]).
For objects whose operation logs can be recorded, refer to the following. 24
FUNCTION
(3) File Convert tab
LOGGING
Make setting to control operation log file conversion with a device.
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Convert a log file
into Unicode Text/ Select this item to convert an operation log file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.
OBSERVATION
CSV
FUNCTION
Specify File
STATUS
Set the trigger device for file conversion.
Convert Trigger
Select this item to automatically convert a binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file
when the operation log file recording ends (at the timing when the next operation log file is
created).
28
File 1 File 2
TRIGGER ACTION
File Conversion
Operation log file (G1O)
Timing Automatically
FUNCTION
convert log files Converted
automatically
Unicode text file/CSV file

Converted automatically to Unicode
text file/CSV file at the timing when
new operation log file is created. 29
Conversion Format Select the file format after conversion ([Unicode text] or [CSV]).
Select the location where the converted file is saved.

TIME ACTION
Save To
To change the location, select [Change], and then set [Drive Name] and [Folder Name] of the location.
FUNCTION
Set system language used for file conversion.
System
File Conversion
Language
Language
Switching
Select this item to convert a file in system language displayed on the GOT. 30
Interlock
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Select this item to convert a file in specified language.

Fixed
After the selection, specify the language.

23.2 Actions
23.2.1 Saving and managing recorded data
 Saving the operation log

The data recorded by the operation log function is created in drive A (standard CF card) or drive B (extended memory
card) as a binary file (*.G1O).
One log file has the capacity to record up to 65500 operations.
If the number of operations exceeds 65500 times, a new operation log file is created. (File names of operation log
files include sub-numbers.)
PRODUCTION LINE Change Target

LINE A 558 LINE A 700
LINE B 197 LINE B 197
OPELOG_20060318_0000.G1O OPELOG_20060318_0000.G1O
65500 operations 65500 operations
OPELOG_20060318_0001.G1O
1 operation
 Management of operation log files

(1) File saving intervals
Operation log files can be saved in daily or weekly.
The saved operation log file can be deleted automatically after storing it for a specified period.
(a) Setting for daily saving
A file is created daily.
OPELOG_ OPELOG_ OPELOG_ OPELOG_

20090406_ 20090407_ 20060408_ 20090412_
0000.G10 0001.G10 0002.G10 0007.G10
2009/4/6 (Mon.) 2009/4/7 (Tue.) 2009/4/8 (Wed.) 2009/4/12 (Sun.)

(b) Setting for weekly saving
A file is created weekly.
OPELOG_ OPELOG_ OPELOG_ OPELOG_

20090406_ 20090413_ 20090420_ 20090511_
0000.G10 0001.G10 0002.G10 0006.G10
2009/4/6 (Mon.) 2009/4/13 (Mon.) 2009/04/20 (Mon.) 2009/5/11 (Mon.)
(2) Setting the operation log file saving size

The size of area in a CF card to save operation log files (total size of all operation log files) can be set.
If the set size is exceeded, the oldest operation log file is automatically deleted.
HINT
Sub-number in operation log file name
The sub-number in the name of the first created operation log file is "0000". The sub-number increases by one
every time an operation log file is created.
The next sub-number of "9999" is "0000".
23 - 6 23.2 Actions

23.2.2 Display and process 23
OPERATION LOG
This section explains how to display and process the created operation log files on the GOT and personal computer.
FUNCTION
 Displaying by the utility
Operation log contents can be checked and operation log files can be managed by [Operation log information] of the
utility.
For the operations of the utility, refer to the following manual. 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
 Operation by the utility
RECIPE
By using the utility, the following operations are available for operation log files.
Management of operation log files is possible on the GOT without using a personal computer.
User’s Manual for the GOT used 26
Item Description
DEVICE DATA
Creates a folder where operation log files are stored.
Creating folder
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
This allows management of operation log files by creating folders by date or period.
Deleting folder Deletes a folder that stores operation log files.
Copies an operation log file.

Copying file
This operation is used to make a backup file of an operation log file. 27
Deleting file Deletes an operation log file.
Renaming file Renames an operation log file.
OBSERVATION
Moves an operation log file to another folder.
FUNCTION
Moving file
This operation is used to make a backup file of an operation log file.
STATUS
G1O CSV / Unicode text conversion Converts a binary file (*.G1O) to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Search
Displaying updated list

Searches for an operation log in an operation log file using the log creation date or time as a key.
Updates the list of operation logs in an operation log file.

28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
23.2 Actions 23 - 7

 Saving the log file in Unicode text file/CSV file and displaying it on a personal computer
The created operation log file is saved in a binary file (*.G1O).
This binary file can be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file to be displayed on a personal computer.
23.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file
Log file Unicode text file/CSV file
HINT
When displaying operation log files on personal computer available for multilingual input
For displaying operation log files, use the Unicode text file.
With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly displayed.
 Display example and details of operation log file

An operation log file, after conversion, is displayed on a personal computer as shown below.
Example: Display in Microsoft Excel
* "-" is displayed if there are no corresponding outputs.
Contents displayed for each item differ depending on the function for which the operation log has been recorded.
The following shows the contents displayed for each item by function.
POINT
Display differences with authentication method
The display details for some items differ depending on the set authentication method.
The following shows the items that the display details differ.
Display details
Item
Operator authentication Security level authentication
Displays the operator name when the operation Displays the level when the operation is
OPERATOR
is executed. executed.
Displays the operator ID when the operation is Displays the level when the operation is
OPE_ID
executed. executed.
23 - 8 23.2 Actions

(1) GOT startup

23
OPERATION LOG
Item Description Item Description
NO Displays a log No. OPE_ID No data is displayed.
FUNCTION
Displays the date on which the operation log was
DATE USER_ID No data is displayed.
collected.
SCRN_NO No data is displayed. ACT_NO No data is displayed.
ACT_ABBR Displays [Start]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.

24
ACTION Displays [Start GOT]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE No data is displayed.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
OPERATOR No data is displayed. PREV_VALUE No data is displayed.
(2) Application switching
Item Description Item Description 25


collected.
RECIPE
ACT_ABBR Displays [AppChng]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
ACTION Displays [Switch applications]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.

26
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the type of screen after change.*1
DEVICE DATA
*1 Switching to each menu in the utility is recorded as an operation on the utility.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(3) Clock data changing
No data is displayed.*1
27
NO Dispalys a log No. OPE_ID
*2
Displays the operator ID or level.
Dispalys the date on which the operation log was
OBSERVATION
collected. (date before changing the clock data).
FUNCTION
STATUS
Displays [GetTime] or [SetTime].*1

ACT_ABBR DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
Displays [ChngTime].*2
28
Displays [Adjust (External device)] or [Adjust (GS)].*1
ACTION DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
TRIGGER ACTION
Displays [Change clock].*2
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the time after change.

FUNCTION
No data is displayed.*1
OPERATOR PREV_VALUE Displays the time before change.
Displays the operator name or level.*2
*1 When the clock of the GOT was adjusted.

*2 When the clock of the GOT was changed by the utility. 29
(4) System language switching
TIME ACTION

FUNCTION
NO Dispalys a log No. OPE_ID Displays the operator ID or level.

collected.
SCRN_NO No data is displayed. ACT_NO No data is displayed. 30

ACT_ABBR Displays [SysLang]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
ACTION Displays [Switch system languages]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the language after switching.
OPERATOR Displays the operator name or level. PREV_VALUE No data is displayed.
23.2 Actions 23 - 9

(5) Displaying system language

collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [DspSysLg]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
ACTION Displays [Display system language]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the language after system language switching.
(6) Security setting (Operator authentication)
NO Displays a log No. OPE_ID Displays the operator ID.*1

collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [Login]/[LoginNG]/[Logout]/[ALogout]/[CLogout/]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
Displays [Login]/[Login failed]/[Logout]/[Automatic logout]/

[Forced logout].
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE No data is displayed.
OPERATOR Displays the operator name. PREV_VALUE No data is displayed.
*1 Applicable only with login, login failed, and logout.
(7) Security setting (Security level authentication)
NO Displays a log No. OPE_ID Displays the level at which the operation was executed.*1

collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [ScrtPwd]*1 or [ScrtLv]*2. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
Displays [Change security levels (password)] or [Change

levels (device)].
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the level after change.
OPERATOR Displays the level at which the operation was executed.*1 PREV_VALUE No data is displayed.
*1 Only when the security level was changed using the password of the utility.
*2 Only when the level device was changed.
(8) Screen switching

collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays the screen switching type in an abbreviation DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
(alphanumeric).
ACTION Displays the screen switching type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME Displays the screen title. CHG_VALUE Displays the screen No. after switching.
23 - 10 23.2 Actions

(9) Station No. switching

23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
collected.

24
ACT_ABBR Displays the station No. switching type in an abbreviation DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
(alphanumeric).
ACTION Displays the station No. switching type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
FUNCTION
Displays "ST_" + "Station No. after switching" (network
LOGGING
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE
No. and PLC station No.).
(10) Language switching

25
RECIPE
collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [DispLang]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.

26
ACTION Displays [Switch languages]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the column No. after switching.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(11) Touch switch

(a) Bit set, bit reset, bit alternate, bit momentary, word set 27
OBSERVATION
NO Displays a log No. OPE_ID Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.
FUNCTION
STATUS
DATE USER_ID Dispalys the user ID.
collected.
Displays the screen number on which the object is set. Dispalys the execution order number if multiple actions
SCRN_NO ACT_NO
(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.) are set.
28
Displays the action type in an abbreviation
ACT_ABBR DATA_TYPE Dispalys the data type.
(alphanumeric).
TRIGGER ACTION
ACTION Displays the action type. DEV_NAME Dispalys the device name and device No.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Dispalys the value written to the device. FUNCTION
OPERATOR Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed. PREV_VALUE No data is displayed.
(b) Application swtiching 29

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

DATE USER_ID Dispalys the user ID.
collected.
Displays the screen number on which the object is set. Dispalys the execution order number if multiple actions
SCRN_NO ACT_NO
(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.)
Dispalys the action type in an abbreviation

are set.
30
(alphanumeric).
SCRIPT FUNCTION
ACTION Dispalys the action type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME Dispalys the object name. CHG_VALUE No data is displayed.
23.2 Actions 23 - 11

(c) Screen switching

DATE USER_ID Displays the user ID.
collected.
Displays the screen number on which the object is set. Displays the execution order number if multiple actions
SCRN_NO ACT_NO
(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.) are set.
Dispalys the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).
ACTION Dispalys the action type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME Dispalys the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the screen No. after switching.
(d) Station No. switching

collected.
Displays the screen number on which the object is set. Displays the execution order number if multiple actions
SCRN_NO ACT_NO
(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed. are set.

(alphanumeric).
ACTION Displays the action type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
Displays the "Station switching type (abbreviation in

OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE alphanumeric)" + "Station No. after switching (Network
No. and PLC station No.)".
(e) Start/end auto repeat
DATE Displays the date on which the operation log was USER_ID Dispalys the user ID.
collected.
SCRN_NO Displays the screen No. on which the object is set. ACT_NO No data is displayed.
ACT_ABBR *1 *2 DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.

Displays [TSW_REPB] or [TSW_REPE] .
Displays [Touch switch: Start auto repeat]*1 or [Touch

switch: End auto repeat]*2.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the number of auto repeats.*2
*1 Displayed when auto repeat starts.

*2 Displayed when auto repeat ends.
23 - 12 23.2 Actions

(12) Numerical input

23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
collected.
SCRN_NO Displays the screen No. on which the object is set. ACT_NO Displays the execution order number if multiple actions
are set. 24
ACT_ABBR Displays [NUM_VAL]. DATA_TYPE Displays the data type.
ACTION Displays [Numerical Input]. DEV_NAME Displays the device name and device No.
FUNCTION
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the value after change.
LOGGING
OPERATOR Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed. PREV_VALUE Displays the value before change.
(a) Write device

25

collected.
RECIPE
are set.
ACT_ABBR Displays [NUM_WDEV]. DATA_TYPE A text code of input data is displayed. (ASCII/SJIS/GB/KS)
26
ACTION Displays [Numerical Input (Write device)]. DEV_NAME Displays the device name and device No.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the value written to the device.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(b) Write complete device
NO Displays a log No. OPE_ID Displays the level at which the operation was executed.
27
collected.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
are set.
STATUS
ACT_ABBR Displays [NUM_WCHK]. DATA_TYPE Displays the data type.
ACTION
OPNAME
Displays [Numerical Input (Write check)].
Displays the object name.

DEV_NAME
CHG_VALUE
Displays the device name and device No.
Displays the value written to the device.

28
TRIGGER ACTION
(13) ASCII input FUNCTION
29
DATE Displays the date on which the operation log was USER_ID Displays the user ID.
collected.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
ACT_ABBR Displays [ASC_VAL]. DATA_TYPE Displays whether the input data is ASCII or SJIS.
ACTION Displays [Ascii Input]. DEV_NAME Displays the device name and device No.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the character string after change.
OPERATOR Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed. PREV_VALUE Displays the character string before change. 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
23.2 Actions 23 - 13

(14) Alarm history and advanced alarm display (user alarm / system alarm)
(a) In delete or all delete operation

collected.

(alphanumeric).
ACTION Displays the action type. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE No data is displayed.
(b) In reset operation

collected.

ACT_ABBR DATA_TYPE Displays the data format.*1
(alphanumeric).
ACTION Displays the action type. DEV_NAME Displays the device name and device No.*1
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the value written to the device.*1
*1 Not displayed for the advanced system alarm display.
(15) Object script

collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [ObScr]. DATA_TYPE Displays the data type.
ACTION Displays [Object Script]. DEV_NAME Displays the device name and device No.
OPNAME Displays the object name. CHG_VALUE Displays the value written to the device.
(16) Log discard information

collected.

SCRN_NO ACT_NO No data is displayed.
collected.
ACT_ABBR Displays [LostLog]. DATA_TYPE No data is displayed.
ACTION Displays [LostLog]. DEV_NAME No data is displayed.
OPNAME No data is displayed. CHG_VALUE Displays the number of operation logs that could not be
recorded.
23 - 14 23.2 Actions

23.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file 23
OPERATION LOG
 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by GT Designer3
A binary file (*.G1O) saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file by GT Designer3.
FUNCTION
The file conversion on GT Designer3 reduces the additional load on the GOT.
1. Store a binary file (*.G1O) in a personal computer using either of the methods below.
• Transferring by GT Designer3 24
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to the personal computer.
• Storing the file in a CF card or USB memory
Save the operation log file in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB memory
FUNCTION
LOGGING
using the personal computer.
2. Select [Tools] [File Conversion] [Operation Log File Conversion] from the menu to display the setting dialog
box on GT Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Path Specify the path of the conversion source file.
Source of Select this item to target all the files (G1O files only) in the same path for conversion.
Conversion When performing a file conversion with this item checked, the conversion log is recorded
Target files with in
the same path
for the specified path automatically.
With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result (OK/NG),
27
and the file creation date can be checked.
Select the type of the conversion destination file (CSV / Unicode Text) and the language
OBSERVATION
Type
being output to the file.
FUNCTION
Destination File
STATUS
Path
 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by the utility 28

A binary file (*.G1O) saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file by the utility.This method
enables the conversion without using GT Designer3.
1. In [Operation log information] of the utility, select a G1O file and touch the [G1O CSV] or [G1O TXT] button to TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
convert the file.
For the utility operation method, refer to the following manual.
29
2. Store the converted file (Unicode text file or CSV file) to the personal computer using either of the following
methods.
• Transferring by GT Designer3
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to the personal computer.
• Storing the file in a CF card or USB memory
Save the operation log file in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB memory
using the personal computer. 30
 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file with the device
SCRIPT FUNCTION
By turning on the specified device, the binary file saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV
file.
23.1 Settings
23.2 Actions 23 - 15

23.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the operation log function.

(1) When recording operation logs in object units
Do not select [Object] in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
When object is selected, the operation log function is enabled for all the objects.
To record operation logs in object units, select [Operation Log Target] in the setting of each object.
(2) When recording operation logs in operation panel key units
Do not select [Object] in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
When object is selected, the operation log function is enabled for all the operation panel keys.
To record operation logs in operation panel key units, select [Operation Log Target] in the settings of each
operation panel key.
(3) When recording operation logs of object script
(a) The following two items must be set.
• [Operation Log Target] is selected in the setting of the object to be recorded.
• [Object Script] is selected in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
(b) To record a device value for the operation log of object script, use the device of the controller.
If an internal device of the GOT is used, operation logs are not recorded.
(c) Operation logs are recorded only when the script execution trigger is set to [Key Code Input],[Input
Fixation],or [Device Writing].
For details of the display trigger and action trigger, refer to the following.
(4) Functions to be set as the operation log target

Select the functions that are set by GT Designer3 as the targets of operation log.
Even for a function that is not set by GT Designer3, if such a function is selected as the target of operation log,
an operation log may be recorded due to internal action of the GOT.
To use the operation log function, install the following OS to the GOT.
• Option OS (Operation Log)
• Extended function OS (Device name converter)

(1) Option function board
To use the operation log function with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.
(2) CF card
Operation log are not recorded in the following cases.
• A CF card is not installed in the GOT
• When a CF card is installed in the GOT, CF card access switch is turned off.

23
OPERATION LOG
(1) When using the alarm history or advanced alarm (user alarm/system alarm)
(a) Operation log of alarm
FUNCTION
For alarms, an operation log is recorded only when an operation (delete, delete all, or reset) is made to the
alarm that has occurred.
When an alarm that has been restored is selected or when operation is made without selecting an alarm,
any operation log is not recorded. (Since the attempted operation is an invalid operation, any log is not 24
recorded.)
Also note that an operation log is not recorded for resetting operation in the upper or middle hierarchy.
(b) Operation log of alarm deletion
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Alarm deletion with [History Clear] in the alarm history and [Buffer Clear] in the advanced alarm is not
recorded to an operation log.
To record an operation log of alarm deletion in the alarm history or extended alarm, execute [Clear the
selected alarm data] or [Display date/time of all data] in the key code switch. 25
(2) When using numerical input
If the offset function is set for a numerical input object, the device name of the device that is offset by the value
set in the offset device is recorded in the operation log.
For details of the offset function, refer to the following.
RECIPE
(3) Saving files
26
(a) To save files, a CF card is necessary.
The CF card must have a larger memory capacity than the operation log file size to be saved.
For the file size that can be saved in a CF card, refer to the following.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(b) Operation logs are not recorded if a CF card is not installed in the GOT or if the CF card access switch of
the GOT is turned off.
(c) The operation log file size cannot be calculated in advance. 27
When the CF card is also used for other functions, it is recommended to limit the memory size used for
operation log files by setting [Specify the total log file size] of GT Designer3.
OBSERVATION
(4) Operation log file conversion by the utility
FUNCTION
When operation log files (*.G1O) are converted to CSV files or Unicode text files by the utility, convert the
STATUS
operation log files one by one.
(5) Using the Unicode text file 28
For the precautions for using Unicode text files, refer to the following.
TRIGGER ACTION
(6) Operation log when the system language switching device is enabled FUNCTION
When the system language switching device is enabled, the system language switching by the utility is disabled.
Though trying to change the system language by the utility outputs an operation log, the system language
switching is not executed.
To check if the system language switching has been executed, check an operation log of [Display system
29
language] that is output after the system language switching.
(7) System language at operation log file conversion
TIME ACTION
When [System Language Switching Interlock] is set for [File Conversion Language] in the operation log setting,
FUNCTION
an operation log file is not converted into a file in the language specified with the system language switching
device.
The operation log file is converted into a file in the system language set by the utility.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(8) When using ASCII input

(a) Changing a text string when the GB code or KS code is used as the text code
When the text string is changed, the new text code is used as the text code of the old and new texts.
Therefore, if the text code is changed between the old and new texts, the old text may not be displayed
correctly.
Example: When the text code is changed from the GB code to the KS code, and when the text is changed from to
The text of the text string is changed.
3 4
(GB code) (KS code)
The value to be stored in GS456 is changed.

3 (GB code) 4 (KS code)
Operation log file
PREV_VALUE
:
(Old text) Because the KS code is used for both old and new
text codes, the old text ( ) is not displayed correctly.
CHG_VALUE
:
(New text)
The old text (PREV_VALUE) is not displayed correctly in a log file because the text code is changed
between the old and new texts.
(b) Outputting operation logs to a CSV file when the GB code or KS code is used as the text code
When the text strings are output to the CSV file, the text code is converted to the ASCII code or Shift-JIS
code.
Therefore, the texts using the GB code or KS code as the text code are displayed as blank texts.

23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
The logging function collects and saves device values of a controller in the buffering area and/or a memory card at any
timing or in specified intervals.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The logging function includes the following two modes.
• File save mode
This mode saves a large amount of collected logging data in a memory card.
The saved logging data are stored in a Unicode text file or a CSV file, and the data can be displayed on a personal
25
computer.
For details of the file save mode, refer to the following.
24.4.1 File save mode
Collecting logging data
RECIPE
Logging data
DAY / TIME LINE1 LINE2 LINE3
2009/04/06 10:30:00 150
2009/04/06 10:30:10 152
2009/04/06 10:30:20 158
2009/04/06 10:30:30 170
100
98
95
92
250
260
270
280
26
Memory card
DEVICE DATA
Logging data
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
DAY / TIME LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 Logging data
2009/10/01 10:30:00 150 100 250 DAY / TIME LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3
2009/10/01 10:30:10 152 98 260 2009/10/01 10:30:00 150 100 250
2009/10/01 10:30:20 158 95 270 2009/10/01 10:30:10 152 98 260
2009/10/01 10:30:30 170 92 280 2009/10/01 10:30:20 158 95 270
2009/10/01 10:30:30 170 92 280
27
• Buffer historical mode
The GOT displays logging data while collecting logging data.
OBSERVATION
To display the logging data on the GOT, use the historical trend graph and the historical data list display.
FUNCTION
For details of the buffer historical mode, refer to the following.
STATUS
24.4.2 Buffer historical mode
For the details of the historical trend graph and the historical data list display, refer to the following.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
Collecting logging data
FUNCTION
Displaying the historical
trend graph or the
historical data list display
29
TIME ACTION
POINT
FUNCTION
Logging data used for the historical trend graph and the historical data list display
When logging data is displayed with the historical trend graph or the historical data list display, for the logging data
to be displayed in the file save mode or the buffer historical mode, refer to the following. 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24 - 1

24.1 Settings
24.1.1 Logging list
Select [Common] [Logging] from the menu to display the [Logging List] dialog box.
Display the list of logging settings and control the logging settings.
The settable number of logging settings differs according to the GOT.
• GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000: 32
• GT14: 8
• GT12: 4
Set a new logging.

Click this button to display the [Logging] dialog box.
Change the contents of the selected logging setting.

Click this button to display the [Logging] dialog box.
Copies the selected logging setting.
Click this button to set the [Destination No.] of the copied logging settings after clicking.
Pastes the logging setting in the logging setting list as the set logging ID.
Deletes the selected logging setting.
Deletes all logging settings.
Closes the [Logging List] dialog box.

24.1.2 Logging setting 23
OPERATION LOG
(1) Basic tab
Logging mode, logging trigger and buffering area are set.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
Set the logging ID of the logging to be set (1 to 32767).

Logging ID
DEVICE DATA
24.2 Control of logging settings
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Set the name of logging. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)
Logging Name
The set logging name is displayed in a Unicode text file, CSV file, or others.
Select the logging mode, and then set the contents.

• File Save: (a) When selecting File Save
27
• Buffer Historical: (b) When selecting Buffer Historical
Logging Mode
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Set the trigger for collecting a device value.
Select the type of trigger for activating device value collection.

·Rise ·Fall ·Sampling ·ON Sampling ·OFF Sampling 28
Logging Trigger Trigger Type When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the trigger interval.
TRIGGER ACTION
(GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000: 1 to 36000, GT14 and GT12: 5 to 36000)
Device Set the device used for the trigger. FUNCTION
Logging Notification Set the device that notifies device values of a controller are being collected into the buffering area.
Device 24.4 Devices to be used
Logging Count Set the device to enable notifying the number of device value collection after the GOT is turned on.
29
Retain data in the

TIME ACTION
embedded memory
FUNCTION
in GOT even when The logging data in the buffering area are saved in the SRAM user area.
the power goes off 24.4 Function that retains log data in the SRAM user area under power failure
(The battery will be
Buffering
required)
30
Log Storage
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set the number of logs that are temporarily saved in the buffering area (1 to 32767).
Number

(a) When selecting File Save
Number of Files Set the number of files to be saved in a memory card (1 to 9999).
Number of Logs a Set the number of logs that can be stored in a file (1 to 65500).
file The value to be set for this item must be larger than the value set for [Log Storage Number].
File Terminal Set the trigger device to create and save a file at specified timing.
Trigger (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Set the device to enable notifying of interrupted device value collection by [File Terminal Trigger].
File Terminal Setting for this item is available only when [File Terminal Trigger] is set.
Notification Device
(b) When selecting Buffer Historical
Set whether to save the logging data in the buffering area to a memory card.
The logging data in the buffering area is not saved to a memory card.
No This selection enables high speed operated logging since logging processing is not
interrupted due to file saving.
Buffer Save The logging data in the buffering area is saved to a memory card.
Yes By saving the data in a memory card, the GOT can read the logging data from the
memory card and restore the data when the GOT is turned on.
Yes (Auto Backup The logging data immediately before saving to memory card is saved as a backup file.
at Save) When the logging data is broken, the data is read out from the backup file if available.
Select the processing to be taken if the number of logs stored in the buffering area reaches the value set for
[Log Storage Number].
Action When Buffer
is Full Delete old Data New logging data is added by clearing the oldest data.
Stop New Addition Device values are not collected even if the logging trigger condition is established newly.
Select this item to notify the specified controllers when the remaining number of logs, which can be saved in the
buffering area, is reduced to the value set for [Buffer Full Alert Capacity].
Full Notification After selecting this item, set the device for Full Notification Signal Device and the following.
Signal Device
Set the timing (remaining number of logs that can be saved: 0 to 255) for the notification
Buffer Full Alert when the available capacity of the buffering area is reduced.
Capacity When the remaining number of logs that can be saved in the buffering area is reduced to
the number set for this item, [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.
Select this item to clear the temporarily saved logging data in the buffering area.
Buffer Historical After selecting this item, set the device for [Buffer Historical Data Clear].
Data Clear
Buffer Historical Select this item to notify when the buffering area clear is completed by [Buffer Historical Data Clear].
Data Clear Alert After selecting this item, set the device for [Buffer Historical Data Clear Alert].

(2) Device tab

23
Target devices of logging data collection are set.
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Block Set the number of blocks in the logging setting (1 to 250).
RECIPE
Number 24.2 Control of logging settings
Select this item when changing the format of device values to be output to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
File Output
Attribute
After selecting this item, set the [File Output Attribute] displayed at the right of the [Device Comment] column.
Setting for this item is available only when [File Save] is selected for [Logging Mode].
26
Inserts a block. Select a line when inserting a block.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
Cuts, copies, or pasts the selected item.
FUNCTION
If [Device Comment] is selected, clears the device comment.
Logging edit If [Digits] is selected, resets the digit value to the default value.
buttons *1
Deletes the setting for the selected row. 27
*2
Reads out the settings edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT Designer3.
OBSERVATION
*2
Saves the logging setting made in the [Device] tab as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Displays the target of device value collection in a list.
Set the device for which the values are collected when the logging function is executed.
Device
Select the data type of a device.
TRIGGER ACTION
Device Type ·Bit ·Signed BIN16 ·Unsigned BIN16 ·Signed BIN32
·Unsigned BIN32 ·BCD16 ·BCD32 ·Real
FUNCTION
Device list Set the number of points of devices for which data is collected in block units.
The set continuous device points are set from head device.
The allowable number of points varies depending on [Device Type].
Point
Bit:1 point
Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16/BCD16:1 to 250 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real:1 to 125 points
29
Set a device comment (Up to 32 characters can be entered).
Device Comment*3
The set device comment is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Set the format of device values to be output to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
For setting the format, select [File Output Attribute] to the right of [Block Number].
Display Type Displays the data display type.

File Output
Attribute
Digits Set the number of digits to be displayed (1 to 32).
30
Select this item to display "0" preceding a device value.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Example: When a collected device value is "125" with "6" set for [Digits].
Fill with 0
• If this item is checked:000125
• If this item is not checked:125

*1 Insert, Copy, Paste, Clear, and Delete are also operated using the menu displayed by right click.
For details of *2 and *3, refer to the following.
*2 Import/Export
An exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited using spreadsheet software and others.
After editing, the Unicode text file or CSV file can be read out to GT Designer3 by importing the file.
Example: Import/export of a CSV file
Export to a CSV file
Editing the exported file

Adding the setting using
Microsoft R Excel, etc.
Import to GT Designer3
The addition is displayed.
POINT
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment.
Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.

*3 Adjusting the column width 23

When the set device comment is displayed only a part of it, the column width can be adjusted so that the entire
OPERATION LOG
comment is visible.
FUNCTION
Expand the column width.
24
(3) File save tab
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Configure the settings to save the logging data stored in the buffering area to a memory card.
The settings are available when selecting the following items in the [Basic] tab.
• [File Save]
• [Buffer Save] is set to [Yes] or [Yes (Auto Backup at Save)] in [Buffer Historical]. 25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
Set the file where the logging data is saved.
OBSERVATION
Drive Name Select a drive where a file is stored.
FUNCTION
Set the folder name where the file is saved.
STATUS
The default folder name is set at [Project Folder] displayed by selecting the [Common]
Folder Name
[GOT Type Setting] from the menu.
File Access
28
Enter the file name to be saved.
TRIGGER ACTION
File Name The default file name is set at "LOG "( : Logging ID).
Add date Select this item to add the file saving date (year, month, day) and time (hour, minute, FUNCTION
information to file second) to the file name.
name The date information is the oldest or latest logging data stored in the logging file.
Set the timing for saving the logging data that are temporarily saved in the buffering area to a temporary file in a
memory card.
29
TIME ACTION
When selecting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], set the trigger interval (1
FUNCTION
to 1440).
Store Trigger
Trigger Type When [None] is selected, the logging data is automatically saved to a memory card when
the buffering area becomes full.
·Rise ·Fall ·None ·Sampling ·ON Sampling ·OFF Sampling
Specify the save trigger device. 30

Device
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Set this item to save a Unicode text file or CSV file at the same time the logging data is saved.
24.4.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file
None Saves only the binary data (*.G1L).
CSV File Saves the binary data (*.G1L) and CSV file.
Additional File Type Unicode Text File Saves the binary data (*.G1L) and Unicode text file.
Select this item to store a Unicode text file or CSV file to which [Additional File Type] is
executed into the save destination different from that of binary data.
After selecting this item, set [Drive Name] and [Folder Name] where the file is to be
Destination
stored.
The Unicode text file or CSV file can be used for a data fetch by storing the file in the
different drive.
Specify File Output

Set the display type of date and time, which is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Time Information
Select this item to set [Date/Time Format].*1
Format
Writing Notification Set the device used for notifying that logging data is being saved.
Writing Error Set the device that notifies an error if saving of the logging data is faulty.
Notification Device 24.4 Devices to be used

*1 Date and time settings 23

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
Preview area
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Item Description
RECIPE
Contents
When selecting [Date/Time ] or [Date ] for [Contents], set the following items.
26

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
week.
Date Setting
Fill with 0
• Selected :09/09/01
27
• Not selected :09/9/1
When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time ] for [Contents], set the following items.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
Type
STATUS
Time Setting
Example) At 10:1
Fill with 0
• Selected :10:01 28
• Not selected :10:1
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

24.2 Control of logging settings

The logging function can control multiple loggings in one logging setting by setting the following items.
• Logging IDs
• The number of blocks
32767
Max. 32 IDs
No. 100
Logging ID 1No. 10
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Max. 250 blocks

Max. number of device points
is 250 (total of all blocks)
 Logging IDs
Logging ID indicates a number that distinguishes the logging setting.
The logging ID is also used to specify the data displayed in the historical trend graph or the historical data list display.
(1) Setting method
Logging ID is set in the [Basic] tab of the [Logging] dialog box.
(2) Setting range
Setting range of logging ID is 1 to 32767.
Note that the number of allowable logging settings is 32.
 Blocks
The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block enables to perform the following settings.
• Setting that multiple device types (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
• Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting
(1) Setting method
Set the number of blocks in the [Device] tab of the [Logging] dialog box.
The following explains an example of setting that bit devices and word devices (singed BIN16 and signed
BIN32) exist in one logging setting.
Set [Device], [Device Type], [Point] and
Specify the number of blocks. [File Output Attribute] for each block.
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
(2) Setting range

Up to 250 block settings can be set in one logging setting.
24 - 10 24.2 Control of logging settings

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
(1) For max. No. of device points
FUNCTION
For each logging setting, the allowable maximum number of device points is 250 points in total.
One device is counted as 1 point, regardless of word device or bit device.
For 32-bit devices, however, 1 device is counted as 2 points.
When multiple blocks are set, the device points for a device data transfer setting are the total device points of 24
all the blocks.
Example)
In the case of block 1: 30 points, block 2: 70 points and block 3: 120 points
FUNCTION
The number of device points in this setting is counted as 220 points (30 + 70 + 120).
LOGGING
(2) When setting random device numbers
One point of device number can be set in one block.
Therefore, setting must be made in different blocks to set random device numbers.
25
(3) When the device type is bit
The device that can be set in a block is 1 point (fixed).
RECIPE
26
The logging function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant setting.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

27
Saving the data in the buffering area to a memory card (Buffer flash forced
OBSERVATION
GS520.b0
saving signal)*1
FUNCTION
STATUS
*1 Without the setting to save the data in a memory card (when [Buffer Save] in the logging setting is set to [No]), the logging data in
the buffering area is not saved to the memory card.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

24.4 Actions
The logging function is enabled by a device or sampling.(Rise/Fall/Sampling/On sampling/Off sampling)
 Logging mode
The logging mode includes the file save mode and buffer historical mode.
Logging mode
Item
File save mode Buffer historical mode
High-speed logging, high-speed display of the

Application Saves large-quantity logging data. historical trend graph and the historical data list
display
Saves the data in the buffering area temporarily and

then in a memory card. Saves the data in the buffering area only
Save location of the collected data
(For a file name, a number (in the range of 0001 to temporarily.*2
9999) is automatically appended.)*1
To be selected from the following.

Processing when the buffering area Saves the logging data in the buffering area to a • Further logging data is not taken into the buffering
is full*3 memory card. area.
• Logging data is deleted from older data.
File format for saving Binary file (*.G1L) *4 Binary file (*.G1L) *4
Application of logging data saved in To be used as the backup data of the buffering area
To display the collected data
a memory card in the event of power failure
*1 When the number of logs being stored in a file exceeds the set value, a new file is automatically created.
It is set at [Number of Logs a File] in the logging setting.
*2 The logging data can be saved to a memory card as the backup of the buffering area in the event of power failure.
24.4.2 Saving data
*3 The allowable maximum number of logs that can be temporarily saved in the buffering area is set at [Log Storage Number] in the
logging setting.
*4 The logging data may also be saved in a Unicode text file or CSV file to be displayed on a personal computer.
 Devices to be used
The logging status can be output to a device.
Devices to be used for the logging function are as follows.
(1) File terminal notification device
[File Terminal Trigger] notifies that the collection of device values is interrupted.
This can be used for the file save mode.
• When the file terminal notification device turns on, the collection of device values is interrupted.
ON
Logging trigger OFF
Collecting the device

Collecting Collecting Collecting
value to the buffering
area
Saving the logging data
Saving
to memory card
ON
[File Terminal Trigger]
OFF
ON
[File Terminal Notification
Device] OFF
*1 Device value collection is not executed while the logging data is being saved.
The established trigger condition is ignored.
24 - 12 24.4 Actions

(2) Full notification signal device

23
This device notifies that the buffering area becomes full.
OPERATION LOG
This can be used for the buffer historical mode.
(3) Buffer historical data clear alert
FUNCTION
[Buffer Historical Data Clear] notifies that the buffering area has been cleared.
This can be used for the buffer historical mode.
(4) Logging notification device 24
The device notifies that device values of a controller are being collected to the buffering area.
When [Trigger Type] of [Logging Trigger] is [Rising]
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Logging trigger OFF
Collecting the device

value to the buffering Collecting Collecting Collecting 25
area
ON
[Logging Notification
Device] OFF
RECIPE
The logging notification device goes OFF in the state the logging
trigger is not established and the device value collection processing
has completed.
26
(5) Logging count device
The device notifies the number of times the device value collection has been executed since the start up of
GOT. (This is not the number of logs stored in the buffering area.)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Using this count value, it is possible to check if the logging is executed correctly.
Counting range is 0 to 65535 and when the count value reaches 65535, it cycles back to 0. (In the case of
unsigned BIN16)
The count value is cleared when the GOT is turned OFF, or when it is reset or restarted.
27
(6) Writing notification device
This device notifies that the logging data is being saved in a memory card.
OBSERVATION
(7) Writing error notification device
FUNCTION
This device notifies that an error occurs while the logging data is written in a memory card.
STATUS
The writing error notification device is not automatically turned OFF even if the error state is released.
Therefore the device must be turned OFF by the user.
When this device turns on, make sure that the following status is made.
• The CF/SD card access switch of the GOT is on.
28
• The memory card has no error.
TRIGGER ACTION
POINT FUNCTION
(1) Timing to establish a logging trigger

Have the logging trigger established when the file terminal notification device and logging notification device
are turned off.
29
While the file terminal notification device and logging notification device are turned on, device value collection
is not executed even when the logging trigger is established.
TIME ACTION
24.5 Precautions
FUNCTION
(2) Timing to establish a save trigger

Have the save trigger established when the writing notification device is turned off.
While the writing notification device is turned on, file saving is not executed even when the save trigger is
established.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 13

buffering area.
turned on.
GOT
User area
Buffering area
Logging
data

SRAM
Saved data
SRAM user area in the SRAM user area
ID3:200KB
Free area

Capacity
Logging function Up to 10
24 - 14 24.4 Actions

(b) Priority order for using the SRAM user area 23

OPERATION LOG
500KB.
FUNCTION

Function
SRAM user area
Advanced user alarm display 24
High
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Low
Logging function

When multiple IDs are set by one function, log data are saved in ascending ID order. 25
RECIPE
To keep the saved log data in the SRAM user area, backup or restore the data in the utility. 26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 15

(a) Normal status
ID1:100KB
ID2:100KB
500KB
ID3:200KB
Free area

changed to the free area.
ID1:100KB Free area
500KB An error occurs because the data of ID:1
ID3:200KB ID3:200KB cannot be saved in another area.

ID1:100KB Reserved area
ID2:100KB ID2:100KB
500KB
Free area Free area
(d) Others
turns on.
If the data are not restored even when the battery is changed, initialize the SRAM user
area.
For how to change the battery or to initialize the SRAM user area, refer to the following.
24 - 16 24.4 Actions

24.4.1 File save mode 23
OPERATION LOG
The file save mode stores the collected logging data in a memory card.
When a file becomes full, another file is automatically created to save large quantity of logging data.
FUNCTION
The file save mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
• To save large quantity of logging data
• To save the logging data in multiple files. The number of logs to be stored in a file is set and when the number of
stored logs exceeds the set value and new file is created. (Example: Creating a file after collecting the data for a day) 24
User area
FUNCTION
Buffering area
LOGGING
100
50
Logging
25
0
0 -1 -2 -3
data
1. When the logging trigger condition is established,

3. Displayed with the historical trend graph or
the device value of a controller is colleted
the historical data list display. 1
and taken into the buffering area.
RECIPE
2. The data are saved into the memory card!
LOG00001_0001.G1L LOG00001_0002.G1L 26
No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2 No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2
1 2005/7/1 9:00:00 150 300 1 2005/7/2 9:00:00 140 302
DEVICE DATA
2 2005/7/1 9:01:10 174 312 2 2005/7/2 9:01:10 145 317
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
3 2005/7/1 9:02:00 196 305 3 2005/7/2 9:02:00 150 307
65500 2005/7/1 22:09:00 215 320

27
One file can store up to 65500 logs.
If the number of logs in a file exceeds the value set for [Number of Logs a File], a new file is
OBSERVATION
automatically created to save the data.
FUNCTION
Up to 9999 files can be created.
STATUS
1. When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is collected and taken into the
buffering area. 28
2.
TRIGGER ACTION
The logging data temporarily stored in the buffering area is saved to the memory card.
3. The collected logging data are utilized as the following.

FUNCTION
• Log analysis or others by storing the data in a Unicode text file or CSV file
• Display by the historical trend graph or the historical data list display 29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 17

 Saving data
In the file save mode, the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a memory card at the following timings.
• When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data is automatically saved.
• The logging data is saved at the specified timing (timing when the file terminal trigger is satisfied) regardless
of the number of logs.
(1) When the buffering area becomes full
When the number of collected logs reaches the value set for [Log Storage Number] in the logging setting, the
logging data is automatically saved to a memory card.
Example: When [Number of Logs a File] setting is 30
1. Buffering area is full.

2. The logging data is added to the temporary file. 3. When the number of logs in the temporary file
reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File],
the data is saved in a file (No. 0001 to No. 9999).
Buffering
area
No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2

No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2 No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2
1 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216
1 2009/4/6 9:00:00 150 256 1 2009/4/6 9:00:00 150 256
2 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217
2 2009/4/6 9:01:00 174 255 2 2009/4/6 9:01:00 174 255
3 2009/4/6 9:02:00 196 254 3 2009/4/6 9:02:00 196 254
10 2009/4/6 9:29:00 230 217 File
11 2009/4/6 9:30:00 231 220 creation
20 2009/4/6 9:19:00 215 250
20 2009/4/6 9:19:00 215 250
21 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216
20 2009/4/6 9:39:00 250 210
21 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216 22 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217
22 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217
Data added 30 2009/4/6 9:29:00 230 217
30 2009/4/6 9:29:00 230 217
Created logging file
(L0G00001_0001.G1L)
31 2009/4/6 9:30:00 231 220
40 2009/4/6 9:39:00 250 210

4.The logging data saved in the logging file is
deleted from the temporary file.
Temporary file No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2

(LOG00001_0000.G1L) 1 2009/4/6 9:30:00 231 220
10 2009/4/6 9:39:00 250 210

Log data are retained
in the temporary file. Temporary file
(LOG00001_0000.G1L)
1. When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data in the buffering area is automatically saved to a
memory card (appended to the existing data).
2. The data is saved in a temporary file (file No. 0000).
3. When the number of logs saved in the temporary file reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File], the
data in the temporary file is saved in a logging file (file No. 0001 to 9999).
When the number of logging files exceeds the number set for [Number of Files], the file number returns to
0001.
In this case, the data to be saved overwrite the data in the logging file (file No. 0001).
(The existing data in the logging file are deleted.)
If [Number of Files] is "12"
Creation File contents are overwritten.
LOG00001_0001.G1L of a file LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L LOG00001_0002.G1L
LOG00001_0012.G1L LOG00001_0012.G1L
To avoid overwriting the file, save the file in the memory card to another location.
4. After saving the logging file, the logging data in the temporary file are automatically cleared and logging
restarts.
24 - 18 24.4 Actions

(2) When using the file terminal trigger

23
Use [File Terminal Trigger] in the logging setting to save the data at the specified timing by creating a file
OPERATION LOG
regardless of the number of logs.
Example: When [Number of Logs a File] setting is 30
FUNCTION
When [File Terminal Trigger] turns on, the logging data The logging file (LOG00001_0001.G1L) is created.
in the buffering area is added to the temporary file.
24
Buffering area
FUNCTION
LOGGING
No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2 No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2 No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2
1 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216 1 2009/4/6 9:00:00 150 256 1 2009/4/6 9:00:00 150 256
2 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217 2 2009/4/6 9:01:00 174 255 2 2009/4/6 9:01:00 174 255
3 2009/4/6 9:02:00 196 254 3 2009/4/6 9:02:00 196 254
7 2009/4/6 9:26:00 230 217 File

20 2009/4/6 9:19:00 215 250
25
creation 21 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216
Data
20 2009/4/6 9:19:00 215 250 22 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217
added
21 2009/4/6 9:20:00 205 216
22 2009/4/6 9:21:00 211 217
27 2009/4/6 9:26:00 230 217
27 2009/4/6 9:26:00 230 217 File to be created
RECIPE
LOG00001_0001.G1L
Temporary file
The logging data saved in the logging
LOG00001_0000.G1L
file is deleted from the temporary file.
No. of Logs Time Line 1 Line 2 26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Temporary file
LOG00001_0000.G1L
1. When [File Terminal Trigger] is turned on, the logging data in the buffering area are added to the temporary
file. 27
2. The logging data in the temporary file (file No. 0000) are saved in a logging file (file No. 0001 to 9999).
(The logging data is saved regardless of the number of logs.)
OBSERVATION
When the number of logging files exceeds the number set for [Number of Files], the file number returns to
FUNCTION
0001.
STATUS
The logging data to be saved overwrites the data in the logging file (file No. 0001).
(The existing data in the logging file is deleted.)
If [Number of Files] is "12"

28
Creation File contents are overwritten.
TRIGGER ACTION
LOG00001_0001.G1L of a file LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L LOG00001_0002.G1L
FUNCTION
LOG00001_0012.G1L LOG00001_0012.G1L
To avoid overwriting the file, save the file in the memory card to another location.
29
3. After saving the logging file, the logging data in the temporary file is automatically cleared and logging
restarts.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 19

The buffer historical mode stores the logging data in only the buffering area and displays the data with the historical trend
graph or the historical data list display on the GOT at high speed.
The buffer historical mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
• Executing high-speed logging and high-speed display of the historical trend graph and the historical data list display
• Cases where saving of large quantity of data is not necessary
1. When the logging trigger condition is

established, the device value of a controller
is colleted and taken into the buffering area.
User area
Buffering area
Logging
data
2. Displayed with the historical trend graph

or the historical data list display.
1. When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is colleted and temporarily taken
into the buffering area.
2. The logging data temporarily stored in the buffering area is displayed with the historical trend graph or the historical
data list display.
 Saving data
In the buffer historical mode, the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a memory card by executing buffer
saving.
If the logging data is saved in a memory card, the GOT reads the logging data from the memory card and restores
the data when the GOT is turned on. (The restoration is automatically executed.)
This setting is used in the operations indicated below.

• To retain the logging data even when a power failure occurs.
• To save the data in a memory card when the buffering area is full.
Memory card
The timing to save the data in a memory card can be set.
Saves (Rising / Falling / None / Sampling / ON Sampling / OFF Sampling)
data. The data can be saved using the touch switches.
User area User area

Buffering area Buffering area
Logging Logging
Logging data data
data
Logging data collected Logging data collected
before turning off the GOT after turning on the GOT
Power turned OFF Power turned ON
24 - 20 24.4 Actions

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
(1) Memory card installation timing at logging data restoration
FUNCTION
When restoring the logging data by reading it from a memory card, install the memory card to the GOT before
turning on the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned on, the logging data cannot be restored by reading the data from the memory card.
Additionally, when the memory card is installed after the GOT is turned on, the logging data in the memory 24
card is overwritten when the data is saved to the memory card.
(2) Restoring logging data when the data are retained under power failure (GT16 only)
When logging data are saved in a memory card and also retained in the SRAM user area under power failure,
FUNCTION
LOGGING
the logging data in the SRAM user area are used for restoration when the GOT turns on.
If the logging data in the SRAM user area are not available due to a voltage drop and others, the logging data
in the memory card are used for the restoration.
(3) When the buffering area becomes full 25
When the number of logging data saved in the buffering area reaches the value set for [Log Storage Number]
of the logging setting, this state can be notified using [Full Notification Signal Device].
Further settings enable the operations as below.
RECIPE
(a) To notify before the buffering area becomes full by setting [Buffer Full Alert Capacity]
(b) To select the processing when the buffering area is full by using [Action When Buffer is Full]
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
Buffering
FUNCTION
area full
notification: Buffering area full notification OFF ON
27
Save Delete
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
When the buffering area full notification signal turns on,
the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card.*1
*1 The trigger for saving the loging data is set for [Store Trigger] in the logging setting.
28
(c) To clear the logging data in the buffering area without saving the logging data by using [Buffer Historical
Data Clear]
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
Buffering
area full
notification:
Buffering area full notification OFF ON 29
TIME ACTION
Save Delete
FUNCTION
Clears the logging data in the buffering area. 30

SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 21

This section explains how to display and process the collected logging data on the GOT and personal computer.
 Displaying data with the historical trend graph or the historical data list display
The collected logging data are displayed with the historical trend graph or the historical data list display.
The displayed data is specified using the logging ID.
Historical trend graph Historical data list display
Date Plan Output Fault

2010/10/08 12:30:00 100 91 8
2010/10/08 12:35:00 100 65 4
2010/10/08 12:40:00 100 53 3
2010/10/08 12:45:00 100 67 2
2010/10/08 12:50:00 100 77 1
2010/10/08 12:55:00 100 83 5
2010/10/08 13:00:00 100 75 4
(1) Display target in the file save mode

The logging data in a memory card and in the buffering area (for the logging function) can be displayed.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)

Buffering area
Buffering area (For the historical trend graph and
(For logging function) the historical data list display)
Logging Logging
data data
(2) Display target in the buffer history mode

Only the logging data in the buffering area (for the logging function) can be displayed.
The logging data saved in a memory card is not displayed.
To display the older logging data, use the file save mode.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
Buffering area (For the historical trend graph and
(For logging function) the historical data list display)
Logging Logging
data data
The logging data in a memory card is

not displayed.
24 - 22 24.4 Actions

23
 Operating by the utility
By using the utility, the following operations are available for logging files.
OPERATION LOG
Management of logging files is possible on GOT, without using a personal computer.
FUNCTION
Item Description
Creates the folder that stores logging files. 24

This enables management of logging files by creating a folder for each line or line of products.
FUNCTION
Folder for Folder for
LOGGING
Creating folder Folder for
storing line 1 storing line 2 storing line 3
logging files logging files logging files
Manages logging files by creating folders for

lines or line of products
25
Deleting folder Deletes the folder that stores logging files.
Copies a logging file.

Copying file
This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.
RECIPE
Deleting file Deletes a logging file.
Renaming file Renames a logging file. 26

Moves a logging file to other folder.
Moving file
This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.
DEVICE DATA
G1L CSV/Unicode text conversion Converts a binary file (*.G1L) into a Unicode text file or CSV file.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
 Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in a Unicode
text file or CSV file 27
The collected logging data is saved in a binary file (*.G1L).
The collected logging data can be displayed on a personal computer by creating a Unicode text file or CSV file from
OBSERVATION
the binary file.
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
Logging
data Unicode text file / CSV file
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 23

POINT
(1) When displaying logging data on personal computer available for multilingual input
For displaying logging data, use the Unicode text file.
With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly displayed.
(2) Display example and description for the logging data
When binary logging data is converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file, the logging data is displayed as
shown below.
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10) 11)
No. Item Description
1) Logging ID Indicates the logging ID.
2) Logging name Indicates the logging name.
3) ID number Indicates the number (0001 to 9999) that is at the end of the file name.
4) Number of set devices Indicates the number of devices.
5) Number of logging data Indicates the number of logging data.
6) Device comment Indicates the device comments.
Indicates the device formats.

BIT:Bit
BIN16:Signed BIN16 or unsigned BIN16
7) Device format BIN32:Signed BIN32 or unsigned BIN32
BCD16:BCD16
BCD32:BCD32
REAL:Real number
Indicates the display formats.

BIN:Binary number
8) Display format DEC:Signed decimal number
UNSIGNED_DEC:Unsigned decimal number
REAL:Real number
Indicates the device size. (Unit: Byte)

9) Device size 1: Bit device or word device (16 bits)
2: Word device (32 bits)
10) Time data Indicates the time that the device values are collected.
11) Logging data Indicates the collected device values.
24 - 24 24.4 Actions

24.4.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file 23
OPERATION LOG
 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file when saving the logging data to a memory card
FUNCTION
When the logging data is saved to a memory card, creating its Unicode text file or CSV file is available.
This method does not require special operation since a Unicode text file or CSV file is automatically created.
1. Set [Additional File Type] in the [File Save] tab in the logging setting. 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Setting of [Additional File Type]
26
2. File save operation automatically creates a Unicode text file or CSV file.
A Unicode text file or CSV file is not created at the timing of temporary file creation.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
24.4.1 File save mode
HINT 27
Interruption of logging processing due to file saving operation
Logging processing is interrupted during data saving to a file.
OBSERVATION
To shorten the interruption time, set [None] for [Additional File Type] and convert a binary file (*.G1L) into a
FUNCTION
Unicode text file or CSV file using GT Designer3 or the utility.
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
24.4 Actions 24 - 25

 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by GT Designer 3

Convert the binary file (*.G1L) saved in a memory card to a Unicode text file or CSV file by using GT Designer3.
1. Store a binary file (*.G1L) to a personal computer using either of the methods below.
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to a personal computor.
Save the logging data in a memory card or USB memory, and read the data from the memory card or USB
memory by using the personal computer.
2. Select [Tools] [File Conversion] [Logging File Convert] from the menu to display the setting dialog box on GT
Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Path Specify the path of the conversion source file.

Source of Select this item to target all the files (G1L files only) of the same path for conversion.
Conversion When converting files with this item selected, the conversion log is recorded for the
Target files in the specified path automatically.
same path
With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result
(OK/NG), and the file creation date can be checked.
Type Select the type of the conversion destination file (CSV/Unicode Text).
Destination File
Path
 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by the utility

Convert the binary file (*.G1L) saved in a memory card to a Unicode text file or CSV file by using the utility.
A Unicode text file or CSV file can be converted without using GT Designer3.
1. In the [Logging Information] of the utility, select the G1L file and touch the [G1L CSV] or [G1L TXT] button.
For utility operation, refer to the following manual.
2. Store the converted Unicode text file or CSV file in a personal computer using either of the following methods.
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to a personal computer.
Save the logging data in a memory card or USB memory, and read the data from the memory card or USB
memory by using the personal computer.
24 - 26 24.4 Actions

23
24.5 Precautions
OPERATION LOG
This section explains the precautions for using the logging function.
FUNCTION
(1) Maximum number of logging settings
Up to 32 logging settings can be configured in one project. 24
For the GT12, up to four logging settings can be configured in one project.
(2) Buffering area size

The size of the buffering area varies according to the setting for [Log Storage Number] of the logging setting.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], refer to the following.
(a) When a large number is set for [Log Storage Number] 25
The size of user area (C drive + Extension memory) is reduced.
Adjust the setting for [Log Storage Number] according to the size of user space (C drive + Extension
memory).
(b) When a small number is set for [Log Storage Number]
RECIPE
In the file save mode, file saving frequency increases.
Since device value collection is interrupted while the data is saved to a file, device value collection may be
disabled. (Especially when device values are collected in short intervals.)
To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], refer to the following.
26
Example: Relationships among logging trigger log storage number and saving frequency
DEVICE DATA
[Log Storage Number]
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
[Logging Trigger]
1 100 10000
Saving in 10000 second

10 ( 100ms intervals) Saving in 1 second intervals Saving in 100 second intervals
27
intervals
Saving in 10000 second Saving in 1000000 second

1000( 100ms intervals) Saving in 100 second intervals
intervals intervals
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
POINT
STATUS
Setting of [Log Storage Number] in the file save mode
To collect device values in short intervals, increase the value set for [Log Storage Number]. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
(3) Mixed use of file save mode and buffer historical mode
Do not overlap the folder name and file name between the two modes.
FUNCTION
If there is an overlap, logging cannot be executed correctly.
In the file save mode

29
Overlapped designation of folder
TIME ACTION
In the buffer historical mode and file names is not allowed.

FUNCTION
In the file save mode, management file "LOG00001.G1L****" 30

is saved at the same timing the "LOG00001_****.G1L" file
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(*: number) is saved. Since this overlaps with the file name
"LOG00001.G1L" used in the buffer historical mode, correct
logging is disabled.
Check of overlapped designation is possible by selecting [Tools] [Data Check..].

(4) Number of settings

When the total capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the logging function
cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points, may not be set.
Make the settings within the free user space available for the GOT.
For calculating the setting data size of the logging function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1. DATA CAPACITY LIST
For the free user space available for the GOT, refer to the following manual.
(5) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size
The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.
To use the logging function, install the extension function OS (Logging) to GOT.

To use the logging function with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT.(For GOTs with built-in option
function boards, no option function board is required.)

23
OPERATION LOG
(1) Saving a file
To save a file, use a memory card.
FUNCTION
The memory card capacity must be larger than the size of the logging file to be saved.
For the size of the file to be saved in the memory card, refer to the following.
24
(2) If no memory card is installed in the GOT when a file is saved
If no memory card is installed in the GOT, the GOT fails to save a file.
[Writing Error Notification Device] turns on and the device values are not collected. (The device values are
collected even if no memory card is installed until the GOT fails to save the file.)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The device values are not collected until the GOT succeeds in saving the file.
File saving and logging restart by inserting a memory card into the GOT.
To use the logging function, install a memory card in the GOT.
(3) To maintain the access performance
25
(a) Before starting logging
It is recommended to format a memory card before starting logging.
(b) Number of files stored in a folder
RECIPE
The number of files to be stored in a folder should be less than 500.
If 500 or more files are stored in a folder, file access performance may be lowered.
(c) When data is repeatedly written/deleted to/from the memory card 26
Regardless of the number of files, the file access performance may be deteriorated.
Format the memory card.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(4) If device value collection is not executed as set

In the cases shown below, the collection of device values may be impossible in the set intervals or even if the
trigger device condition is satisfied.
• A large number of device points is set for collection, taking a long communication time between GOT and a
controller.
• Logging trigger interval is short (trigger conditions is established during the collection of device value).
Example: When logging trigger interval is short

ON
Logging trigger OFF
Device value is During

During collection collection
being collected to
buffering area.
Take any of the following measures.

• When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], reduce the device points for a logging setting enabled with short
intervals. (Set the logging setting enabled with long intervals separately from the logging setting enabled with
short intervals.)
Logging setting (logging ID 1)

Interval: 10 ( 100ms)
Devices to be transferred
D100 D200 D101 D201
D102 D202 D103 D203
D104 D204 D105 D205
D106 D206 D107 D207
D108 D208 D109 D209
Divide the settings.
Logging setting (logging ID 1) Logging setting (logging ID 2)

Interval: 10 ( 100ms) Interval: 100 ( 100ms)
Devices to be transferred Devices to be transferred

D100 D200 D101 D201
D102 D202 D103 D203
D104 D204 D105 D205
D106 D206 D107 D207
D108 D208 D109 D209
Setting with short intervals Setting with long intervals
• Have the trigger condition established while the logging notification device is OFF.
• If the baud rate can be changed, increase the baud rate in the Communication detail settings.
POINT
If device value collection is impossible
A device value is collected when the trigger device is established next.
The device value to be collected is the value at the time the trigger condition is established next.

(5) Integrity of the device values between the controller device values and the collected device values
23
When the number of device points set for device value collection is large, integrity of device values may not be
OPERATION LOG
secured between the device values of a controller and the collected data values.
FUNCTION
Logging data at GOT Device values at controller
D0 120 D0 120
D1 140 D1 140 Device value reading
processing by GOT
D2 160 D2 160
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
D100 200 D100 200
25
Logging data at GOT Device values at controller
D0 120 140 D0 120 Device value changed

D1 140 D1 145 during reading processing
RECIPE
Remains
D2 160 D2 160
26
Device value reading
processing by GOT
D100 200 D100 200
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
If such a problem occurs, set an interlock at the controller so that the device value will not change until the
logging by GOT finishes.
Logging status can be checked by [Logging notification device].
24.1.2 Logging setting 27
(6) Timing at which processing stops or is suspended
(a) Timing at which device value collection stops or is not executed
OBSERVATION
In the cases shown below, device value collection is not executed even if the trigger condition is
FUNCTION
established.
STATUS
Device values may be collected incorrectly as device value collection stops temporarily. (Particularly when
device value collection is executed in short intervals.)
28
Description Corrective action
TRIGGER ACTION
• In the file save mode, increase the value set for [Log Storage Number].
When saving the logging data to memory
• Use [Writing Notification Device] appropriately so that the trigger condition is not
card
FUNCTION
established during writing.
• Have the trigger condition established only after [Buffer Historical Data Clear Alert] is
When clearing the buffering area
turned on.
When the historical trend graph or the

historical data list display accesses the
• Decrease the device point to be monitored by the historical trend graph or the historical data 29
list display.
logging data
TIME ACTION
(b) Timing at which file saving and buffering area clear are suspended
FUNCTION
In the case shown below, file saving and buffering area clear are not executed.
Description Corrective action
When the historical trend graph or the

• Decrease the device point to be monitored by the historical trend graph or the historical data
30
historical data list display accesses the
list display.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
logging data

(7) When using the historical trend graph or the historical data list display
When the logging function is used, the data display is not updated on the historical trend graph or the historical
data list display during the following period.
• From the start to the end of saving the logging data in a memory card
(8) Deletion prohibited file (only in the file save mode)
In the file save mode, a number is appended to the set file name.
Do not delete the management data and the temporary file indicated below.
If deleted, correct logging is disabled.
File without a number in the file name : Management data*1

File with 0000 appended to the file name : Temporary file*1
File with a number (0001 to 9999) appended to the file name : Logging data
*1 Deletion prohibited file
(9) When turning off GOT power, restarting or resetting GOT

The logging data in the buffering area is cleared.
If the logging data must not be cleared, save the data using [File Terminal Trigger] or [Store Trigger].
(10) When the GOT is turned off before the save trigger is established (GT16 only)
When the setting for saving logging data in a memory card is configured, and when the GOT is turned off by
power failure and others before [Store Trigger] is established, the logging data in the buffering area are cleared
and not retained in the memory card.
For the GT16, configure the settings for saving logging data in the memory card and for retaining the logging
data in the SRAM user area under power failure. The logging data in the buffering area saved before [Store
Trigger] is established can be retained in the SRAM user area under the power failure.
24.4 Function that retains log data in the SRAM user area under power failure
(11) Logging file conversion by the utility
When logging files are converted to CSV files or Unicode text files by the utility, convert the logging files one by
one.
(12) Using a Unicode text file
For the precautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
(13) When opening CSV file with Microsoft Excel

When opening a Unicode text file or CSV file created using the logging function with Microsoft Excel, the file is
displayed in the standard format for Microsoft Excel.
In some setting, data display such as date and hour of logging may differ from the actual format.
If they differ, the format output with the GOT can be checked by opening the Unicode text file or CSV file using
text editor.
functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
editors.

RECIPE


23
25. RECIPE
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
The recipe function enables to easily set and change the conditions required for production or others.
A value is set and changed when the preset value is written to the devices of a controller.
The value can be read from the specified device.
The read values are stored in a file. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer. 24
This function includes the recipe function and the advanced recipe function.
For the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function
FUNCTION
LOGGING
 Recipe file
A recipe file stores the device values read by a controller.
The device values stored in the recipe file can be edited on the personal computer. 25
The data of the recipe file can be written to the devices.
 Procedure for reading or writing of the device value using the recipe
(1) Writing of the device value in the controller without using the recipe file
RECIPE
The values preset with GT Designer3 are stored in the GOT built-in memory (user area).
The set values are written to the devices of the controller according to the status of the device (on or off).
The recipe file is not required for the following cases.
26
• Only writing the value to the devices of a controller
• Not necessary for displaying or editing the writing value on the personal computer
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
1. GT Designer3 setting
Device Device value
OBSERVATION
D10 150
FUNCTION
D11 250
STATUS
D12 350
D10 150
2. Download the set data 3. Write trigger : OFF ON D11 250
to GOT (Write the set data to the device) D12 350 28
1.
TRIGGER ACTION
Configure the recipe setting on GT Designer3.
Do not select the item to use the recipe file.
FUNCTION
2. Download the set data to the GOT.
3. Write the values set in GT Designer3 to the device of the controller with the write trigger.
29
POINT
TIME ACTION
How to read the value from the device of a controller

FUNCTION
Use the recipe file.

When the recipe file is not used, only writing the devices to the GOT is available according to the status of the
device (on or off).
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
25 - 1

(2) Using the recipe file for reading or writing of the device values
Reading or writing of the device values by using the recipe file is available for project management and
production management on the personal computer.
The following shows how to read or write of the device values by using the recipe file.
(a) Writing the devices to the GOT is performed according to the status of the device (on or off).
1. GT Designer3 setting
Device Device value
D10 150
D11 250
D12 350
2. Download the set data to GOT 3. Read trigger : OFF ON
D10 50
D11 100
Recipe (Read the device value)
file D12 150
Device Device value
D10 150 50
D11 250 100
D12 350 150
4. The device values read to recipe file are stored.
5. The recipe file is stored in PC.
Recipe
file
6. Recipe file is displayed or edited in PC.

Device Device value
D10 50 500
D11 100 600
D12 150 700
D10 500
7. Transfer the edited recipe file 8. Write trigger : OFF ON D11 600
to GOT. Device Device value (Write the set values to the device.) D12 700
D10 500
D11 600
D12 700
1. Configure the recipe setting on GT Designer3.

Select the item to use the recipe file.
3. The device values of the controller are read with the read trigger.
4. The read values are stored in the recipe file.
5. Store the recipe file in the personal computer.
6. Display and edit the file stored at the step 5. on the personal computer.
7. Store the edited recipe file in the GOT.
8. The values are written to the devices of the controller with the write trigger.
25 - 2

(b) Writing the devices to the GOT is performed in the utility (Only advanced recipe function) 23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
1.
24
GT Designer3 setting
Device Device value
D10 150
D11 250
D12 350
FUNCTION
LOGGING
2. Download the set data to GOT 3. Advanced recipe file
(Create a binary file (*.G1P).)
4. Touch the
the utility.
Save record
PLC GOT
button on 25
D10 50
D11 100
Advanced (Read the device value) D12 150
recipe file
RECIPE
Device Device value
D10 150 50
D11 250 100 26
D12 350 150
5. The device values read to the advanced
DEVICE DATA
recipe file (binary format file (*.G1P))
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
are stored.
6. Convert the binary file (*.G1P) to
Advanced a Unicode text file or CSV file. *1
recipe file
Store the converted file and binary
7. The Unicode text file or CSV file is file (*.G1P) in the personal computer. 27
displayed or edited on the personal computer.
Device Device value
OBSERVATION
D10 50 500
FUNCTION
D11 100 600
STATUS
D12 150 700
8. Convert the edited file to a binary

file (*.G1P) in GT Designer3. *2
10. Touch the Load record
D10 500 28
9. Transfer the binary file GOT PLC
button on D11 600
(*.G1P) to the GOT. the utility.
TRIGGER ACTION
(Write the set values D12 700
to the device.)
Device Device value
FUNCTION
D10 500
D11 600
D12 700
1. Configure the setting on GT Designer3. 29

3.
TIME ACTION
Create the advanced recipe file with the utility.

FUNCTION
4. The device values of the controller are read with the utility.
5. The read values are stored in the advanced recipe file (binary file (*.G1P)).
30
6. Convert the binary file (*.G1P) to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Store the converted file and the binary file in the personal computer.
7. Display and edit the converted file stored at the step 6. on the personal computer.
25 - 3

8. Convert the edited file to the binary file (*.G1P) on GT Designer3.
9. Store the binary file (*.G1P) in the GOT.
10. The set values are written to the devices of the controller with the utility.
POINT
Advanced recipe file
The advanced recipe file is a recipe file used for the advanced recipe function.
25.3 Advanced Recipe Function
25 - 4

23
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and
Advanced Recipe Function
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
The following shows the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function.
Select the recipe to use based on the followings.
25.2 Recipe Function 24
Item Recipe function Advanced recipe function Reference
FUNCTION
LOGGING
• GT16 • GT15
• GT14 • GT12 • GT16 • GT15
Applicable GOT -
• GT11 • GT10 • GT14 • GT SoftGOT1000
• GT SoftGOT1000
Option function board, • Option function board • Option function board Appendix2 Precautions for
25
option OS*3 • Option OS (Recipe) • Option OS (Advanced recipe) Option Function Board
Maximum number of
Up to 256 settings Up to 2048 settings
recipes
RECIPE
GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, When the number of record settings is 240 or
*1 less: Up to 32767 points per setting Max. No. of recipes
GT SoftGOT1000: Up to 8192 points
When the number of record settings is 241 or
Number of device points *1
GT10: Up to 4000 points
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points
more: Up to 4096 points per setting
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points
26
for 1 device.) for 1 device.)
Max. No. of values in
DEVICE DATA
Number of records 1 (Only one record) More than one (Up to 2000 records) one device (For each
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
setting)

Device type • Signed BIN32 • Unsigned BIN32
Only one device type for each setting
• BCD16 • BCD32 • Bit
Allowed to set multiple device types for each Applicable device name 27
setting. and device type
Allowed to set multiple device names for each
OBSERVATION
Device name Only one device name for each setting
setting.
FUNCTION
• Set the trigger device for each setting Trigger device for
STATUS
Trigger device • Set trigger device for each setting • Allowed to read/write all advanced recipes in reading/writing device
common trigger device value
Use of utility Not allowed Allowed Operation in utility 28

• Reading/Writing being executed
TRIGGER ACTION
• Reading/Writing being completed Notifying the process
Notification of
• Reading/writing being executed • Recipe process error status to the device of
processing status
• Displaying the advanced recipe information in controller
utility FUNCTION
GT16: GT15, GT10, GT SoftGOT1000: CSV file

Stored file type Binary file*2 Storing file type
GT14, GT12, GT11: CSV file, binary file
Required memory area Change depending on the setting

(Fundamentals)Appendix. 29
1 DATA CAPACITY LIST
*1 Settable for each recipe setting for GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11, and GT SoftGOT1000.
Total number of points in one project for GT10.
TIME ACTION
*2 Can be converted to a CSV file or Unicode text file in GT Designer3. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.
FUNCTION
*3 No option function board is required for GT16, GT14, and GT12.

No option function board and option OS are required for GT SoftGOT1000 and GT10.
POINT 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
For compatibility of recipe function and advanced recipe function

Setting for Recipe Function and advanced recipe function cannot be utilized.
Select between recipe function and advanced recipe function before using the recipe.
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function 25 - 5

 Max. No. of recipes

Multiple recipes can be set for each setting.
Also, the setting can be managed separately for each line or line of products.
Max. No. of recipes and device points are shown as the following table.
Recipe function Advanced recipe function*2
Max. 256 Max. 2048

recipes recipes
Max. 8192 points can be set*1. Max. 32767 points can be set for each setting.
(When device type is 32 bit, (When device type is 32 bit,
calculate as 2 points for 1 device.) calculate as 2 points for 1 device.)
*1 Settable for each recipe setting for GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11, and GT SoftGOT1000.
Total number of points in one project for GT10. (Max. 4000 points for GT10)
*2 For the maximum number of device points, refer to the following.
25.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting
 Max. No. of values in one device (For each setting)

Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple values in one device are
shown below.
Example : When setting 3 values in D11 to D13 of device,

Device name Device value 1 Device value 2 Device value 3
D11 100 150 500
D12 200 250 600
D13 300 350 700
When setting the above values, the functions will be as the following table.
Recipe function Advanced recipe function
One value can be set in one device.

When setting multiple values in one device, separate the setting for each Multiple values can be set in one device.
device value. Multiple recipe information can be managed in one setting.
Device value 1 setting
Device value 1 to 3 can be set in one device!
Multiple values
(max. 2000 records)
can be set in one device.
Device value 2 setting Device value 3 setting
25 - 6 25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

23
 Applicable device name and device type
Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple device names and device
OPERATION LOG
types are shown below.
FUNCTION
(1) Example for setting multiple device names
(a) Settings
It is explained as example for setting that is shown below.
24
Correspondence to the following setting (b)
Device name Device type Device value Advanced recipe
Recipe function
function
FUNCTION
LOGGING
D11 Signed BIN16 100
D 1)
3)
R0 Signed BIN16 400
R
R1 Signed BIN16 500
2) 25
(b) GT Designer3 setting
When setting above (a), GT Designer3 setting will be as the following table.
RECIPE
Multiple device names cannot be set in one setting.

Separate the setting for each device name. Multiple device names can be set in one setting.
26
1) 2) 3)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
D device setting R device setting
D and R device setting can be set in one setting!
27
OBSERVATION
(2) Example for setting multiple device types
FUNCTION
(a) Settings
STATUS
Device name Device type Device value

28
Advanced recipe
Recipe function
function
TRIGGER ACTION
1)
D12 Signed BIN16 200 FUNCTION
D 3)
D13 Unsigned BIN32 300
2)
D15 Unsigned BIN32 400
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


Recipe Function Advanced recipe function
Multiple device types cannot be set in one setting. Multiple device types can be set in one setting.
Separate the setting for each device type. The setting can be put together for each line or line of products.
2) 3)
1)
The setting of signed BIN16 and unsigned BIN32

Signed BIN16 setting Unsigned BIN32 setting can be set in one setting!
(3) Example for setting multiple device numbers

(a) Settings

Device name Device type Device value Advanced recipe
Recipe function
function

1)
D 3)
2)

Recipe Function Advanced recipe function
Only continuous device number can be set. The random device type can be set in one setting.
When the device number is not continuous, separate the setting.
1) 2) 3)
Setting of D11 to D12 Setting of D1000 to D1001 The random device number can be set in one setting!
POINT
Device type for the recipe function
BCD16, BCD32 and the bit device (bit specification of word device) cannot be set for the device type.
To set the above device types, use the advanced recipe function.

23
 Trigger device for reading/writing device value
The recipe performs read/write of the device value depending on status of the trigger device (ON/OFF).
OPERATION LOG
When reading/writing device value, differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function at the trigger
FUNCTION
device setting are shown below.
Example : When four settings exist

Recipe Function Advanced recipe function 24
Set the trigger device for each setting.
Trigger device can be set for each setting as recipe function.

1) 2)
Also, all advanced recipes can be read/written in common trigger device.
FUNCTION
For this, it is not necessary to newly set trigger device even if increasing
LOGGING
settings.
1) 2)
25
3) 4)
3) 4)
RECIPE
26
Trigger
DEVICE DATA
device
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Trigger device setting 1) setting
2) 1) 2) 3) 4)
1)
3) Or
27
2) 4)
OBSERVATION
Set the trigger device Set the common
3) for each setting. *1 trigger device. *2
FUNCTION
STATUS
4)
Set the trigger device for each setting

28
TRIGGER ACTION
*1 It is necessary to specify additional record No. when reading/writing device value.
25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
*2 It is necessary to specify additional recipe No. and record No. when reading/writing device value. FUNCTION
 Operation in utility 29
Advanced recipe function can perform the following operation in utility.
• Advanced recipe file operation
TIME ACTION
• Recipe execution
FUNCTION
• G1P Unicode text file or CSV file conversion

Recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading the file to PC.
25.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Notifying the process status to the device of controller

Recipe can notify the status for read/write of device value with storing to the device of controller.
• Reading/writing being executed

• Reading/writing being completed
• Reading/writing being executed • Recipe process error
25.2.2 Relevant settings • Displaying advanced recipe function information in utility
25.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe
process error
 Storing file type

Recipe can read the device value of controller and store in recipe file.
Also, the data of recipe file can write to device.
Recipe can use the file type as shown below.
*1
CSV file
Binary file*2
Binary file (GT14, GT12, and GT11 only)
*1 The stored CSV file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.

*2 The binary file can be converted to a CSV file or Unicode text file. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.

23
25.2 Recipe Function
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
The recipe function enables reading or writing of a value from or to the specified device according to the operation status
of the device (on or off).
For the reading or writing procedure, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25. RECIPE
Example
Changing the quantity of used material according to the
25
products
Product A
D100: 20 D100: 20 51
D101: 42
RECIPE
D101: 42 52
D102: 22
D102: 22 94
D103: 65 Switch the
During product D103: 65 16
Product B A production production of A to B
D100: 51
D101: 52
a
b
c
20
42
22
Pr. A 26
d 65 Pr. B
D102: 94
D103: 16
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
25.2.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Recipe] [Recipe] from the menu to display the [Recipe List] dialog box. 27
The data for each recipe function are displayed.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
Set the new data for the recipe function.
Click this button to display the [Recipe] dialog box.
Set the selected data for the recipe function.

Click this button to display the [Recipe] dialog box.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Copies the selected data for the recipe function.
Pastes the copied data for the recipe function in the end of the list.
Deletes the selected data for the recipe function. 30

SCRIPT FUNCTION
Deletes all the set data for the recipe function.
Closes the [Recipe List] dialog box.
25.2 Recipe Function 25 - 11

 Recipe
Set the data for the recipe function.
(Example: Setting screen for the GT16) (Example: Setting screen for the GT11)
Recipe Name Set a recipe name. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)
Set the points of the device to be read or written.

The specified number of devices with consecutively starting from the start device is set.
Points The number of maximum points differs according to the data type of the devices.
• Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16: Up to 8192 points (Up to 4000 points for the GT10)
Device Points • Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32: Up to 4096 points (Up to 2000 points for the GT10)
Select the data type of the devices.

Data Type • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32
• Unsigned BIN32
Deletes the device value of the selected No.
Copies the device value of the selected No.
Recipe Edit Button Pastes the device value of the copied No. to the device value of the selected No.
*1
Reads the edited recipe data with a CSV file to GT Designer3.
*1
Stores the recipe data set on GT Designer3 as a CSV file.
A list of the devices that are set to read or write the recipe function data is displayed.
Clicking the No. selects the data, and the data can be edited by clicking the recipe edit buttons.
Set the start device that executes read or write the data for the recipe function. Set the
Device View device in the row of No. 1.
Device
Value Enter the device value to be written to the PLC when the condition is satisfied.
Set the device that executes the write of data and the trigger condition (on or off) for the recipe function.
Write Trigger1/ (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Write Trigger2 Set [Write Trigger2] to write the data when two conditions are satisfied.
The device writes the data only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are satisfied.
Set the device that executes the read of data and the trigger condition (on or off) for the recipe function.
Read Trigger1/ (Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Read Trigger2 Set [Read Trigger2] to read data when two conditions are satisfied.
The device reads the data only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are satisfied.
25 - 12 25.2 Recipe Function


23
Select whether to use the recipe file.
OPERATION LOG
The recipe file is not used.
Not use a recipe file
FUNCTION
The values stored in the built-in memory of the GOT (the value set in GT Designer3) are
(Write Only)
written to the device.
By using the recipe file with the recipe name set for the following, the devices are written
or read.
Select a drive that saves the recipe file.

24
GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: [A:Standard CF Card]/[B:Extended
Memory Card]
Drive Name
GT14: [A:Standard SD Card]/[D:Built-in SRAM]
FUNCTION
GT12, GT11: [A:Standard CF Card]/[D:Built-in SRAM]
LOGGING
GT10: [D:Built-in SRAM] (Fixed)
Set a folder name where the file is stored.

Use a recipe file (Read
Recipe File*2 and Write)
Folder Name in GOT
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used
25
By default, [Project Folder] of [GOT Type Setting] for [Common] is set.
Set a file name where the file is stored.

(For the GT14, GT12, and GT11, select the file format.)
RECIPE
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used
File Name
in GOT
By default, “RECIP " is set. ( : Recipe No.) 26

Create a recipe file with
the value set in this
When no recipe file exists in the drive set in the above, a recipe file is created by the
dialog if a recipe file is
DEVICE DATA
values set on GT Designer3.
TRANSFER
not available at the time
FUNCTION
of startup
Select this item to specify a file register name.

After selecting this item, set the drive No. and the file name.
The specification is only available when the following settings are satisfied. 27
• Set any of the followings in [Controller Type] for the controller setting.
[MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nD/M/NC/DR,CRnD-700], [MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nD/M/NC/DR],
[MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nNC/DR,CRnD-700] , [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS,MELDAS C6*],
OBSERVATION
[MELSEC-QnA/Q,MELDAS C6*] , [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion],
FUNCTION
[MELSEC-Q(Multi)] , [MELSEC-L]
STATUS
Specify a file
• When a device that executes the read or write is set in the file register (R, ER, ZR)
register
When no file register is specified, the file register with the file name specified by the QCPU in the "END" process is
the target file register.
Select the drive No. of a controller.

28
Drive When [MELSEC-L] is set in [Controller Type] for the controller setting, only the drive No.
TRIGGER ACTION
3 is available.
Set a file name.

File Name
(Up to 8 characters can be entered.) FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1 Import/Export
The exported CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file
Exporting to a CSV file

Add the setting using
R
The added contents

are displayed.

*2 Operation for the recipe file setting 23

Available operation for the recipe function differs according to the selected items.
OPERATION LOG
The following shows the operation differences.
FUNCTION
Item Available operation for the recipe function
The values stored in the built-in memory of the GOT (the values set on GT Designer3) are written to the
devices.
1) Write value
Write
24
Saved value in
Not use a recipe file (Write build in Memory device
Only)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
GOT
controller
• When [Create a recipe file with the value set in this dialog if a recipe file is not available at the time of
startup] is selected
25
When no recipe file exists in the specified drive with starting the GOT, a recipe file is created with the
values set on GT Designer3. Required memory capacity of the GOT differs according to the number of
the set values.
Select this item to write the values set on GT Designer3 into a controller.
RECIPE
1) Write value when starting GOT
Specified drive 2) Write the values of the
Value set by
GT Designer3
(A drive or others) recipe file.
Write
26
3) Read the device value device
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
GOT controller
Use a recipe file (Read and
Write) • When [Create a recipe file with the value set in this dialog if a recipe file is not available at the time of
startup] is not selected 27
When no recipe file exists in the specified drive with starting the GOT, a recipe file is not created. When
the data is only written, the recipe file is required by the user. (When the GOT reads device values from
the controller, a recipe file is automatically created in the memory card or the D drive.)
OBSERVATION
Because the value setting in GT Designer3 is not required, data volume transferred to the GOT can be
FUNCTION
decreased and download time can be shortened.
STATUS
Specified drive
1) User created (A drive or others) 1) Read device value
recipe file 2) Write the values of the Write 28
recipe file. device
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
GOT controller
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

POINT
(1) Memory card or D drive check when using the recipe function
The GOT executes the following operation according to the status of the memory card or D drive.
(a) When recipe file is not valid or corrupted
A system alarm "351:Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file." occurs and recipe operation is
stopped.
(b) When no memory card is installed in the GOT
A system alarm "352:Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting memory card." occurs.
(c) If the capacity of D drive is insufficient
A system alarm, "571: Capacity shortage of user memory (RAM)" appears.
(2) Reading/writing procedure for GT14, GT12, and GT11
When a device value read from a controller is stored to the D drive as a G1R file, editing of the stored G1R file
by a personal computer is not allowed.
(The data on the D drive can be written to the controller.)
To edit the data, save the data in a CSV file on the A drive.
D Drive
X10 (Reading trigger) OFF ON
D10 100 Device values of the controller are read. D10 100
D11 200 D11 200
D12 300 D12 300
X20 (Writing trigger) OFF ON
Value on D drive is written.
HINT
Precautions when executing recipe function
(1) When many read/write devices are set
Other processing such as monitoring of other object function or key input will not be executed until the
completion of the recipe function.
<Confirming the recipe function execution>
Set such as a lamp, which monitors the recipe in-processing signal of system signal 2-1, on the GOT screen,
and it is possible to confirm whether the recipe function is executed or not.
System signal 2-1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Recipe in-processing signal
Recipe in-processing signal Recipe in-processing signal
The lamp is lit while the recipe The lamp goes off at the completion
function is executed. of the recipe function.

(2) CSV file stored in memory card 23

A CSV file is created in a memory card for each recipe setting.
OPERATION LOG
Recipe name File name (can be randomly changed)
Recipe operation 1 RECIP001.CSV
FUNCTION
24
1)
2)
3)
4)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
5)
25
No Item Description
1) DATE File creation date and time
RECIPE
2) GROUP No. Recipe No.
3) GROUP NAME Recipe name
4) DEVICE Number of devices

26
5) ITEM NAME VALUE Device value
(3) G1R file stored in D drive (only when using GT14, GT12 or GT11)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
A G1R file is created in the D drive for each recipe setting.
FUNCTION
Recipe name File name (can be randomly changed)
Recipe operation 1 RECIP001.G1R
Recipe operation 2
Recipe operation 3
RECIP002.G1R
RECIP003.G1R
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
The recipe function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
[Environmental Setting] dialog box. FUNCTION

29
Notifying the recipe processing progress (Write device: System signal 2-1.b10) [System Signal 2-1]
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

25.2.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the recipe function.

(1) Maximum number of recipe settings
Up to 256 settings can be configured in one project.
To use the recipe function, install the option OS (Recipe) on the GOT. (The option OS is not required for the GT10.)

To use the recipe function with the GT15 or the GT11, mount the option function board on the GOT. (No option
function board is required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)
For the GT16, GT14, and GT12, no option function board is required.

(1) Recipe file saved in memory card or D drive
Only one recipe file can be saved in the memory card or D drive for one recipe setting.
For the recipe file data, only the read data are saved and historical data are not saved. (Old data is overwritten.)
When historical data are required, save data in the personal computer every time the recipe function is
executed.
(2) File data size
Refer to the following for the data size stored into a memory card/D drive when the recipe function is used.
functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
editors.

23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
The advanced recipe function enables reading or writing of a value from or to the specified device according to the
operation status of the device.
For the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function
25.3.1 Settings 25
 Advanced Recipe Common Setting
Select [Common] [Recipe] [Advanced Recipe Common] from the menu to display the [Advanced Recipe
Common Setting] dialog box.
RECIPE
Set the device to control the advanced recipe function.
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
Specify a common trigger device, and then set the device to read or write of the device value.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Set the device to control the read or write of the device value for the recipe specified in
[Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No. Storage Device].
External Control Device
When [External Control Device] is set, the subsequent devices of this device are
automatically set in sequential device order.
28
External Control
TRIGGER ACTION
Information Recipe No. Storage Stores the recipe No. when reading or writing a value with [External Control Device]. (1
Device to 32767)
Record No. Storage Stores the record No. when reading or writing a value with [External Control Device]. (1 FUNCTION
Device to 2000)
File Convert External Select this item to control advanced recipe file conversion with a device.
Control Displays required memory for advanced recipe file conversion.
Select this item to set the device to output the execution status of the advanced recipe.
29
TIME ACTION
Controls the controller notification of the execution status of the advanced recipe.
External Notification
FUNCTION
When [External Notification Information] is set, the subsequent devices of this device
External Notification Device
are automatically set in sequential order.
Information
Recipe No. Notification
Stores the recipe No. of the device value being written. (1 to 32767)
Device
Record No. Notification

30
Stores the record No. of the device value being written. (1 to 2000)
Device
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Delete Deletes the set data of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe].
25.3 Advanced Recipe Function 25 - 19

 Advanced Recipe List

Select [Common] [Recipe] [Advanced Recipe] from the menu to display the [Advanced Recipe List] dialog box.
The list of the advanced recipe setting is displayed and the advanced recipe setting is controlled.
Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be configured.
To configure this setting, set the advanced recipe common setting in advance.
Set the new data for the advanced recipe.

Click this button to display the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
Change the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.

Click this button to display the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
Copies the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.
Click this button to set [Destination No.] for the copied advanced recipe setting.
Pastes the copied data as the new data for [Destination No.] in the advanced recipe list.
Deletes the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.
Deletes all data for the advanced recipe setting.
Closes the [Advanced Recipe List] dialog box.
25 - 20 25.3 Advanced Recipe Function

(1) Advanced Recipe

23
(a) Basic tab
OPERATION LOG
Set the data for the advanced recipe function.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Set the recipe No. (1 to 32767) of the advanced recipe to set.
Recipe No.
Set a recipe name.(Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

26
Recipe Name
The set recipe name is displayed at creating the advanced recipe file in the utility.
Set the advanced recipe file setting.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
When selecting [Use], set the following.
Drive Name Select a drive where the file is stored.
Folder Name
27
By default, [Project Folder] of [GOT Type Setting] for [Common] is set.
OBSERVATION
Recipe File
FUNCTION
File Name Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT
STATUS
By default, ARP is set. ( : Recipe No.)
Include device
comments in
conversion target
Select this item to edit a device comment when creating an advanced recipe file by using
a Unicode text file or CSV file. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
This item is available only when [Include device comments in conversion target] is
Maximum number selected.
of characters Set the number of characters of a device comment. (Up to 32 characters can be
entered.) FUNCTION
Select this item to set the trigger conditions to read or write of the data.
25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value 29
Set the device that executes the write data and the trigger condition (on or off).
Write Trigger 1/ Set [Write Trigger 2] to be written the data when two conditions are satisfied. The data
TIME ACTION
Write Trigger 2 are written to the device only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are
FUNCTION
satisfied.
Trigger Device
Set the device that executes the read data and the trigger condition (on or off).
Read Trigger 1/ Set [Read Trigger 2] to be read the data when two conditions are satisfied. The data are
Read Trigger 2 read from the device only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are
satisfied. 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set the device that stores the record No. of the read or write of the target data.
Record No. Device (1 to 2000)

Configure the setting to control advanced recipe file conversion with a device.
To use this setting, enable the file conversion external control for the advanced recipe common setting.
Click the [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] button to select [File Convert External Control].
File Convert
External Control Convert Format Select a file format. (CSV/Unicode text)
To change the folder where the converted file is stored, set a drive name and folder
Storage location
name for the file.
(b) Device tab

Configure the device setting.
Set the number of blocks for the advanced recipe setting. (1 to 2048)
Block Number
Set the number of records for the advanced recipe setting. (1 to 2000)
Record Number
Inserts a block. To insert the block, select a row.
Inserts a record. To insert the record, select a column of the record.
Cuts, copies, and pastes the selected item.
Clears the device value of the selected record to 0.

Advanced recipe Multiple consecutive records can be selected.
edit button
Deletes the selected block or record.
To delete the block or record, select the block No. or the column of the record.
Multiple consecutive records can be selected.
*1 Reads the advanced recipe setting that is edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to
GT Designer3.
*1 Stores the data for the [Device] tab setting as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Change the record attribute.

To change the record attribute, select the column of the record.
Multiple consecutive records can be selected.
Click the [Record Attribute] button to display the [Record Attribute] dialog box.

23
OPERATION LOG
A list of the devices that are set to read or write the advanced recipe function data is displayed.
Set the device that executes read/write the advanced recipe function data.
FUNCTION
Device
Select the data type of the devices.

Device Type
• Bit • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32 24
• Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32
Set the device points to read/write in block unit.

Device List
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The set the continuous device points from head device are set.
Points Applicable points differ depending on [Device Type].
• Bit:1 point
• Signed BIN16/unsigned BIN16/BCD16: 1 to 32767 points
• Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32: 1 to 16383 points 25
Display Type Displays the display type of data to read or write.
Set a device comment. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

Device Comment
The set device comment is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Set the value to be read or written.
RECIPE
Record
The number of records can be changed in [Record Number].

26
POINT
DEVICE DATA
Multiple selection of records
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The multiple selection of the records is available by dragging the record title of the column. (The selected record
column is highlighted in blue.)
27
Record titles of columns
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1 Import/Export
The exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited Unicode text file or CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.

Addition is displayed.
POINT
When importing or exporting files on personal computer available for multilingual input
Importing or export the Unicode text file. With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly imported or
exported.

(c) Record Attribute 23

The selected record attribute is changed.
OPERATION LOG
For the record attribute change, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Displays the selected record No. (When the multiple records are selected, this item is not
Record No.
25
displayed.)
Set the record comment. (Up to 32 characters can be enterd.)

Record Comment
The record comment is displayed in utility at saving/loading record.
Not to set the device value*1 Select this item to set a record with no device value.
Not to overwrite the device value

Select this item not to be written a new device value over the device value stored in the record.
RECIPE
in a recipe file*1
*1 [Not to set the device value] and [Not to overwrite the device value in a recipe file] cannot be set at the same time.
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The advanced recipe function can control multiple advanced recipe settings in one project by setting the following items.
• Recipe No.
• Number of blocks
• Number of records
27
Max. 2048 No.32767
recipes
OBSERVATION
No.
10 100
Recipe No. No.
1
FUNCTION
STATUS
Block 1
Block 2 28
Block 3
Block 4
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
Max. 2048 blocks
No. of device points
is 32767 points.(A total of all blocks) Max. 2000 records
29
 Recipe No.
Recipe No. is to identify advanced recipe setting that will be a target of reading/writing the device value.
TIME ACTION
(1) Setting method

FUNCTION
The recipe No. is set on the [Basic] tab in the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
25.3.1 Settings
(2) Setting range 30
The recipe No. can be set in the range of 1 to 32767.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be set.

 Block
The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block can perform the following setting.
• Setting that multiple device type (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
• Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting
(1) Setting method
The number of blocks is set on the [Device] tab in the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
25.3.1 Settings
The following explains as example of setting that bit device and word device (signed BIN16 and signed BIN32)
exist in one advanced recipe setting.
2) Set [Device], [Device Type] or [Points] for each block.
1) Specify block number
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
(2) Setting range

For each advanced recipe setting, up to 2048 blocks can be set.
 Record
The record is setting unit for identifying a groups of device value to read/write.
Setting device value for writing to controller in record unit can set multiple values to the same device.
(1) Setting method
The number of records is set in the [Device] tab of the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
25.3.1 Settings
The following shows as example of setting two values (two records) in one device.
Specify record number
Record 1 Record 2
(2) Setting range

For each advanced recipe setting, up to 2000 records can be set.

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
(1) Maximum number of device points
FUNCTION
For each advanced recipe setting, up to 32767 points in total can be set.
Calculate as 1 point for 1 device regardless of word device or bit device.
However, when device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points for 1 device.
In the case of multiple blocks, it is a total for device points of all blocks. 24
Example:
In the case of block 1: 500 points, block 2: 2000 points, block 3: 30000 points, a total for No. of device points
will be 32500 points. (500 + 2000 + 30000 = 32500 points.)
FUNCTION
(2) When setting random device number
LOGGING
Device number can be set in one block is one point.
When setting random device number, set separating block.
(3) When the device type is bit 25
Device can be set in one block is one point (fixed).
(4) For No. of device points when No. of device points for each block is one point
When setting one point for each block as follows, max. No. of device points will be 2048 points.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)
RECIPE
Example: When all device type is bit
Max. 2048 blocks can be set in 26

one advanced recipe setting.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
When device type is bit, one device can be set in one block.
STATUS
For this, when all device type is bit, 2048 devices can be set.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

The following two methods show how to read or write a device value from or to a device of a controller.
• Reading or writing of the device depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
• Reading or writing of the device in the utility
 Reading or writing of a device value depending on status of device (ON/OFF)

By controlling the recipe with the devices, the device value is read or written.
(1) Reading or writing of a device value with specifying a common trigger device
By setting the external control device, all advanced recipe settings are controlled.
With the common trigger device, the external control device is used for reading or writing of the device value.
25.3.1 Settings
No.1 No.
2 3
Recipe No.
Specify conditions of recipe No., record No. and trigger conditions

to read/write device value in common trigger device.
(a) Details for device

Device Bit No. Signal name Description
Controls reading or writing the device value of the recipe specified in [Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No.
Storage Device].
Loading record ON: Writes the values to the device of the controller.
b0
trigger signal OFF: -
Saving record ON: Reads the values from the device of the controller.
b1
trigger signal OFF: -
b2 to b7 Must not be used -

External Control
Advanced recipe file ON: Converts the advanced recipe file.
Device*1 b8
convert signal OFF:-

ON: Converts the advanced recipe file reversely.
b9 reverse convert
OFF: -
signal
Advanced recipe
ON: Clears an advanced recipe process error.
b15 process error clear
OFF: -
signal
Recipe No. Stores the recipe No. when the device value is read or written with [External
-
Storage Device*1 Control Device]. (1 to 32767)
Record No. Stores the record No. when the device value is read or written with [External
-
Storage Device*1 Control Device]. (1 to 2000)
*1 When [External Control Device] is set, [Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No. Storage Device] are set in sequential device
order.

(b) Setting a target device that value is read or written 23

By using the device shown in (a), the target device that value is read or written is set.
OPERATION LOG
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
FUNCTION
• External control device: D100
• Recipe No. storage device: D101
• Record No. storage device: D102
• External notification device: D200 24
ON
Read/write of device value is
controlled in common trigger device! Loading record
trigger signal
FUNCTION
(D100.b0)
LOGGING
ON OFF
Record loading
D100. b0 Loading record trigger signal notification signal
(External Control Device.b0) : OFF ON (D200.b0)
D101 [Recipe No. Storage Device] : 2
D102 [Record No. Storage Device] : 1
Writing data to the device 25
RECIPE
26
<Recipe No.1>
Device Record 1 Record 2
DEVICE DATA
D10 500 550
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
D11 600 650
D12 700 750 Writing record 1 of recipe No. 2
D10： 100
<Recipe No.2>

D11： 200
D12： 300
27
D10 100 150
D11 200 250
OBSERVATION
D12 300 350
FUNCTION
STATUS
(2) Executing with specifying the condition of reading or writing of the device value for each
advanced recipe setting
The trigger device for reading or writing a device value and the targeted record No. are set for [Trigger Device] 28
of [Advanced Recipe].
TRIGGER ACTION
The trigger device can be set for each advanced recipe setting.
FUNCTION
No. 120
Recipe No. No.
1 100
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set the trigger device for each advanced recipe setting.


Device Description
Write Trigger 1 The trigger device writes a value to a device of a controller.

Executes the writing of values when the set conditions (ON/OFF) are satisfied.
Write Trigger 2 The write trigger 2 executes the writing of values when two conditions (AND condition) are satisfied.
Read Trigger 1 The trigger device reads a value from a device of a controller.
Executes the reading of values when the set conditions (ON/OFF) are satisfied.
Read Trigger 2 The read trigger 2 executes the reading of a value when two conditions (AND condition) are satisfied.
Record No. Device Stores the record No. of the target device that value is read or written. (1 to 2000)

(b) Setting a target device that value is read or written 23

By using the device shown in (a), the target device that value is read or written is set.
OPERATION LOG
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
FUNCTION
X20 ([Write Trigger 1]) : OFF ON
X20 ([Write Trigger 2]) : OFF ON
D100([Record No. Device]) : 1
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
<Recipe No.1> <Recipe No.2> 25
[Write Trigger 1] : X10 [Write Trigger 1] : X20
[Write Trigger 2] : X11 [Write Trigger 2] : X21
(Write)
D10 100
[Record No. Device] : D0 [Record No. Device] : D10
D11 200
Device Record 1 Record 2 Device Record 1 Record 2
D12 300
RECIPE
D10 500 550 D10 100 150
D11 600 650 D11 200 250
D12 700 750 D12 300 350
26
 Reading or writing of a device value in the utility
Specify the advanced recipe file and the target record No. in the utility to read or write from or to the device value of
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
the controller.
Without designing the dedicated screen for the advanced recipe function, the device value is read or written.
For utility operation, refer to the following.
User’s Manual for the GOT used 27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
1. Touch the record 28
to read/write.
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
2. Touch the Load record or Save record 29

GOT PLC PLC GOT
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

By storing the value read from the device in the advanced recipe file, the file is available for project or production
management on the personal computer.
The device value read from a controller can be stored in the advanced recipe file.
The value in the advanced recipe file can be written to a device of the controller.
Reading or writing the value as shown below, the advanced recipe file is required.
• Reading or writing of the device depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
• Reading or writing of the device in the utility
POINT
To create the advanced recipe file
The advanced recipe file is created by the set data of [Advanced Recipe].
Configure the setting for [Advanced Recipe] in advance.
25.3.1 Settings
 Creating an advanced recipe file and storage area

To create the advanced recipe file, operate any of the following method.
(1) Automatically creating when reading/writing the device value depending on the status of the
device (ON/OFF)
When the advanced recipe file does not exist at the read/write of the device value, the advanced recipe file is
automatically created.
As the advanced recipe file is automatically created, creating operation for the advanced recipe file is
unnecessary.
1. Set [Recipe File] to [Use] on the [basic] tab of [Advanced Recipe] in GT Designer3.
[Recipe File] setting
2. When the device value of a controller is read or written, an advanced recipe file is automatically created.
POINT
Timing of which an advanced recipe file is automatically created
The advanced recipe file is automatically created only when the advanced recipe file set for [Recipe File] does not
exist.
The existing advanced recipe file is not overwritten.
25.3.6 Precautions

(2) Creating in the utility

23
The following explains the procedure for creating the advanced recipe file when configuring the advanced recipe
OPERATION LOG
setting in GT Designer3 and reading or writing device value of the controller in the utility only.
FUNCTION
1. Touch the [Create G1P] button on the advanced recipe information in the utility.
24
2. Select the advanced recipe setting.
3. Touch the [Next] button to create an advanced recipe file.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Touch the Create G1P button.
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Select the Advanced Recipe Setting.
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Touch the Next button.
28
POINT
TRIGGER ACTION
To create the advanced recipe file in the utility
Configure the advanced recipe setting in GT Designer3 and download the data to the GOT. FUNCTION
The advanced recipe file is created by the advanced recipe settings downloaded to the GOT.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Project data of Advanced

Recipe Setting
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Displaying or editing the created advanced recipe file on the personal computer
The created advanced recipe file is a binary file (*.G1P).
To display or edit the advanced recipe file on the personal computer, convert the file to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
The following methods show how to convert the advanced recipe file to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
• Using GT Designer3
• Using the utility
• Using a device
(1) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file in GT Designer3

Convert the binary file stored in a memory card to a Unicode text file or CSV file by using GT Designer3.
1. Store the binary file on the personal computer with any of the following methods.
• Transferring the file with GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] [Communication with GOT] from the menu, and transfer
the file to the personal computer.
• Storing the file with a memory card or USB memory
Store the advanced recipe file in the memory card or the USB memory, and read the data from the
memory card or the USB memory by using the personal computer.
Advanced Memory card/ Memory card/ Advanced

recipe file USB memory USB memory recipe file
2. Select [Tools] [File Conversion] [Advanced Recipe File Conversion] from the menu to display the
setting dialog box on GT Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
Type Select the type of the file to be converted. (CSV/Unicode Text/G1P)
Path Specify the path of the file to be converted.
Select this item to convert all files (any of CSV/Unicode Text/G1P) that has the same
Source of
path as the path of the file to be converted.
Conversion
Target files in the With this item selected, the conversion log is automatically recorded for the specified
same path path.
With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result (OK/NG),
and the file creation date can be checked.
Type Select the type of the converted file (CSV/Unicode Text/G1P).

Destination File Displays the path (same as the path of the file to be converted) where the converted file
Path
is saved.

23
3. Display or edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.
The record attribute, the record comment, and the device value can only be edited on the Unicode text file
OPERATION LOG
or CSV file.
FUNCTION
1) 2) 3) 4)
24
10)
11)
12)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
13)
14)
25
5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
○: Can be edited ×: Cannot be edited
RECIPE
Can be or cannot
No. Item Description
be edited
1) Recipe No. Displays the recipe No. × 26

2) Recipe name Displays the recipe name. ×
Setting device
3) Displays the number of devices. ×
DEVICE DATA
number
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
4) Record number Displays the number of records. ×
5) Line number Displays the row number. ×
Device comment*4
6) Displays the device comment. Edit the device comment. ○
27
Displays the device type.
BIT: Bit
BIN16: Signed BIN16 or unsigned BIN16
OBSERVATION
7) Device type ×
BIN32: Signed BIN32 or unsigned BIN32
FUNCTION
BCD16: BCD16
STATUS
BCD32: BCD32
Displays the display type.
8) Display type
BIN: Binary
DEC: Signed decimal
× 28
UNSIGNED_DEC: Unsigned decimal
TRIGGER ACTION
Displays the device data size. (Unit: byte)
9) Device size Bit device or word device (16 bit): 2 ×
word device (32 bit): 4 FUNCTION
10) Record No. Displays the record No. ×
11) Record comment Displays the record comment. Edit the comment. ○
Displays the record attribute. Edit the attribute. 29

Blank : Applicable to edit device value*1 *3
12) Record attribute ○
P : Not applicable to edit device value*1 *3
N : No device value*2 *3
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
13) Record update time Displays updated time of the records in the advanced recipe file by being read the device value. ×
14) Device value Displays the device value. Edit the value. ○
*1 Make sure to set the value into the device value area of the above 14). (The blank is not allowed.)
When the value is not set, an error occurs at converting the Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file (*. G1P) on GT 30
Designer3.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*2 Do not set the value into the device area of the above 14). (Make the blank.)
Even if the value set, the set value is cleared when converting the Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file on GT Designer3.
*3 Correspondence to the record attribute that is set in GT Designer3 and displayed in the Unicode text file or CSV file
Operations when setting the record attribute
*4 If [Include device comments in conversion target] is not selected in the [Basic] tab, the device comment cannot be edited.

4. To use the advanced recipe file edited in the personal computer again, convert the Unicode text file or CSV
file to the binary file (*.G1P).
Open the [Advanced Recipe File Conversion] dialog box at the step 2., and convert the Unicode text file or
CSV file to the binary file.
5. Save the binary file in the memory card or USB memory, and install the memory card or USB memory in
the GOT.

POINT
(1) Converting Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file (*.G1P) in GT Designer3
For the conversion, the binary file is required.
When the binary file does not exist, store the binary file in the same hierarchy as that of the Unicode text file or
CSV file.
(2) Downloading advanced recipe file (Personal computer GOT)
The advanced recipe file cannot be downloaded to GT Designer3.
To transfer the advanced recipe file from the personal computer to the GOT, use a memory card or USB
memory.

(2) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file in the utility
23
Convert the binary file stored in the memory card to a Unicode text file or CSV file with the utility.
OPERATION LOG
The Unicode text file and CSV file can be created without GT Designer3.
FUNCTION
1. Select the G1P file for [Advanced Recipe Information] in the utility, and touch [G1P CSV] or [G1P TXT]
for the conversion. 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
G1P CSV , G1P TXT Button 26
2. Store the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
• Transferring the file with GT Designer3
FUNCTION
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] from the menu, and transfer the file to the personal
computer.
• Storing the file with a memory card or USB memory
Store the advanced recipe file in the memory card or the USB memory, and read the data from the 27
memory card or the USB memory by using the personal computer.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
3. Display the converted Unicode text file or CSV file and edit the file by using the personal computer.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(3) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file with the external control device
Convert a binary file stored in a memory card or USB memory to a Unicode text file or CSV file by turning on the
specified external control device.
To convert the file to the Unicode text file or CSV file, configure the following settings.
• External control information (Advanced Recipe Common Setting)
25.3.1 Advanced Recipe Common Setting
• File conversion external control (Advanced recipe (Basic tab))
25.3.1 Advanced Recipe List (1) Advanced Recipe
After the settings, convert binary files to CSV files or Unicode text files by turning on b8 (Advanced recipe file
convert signal) of the external control device.
Example) Setting and operation to convert a binary file (*.G1P) to a Unicode text file (*.txt)
• External control device: D100
• Recipe No. storage device: D101
• External notification device: D200
25.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error
Storing 50 to D101
The bit turns off when
Turning on D100.b8
ON D100.b8 turns off and
Advanced recipe file the file conversion is
convert signal completed.
(D100.b8)
ON
G1P Advanced recipe file
TXT converting notification
Binary Unicode signal (D200.b8)
file text file
File conversion
Converting the advanced recipe file
of recipe No. 50 to a Unicode text file
POINT
Precautions for file conversion with the external control device
Before converting an advanced recipe file, write the recipe No. for the advanced recipe to be converted into the
recipe No. storage device.
Even though b8 (Advanced recipe file convert signal) of the external control device turns on before writing the
recipe No., the advanced recipe file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
25.3.1 Settings
HINT
Converting the advanced recipe file reversely with the external control device
Turing on b9 (Advanced recipe file reverse convert signal) of the external control device can convert Unicode text
files or CSV files to binary files.

23
 Operation in the utility
In the utility, the following operations are available for the advanced recipe file.
OPERATION LOG
• Creating folder • Deleting folder • Copying file
FUNCTION
• Deleting file • Renaming file • Moving file
• Creating file • Saving record • Loading record
• Matching record • Delete device value • Converting G1P CSV/Unicode text
• Converting Unicode text/CSV G1P
The recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading out the file to the personal computer.
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(1) Advanced recipe file operation
Item Description
The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is created. 25

The folder is created for each line or line of products, and the advanced recipe file can be
managed.
Creating folder
RECIPE
Advanced recipe Advanced recipe Advanced recipe
file storage file storage file storage
folder for line 1 folder for line 2 folder for line 3
26
Management with creating folder for each line or line of products!
Deleting folder The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is deleted.
DEVICE DATA
The advanced recipe file is copied.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Copying file
Use it when the advanced recipe file is backed up.
Deleting file The advanced recipe file is deleted.
Renaming file The advanced recipe file is renamed.
The advanced recipe file is moved to other folder.

27
Moving file
Use it when the advanced recipe file is made backup.
OBSERVATION
The advanced recipe file is newly created.
Creating file
FUNCTION
25.3.4 Creating an advanced recipe file and storage area
STATUS
Converting G1P CSV/Unicode text The binary file (*.G1P) is converted to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
Converting Unicode text/CSV G1P The Unicode text file or CSV file is converted to the binary file (*.G1P).
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Operation for executing the recipe
Item Description
Load record The device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value) is written to controller device.
GOT PLC 25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
Save record The device value of controller is read and stored in the specified record.
PLC GOT 25.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
This operation checks whether the device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value) matches
with the device value of controller.
Use it to check whether the read value is reflected to the advanced recipe file.
Check whether
Device Record 1 Record 2 they are matched! D10 500
D10 500 100 D11 600
D11 600 200
D12 700
Match records D12 700 300
GOT PLC
Touch !
The device value (selected record value) in the advanced recipe file is deleted.
When the device value is deleted, the record attribute will be status for not setting device value.
Operations when setting the record attribute
Delete device value Device Record 1 Record 2

D10 500 100
D11 600 200 Delete the selected record device value!
D12 700 300

23
 Operations when setting the record attribute
In the advanced recipe function, the presence/absence of device value setting for each record or device value in the
OPERATION LOG
advanced recipe file can be changed.
FUNCTION
25.3.1 Settings
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(1) When device values are not set ([Not to set the device value])
By setting the record with no device value, file capacity can be saved.
(a) For reading 25
(Reading to record 2)
RECIPE
Device
D10
Record 1
500
Record 2
150 Previously setting when not
26
D11 600 250 setting the device value.
When read the device value,
D12 700 350
the read value is stored.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(b) For writing
(Writing to record 2) 27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
D10 500 Not setting of device value D10 :
D11 600 For not device value setting, D11 :
D12 :
28
D12 700 write can be performed.
By storing the read device value in the record of [Not to set the device value], the status of the device value
TRIGGER ACTION
setting is enabled, and the device value can be written.
FUNCTION
29
D10 500 150 D10 : 150
Not setting Setting
D11 600 250 D11 : 250
TIME ACTION
D12 700 350 D12 : 350

FUNCTION
(Writing to record 2)
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

D10 500 150 Device value setting
D10 : 150
D11 600 250
Write is allowed! D11 : 250
D12 700 350
D12 : 350

(2) When the device value is not overwritten

By setting [Not to overwrite the device value in a recipe file], the record cannot be overwritten.
Use a special record for being dedicated to store the value for writing to a controller device.
(a) For reading

D10 500 100 D10 : 150
D11 600 200 For not allowed to overwrite, D11 : 250
read is not allowed. D12 : 350
D12 700 300
(b) For writing
(Writing to record 2)

D10 500 100 D10 : 100
D11 600 200 Write is allowed! D11 : 200
D12 : 300
D12 700 300
POINT
(1) For check method of record attribute
Record attribute can be checked in the advanced recipe information of the utility.
(2) Corresponding to the setting of record attribute, utility, and record attribute displayed in the CSV file,
Unicode text file, or others
Setting for record attribute of GT Record attribute displayed in CSV file/

Record attribute displayed in utility
Designer3 Unicode text file
(Not setting) V (Blank)
Device Values are not set. (Blank) N
Device Values are not overwritten in Recipe

VP P
file.

25.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error 23
OPERATION LOG
To check whether an error occurs or not, check [External notification Device] for [Advanced Recipe Common
Setting].
FUNCTION
(1) External Notification Device
Storing the executing status into controller device can check the executing status of advanced recipe function.
When error occurs, the device value of controller cannot be read/written.
24
25.3.1 Settings
Device Bit No. Signal name Description
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Set the device to store information regarding to the advanced recipe function.
Record loading ON : Writing the value to controller device

b0
notification signal OFF : Completion of writing, or advanced recipe process error occurs.
Record saving ON : Reading the device value of controller

25
b1
notification signal OFF : Completion of reading, or advanced recipe process error occurs.
Record load ON : Completion of writing the value to controller device

b4
complete signal OFF : At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.
RECIPE
Record save ON : Completion of reading the device value of controller
b5
complete signal OFF : At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.
b6 to b7 Reserved - 26
ON : Converting the advanced recipe file.
b8 converting
OFF : Converting the advanced recipe file is not executed.
DEVICE DATA
notification signal
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
ON: Converting the advanced recipe file reversely
b9 reverse converting
OFF: Converting the advanced recipe file reversely is not executed.-
notification signal
Device*1 Advanced recipe file
ON: Advanced recipe file conversion error
OFF: No advanced recipe file conversion error
27
b10 conversion error
Remove the causes of the error and turn on the Advanced recipe process
signal
error clear signal (external control device .b15).
OBSERVATION
ON: Advanced recipe file reverse conversion error
FUNCTION
OFF: No advanced recipe file reverse conversion error
STATUS
b11 reverse conversion
error signal
b12 Must not be used - 28

ON: Advanced recipe file reverse conversion warning error
TRIGGER ACTION
OFF: No advanced recipe file reverse conversion warning error
b13 reverse conversion
warning error signal
FUNCTION
Advanced recipe
ON : Displaying advanced recipe information in utility
b14 information
OFF : Completion of advanced recipe information of utility
displaying signal
Advanced recipe
ON : Advanced recipe process error is occurring. 29
OFF : Advanced recipe process error is not occurring.
b15 process error
notification signal
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Stores the recipe No. of the device that value being written. (1 to 32767)
Recipe No. Notification
*1
- The stored recipe No. is updated when the reading or writing of the device
Device
value is started.
Stores the record No. of the device that value being written. (1 to 2000)
Record No. Notification
Device *1
- The stored record No. is updated when the reading or writing of the device 30
value is started.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1 When [External notification Device] is set, [Recipe No. Notification Device] and [Record No. Notification Device] are set in
sequential device order.

(b) Timing of ON/OFF

Timing of ON/OFF for each signal is shown.
• At being normally completed
Next read/write is started.
ON
OFF
Read/Write trigger
ON
Record saving/loading notification signal OFF
(External notification device. b0/b1)
ON
Record save/load complete signal OFF
Advanced recipe process error notification

OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)
• At being faulty completed
ON
OFF
Read/write trigger
ON When error occurs,
read/write is not allowed. *1
Record saving/loading notification signal OFF
Error occurs!
Record save/load complete signal OFF
ON
Advanced recipe process error notification
OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)
*1 When the causes of the advanced recipe process error is eliminated even if the advanced recipe process error notification signal
turns on, read/write of device value is allowed.
POINT
Operations when multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously
For details when another trigger device conditions are satisfied while the Advanced recipe information displaying
signal turns on, refer to the following.
25.3.6 Precautions
(2) Corrective actions for advanced recipe process error

Eliminate the advanced recipe process error with the following procedure.
1. When error occurs, the advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device. b15) turns
on, and the system alarm occurs.
Check the message of system alarm.
(Display example)
2. Eliminate the causes of error according to the message of system alarm.
3. Reset the system alarm.

• For the advanced system alarm: 11.4 Advanced System Alarm Display
• For the system alarm display: 11.7 System Alarm Display

23
4. Turn on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15) to perform error reset.
When turning on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15), the
OPERATION LOG
advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device. b15) is turned off.
FUNCTION
ON
Advanced recipe process OFF
error notification signal
(External output device. b15)
Error occurs! ON 24
Advanced recipe process
error clear signal OFF
(External control device. b15)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

25.3.6 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the advanced recipe function.

(1) Maximum number of advanced recipe settings
Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be configured in one project.
(2) Devices that are set in the advanced recipe common setting
[External Control Information] and [External Notification Information] cannot be set the same device.
The above devices cannot be overlapped with the following devices.
Screen switching device Switching station No. device Device of system information
(3) Estimate of processing time

It takes processing time depending on block numbers of advanced recipe setting.
To reduce processing, decrease the block number.
(Reference value)
• QCPU and CPU directly connection (device points: 32767 points setting, transmission speed: 115200bps)
• For 1 block setting : Approximately 17 seconds
• For 2048 block settings : Approximately 4 minutes
(4) Folder to store the recipe file
Do not overlap the file of other functions (advanced alarm function or other functions) with folder to store.
When performing the overlapped setting, the recipe file and the file of other functions are stored together in
folder.
The file of other functions is not displayed in utility.
For it, as the file in folder cannot be deleted, deleting folder in utility will not be allowed.
(5) Using the utility
When operating the advanced recipe in the utility, set [Recipe Name].
When [Recipe Name] is not set, only the recipe No. is displayed at creating the advanced recipe file in utility.
(6) Import/export
When an advanced recipe file with more than 251 records is exported to a Unicode text file or CSV file, display
the exported file with a text editor or Microsoft Excel 2007.
When the total memory capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the advanced
recipe function cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points and number of records, may not be set.
For calculating the setting data sizes of the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.1 Data Capacity List
For the free user space available for the GOT, refer to the following manual.
(8) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size
The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.
(9) The relationship between the record number and the setting size
When treating many data groups in the recipe, using the record to reduce the setting size is better than
increasing the setting number of the advanced recipe function.
Example: Setting size when 200 data groups are treated
(1 record 200 setting) size > (200 records 1 setting) size

(10) Recipe device setting value

23
When the default value is not required for the recipe, set [Not to set the device value] on GT Designer3. Setting
OPERATION LOG
this item reduces the setting data size. (The file data size is not changed.)
(11) Setting change of a device comment
FUNCTION
(a) Display range of characters in a device comment
If characters in a device comment exceed the maximum number of characters that can be displayed, the
characters out of the display range cannot be displayed.
Set the device comment within the maximum number of characters.
24
(b) Converting a Unicode text file or CSV file to a G1P file
If the device comment is changed and the number of characters is reduced, the reduced characters are
displayed as blank spaces.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
To use the advanced recipe function, install the option function OS (Advanced recipe) to the GOT.
25
To use the advanced function with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT. (No option function board
is required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)
RECIPE

(1) Record number applicable to read/write
Record number applicable to read/write in one setting is one record.
DEVICE DATA
Multiple records cannot be read/written simultaneously.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Read/write is performed
in record unit.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
(2) When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously
(a) When other trigger conditions are satisfied while reading/writing, the satisfied trigger conditions are
FUNCTION
ignored.
ON
Write trigger*1
(Example: Recipe No.1 trigger

OFF 29
of [Advanced Recipe])
Write trigger*1 OFF

TIME ACTION
(Example: Recipe No.2 trigger

FUNCTION
of [Advanced Recipe]) Ignored! Executed!

ON
Record loading notification signal OFF
(External notification device. b0)
*1 Correspond to trigger are shown below.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
• The read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe Common Setting]
• The read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe]

(b) When trigger conditions of different recipe No. are satisfied simultaneously
Execute reading/writing prior to recipe of small number.
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced OFF

Recipe] (recipe No.1)
ON

ON

ON

(External notification device.b0) Processing for Processing for Processing for
recipe No.1 recipe No.2 recipe No.3
(c) When trigger conditions of read/write are satisfied simultaneously

Execute prior to read.
Execute write after completion of reading.
ON
ON
Read trigger of [Advanced OFF

ON
Record saving notification signal OFF
(External notification device.b1)
ON
(d) When trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe] are satisfied
simultaneously
Execute with prior to trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe].
ON

Recipe Common Setting]
ON
Write trigger of OFF

[Advanced Recipe]
ON
(3) When simultaneously satisfied trigger conditions become unsatisfied before the processing
When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously, the processing is executed because they are not
satisfied before processing turn has come.
ON
ON
ON
When conditions of recipe
ON No.3 are not satisfied at
the processing, the processing
Record loading notification signal OFF is not executed.
(External notification device.b0) Processing Processing for
for recipe No.1 recipe No.2

(4) When the trigger conditions are satisfied while displaying advanced recipe information in utility
23
The trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] or [Advanced Recipe] are ignored.
OPERATION LOG
The presence/absence of utility operation can be checked in [External Notification Device] of [Advanced Recipe
Common Setting].
FUNCTION
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced OFF All kinds of trigger are ignored

24
Recipe Common Setting] while the advanced recipe
information displaying signal
turns on.
Recipe]
ON
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Advanced recipe information
displaying signal OFF
(5) For executing multiple recipes in order 25

Make the status of the trigger conditions satisfied until executing the processing.
When performing the process again after completion of the process, make the status of the trigger conditions to
not satisfied, and then satisfied again.
RECIPE
Do not execute the
process until trigger
conditions will be status
26
of not satisfied once.
ON
DEVICE DATA
ON
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
ON

27
(External notification device.b0) Processing for Processing for Processing for
recipe No.1 recipe No.2 recipe No.1
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
HINT
Useful method for executing multiple recipes in order
Turn off satisfied trigger conditions (trigger conditions are satisfied at ON OFF) in the advanced recipe setting.
28
Set the trigger device to OFF ON (trigger conditions are not satisfied) OFF at the status.
TRIGGER ACTION
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe]
FUNCTION
OFF
(recipe No.1)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe] OFF
(recipe No.2)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
29
ON

TIME ACTION

FUNCTION
Processing for Processing for Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1 recipe No.2 recipe No.1 recipe No.2
When setting the same devices to multiple trigger devices, multiple recipes can be executed depending on the
status of one device (OFF ON OFF) in order.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(6) When the trigger condition is satisfied

Only after the trigger condition is unsatisfied, the trigger condition can be satisfied.
If the unsatisfied period is too short, the GOT cannot recognize the unsatisfied period. Therefore, the processing
for the recipe may not be executed.
Since the write trigger is off for a short time, the GOT
cannot recognize the next satisfied trigger condition.
ON ON
Write trigger of [Advanced
Recipe] (recipe No.1) OFF
ON
Record loading notification signal
(External notification device.b0) OFF
Processing The processing for the recipe
for recipe No.1 No.1 is not executed.
(7) Saving a file

A memory card is required to save the file.
The memory card capacity must be larger than the size of the advanced recipe file to be saved.
For the size of the file that is saved in the memory card, refer to the following.
(8) When changing read/write target
Change read/write target (recipe No., record No.) after record load/save complete signal turns on.
When changing before record load/save complete signal turns on, next read/write may not be normally
performed.
(9) When read/write cannot be performed
When the binary file (*.G1P) of the file name is the same as that of the file created in different project, the device
value cannot be read/written.
Delete the binary file (*.G1P), and then execute the read/write of the device value.
(10) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already
When the advanced recipe file setting in [Recipe File] exists, the change is not reflected to the advanced recipe
file even if changing the setting (device value, number of records, and others) in GT Designer3.
For it, device value cannot be read/written in the changed settings.
When reading/writing device value in the changed settings, create the advanced recipe file with the following
procedure again.
1. Perform either of the following operations in utility.

• Delete the advanced recipe file.
• Change the file name of the advanced recipe file.
• Move the existing advanced recipe file to other area.
2. Download the changed advanced recipe setting into GOT.
3. Create the advanced recipe file.

• When reading/writing device value depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
As reading/writing device value, the file is automatically create.
• When reading/writing device value in utility

The advanced recipe file is created in utility.
(11) Setting change when an error occurs

When an error occurs, a recipe file may be created.
When changing the setting in GT Designer3 and reading or writing of the device value with the changed
settings, create the advanced recipe file again.
(10) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already
(12) Reading/writing of the device value in advanced recipe file moved or renamed
Match [Recipe File] of the advanced recipe setting to the file of moved or renamed.
Download the advanced recipe setting to the GOT after the setting change.

(13) Advanced recipe file conversion by the utility

23
When advanced recipe files (*.G1P) are converted to CSV files or Unicode text files by the utility, convert the
OPERATION LOG
advanced recipe files one by one.
FUNCTION
(14) Unicode text file converted in the utility or GT Designer3
For the precautions for using the Unicode text file, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File 24
functions for editing files, including MicrosoftExcel.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
editors.
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


TRIGGER ACTION


23
26. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The device data transfer function enables the GOT to read values of specified devices and write the values into the other
devices at any timing or by trigger intervals.
Trigger condition : When D0.b0 turns on
Source device : D100 of controller 1
25
Destination device: R100 of controller 2
D0.b0: 0 1 Controller 2
Condition satisfied !! Transferring device data
RECIPE
Destination device
R100: 0 200
26
Controller 1
Source device
DEVICE DATA
D100: 200
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
 Collecting controller data without sequence program 27
With the device data transfer function, the GOT can collect controller data without a sequence program.
Example 1) When collecting controller data without device data transfer function
OBSERVATION
A sequence program is required for collecting controller data. (The GOT monitors the data only.)
FUNCTION
STATUS
Collecting data (Sequence program)
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
Sequence program for collecting data
29
Example 2) Collecting controller data with device data transfer function
By setting the device data transfer, a sequence program is not required.
TIME ACTION
Collecting data (Device data transfer function)

FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device data transfer setting
26 - 1

26.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Device Data Transfer] from the menu to display the [Device Data Transfer List] dialog box.
The set data for the device data transfer is displayed in a list and controlled.
Up to 255 device data transfer settings are available.
Set the new data for the device data transfer setting.
Click this button to display the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
Change the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
Click this button to display the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
Copies the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
After clicking this item, set [Destination ID] of the copied data for the device data transfer setting.
Pastes the copied data as the data of the set device data transfer ID in the list.
Deletes the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
Deletes all data for the device data transfer setting.
Closes the [Device Data Transfer List] dialog box.

23
 Device data transfer
OPERATION LOG
(1) Basic tab
Set the device data transfer trigger and the external notification information.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Device Data Set the device data transfer ID (1 to 255) corresponding to the device data transfer setting to be set.
Transfer ID 26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting
Device Data Set the name of the device data transfer setting. For the device data transfer name, up to 32 characters,
RECIPE
Transfer Name including one-byte and two-byte characters, can be entered.
Set conditions for transferring device values.
Select a trigger type for transferring device values.

26
•Rise •Fall •Sampling
Trigger Type When [Sampling] is selected, set the interval between executions of the device data
transfer. (GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: 1 to 36000, GT14: 5 to 36000)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Set a device for the selected [Trigger Type].

External Control
Set this item to select [Rise] or [Fall], or to use the transfer inverting flag device for
Device Data Device
Transfer Trigger
[Sampling].
Bit 0 of the device set for [External Control Device] is specified.

27
When trigger conditions are met, the GOT transfers the source device value to the
Trigger Device destination device.
OBSERVATION
(2) Device tab
FUNCTION
This item is available only when [Rise] or [Fall] is selected.
STATUS
Bit 1 of the device set for [External Control Device] is specified.
Transfer Inverting When trigger conditions are met, the source and destination devices are inverted.
28
Flag Device
26.3 External control device
Set the device for notifying the transfer status.
TRIGGER ACTION
26.3 External control device
Select this item to set the device that notifies the device data transfer status.
External Notification After selecting this item, set the device. FUNCTION
Device
Information Device Data
Transfer Notification
Bit 0 of the device set for [External Notification Device] is specified.
The signal notifies that the GOT transfers device data in process.
29
Signal
Device Data
Bit 15 of the device set for [External Notification Device] is specified.
Transfer Error
TIME ACTION
The signal notifies that errors occur during transferring device data.
FUNCTION
Notification Signal
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Device tab

Set the source device, destination device, and others.
Set the number of blocks (1 to 2048) for device data transfer settings.
Block Number
26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting
Inserts a block on the selected row.
Cuts, copies, or pastes the selected row.
Clears a comment.
Device data transfer
edit buttons*1 Deletes the selected setting. Select a row to delete the setting.
*1 Reads edited setting data as Unicode text files or CSV files to GT Designer3.
Stores the device data transfer setting data set with GT Designer3 (setting data on
*1
the [Device] tab) as Unicode text files or CSV files.
Displays the source device and the destination device for transferring device data in a list.
Select a data type of the devices.

Device Type •Bit •Signed BIN16 •Unsigned BIN16 •Signed BIN32
•Unsigned BIN32 •BCD16 •BCD32 •Real
Set the number of points for devices to be transferred per block.

26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting
The consecutive devices starting from the head device equivalent to the set points
are specified.
The settable number of points for one device data transfer ID differs according to the
GOT type and [Device Type].
Points • GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000
Bit: 1 point
Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16/BCD16: 1 to 32767 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real: 1 to 16383 points
• GT14
Bit: 1 point
Device list Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16/BCD16: 1 to 10000 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real: 1 to 5000 points
Set the device with values to be transferred to the destination device.

Source Device*2
Set the device that stores transferred values read from the source device.
Destination Device*2
Set a comment. (Up to 32 characters, including two-byte and one-byte

Comment characters, can be entered.)
The set comment is displayed as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Displays the offset target and the offset device.

Click the [...] button to display the [Offset setting] dialog box.
Offset (a) Offset setting

For details of the offset, refer to the following.

*1 Import/Export 23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
The addition is displayed. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
POINT
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment. Characters in a file can be correctly
imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

*2 Setting same device for source device and destination device
When a device set for the source device is set for the destination device in one device data transfer setting, the GOT
may not correctly transfer the device data.
For setting the same device for the source and destination devices, set a device for the source device in one device
data transfer setting, and set the same device for the destination device in another device data transfer setting.
The following shows a setting example.
Example: When transferring values of D100, D105, D110 to D110, D115, D120 (D100 is set for the source and
destination devices.)
Device data transfer ID Trigger type Trigger device Number of blocks Source device Destination device
1 Sampling D1000.b0 1 D110 D120
D100 D110
2 Sampling D1000.b0 2
D105 D115
When the same trigger device (D1000.b0) is set in multiple device data transfer settings, the GOT executes the
device data transfer with the smallest device data transfer ID first.
The GOT transfers the value of D110 to D120 before transferring the value of D100 to D110. As a result, the GOT can
transfer the value of D110 that is not overwritten with the value of D100 to D120.
Device data transfer ID Trigger type Trigger device Number of blocks Source device Destination device
D110 D120
1 Sampling D1000.b0 3 D100 D110
D105 D115
When the above settings are set in one device data transfer setting, the GOT transfers the value of D100 to D110
before transferring the value of D110 to D120, and the value of D110 is overwritten with the value of D100.
After that, the GOT transfers the value of D110 to D120. As a result, the value of D100 is stored in D120.
(a) Offset setting

Set the offset target and the offset device.
When [Bit] is selected for [Device type], and the word device is set for [Source Device] or [Destination
Device] as bit devices, the offset is not available.
Select the offset target.

Offset Target
•None •Source •Destination •Both
Set the offset device.

This item can be set when [Offset Target] is set to [Source], [Destination], or [Both].
Offset Device
When [Offset Target] is set to [Both], one offset device can be set for both [Source Device] and
[Destination Device] in common.

26.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting 23
OPERATION LOG
The device data transfer function can control multiple device data transfer settings in one project by setting the following
items.
FUNCTION
• Device Data Transfer ID
• Block Number
Max. 255 IDs

255 24
Device data transfer ID 1 10 100
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Block 1
Block 2
25
Block 3
Block 4
Max. 2048blocks
Max. number of device points
RECIPE
is 2048 (total of all blocks)
 Device data transfer ID 26

A device data transfer ID is a number that identifies the corresponding device data transfer setting.
(1) Setting method
DEVICE DATA
The device data transfer ID is set on the [Basic] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
26.1 Settings
(2) Setting range
The setting range for the device data transfer ID is 1 to 255. 27
 Block
OBSERVATION
A block is a setting unit for setting random device numbers or different device types.
The following settings are available by setting device numbers or device types per block.
FUNCTION
STATUS
• Setting different types of devices, including bit data and word data, in one setting
• Setting consecutive device number settings and random device number settings in one setting
(1) Setting method
The number of blocks is set on the [Device] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
26.1 Settings
The following shows an example of setting bit devices and word devices (signed BIN16 and signed BIN32) in
one device data transfer setting. FUNCTION
2 Set [Device Type], [Points], [Source Device], and

[Destination Device] per block.
29
1 Specify the number of
blocks.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(2) Setting range

For each device data transfer setting, up to 2048 blocks can be set.

POINT
(1) Maximum device points
Up to 32767 device points can be set for each device data transfer ID.
(Up to 10000 device points for the GT14)
One double-word device is counted as two points.
When multiple blocks are set, the device points for a device data transfer setting are the total device points of
all the blocks.
Example)
In the case of block 1: 30 points, block 2: 70 points and block 3: 120 points
The number of device points in this setting is counted as 220 points (30 + 70 + 120).
(2) When setting random devices
One device can be set for one block.
Set random devices in different blocks.
(3) When device type is bit
The device that can be set for one block is one point (fixed).
(4) Maximum device points when device point for each block is one point
When the device point for each block is set to one point as below, up to 2048 device points can be set. (That
is because up to 2048 blocks can be set for one device data transfer setting.)
Example) When setting all device types to bit
Up to 2048 blocks can be set for

one device data transfer setting.
When the device type is set to [Bit], only one point can be set for one block.
When the device types for all the blocks are set to [Bit], up to 2048 points
can be set.
(Because up to 2048 blocks can be set.)

23
OPERATION LOG
The device data transfer function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FUNCTION
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings.

24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Turning on the signal clears the error device data transfer ID and the device data transfer
GS510.b0
error count (Device data transfer error clear signal)
Turning on the signal clears the device data transfer processing time, device data transfer
minimum processing time, and device data transfer maximum processing time. (Device
data transfer processing time clear signal)
GS510.b1
25
Storing the device data transfer ID with an error when an error occurs during transferring
GS642
device data (Error device data transfer ID)
Storing the number of error occurrences during transferring device data (Device data
GS643
RECIPE
transfer error count)
Storing the processing time for transferring device data (Device data transfer processing
GS644
time)
Storing the device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer when GS644
26
GS645
stores the processing time (Device data transfer ID)
Storing the minimum processing time among data stored in the device data transfer
DEVICE DATA
GS646
processing time (Device data transfer min. processing time)
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
GS647
stores the minimum processing time (Device data transfer ID (min. processing time)
Storing the maximum processing time among data stored in the device data transfer
processing time (Device data transfer max. processing time)
GS648
27
GS649
stores the maximum processing time (Device data transfer ID (max. processing time)
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

26.3 Actions
The device data transfer function is available by setting the devices or the set sampling cycle. ([Rise]/[Fall]/[Sampling])
26.1 Device data transfer
The following devices are available for the device data transfer function.
• External control device
• External notification device
 External control device

The device is a trigger to execute the device data transfer.
(1) Trigger device (External control device .b0)
The device transfers the source device value to the destination device.
(2) Transfer inverting flag device (External control device .b1)
The device inverts the source device and the destination device.
With inverting the source device and the destination device, data can be transferred from the source device to
the destination device and vice versa by one device data transfer setting.
The following shows the relation among the transfer inverting flag device, source device, and destination device.
(a) When transfer inverting flag device is off
The GOT transfers device data from the source device to the destination device.
Source device: Destination device:

GD100 Transferring device data
D100
(b) When transfer inverting flag device is on

The GOT transfers device data from the destination device to the source device.
Source device: Destination device:

GD100 Transferring device data D100
POINT
(1) Alternative to the script function
Substituting the device data transfer function for the bmov instruction of the script function is available.
With the device data transfer function, the GOT communicates with controllers only when trigger conditions
are met. Therefore, the GOT has no communication loads by always monitoring the device used for the script
function.
For the script function, refer to the following.
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
(2) Timing to invert the source device and destination device
Turn on the transfer inverting flag device before turning on the trigger device, or turn on the transfer inverting
flag device and the trigger device at once by the word data.
26 - 10 26.3 Actions

23
 External notification device
The GOT can output the device data transfer status to devices.
OPERATION LOG
Doing so enables checking the execution status of the device data transfer function.
FUNCTION
(1) Device data transfer notification signal (External notification device.b0)
The signal notifies that the device data transfer is in process.
• When the device data transfer trigger condition is met, the signal (.b0) turns on.
• When the device data transfer trigger condition is not met and the device data transfer is completed, the 24
signal (.b0) turns off.
The next device data transfer can be executed when the processing device data transfer is completed, even if
the signal is on.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(2) Device data transfer error notification signal (External notification device.b15)
The signal notifies if errors occur during transferring device data.
• The signal (.b15) turns on when errors occur during transferring device data.
• The signal (.b15) turns off when the device data transfer executed after an error occurs is correctly 25
completed.
The following shows the actions and corrective actions for the device data transfer when an error occurs.
When an error occurs, the following actions are executed.
ON ON
RECIPE
Device data transfer trigger OFF
(Example: Device data transfer ID 1)
Device data transfer notification signal ON ON 26

(Example: External notification device .b0 OFF
of device data transfer ID 1)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Error
Transferring device data (GOT) occurred
ON
Device data transfer error notification signal
(Example: External notification device. b15 OFF
27
OBSERVATION
Error device data transfer ID
(GS642) 0 1 0
FUNCTION
STATUS
Device data transfer error count 0 0 0
(GS643)
ON 28
Device data transfer error clear signal OFF
(GS510.b0)
1. The device data transfer error notification signal (external notification device.b15) turns on. TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
2. The error device data transfer ID (GS642) stores the device data transfer ID corresponding to the device
data transfer with the error.
3. The number of error occurrences with the device data transfer is counted. 29
4. A system alarm occurs.
When the system alarm occurs, check the message and remove the error causes.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
For system alarms and corrective actions, refer to the following manual.
5. Execute the device data transfer again.

30
6. When the transferring is normally completed, the device data transfer error notification signal (external
SCRIPT FUNCTION
notification device.b15) turns off.

For clearing the error device data transfer ID (GS642) and the device data transfer error count (GS643),
turn on the device data transfer error clear signal (GS510.b0).
26.3 Actions 26 - 11

26.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the device data transfer function.

(1) Maximum number of device data transfer settings
Up to 255 device data transfer settings can be configured in one project.
(2) Estimate of processing time
The processing time depends on the number of blocks for the device data transfer setting.
For shortening the processing time, reduce the number of blocks.
(Reference value)
Connecting to QCPU with direct CPU connection (Device points: 32767, transmission speed: 115200bps)
• When the number of blocks is 1: Approximately 31 seconds
• When the number of blocks is 2048: Approximately 159 minutes
When the total memory capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the device data
transfer function cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points, may not be set.
For calculating the setting data size of the device data transfer function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.1 Data Capacity List
For the free space of the GOT user area, refer to the following manual.
(4) Comments and setting data size
[Comment] set on the [Device] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box significantly affects the setting data
size of the device data transfer.
Therefore, setting comments for each device increases the setting data size.
(5) Changing [Device type]
Set [Device type] before setting [Source Device] and [Destination Device].
When the set [Device type] is changed to a device type with a different data length, settings for [Source Device]
and [Destination Device] are cleared.
Example 1) When data length is different between before and after changing [Device type]
Before change After change Result
Settings for [Source Device] and [Destination Device] are cleared because the data
Signed BIN16 Real
length is changed from 16 bits to 32 bits.
Example 2) When data length is the same between before and after changing [Device type]
Before change After change Result
Settings for [Source Device] and [Destination Device] are not changed because the
Signed BIN16 BCD16
data length is the same.
To use the device data transfer function, install the extended function OS (Device Data Transfer) on the GOT.

23
OPERATION LOG
(1) Device data transfer and GOT status
The device data transfer cannot be executed with some GOT statuses.
FUNCTION
The device data transfer cannot be executed during the following processing.
• The GOT downloads project data.
• The GOT installs OSs.
• The GOT restarts. 24
When the device data transfer is interrupted because of the above processing, values in the source device and
destination device for the transfer are not synchronized.
When the device data transfer is interrupted, execute the device data transfer again after the GOT completes
the above processing.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(2) When the device data are not transferred as required
The device data may not be transferred correctly due to the following causes or others.
• The communication time between the GOT and a controller takes time because of high device points to be
transferred.
25
• Two or more trigger conditions are met during a device data transfer.
• Functions other than the device data transfer function, including the logging function and recipe function, are
set.
RECIPE
When the device data is not transferred, take any of the following actions.
• When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], reduce the device points for one device data transfer setting
enabled with short intervals. (Set device data transfer settings enabled with long intervals separately from 26
those enabled with short intervals.)
Device data transfer setting
DEVICE DATA
(Device data transfer ID 1)
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Interval: 10 ( 100ms)
Devices to be transferred
D100
D102
D200
D202
D101
D103
D201
D203 27
D104 D204 D105 D205
D106 D206 D107 D207
D108 D208 D109 D209
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Divide the settings.
Device data transfer setting Device data transfer setting 28

(Device data transfer ID 1) (Device data transfer ID 2)
TRIGGER ACTION
Interval: 10 ( 100ms) Interval: 100 ( 100ms)
Devices to be transferred Devices to be transferred

D100 D200 D101 D201 FUNCTION
D102 D202 D103 D203
D104 D204 D105 D205
D106 D206 D107 D207
D108 D208 D109 D209 29
Setting with short intervals Setting with long intervals
• Make sure that the trigger condition is met when the device data transfer notification signal is off.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
26.3 External notification device

• Set a higher transmission speed in the communication detail settings if the transmission speed can be
changed.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(3) When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met

(a) When trigger condition for another device data transfer setting is met during device data transfer
The GOT cannot detect that the trigger condition for another device data transfer setting is met.
ON
ON
ON
Device data transfer notification signal
of device data transfer ID 1) Not
Executed!
detected!
ON
OFF
(Example: External notification device .b0
Transferring device data (GOT)
For ensuring the device data transfer, set [Trigger Type] to [Rise], and establish a handshake with the
trigger device and the device data transfer notification signal.
1. ON
ON
2.
ON
(Example: External notification device .b0 OFF 3.
ON
4.
1. Turn on the device data transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1).
2. The device data transfer notification signal (Device data transfer ID: 1) turns on. Turn off the device data
transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1), and then turn on the device data transfer trigger (Device data
transfer ID: 2) only.
3. When the device data transfer is completed and turn off the device data transfer trigger (Device data
transfer ID: 1), the device data transfer notification signal (Device data transfer ID: 1) turns off.
4. The next device data transfer can be executed. The device data transfer corresponding to the device data
transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 2) turned on in the step 2. is executed.

(b) When trigger conditions for different device data transfer IDs are simultaneously met 23
The GOT executes the device data transfer corresponding to the smallest device data transfer ID first.
OPERATION LOG
ON
FUNCTION
ON
Device data transfer trigger OFF 24
ON
FUNCTION
LOGGING
ON
OFF
25
ON
OFF
RECIPE
ON
OFF
of device data transfer ID 3) 26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
When trigger conditions for multiple device data transfer IDs are met after device data transfer is
completed, the GOT executes the device data transfer. The smallest device data transfer ID next to the
device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer is transferred.
Example) When the device data transfer (Device data transfer ID: 2) is completed (turning on the device 27
data transfer trigger), and the device data transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1, 3) is met, the GOT
executes the device data transfer (Device data transfer ID: 3).
OBSERVATION
(4) Using Unicode text files
FUNCTION
For precautions for using Unicode text files, refer to the following.
STATUS
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application 28
functions for editing files, including Microsoftâ Excel.
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
editors.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
This function enables operations such as turning a device ON/OFF and writing a value when the specified conditions are
FUNCTION
LOGGING
satisfied.
Condition
satisfied
Write 25
RECIPE
Operate
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
 Available setting conditions
Up to two settings are available for the following conditions.
• Turning on or off a bit device
• Range specification of word device values 27
 Write or other operations allowed when conditions are satisfied
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
• Turning ON a bit device when the condition is satisfied
STATUS
• Turning ON/OFF a bit device
• Reversing a bit device status
• Writing a value into a word device
• Outputting sounds with external speakers (Only applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000)
28
TRIGGER ACTION
 Types of status observation functions
The status observation function can be set with the following two types of monitoring method. FUNCTION
• Status observation of project common devices
In one project, the GOT monitors the devices satisfied with the specified conditions.
• Status observation of devices in each screen 29
When the GOT only displays the monitoring target screen, the GOT monitors the devices satisfied with the
specified conditions.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
27 - 1

27.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Status Observation] from the menu to display the [Status Observation] dialog box.
Set the monitoring method for the status observation function.

• Status observation of the project common devices (Setting in the [Project] tab)
• Status observation of the devices in each screen (Setting in the [Screen] tab)
Screen Type Select a screen for setting the status observation function. (Base Screen/Window Screen)
(for screen tab only) (For the GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
Screen No. Set the screen number of the screen to configure the status observation function settings.
(for screen tab only) Click the [Browse] button to check the screen image.
Displays the data (trigger conditions, actions) in a list for the status observation function.
Adds new data for the status observation function.

*1 Up to 512 settings can be set in one project.
Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box, and set the data for the status
observation function.
List of Status
Change the selected data for the status observation function.
Observation
Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box.
Function data
Copies the selected data for the status observation function.
Pastes the copied data for the status observation function to the end of the list.
Deletes the selected data for the status observation function.
Select the observation cycle for the status observation function. (Ordinary/Sampling)
Observation Cycle
When selecting [Sampling], set the sampling cycle (time). (1 to 60 second)
*1 To set multiple data for the status observation function, set [N/W No.] and [Station No.] for the [Trigger/Action] dialog box. The
set [N/W No.] and [Station No.] must be the same as those of the multiple data.
POINT
Constant observation for the devices satisfied with set trigger conditions
By setting [Ordinary] for [Observation Cycle], the status of the device set in the [Trigger] tab is monitored. The
status of the device is monitored when END processing of sequence program scan time or link scan time is
completed.

23
 Trigger/Action
OPERATION LOG
(1) Trigger tab
Set the trigger conditions to execute the status observation function.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.
Up to two triggers can be set. (Setting one trigger only is allowed.)
With two triggers, the status observation function is executed when both triggers are satisfied.
After setting the trigger, set the device that is used as the trigger.
26
DEVICE DATA
ON Executes operation when the bit device turns on.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
OFF Executes operation when the bit device turns off.
Executes operation when the word device value is within the set range.
To use this item, set the following triggers.
Trigger1/Trigger2 Data Size Select the data size for the word device. (16bit/32bit) 27
Data Type*1
•Signed BIN •Unsigned BIN •BCD •Real
OBSERVATION
Word Range Set the word device value range to satisfy the trigger conditions.
FUNCTION
For the word device value, set the operator in the left, and the constant in the right.
STATUS
Example)
Specified Range
[<=], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is less than
of Word Device
100.
Value
[==], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is equal to 100. 28
[!=], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is not equal to
100.
TRIGGER ACTION
Delete Deletes the data of [Trigger2].
Select this item to switch multiple devices to be monitored the devices. (Only for each screen observation) FUNCTION
Offset After selecting this item, set the offset device.
Data size is fixed as 16bits.
29
*1 The real number can be set only when [32bit] is selected for [Data Size].
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Action tab

Set the data of the action for the status observation function.
Select the type of action for the status observation function when the trigger are satisfied.
Momentary Turns on a bit device only while the triggers are satisfied.
Set Turns on a bit device.
Reset Turns off a bit device.
Action Altimate Switches the current status of the bit devices (OFF ON)
Data Set (16bit/32bit) Writes the value to the word device (16 bits/32 bits).
Outputs the sound. (Only the GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000)

After selecting this item, set the number for a sound file to be output.
Sound Output Click the [Browse] button to select the sound in the list.
Set the target device when the trigger is satisfied for status observation function.
Set the number of action devices (points) when the trigger is satisfied.
The maximum number of device points differs according to [Action].
Points • 40 points: Momentary/Set/Reset/Altimate
• 20 points: Data Set (16bit)
• 10 points: Data Set (32bit)
Select the data type of the data that is written to the device when [Data Set (1616bit)] or
Data [Data Set(32bit)] is set for [Action]. (For the real number, only the data set (32 bits))
•Signed BIN •Unsigned BIN •BCD •Real
Select the setting method of the device.

When more than two points are set for [Points], select [Continuous] or [Random].
Select this item to enable writing other word device value into this
*1
word device when the trigger is satisfied.
Indirect
When two or more points are set in [Points], select [FMOV] or
Storing Device Device Settings [BMOV].
Sets the specified number of devices continuously with starting from

Continuous
the set device automatically.
Sets the devices one by one arbitrarily.

Random
(This item cannot be selected when the GT10 is used.)
Displays the target devices for when the trigger is satisfied.

Device Click each column to set the device.
Displays the target word device to be written to [Device].

Indirect
Click each column to set the device.
Select this item to enable writing a fixed value into the word device when the trigger is
Fixed*1 satisfied.
After selecting this item, set the fixed value.

*1 Fixed and Indirect 23

When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are set, the fixed value or other word device value can be written into the set device.
OPERATION LOG
[Fixed] and [Indirect] can be set simultaneously.
FUNCTION
(1)[Fixed] (2)[Indirect]
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Write fixed value(50) into D100 when trigger is satisfied. Write value of D200 into D100 when trigger is satisfied.
(3)[Fixed] + [Indirect]
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
Write value of D200 + fixed (50) into D100
when trigger is satisfied.
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

When two or more setting device points are set for the indirect setting (as shown in above (2), (3)), select the write
action to the device. (When the fixed is set, the fixed value is added to the written value.)
• FMOV
When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current value of the word device specified in [Indirect] to the set
device.
• BMOV
When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current values of multiple word devices specified in [Indirect] to the set
device.
(1) FMOV (2) BMOV
When trigger is satisfied, writes D200 value When trigger is satisfied, writes values of D200
into D100 to D104. to D204 into D100 to D104 respectively.

The status observation function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings.
Keeping on during one cycle from the switching of the base or window screen to the
completion of object processing for status monitoring on the screen (Base screen initial GS0.b2
scan complete signal: write device)
Keeping on during one cycle from the switching of the base screen to the completion of
object processing for status monitoring on the screen (Base screen initial scan complete GS1.b2
signal: write device)

23
27.3 Precautions
OPERATION LOG
This section explains the precautions for using the status observation function.
FUNCTION
(1) Maximum number of status observation settings
Up to 512 status observation settings can be configured in one project or screen. 24
(2) Maximum number of points for the writing action
Action Maximum points
FUNCTION
•Momentary •Set •Reset •Altimate 40
LOGGING
•Data Set (16bit) 20
•Data Set (32bit) 10
25
(3) Data size of the status observation function
When data size exceeds 64k bytes, even if the number of status observation settings is fewer than 512, no more
status observation settings can be set.
Change the settings to be the data size less than 64k bytes.
RECIPE
(4) When the observation cycle does not function as set
(a) When the setting of the observation cycle is not correct 26
When the object with the offset function specified is set on the screen, the trigger device monitored in the
status observation function is delayed.
DEVICE DATA
When the monitoring of the trigger device is delayed, the observation cycle may not function normally.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Because data collection timing is changed and the data is not collected normally.
Set [Ordinary] for [Observation Cycle] so that the data are normally collected.
(b) For GT10
When [Ordinary] is set for [Observation Cycle], the screen display of monitored device value may be 27
delayed. To avoid the delay, set [Sampling] for [Observation Cycle].
(5) Trigger device
OBSERVATION
The status of the device that executes the status observation function (trigger device) must be held for the time
FUNCTION
of the status observation cycle or longer.
STATUS
(1) Sound output function 28
This function is available for the GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000.
TRIGGER ACTION
For the sound output, refer to the precautions for the sound output function.
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
The trigger action function switches screens when the specified condition is satisfied.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Condition satisfied!! Trigger device: X100
Screen switching executed
X100 : 0 1
25
32 0
RECIPE
 Available setting conditions 26
The following conditions are available.
• Ordinary
• ON or OFF state of a bit device
DEVICE DATA
• Rising or falling of a bit device
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
• Range specification of word device values
 Operation when the condition is satisfied 27

When the condition is satisfied, a screen is switched to the specified screen.
To execute operations other than the screen switching, use the status observation function.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
 Types of trigger actions
The trigger actions include the following two types. 28
• Trigger action common to a project
TRIGGER ACTION
Trigger action that can be specified per project
• Trigger action by screen
Trigger action that can be specified per screen FUNCTION
This trigger action can be set for base screens and window screens.
The trigger action is enabled while the corresponding screen is displayed.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
28 - 1

28.1 Settings
Select [Common] → [Trigger Action] from the menu to display the [Trigger Action] dialog box.
Set the trigger action common to a project on the [Project] tab.
Set the trigger action by screen on the [Screen] tab.
Trigger action list
Trigger action list
[Project] tab [Screen] tab
Select the type of the screen that a trigger action is set for.(Base Screen/Window Screen)
Screen Type (For the GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
This item can be set on the [Screen] tab only.
Set the number of the screen that a trigger action is set for.
Screen No. Click the [Browse] button to check the screen image.
This item can be set on the [Screen] tab only.
Trigger action list Displays trigger actions in a list.
Adds a new trigger action.

Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box, and configure the trigger action setting.
Trigger/Action
Change the setting of the selected trigger action.

Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box.
Trigger/Action
Copies the selected trigger action.
Pastes the copied trigger action to the end of the list.
Deletes the selected trigger action.

23
 Trigger/Action
OPERATION LOG
(1) Trigger tab
Set the trigger condition to execute the trigger action.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Set the trigger condition to execute the trigger action.

Trigger Type (Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Word Range) 26
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Trigger setting
Trigger
After setting the trigger type, set the trigger device.
Trigger Device
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Action tab

Set the trigger action details.
When [Next Screen] is set to [Device]
When [Next Screen] is set to [Fixed]
Select the action executed when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Action
(Screen Switching)
Set the type of the screen displayed after screen switching.

Screen Type
The settable type of the screen displayed after screen switching differs according to the GOT used.
Set the method to specify the screen displayed after screen switching.
Set the screen displayed after screen switching.

• Fixed
Select this item to switch the screen to a screen with the number set for [Screen No.].
After selecting this item, set the number of the screen displayed after screen switching
for [Screen No.].
• Back(Previous/History)
Detail Setting of Select this item to switch the screen to the previously displayed screen.
Screen Switching Next Screen The hierarchy mode or the history mode can be set with [Screen Switching/Window] in
the environmental setting.*1
(Fundamentals) Screen Switching Device Setting
• Device
Select this item to specify the number of the screen displayed after screen switching
by the value in the set device.
After selecting this item, set the data type of the device for [Data Type] and the device
name for [Device].
*1 For details of the hierarchy mode and the history mode, refer to the following.
28.2 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the trigger action function.

Up to 50 trigger actions common to a project can be set per project.
Up to 50 trigger actions by screen can be set per screen.

23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
The time action function turns on or off a device or writes a value to the device on the set day of week or time.
This function is operated by the day of the week and time set for the GOT.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
 Turning on or off a bit device of a controller
Start time End time
OFF ON
25
ON OFF
RECIPE
 Writing a value to a word device of a controller
Start time End time
26
0 100
DEVICE DATA
Write the set value Write the set value
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
 Outputting sounds with an external speaker (Available for only the GT16, the GT15, and
GT SoftGOT1000)
Start time End time 27
The operation
OBSERVATION
starts.
FUNCTION
Sound output Sound output
STATUS
Application example
Designated bit device is turned ON on Monday mornings and Values are written on word devices at the designated time every 28
turned OFF on Friday evenings. day.
TRIGGER ACTION
Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab. Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab.
FUNCTION
Monday Mornings Friday Evenings 10:00 15:00
M10 M10 D10 D10

100 200
29
M10 is turned ON. M10 is turned OFF. "100" is written to D10. "200" is written to D10.
The sound 1 is played on Monday mornings, and the sound 2 is

TIME ACTION
played on Friday evenings.

FUNCTION
Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab.
Monday Mornings Friday Evenings

30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Good Have a
morning. nice weekend.
29 - 1

29.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Time Action] from the menu to display the [Time Action] dialog box.
Set the data of the action, start time, and end time of the time action.
Displays the [Time Action Attribute] dialog box to set or edit the data of the time action list.
Select the row of data to be set or edited in the list, and then click the [Edit] button.
Deletes the selected data for the time action setting in the list.
Deletes all data for the time action setting in the list.
Select this item to control the data of the time action setting with a device. (To set this item, set [External Control
Device].)
After selecting this item, set each device of [External Control].
Enable External
By setting this item, the following actions are enabled.
Control
29.2 Actions
• Outputting the data for the time action setting to the external control device
• Changing the data for the time action setting with the external control device
Select whether to set the external control device for each time action or to set the same
external control device for all time actions.
• Separate
Select this item to set the external control device for each time action.
Device Setting
One setting requires eight word devices.
• Continuous
Select this item to set the same external control device for all time actions.
All settings require eleven word devices.
External Control Set the device to specify the data for the time action setting to be controlled.
Setting No. Device When [Continuous] is selected for [Device Setting], eleven devices starting from this
device are set as external control devices.
External Control
Set a trigger device to control the setting with the device.
Signal Device
External Control
Status Notification Set the device to notify the execution result of the output or change.
Device
Select this item to save the time action setting file in the GOT.
Selecting this item enables b3 to b4 of the external control signal device, and b3 to b5 of the external control
status notification device.
Enable the save to By setting this item, the following actions are enabled.
GOT
29.2 Actions
• Changing the data for the time action setting with the external control device
• Deleting the time action setting file

23
 Time action setting
OPERATION LOG
(1) Time tab
Set the day-of the-week and time when the time action function is to be used.
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Set the mode type for the time action function.
Mode Daily Time action is executed only on the specified day-of-the-week/time.

26
Through Time action is executed continuously for the specified number of days.
Select the day-of-the-week and time when the time action function starts/ends.
DEVICE DATA
Set the day/time when the time action starts.
TRANSFER
Start
FUNCTION
Start/End When [Daily] is set, multiple days can be set.
Set the day/time when the time action ends.

End
Only when [Through] is set, the day-of-the-week setting is available.
Set this item to control the time action with each device. 27
Continuous eight points from the set device are set as external control devices.
29.2 Actions
External Control
OBSERVATION
Device When the device setting is set to [Continuous], this item is not displayed.
FUNCTION
To use this setting, select [Enable External Control] in the [Time Action] dialog box and select [Separate] for
STATUS
[Device Setting].
28
HINT
TRIGGER ACTION
Setting the same action settings in a week
When [Through] is set, only one time action setting is available.
FUNCTION
To set one time action setting that is executed more than twice a week by [Through], set the same settings as the
set time action setting. To set the multiple time action settings, start and end time must be different from each
setting. (Set [Daily] of [Mode] for the [Time] tab.)
Setting example)
29
Turn M0 ON in AM of Monday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Tuesday (Set this in time action1)
No action on Wednesday
TIME ACTION
Turn M0 ON in AM of Thursday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Friday (Set this in time action2)
FUNCTION
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
M0 ON M0 OFF M0 ON M0 OFF
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Action tab

Set the condition trigger executing the time action function.
Select this item to turn a bit device ON/OFF at the start/end time.
Bit
After selecting the item, set the bit device to be turned ON/OFF.
Select this item to write the specified value to a word device at the start/end time.
After selecting the item, set the word device to write in a value, and then set the following.
Select the data type of the word device for value write.
Data Type
• Signed BIN • Unsigned BIN • BCD • Real*1
Word
Data Size Select a data size for the word device. (16bit/32bit)
Start Write Value Set the value to be written to the specified word device at the start time.
End Write Value Set the value to be written to the specified word device the at end time.
Select the item for outputting sounds at the start or end time.
After selecting this item, set the following.
Click the [Browse] button to select a sound file to be output in the list.
Sound 41. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION
Start Set the number for the sound file to be played at the start time.
End Set the number for the sound file to be played at the end time.
*1 Only when [32bit] is selected for [Data Size].

23
29.2 Actions
OPERATION LOG
To control the time action with a device, use the external control device.
FUNCTION
The set time action data are output to a device, or the time action setting can be changed.
This section explains the devices relevant to the external control and the action for the external control.
29.1 Time action setting
24
 External control device
Stores time action setting.
According to the set data for [Device Setting] in the [Time Action] dialog box, the items assigned to the device differ.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
When [Separate] is set, consecutive eight devices starting from the device set for [External Control Device] in the
[Time Action Attribute] dialog box are set as external control devices.
When [Continuous] is set, consecutive eleven devices starting from the device set for [Setting No. Device] in the
[Time Action] dialog box are set as the external control devices. 25
If changing the external control device value to 0 and executing it, the time action setting can be disabled.
Device
Item Description
Separate Continuous
RECIPE
No applicable
Setting No. device Set device Setting No. device
device *1
External control
signal device
No applicable
device *1
Set device +1 External control signal device 26
External control
No applicable
status notification Set device +2 External control status notification device
device *1
DEVICE DATA
device
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Indicates time action mode.
Mode Set device Set device +3 b0 : 0 (Daily), 1 (Through)
b1 to b15: Must not be used
Indicates start day of the week/end day of the week for time action. 27
(When the mode for the time action is set to [Daily], do not set the device for
the end day of the week.)
Start day of the week End day of the week
OBSERVATION
b0: Sun b8: Sun
FUNCTION
Start day of the
b1: Mon b9: Mon
STATUS
week Set device + 1 Set device +4
b2: Tue b10: Tue
End day of the week
b3: Wed b11: Wed
b4: Thu b12: Thu
b5: Fri b13: Fri 28
b6: Sat b14: Sat
b7: Must not be used b15: Must not be used
TRIGGER ACTION
Start time (Hrs) Set device + 2 Set device +5
Start time (Min) Set device + 3 Set device +6 Indicates the start time of time action. (Data format: BCD) FUNCTION
Start time (Sec) Set device + 4 Set device +7
End time (Hrs) Set device + 5 Set device +8
End time (Min) Set device + 6 Set device +9 Indicates the end time of time action. (Data format: BCD)
29
End time (Sec) Set device + 7 Set device +10
*1 This device can be set in the [Time Action] dialog box.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
 Setting No. device

By storing the time action settings with the setting No. 1 to 32 to the set device, the time action setting for the external
control is specified.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
29.2 Actions 29 - 5

 External control signal device

Executes external control.
Each bit turns on according to the execution contents.
If the bits turn on simultaneously, the bits turn on in order starting from the smallest bit number.
b0 : Output trigger (outputs the contents of time action to an external device)
b1 : Change trigger (changes time action setting according to external device contents)
b2 : Must not be used
b3 : Time action setting file storage trigger (GT14, GT11, and GT10 only)
Saves all time settings of the time actions as a time action setting file.
The time action setting file is saved in the D drive.
However, the GT1020 saves the file in the C drive.
b4 : Time action setting file deletion trigger (GT14, GT11, and GT10 only)
Deletes the time action setting file.
b5 to b15 : Must not be used
POINT
GOT operation for the time action setting file
If the GOT has the time action setting file when the GOT is turned on or reset, the GOT reads the time action
settings from the file.
 External control status notification device

Notifies the result of when external control is executed.
When turning off external control signal device after output/change, this device automatically turns off.
b0 : Normal termination of output
b1 : Normal termination of change
b2 : Error (System alarm occurs.)
b3 : The time action setting file is normally saved. (GT14, GT12, GT11, and GT10 only)
Turns on when the time action setting file is successfully saved.
b4 : The time action setting file is normally deleted. (GT14, GT12, GT11, and GT10 only)
Turns on when the time action setting file is successfully deleted.
b5 : The time action setting file is normally read. (GT14, GT12, GT11, and GT10 only)
Turns on when the time action setting file in the GOT is successfully read.
b6 to b15 : Must not be used
POINT
Disabling reading data from the time action setting file (GT14, GT12, GT11, and GT10 only)
To disable reading data from the time action setting file, execute any of the following operations, and restart the
GOT.
• Turn on b4 (time action setting file deletion trigger) of the external control device.
• Write a project without the [Enable the save to GOT] setting to the GOT.
29.1 Settings
29 - 6 29.2 Actions

23
 Action example for the external control
OPERATION LOG
(1) Output (when time action contents are output to an external device)
FUNCTION
Output (when time action contents are output to an external device)
Time action setting 3. 1. Setting No.

2. External control signal device 24
External control device for each
time action setting (8 points)
1.
FUNCTION
Specify the setting No. of the time action setting to be output.
LOGGING
2. Turn ON b0 of external control signal device.
3. The time action setting is output to the external control device. 25

(2) Change (when time action setting is changed with external device contents)
Change (when time action setting is changed with external device contents)
RECIPE
Time action setting 4. 1. Setting No.
3. External control signal device
2. External control device for each 26
time action setting (8 points)
1.
DEVICE DATA
Specify the setting No. of the time action setting to be changed.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
2. Write a changed value to the external control device.
3. Turn ON b1 of external control signal device.

27
4. Time action is set with the setting contents.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
29.2 Actions 29 - 7

29.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the time action function.

(1) Maximum number of time action settings
Up to 32 time action settings can be configured in one project.
(2) Multiple time action settings
Do not set different time actions to the same day-of-the-week and time.
Otherwise GOT may work abnormally.

(1) Clock function
For the precautions and restrictions about the GOT clock function for the date display or time display, refer to the
following.
(2) During operation of time action function
Changing the GOT built-in clock time or any preset device status may affect the time action behavior.
Example1:When the set bit device (M0) is turned ON before the time action is executed
The action is not executed at the time set by the time action function
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00
ON
OFF
M0 device status
ON OFF
Action set by time action function
Example2:When the GOT's built-in clock time is changed

The action is executed at the next start time.
It will not be executed if the change is made after the start/end action time.
The probable causes of why times set by the clock are changed are described below.
• The GOT built-in clock is changed for [Time] in the utility. (Time notification setting)
• Time of the GOT clock synchronizes with that of controller when "Clock data GOT is matched to clock data
External" is checked on Clock Settings of GT Designer3.
• Times may be changed by GOT's internal devices from GS513 to GS516.
Start action: 8:00 D0=100
End action: 17:00 D0=200
GOT's clock time is GOT's clock time is

changed from 10:00 to 7:00. changed from 10:00 to 20:00.
7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 21:00

7:00 20:00
Writes 100 to D0. Writes 100 to D0

Since 17:00 is not identified,
200 is not written to D0.

(3) When using external control

23
When the time action setting is changed with a device, it can be restored to the setting made with GT Designer3
OPERATION LOG
by either of the following operations.
• Powering off the GOT, resetting
FUNCTION
• Transferring OS or project data
(4) When using sound output function
Only the GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000 are available for this function.
For the sound output, refer to the precautions for the sound output function. 24
(5) When saving the time action setting file (GT14, GT12, GT11, and GT10 only)
FUNCTION
The time action setting file is saved in the D drive.
LOGGING
To keep the time action setting file, a battery is required.
The GT1020 does not have the battery and the D drive.
Therefore, the time action setting file is saved in the C drive.
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


SCRIPT FUNCTION


23
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
30.1 Overview
24
The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (hereafter abbreviated to
"script").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script drastically reduces the load on the system side (e.g. controller,
microcomputer) display.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
This section explains the specifications, GT Designer3 settings, program example and troubleshooting of the script
function.
30.1.1 Features 25
 Ease of system maintenance
As the necessary programs can be created and assigned to GOT with the script functions in advance, the system
side handles only machine control programs, facilitating system maintenance.
RECIPE
 Various screen controls by GOT alone
Using the script function enables the following operations that cannot be achieved by the GOT alone. 26
(1) Various object functions are available
(a) A single lamp represents multiple bit device statuses.
DEVICE DATA
(b) A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is ON, and is erased if they are all OFF.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
(c) At the same time as a numeric value is input, a part indicating "Already input" is pasted to the place
adjacent to the input value display frame.
(d) A single touch switch can make multiple operations corresponding to multiple statuses. 27
(e) At the same time as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error (*1), the corresponding
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
OBSERVATION
*1 When an error occurs in the alarm list (system alarm), error contents are stored to GOT error code of [System Information].
FUNCTION
(2) Processing of complicated arithmetic
STATUS
(a) A polynomial operation can be more simply represented on a single line as compared with ladder program.
Ladder program Script

28
TRIGGER ACTION
[w:D5] = ([w:D1] - [w:D2])/100+[w:D3]-[w:D4])-100;
FUNCTION
(b) Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions, such as
trigonometric and exponential functions, can be used optionally.
29
(3) Expanded applicable fields
(a) The date is calculated by entering the start date (month, day and year) and the duration (number of days)
after that date.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
What is the date 345 days after May 20, 2008? April 30, 2009
(b) The day of the week is calculated by entering the corresponding date (month, day and year).
Which day of the week falls on February 21, 1961? Tuesday
30
 Easy programming language
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Script can be created with entry-level programming knowledge, as it is C language-like program.
30.1 Overview 30 - 1

 Compatibility with commercially-available programming editors

Commercially-available text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windowsstandard memo pad, Wordpad) are applicable for
programming to improve program productivity.
 Execution condition selectable for each script

Any of various conditions can be selected as a trigger to execute each script, which enables script execution
scheduling.
In addition to the above conditions, an object script can be executed in synchronization with object input/display and
touching of a touch switch.
 Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. MicrosoftVisual C++)
can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using GOT.
The test and device monitor functions are available to check conditional branching in a script. By monitoring the GOT
special registers (GS), error information and a script in execution can be easily confirmed.
 Check the validity of the syntax for the created scripts

The validity of the syntax for the created scripts can be checked by using GT Designer3 before executing the scripts
on the GOT. Doing so increases the programming efficiency.
 The script language created on digital package is convertible

It is possible to convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital package in order to operate it
on GOT.
HINT
(1) Execution condition setting and syntax validity check
The execution condition setting and the syntax validity check are made on GT Designer3 at the time of
monitor screen creation.
• Project script and screen script : 30.2.1 Settings
• Object script : 30.3.1 Settings
(2) Converting script language created on Digital package
Convert the script language created on Digital package using GT Converter2.
Refer to the following for details of convertible data and conversion method.
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
30 - 2 30.1 Overview

23
 Script functions types
There are three types of script functions as below.
OPERATION LOG
(1) Project script
FUNCTION
(a) Target of setting/action 24
Project script means the script function that is set / operated for the project as a whole.
(b) GOT status that enables execution of a project script
A project script can be executed any time while the GOT is online.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(c) Script execution condition
A script is executed when the condition is established.
(d) Allowable number of scripts
Up to 256 scripts can be set for a project. 25
POINT
Precautions for setting a project script
RECIPE
Devices monitored by project scripts are always operating.
Therefore, if monitor target devices increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.
26
HINT
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Application of project scripts
Since a project script operates for a project as a whole, it can be conveniently used in such as the case shown
below.
Example: To call up the troubleshooting screen automatically at the same time that the alarm list (system alarm) 27
detects an error
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
(2) Screen script
STATUS
(a) Target of setting/action
28
Screen script means the script function that is set / operated for the screens indicated below.
TRIGGER ACTION
• Base screen*1, *2
• Window screen*1, *2(Superimpose windows, overlap windows) FUNCTION
*1 The called screen by the set overlay screen function is also the target of a screen script.
*2 The screen displayed by the parts display function is not the target of a screen script.
(b) GOT status that enables execution of a screen script

A screen script can be executed when two conditions below are satisfied.
29
• GOT is online.
• The target screen is displayed.
TIME ACTION
(c) Script execution condition

FUNCTION
A script is executed when the condition is established.

(d) Allowable number of scripts
Up to 256 scripts can be set in a screen (including the called screens by the set overlay screen function)
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

POINT
Precautions for setting a screen script
If the number of monitor devices of screen scripts increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.
(3) Object script
(a) Target of setting/action

Object script means the script function that is set / operated for the objects indicated below.
Setting/Operation Target of Object Script Function
Touch switch (switch only), Bit lamp, Word lamp, Numerical display,
Numerical input, ASCII display, ASCII input, Date display,
Time display, Comment display, Level, Panelmeter,
Line graph, Trend graph, Bar graph, Statistics bar graph,
Statistics pie graph, Scatter graph, Parts display, Parts movement
(b) GOT status that enables execution of an object script

An object script function can be executed when four conditions below are all satisfied.
• GOT is online.
• The screen where arranged target object is displayed.
• The target object is displayed/operating.
• Target object operating is not restricted by the security function.
(c) Execution condition for script function
A script is executed when the condition is established. Execution of a script is also triggered by object input
/ display and touch operation of a touch switch.
(d) Allowable number of script function
Numerical input and ASCII input allows the setting of input object script and display object script for one
object.
For objects other than numerical input and ASCII input, one script can be set for one object.
POINT
Precautions for setting an object script
If number of monitor devices on object scripts increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.

30.1.2 Precautions for use 23
OPERATION LOG
This section explains the precautions for using the script function.
FUNCTION
 Applicable range of the script functions
Since script functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them for machine control that requires the
severe timing for execution.
When changing the data within PLC from GOT, create an interlock circuit in a sequence program to ensure that the 24
whole system will operate safely.
The following time periods vary depending on the project data.
• Time period from when the trigger device condition for the script is met until when the script is executed
FUNCTION
• Script processing time
LOGGING
 Stop of the script processing
Any of the following cases disables the corresponding script to be processed, resulting in an error.
• A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
25
• A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a script
data format.
Example: [D0]=[D1]: Current value of D1 is "0x991A"
RECIPE
• An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a script data
format.
Example: 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999 26
32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
• As the write target device of the while statement, a temporary device area (TMP) is not used but the PLC
DEVICE DATA
CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) is used.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Applicable data range
30.2.6 Applicable data and representation methods
Details of while statement
27
30.2.5 Control structure
OBSERVATION
Corrective actions to be taken when script processing has stopped
FUNCTION
30.4 Troubleshooting
STATUS
 Differences in processing result between data formats
The following cases may result in an unintended processing. 28
• When other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit BCD" has been selected as script data format, the constant is
TRIGGER ACTION
described that is outside the selected format range.
• When "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit unsigned BIN" has been selected as the script data format, the
negative constant is described. FUNCTION
• When other than "real number" has been selected as script data format, the constant with a decimal point is
described.
For details on data format, refer to the following. 29
 Instructions for monitor device description

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Some controller includes the monitor devices of which Nos. have to be described in the specific number of digits.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction.
For details on describing method, refer to the following.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
 Precautions for writing data in the GOT

When editing a screen script or an object script, write the screen data with the edited script in the GOT.
Failure to do so does not reflect the edited script in the GOT.

 Instructions for assignment delay

(1) For assignment delay
When a script function writes the operation result to a device at the end of script execution, writing to a device
(assignment) can be delayed with some devices.
The table below shows if such assignment delay occurs for each kind of devices.
Synchronized: Operation result is written to a device in synchronization with script.
Delay: Assignment delay occurs.
Device and Temporary Device Script

Area Project Script Screen Script Object Script
Controller's devices Delay
GB
Delay*1 Synchronized
GD
GS Delay
TMP Synchronized
*1 By setting [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay] on GT Designer3, the operation result can be written to a device in
synchronization with the execution of script.
For the setting on GT Designer3, refer to the following.
Therefore, performing assignment processing as "Example 1" causes a write delay.

Describe a script as example 2 and example 3 to reduce the frequency of communications with the PLC CPU
and avoid influence on monitor processing.
Example 1: Assignment processing using PLC CPU devices
[w:D1] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into D1.

[w:D2] = [w:D1]; //substitutes D1 into D2.
D0 100 100
D1 200 100
D2 300 200
Script start Script end
In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately, causing a write delay.
This status persists until this script is processed.

Example 2: Assignment processing using temporary device areas 23
OPERATION LOG
[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into TMP0001.
FUNCTION
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
24
D0 100 100
D1 200 100
FUNCTION
LOGGING
D2 300 100
Script start Script end
Using the temporary device areas designed for script functions prevents a write delay.
25
For details on temporary device areas, refer to the following.
RECIPE
Example 3: Assignment processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)
[w:GD1] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into GD1. 26

[w:D1] = [w:GD1]; //substitutes GD1 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:GD1]; //substitutes GD1 into D2.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) enables the same processing timing as temporary device areas and
prevents a write delay.
With project scripts and screen scripts, the setting of [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay] is
necessary on GT Designer3. 27
For the setting on GT Designer3, refer to the following.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
POINT
(1) When GOT internal device is used. 28
When GOT internal device (GD, GB) assignment delay is cancelled, a link scan will be made on each line
TRIGGER ACTION
including the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GOT internal devices (GD, GB) are used in
many places. FUNCTION
(2) LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package
The LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package are designed to be
free from an assignment delay.
Therefore, when Digital-based script language including LS devices as shown in the example 1) is converted,
29
this may result in different operation on the GOT. As shown in the example 2), use temporary device areas in
Digital-based script language including LS devices to prevent an assignment delay.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Assignment delay with offset function

(a) When reading values from devices
For using the offset function in scripts, when devices for controllers and GOT internal devices (GB, GD) are
used as base devices, assignment delays occur and scripts might not operate correctly even though values
of offset devices are changed.
Example 1) Incorrect operations with offset function (R200 = 10)
[w:TMP0000] = [w:R200];
[w:TMP0001] = [w:R100[w:TMP0000]]; The value of R100 cannot be read.
Offset device
Base device
With the above example, the offset device (TMP000) keeps the value before the assignment.
When device numbers are out of the base device (R) numbers, an error occurs.
For no assignment delays, use the temporary device area or GOT internal devices as both base devices
and offset devices.
When the GOT internal device is used, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
Example 2) No assignment delays with temporary device area (R200 = 10)
bmov([w:R100],[w:TMP0100],11)
[w:TMP0000] = [w:R200];
[w:TMP0001] = [w:TMP0100[w:TMP0000]]; The value of TMP110 can be read.
Assign the values of base devices to the temporary device area with the bmov control statements in
advance, and then the inoperative operations in Example 1 work.
POINT
Notes for Example 2
For Example 2, the range of the offset device (R200) is 0 to 10, and values of 11 devices starting from the base
device (R100) are assigned to the temporary device area.
As a result, the number of devices to be assigned to the temporary device area must be changed depending on the
range of offset devices.
(b) When writing values to devices

No restrictions as reading values from devices exist. (Refer to the following Example 1.)
When devices for controllers and GOT internal devices (GB, GD) are used as base devices, the values of
offset devices with the while control statements cannot be changed repeatedly as shown in Example 2.
Use the temporary device area or GOT internal devices as both base devices and offset devices as with
reading values from devices, and the values of offset devices with the while control statements can be
changed repeatedly.
When the GOT internal device is used, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].

Example 1) Using offset function for write devices (Enabled) 23
OPERATION LOG
[w:TMP0000] = 10;
[w:R100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001]; A value can be assigned to R110.
FUNCTION
Offset device
Base device
24
Example 2) Using offset function for write devices with while control statements (Disabled)
[w:TMP0000] = 10;
FUNCTION
LOGGING
while([w:TMP0000] < 20) {
[w:R100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001]; An error occurs.
[w:TMP0000] = [w:TMP0000]+2;
}
25
Example 3) No assignment delays using offset function for write devices with while control statements
RECIPE
bmov([w:R110],[w:TMP0110],10);
[w:TMP0000] = 10;
while([w:TMP0000] < 20) {
[w:TMP0100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001];
[w:TMP0000] = [w:TMP0000]+2;
No error occurs. 26
}
bmov([w:TMP0110],[w:R110],10);
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Assign the values assigned to the temporary device area to base devices with the bmov control statements
after operations with the temporary device area, and then the inoperative operations in Example 2 work.
 Exchanging data among scripts using the temporary device area 27

Project scripts and screen scripts share the same temporary device area, while object scripts use the independent
temporary device area.
OBSERVATION
Accordingly, data exchange between an object script and a project script / screen script using the temporary device
FUNCTION
area is not possible.
STATUS
Project script Screen script Object script
(b)
28
(a)
TRIGGER ACTION
Temporary device area Temporary device area
FUNCTION
(An image showing the case where the access is made to the temporary device area of the same number)
To exchange the data between a project script / screen script and an object script, use GOT internal devices GD or
GB.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.2 Project Script, Screen Script
30.2.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Script] [Script] from the menu to display the [Script] dialog box.
 Project tab
Script setting list
Set the Project script applicable for the whole projects.

Displays the set script settings in the list.

Script setting list
The script for the selected script No. is shown below the script setting list.
Adds a new script setting.

Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box.
(1) Script Edit
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit the selected script setting.

(1) Script Edit
Copies the selected script setting.
Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list.
After clicking the [Paste] button, select the method to paste the copied script.
Yes: Creates a new script from the source script.
(3) Script data registration
No : Refers to the copied script.
Deletes the selected script setting.
Changes the order of executing selected script settings.
Edit the selected project script by the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
• [Option] tab: Option tab
• Script Editor : (2) Script editor
30 - 10 30.2 Project Script, Screen Script

23
OPERATION LOG
Displays the registered scripts in the list.
A script can additionally registered or edited on the list.
FUNCTION
(4) Script file list
(1) Script Edit 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab) (When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)
RECIPE
Order Display the order of the script under editing.
Register the script No. for the current script which is being edited.
Script No.
Click the [View] button to confirm the registration No. of other script files.
26
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)
DEVICE DATA
File Name Display the drive and folder that include the script file to be executed.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
When the script file is not registered, click the [Browse] button to specify the script file to be executed.
(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Set the name of the script to be executed.
Script Name Click the [Import] button and the script edited in a text file is read out to GT Designer3.
When importing the script file, the file name with the extension (".TXT") eliminated from the script file name is 27
displayed at [Script Name].
Edit the script selected by [File Name] or [Script Name] using the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the
OBSERVATION
[Option] tab.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Comment Input the comment of the script being edited.
Checks the validity of the syntax for the script selected in [File Name] or [Script Name]. 28
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
TRIGGER ACTION
30.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
Select the data type of script to be executed.

Data Type • Signed BIN 16 • Unsigned BIN 16 • Signed BIN 32 • Unsigned BIN 32 FUNCTION
Select the trigger for operating the script.

• Ordinary • ON
• When closing a screen
• OFF • Rise • Fall • Rise/Fall • Sampling • ON Sampling
29
Trigger Type When [Ordinary], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600s) in 1-second
unit.*1
TIME ACTION

FUNCTION
Set the trigger device that executes the script.

Trigger Device (When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [Rise/Fall], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected for [Trigger Type])

SCRIPT FUNCTION
30.2 Project Script, Screen Script 30 - 11

*1 Update timing when the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling]
The sampling cycle counting is started when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger type is set to [ON Sampling] and the sampling cycle is set to 10 seconds, for example, the script is
executed 10 seconds after the device set at [Trigger Device] turns on. (When the trigger device turns off after 10
seconds, the script is not executed.)
When the trigger condition is not satisfied, counting of the sampling cycle is reset.
HINT
(1) Script file name
A file name of a script file (excluding extension ".TXT") must be within 32 characters independent of the
character type (1-byte character or 2-byte character).
The file name is used for [Script Name] when converting the script data with [Project Data] selected in the
[Option] tab.
When a specified file name is more than 33 characters, only the first 32 characters are available for [Script
Name].
(2) Script name
Set a unique script name.
The script name set at [Script Name] is used as the script file name when converting the file with [External
File] selected in the [Option] tab.
Therefore, if a script name already existing is assigned, take any measures including the file name change.

(2) Script editor

23
The script editor is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
Script edit area
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Scripts can be edited directly.
Returns the script edit operation one step.
Redoes returned operation. 27

Cuts the selected character string.
OBSERVATION
Copies the selected character string.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Pastes the copied or cut character string.
Deletes the selected character string.

28
Script edit area *1
Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer3.
TRIGGER ACTION
*1
Saves the script edited by GT Designer3 in a text file.
Displays the search dialog box. FUNCTION

Enter the search target texts and select the search direction (upward/downward). Click the
[Search Next] button to search for the entered texts.
Set script symbols.

Click the [Sym] button to display the [Script symbol] dialog box.
29
Script symbol tab / Script symbols
Input
TIME ACTION
Select this item to display [Input Navigation] in the [Edit Script] dialog box.
Navigation
FUNCTION
Line No. Select this item to display the row numbers in the script.

30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Functions, devices, etc. that are inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
Input Navigation
Click the [Insert] button to enter the functions and devices at the cursor position on the script edit area.
This button is displayed when [External File] is selected for the [Option] tab.
Overwrites the script file with the project script and save it.
This button is displayed when [External File] is selected for the [Option] tab.
Closes the script editor.
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.
*1 Import/Export
Even if a script is stored in the project data, the exported text file can be used for simulating the operation using a
commercially-available general-purpose C compiler and editing the script using a commerciallyavailable text editor.
The edited text file is imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example: When editing the script data stored in the project data using a commercially-available text editor
Exporting the data as a text file

Edit the script using
the ext editor.
Edited contents are

reflected.

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
Use example of input navigation
FUNCTION
How the input navigation is used is explained below using an example of inserting an assignment statement of the
temporary device area to a script.
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
2. 3.
RECIPE
26
1.
1.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
1. Select [Items] [Other] [Temporary device area] from the tree.
27
2. Edit the temporary device area number, assignment operator, and others referring to [Description].
3. Click the [Insert] button. The edited assignment statement in the temporary device area shown as the
OBSERVATION
step2. is inserted to the cursor position in the script edit area.
FUNCTION
STATUS
(3) Script data registration
Set the script No. and the file name or script name of the copied script data for registration. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab) (When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab) 29
Item Description
TIME ACTION
Set the script No. of the copied script data for registration. (Default: Minimum script number among the
FUNCTION
unregistered script numbers)

Script No. After registration, the data is displayed on the list.
File Name
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab) 30
Click the [Browse] button to set the path name and file name of the copied script data for registration.
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Script Name
Set the script name of the copied script data for registration. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)


The registered scripts are displayed in a list, where scripts are added or edited.
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab) (When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)
Displays the registered scripts in a list (script file/script name *1, modified date and comment).
The script file specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box is reflected in this dialog box.
Script List
A comment can be directly input in the Comment column of the list.
The contents of the selected script are displayed in the area below the list.

Registers the script file to be referred in the script list.

Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer3.

*2
Changes the path name of the selected script file.
Select the row to be changed. Click the [Convert Path] button to set a new path name.
Checks the validity of the syntax for the selected script or all the registered script.
When an error occurs, the error line No. and its details are displayed.
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
Deletes the selected script.
Edit the selected script using the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
For details of the [Option] tab and script editor, refer to the following.
• [Option] tab : Option tab
Makes the script set in [Script No.] to be the selected status.
*1 When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab, the path name is displayed.
When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab, the script name is displayed.
*2 Click the [Convert Path] button to display the [Convert File Path] dialog box.
Item Description
Before Display the old path name of the script file.
After Click the [Browse] button to set the path name of the converted script file.
Convert the same path Select this item to convert all the files with the same path name as the file to be converted.

23
HINT
OPERATION LOG
Script file in the project data folder
FUNCTION
Save a script file into the project data folder of GT Designer3. Doing so updates the script path name automatically
when the project data folder is moved to other drive or path, which eliminates the necessity to modify the path
name.
24
 Screen tab
Set the Screen script to be executed for each screen.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Script setting list
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Set the screen (Base/Window) on which the script function will operate and the screen No.
Screen Type A screen title can be used for the screen No.
(Fundamentals) 3.7 Creating/Opening/Closing Screen
Displays the set script settings in the list.

27
Script setting list
The script for the selected script No. is shown below the script setting list.
OBSERVATION
Adds a new script setting.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Project tab (1) Script Edit
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit the selected script setting.

Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box. 28
Project tab (1) Script Edit
TRIGGER ACTION
Copies the selected script setting.
Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list. FUNCTION
After clicking the [Paste] button, select the method to paste the script.
Yes: Creates a new script from the source script.
Project tab (3) Script data registration
No: Refers to the copied script. 29
Deletes the selected script setting.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Changes the order of executing selected script settings.
Edit the selected project script by the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
• Script Editor: Project tab (2) Script editor
Displays the registered script in the list.

A script can be additionally registered or edited on the list.
Project tab (4) Script file list

 Script symbol tab / Script symbols

A script can be described using a character string, instead of a device or fixed value.
This is possible by setting a device or fixed value to each character string in the Script Symbol window (Even when a
character string is described in the script, the script operates on GOT.)
This setting is valid to project scripts and screen scripts.
When the [Script Symbol] tab is selected When clicking the [Sym] button of the script editor
Input the character string to be described in script (Up to 32 characters).

Symbol Name The symbol "#" is not available.
Up to 10000 symbol names can be set.
Device and Constant Input the device or character string for the symbol name, i.e., character string (Up to 32 characters).
Deletes the settings (symbol name, device, or constant).

Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the row to be deleted.
*1 Reads out the script symbol settings that are edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT Designer3.
*1 Saves the script symbol settings that are set by GT Designer3 as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(When the [Script symbol] tab is selected)

Displays the [Script File List] dialog box.
Displays the registered script in list format.
Script can be added, registered and edited on the list.
(This button is displayed only when the [Sym] button of the script editor is clicked.)
Inserts the selected script symbol to the script.
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the script symbol to be inserted.

*1 Import/Export 23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
POINT
Editing exported files
When "0" is used as the first character of symbol names and device or field values, "0" can be deleted with
24
application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
Pay attention to the above for editing exported files.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Add the setting using applications

R
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
The added contents
TIME ACTION
are displayed.
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Option tab
Set the script data storing area, the text editor used for editing a script and the processing when an internal device is
used.
Select the area where the script data of project scripts and screen scripts are stored.
Stores the script data in the project data.

Project Data If the setting is changed from [External File] to [Project Data], the script data is
converted from the script file to the project data.*1
Stores the script data in the script file.

Script Data Storage If the setting is changed from [Project Data] to [External File], the script data is
External File
Destination
converted from the project data to the script file.*2
This item is available when [External File] is selected for the script data storage
Display the script data
area.
update confirmation
Select this item to display the message to ensure the update of the script data
message when
when communicating with the GOT. (When selecting [Communication] from the
processing write to GOT
menu)
Set the editor used to edit project scripts and screen scripts.
Script Editor: Select this item to use the built-in script editor of GT Designer3 to edit
the scripts.
User-specified Editor: Select this item to use the text editor specified by the user to
Editor Type
edit the scripts. This item can be selected only when [External File] is selected for
Script Editor Selection [Script Data Storage Destination].
When [User-specified Editor] is selected, set the following [Editor Path] or [Option].
Set the file (including Notepad (NOTEPAD.EXE) or WordPad (WORDPAD.EXE) of

Editor Path
Windows) to open the text editor.
Option Specify the options used on the text editor.
Select an order of storing data with file_read or file_write.

File Handling Function
• Low-->High : Data are stored in the order of lower to upper data.
Storage Order
• High-->Low : Data are stored in the order of upper to lower data.
Select this item to avoid substitution delay, which occurs when the project script or screen script is used, by
Cancel internal device using the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
(GD/GB) assignment Refer to the following for cautions about substitution delay.
delay
30.1.2 Instructions for assignment delay
Update Script Data

Click the [Update] button to update the script data read by GT Designer3.
(Project and Screen)
Displays the registered script in list format.

Script can be added, registered and edited on the list.
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.

*1 Converting the script data from script file to project data 23

1. When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [External File] to [Project Data],
OPERATION LOG
the following dialog box appears.
FUNCTION
24
2. Click the [Yes] button to convert the script data to the project data.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
*2 Converting the script data from project data to script file
1. When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [Project Data] to [External File],
25
the following dialog box appears.
RECIPE
26
2. For [Destination to create the script file], specify the folder where the script is saved.
3.
DEVICE DATA
Click the [OK] button to convert the script data to the script file.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
POINT
(1) File name of the converted script file 27
When the script data in the project data is converted to a script file, the script file name before conversion is
used as the file name of the script file (extension is ".TXT").
OBSERVATION
If the script name already exists, the dialog box as shown below is displayed.
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
When the above dialog box appears, click the [No] button to change the file name.
(2) Number of characters of the file name
FUNCTION
Up to 32 characters are available for the script file name in the project data.
When the data storage area are changed from [External File] to [Project Data], and when the file name is more
than 33 characters, the first 32 characters are only available.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.2.2 Relevant Settings

The following items for the GOT special register (GS) are relevant to the project script or screen script.
Address Item Description
Stores the data of error occurrence.

GS14.00 : Turns ON at error occurrence.
Script common information GS14.07 : Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS14
(read only) GS14.08 : Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12 : Turns ON at communication error occurrence
(including access to out-of-range device).
Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.

The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS16 to GS47).
The value at GS15 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
"-1"→"16"→"18"→ … → "46"(cycles back to "16".)
GS15 Script error pointer The relationships between the GS15 value and the latest error code storing area are shown below.
• When the GS15 value is 16, the latest error code address is stored to GS16 and GS17.
: :
Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due order, starting
from the higher addresses of the storage area.
GS16 to 47*1 Script error data
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.
Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script execution numbers
(GS49 to GS79).
The value at GS48 cycles as shown below each time a project script/screen script is executed.
"-1"→"49"→"50"→ ....... → "79"(cycles back to "49".)
GS48 Script execution pointer The relationships between the GS48 value and the latest script execution number storing area are
shown below.
• When the GS48 value is 49, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS49.
: :
GS49 to 79 Script execution number Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.
Notifies the execution statuses of the file operation functions.

GS154.00 : Turns on during executing a file operation function.
File operation function information The bit turns off when the file operation function is completed.
GS154
(write only) GS154.15 : Turns on when an error occurs with a file operation function.
The bit turns off when the next file operation function is completed normally.
The bit does not turn off even if the script error clear signal (GS384.0) turns on.
Script common control GS384.0 : When ON, clears Script error data (GS16 to 47).
GS384
(write only) GS384.1 : Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error when turned ON.
Sets the monitor time of one script in second unit.

If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped. (Error code: 15)
Set a value to be stored from 1 to 300 (seconds). (Initial setting: 0)
When a value of 0 or 301 or more is set, the value is processed as 10 seconds.
The following shows the setting examples.
GS385 Script monitoring time
• When GS385 is set to 0, the monitor time is set to 10 seconds.
• When GS385 is set to 1, the monitor time is set to 1 second.


23
GS386 is available for a project or a screen script whose [Trigger Type] is set to [Rise] or [Fall].
OPERATION LOG
Set whether to execute the script or not after the screen switching processes or other processes are
executed when the trigger device is on (when [Trigger Type] is [Rise]) or off (when [Trigger Type] is
FUNCTION
[Fall]).
• When the stored value of GS386 is 0: The script is executed.
• When the stored value of GS386 is other than 0: The script is not executed.
Example)
When the base screen 1 is switched to the base screen 2 that includes the setting of the screen
24
script ([Trigger Type]: [Rise], Trigger device: X1000)
When the stored value of GS386 is 0: The screen script is executed.

When the stored value of GS386 is other than 0: The screen script is not executed.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
ON
Trigger device
(X1000)
Project/screen script initial OFF
GS386
operation 25
Screen switching
1 2
device
Switching the screens
RECIPE
The following shows the processes to be targeted or not to be targeted for executing the script.
Project script
• When the GOT is turned on, or when the GOT restarts monitoring of a controller
Screen script
26
• A screen is switched to another screen that includes scripts.
• Security switching
• Language switching
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
• Switching station No.
• Offset switching
Select an order of storing data with file_read or file_write.

[Low-->High]: Data are stored in the order of lower to upper data.
[High-->Low]: Data are stored in the order of upper to lower data. 27
The order of storing data for the file operation functions can be set with GT Designer3.
File operation function data When 1 or 2 is set for GS390, the order of storing data set with GT Designer3 is disabled.
GS390 storage order The following shows the setting examples.
OBSERVATION
(read only) • When GS390 is set to 0, the data is stored by the order of storing data set with GT Designer3.
FUNCTION
• When GS390 is set to 1, the data are stored by the order of lower to upper data.
STATUS
• When GS390 is set to 2, the data are stored by the order of upper to lower data.
• When GS390 is set to 3 or more, the data is stored by the order of storing data set with GT
Designer3.
*1 For the script function error, refer to the following.

28
Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.2.3 Settings and procedure for execution
This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script.
Start
28.2.1 Project tab (2) Script

Create/edit scripts using a script editor or commercially ...... editor
available text editor.
For a complicated script including many control statements,

......
the operation has to be simulated using general Compiler as 30.4.1 Simulation using general
necessary. C language compiler or debugger
If a commercially available text editor is used to create or edit

scripts, read them using GT Designer3.
Set the data type, trigger type, and others for the scripts ...... 30.2.1 Settings
using GT Designer3.
28.2.1 Project tab (2) Script

Perform the syntax check on the scripts using GT Designer3. ......
editor
No
Valid?
Yes
Write the project data from the personal computer to the GOT ...... GT Designer3 Version□ Screen
by GT Designer3. Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the ...... GOT1000 Series User's Manual
system monitor. (Extended Functions, Option
(Chapter2 SYSTEM MONITOR
FUNCTION)
No
Normally operating?
Yes
End

30.2.4 Actions and settings 23
OPERATION LOG
This section explains how to execute the project script and screen script.
FUNCTION
 Execution conditions
When an execution condition is satisfied, the Project script, Screen script executes the corresponding script and
writes the result to the PLC CPU.
The execution condition is set when the monitor screen is created using GT Designer3. 24
There are following execution conditions.
• Ordinary
• Rising of a bit or falling of a bit
FUNCTION
• Rising and falling of a bit
LOGGING
• ON or OFF state of a bit
• ON or OFF state of a bit in the set cycle
• Cycle (Unit: second)
• Closing a screen or switching screens (Available for the screen script only)
25
 Execution unit
Project script, Screen script executes scripts one by one.
If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are satisfied, the scripts are not processed concurrently.
RECIPE
 Execution sequence
The project script and screen script are executed in the following order. 26
Max.
Function executing Screen Calling Function Script Executing Order Set with GT Execution
Screen Setting Order Execution
DEVICE DATA
Order Laying Order Designer3 Sequence
TRANSFER
Count
FUNCTION
Script A 1)
Project script ---- ---- Script B 256
27
Script A 2)
Base Script B
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
Script A
First called screen Script B

Base 256 28
TRIGGER ACTION
Script A
Script B FUNCTION
16th called screen
Screen script
Script A 3) 29
Superimpose window 1 Script B
TIME ACTION
Script A
FUNCTION

Superimpose window 1 256
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Script A
16th called screen Script B

Max.
Count
Script A 4)
Superimpose window 2 Script B
Script A

Superimpose window 2 256
Script A
Script A 5)
Overlap window 1 Script B
Script A

Overlap window 1 256
Script A
Screen script
Script A 6)
Script A

Script A
Script A 7)
Script A

Script A

Max.
23
OPERATION LOG
Count
Script A 8)
FUNCTION
Script A 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Script A

25
Screen script
Script A 9)
RECIPE
Script A

Overlap window 5 256 26
DEVICE DATA
Script A
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
 Execution status
The following table describes the script statuses and the corresponding processings to be performed.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
Script Status Processing
STATUS
• A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
Waiting for turn
• When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".
• Processing changes depending on the execution condition status. 28

Waiting for execution Enabled: The corresponding script is "executed".
Disabled: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next script "waits for execution".
TRIGGER ACTION
• When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU and the corresponding script "waits its turn".
And, the next script "waits for execution".
FUNCTION
Execution • If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next script "waits for execution".
• If a screen is changed when the screen script is used, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all "executed" and
then the next script "waits for execution".
Stop • The script is kept "stopped" until the error history is cleared. 29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

This section explains the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.
 Control statement
Control statement Description
Statement example if (conditional expression) {set of expressions}
Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0),
if Function
executes the {set of expressions}.
An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
Point
given value or to change a program sequence.
Statement example if (conditional expression) {set of expressions 1} else {set of expressions 2}
Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0),
if to else Function
executes the {set of expressions 1}, or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.
An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
Point
given value or to change a program sequence.
Statement example while (continuous conditional expression) {set of expressions}
Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0), repeats
execution of the {set of expressions}.
Function Processing exits the "while" statement, in the following cases:
while • If the evaluation result of "continuous condition" is false (0).
break • If a "break" statement exists in the "set of expressions".
A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a specific purpose.

(For example, the statement is repeated until the device value becomes "0".)
Point
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0) results in an infinite loop.
A temporary device area must be used as the write target device.
switch (term)
{
case constant: set of expressions;break;
Statement example
case constant: set of expressions; break;
default: set of expressions;
}
Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case, break and default.
switch In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions" following the case and default
case statements.
default • The (term) value matches the "constant"
break • It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
Function
In either of the following cases, escapes from { } of switch without execution.
• There is a break statement within a script
• There are no case statements including the "constants" corresponding to the (term) and no default
statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement.
Point The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings to be performed.
Statement example return;
return Function Ends a script.
Point A single script can have multiple returns.
Statement example ;
;
Represents the end of a single statement.
Function
This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement.

23
 Operator
OPERATION LOG
(1) Logic
FUNCTION
Operator Description
Statement example if ((relational operation expression) && (relational operation expression)) {.....}
&&
Function
If two (relational operation expressions) are both true, resulting in 1; if either is false, resulting
in 0. (Logical AND operator)
24
Statement example if ((relational operation expression) || (relational operation expression)) {.....}
|| If either of relational operation expressions is true, resulting in 1; if both are false, resulting in
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Function 0.
(Logical OR operator)
Statement example if (!(relational operation expression)) {.....}

!
If the relational operation expression is 0, resulting in 1; otherwise, resulting in 0.
25
Function
(Logical NOT operator)
(2) Relation
RECIPE
Statement example <Term 1> < <term 2>

< 26
Function <Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)
Statement example <Term 1> <= <term 2>
DEVICE DATA
<=
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Function <Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence left inequality operator)
Statement example <Term 1> > <term 2>

>
Function <Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator) 27
Statement example <Term 1> >= <term 2>
>=
OBSERVATION
Function <Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence right inequality operator)
FUNCTION
STATUS
Statement example <Term 1> != <term 2>
!=
<Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)
28
Function
Statement example <Term 1> == <term 2>

==
TRIGGER ACTION
Function <Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(3) Arithmetic
Statement example <Term> + <factor>

+
Function Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)
Statement example <Term> - <factor>

-
Function Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)
Statement example <Term> * <factor>

*
Function Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)
Statement example <Term> / <factor>
/ Function Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)
Point If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
Statement example <Term> % <factor>
Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.

% Function
(Remainder operator)
Point If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
(4) Bit device
Statement example <Term> & <factor>

&
Function Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit accumulation operator)
Statement example <Term> | <factor>

|
Function Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit addition operator)
Statement example ~ <bit>

~
Function Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)
Statement example <Term> ^ <factor>

^
Function Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit difference operator)
Statement example <Term> << <factor>

<<
Function Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)
Statement example <Term> >> <factor>

>>
Function Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)
(5) Assignment
Statement example <Device> = <term>

=
Function Stores <term> into <device>. (Assignment operator)

23
 Variables
OPERATION LOG
Variable Description
FUNCTION
Statement example [w:GD150]
Device and
temporary device Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary device area.
area Refer to the following for details of the devices and temporary device areas.
Function
30.2.6 Applicable data and representation methods 24
 Function
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(1) Device operation
Statement example set (<bit device>) 25

set
Function SETs <bit device>.
Statement example rst (<bit device>)

rst
RECIPE
Function RSTs <bit device>.
alt (<bit device>)

26
Statement example
alt
Function Inverts <bit device>.
DEVICE DATA
(2) Continuous device operation
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Statement example bmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
bmov
Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 1>,
27
Function
to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 2>.
OBSERVATION
Statement example fmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
FUNCTION
fmov
Transfers the value of <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at <integer>,
STATUS
Function
starting from <word device 2>.
(3) Application arithmetic operation 28

TRIGGER ACTION
Statement example sin (<word device or constant>)
sin FUNCTION
Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)
Function
Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.
cos
Statement example cos (<word device or constant>)
29
Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Cosine)
Function
TIME ACTION
Statement example tan (<word device or constant>)

FUNCTION
tan
Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>. (Tangent)
Function
asin
Statement example asin (<word device or constant>)
30
Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)
Function
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Statement example acos (<word device or constant>)

acos
Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)
Function
Statement example atan (<word device or constant>)

atan
Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)
Function
Statement example abs (<word device or constant>)

abs
Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.
Function
(Absolute value)
Statement example log (<word device or constant>)

log
Function Calculates the power (base e) of <word device or constant>. (Natural logarithm)
Statement example log10 (<word device or constant>)

log10
Calculates the logarithm (base 10) of <word device or constant>.
Function
(Common logarithm)
Statement example exp (<word device or constant>)

exp
Function Calculates the power (base e) of<word device or constant>. (Exponent)
Statement example 1dexp (<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)
ldexp
Multiplies <word device 1 or constant 1> by 2 to the power of <word device 2 or constant 2> .
Function
(Exponential product)
Statement example sqrt (<word device or constant>)

sqrt
Function Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)
(4) File operation
file_getlist (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of files>,
Statement example
<maximum number of characters>)
Obtains file names equivalent to <number of files>, starting from the <offset>th file when <file
Function name> in <folder name> is set as the head file. <Maximum number of characters> of each file
file_getlist name is stored in <storage device> and subsequent devices.
Normal: Number of obtained files

When the specified file does not exist or the value for <offset> exceeds the number of existing
Return value
folders: 0
Error: -1
Statement example file_read (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of read bytes>)
Reads data equivalent to <number of read bytes>, starting from the <offset>th byte, from <file
Function name> in <folder name>, and stores the read data in <storage device> and subsequent
file_read devices.
Normal: Number of read data (bytes)

Return value When the number of read bytes is 0, or the value for <offset> is larger than the file size: 0
Error: -1

23
file_lineread (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <maximum number of
OPERATION LOG
Statement example
read bytes>)
FUNCTION
Reads data equivalent to one line, starting from the <offset>th byte, from <file name> in
Function <folder name>, and stores the read data in <storage device> and subsequent devices.
file_lineread
The maximum data that can be read at one time is <maximum number of read bytes> or less.
Normal: Number of read data (bytes)*1

Return value When the number of read bytes is 0, or the value for <offset> is larger than the file size: 0 24
Error: -1
file_write (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of write bytes>,
Statement example
<mode>)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Writes data with the method specified for <mode>.
• New: 0
Newly creates <file name> in <folder name> that contains data equivalent to <number of
25
write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent devices.
When <file name> already exists, the existing file is deleted and a new file is created.
• Addition: 1
file_write Function
Adds data equivalent to <number of write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent
devices to the end of <file name> in <folder name>.
When no <file name> exists, a new file is created.
• Overwrite: 2
RECIPE
Overwrites the <offset>th byte and subsequent bytes of <file name> in <folder name> with
data equivalent to <number of write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent devices.
Return value
Normal: Number of written data (bytes)
Error: -1
26
Statement example file_rename (<folder name>, <file name>, <renamed file name>)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
Renames <file name> in <folder name> to <renamed file name>.
FUNCTION
file_rename Function
Normal: 0
Return value
Error: -1
Statement example file_delete (<folder name>, <file name>) 27

file_delete Function Deletes <file name> in <folder name>.
OBSERVATION
Normal: 0
Return value
FUNCTION
Error: -1
STATUS
file_copy(<copy source folder name>, <copy source file name>, <copy destination folder
Statement example
name>, <copy destination file name>, <copy mode>)
Copies <copy source file name> in <copy source folder name> to <copy destination folder
name> with renaming the file name to <copy destination file name>.
28
By using <copy mode>, whether to overwrite the file can be specified.
file_copy
TRIGGER ACTION
Function
When no <copy destination folder name> exists, a folder is created and the file is copied to the
folder.
FUNCTION
A zero-byte file can be copied.
Normal: 0
Return value
Error: -1
Statement example
file_xcopy(<copy source folder name 1>, <copy source folder name 2>, <copy destination
folder name 1>, <copy destination folder name 2>, <copy mode>)
29
Copies files in <copy source folder name 1> and <copy source folder name 2> to <copy
destination folder name 1> and <copy destination folder name 2>.
file_xcopy
TIME ACTION
Function
By using <copy mode>, whether to overwrite the files and folders and whether to copy
FUNCTION
subfolders can be specified.
Normal: 0
Return value
Error: -1

SCRIPT FUNCTION

#pragma Statement example #pragma folder_name_length (<maximum number of folder name characters>)
folder_name_leng
Sets <maximum number of folder name characters> when specifying a folder name with
th Function
devices.
Statement example #pragma file_name_length (<maximum number of file name characters>)

#pragma
file_name_length
Function Sets <maximum number of file name characters> when specifying a file name with devices.
*1 The read data does not include a line feed code. However, the return value stores the number of bytes that includes the line feed
code.
For arguments used for the file operation functions, refer to the following.
HINT
(1) Folder/file name character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma
file_name length)
(a) Application
The folder/file name character number specification functions are used for specifying a file or folder name
with devices.
The functions are invalid for specifying the folder or file name with any character string.
(b) Maximum number of folder/file name characters without functions
Up to 12 characters are available for a folder or file name without the folder/file name character number
specification functions.
(2) Devices used for arguments
For the file operation functions, using the GOT internal devices for the following arguments is recommended.
Using the devices of the controller may take time for processing.
<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>,
<renamed file name>, <copy source folder name>, <copy source file name>,
<copy destination folder name>, <copy destination file name>

(5) String operation

23
OPERATION LOG
str_scanf (<string storage device>, <number of read bytes>, <offset>, <format>, <read value
FUNCTION
Statement example
storage device>, <read value storage device>, …)
This function is used to read data from an ASCII code string.

Reads a string equivalent to <number of read bytes>, starting from the <offset>th byte of
str_scanf Function
<string storage device>, and stores the read data in <read value storage device> in <format>.
Up to 10 data to be read can be specified.
24
Normal: Number of read data
Return value
Error: -1
FUNCTION
str_printf (<string storage device>, <number of write bytes>, <format>, <write value storage
LOGGING
Statement example
device>, <write value storage device>, …)
This function is used to write a device value in an ASCII code string.

Writes the value of <write value storage device> equivalent to <number of write bytes>,
str_printf Function
starting from the first byte of <string storage device> in <format>. 25
Up to 10 data to be written can be specified.
Normal: Data length of written string (bytes)

Return value
Error: -1
str_strlen (<string storage device>, <number of read bytes>)
RECIPE
Statement example
This function is used to obtain a data length of an ASCII code string.

Obtains the data length of the string, starting from the first byte to the <number of read
26
str_strlen Function
bytes>th byte of <string storage device>.
Normal: Data length of string (bytes)

Return value
Error: -1
DEVICE DATA
str_strmid (<string storage device>, <read value storage device>, <offset>, <number of read
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Statement example
bytes>)
This function is used to read some data from an ASCII code string and to store the read data
in a device.
str_strmid Function
Reads the string equivalent to <number of read bytes>, starting from the <offset>th byte of
<string storage device>, and stores the read data in <read value storage device>.
27
Normal: Data length of read string (bytes)
Return value
Error: -1
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
HINT
(1) Using the string operation function with the file operation function 28
By using the string operation function with the file operation function, data in a CSV file can be read or edited.
(2) Devices used for arguments
TRIGGER ACTION
For the string operation functions, using the GOT internal devices for the following arguments is
recommended. FUNCTION
Using the devices of the controller may take time for processing.
<string storage device>, <read value storage device>, <write value storage device>
29
 Others
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Item Description
Statement example 1234
Constant Represents a constant (decimal / hexadecimal / BCD / real number / character strings).
Refer to the following for details of constants.
30
Function
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Statement example // (comment)

Comment
Function A comment for a script can be described in (comment).

 Script data formats

Any of the following seven different data formats can be selected for the script functions.
Note that the selected data format is fixed for each script.
The data format is selected in GT Designer3 when the monitor screen is created.
Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32 Unsigned BIN32

BCD16 BCD32 Real number
HINT
To operate different types of data
Device value of integral number can be calculated as real number by using integral number real number
conversion function for each script.
Integer <--> Real number conversion function
 Applicable constants and representation methods

The following four different constants are applicable for the script functions.
Constant Representation Method
Decimal number 124
Hexadecimal number 0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1
Real number 32.124, 3.2124e+10
BCD 344
Note that the data format of each script determines the applicable constants and data ranges as shown below.
Data Format Usable Constant Applicable Data Range
Decimal number -32768 to 32767

Signed BIN16
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number 0 to 65535

Unsigned BIN16
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number -2147483648 to 2147483647

Signed BIN32
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
Decimal number 0 to 4294967295

Unsigned BIN32
BCD 0 to 9999
BCD16
Hexadecimal number 0 to 270F
BCD 0 to 99999999
BCD32
Hexadecimal number 0 to 5F5E0FF
Signed 13-digit representation

Real number
Real number (Representation with a decimal point only)*1
*1 The real number precision is given below dicimal point to the 6th digit. The 7th and later digits are illegal.
For examples of display of a number having 7th and later digits, refer to the following.

23
 Applicable devices and representation methods
The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions.
OPERATION LOG
The following table shows the device representations by device type; a station No.-specified device is represented
FUNCTION
differently from others.
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example Model
Word device *2 [w:D100]

[w: device No. ]
24
Bit device [b: device No. *2] [b:X100]
Specified bit of word device [b: device No.*2. bit position] [b:D100.01]
Specified word of bit device [w: device No. *2] [w:X100]
FUNCTION
LOGGING
*1
Station No.-specified device [Network No.-station No.: w: device No. *2] [0-FF:w:D100]
25
Multiple CPU No. specification*3 [Network No.-station No./CPU No.: w: device No.] [0-FF/1:w:D100]
*4 *5 [w:D100[s16:D200]]
Offset device specification [w: device No. [s16: device No. ]]
Specification of extension file

[w: ER block No.-device No.] [w:ER255-100]
register block No.*6
RECIPE
Specification of buffer memory
[w: BM buffer memory head I/O No.-device No.] [w:BM1E-100]
head I/O No.*7
26
*8
Channel No.-specified device [@Channel.:w:device No.] [@3:w:D100]
*9
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
System label [<t: System label name>] [<t:Label>]
*1 For the QCPU, LCPU, QnACPU or ACPU, if the network No. and station No. are omitted, the GOT monitors the devices of the
host station (0-FF).
27
*2 Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device No. must be described in the following number of digits.
OBSERVATION
Number of Described
FUNCTION
Digits (Digits) Representation
PLC CPU Device Name Remarks
STATUS
Word Bit Example
specified specified
OMRON PLC
.. ―― 2 [b:..2303] As the channel + relay format is used, 28
LR,AR,HR,WR ―― 2 [b:HR207] the relay part is described in 2 digits.
TRIGGER ACTION
The file No. is described in 3 digits, the
[w:B000003]
B 6 7 element No. in 3 digits, and the bit
[b:MB02343]
FUNCTION
position in 1 digit.
Allen-Bradley PLC
N,TP,TA,CP,CA 6 ―― [w:N007255] The file No. is described in 3 digits, and
TT,TN,CU,CD,CN ―― 6 [b:TT004255] the element No. in 3 digits.
SIEMENS PLC D ―― 9 [w:D000100000]

The data block (DB) is described in 4 29
digits, and the data word (DW) in 5 digits.
*3 Even if the target PLC is set to the host station (0-FF), be sure to specify the station No. in statements.
*4 For details of the offset device, refer to the following.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Device offset
*5 The available data range is 16 bits. (-32768 to 32767)
*6 The block No. of the extension file register can be specified only with ER devices.
*7 The head I/O No. of the buffer memory can be specified only with BM devices.
*8 When specifying both channel No. and station No., specify the channel No. first. (Example: [@3:0-FF:w:D100]) 30
*9 When specifying a device at channel No. 1, designation of a channel No. ("@Channel.:) can be omitted. (In the case of
SCRIPT FUNCTION
[@1:w:D100], representation of [w:D100] is allowed by omitting "@1:".)

HINT
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor target PLC CPU.
 Applicable arguments and representation methods

The following shows arguments applicable to the file operation functions.
Argument Expression example Applicable Data Range
Folder name/copy source folder For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\" The following drives can be specified.
name For specifying with devices : [w:D0001] GT16 : A/B/E , GT15 : A/B , GT14 : A/D/E,
GT12 : A/D , GT11 : A/D ,
For specifying with character string : "FILE00001.CSV"
File name/copy source file name GT SoftGOT1000 : A/B/E
For specifying with devices : [w:D0001]
• For specifying with character string*3:
folder name + file name: 78 characters or less
• For specifying with devices:
For specifying with character string : "FILE00001.BAK"
Renamed file name Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods
Applicable devices
*1 [w:GD200]
Storage device Applicable devices and representation
methods
Number of files 1 1 to 32
• For the file operation function

16 bits : 0 to 65535
32 bits : 0 to 2147483647
For using the offset in the file name obtaining function
(file_getlist), only 16 bits can be specified.
For the file write function (file_write), the offset is
Offset*2 0
applicable only when the mode is set to "2"
(Overwrite).
When the mode is set to any other than "2", set the
offset to "0".
• For the string operation function
0 to 255
Maximum number of characters 8 1 to 78
• For the file operation function

1 to 2048
Number of read bytes
Number of read bytes cannot be specified by the
device.
For specifying with character string : 32 • For the string operation function
For specifying with devices : [w:GD200] For specifying with character string: 1 to 256
For specifying with devices: Applicable devices
Number of write bytes
Applicable devices and representation
methods
Maximum number of read bytes 256 1 to 256
New: 0
Addition: 1
Overwrite: 2
Mode 0 The operation of the file write function (file_write) for each
mode, refer to the following.

Argument Expression example Applicable Data Range

23
The following drives can be specified.
OPERATION LOG
GT16 : A/B/E , GT15 : A/B , GT14 : A/D/E,
For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"
Copy destination folder name GT12 : A/D , GT11 : A/D ,
FUNCTION
GT SoftGOT1000 : A/B/E
copy destination folder name
Copy destination file name

For specifying with character string :
"FILE00001.CSV"
+ copy destination file name: 78 characters or less
• For specifying with devices: 24
For specifying with devices : [w:D0001] Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation methods
FUNCTION
LOGGING
GT16 : A/B/E , GT15 : A/B , GT14 : A/D/E,
Copy source folder name 1 GT12 : A/D , GT11 : A/D ,
GT SoftGOT1000 : A/B/E
For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"
For specifying with devices : [w:D0001] copy source folder name 1 25
+ copy source folder name 2: 78 characters or less
Copy source folder name 2 • For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
RECIPE
GT16 : A/B/E , GT15 : A/B , GT14 : A/D/E,
GT12 : A/D , GT11 : A/D ,
Copy destination folder name 1
GT SoftGOT1000 : A/B/E 26
For specifying with character string : "A:\\backup\\"
copy destination folder name 1
+ copy destination folder name 2:
DEVICE DATA
78 characters or less
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Copy destination folder name 2 • For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
• For specifying with character string : 27

0 to 3
Bit 0
OBSERVATION
File overwrite prohibited: 0
File overwrite permitted: 1
FUNCTION
For specifying with character string : 3
Copy mode Bit 1
STATUS
Subfolders not copied: 0
Subfolders copied: 1
• For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices 28
TRIGGER ACTION
Maximum number of folder name
12 1 to 78
characters
FUNCTION
Maximum number of file name
12 1 to 78
characters
Word devices or bit devices specified as word devices

String storage device [w:GD200]
Applicable devices and representation methods 29
• For specifying with character string :
Number of characters: 256 or less
TIME ACTION
Number of format specifiers: 10 or less

FUNCTION
• For specifying with comments :

For specifying with character string : "%d,%5s"
Format *4 cmt (comment group, comment No.)
For specifying with comments : cmt(1,3)
Comment group: 1 to 255
Comment No. : 1 to 32767
Only the comments registered in the comment group can
be used.
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Read value storage device Word devices or bit devices specified as word devices
[w:GD200]
Write value storage device Applicable devices and representation methods
*1 Bit devices cannot be specified as word devices.

*For details of *2 to *4, refer to the following.

*2 How to use offset
The offset is an argument that represents the storage position of the target data in a folder or file.
For representing the storage position of the target data with an offset, the first byte of a folder or file is recognized as
the zeroth byte.
The following shows an offset example using the file read function (file_read).
Example) Offset for the file name "ARP00001.DAT":
For reading the data equivalent to six bytes (number of read bytes) starting from the fourth byte, and storing the read
data in the storage device "D100" and sequential devices
[s16:D500] = file_read("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP00001.DAT", [w:D100], 4,6); //Reading file
A drive
Project 1
ARP00001.DAT
Storage device
The first byte is counted
as the zeroth byte. D100 2 4
D101 8 6
D102 2 1
10584268123
Reading 6-byte data, starting from
the fourth byte, from
ARP000001.DAT, and storing the
read data in the devices from
D100 to D102.
*3 Folder name and file name
(1) How to use delimiter "\"

For specifying a folder name with a character string, set "\\" as a directory delimiter in a path.
In the file operation functions, the first delimiter "\" is recognized as a control character.
Therefore, fialure to set "\\" causes an error due to incorrect path specification.
Example: "A:\Project\" (Actual path) "A:\\Project\\" (Path as argument)
For specifying a folder name with a device, do not set "\\" as a directory delimiter in a path.
Doing so causes an error due to incorrect path specification.
(2) Restrictions on folder name and file name
For the character strings that are not applicable to folder names and file names, refer to the following.
(3) Wild card specification
Only when the file name obtaining function (file_getlist) is used, a wild card can be used for specifying a file
name.
Use the wild card under the following conditions.
(a) The symbol that can be used as the wild card is "*" only.
Applicable example : "ARP*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP?????.DAT"
(b) Only one "*" can be used in one argument.
Only "*.*" without characters can be set as an exception.
Applicable example : "*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP*.*"
(c) For using "*" for the file name part in <file name>, "*" can be set right before "." (Period) only.
Applicable example : "ARP*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP*01.DAT"
(d) For using "*" for the extension in <file name>, only "*" can be set.
Applicable example : "ARP00001.*"
Inapplicable example : "ARP00001.*AT"

23
HINT
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
Wild card
A wild card is a symbol that treats an unknown part in a file name as any character string.
The part specified with the wild card can be any character string.
The following shows an example of using the wild card.

24
Example : For obtaining file names starting with "ARP" and ending with ".DAT" from the "A:\\Project1\\" folder.
FUNCTION
//Obtaining file name
LOGGING
[s16:D500] = file_getlist("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP*.DAT", [w:GD100], 0, 5, 12);
ARP * .DAT
Wild card (any character string) 25
A drive
Project 1
RECIPE
ARP00001.CSV
ARP00002.CSV
ARP00003.CSV 26
ARP00004.CSV Obtained character strings
ARP00005.CSV
ARP00001.DAT ARP00001.DAT
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
"*" part
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
*4 How to specify the format
The format is specified by the format specifier and the escape sequence.
Available format specifiers and escape sequences differ according to the functions. 28
TRIGGER ACTION
POINT
(1) Format specification with comments FUNCTION
Only the comments registered in the comment group can be used.
Basic comments cannot be used.
Do not insert a line feed in the format. 29
If a line feed is inserted, the description after the line feed is not reflected in the format.
(2) Format specifier
The format specifier is a string that determines the data type for reading or writing data.
TIME ACTION
The syntax of the format specifier differs according to the functions.

FUNCTION
Each data has one format specifier.

The number of format specifiers must be the same as the number of devices, which are storage locations of
read or written data.
(3) Escape sequence
30
The escape sequence is a string to skip or write control symbols and others.
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(1) String input function (ASCII code) (str_scanf)

(a) Format specifier
The format specifier is set with the following syntax.
% + Flag + Field width + Type specifier
Representation example)
For skipping one character and then read data with five field width as the decimal number: "%*c%5d"
• Flag
The flag functions when data is read.
If necessary, add a flag after a percent sign (%).
Representation
Flag Representation Description
example
Skip the data of the specified type specifier.

The number of skipped data is not added to the number of read data
Skip * %*d
(return value).
(Representation example: When skipping decimal data)
• Field width
The field width specifies the maximum number of characters that can be read from a string.
If the number of data to be read is larger than the number of bytes specified in the field width, a part of
the read data that exceeds the number of bytes specified for the field width cannot be read.
The field width is described with a non-negative integer.
If necessary, add the field width before the type specifier.
• Type specifier
The type specifier specifies the type of the data to be read from a string.
The format specifier requires the type specifier.
Type specifier Description
c Read one character.
s Read a string.
d Read an integer as the decimal number.
u Read an unsigned integer as the decimal number.
o Read an integer as the octal number.
x Read an integer as the hexadecimal number.
f Read a real number.
Read characters specified in the bracket.

At the time when characters other than the characters in the bracket are read, the reading is interrupted.
Example)
When %[ABC] is set for the format specifier and a string of“CBAGAB”is read, the result is “CBA”.
[...]
When “^” is added to the characters in the bracket, characters other than the specified characters are read.
At the time when characters in the bracket are read, the reading is interrupted.
Example)
When %[^ABC] is set for the format specifier and a string of “DEFADE” is read, the result is “DEF”.
% Skip a percent sign (%).
(b) Escape sequence
Escape sequence Description
\n Skip a line feed (LF).
\t Skip a tab.
\\ Skip a backslash sign (\).
\? Skip a question mark (?).
\' Skip a single quotation mark (').
\" Skip a double quotation mark (").

(2) String output function (ASCII code)(str_printf)

23
(a) Format specifier
OPERATION LOG
The format specifier is set with the following syntax.
% + Flag + Field width + Precision specification + Type specifier
FUNCTION
Representation example)
For writing left-aligned data with five field widths as the fixed point number with four decimal digits: "%-5.4f"
• Flag
The flag functions when data is written. 24
If necessary, add a flag after a percent sign (%).
Representation
Flag Representation Description
FUNCTION
example
LOGGING
Left-align a string when the field width is specified.
Left alignment - %-d
(Representation example: Left-aligning decimal data)
Plus sign (+)

addition
+ %+d
Add a plus sign (+) before a numeric value.
(Representation example: Adding a plus sign (+) to decimal data)
25
Add a blank before a numeric value.
Blank addition Blank %d
(Representation example: Adding a blank to decimal data)
Pad the blank space with zeros when the field width is specified.
Zero padding 0 %05d (Representation example: Padding the blank space of decimal data with
RECIPE
zeros)
Add 0, 0x, or 0X as a prefix when a numeric value in the octal number or

Prefix # %#5x the hexadecimal number is written. 26
(Representation example: Adding 0x to hexadecimal data as a prefix)
• Field width
The field width is the maximum number of characters that can be written in a field.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
If the number of characters of data to be written is less than the number of characters specified for the
field width, the remaining digits stores blanks.
The field width is described with a non-negative integer.
If necessary, add the field width before the type specifier.
• Precision specification
27
The precision specification specifies a period (.) and a non-negative integer.
The meaning of the precision specification differs according to the type specifier used.
OBSERVATION
When the precision specification is not added to the syntax, the default value of the precision
FUNCTION
specification is applied.
STATUS
If necessary, add the precision specification after the field width.
Type specifier Description Precision default value 28

c The precision specification is invalid. -
TRIGGER ACTION
Specify the maximum number of characters to be output.
s 8
Characters that exceed the precision specification value are not output.
Specify the number of digits of data to be written. FUNCTION

When the number of digits in the argument is smaller than the value specified in
the precision specification, the remaining digits are filled with Null or zeros.
d, u, o, x, X (Whether the remaining digits are filled with Null or zeros differ according to the 1
specified flag.) 29
When the number of digits is more than the number of values of the precision
specification, the value is not truncated.
TIME ACTION
Specify the number of decimal digits of a decimal number.

FUNCTION
*1
When a decimal point is displayed, the integer part of the decimal number is
f
displayed.
The value is truncated to the appropriate number of digits.
Specify the output number of decimal digits of a decimal number. 6

e, E *1 Up to 39 digits can be specified for the precision. 30
The last number of the output value is truncated.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Specify the number of significant digits of data to be written.

g, G
Up to 14 digits can be specified for the precision.
*1 In the following cases, the digits after the decimal point are not output.
• When 0 is set for the precision specification
• When a period (.) is set without a number following the period

• Type specifier
The type specifier specifies the type of the data to be written to a string.
The format specifier requires the type specifier.
Type specifier Description
c Write one character.
s Write a string.
d Write an integer as the signed decimal number.
u Write an integer as the unsigned decimal number.
o Write an integer as the octal number.
Write an integer as the hexadecimal number.

x, X
When X is used in data, alphabets are written in uppercase.
Write a real number in the real number format.

f
Example) 123.456
Write a real number in the index number format.

The index number is displayed in the three digits.
e, E
Example) 12345.6e-002
When E is used in data, alphabets are written in uppercase.
Write a real number in the appropriate format.

When the index number is any of the following values, the real number is written in the index number format.
• Value less than -4
g, G
• Value larger than the precision value (set for the precision specification)
If the index number is other than the above values, the real number is written in the real number format.
When G is used in data, alphabets are written in uppercase.
Write a percent sign (%).

% Specifying the corresponding device is not required.
Even though the field width and the flag are specified, they become invalid.
(b) Escape sequence
Escape sequence Description
\n Write a line feed (LF).
\r Write a carriage return (CR).
\t Write a tab.
\\ Write a backslash sign (\).
\? Write a question mark (?).
\' Write a single quotation mark (').
\" Write a double quotation mark (").

23
 Applicable temporary device areas and representation methods
For temporary device area, 1024 points of from TMP0 to TMP1023 are applicable.
OPERATION LOG
One variable is handled as 32 bits, and stores 0 at power-on of the GOT.
FUNCTION
Read/write of the temporary device area is possible from multiple scripts created by the project script and screen
script.
The temporary device area representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below.
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example

24
Word device [w: temporary device area No.] [w:TMP0001]
Bit device [b: temporary device area No. bit position] [b:TMP1023.01]
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Temporary device areas are used in the following cases.
Example 1: Prevention of a write delay in assignment processing of the PLC CPU

30.1.2 Precautions for use 25
Example 2: Write target device of while statement
Example 3: Variable for operation
RECIPE
When assigning a D0 + 1 value to D1 and assigning a D1 + 1 value to D2
26
[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]+1; //substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001]+1; //substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
POINT
Precautions for using temporary device area
27
The temporary device area is a 32-bit global variable.
Note that a correct value cannot be read in either of the following cases.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
(a) A value is read in the script of which data format is different from that of the script used to write the value
STATUS
to the temporary device area.
Example: Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w:TMP0000] = 0x1234; 28
Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)
TRIGGER ACTION
[w:GD0000] = [w:TMP0000];
(b) A value is read in the script represented (as word device/bit device) differently from the script used to
write the value to the temporary device area. FUNCTION
Example: Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)

[w:TMP0000] = 0x3;
if( [b:TMP0000.b0] == ON) {• • • 29
Make sure to write and read a value to and from one temporary device area in the same data format and
representation.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Representing bit device (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.
(1) When performing relational operation of bit device
A device value, which is normally represented as "1" or "0", can also be represented as "ON" or "OFF".
if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
(2) When performing assignment processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented by assigning "1" or "0", can be also represented by assigning "ON"
or "OFF".
set([b:X100]); //X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=1; //X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=ON; //X100 turns ON.
 Replacing devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced with any character string.
Configure the user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer3.
For details of the setting method, refer to the following.
30.2.1 Script symbol tab / Script symbols
Example) When replacing "b:X100" with "LS1_ERROR" using GT Designer3
if(LS1_ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100(LS1_ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.

23
 Device offset
The device offset can be specified.
OPERATION LOG
This specification is allowed only in screen script.
FUNCTION
(1) Format
Example: When D200 is 5, store 48 in D105.
[ w:D100[ w:D200] ] = 48;

24
Offset device
Base device
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(2) Applicable device
(a) Base device
The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is not applicable) 25
(b) Offset device
The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is applicable. Please set device as the
multiple of 16.)
RECIPE
(3) Example
Switch the parameter according to operation mode.
• D10 : for switching operation mode • D100 to D900 : for storing parameter value 26
• GD500 : base device • TMP100 : offset device
(a) Script 1 (specify parameter value)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
[w:GD500]=10; //parameter value of operation mode1
[w:GD501]=11;
[w:GD502]=12;
:
[w:GD600]=20; //parameter value of operation mode2 27
[w:GD601]=21;
[w:GD602]=22;
:
OBSERVATION
[w:GD700]=30; //parameter value of operation mode3
FUNCTION
[w:GD701]=31;
STATUS
[w:GD702]=32;
:
(b) Script 2 (offset value is determined by the device value for switching operation mode)
28
switch( [w: D10] ){
TRIGGER ACTION
case 1: //when D10 is 0, offset value is 0.
[w:TMP100]=0;
FUNCTION
break;
case 2: //when D10 is 2, offset value is 100
[w:TMP100]=100;
break;
case 3:
[w:TMP100]=200;
//when D10 is 3, offset value is 200
29
break;
}
TIME ACTION
(c) Script 3 (write parameter according to offset value)

FUNCTION
bmov([w:GD500[w:TMP100]],[w:D100],10); //write the device value of (GD500+TEM100) to D100 to D109.
POINT 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Precautions for example (b) and (c)

When script (b) and script (c) are executed simultaneously or in a single script, the offset switching is delayed,
causing the system to operate abnormally.

(4) Precautions
(a) Data type of the offset device
Regardless of [Data Type] set in [Script Edit], the device type is converted to the signed 16-bit binary data.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[s32:GD1000]];

1) When "65535" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "-1" (signed 16-bit binary data).
The value in D999 is assigned to GD 100.
2) When "65537" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "1" (signed 16-bit binary data).
The value in D1001 is assigned to GD100.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[d32:GD1000]];

When "10" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "16" (signed 16-bit binary data). The
value in D1016 is assigned to GD100.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[flt:GD1000]];

1) When "65535.0" is set for GD1000 (real number), the value is "-1" (signed 16-bit binary data). The value
in D999 is assigned to GD100.
2) When "65537.0" is set for GD1000 (real number), the value is "1" (signed 16-bit binary data). The value
in D1001 is assigned to GD100.
(b) Processing delay when the offset device value is assigned

When a device for a controller is used as the base device, the processing is delayed and the operation can
be incorrectly executed even though the offset device value is changed.
When offset cannot be performed normally, use temporary device area or GOT internal device.
30.1.2 Precautions for use
To use the GOT internal devices, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].

23
 Integer <--> Real number conversion function
In script function, the data type is selected for each script. Once it is set, it cannot be changed (fixed). However, the
OPERATION LOG
integer device value can be calculated as real number by using integer real number conversion function.
FUNCTION
(1) Conversion method
Integer real number conversion is executed by taking GOT internal device (GD) as conversion target.
Integer real number conversion can be executed by specifying the following devices.
Maximum 4096 devices can be converted once. 24
For details about GOT internal device, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
POINT
Device that can be the target of integer real number conversion 25
Integer real number conversion can only be executed by GOT internal devices (GD).
To convert the device value of controller, transmit the device value of controller to GOT internal device (GD) by
script (bmov instruction).
RECIPE
(a) Read device
Device Function Description 26

Specify the conversion start and conversion method by each bit.
b0 :Unsigned 16-bit binary data are converted to real numbers.
b1 :Signed 16-bit binary data are converted to real numbers.
DEVICE DATA
b2 to b3 :Disabled
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
GS460 Conversion start instruction
b4 :Real numbers are converted to unsigned 16-bit binary data.
b5 :Real numbers are converted to signed 16-bit binary data.
b6 to b14:Disabled
27
b15 :Execute conversion when it is turned ON.
GS461 Number of conversion devices Number of devices
Conversion source head Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value before
GS462
OBSERVATION
device No. conversion.
FUNCTION
Conversion destination head Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value after
GS463
STATUS
device No. conversion.
When error occurs, specify the device value to be stored in the conversion source device.
GS464 Storage error value
(Useful for error recognition)
28
(b) Write device
TRIGGER ACTION
Device Function Description
Store the conversion completion notification and error occurrence status into each bit. FUNCTION
When conversion start instruction (GS460.b15) is turned OFF (0), each bit becomes 0.
b0 to b13 : Disabled
GS260 Status
b14 : It is turned ON when error occurs during conversion
processing by GOT. (Store error code in GS261) 29
b15 : It is turned ON when conversion is completed by GOT.
Store the error during conversion.

GS261 Error code *1
Store 0 when the conversion is completed normally.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1 Error code
Error codes stored in GS261 and the error information are as follows:
Error code Description Remark
1 Conversion start instruction is not initialized
2 Conversion start instruction is not set correctly.
3 Number of devices is set out of the range. Conversion processing is not executed.
4 Device is out of range.
5 Conversion source overlaps with conversion destination.
6 Not used ---
7 Conversion error (overflow, ect.) Conversion processing continues.
(2) Example
The average value of the data (signed 16-bit binary data) stored in the controller device is displayed on the GOT
as the real number.
(a) Operate when GB50 (trigger) turns ON

Transmit the value to GOT internal device
(b) Integer GD100 50
D100 50 real number
conversion GD109 139
D109 139
(c) Store average
value in GD300
GD300 68.25
GD300 68.25
Display on GOT
(a) Script 1 (conversion start processing)

Transmit the devices (D100 to D109) value of controller to GOT internal devices (GD100 to GD109) and
execute integer real number conversion.
After conversion is started, script 2 starts.
Data type: Signed BIN16 Trigger: GB50 is ON
bmov([w:D100],[w:GD100],10);
[w:GS461]=10; //Number of object devices to be converted
[w:GS462]=100; //Conversion source head device No.
[w:GS463]=200; //Conversion destination head device No.
[w:GS460]=0x8002; //Conversion starts
set([b:GB100]); //Script 2 starts
(b) Script 2 (conversion completion monitor processing)

Wait the completion of integer real number conversion.
If error does not occur after conversion is completed, clear the conversion start instruction device
simultaneously when starting script 3.
Data type: Signed BIN16 Trigger: GB100 is ON
if([b:GS260.15]==1)
{ //Conversion completed.
if([b:GS260.14]==0)
{
set([b:GB101]); //Conversion is completed normally (script 3 starts).
}
[w:GS460]=0; //Clear conversion start.
rst([b:GB100]); //Clear the start of script 2.
}

(c) Script 3 (Average calculating processing) 23

After converting to real number, calculate the average value of GOT internal device and store in GD300.
OPERATION LOG
Data type: Real number Trigger: GB101 is ON
FUNCTION
[w:TMP001]=0;
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD200];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD202];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD204];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD206]; 24
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD208];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD210];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD212];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD214];
FUNCTION
LOGGING
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD216];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD218];
[w:GD300]=[w:TMP001]/10; //Store the average in GD300 (real number)
rst([b:GB101]); //Clear start of script 3.
25
(3) Precautions
(a) Turn the conversion start instruction (GS460) OFF after conversion completion.
When the device is ON, the conversion cannot be executed even if conversion start instruction is executed.
RECIPE
(b) During integer real number conversion, figures after the decimal point will be rounded off. (1.53 1)
(When it is out of the real number range, error code will be displayed during operation and the conversion
cannot be executed.)
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Data type conversion function

The GOT can calculate integer device values as real numbers easier with the data type conversion function than with
the integer real number conversion function.
The function allows reading / writing of a word device value after converting the value into the specified data type.
The data type to which a device value should be converted is specified when reading / writing the device value.
The table below shows the list of the data types that can be specified by the data type conversion function.
Data type after conversion Expression example Representation example
//Refers to the value in GD0 as the data type of [Data

Type].
Signed BIN16 [s16:device] [s16:D0]=[w:GD0]; //Converts the device value into
//the signed 16-bit binary data, and
//substitutes the data to D0.
//Refers to the value in D0 as the unsigned 16-bit //binary

data.
Unsigned BIN16 [u16:device] [w:GD0]=[u16:D0]; //Coverts the value into the data type of
//[Data Type], and substitutes the data to
//GD0.
//Refers to the value in D0 to D1 as

Signed BIN32 [s32:device] if([s32:D0]<0){ //the signed 32-bit binary data.
//Compares the data with "0".
//Refers to the value in GD0 and GD1 as

//data type of [Data Type].
//Executes calculation, and converts the result //data into
Unsigned BIN32 [u32:device] [u32:GD10]=[w:GD0]*[w:GD1];
the unsigned 32-bit
//binary data, and substitutes the data to GD10 //and
GD11.
//Refers to the value in GD0 as the data type

//of [Data Type].
BCD16 [d16:device] [d16:GD0]=[w:D0]&0x000F; //Executes calculation, and converts
//the result data into BCD16, and substitutes
//the data to GD0.
//Refers to the value in D0 to D1 as BCD32.

BCD32 [d32:device] [w:GD0]=[d32:D0]; //Converts the value into the data type of
//[Data Type], and substitutes the data to GD0.
//Refers to the value in D200 as the data type //of [Data

Type].
Real number [flt:device] [flt:D100]=log([w:D200]); //Executes calculation, and converts the result
//data into the real number, and
//substitutes the data to D100 to D101.
Example 1) Substituting the average of device values when Signed BIN16 is set as [Data Type]
[flt:D10]=([w:D20]+[w:D30]+[w:D40]+[w:D50]+[w:D60])/5;
Example 2) Writing a real device value in Signed BIN32 after dropping the fractional portion of the device value
[s32:D100]=[flt:D200];
Example 3) Writing a real device value in Signed BIN32 after rounding off the device value
[s32:D100]=[flt:D200]+0.5;

30.2.7 Program examples 23
OPERATION LOG
This section explains script program with examples.
FUNCTION
 Touch switches with interlock function
(1) Operation
When the ready switch and run/stop switch turns on, the running lamp is lit.
System operation is controlled synchronously with the running lamp. 24
Screen Image Part Operation Definition
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Running lamp:
Indicates the operating status of the system.
Ready switch:
25
Acts as an interlock for the [Run/Stop] switch.
Run/Stop switch:
Used to switch the operating status (run/stop) of the system.
RECIPE
26
(2) Monitor screen settings
DEVICE DATA
Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
M0003
Running lamp Bit lamp Monitor device
(System operation controlling device)
Ready switch Bit switch

Monitor device
Operation setting
M0001
Alternate
27
Monitor device M0002
Run/Stop switch Bit switch
OBSERVATION
Operation setting Alternate
FUNCTION
STATUS
(3) Program example
Item Description
28
Data format Signed BIN16
TRIGGER ACTION
Trigger type Ordinary
if ([b:M0001]&&[b:M0002]==1){ //if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON FUNCTION
set([b:M0003]); //the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.
}
Script
else{ //if not
rst([b:M0003]); //the running lamp turns off and the system is stopped. 29
}
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions

(1) Operation
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control statuses of three lines are represented
by one lamp.
Control status lamp:

The lamp color and comment are changed according to the operating status of
each line.
Line 1 switch to Line 3 switch:

Controls the operation status of the line 1 to line 3.
Stop all lines switch:

Stops all lines.
Monitor device D10
Display range : $V==0 Lamp color: 182

Text : All lines stop

Text : Line 1 running

Text : Line 2 running

Control status lamp Word lamp Text : Line 3 running
Style, text
Text : Lines 1, 2 running



Text : Lines 1, 2, 3 running
Monitor device X1
Line 1 switch Bit switch
Monitor device X2
Monitor device X3
Monitor device X0
Stop all lines switch Bit switch
Operation setting Set

(3) Program example

23
OPERATION LOG
Item Description
FUNCTION
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF

[w:D10]=0; //stores 0 into D10 24
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1 is ON and line 2 and 3 are OFF.

[w:D10]=1; //stores 1 into D10
FUNCTION
LOGGING
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 2 is ON and line 1 and 3 are OFF.

} 25
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 3 is ON and line 1 and 2 are OFF.
}
RECIPE
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.
}
Script
26
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 1 and 3 are ON and line 2 is OFF.
}
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 2 and 3 are ON and line 1 is OFF.
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 1, 2 and 3 are ON. 27

}
OBSERVATION
if ([b:X0]==ON){ //if all lines stop turns ON
FUNCTION
rst([b:X1]); //turns OFF line 1.
STATUS
rst([b:X0]); //turns OFF all lines stop.
} 28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Password input screen with time limit function

(1) Operation
The password enter screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds
after it appeared.
Screen with the Manager switch (base screen 3)
Manager button:
Shifts to the password enter screen (base screen 4).
Screen change Returns in 10 seconds
Password entry:
Displays the password entered by using the 0 to 9 switches.
0 to 9 switch:
Enters a value.
Clear switch:
Clears the entered value.
Confirm switch:
Confirms the entered value.
Password match
Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.
Manager button Screen switching switch Operation setting Switching to base screen 4
Password entry Numerical input Monitor device D10
1 switch Key code switch Operation setting Key code [0031H]
Clear switch Key code switch Operation setting Key code [0088H]
Confirm switch Key code switch Operation setting Key code [000DH]

(3) Program example

23
OPERATION LOG
Item Description
FUNCTION
if([b:GS1.01]==ON){ //only when the password input screen has appeared

[w:TMP0001]=[w:GS7]; //assigns GS7 to TMP0001. 24
}
if([w:D10]==3238){ //when the correct password is entered

[w:D0]=5; //switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Script [w:D10]=0; //clears the password.
}
if([w:GS7]-[w:TMP0001]>=10){ //if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password enter screen
//had appeared 25
[w:D0]=3; //returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).
}
RECIPE
POINT
Program example using GOT special registers (GS) 26
This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers store the GOT's internal data, communication status, script error data and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by correctly using the GOT special registers together with the script
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
functions.
FUNCTION
For details on GOT special registers, refer to the following.
27
 Example of using file operation functions
OBSERVATION
The following shows examples of using the file operation functions.
FUNCTION
STATUS
(1) File list obtaining function (file_getlist)
For obtaining two file names, starting from the third file among DAT files in the "Project1" folder of the A drive,
and for storing eight characters of each file name in devices from D100 to D109, the statement is as shown 28
below.
TRIGGER ACTION
s16:D500]=file_getlist("A:\\Project1\\","*.DAT",[w:D100],3,2,8); //Obtaining file list
A drive FUNCTION
Project 1
Storage device
29
ARP00001.CSV D100 R A
Obtaining two file names, D101 0 P
ARP00002.CSV
starting from the third
ARP00003.CSV D102 0 0
file among DAT files, and
TIME ACTION
ARP00004.CSV D103 4 0
FUNCTION
storing eight characters

ARP00005.CSV
of each file name in D104 \0 \0
ARP00001.DAT
devices from D100 to D109 D105 R A
ARP00002.DAT
ARP00003.DAT D106 0 P
ARP00004.DAT
ARP00005.DAT
D107 0 0 30
D108 5 0
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D109 \0 \0

(2) File read function (file_read)

For reading 16-byte data, starting from the fourth byte, from "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A
drive, and for storing the read data in devices from D100 to D107, the statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500]=file_read("A:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.DAT",[w:D100],4,16); //Reading file
A drive
Project 1
Storage device
APR00001.DAT
D100 7 0
0 0 0 0 D101 2 1
0 7 1 2 D102 1 1
1 1 1 5 D103 5 1
D104 0 2
2 0 3 2
D105 2 3
a b c d D106 b a
e f g h D107 d c
Reading 16-byte data, starting
from the fourth byte, from
ARP000001.DAT, and storing
the read data in devices from
D100 to D107
(3) File line read function (file_lineread)

Example) For reading one line data starting from the first line of "ARP00001.CSV" in the "Project1" folder of the
A drive, and storing the read data in the devices from D300 and sequential devices, the statement is as shown
below.
• Data length of one line: Up to 32 bytes
• D200: Return value (number of read bytes)
• D300: Storage device of read data
[s16:D200] = file_lineread("A:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.CSV",[w:D300],0,32); //Reading one line
A drive
Project 1
Storage device
APR00001.CSV
D300 , 1
Up to 32 bytes D301 3 1
}
D302 , 0
1,130 , 21 , … , 565 D303 1 2
…
2,125 , 51 , … , 761
D314 5 ,
3,152 , 31 , … , 225 D315 5 6
…
Reading the string starting from

the first character before the line
feed, and storing the read data in
D300 and sequential devices

23
HINT
OPERATION LOG
Reading data of the second or later lines
FUNCTION
By adding the number of read bytes stored as the return value to the offset device, the second or later lines can be
read consecutively.
Example)
[s16:D400] = [s16:D400] + [s16:D200]; //Adding the number of read bytes to the offset value 24
[s16:D200] = file_lineread("A:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.CSV",[w:D300],[s16:D400],256);
(4) File write function (file_write)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
For overwriting the fourth byte and subsequent bytes of "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A drive
with 16-byte data in devices from D100 to D109, the statement is as shown below.
25
[s16:D500]=file_write("A:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.DAT",[w:D100],4,16,2); //Writing to file
A drive
Project 1 Storage device
RECIPE
D100 7 0
ARP00001.DAT D101 2 1
26
0 0 0 0
D102 1 1
0 7 1 2
D103 5 1
1 1 1 5 D104 0 2
2 0 3 2 D105 2 3
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
D106 b a
FUNCTION
a b c d
D107 d c
D108 0 0
Overwriting the fourth byte and D109 0 0
subsequent bytes of 27
"ARP00001.DAT" with 16-byte
data in devices from
D100 to D109
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
(5) File rename function (file_rename)
For renaming the file name of "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A drive to "DATA1201.DAT", the
statement is as shown below. 28
[s16:D500]=file_rename("A:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.DAT","DATA1201.DAT"); //Renaming file
A drive TRIGGER ACTION

FUNCTION
Project 1
Renaming <file name> in
<folder name> to
<renamed file name>
29
ARP00001.DAT
TIME ACTION
DATA1201.DAT
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT DATA1201.DAT
<folder name> <file name> <renamed file name>

(6) File copy function (file_copy)

For copying "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder in the C drive to the "backup" folder in the A drive, the
statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500] =file_copy("C:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.DAT","A:\\backup\\","",1); //Copying file
A drive B drive
Project 1 backup
Copying <copy source file name> in

<copy source folder name> to
<copy destination folder name>
(7) Folder copy function (file_xcopy)

For copying data (including subfolders) in the "Project1" folder in the C drive to the "backup" folder in the A drive,
the statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500] =file_xcopy("C:\\Project1\\","","A:\\backup\\","",3); //Copying folder
A drive B drive
Project 1 backup
sample 1 sample 1
Copying data (including subfolders) in

<copy source folder name 1> and
<copy source folder name 2> to
<copy destination folder name 1> and
<copy destination folder name 2>

(8) Folder/file name character number specification functions

23
(#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma file_name_length)
OPERATION LOG
For setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 14 and that of file name characters to 12, the
FUNCTION
statements for reading data from a file are as shown below.
GD2000 to GD2006 :Storing a folder name of "A:\FOLDER01\"
GD2100 to GD2105 :Storing a file name of "ARP00001.DAT"
GD3000 to GD3015 :Storing data read from the file 24
#pragma folder_name_length(14) //Setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 14
#pragma file_name_length(12) //Setting the maximum number of file name characters to 12
[s16:D500]=file_read([w:GD2000],[w:GD2100],[w:GD3000],0,32);
//Reading 32-byte data from the specified file
FUNCTION
LOGGING
A:\FOLDER01\
Specifying the folder name with 14 characters
25
read from GD2000 to GD2006
A : \ FOLDER01 \
Specifying the file name with 12 characters

ARP00001.DAT read from GD2100 to GD2105
ARP00001.DAT
RECIPE
26
 Usage example of the string operation function
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The following shows a usage example of the string operation function.
(1) String input function (ASCII code)(str_scanf)
Example) For reading the first two fields of data from one line data stored in D100 and sequential devices
• D500: Return value 27
• D100: String storage device (Read one line data)
• D200: Read value storage device (First field)
OBSERVATION
• D204: Read value storage device (Second field)
FUNCTION
STATUS
[s16:D500] = str_scanf([w:D100],32,0,"%d,%4x",[w:200],[w:D204]); //Obtaining two data
D100 to D115: String to be read

28
1,1000,1574, … ,424
TRIGGER ACTION
Reading the data as
%d the decimal number
D200 1
(Signed 16-bit binary data)
FUNCTION
, Skipping the comma
Reading the data as
D204 4096
%4x the hexadecimal number
with the maximum of four digits (Signed 16-bit binary data)
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) String output function (ASCII code) (str_printf)

Example) For writing three data stored in D200, D300, and D400 to one string stored in D100 and sequential
devices
• D500: Return value
• D100: String storage device (String where data is written)
• D200: Write value storage device (Data written to the first field)
• D300: Write value storage device (Data written to the second field)
• D400: Write value storage device (Data written to the third field)
[s16:D500] = str_printf([w:D100],18,"%04d,%4x,%4.2f\r\n”,[s16:D200],[s16:D300],[flt:D400]);
//Writing three data
D100 to D108: String where the data is written
C L
Writing the device value of 0010, 4d2,3.14 R F
D200 10 D200 as the four-digit

decimal number with zero %04d
(Signed 16-bit binary data) padding
Writing the left-aligned
D300 1234 device value of D300 as %4x
the hexadecimal number
(Signed 16-bit binary data)
Writing the device value
D400 3.14151 of D400 as the real number
%4.2f
with the two digits after the
(Real number) decimal point
Writing the return codes \r\n
(3) String length acquisition function (ASCII code) (str_strlen)

Example) For acquiring the data length of the string stored in D100 and sequential devices, which can store 10-
byte data
• D500: Return value (Data length)
• D100: String storage device
[s16:D500] = str_strlen([w:D100],10); //Acquiring the data length of the string stored in D100 and sequential devices
Acquiring the stored data length Storing the acquired data length as the return value
D100 to D104: 10-byte string
Null
112567 D500 6
The data length is six digits.
(4) Partial string acquisition function (ASCII code) (str_strmid)

Example) For reading seven-byte data starting from the sixth character of the string stored in D100 and
sequential devices, and storing the read data in D200
• D500: Return value (Number of read data)
• D100: String storage device (String where data is read)
• D200: Read value storage device (Read data)
[s16:D500] = str_strmid([w:D100],[w:D200],5,7); //Reading seven-byte data starting from the sixth character
D100 to D108: string D200 D203
0 0 1 0 , DATA1 0 0 4 d 2 0 1 0 D ATA 1 0 0
Writing NULL
Reading the seven-byte data starting from
at the end of data
the sixth character of the string

OPERATION LOG
This section explains the precautions for using the project script or screen script.
FUNCTION
(1) Maximum number of script settings
Up to 256 script settings can be configured in one project or one screen.
(2) Maximum number of scripts that can be registered
24
Up to 32767 scripts can be registered.
(3) When editing scripts
FUNCTION
GT Designer3 cannot be operated while editing a script file by a script editor or a text editor after clicking the
LOGGING
[Edit Script] button.
While the scripts are edited, GT Designer3 seems to be frozen. Operation is restored when exiting the script
editor or text editor.
25
(4) Restoration of a script file
When the project for which [External File] is set in the [Option] tab is opened, if the script file does not exist in the
set path, GT Designer3 restores the script file.
In this case, set the folder where a script file should be restored at the dialog box as shown below.
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
(5) Clearing [Use system labels in conjunction with MELSOFT Navigator]
FUNCTION
When [Use system labels in conjunction with MELSOFT Navigator] is cleared, system labels used for scripts
cannot be converted to devices.
Set devices for project data by the user.
27
 Precautions for writing a script
(1) Operations that exceed the allowable range of a device value
OBSERVATION
Do not write a script that causes the operation result to exceed the allowable range of a device value.
FUNCTION
Script operation is executed internally by double-precision real numbers.
STATUS
Therefore, when judgment is made using such as an IF statement, results of judgment can differ depending on
the operation method.
28
Example: Judgment for the difference between GD100 and D100 using an IF statement
(for 16-bit unsigned binary)
TRIGGER ACTION
When GD100=-32758 and D100=32767
(a) When operation is executed in evaluation expression FUNCTION
if ( ( [w:GD100] - [w:D100] ) >= 10 ) { //If difference between GD100 and D100 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0; //"0" is written to D200.
} 29
The calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is "-65525", meaning that the condition is not
met.
TIME ACTION
(b) When processing the script after substitution

FUNCTION
[w:GD200] = [w:GD100] - [w:D100]; //Substitutes the value of "GD100 - D100" to GD200.

if ( [w:GD200] >= 10) { //When the value of GD200 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0; //"0" is written to D200.
} 30
When "-65525" which is the calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is substituted to
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GD200 in 16-bit unsigned binary, GD200 becomes "10", meaning that the condition is met.
(Since a value that cannot be handled by a variable (device) is substituted as the result of operation, the
result differs from that obtained in (a).)

(2) Precautions for using bmov and fmov instructions

(a) Data type
For using the bmov or fmov instructions, make sure that the data types for the word device 1 and the word
device 2 are the same.
When the data types differ, errors occur with the syntax check.
30.2.1 Settings
(b) Data type for [w:device]

The data type for [w:device] is set to the data type specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box.
The following example shows an error occurrence with the syntax check when using [w:device].
Example: When setting [Signed BIN16] for the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box
bmov([w:GD200],[flt:GD201],10);
Because the data type for GD200 is the signed BIN16 and the data type for GD201 is the real number,
errors occur with the syntax check.
30.2.6 Data type conversion function
POINT
Precautions for syntax check
When the syntax check is executed in the [Script File List] dialog box, the data type is processed as [Signed
BIN16].
For executing the syntax check with the arbitrary data type, set the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box, and
then execute the syntax check in the dialog box of the script editor.
(3) Precautions for using file operation functions

(a) Data type
For using the file operation functions, do not specify BCD data for the data types of the storage devices.
Doing so cannot detect errors with the script.
30.2.1 Settings
(b) Data type for [w:device]
The data type for [w:device] is set to the data type specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box.
For using [w:device] in any file operation function, do not specify BCD data for the data types of the storage
devices.
POINT
Precautions for syntax check
When the syntax check is executed in the [Script File List] dialog box, the data type is processed as [Signed
BIN16].
For executing the syntax check with the arbitrary data type, set the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box, and
then execute the syntax check in the dialog box of the script editor.
(c) Operations while files are read or written

The following file operation functions cannot be executed while the target file is accessed with the other
functions.
Execute the following functions after accessing the target file with the other functions is completed.
• During reading : file_read, file_write, file_lineread, file_delete
• During writing : file_read, file_write, file_lineread, file_rename, file_delete

(d) Precautions for using file rename function (file_rename) 23

When the full path to the file is specified in <folder name>, be sure to set <file name>.
OPERATION LOG
Failure to do so cannot rename the file name correctly.
FUNCTION
Example: When specifying full path to file in <folder name> without setting <file name>
[s16:D500] =file_rename("A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT","","DATA-15-JAN-08.DAT"); //Renaming file name
The file name is renamed from "ARP00001.DAT" to "ARP00001.DATDATA-15-JAN-08.DAT".
24
When the full path to the file is specified in <file name>, specify the full path to the file in <renamed file
name>.
Failure to do so change the file name and the path.
Therefore, the file is stored in a different storage area.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Example: When specifying full path to file in <file name> without setting <folder name>
[s16:D500] = file_rename("","A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT","DATA-15-JAN-08.DAT"); // Renaming file name
The file name is renamed from "ARP00001.DAT" to "DATA-15-JAN-2008.DAT".
25
(e) Precautions for using file copy function (file_copy)
• When no folder specified in <copy destination folder name> exists, a folder is created and the file is
copied in the folder.
RECIPE
Make sure to add "YY" to the end of <copy destination folder name>.
Failure to do so copies the file with renaming the file to the folder name specified in <copy destination
folder name>. 26
Example: When no folder specified in <copy destination folder name> exists and "YY" is not added to the
end of <copy destination folder name>
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
[s16:D200] =file_copy("A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT","B:\\backup","",1); //Copying file
When the "backup" folder does not exist in the A drive, "ARP00001.DAT" is copied in "A:YY" with renaming the file name to "backup".
• Do not create a folder with the same name as the file specified in <copy source file name> in the copy
destination drive. 27
Doing so cannot copy the file correctly.
(f) Precautions for using folder copy function (file_xcopy)
OBSERVATION
• When an error occurs during a copy process, the copy stops.
FUNCTION
For files copied before the copy stops, the copy processing is completed.
STATUS
• Do not create a folder with the same name as the file specified in <copy source file name> in the copy
destination drive.
Doing so cannot copy the file correctly.
28
(g) How to use folder/file name character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length,
#pragma file_name length)
TRIGGER ACTION
Use the folder/file name character number specification functions only one time at the head of a script.
Failure to do so cannot specify folder/file names correctly. FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(h) Precautions for specifying folder/file names with devices

Do not set values that exceed the numbers of actual folder/file name characters in the folder/ file name
character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma file_name length).
For specifying folder/file names with devices, the GOT reads device data equivalent to the numbers of
characters specified in the folder/file name character number specification functions.
When the values specified in the functions exceed the actual numbers of the file/folder name characters,
the GOT reads unnecessary data.
Reading unnecessary data increases loads on communication processing. As a result, updating screens
and executing scripts may take a longer time than those without reading unnecessary data.
Example: When maximum number of file name characters is set to 22 and number of actual file name
characters is 16
D100 to D110: Storing a folder name of "A:\folder-00001\"
D200 to D210: Storing a file name of "DATA-15-JAN-2008"
GD100 : Storage device
#pragma folder_name_length(22) //Setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 22
#pragma file_name_length(22) //Setting the maximum number of file name characters to 22
[s16:D500]=file_read([w:D100],[w:D200],[w:GD100],0,16); //Reading 16-byte data from the specified file
D100 : A D200 A D
D101 f \ D201 A T
D102 l o D202 1 -
D103 e d D203 - 5
D104 - r D204 A J
D105 0 0 D205 - N
D106 0 0 D206 0 2
12-byte
D107 \ 1 D207 8 0
unnecessary
data D108 D208
D109 D209
D110 D210
(4) Precautions for using the string operation function

(a) Available strings
The string operation function can use a string of the ASCII characters only.
If the string includes characters other than ASCII characters, a script error occurs.
(b) Return value when an error occurs
If an error occurs when data in a device set as an argument is read or written, execution of the script is
aborted.
Therefore, a return value is not stored in the device for storing the return value.
(c) Data storage order
For the data storage order when data is stored in a read value storage device or a string storage device,
[Low-->High] or [High-->Low] can be selected.
(5) Precautions for the format specification
(a) Field width of the format specifier
By using the format specifier, if a value specified for the field width is larger than a value of <number of read
bytes> or <number of write bytes>, the value of <number of read bytes> cannot be read or <number of
write bytes> cannot be written.
(b) Count of the skipped data
When the string input function (ASCII code) is used, data skipped by the skip flag (*) is not counted as the
number of read data (return value).
(c) Characters that cannot be specified with the format specifier "%[...]"
With the format specifier "%[...]", the following signs cannot be specified.
If the signs are specified, a format error occurs.
-, ]

(d) Format specification with a comment 23

A comment is configured in the Unicode text.
OPERATION LOG
When the format is specified by a comment, do not use characters that cannot be converted from the
Unicode text to the ASCII characters.
FUNCTION
Doing so places the characters with blanks.
(e) Data delimiter of a CSV file
When reading data obtained from the CSV file, or writing data in strings that are written to the CSV file,
indicate a delimiter with the format specifier. 24
Example) When reading obtained numerical values from a CSV file
• Delimited by a blank: The syntax "%d%d" can read the string "123 456".
• Delimited by a comma: The syntax "%d,%d" can read "123 , 456".
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(f) String delimiter
When a string is read by using "%s", a comma is not recognized as a delimiter but as a part of the string.
Therefore, the string with the comma used as the delimiter is read as one data.
To read the string as the data that is delimited by a comma, use "%[^,]" to read characters other than the 25
comma, and then, skip the delimiter with the comma.
Example) When reading the string "ABC?DEF" with "%s"
GD100 to D108: Storing the string "ABC,DEF"
GD200: Read value storage device 1
RECIPE
GD250: Read value storage device 2
[s16:GD500]=str_scanf([w:GD100],7,0,"%[^,],%s",GD200,GD250) ; //Reading the seven-byte string

26
ABC,DEF
DEVICE DATA
Reading characters other
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
than a comma and end D200 and sequential
%[^,] reading when the comma ABC
devices
is found
27
D250 and sequential
DEF
, Skipping the comma devices
Reading the remaining

%s
OBSERVATION
characters
FUNCTION
STATUS
Blanks are recognized as the delimiters. Therefore, if the string with a blank is read, the string is read as
multiple data.
To read a string with blanks as one data, use "%[^?]" to read characters other than a comma, and then skip
a delimiter with the comma. 28
Example) When reading the string "ABC D, EFG" by using the above script
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
A B C D , EF Reading characters other
than a comma and end D200 and sequential
%[^,] reading when the comma ABC D
devices
is found
29
D250 and sequential
EF
, Skipping the comma devices
TIME ACTION
Reading the remaining

FUNCTION
%s
characters
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(g) Number of significant digits for the single precision real

Maximum number of significant digits for the single precision real is six.
If the precision with more than six digits is set for the format specifier, the result may be incorrect.
(h) Differences in the written result between the GOT and GT SoftGOT1000/GT Simulator3
Between the GOT and GT SoftGOT1000/GT Simulator3, some processing differs.
The real number with the precision of more than six is written, the results may differ between the GOT and
GT SoftGOT1000/GT Simulator3.
(i) When writing a string with "%s"
Starting from a device to be written, device points that correspond to the number of characters are used.
Make sure to keep the writable device area in advance.

30.2.9 Precautions for using bmov 23
OPERATION LOG
If using the bmov instruction (many times) in Project script or Screen script to read device values from the controller into
the GOT internal devices, this may cause the performance of the GOT display refresh and screen change by use of the
FUNCTION
touch switch to slow down considerably.
This Section provides guidelines for using the GOT in order to improve the monitoring performance by reducing the
number of times to communicate with the controller using the bmov instruction.
24
POINT
How to read device values from controllers without bmov instruction
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The GOT can read device values with the device data transfer function instead of the bmov instruction.
With the device data transfer function, the GOT communicates with controllers only when trigger conditions are
met. Therefore, the GOT has no communication loads by always monitoring the device used for the script function.
For the device data transfer function, refer to the following.
25
 Reducing the communication time when using bmov instruction
RECIPE
With Project script or Screen script, the GOT only reads*2 a batch of device values from the controller direct
address*1, regardless of script execution condition, or conditional 'if' or 'switch' statements.
Also, when using the bmov instruction to read devices from the controller, communication with the controller from the
26
GOT is done one or more times for each instruction*2, depending on the amount of data.
Therefore, in order to reduce the communication time, it is recommend to read a batch of values from the source
DEVICE DATA
devices into a TMP (Temporary device area) area before transferring the data to the GOT internal devices.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
*1 When the offset is specified in the device, the offset device is the device described in the direct address.
*2 The Screen script applies only to the currently displayed screen on the GOT.
The following counter measures should be taken into consideration.

(a) The batch of divided blocks are read from the controller to the GOT internal memory during one
27
communication processing.
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices into separate blocks and transferred to the
OBSERVATION
temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices, such as GD.
FUNCTION
STATUS
Script solution examples
(b) The batch of divided blocks (for each 'if' and 'switch' statement) are read from the controller to the GOT
internal memory during one communication processing. 28
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices according to the 'if' and 'switch' statements
and transferred to the temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices, such as GD.
TRIGGER ACTION
Script solution examples(2) Reading bmov in a batch of steps within a script
FUNCTION
When reading a batch of devices from the controller to the temporary device area, make sure the devices
fall within the specified range, as shown in the table below.
If the number of words is greater than the specified reference, the number will be automatically divided and
then transferred. 29
Number of words transferred by bmov for each communication
Connected controller
processing
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
QCPU (bus connection only)

960 words
Motion controller CPU (Q mode)
QCPU (other than bus connection)
LCPU 30
480 words
QnACPU
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Motion controller CPU (A mode)
ACPU
64 words
FXCPU

 Script solution examples

(1) Reading a batch of device values into temporary device area
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal memory and
the controller down to just once, where it took 3 times to do the same processing before.
(When transferring from the temporary device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory*1
does not communicate with the controller.)
*1 System area used for communication processing. The user is not permitted access to this area.
[Normal process]
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, R1010 to R1014 and R1020 to R1024 into GD360 to
GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to GD384, respectively.
(b) Script description GOT

bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5); controller internal Internal
device memory GD
bmov([w:R1010],[w:GD370],5);
R1000 to R1004 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:R1020],[w:GD380],5);
R1010 to R1014 GD370 to GD374
R1020 to R1024 GD380 to GD384
3 times : Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing
[Solution applied]
(c) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1024 into TMP0 to TMP24 within GOT at once.
Then they are transferred from TMP0 to TMP24 into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to
GD384, respectively, as shown below.
(d) Script description GOT

bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],25); controller internal Internal
device
bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5); memory GD
TMP0 to TMP4 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:TMP10],[w:GD370],5);
TMP5 to TMP9
bmov([w:TMP20],[w:GD380],5); R1000 to R1024 TMP10 to TMP14 GD370 to GD374
TMP15 to TMP19
TMP20 to TMP24 GD380 to GD384
1 time : Indicates the communication with controller


(2) Reading bmov in a batch of steps within a script

23
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal memory and
OPERATION LOG
the controller to just once, where it took 10 times to do the same processing before.
(When reading internal devices within the controller in 'if' or 'switch' statement, the internal memory
FUNCTION
communicates with the controller regardless of the execution condition. When transferring from the temporary
device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory does not communicate with the controller.)
[Normal process] 24
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, ... and R1900 to R1904 into GD360 to GD364
depending on the amount of data.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(b) Script description GOT
switch([w:D1000]){ controller internal Internal
25
case device memory GD
case 1: 1 R1000 to R1004 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5);
2 R1100 to R1104
break; : : :
case 2: : : :
9 R1800 to R1804
bmov([w:R1100],[w:GD360],5);
RECIPE
break; 10 R1900 to R1904
: 10 times : Indicates the communication with controller
case 9:
26
bmov([w:R1800],[w:GD360],5);
break;
case 10:
DEVICE DATA
bmov([w:R1900],[w:GD360],5);
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);
27
[Solution applied]
(c) Processing outline
OBSERVATION
A batch of device values is transferred from R1000 to R1904 into TMP0 to TMP904 within GOT once, and
FUNCTION
then it is transferred from TMP0 to TMP904 into GD360 to GD364 depending on the amount of data.
STATUS
(d) Script description
bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],905); GOT
28
switch([w:D1000]){ controller internal
device
Internal
TMP case GD
memory
case 1:
TRIGGER ACTION
TMP0 to TMP4 1 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5); TMP5 to TMP99
TMP100 to TMP104 2
break;
R1000 to R1904
: :
FUNCTION
case 2: : :
TMP800 to TMP804 9
bmov([w:TMP100],[w:GD360],5); TMP805 to TMP899
break;
29
TMP900 to TMP904 10
: 1 time : Indicates the communication with controller

case 9: : Indicates the bmov processing
bmov([w:TMP800],[w:GD360],5);
break;
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
case 10:
bmov([w:TMP900],[w:GD360],5);
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.3 Object Script
This section explains the object script that operates for each object.
Three types of object script are available as shown below.
 Input object script

Input object script is executed for objects where input numerical, etc.
Example:
The value to be written to a device is changed according to the input value.
30.3.7 Data calculation by numerical input script
When "-145" is written. When "456" is written.
 Display object script

Display object script is executed for objects where display characters, lamps, etc.
Example:
The script changes the numerical value display color and makes the value blink when a numerical value is not
updated for 5 seconds. (The script notifies that the device value update is stopped.)
30.3.7 To start blinking after the elapse of set time
 Switch object script

Switch object script is executed for the touch switch (Switch only).
Example:
The script shows or hides a touch switch so that a switch can be touched only when the operation is required.
30.3.7 Showing/hiding the input/touch operation object
30 - 72 30.3 Object Script

30.3.1 Settings 23
OPERATION LOG
1. Double click an object arranged on the screen to display the setting dialog box.
FUNCTION
Double click 24
2. Open the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script] tab to configure the settings for the object script.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
Numerical input for [Operation/Script] tab
The items to be set in the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script] vary depending on the object type.
For details of setting items displayed in the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script], refer to the following.
RECIPE
Object script type Target object Reference
Input object script Numerical input*1, ASCII input*1

Script tab and operation/script tab of
input object scripts
26
Bit lamp, Word lamp, Numerical display, Numerical input*2,
*2
ASCII display, ASCII input , Date display, Time display,
DEVICE DATA
Script tab and operation/script tab of
TRANSFER
Comment display, Level, Panelmeter, Line graph,
FUNCTION
Display object script
Trend graph, Bar graph, Statistics bar graph, display object scripts
Statistics pie graph, Scatter graph,
Parts display, Parts movement
Switch object script Touch switch (Switch only) Script tab of switch object scripts 27
*1 When selecting the input object script
*2 When selecting the display object script
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
30.3 Object Script 30 - 73

 Script tab and operation/script tab of input object scripts
(Screen for the input object script setting in the numerical input)
Click the [Input] button to set the input object script.

Clicking this button displays the setting items for the input object script.
This button is displayed only for the following objects.
• Numerical input • ASCII input
Use Object Script Select this item to use the object script.
Set a script user ID No.

Script User ID The script user ID No. must be unique.
By setting unique numbers, it is possible to identify the object script that caused an error.
Select the device data type to be used by a script.

Select the execution condition of a script.

• Ordinary • ON • OFF • Rise • Fall • Rise/Fall • Sampling • ON Sampling
• OFF Sampling • Key Code Input • Input Fixation
Trigger Type*1 When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle by the second. (1 to
3600 seconds)
Set the trigger device when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [Rise/Fall], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected
Trigger Device for [Trigger Type].
Displays the scripts.

Script
The scripts can be edited. After editing the scripts, click the [Syntax Check] button to check the edited scripts.
Opens the editor to edit the scripts.

Script editor
*1 For precautions when [ON], [OFF], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, refer to the following.
Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles

23
 Script tab and operation/script tab of display object scripts
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
(Screen for the display object script setting in the numerical input)
Click the [Display] button to set the display object script.
RECIPE
Clicking the button displays the setting items for the display object script.
This button is displayed only for the following objects.
Use Object Script

• Numerical input • ASCII input
Select this item to use the object script.

26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Select the execution condition of a script. 27

• OFF Sampling • View Change • Synchronize Display Trigger*2
OBSERVATION
3600 seconds)
FUNCTION
STATUS
TRIGGER ACTION
Script

FUNCTION
Script editor
29
*2 Not available for the bit lamp, word lamp, date display, time display, and panelmeter.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Script tab of switch object scripts

Use Object Script Select this item to use the object script.
Select the execution condition of a script.
• OFF Sampling • Device Writing
3600 seconds)
When substituting the value processed by the script to a device in response to the operation of a touch switch,
set the target device.
Select the data type of object internal variable $W (write device).
$W (Writing Device) Data Type • Bit • Signed BIN16 • Unsigned BIN16 • Signed BIN32
• Unsigned BIN32 • BCD16 • BCD32 • Real
Set the object internal variable $W (write device).
Device

Script editor
Script

23
 Script editor
The Edit Script tab is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
Script edit area
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
Item
Scripts can be edited directly.

Description Model
26
Returns the script edit operation one step.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Redoes returned operation.
Cuts the selected character string.
Copies the selected character string.

27
Pastes the copied or cut character string.
OBSERVATION
Deletes the selected character string.
FUNCTION
*1
Script edit area
STATUS
Reads out the script edited in a text file or Unicode text file to GT Designer3.
*1
Saves the script edited by GT Designer3 in a text file or Unicode text file.
The search dialog box is displayed. 28

Enter the search target texts and select the search direction (upward/downward). Click the
TRIGGER ACTION
[Search Next] button to search for the entered texts.
Set an object script symbol.

Click the [Sym] button to display the [Object Script Symbol] dialog box. FUNCTION
Object script symbol
Input
Selecting this item displays [Input Navigation] in the [Edit Script] dialog box.
Navigation
29
Line No. Selecting this item displays the row numbers in the script.
Function / device/ property, etc. that is inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
Input Navigation
Click the [Insert] button to enter the functions and devices at the cursor position on the script edit area.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1 Import/Export
For the exported text file / Unicode text file, operation simulation is possible using general C compiler. It is also
possible to edit scripts using general text editor.
The edited text file and Unicode text file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example: Editing a script by text editor
Exporting to a text file / Unicode text file

Edit the script using
the text editor.
Edited contents
are reflected.
HINT
About Unicode text file
Unicode text file is used for importing / exporting in the multilanguage environment.
For multilanguage input, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 8.6 Entering Multiple Languages (Multi-Language Input Function)

23
POINT
OPERATION LOG
(1) Use example of input navigation
FUNCTION
The following shows how to insert the line drawing function (d_line()) to a script.
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
2. 3.
25
1.
1.
RECIPE
26
1. Select [Items] [Drawing] [Line] from the tree.
2.
DEVICE DATA
Edit the arguments of d_line() referring to [Description].
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
For how to set the argument, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Functions (1) (a) Argument
For the setting of the line color, refer to the color number in (2) as shown below.
27
3. Click the [Insert] button. The assignment statement of d_line() edited in the step 2. is inserted to the cursor
position in the script edit area.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
(2) Color code number
STATUS
The following procedure shows how to display the color code number to be used.
1. Draw an appropriate figure on the screen and open the setting dialog box. 28
2. Open the color setting dialog box and check the code number of the color to be used.
TRIGGER ACTION
The displayed number can be used as a script.
FUNCTION
29
2..
2
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Object script symbol

Select [Common] [Script] [Object Script Symbol] from the menu to display the [Object Script Symbol] dialog
box.
Devices, constants, etc. to be described in a script may be an arbitrary character string.

To use an arbitrary character string in a script, set a device or constant that corresponds to the character string in this
setting. (The script operates on GOT even if a character string is described in a script.)
The object script symbol setting is valid only to object scripts.
Input an arbitrary character string to be described in script. (Up to 32 characters)

Symbol Name The symbol of "#", the control statement, or the operator is not available.
Up to 10000 symbol names can be set.
Device and Constant Input the device or constant that corresponds to symbol name. (Up to 32 characters)
Deletes the settings (symbol name, device, or constant).

Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the row to be deleted.
*1 Reads out the object script symbol settings that are edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT
Designer3.
*1
Saves the object script symbol settings that are set by GT Designer3 as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(This button is displayed only when the [Sym] button of the script editor is clicked.)
Inserts the selected script symbol to the script.
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the object script symbol to be inserted.

*1 Import/Export 23
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Adding the setting using 27

Microsoft Excel, etc.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
The addition is displayed.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
POINT
Editing exported files
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When "0" is used as the first character of symbol names and device or field values, "0" can be deleted with
application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
Pay attention to the above for editing exported files.

 Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles
(1) Execution timing when [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is set for [Trigger Type]
30.3.1 Settings
(a) Execution timing
The device status is checked in the sampling cycles set for [Trigger Type].
If the condition is not established when checked, the object script is not executed.
(When the sampling cycle is set at one second, and [ON Sampling] is set for [Trigger Type])
1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.

Sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type]
ON
OFF
Status of the device set for [Device]
3.
1. 2. 4. 5.
The object script is executed at the timing of "1.".

At the timing of "3.", the object script is not executed since the timing is not the condition check sampling
cycle.
At the timing of "4.", the object script is not executed since the device condition is not established.
(b) To start counting of a sampling cycle when the device condition is established
The sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type] does not depend on the device status. (The sampling cycle does
not change when the device turns ON/OFF.)
To start counting of a sampling cycle, make settings as below.
1. Set [Rise] or [Fall] for [Trigger Type].
2. Make a sequence program so that the device turns ON / OFF at the timing when an object script
should be executed.
(2) Execution timing when sampling cycle is set in any of [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF
Sampling]
Counting of a sampling cycle starts and is reset at the timing indicated below.
• The object itself is displayed (display in response to switching of the screen, changing of the security level,
etc.).
• At security level changing
After the execution of any of the events above, the object script is executed at the time that the set sampling
cycle is reached.

30.3.2 Relevant Settings 23
OPERATION LOG
The following items for the GOT special register (GS) are relevant to the object script.
FUNCTION
Stores the data of error occurrence.

GS80.00 : Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS80
Object script common information
(read only)
GS80.07
GS80.08
: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
24
GS80.12 : Turns ON at communication error occurrence
(including access to out-of-range device).
Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS82 to GS113).
The value at GS81 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
"-1"→"82"→"84"→ ....... →"112"(cycles back to "82".)
The relationships between the GS81 value and the latest error code storing area are shown below.
The following shows the setting examples. 25
GS81 Object script error pointer • When the GS81 value is 82, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS82 and
GS83.
• When the GS81 value is 84, the address of the latest script execution number address is stored to
GS84 and GS85.
: :
RECIPE
• When the GS81 value is 112, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS112 and
GS113.
Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due order, starting
from the higher addresses of the storage area.
26
*1 Object script error data
GS82 to 113
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.
DEVICE DATA
Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script execution numbers
(GS115 to GS145).
The value at GS114 cycles as shown below each time an object script is executed.
"-1"→"115"→"116"→ ....... → "145"(cycles back to "115".)
GS114 Object script execution pointer The relationships between the GS114 value and the latest script execution number storing area are 27
shown below.
OBSERVATION
: :
FUNCTION
STATUS
GS115 to 145 Object script execution number Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.
Object script common control GS387.0 : When ON, clears Script error data (GS82 to 113).
GS387
(write only) GS387.1 : Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error when turned ON. 28
Sets the monitor time of one object script in unit of second.
TRIGGER ACTION
If an object script does not end after elapsing the preset time, object script processing is stopped.
(Error code: 1015)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
GS388 Object script monitoring time The following shows the setting examples. FUNCTION
• When GS388 is set to 1, the monitor time is set to 1 second.
• When GS388 is set to 11, the monitor time is set to 11 seconds. 29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Sets the contents of initial operation to be performed when the following conditions are satisfied.
• The object script is used.
• [Rise] or [Fall] is selected for [Trigger Type] of the execution condition.
• The screen is switched to the one that includes object scripts.
• Switching security
• Switching language
• Switching station No.
Set the contents of initial operation to be performed at the start up of the GOT.
• Object for which store memory is set
• Line graph for which locus display is set
GS389 Object script initial operation
When GS389 is set to 0
• When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT executes the object script only once.
• When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT executes the object script only once.
When GS389 is set to other than 0
• When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT does not execute the object script.
• When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT does not execute the object script.
*1 For the script function error, refer to the following.
Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

30.3.3 Settings and procedure for execution 23
OPERATION LOG
Settings and the procedure before executing object scripts are explained below.
FUNCTION
Start
Create / edit the script in the Edit Script dialog box of GT

24
30.3.1 Script editor
Designer2.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
For a complicated script including many control statements,
the operation must be simulated using general C compiler as 30.4.1 Simulation using general
necessary. C language compiler or debugger
25
Set the data type, trigger type, and others for the object script
30.3.1 Settings
using GT Designer3.
RECIPE
Perform the syntax check on the scripts using GT Designer3. 30.3.1 Script editor
26
No
Valid?
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Yes
GT15 User's Manual

27
Install the option function board to GOT. (GT15 only)
OBSERVATION
Install the option OS and write the project data from the personal
computer to the GOT using GT Designer3. (Fundamentals) 7.
FUNCTION
COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
STATUS
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the
system monitor function. GOT1000 Series User's Manual 28
(Extended Functions, Option Functions)
TRIGGER ACTION
for GT Works3 (2. SYSTEM MONITOR)
No FUNCTION
Normally operating?
Yes
29
End
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.3.4 Actions and settings
This section explains the functions and execution of the object script.
 Object script functions

(1) Object internal variables
Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Using an object internal variable, it is possible to calculate a monitored device value of an object and display the
results of calculation in the object.
For details of object internal variables, refer to the following.

• Object internal variable kinds : 30.3.5 Object internal variables
• Use of object internal variables : 30.3.6 Object internal variables
(2) Object properties

For the object properties, the settings of objects drawn by GT Designer3 can be read or changed (written).
It is possible to change object setting dynamically on the screen by changing object properties during
monitoring.
For details of object properties, refer to the following.

• Reading/writing: [Operation/Script] or [Script] tab of each object
• Setting: 30.3.5 Object internal variables
• Representation method: 30.3.6 Object internal variables
(3) Free figure drawing function

Figures (line, rectangle, circle, character, etc.), comments and others can be drawn on an object.
For the settings of free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Functions (1) Free figure drawing
POINT
Execution condition for the free figure drawing function not to execute drawing
To use the free figure drawing function, execute an object script with execution conditions other than those
indicated below.
When executed the free figure drawing function using the execution conditions shown in the below, a figure is not
drawn and any errors do not cause.
• Key code input
• Input fixation
• Device write
(4) Screen control function

The screen control function controls redrawing / erasing of screens and objects.
For the available kinds of screen control function, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Functions (2) Screen control

23
(5) Script user ID
A script user ID means an arbitrary number that is set to an object script.
OPERATION LOG
If an error occurs with an object script, the script user ID of that object script is stored to a GOT special register
FUNCTION
(GS).
HINT
24
Setting a script user ID
By setting a unique value for script user ID of respective object scripts, it is possible to identify an object script
involved with an error.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
(6) Execution condition of scripts
An object script can be executed in response to object input / display or touching of a touch switch, according to 25
the object script kind.
It is also possible to execute an object script using a trigger other than input/display of object or touch switch
operation.
For the execution conditions of object scripts, refer to the following.
RECIPE
 Execution conditions 26
An object script is executed when all of the triggers (1) to (4) below are satisfied.
It is not executed if any of these triggers is not satisfied.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
(1) On GOT, the screen arranged a target object is displayed.
FUNCTION
The screen arranged a target object must be displayed with a controller connected to GOT.
(2) The object is displayed / operating.

The target object must be displayed / operating. 27
(3) The object is not restricted by the security function of GOT.
OBSERVATION
When the security function is used, the object with an object script set in higher security level must not be
FUNCTION
restricted during display / operation.
STATUS
(4) The execution condition of the script is established.
An object script can be executed when the execution condition set for it is established.
For details of execution conditions of scripts, refer to the following.
28
TRIGGER ACTION
 Execution units FUNCTION

Object scripts are executed in order in script units.
If the condition of multiple scripts are established, scripts are not executed simultaneously.
 Execution sequence 29
Object scripts are executed in the order of object IDs.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Execution status
Object scripts execute the processing as indicated below depending on the script status.
Script status Processing
• A script waits for its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
Waiting for turn
• When its turn has come, the script enters the "waiting for execution" status.
• Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.

Enabled : The target script enters the "execution" status.
Waiting for execution
Disabled : The target script enters the "waiting for run" status and the next script enters the "waiting for execution"
status.
• When the execution of a script finishes, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU, and it enters the "waiting for
run" status.
Execution At the same time, the next script enters the "waiting for execution" status.
• If a fatal error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enters the "stop" status.*1
• If an execution error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enter the "waiting for run" status.*1
Stop • The script retains the "stop" status until the error history is cleared.
*1 For details of fatal errors and execution errors, refer to the following.
30.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
An object script can use the control structure of project scripts/screen scripts (with exceptions of the following function)
as well as the control structure explained in this section.
Project script / screen script functions that cannot be used by object scripts
Classification Name
bmov
Successive device operation function
fmov
For the control structure of project scripts/screen scripts, refer to the following.
 Object internal variables

Statement example [w:D100] = $$
References when processing a monitor device value by a script.

Function Substitution is not possible.
$$ Data format Data type set at the script setting
Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor device value.
(This does not cause an error.)
Point If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is executed, "$$" is
read out.

23
[w:D100] = $K
OPERATION LOG
Statement example
References when processing the latest key code input from a touch key by a script.
FUNCTION
Function Substitutes when writing a key code to an object.
$K
Data format 16-bit unsigned BIN
Hint Gets 0xFFFF if referenced when a key code has not been input. 24
Statement example [w:D100] = $W
References when processing the value input with a fix touch key by a script.
Function Substitutes when writing a value to an object.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
$W
Data format Data type set at the script setting
Gets 0 if referenced when an input has not been made using the Enter key.
25
Hint
For the input object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object and
trigger type to be used.
Usability of object internal variables is indicated below.
RECIPE
RW: Reference/substitution possible, R: Reference possible, W: Substitution possible, -: Cannot be used
Object Trigger Type

Variable 26
$$ $K $W $V
Ordinary, ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling,

R - - -
DEVICE DATA
OFF Sampling
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Numerical input
Key code input R RW - -
Input fixation R - RW

OFF Sampling
- - - - 27
ASCII input
Key code input - RW - -
OBSERVATION
Input fixation - - - -
FUNCTION
STATUS
Variable Description 28
Statement example [w:D100] = $$
TRIGGER ACTION
References when processing a monitor device value by a script.
Function Substitution is not possible.
FUNCTION
$$ Data format Data type set at the script setting
Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor device value.
Point
(This does not cause an error.)
If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is executed, "$$" is
29
read out.
Statement example $V = [w:D100]

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Reference is not possible.

$V Function Substitutes when changing a value to be displayed by an object.
Data format Data type set at the script setting
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For the display object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object and
Variable
Object Trigger Type
$$ $K $W $V
Ordinary, Synchronize Display Trigger R - - W

Numerical display, numerical input,
comment display, Level, parts ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, OFF Sampling R - - -
display, parts movement
View Change R - - R
Ordinary R - - W
Bit lamp, word lamp, panelmeter ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, OFF Sampling R - - -
View Change R - - R
ASCII display, ASCII input, date

display, time display, line graph,
trend graph, bar graph, statistics bar -
OFF Sampling, View Change, Synchronize Display Trigger*1
graph, statistics pie graph, scatter
graph
*1 For the date display and time display, [Synchronize Display Trigger] cannot be set for [Trigger Type].
(3) Switch object script
Statement example $W = [w:D100]
Reference is not possible.

$W Function Substitutes when a value processed by a script is used as the value to be written using a touch
switch.
Data format Data type set using the script setting
For the switch object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object and
Variable
Object Trigger Type
$$ $K $W $V

Touch switch (Switch only) - - W -
OFF Sampling, Device Writing
POINT
Using object internal variables that cannot be confirmed by syntax check
Syntax check cannot check the use of internal variables indicated below
• Referencing an object internal variable that cannot be referenced
• Substituting an object internal variable that cannot be substituted
When creating a script, use an object internal variable correctly.

23
 Object properties
For the read / write correspondence of object properties, refer to the following.
OPERATION LOG
Object script tab of respective objects
FUNCTION
For the timing that the set object property is reflected to screen display, refer to the following.
(1) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
24
Object property list is indicated below.
Property Description
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Statement example my.active = 1
Specifies whether or not the object itself is updated.

1: Updates the object itself.
active Function 0: Does not update the object itself.
Object is not updated even if the display condition is established.
25
When "0" is specified before the object is displayed on the screen had been switched, the
Point object itself is not displayed.
Statement example my.x = 0
RECIPE
Specifies the X coordinate of object itself move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767") "0":
Function Left end of the screen
x
Point
For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for [Move 26
Way] of [Move Format] by GT Designer3.
Hint When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Statement example my.y = 0
Specifies the Y coordinate of object move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767") "0": Upper
Function end of the screen
y
Point
For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for [Move 27
Way] of [Move Format] by GT Designer3.
Hint When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
Statement example [w:D100] = my.width
STATUS
width
Function Obtains the width of the object frame.(Range: 1 to 2000)
height
Statement example [w:D100] = my.height
28
Function Obtains the height of the object frame.(Range: 1 to 1600)
TRIGGER ACTION
Statement example my.decimal_point = 1
Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point.(Range: 0 to 32) FUNCTION
decimal_point Function
This property is enabled only when [Real] is selected for [Format] of [Display Format] in the
Point numerical display or numerical input setting.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Statement example my.blink = 0
Specifies the blink interval and target.

(For 129 and the subsequent values, only the numerical display, numerical input, ASCII
display, or ASCII input can be specified.)
0 : Does not blink.
1 : Blinks numerical values/characters (1 second intervals).
blink*2 Function 2 : Blinks numerical values/characters (0.5 second intervals).
3 : Blinks numerical values/characters (0.2 second intervals).
128 : Does not blink.
129 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (1 second intervals).
130 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (0.5 second intervals).
131 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (0.2 second intervals).
Hint Reading out my.blink after writing "128" causes the script to get "0".
Statement example my.highlight = 0
highlight*2 Specifies highlighting of the object itself.

Function 0 : Does not highlight the object.
1 : Highlights the object.
Statement example my.part_no = 1

part_no*2
Function Specifies the part number of the part to be displayed.(Range: 0 to 32767)
Statement example my.mark_color = 255
Specifies the color, to be changed from white, when a part is displayed as a mark.
mark_color*2
(Range: 0 to 255)
Function The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.
Statement example [w:D100] = my.frame_color
frame_color Gets the frame color.(Range: 0 to 255)

Statement example my.plate_color = 255
Specify the plate color of the figure.

plate_color*2
(Range: 0 to 255)
Statement example my.graph_color = 255
Specifies the color for specifies the Level Color/Needle Color of Needle/Fill Attribute. /
graph_color*2 level.(Range: 0 to 255)
Statement example my.back_color = 0
Specifies the color for specifies the background color/BG Color of Meter Panel Attribute. /
back_color*2
background.(Range: 0 to 255)

23
OPERATION LOG
Statement example my.pattern = 1
FUNCTION
Specifies the pattern.
0 : Does not use a pattern.(Must not be used when panelmeter is used.)
1: , 2: , 3: , 4: , 5: , 6: , 7: ,
pattern*2 8: , 9: , 10 : , 11 : , 12 : , 13 : , 14 : , 24
Function 15 : , 16 : , 17 : , 18 : , 19 : , 20 : , 21 : ,
22 : , 23 : , 24 : , 25 : , 26 : , 27 : , 28 : ,
FUNCTION
LOGGING
29 : , 30 : , 31 : , 32 : , 33 : , 34 : , 35 : ,
36 : , 37 :
Statement example my.pattern_bg_color = 255

25
pattern_bg_color Specifies the Fill Color of Meter Panel Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)
Statement example my.fill_color = 255
RECIPE
fill_color Specifies the Fill Color of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)
26
Statement example my.fill_bg_color = 255
fill_bg_color Specifies the BG Color of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Statement example my.fill_pattern = 1
Specifies the Pattern of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 1 to 37)

0 : Must not be used.
27
1: , 2: , 3: , 4: , 5: , 6: , 7: ,
OBSERVATION
fill_pattern 8: , 9: , 10 : , 11 : , 12 : , 13 : , 14 : ,
FUNCTION
Function
STATUS
15 : , 16 : , 17 : , 18 : , 19 : , 20 : , 21 : ,
22 : , 23 : , 24 : , 25 : , 26 : , 27 : , 28 : ,
29 : , 30 : , 31 : , 32 : , 33 : , 34 : , 35 : , 28
36 : , 37 :
TRIGGER ACTION
Statement example my.core_color = 255
core_color Specifies the Fill Color of Core Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255) FUNCTION
Statement example my.core_bg_color = 255 29

core_bg_color Specifies the BG Color of Core Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)
TIME ACTION

FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Statement example my.core_pattern = 1
Specifies the Pattern of Core Attribute.(Range: 1 to 37)

0 : Must not be used.
1: , 2: , 3: , 4: , 5: , 6: , 7: ,
core_pattern 8: , 9: , 10 : , 11 : , 12 : , 13 : , 14 : ,
Function 15 : , 16 : , 17 : , 18 : , 19 : , 20 : , 21 : ,
22 : , 23 : , 24 : , 25 : , 26 : , 27 : , 28 : ,
29 : , 30 : , 31 : , 32 : , 33 : , 34 : , 35 : ,
36 : , 37 :
Statement example my.text_color = 255
text_color*2 Specifies the color of numbers/characters to be displayed.(Range: 0 to 255)

Statement example my.text_width = 1
Specifies the scaling factor (width) of numbers and characters the object itself displays.
text_width Function 0 : 0.5 times
1 to 8 : 1 to 8 times
Hint For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", "6" and "8" is possible.
Statement example my.text_height = 1
Specifies the scaling factor (height) of numbers and characters the object itself displays.
text_height Function 0 : 0.5 times
1 to 8 : 1 to 8 times
Hint For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", "6" and "8" is possible.
Statement example my.arrange = 1
Selects the arranging type of character strings in multiple lines.

0 : Left flush
arrange
1 : Right flush
Function
2 : Centering
Left flush Right flush Centering
Statement example my.scale_max[0] = 255 scale_max[1]
Specifies the upper limit value of scale.

scale_max[0],
*1
scale_max[0] and scale_max[1] specify the upper limit value
scale_max[1]
Function in the horizontal direction and that in the vertical direction,
respectively.
(Range: Range of the monitor devices) scale_max[0]
(Continued to next page)Z

23
OPERATION LOG
Statement example my.scale_min[0] = 0 scale_min[1]
FUNCTION
Specifies the lower limit value of scale.
scale_min[0],
scale_min[0] and scale_min[1] specify the lower limit value
scale_min[1]*1
Function in the horizontal direction and that in the vertical direction,
respectively.
(Range: Range of the monitor devices) scale_min[0] 24
Statement example my.security = 0
security Function Sets the security level of an object.(Range: 0 to 15)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this sets the
Hint security level for display.
input_security
Statement example my.input_security = 0
25
For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this sets the
Function security level for input.(Range: 0 to 15)
Statement example my.draw_mode = 0
RECIPE
Specifies the drawing mode
• For numerical and comment display
0 : Transparent
draw_mode
1 : XOR
• For parts display
26
Function 0 : Replace
1 : XOR
2 : Overwrite
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The setting for the draw mode is the same as with the setting at the setting dialog box of GT
Designer3.
Statement example my.delay = 5
delay Specifies the delay time in unit of second, for the object itself takes an action after the 27
Function touch.(Range: 0 to 5)
If "0" is set, the object itself takes an action immediately after the touch.
OBSERVATION
Statement example my.beep = 0
FUNCTION
STATUS
Specifies beep length and timing.
0 : One shot
beep
1 : One short (only when the execution condition is established)
28
Function 2 : No beeps
128 : While a key is pressed
129 : While a key is pressed (only when the execution condition is established)
TRIGGER ACTION
*1 For the object indicated below, only scale_max[0]/scale_min[0] can be specified.
Designation of scale_max[1]/scale_min[1] is not allowed.
• Panelmeter FUNCTION
*2 When an object has multiple conditions, including the ON/OFF state of the bit and the state, the object property is reflected only
for the normal case (when the bit is off or the state is set to "0").
When the bit is on or the state is set to any other than "0", the object property is not reflected.
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

POINT
Valid duration of changed object property
Changes of the object property are retained until executing the operation below.
• Turning ON/OFF or resetting of GOT
• Writing of project data
(1) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
After the setting of an object property, the setting is reflected to the screen display in any of the timings 1 to 5
indicated below.
1. The display changes to the specified one at the same time changed the object property.
2. The specified action is executed at the next action after changing the object property.
3. The display/action changes to the specified one at any of the timing indicated below.
• The timing when redraw_object() is executed
Functions (2) Screen control
• The timing when the display condition / execution condition of the object itself is established
• The timing when redraw_screen() is executed
• The timing when switching screen is executed
• The timing when redraw_object() / redraw_screen() is executed
• The timing when switching screen is executed
The timing (1 to 5) when changing the object script is reflected to the screen display varies depending on the
object and object property kind.
For the correspondence between the object and object property kind, and the reflection timing, refer to the
following.
Object property tab of respective objects
HINT
(1) Use of redraw_object()
To reflect the setting of multiple object properties to the screen by specifying redraw_object(), use one
redraw_object() for multiple object properties to reduce the number of times the objects are redrawn.
my.text_height=2; my.text_height=2;
redraw_object();
my.arrange=1; my.arrange=1;
redraw_object(); redraw_object();
(2) Display/action until the setting is reflected to the screen display

An object may not be displayed or fail to act correctly until the setting is reflected to the screen.

23
 Functions
OPERATION LOG
(1) Free figure drawing
For the arguments of the free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
(a) Argument
Functions Description
d_line(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
24
Statement example <Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)
d_line Function Draws a line.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
Hint <Y coordinate 2>).
d_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
25
Statement example type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)
d_rectangle Function Draws a rectangle.
RECIPE
d_circle(<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>,
Statement example <Line color>)
d_circle
Function Draws a circle.

26
d_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
Statement example type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)
DEVICE DATA
d_ellipse Function Draws an ellipse.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
p_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
Statement example type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>) 27
p_rectangle Function Draws a rectangle (fill).
OBSERVATION
Hint
FUNCTION
<Y coordinate 2>).
STATUS
p_circle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>, <Line
Statement example color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)
p_circle
Function Draws a circle (fill). 28

p_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
TRIGGER ACTION
Statement example type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)
p_ellipse Draws an ellipse (fill).

FUNCTION
Function
Statement example
d_textout(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Character X scaling factor>, <Character Y scaling factor>, <Character attribute>,
29
<Character color>, <Character shadow color>, <Characters>)
d_textout
Function Draws characters.
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

d_commentout(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
Statement example <Character X scaling factor>, <Character Y scaling factor>, <Character attribute>,
<Comment group No.>, <Comment No.>)
d_commentout
Function Displays a comment in a comment group.
Statement example screen_draw(<screen draw flag>)
Function Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
screen_draw
If the drawing area is not specified by screen_draw, drawing is executed in the object area.
Hint Object area is the same as the area defined by the coordinates shown in the data list of GT
Designer3.
(a) Argument
Argument Description
Specifies the area (the area defined by two points of (<X coordinate 1>,<Y coordinate 1>) and (<X
coordinate 2>,<Y coordinate 2>) in which a figure is drawn in dots.(Range: -32768 to 32767)
(0, 0) indicates the coordinates of the upper left position of an object.
<X coordinate 1>, Example: Ellipse (d_ellipse())
<Y coordinate 1>
<X coordinate 2>, (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>)
<Y coordinate 2>
(<X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>)
<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate> Specifies the coordinates of the center of a figure in dots.(Range: -32768 to 32767)
<Radius> Specifies the radius of a circle in dots.(Range: 1 to 32767)
Selects the line type from those shown below.
0:
1:
<Line type>
2:
3:
4:
<Line width> Specifies the line width in dots.(Range: 1 to 5, 7)
Specifies the color of line/character/pattern/background of pattern/background of character by a code

<Line color>, <Character color>,
number.
<Pattern color>,
(Range: 0 to 255)
<Pattern background color>,
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the specification of
<Character shadow color>
figure colors by GT Designer3.
Select the fill pattern from the following.

(The following patterns shows the case when white and black are specified for the pattern color and the
pattern background color, respectively.)
1: , 2: , 3: , 4: , 5: , 6: , 7: ,
8: , 9: , 10 : , 11 : , 12 : , 13 : , 14 : ,
<Pattern>
15 : , 16 : , 17 : , 18 : , 19 : , 20 : , 21 : ,
22 : , 23 : , 24 : , 25 : , 26 : , 27 : , 28 : ,
29 : , 30 : , 31 : , 32 : , 33 : , 34 : , 35 : ,
36 : , 37 :
Specifies the scaling factor of characters. Character Y

<Character X scaling factor >, Specify "2", "4", "6" or "8" when HQ characters are set <Character attribute>. A scaling factor
<Character Y scaling factor > Designation of "0" and "1" to "8" is allowed when HQ characters are not set. Character X
If "0" is specified, scaling factor is 0.5. scaling factor

23
Argument Description
OPERATION LOG
Specifies the display attribute of characters.
The explanation below assumes binary notation. When specifying in a script, change the representation
FUNCTION
meeting the applicable notation of the script, such as hexadecimal number.
b12 b11 to 10 b9 b8 b7 b6 to 5 b4 to 3 b2 b1 to 0
• b1 to b0 :
Select the display type of characters. 24
These bits can be used only for d_textout().
Specify "00" (fixed) for other functions.
00 : Standard
01 : Bold
FUNCTION
LOGGING
10 : Shadow
11 : Engraving Standard Gothic Shadow Engraving
• b2 :
0(fixed) 25
• b4 to b3 :
Select the arranging type of character strings of multiple lines.
00 : Left flush
01 : Right flush
RECIPE
10 : Centering
11 : Reserved
Left flush Right flush Centering
• b6 to b5 : 26
00(fixed)
<Character attribute> • b7 :
DEVICE DATA
Select whether or not HQ characters are used.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
This bit can be used only for d_commentout().
Specify "0" (fixed) for other functions.
0 : Does not use HQ characters.
1 : Uses HQ characters.
• b8 :
27
0(fixed)
OBSERVATION
• b9 :
FUNCTION
Specify font size.
STATUS
0 : 16 dots
1 : 12 dots
• b11 to b10 :
Specify Kanji region.
28
00 : Japanese
TRIGGER ACTION
01 : Chinese (GB)
10 : Chinese (Big5)
11 : Reserved FUNCTION
• b12 :
Specify the face.
This bit can be used only when the use of HQ characters is specified (b7=1).
Specify "0" (fixed) when HQ characters are not used.
29
0 : Mincho
1 : Gothic
TIME ACTION
<Character> Specify character sting in up to 256 characters.

FUNCTION
<Comment group No.> Specify a comment group No.(Range: 1 to 255)
<Comment No.> Specify a comment No.(Range: 0 to 32767)
Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
0 : After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the object area.
30
<Screen draw flag>
Object area is the same as the area defined by the coordinates shown in the data list of GT Designer3.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 : After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the entire screen size.

HINT
Drawing results of circle / ellipse
To use the circle / ellipse drawing function (d_circle(), d_ellipse(), p_circle(), p_ellipse()), set solid line for line type
and 1 dot for line width.
If designation is other than the combination of solid and 1 dot, a circle / ellipse is drawn as shown below.
Drawing example) The figure below shows the results of ellipse drawn by setting dashed line and 4 dots for line
type and line width, respectively.
(2) Screen control
Statement example redraw_object()
redraw_object Executes processing as indicated below for the object itself.

Function 1. Clears the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function.
2. Re-draws the object itself.
Statement example clear_object()
Clears the items indicated below.

• Data (number/character, etc.) displayed by the object itself
clear_object
• Figure drawn by the free figure drawing function of the object script of the object itself
Function Displays only the figure frame area for the object including the numerical display, the ASCII
display, and the comment display that allow the setting of the plate color.
For the objects other than the above, the object is cleared.
Statement example redraw_screen()
redraw_screen Executes processing as indicated below for the entire screen.

Function 1. Clears all figures drawn by the free figure drawing function.
2. Re-draws all objects.
HINT
Execution timing of the screen control function
The functions (redraw_object() and clear_object()) are executed during the object script execution.
The function (redraw_screen()) is executed after the object script execution. The GOT reflects the result of the
function when the objects and others are redrawn on the GOT screen.

30.3.6 Applicable data and representation methods 23
OPERATION LOG
With object scripts, the data and representation methods explained below can be used in addition to the data and
representation methods applicable to project scripts / screen scripts.
FUNCTION
For details of data and representation methods with project scripts / screen scripts, refer to the following.
24
 Applicable constants and representation methods
With object scripts, constants explained below can be used in addition to the constants that can be used for project
scripts / screen projects.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Constant Representation Method
Text "To be enclosed by double quotations"
25
 Object internal variables
Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Processing as shown below is possible by using object internal variables.
RECIPE
• Can process the monitor device value by referencing it. ($$)
• Can change the object display to the processing result of the script. ($V)
• Can substitute the processing result of the script by the operation of a touch switch. ($W)
26
For reading/writing of an object internal variable, refer to the following.
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Example: To add the device value (GD0) to the monitor device value ($$) and display ($V) the result at an object in
numerical display
27
$V=$$+[w:GD0];
OBSERVATION
POINT
FUNCTION
STATUS
Automatic adjustment of decimal point
When using automatic adjustment of decimel point, the processing as below is executed.
(a) When a value is substituted to $V
28
A value substituted to $V is substituted to an object.
TRIGGER ACTION
(b) When a value is substituted to $W
The decimal point of the value substituted to $W is shifted left by the value set for [Decimal Point] and FUNCTION
substituted to a monitor device.
Example) When the adjust decimal point range is used by setting "2" for [Decimal Point]
• When "$V=1;" is executed, "1.00" is displayed in the numerical input. 29
• When "$W=1;" is executed, the substituted value is multiplied by 102 and "100" is written to the monitor device
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Object properties
For the object properties, settings of the objects drawn by GT Designer3 can be referenced or changed (substituted).
For details of object properties, refer to the following.
• Reference/Substitution : Object script tab of each object
• Setting : 30.3.5 Object properties
(1) Format
When describing an object property in a script, specify "my." preceding the object property name.
Example: For changing text colors and blink display corresponding to the object security level
if(5<=my.security){// If object security level is 5 or higher

my.text_color=224;// changes text color to red (224).
my.blink=1;// blinks the object display at a low speed.
}else{// If object security level is lower than 5
my.text_color=255;// changes text color to white (255).
my.blink=0;// does not blink the object display.
}
30.3.7 Program examples
This section explains program examples of object script program.
 Data calculation by numerical input script

(1) Operation
Data calculation is executed when a device value is written.
Screen image Parts operation
Numerical input :
When the write value is "0" or larger, the write value is multiplied by
10.
When the write value is smaller than "0", the write value is set as
"5000".
(2) Program examples
Item Description
Data Type Signed BIN16
Trigger Type Input fixation
[w:TMP0] = $W;
// Stores the write value to the temporary area.
if([w:TMP0] >= 0) {
// If the write value is "0" or larger,
$W = [w:TMP0] * 10;
Script // the write value is multiplied by 10.
}else{
// If the write value is less than "0",
$W = 5000;
// the write value is set as "5000".
}

23
 To start blinking after the elapse of set time
OPERATION LOG
(1) Operation
The displayed value (monitored device value) blinks when it does not change for the set time.
FUNCTION
This feature can be used to give a caution after the elapse of a set time.
24
Numerical Display :
If the displayed value (monitored device value) does not change for 5
seconds, the characters blink in red.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Item Description
25
Trigger Type Sampling (1 second)
if([w:TMP0002] != $$){ // When the displayed value changes,
RECIPE
[w:TMP0001] = 5; // counting starts (sets time (seconds) for staring blinking).
[w:TMP0002] = $$; // saves the displayed value.
my.blink = 0;
26
// sets "does not blink".
my.text_color = 0xFF; // changes the character color to white.
}else{ // When the displayed value does not change,
if([w:TMP0001] > 0){ // If the count is not "0",
[w:TMP0001] = [w:TMP0001] - 1; // reduces the count value.
DEVICE DATA
Script if([w:TMP0001] == 0){ // When the count value reaches "0",
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
my.text_color = 0xE0; // changes the character color to red.
my.blink = 3; // starts high-speed blinking.
}
}else{
[w:TMP0001] = 5; 27
}
}
redraw_object(); // reflects property.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Showing/hiding the input/touch operation object

(1) Operation
The script controls "show / hide" of the specific objects for input / touch operation corresponding the execution
condition at switching screen.
Since an object used for input / touch operation is displayed only when necessary, this feature can be used to
avoid inputting error.
Numerical Input :
Numerical input is displayed when M0 turns ON.
Numerical Input is hidden when M0 turns OFF.
Switch 1 switch:
The touch switch is displayed when M1 turns ON.
The touch switch is hidden when M1 turns OFF.
Part Name Object Type Setting item Setting
Trigger Type ON
Numerical input Numerical input Display / Trigger
Trigger device M0
Trigger Type ON
Switch 1 Switch Trigger
Trigger device M1

(a) Numerical input
Item Description
Trigger Type Ordinary
if([b:M0] == ON){
my.active = 1; // Euables update.
redraw_object(); // Updates the object.
Script }else{
my.active = 0; // Disables update.
clear_object(); // Clears the object.
}
(b) Switch 1 switch
Item Description
if([b:M1] == ON){
my.active = 1; // Euables update.
redraw_object(); // Updates the object.
Script }else{
my.active = 0; // Disables update.
clear_object(); // Clears the object.
}

23
 Drawing responding to a device value
OPERATION LOG
(1) Details of operation
A figure is drawn on the screen corresponding to the device value.
FUNCTION
Operation 1 lamp :
Turns ON when D500 is "1" and a circle is drawn around the lamp.
Operation 2 lamp :
24
Operation 3 lamp :
FUNCTION
LOGGING
Reset switch:
Resets Operation 1 to Operation 3.
Operation 1 switch to Operation 3 switch:

Starts Operation 1 to Operation 3.
25
Part Name Object Type Setting item Setting
RECIPE
Device D500
Text Operation 1
26
Operation 1 lamp Word lamp State 0 Lamp color Red
Word Range $V < 1

State 1
DEVICE DATA
Lamp color Black
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
Device D500
Text Operation 2
Operation lamp 2 Word lamp State 0 Lamp color
Word Range
Red
$V < 2
27
State 1
Lamp color Black
OBSERVATION
Device D500
FUNCTION
Text Operation 2
STATUS
Operation 3 lamp Word lamp State 0 Lamp color Red
28
Word Range $V < 3
State 1
Lamp color Black
TRIGGER ACTION
Device D500
Reset switch Word switch Set value(fixed) 0
Text Reset FUNCTION
Device D500
Operation 1 switch Word switch Set value(fixed) 1
Text Operation 1
29
Device D500
TIME ACTION

FUNCTION
Text Operation 2
Device D500
Text Operation 3
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION


(a) Operation 1 lamp
Item Description
if ([w:D500] == 1){ // When D500 is "1",

screen_draw(1); // sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224); // draws a circle.
Script }else{ // When D500 is not "1",
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255); // clears a circle. (draws a circle in the same color as the
} // background color)
(b) Operation 2 lamp
Item Description
if ([w:D500] == 2){ // When D500 is "2",

(c) Operation 3 lamp
Item Description
if ([w:D500] == 3){ // When D500 is "3",


OPERATION LOG
To use the object script, install the option OS (Object script) on the GOT.
FUNCTION
To use the object script with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT. (No option function boards is
required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.) 24
FUNCTION
LOGGING
 Precautions for objects
When the setting dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button after changing from the numerical input or ASCII
input to the numerical display or ASCII display, the input object script settings are cleared.
Only the display object settings are not cleared.
25
 Precautions for the object script execution condition
(1) Setting in the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box
When [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT Designer3] is selected in the [GOT Type Setting]
RECIPE
dialog box, the object script is not available.
(2) Functions that cannot be set simultaneously
Object scripts cannot be used when any of the functions below is set.
26
To use object scripts, do not set the functions indicated below.
• Data Operation
DEVICE DATA
• Store memory
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
• Locus display (line graph only)
(3) Object status

Object script cannot be executed when the object is in the status indicated below. 27
• The object is not displayed / operating since it is out of the screen.
• The object is not displayed / operating since a monitor device has not been set.
OBSERVATION
(4) Execution of object scripts on the same screen
FUNCTION
STATUS
When a multiple display of the same screen is given due to overlap window/superimpose window/screen
overlay, only the object script in the screen displayed first is executed.
While the object script on the screen displayed first is executed, the object scripts on the same screens
displayed later are not executed. 28
The object script displayed in the same screen is executed when the object script displayed in the first screen
TRIGGER ACTION
has been executed.
(5) When the device write is set for the execution condition
FUNCTION
Set the write device to the object for which a script is set.
The script is not executed if a write device is not set.
 Precautions for devices 29

(1) Number of write enabled devices
When a value is written into the following devices, a script can write the value only once into each device.
TIME ACTION
• Devices in a controller
FUNCTION
• GOT special register (GS)

When writing a value to the following devices, writing is possible for multiple devices with one script.
• Temporary device area (TMP)
• GOT bit register (GB) 30
• GOT data register (GD)
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Precautions for object property

(1) The numerical display or comment display movement on the GOT when a level is overlaid
When drawing with the level overlaid on GT Designer3, the numerical display or comment display can be moved
only inside of the level displaying area.
When the numerical display or comment display is moved to outside of the level displaying area, it is not
displayed properly.
When drawing without overlaying on GT Designer3, the superimposing processing is not executed even when
the numerical display or comment display is moved to the inside of the level displaying area.
(2) Properties that are valid only when set on GT Designer3

Among the setting items of objects, those which are valid only when they are set on GT Designer3
(such as the settings which are not valid unless a certain item is checked), cannot be referenced/changed by
object property.
 Precautions for free figure drawing function

(1) Drawing while an object is blinking
While an object is blinking, the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function blinks together with the object.
(2) Superimposing of drawing figure and an object

If a figure drawn using the free figure drawing function is superimpose to an object, the figure in the
superimposed area may disappear.
(3) Drawing when other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger] are set for the
execution condition
When the execution condition is other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger], the object itself
overwrites the figure drawn by the free figure drawing function. Therefore, the figure drawn by the free figure
drawing function may be cleared.
(4) When [Key Code Input], [Input Fixation] or [Device Writing] is set for action trigger
Drawing is not executed.
In this case, any errors do not occured.
When using the free figure drawing function, set the execution condition other than [Key Code Input], [Input
Fixation], and [Device Writing].
(5) Maximum number of settings
Concerning figures to be drawn by the free figure drawing function, the drawing is possible for up to 1280 points
by a single object.
(6) Drawing area
With the upper left corner of GOT screen set as (0, 0), it is not possible to draw a figure outside of the area from
(-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).
Specify the coordinates to draw inside of the area from (-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).
(-2400,-2400) Drawing is not possible outside the frame.
(0,0)
In the area inside the frame, drawing is allowed.
(4799,4799)

23
 Precautions for writing a script
Do not write a script that causes the operation result to exceed the allowable range of a device value.
OPERATION LOG
Script operation is executed internally by double-precision real numbers.
FUNCTION
Therefore, when judgment is made using such as an IF statement, results of judgment can differ depending on the
operation method.
Example: Judgment for the difference between GD100 and D100 using an IF statement (for 16-bit unsigned binary)
When GD100=-32758 and D100=32767 24
(a) When operation is executed in evaluation expression
if ( ( [w:GD100] - [w:D100] ) >= 10 ) { //If difference between GD100 and D100 is 10 or larger,
FUNCTION
[w:D200] = 0; // "0" is written to D200.
LOGGING
}
The calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is "-65525", meaning that the condition is not
met.
25
(b) When processing the script after substitution
[w:GD200] = [w:GD100] - [w:D100]; // Substitutes the value of "GD100 - D100" to GD200.
if ( [w:GD200] >= 10) { // When the value of GD200 is 10 or larger,
RECIPE
[w:D200] = 0; // "0" is written to D200.
}
26
When "-65525" which is the calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is substituted to
GD200 in 16-bit unsigned binary, GD200 becomes "10", meaning that the condition is met.
(Since a value that cannot be handled by a variable (device) is substituted as the result of operation, the
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
result differs from that obtained in (a).)
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

30.4 Troubleshooting
The script function does not display an error message at the time of error.
It stops the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping.
Therefore, each script must be debugged without fail by reference to the followings.
30.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger
Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. MicrosoftVisual C++) can
be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
Observe the following procedure to perform simulation using the general C language compiler or debugger.
 Project script, Screen script

Changing file extension 1. Change the script file (extension .txt) created
for the GOT into a C language source file
text1.txt → text1.c (extension .c).
Additional description of main and include 2. Open the C language source file with a
commercially-available text editor and create a
Additional description → #include<stdio.h> frame with main(){}.
Additional description → main(){
Also, describe #include<stdio.h> at the
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){ beginning.
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional description → }
Changing device (variable) describing method 3. Change the device (variable) describing
method from that for script function to that for C
#include<stdio.h> language.
main(){ Changing the variables into for C language
Description change → _wTMP0001_ _=0; based on the following definition enables
Description change → while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__ ){
smooth restoration to the GOT script.
Description change → if(!((_wTMP0000_ _-1900)%4)){
Description change → _wTMP0001__ =_wTMP0001_ _+1;
Definition 1 [w: →_w
......(Omitted)...... Definition 2 [b: →_b
Definition 3 ] →__
Description change → _wTMP0010_ _=_wTMP0002_ _+_wTMP0003__
Description change → +_wTMP0004__-1;
Description change → _wD200__ = _wTMP0010_ _%7; Using the batch replacement function of the
} commercially available text editor is convenient
to make changes.
↓
(To the next page)
30 - 110 30.4 Troubleshooting

(From the preceding page) 23

↓
Variable definition (auto variable declaration) 4. For C language, the variables must be defined
OPERATION LOG
#include<stdio.h> prior to use.
FUNCTION
Description change → void main(void){ As only one data format can be selected for
Addition → unsigned short _wTMP0000_ _; one script, the variable types of the C language
Addition → unsigned short _wTMP0001_ _;
must be set all the same.*1
Addition → unsigned short _wTMP0002_ _;
Addition → unsigned short _wD100__ ; 24
......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0001__ =0;
FUNCTION
while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__ ){
LOGGING
if(!((_wTMP0000_ _-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__ =_wTMP0001__ +1;
......(Omitted)...... 25
_wTMP0010__ =_wTMP0002_ _+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004_ _-1;
_wD200_ _ = _wTMP0010__ %7;
}
RECIPE
↓
Execution of simulation 5. Perform simulation with the general C

language compiler or debugger. 26
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
The step run, variable watch and other
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
functions specific to debugger are usable.
On completion of debugging, execute the

steps 1. to 4. in reverse order to restore the
GOT script file.
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
*1 Data type of script
The following shows the data type of the script. FUNCTION

Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler or
debugger.
Data type of script Variable Type 29
Signed BIN16 short
Unsigned BIN16 unsigned short

TIME ACTION
Signed BIN32 long

FUNCTION
Unsigned BIN32 unsigned long
Real float
BCD32/BCD16 -
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
30.4 Troubleshooting 30 - 111

 Object script
Changing file extension 1. Export the object script, created by GT
Designer3, to a text file or Unicode text file
(extension ".txt") and change the exported
text1.txt → text1.c
script file into a C language source file
(extension ".c").
↓
Additional description of main and include 2. Open the C language source file with a
Additional description → #include<stdio.h> commercially-available text editor and create a
Additional description → main(){ frame with main(){}.
[w:TMP0001]=0; Also, describe #include<stdio.h> at the
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
beginning.
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
my.x = 200;
my.scale_max[0] = 500;
......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
$W = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional description → }
Changing device (variable) describing method 3. Change the device (variable / property)
#include<stdio.h>
describing method from that for script function
main(){ to that for C language.Changing the variables
Description change → _wTMP0001__=0; into those for C language, based on the
Description change → while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){ following definition, enables smooth restoration
Description change → if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
to the GOT script.
Description change → _wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
Description change → my_x = 200; Definition 1 [w:→_w
Description change → my_scale_max_0__ = 500;
Definition 2 [b:→_b
......(Omitted)......
Description change → _wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__ Definition 3 ] →__
Description change → +_wTMP0004__-1; Definition 4 my.→my_
Description change → device_write = _wTMP0010__%7; Definition 5 $W →device_write
} Definition 6 $V →device_value
Definition 7 $$ →monitor_ device
Definition 8 $K →key_input
Definition 9 [ →_
Using the global replacement function of the

commercially-available text editor is
convenient to make changes.
↓
(To the next page)

23
((From the preceding page)
↓
OPERATION LOG
Variable definition (auto variable declaration) 4. For C language, the variables must be defined
FUNCTION
prior to use.
#include<stdio.h> As only one data format can be selected for
Description change → void main(void){
one script, the variable types of the C language
Addition → unsigned short _wTMP0000__;
must be set all the same.*1
Addition → unsigned short _wTMP0001__;
unsigned short _wTMP0002__;
24
Addition →
Addition → unsigned short _wD100__;
Addition → short my_c;
Addition → unsigned sort my_scale_max_0__;
FUNCTION
unsigned sort device_write;
LOGGING
Addition →
......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0001__=0;
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
25
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
my_x = 200;
my_scale_max_0__ = 500;
......(Omitted)......
RECIPE
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004__-1;
device_write = _wTMP0010__%7;
} 26
↓
5.
DEVICE DATA
Execution of simulation Perform simulation with the general C
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
language compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
The step run, variable watch and other 27
functions specific to debugger are usable.
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
*1 Data type of script
The following shows the data type of the script.

Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler or
29
debugger.
(1) Device
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
Data type of script Variable Type
Signed BIN16 short
Unsigned BIN16 unsigned short
Signed BIN32 long

30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Unsigned BIN32 unsigned long
Real float
BCD32/BCD16*1 -

(2) Property
Select the data format according to the property range.
(3) Internal variable
Assign the same variable type as the script data type.
POINT
Precautions for simulation with the general C language compiler or debugger
• Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler
or debugger.
• As dedicated for the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov statements cannot be simulated with the
general C language compiler or debugger.
Use assignment of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
• When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged, the define must be added to the
C language source file.
• The assignment delay does not occur during simulation with the general C language compiler or debugger,
although it occurs when a script is executed on GOT. Therefore, take the possibility of assignment delay
occurrence into consideration when performing simulation.
• By applying the above, a new program created using C language can be used as a GOT script after being
debugged.
• Offset designation of a device cannot be used in the above debugging.
If debugging of the offset designated device is required, it is necessary to set the corresponding device in
advance.
 The dialog box displayed during syntax check

The following dialog box will be displayed during syntax check.
If there is an error in script, the error code will be displayed in the dialog box.
When the error code is displayed, refer to the following.
Error code list
Error code
POINT
About errors that cannot be checked by syntax check
There are errors that cannot be checked by syntax check.
If a script includes an error that cannot be checked by syntax check, an error occurs when a script is executed on
GOT.
For the errors detected during script execution on GOT and the corrective action, refer to the following.
30.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

23
 Error code list
The following list provides the error codes that may be displayed in the script error dialog box.
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION
Error code*1 Error Definition
0 The configuration error of script.
1 The address of device is not an even number.
2 Extended file register (ER) setting error. (inter-block settings) 24

3 The bit device made word access.
4*2 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in HEX. number)
5*2 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in DEC. number)
FUNCTION
LOGGING
6 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in OCT. number address)
7 The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.
8 The setting is not within the range of 0 to 15 when specifying word device bit.
25
9 The set device is out of the range or does not exist.
11 Illegal address.
14 Access to the device disabling word accessibility by using bit.
15 Access to the device disabling bit accessibility by using bit.
RECIPE
16 Octal device are set with odd number.
17 The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.
20 The specified CPU does not exist. 26

21 The specified Word type does not exist.
22 A CPU not included with network settings has been specified.
DEVICE DATA
25 No expression exit between {and}.
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
26 The operator type of expressions table flow.
27 The control type table overflew.
28 case outside of switch
29 "Default" exist although there is no switch statement. 27

30 There are multiple "default" settings in switch statements.
31 There are too many switch "case" statements.
OBSERVATION
32 There are too many "switch break" statements.
FUNCTION
STATUS
33 Switch nest is deep.
34 System memory is insufficient.
35
36
Parenthesis nest is deep.
Regarded as invalid statement.

28
37 No semicolon.
TRIGGER ACTION
38 There are invalid characters.
39 File input is not specified.

FUNCTION
40 The specified input file does not exist.
41 The nest of if/while is deep.
45 The CPU incompatible with multi-CPU is specified as multi-CPU.

29
46 The multi-specified station No. is incorrect.
47 Network specification or station No. specification is incorrect.

TIME ACTION
48 Set network in GOT internal devices.

FUNCTION
101 No closed parenthesis.
111 The bit device is specified for the device with indirect specification.
112 The controller type for any channel number (1 to 4) is not specified or the GOT cannot communicate with the specified controller.
113 Channel number is illegal. 30

114 Channel designation is not allowed for a common device.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
115 Write is attempted for a read-only internal variable.

Error code*1 Error Definition
116 Read is attempted for a write-only internal variable.
117 Write is attempted for a read-only property.
118 Read is attempted for a write-only property.
119 A character string does not end with '"'.
120 EOF is used in a character string.
121 A character string includes too many characters.
122 Unicode conversion error of a character string.
123 EG device cannot be used in an object script.
124 Data type conversion function cannot be used.
125 An unusable internal variable is used.
126 An unusable property is used.
127 An unusable function is used.
129 Unterminated label
130 There is EOF in label
131 The label is too long
132 An unavailable label is set
133 The device of label is invalid
135 Label conversion error
136 The data types for the word device 1 and the word device 2 in the bmov or fmov function differ.
137 value out of range
138 can't use #pragma except in script head
139 #pragma folder_name_length redeclared
140 #pragma file_name_length redeclared
141 Bit device word cannot be used.
142 Word device bit cannot be used.
201 The device code is unknown.
202 The device No. is beyond the valid range
203 Device No. + Device Points are beyond the valid range.
204 The network No./Station No./CPU No. are beyond the valid range.
205 The device name is invalid.
206 The device No. notation is invalid.
207 The address No. is invalid (not in even number or multiples of 8/16).
208 The device type is invalid.
209 The GOT series is unknown.
*1 The same error code may be displayed twice when station No. setting of a device is incorrect.
*2 For devices (such as coil (MB) of YASKAWA PLC CP-9200SH) that have mixed representation (decimal and hexadecimal) of a
device number, error code "4" occurs when a number outside the address range is specified.

30.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT 23
OPERATION LOG
 Error checking method
The error data of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers (GS).
FUNCTION
Check the stored data using the system monitor function and various object functions (numerical display, lamp
indication and others) of the GOT.
• Details of GOT special registers 24

• Details of system monitor function
FUNCTION
LOGGING
GOT1000 Series User’s Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3
(1) Items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the project script or screen script
For the items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the project script or the screen script, refer to the 25
following.
(2) Items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the object script
RECIPE
For the items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the object script, refer to the following.
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Error code list

(1) Project script, Screen script
Error Code Error Definition Corrective Action
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts.

1 Initialization of project script failed.
• Reduce the number of times to execute the project script.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and base
screens.
2 Initialization of screen script (base screen) failed.
• Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (base
screen).
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and

superimpose window 1.
3 Initialization of screen script (superimpose window) failed.
• Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script
(superimpose window 1).
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap
window 1.
4 Initialization of screen script (overlap window 1) failed.
• Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 1) .
window 2.
window 2) .
An error occurred in reading data from the device that always Correct the script of the device of which the data is outside the
6
collects the data. specified range.
• Change the number of times to execute scripts in one project to 256

The number of times to execute scripts exceeded the limit. And or less.
7
some scripts were left unexecuted. • Change the number of times to execute scripts on one screen to 256
or less.
• Check whether the device to be monitored is correct.

When [BCD16] or [BCD32] is selected as the script data type,
8 • Check the processing of the device which could not be handled as
the monitor device value cannot not be handled as BCD.
BCD, and correct the script and sequence program.
When [BCD16] or [BCD32] is selected as the script data type, • Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the
9
the operation result is outside the BCD data range. BCD data range.
• Check the factor that caused zero division in the corresponding

10 The numerator was divided by the denominator of 0.
script, and correct the script.
11 Write to a device failed. • Check the device description of the corresponding script.
• Reduce the number of write device points in the corresponding

12 Reservation of an internal area for device write failed.
script.
• Replace the device that makes an assignment delay in the while

The while statement includes the description of a device that
13 statement with a temporary device area.
makes an assignment delay.
• Use a device that does not make an assignment delay.
• Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding

14 An expression was too complicated to process.
script.
• Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless

15 A script did not end within the script monitoring time. loop.
• Increase the value of script monitoring time (GS385).
• Check the corresponding processing to the GOT internal device, and

Access to GOT internal device failed, resulting in error (BCD
correct the script and PLC program.
conversion out of device range) occurrence.
• Check the target script description.
16
• Make sure that the option OS for the gateway function is installed on
Access to gateway device failed. the GOT.
• Check the cable.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and

superimpose window 2.
19 Initialization of screen script (superimpose window 2) failed.
• Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script
(superimpose window 2).
The GOT fails to access a temporary device area because the

• Correct statements with the temporary device area in the target
20 specified value is outside the range of the temporary device
script.
area.

Error Code Error Definition Corrective Action

23
• Check if the data in the arguments are not out of range.
OPERATION LOG
The GOT fails to execute the file operation function because
• Correct the folder and file names.
24 data in the arguments used in the function are invalid. (The path
• Check if the storage device data and file size are not out of range by
is invalid, the data are out of range, or the other errors occur.)
FUNCTION
the offset, number of write bytes, and/or number of read bytes.
The GOT fails to write data because the memory card has
25 • Check the free space of the memory card.
insufficient free space.
26
The GOT fails to access the file because no memory card is
installed or the CF/SD card access switch is off.
• Check if a memory card is installed.
• Check if the CF/SD card access switch is on.
24
The GOT fails to write the data because the memory card is • Check if the memory card is not write-protected.
write-protected, the specified file is a read-only file, or the file • Check if the specified file is not the read-only file.
27
whose name is the same as the folder name in the path of the • Check if a file with the same name as the folder name in the path of
FUNCTION
LOGGING
copy destination. the copy destination does not exist.
The GOT fails to access the file because the memory card is • Check if the memory card is formatted.
28
not formatted or is faulty. • Check if the memory card is not broken.
29
The GOT fails to access the file because the specified file is • Check if the specified file is not used for the other functions when the 25
used for the other functions. file operation function is executed.
• Check if the copy destination folder has no file with the same name
The GOT stops the copy because a file with the same name as as the copy source file.
30
the copy source file exists in the copy destination folder. • If the copy mode is set to overwrite prohibited, set the copy mode to
overwrite permitted.
RECIPE
The GOT fails to execute the string operation function because • Correct the argument of format.
31
arguments in the function specify invalid character strings. • Check if the arguments are not out of the specified range.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap 26
window 3.
window 3).
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
window 4.
window 4).
window 5.
27
window 5).
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Object script
Error Code Error Category*1 Error Definition Corrective Action
Object script cannot be executed since the option

1000 Fatal error Mount the option function board correctly.
function board is not recognized.
• Reduce the number of object scripts and the monitor device

Initialization of objects related to the object scripts
1002 Fatal error points of the base screen.
failed when switching the screen.
• Reduce the number of object scripts presently executed.
An error occurred in writing the data from the Correct the description of the device, taken as the out of the
1006 Fatal error
ordinarily collected devices. range device.
1011 Execution error Writing to a device failed. Check the description of the target script.
Simplify the script operation expression by dividing it or by

1014 Fatal error The expression is too complicate to be processed.
using other appropriate method.
• Check the script if it constitutes endless loop.

Execution of object script does not finish although
1015 Fatal error • Increase the value set for object script monitoring time
the object script monitor time has elapsed.
(GS388).
• Check the access operation to a GOT internal device and

1016 Fatal error Access to a GOT internal device failed. also the script and sequence program.
• Check the description of the target script.
The script that caused an error in the syntax check Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
1017 Fatal error
by GT Designer3 is executed. check by GT Designer3.
Access failed since temporary device outside the

1018 Fatal error Specify the temporary device within the range.
range is specified.
Write to multiple devices was attempted in a single Correct the specified number of write devices to the allowable
1020 Fatal error
script. number.
1021 Fatal error Illegal device type was detected. Correct the device to the one that can be used by the script.
Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows

1031 Fatal error Reference of an internal variable was impossible.
referencing of the corresponding internal variable.
Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows

1032 Fatal error Substitution to an interval variable was impossible.
substitution to the corresponding internal variable.
The script that caused an error in the syntax check Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
1039 Fatal error
by GT Designer3 is executed. check by GT Designer3.
Setting that is not in the object was referenced or Refer to or change the property that can be set by the object
1045 Fatal error
changed. itself.
1057 The script that caused an error in the syntax check Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
Fatal error
1060 by GT Designer3 is executed. check by GT Designer3.
• Check the device setting for monitoring.

The result of operation cannot be treated by BCD
1108 Execution error • Check the device operation that the BCD data could not
data.
process.
The result of operation falls outside the BCD data Check the operation of the device that caused the BCD data to
1109 Execution error
range. be outside the range.
1110 Execution error Zero division was executed. Check the zero division of the script.
1131 Execution error Reference of an internal variable was impossible. Cheek the internal variable to be referenced.
1141 Execution error A value outside the property range was set. Check the value to be substituted in property.
For the element number of the property that

Check the element number of the property that specifies an
1142 Execution error specifies an array, a value outside the range was
array.
set.
• Object font was not the standard font.

1143 Execution error • For the object font other than 16-dot standard, "0" Check the substituted value of property.
(display in 0.5 times) was set.
The scale ratio value set in the target object is larger

1144 Execution error Check the substituted value of property.
than the value set in the figure.

23
Error Code Error Category*1 Error Definition Corrective Action
OPERATION LOG
1251 Warning There is an error in coordinates or radius. Check the argument in the drawing execution function.
1252 Warning There is an error in line style, line width or line color. Check the argument in the drawing execution function.
FUNCTION
There is an error in pattern, pattern color or pattern
1253 Warning Check the argument in the drawing execution function.
background color.
1254 Warning
There is an error in character attribute, character
color, character shade color, character scale ratio, Check the argument in the drawing execution function. 24
character string code or character string length.
There is no comment assigned to the specified

1255 Warning Check the argument in the drawing execution function.
comment No. of the specified comment group No.
FUNCTION
LOGGING
The stored amount of drawing data exceeded the
1256 Warning Reduce the number of functions.
allowable capacity.
*1 For details of error category, refer to the following.

Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error 25
RECIPE
26
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
27
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION
STATUS
28
TRIGGER ACTION
FUNCTION
29
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION
30
SCRIPT FUNCTION

 Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

(1) Error category
Object script errors are classified into the categories shown below.
Script operation at the occurrence of error is also indicated.
Error Category Object Script Operation at the Occurrence of Error
Object script stops.

Fatal error Object script does not operate even if the trigger condition is established again.
Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped.*1
Object script stops.

Object script operates when the trigger condition is established again.
Execution error
Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped.*1
If the error occurs repeatedly, the occurrence of error in the second time and later is not written to GS82 to GS113.
Warning Object script does not stop.
*1 Operation of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, differs depending on the action and execution trigger set.
Trigger Executed to Act for Object Script Monitor Function of Object Write Function of Object
Key code input

Input fixation Operates Stops
Device writing
View change
Stops Operates
Synchronize display trigger
Other than above Stops Stops
(2) Script executed before the occurrence of an error

Reflection of the written value and execution of a function differ depending on the write target device and the
function to be executed.
(a) Writing to a device
If writing to a device was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the error, the
written value is reflected as indicated below.
Write Target Device Operation at the Occurrence of Error
GOT internal device (GB/ GD) ○
GOT internal device (Other than GB/ GD) ×
Controller device ×
Temporary device area ○
○ : Written value is reflected. × : Written value is not reflected.
(b) Execution of function

If a function was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the error, execution of
the function is processed as indicated below.
Execution Target of Write and Function Operation at the Occurrence of Error
Free figure drawing ×
Object update function ○
Object display clear function ○
Screen update function ○
Internal variable ×
Property ○
○ : Function is executed. × : Function is not executed.

30.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script 23
OPERATION LOG
The following shows the troubleshooting for the object script
FUNCTION
Error Cause Corrective Action
The object script does not The option function board is not installed on the GOT. Install the option function board on the GOT.
operate. The option OS is not installed on the GOT. Install the option OS (Object script) on the GOT.
Check if no error occurs with the syntax check on GT

24
The syntax for the script is incorrect.
Designer3.
The object is out of the GOT display area. Set the object in the GOT display area.
FUNCTION
The displays and operations of the object are limited
LOGGING
Decrease the security level.
because of the security.
The settings for the object, including the device, are not
Set the device and the other settings for the object.
set.
One of the object scripts does not
The trigger conditions are not met for the object script.
25
run.
(For such as [Key Code Input], [Input Fixation], [View
Set the correct trigger condition.
Change], [Synchronize Display Trigger], and [Device
Writing] of [Trigger Type])
Review the configuration of the screens.
RECIPE
The same screens, including the screens for the overlay
(Only the object scripts on the first displayed screen are
screen function, overlap windows, and superimposed
executed. The object scripts on the second or later
windows, are displayed.
displayed screens are not executed.))
An error occurs during the execution of the object script. Check the error code for the object script.
26
For operations in process, use the internal devices or the
The values are written in multiple devices on a script.
temporary device area of the GOT
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
The specified device is incorrect. Set the correct device.
A value cannot be assigned to the
device. Check if the cable is unplugged. Check if the communication
unit is correctly installed on the GOT.
A communication error occurs.
Check if the status of the controllers is ready for
communications. 27
Set a correct internal variable.
The script is stopped in the
The specified internal variable is incorrect. (Some internal variables cannot be read or assigned
formula with an internal variable.
OBSERVATION
depending on an object and trigger condition.)
FUNCTION
Set a correct property.
The specified property is incorrect.
STATUS
(Some properties cannot be set depending on an object.)
formula with a property. The value assigned to the property is incorrect. (For
example, the value assigned to the property is out of
range.)
Check the setting range for the value to be assigned.
28
When the operation is executed with BCD data, the data
TRIGGER ACTION
become out of range. Set a correct formula.
formula with operations.
Division by zero
The script is stopped in the FUNCTION

formula with a free figure drawing The value for the argument is incorrect. Check the the value for the argument.
function.
The key input cannot be operated

even though the keys are pressed.
29
Even though the device is entered
for the numerical input, the
TIME ACTION
entered value cannot be written in

FUNCTION
the device. Check if no error occurs during the execution of the object
An error occurs on the script.
script.
The display of the object is not
changed even though the object is
set. 30
A value cannot be written in the
SCRIPT FUNCTION
device with touch switches.


PERIPHERALS


31
FUNCTION
BARCODE
32
RFID FUNCTION
The barcode function enables to write data read by the barcode reader connected to the GOT into a controller. The
function also enables to directly input the read data to objects (numerical input and ASCII input).
 Writing data to a controller

33
Read data
OPERATION FUNCTION
"123456789"
REMOTE PERSONAL
9 Read byte
D0
(00 H) (09 H) number
D1 2 1
COMPUTER
(32 H) (31 H)
D2 4 3
Barcode (34 H) (33 H)
D3 6 5 Storage
D4
(36 H)
8
( 35H)
7
data
34
(38 H) (37 H)
123456789 D5 SP 9
GOT
VNC(R) SERVER
(20 H) (39 H)
FUNCTION
QCPU(Q mode)
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
Read data Terminator
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CR
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 0DH
 Directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input 36

MULTIMEDIA
Barcode FUNCTION
123456789 GOT
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
123456789 QCPU(Q mode)

I/O FUNCTION
Data is input in the touched object.
38
RGB DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CR
FUNCTION
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 0DH
31 - 1

POINT
Channel No. restrictions
To use a barcode reader with GT SoftGOT1000, configure the setting required for connecting the barcode reader
to channel No.5.
HINT
How to connect a barcode reader
For the system configuration and communication settings for connecting a barcode reader, refer to the
following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT

Works3
31.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Peripheral Settings] [Bar Code] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
POINT
When using GT SoftGOT1000
To use a barcode reader, configure the communication setting with GT SoftGOT1000.
When [Yes] for [Read Data Direct Input to Object] is selected
When [No] for [Read Data Direct Input to Object] is selected
Select the connection target interface for the barcode reader.

Destinati Select the [Detail Setting] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box for the barcode function.
on I/F
(1) Detail Setting


31
Use Bar Code Select this item to enable the settings of the barcode function.
Select whether to write data read by the barcode reader to a controller, or to directly input the read
data to objects (numerical input and ASCII input).
FUNCTION
BARCODE
No: Writes the data to the controller.
Read Data Direct Input Yes: Directly inputs the data to the numerical input and ASCII input.
to Object To directly input the data to an object by using the barcode function, the setting for objects
(numerical input and ASCII input) is required.
5.2 Extended tab
32
6.2 Extended tab
RFID FUNCTION
Set the start device of the devices that store the data read by the barcode reader.
Device
Set the device points of the device that stores the read data.
Device Points • GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT SoftGOT1000: 2 to 2000 : 2 to 2000
• GT10 : 2 to 1000
Select the header of the barcode data read by the barcode reader.
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
Header None : No header
REMOTE PERSONAL
STX : Adds the STX to the header.
Function
Select the terminator of the barcode read by the barcode reader.
Setting
COMPUTER
ETX : The ETX terminator is added to the data.
Terminator LF : The LF terminator is added to the data.
CR : The CR terminator is added to the data.
CR+LF : The CR and LF terminator are added to the data.
Set the order of writing data to controller device.

34
Low High : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower
VNC(R) SERVER
Data Writing Order 8 bits to upper 8 bits.
High Low : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper
FUNCTION
8 bits to lower 8 bits.
Select this item to fill in devices without data with spaces or NULLs when the number of bytes for the
Fill up a space when
imported data is less
data read by the barcode reader is less than that of bytes equivalent to the set device points.
After selecting the item, select the data to fill in devices without data. 35
than the writing points Space : Fills devices without data with spaces (20H).
NULL : Fills devices without data with NULLs (00H).
VIDEO DISPLAY
Select whether to enable or disable the completion notification of data input process by the System
FUNCTION
Input Completion signal (External device I/O signal and External device I/O complete signal). (Disable/Enable)
Notification
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(1) Detail Setting

Configure the barcode reader detail settings.
Transmission
Select the transmission speed. (4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200(BPS))
Speed
Detail setting list Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)
Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)
Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)

31
The barcode function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FUNCTION
BARCODE

32
RFID FUNCTION
Target
CH
Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-2.b2) [System Signal 1-2]
Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b0). (Read device: 33
[System Signal 1-2]
OPERATION FUNCTION
CH5 System signal 1-2.b3)
REMOTE PERSONAL
Storing the data read by the barcode reader into the specified device can be notified. (Write device:
[System Signal 1-2]
System signal 2-3.b0)
COMPUTER
Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b1). (Read device:
[System Signal 1-2]
[System Signal 1-2]
34
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
[System Signal 1-2]
[System Signal 2-3]
Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-1.b5) [System Signal 1-1] 35
[System Signal 1-1]
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
[System Signal 2-1]

36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
GS243.b15
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

31.3 Actions
 Storing data read by barcode reader and device points
(1) Device that data can be stored
The data can be stored into word device.
Word of bit device cannot be specified.
Up to 2000 device points can be set. (For the data read by the barcode reader, up to 1999 device points can be
stored to the devices.)
(3) Data stored in the device
Data read by the barcode reader is written into controller devices as ASCII data.
Example) Read data: F123456789
Order of writing data: low high
(a) When the number of read data is less than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 8)
Write device Stored data ASCII data
D0 0009H - •••The GOT writes the number of read bytes.
D1 3231H 21 •••The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the
D2 3433H 43 lower byte.
D3 3635H 65
D4 3837H 87
D5 2039H 9
•••When the number of bytes for the read data is less than
D6 2020H that of the set device points, fill in devices without ASCII
data with spaces (20H) or NULLs (00H).
D7 2020H
31.1 Settings
•••Space
(b) When the number of the read data is more than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 4)
Write device Stored data ASCII data
D3 3635H 65
•••The data that exceed the maximum number of device

points are not written.
31 - 6 31.3 Actions

31
 Header/terminator
The header or terminator of the barcode read by barcode reader can be set.
The following shows applicable header/terminator.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Item Description
Header None (Default), STX
Terminator ETX, LF, CR (Default), CR+LF 32

The following explains the header and terminator with an example of reading "12345" by the barcode reader.
RFID FUNCTION
(1) Header
(a) None (Default)
Set when not adding the header to the head of data.
Read data 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5
REMOTE PERSONAL
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H
(b) STX
COMPUTER
Set when adding the STX to the head of data.
34
Header Read data
STX 1 2 3 4 5
02H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H
VNC(R) SERVER
(2) Terminator
FUNCTION
(a) ETX
Set when adding the ETX to the end of data.
Read data Terminator 35

1 2 3 4 5 ETX
VIDEO DISPLAY
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 03H
FUNCTION
(b) LF
Set when adding the LF to the end of data.

36
1 2 3 4 5 LF
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0AH
MULTIMEDIA
(c) CR (Default) FUNCTION
Set when adding the CR to the end of data.
1 2 3 4 5 CR
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH

OPERATION PANEL
(d) CR+LF
I/O FUNCTION
Set when adding the CR+LF to the end of data.
1 2 3 4 5 CR LF 38
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH 0AH
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
31.3 Actions 31 - 7

 Order of writing data to controller

When writing the data read by barcode reader to controller, set the order of writing.
(1) Low High
Write the data to controller device in order of lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits.
Storage in order of lower 8 bits higher 8 bits.

Read data
"12345"
D0 5 Read byte
Barcode (00 H) (05 H) number
D1 2 1
(32 H) (31 H)
D2 4 3 Storage
(34 H) (33 H) data
12345 D3 5
<GOT> (20 H) (35 H)
1 2 3 4 5 CR
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH
(For header: none, terminator: CR)
(2) High Low

Write the data to controller device in order of upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits.
Storage in order of higher 8 bits lower 8 bits.
Read data
"12345"
5 Read byte
D0 number
Barcode (00 H) (05 H)
D1 1 2
(31 H) (32 H)
D2 3 4 Storage
(33 H) (34 H) data
12345 D3 5
<GOT> (35 H) (20 H)
1 2 3 4 5 CR
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH

(For header: none, terminator: CR)
31 - 8 31.3 Actions

31
 Action timing of the barcode function
The following shows the action timing of the barcode function.
Example) GT Designer3 setting
FUNCTION
BARCODE
• The barcode reader with the channel No.8 is connected to the GOT.
• [No] in [Read Data Direct Input to Object] is selected.
• System signal 1-1 D11 • System signal 2-1 D12 • Device to be set D1000
• Data points 8 points
32
(1) Control devices
RFID FUNCTION
Device Item
External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6),

System information External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
(2) Handshake 33
1.
OPERATION FUNCTION
Receiving data
REMOTE PERSONAL
GOT 31h,32h,33h
2.
COMPUTER
Barcode input disable signal
(System signal 1-1.b5) 3.
Storing data
GOT
31h,32h,33h
34
4. 7.
External device I/O signal
VNC(R) SERVER
(System signal 2-1.b6)
5.
FUNCTION
D1000
User-created program
R1000
External device I/O complete 6. 8.

signal (CH8)
(System signal 1-1.b6) 35
1. The GOT receives the data from the barcode reader.
VIDEO DISPLAY
2. If the Barcode input disable signal is off, the GOT executes the process.
FUNCTION
3. The received data is stored in the specified device.
4. The GOT turns on the External device I/O signal (CH8).

36
5. The data stored in the specified device is moved to any of the other devices.
6. The GOT turns on the External device I/O complete signal (CH8) by using the user created program.
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
7. The GOT turns off the External device I/O signal (CH8).
8. The GOT turns off the External device I/O complete signal (CH8) by using the user created program.
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
31.3 Actions 31 - 9

(3) Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using the channel No.8)
While the External device I/O complete signal and the External device I/O signal are on, the GOT cannot read
data from the barcode reader.
Create a sequence program so that the External device I/O complete signal and the External device I/O signal
turn off.
POINT
Before using example programs
For applying the example programs in this manual to the actual system, make sure that the target system has no
troubles on the control.
Signal to be used in sequence program

D12.6 When the GOT turns on the External device
0 BMOVP D1000 R1000 K8 I/O signal (CH8), the data stored in the
specified device is moved to any of the
other devices.
SET D11.6 After moving the data, turn on the external
device I/O complete signal (CH8).
D12.6 D11.6
The GOT turns off the External device
24 RST D11.6
I/O complete signal (CH8).
 Directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input

Input completion notification
• When the input completion notification is disabled
Establishing a handshake is not required by using the External device I/O signal and the External device
I/O complete signal.
If data is sequentially read to an object, old data is immediately overwritten by new data in each time.
• When the input completion notification is enabled
Data cannot be input to the object until the External device I/O signal is turned off by the External device
I/O complete signal.
For the System signal action, refer to the following.
31.3 Action timing of the barcode function
31 - 10 31.3 Actions

31
31.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the barcode function.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
(1) Barcode that can be read
For the barcode that can be read, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for 32
GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
(2) Number of barcode settings
RFID FUNCTION
Only one barcode setting is available for one project.
(3) System information setteing
(a) System information setting
Make sure to set the following system signals according to the channel number used.
For GT SoftGOT1000, set the system signals used for channel No.5. 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
The barcode function is unavailable without the settings.
REMOTE PERSONAL
Channel No. System signal
COMPUTER
Channel No.8 System signal 1-1,System signal 2-1
Channel No.5
Channel No.7
34
For details of the system information, refer to the following.
VNC(R) SERVER
• (Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
FUNCTION
• User's Manual for the GOT used
(b) Operation of barcode reader function with system signal status.
When the following System signals are ON, the data read by the barcode reader is not written to a
controller. 35
The External device I/O signal and the External device I/O complete signal can be automatically turned off
by using a sequence program and others.
VIDEO DISPLAY
• System signal 1-1
FUNCTION
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
36
Barcode input invalid signal
External device I/O complete signal (CH8)
• System signal 2-1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 MULTIMEDIA

FUNCTION
External device I/O signal (CH8)
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

 Precaution for OS
To use the barcode function, install the extended function OS (Barcode) on the GOT.
(Excluding the GT10 and GT SoftGOT1000)
 Precaution for hardware

For the system configurations for using the barcode reader, refer to the following.
Works3
 Precautions for directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input
(1) Setting required for objects
To directly input the data to an object by using the barcode function, the setting for objects (numerical input and
ASCII input) is required.
(2) When the numerical input and ASCII input are not in the ready state for the data read by the
barcode reader to be directly input
When the numerical input and ASCII input are not in the ready state for the data read by the barcode reader to
be directly input, the read data is cleared.
To input data, touch the numerical input or ASCII input, and read data to the numerical input or ASCII input while
displaying a cursor.

31
32. RFID FUNCTION
FUNCTION
BARCODE
32
RFID FUNCTION
The RFID function enables to send and receive data by an RFID reader/writer of an RFID controller connected to the
GOT, and enables to write the received data into devices. The function also enables to directly input the received data to
objects (numerical input and ASCII input).
 Writing data to devices 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
RFID reader/writer Requesting to read data
COMPUTER
RFID controller GOT
IC tag 34
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
Data of IC tag Received data
5 5
Receiving data
2 1 2 1 35
1 2 3 4 5 3
4 3 4
VIDEO DISPLAY
SP 5 SP 5
FUNCTION
5.2 Setting Numerical Input 36
RFID reader/writer Requesting to read data MULTIMEDIA

FUNCTION
GOT
RFID controller
37
12345
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
IC tag
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
Data is input in the touched object.

Data of IC tag
5 38
Receiving data
2 1
3
RGB DISPLAY
4 1 2 3 4 5
FUNCTION
SP 5
32 - 1

POINT
Channel No. restrictions
To use an RFID controller with GT SoftGOT1000, configure the setting required for connecting the RFID controller
to channel No.8.
HINT
How to connect an RFID controller
For the system configuration and communication settings for connecting an RFID controller, refer to the following.

Works3
32.1 Settings
Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [RFID] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
POINT
When using GT SoftGOT1000
To use an RFID controller, configure the communication setting with GT SoftGOT1000.
When [Yes] for [Read Data Direct Input to Object] is selected
When [No] for [Read Data Direct Input to Object] is selected
Select the connection target interface for the RFID controller.

Destinati Click the [Detail Setting] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box for the RFID function.
on I/F
(1) Detail Setting


Use RFID Select this item to enable the settings of the RFID function.
Select whether to write data read by the RFID reader/writer to a controller, or to directly input the
read data to objects (numerical input and ASCII input).
FUNCTION
BARCODE
No: Writes the data to the controller.
Yes: Directly inputs the data to the numerical input and ASCII input.
Read Data Direct Input 32.3 Directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input
to Object
To directly input the data to an object by using the RFID function, the setting for objects
(numerical input and ASCII input) is required.
32
5.2 Extended tab
RFID FUNCTION
6.2 Extended tab
Select a device to be used for the RFID function.

Device Devices equivalent to 5 points starting from the selected device are set as the RFID controller signal.
Set the item with the dedicated protocol (ICU-60S or ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS
TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.) or the nonprocedural protocol. 33
Set the device points for data to be sent. (0 to 10000)
OPERATION FUNCTION
Transmitted Data
REMOTE PERSONAL
Set the item so that the device points for [Transmitted Data Points] and [Received Data Points] in
Points
total are 10000 points or less.
If [No] is selected for [Read Data Direct Input to Object], set the item so that the device points for
COMPUTER
[Transmitted Data Points] and [Received Data Points] in total are 10000 points or less.
Set the device points for received data. (0 to 10000)

Received Data Points Set the item so that the device points for [Transmitted Data Points] and [Received Data Points] in
total are 10000 points or less.
34
Displays the total device points of [Transmitted Data Points], [Received Data Points], and the RFID
Device Points
controller signal (5 points).
VNC(R) SERVER
Function
Select this item when using nonprocedural protocol.
Setting
FUNCTION
(1) Detail Setting
Header Select either of the following suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller.
None: No header
STX: Adds the STX to the header.
Select this item when using nonprocedural protocol.

35
(1) Detail Setting
ETX: The ETX terminator is added to the data.
VIDEO DISPLAY
Terminator
LF: The LF terminator is added to the data.
FUNCTION
CR: The CR terminator is added to the data.
CR+LF: The CR and LF terminator are added to the data.
Select an order of writing data into controller devices.
Data Writing Order

Low
8 bits.
High: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower 8 bits to upper
36
High Low: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper 8 bits to lower
8 bits.
Select this item to fill in devices without data with spaces or NULLs when the number of bytes for the MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
data received by the RFID reader/writer is less than that of bytes equivalent to the device points set
Fill up a space when
for [Received Data Points].
imported data is less
After selecting the item, select the data to fill in devices without data.
than the writing points
Space: Fills devices without data with spaces (20H).
NULL: Fills devices without data with NULLs (00H).
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
Select whether to enable or disable the completion notification of data input process by the System
OPERATION PANEL
Input Completion signal (External device I/O signal and External device I/O complete signal) and the RFID controller
signal (RFID receive signal). (Disable/Enable)
I/O FUNCTION
Notification
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(1) Detail Setting

Configure the RFID detail settings.
Transmission Speed Select the transmission speed. (4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200(BPS))
Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)
Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)
Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)
Sum Check Select whether to perform sum check. (Done/None)
Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs.

Retry
Detail setting When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (0 to 5 (Times))
list
Timeout Time Set the time required for communication to time out. (3 to 30 (Sec.)
Delay Time Set the delay time to lower the load of the network/connected PLC. (0 to 3000(ms))
Select the communication format. (10/11/12/15)

Format10: Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
Format11: Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)
Format
Format12: Dedicated protocol (ICU-215 (Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.)
Format15: Nonprocedural protocol

31
The RFID function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FUNCTION
BARCODE

32
RFID FUNCTION
Target
CH
Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data.

(Read device: System signal 1-2.b4)
[System Signal 1-2] 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b0).
[System Signal 1-2]
CH5
COMPUTER
With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are stored in
the specified device.
With the nonprocedural protocol, this signal notifies that sending data to the RFID controllers is [System Signal 2-3]
completed.
(Write device: System signal 2-3.b0) 34
[System Signal 1-2]
VNC(R) SERVER
[System Signal 1-2]
FUNCTION
CH6
completed. 35
(Write device: System signal 2-3.b1)
VIDEO DISPLAY
[System Signal 1-2]
FUNCTION
[System Signal 1-2]
CH7
36
completed.
Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
[System Signal 1-2]
[System Signal 1-1]
CH8
With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are stored in 37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
completed.
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Notifying that external authentication or fingerprint authentication succeeds. (Write

GS240.b0
device)
Notifying that external authentication or fingerprint authentication fails. (Write device) GS240.b1
Notifying that the login screen for the external authentication or fingerprint authentication
GS240.b14
is displayed. (Write device)
Notifying that the object is in the ready state for the data read by barcode reader or RFID
GS243.b15
to be directly input. (Write device)

31
32.3 Actions
The following explains settings and functions required for the RFID function.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
 Storing data read by RFID reader/writer and device points
(1) Devices that can store data
The data can be stored in word devices. 32
Bit devices cannot be specified as word devices.
RFID FUNCTION
Up to 10000 points can be set for the send data points and receive data points in total.
(3) Data to be stored in devices
The following shows how the GOT writes data to be sent or received by an RFID reader/writer into controller
devices as ASCII data.
Example) Received data: 123456789 33
Order of writing data: low high
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
(a) When device points for read data are less than set device points
Settings (Storage device: D1005, Data points: 8)
COMPUTER
Write device Data to be stored ASCII data
D1006 3231H 21 •••The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the 34
VNC(R) SERVER
D1008 3635H 65
FUNCTION
D1009 3837H 87
D1010 2039H 9
•••When the number of bytes for the read data is less than
D1011 2020H that of the set device points, fill in devices without ASCII
D1012 2020H
data with spaces (20H) or NULLs (00H).
35
32.1 Settings
•••Space
VIDEO DISPLAY
(b) When device points for read data are more than set device points
FUNCTION
Settings (Storage device: D1005, Data points: 4)
Write device Data to be stored ASCII data
D1005 0009H - •••The GOT writes the number of read bytes. 36

D1008 3635H 65 MULTIMEDIA

FUNCTION
•••The data that exceed the maximum number of device
points are not written.
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 7

 Order of writing data to controller

For writing data read by an RFID reader/writer into a controller device, the order of writing data can be set.
(1) Low High
Write the data to controller device in order of lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits.
Storing data in order of data from

lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits
Read data
12345 Number of
D1000 5 read bytes
Requesting to read data
D1001 2 1
Stored
D1002 4 3 data
D1003 5
Receiving data
1 2 3 4 5
(2) High Low

Write the data to controller device in order of upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits.
Storing data in order of data from
upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits
Read data
12345
D1000 Number of
5
read bytes
Requesting to read data
D1001 1 2
Stored
D1002 3 4 data
D1003 5
Receiving data
1 2 3 4 5
32 - 8 32.3 Actions

31
 Header/terminator
Set the header and terminator suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used.
32.1 Settings
FUNCTION
BARCODE
The following shows applicable header/terminator.
Item Description
Header None (Default), STX 32

Terminator ETX, LF, CR (Default), CR+LF
RFID FUNCTION
The following explains the header and terminator with an example of reading "12345" by the RFID reader/writer.
(1) Header
(a) None (Default)
Set when not adding the header to the head of data.
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
Read data
REMOTE PERSONAL
1 2 3 4 5
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H
COMPUTER
(b) STX
Set when adding the STX to the head of data.
Header Read data

34
STX 1 2 3 4 5
VNC(R) SERVER
02H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H
FUNCTION
(2) Terminator
(a) ETX
Set when adding the ETX to the end of data.
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 ETX
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 03H
FUNCTION
(b) LF
Set when adding the LF to the end of data.
Read data Terminator 36

1 2 3 4 5 LF
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0AH

MULTIMEDIA
(c) CR (Default) FUNCTION
Set when adding the CR to the end of data.

37
1 2 3 4 5 CR
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH

I/O FUNCTION
(d) CR+LF
Set when adding the CR+LF to the end of data.
1 2 3 4 5 CR LF 38
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 0DH 0AH
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 9

 RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area
Set the RFID controller signal for controlling data transmissions with the RFID function.
Set [Device] in the RFID dialog box to automatically set the RFID controller signal.
32.1 Settings
The following shows an setting example of the RFID controller signal, send data points, and receive data points.
Example) RFID settings
Device : D1000
Send data points : 4
Receive data points: 8
(a) RFID controller signal
Device Bit number Item Description
With the nonprocedural protocol, the bit turns on when the GOT
b0 RFID receive signal
receives data from the RFID controller.
D1000
b1 to b14 - -
b15 Error signal Turns on when the GOT receives an error signal.
Stores time (second) that the RFID reader/writer sends or receives

b0 to b7 IC tag communication time data from/to an IC tag, when the dedicated protocol (LSRF
manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.) is used.
D1001
Stores the number of the RFID reader/writer that sends or receives
b8 to b15 RFID reader/writer No. data from/to an IC tag, when the dedicated protocol (LSRF
manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.) is used.
D1002 b0 to b15 - -
b0 to b7 Error No. Stores error codes when errors occur.

D1003
b8 to b15 Number of errors Stores the number of error occurrences.
Stores the communication time for the RFID function.

• With dedicated protocol
D1004 b0 to b15 RFID communication time The bits store the total of the send data time and receive data time.
• With nonprocedural protocol
The bits store the send data time or receive data time.
(b) Send data area, receive data area
Device Item Description
Stores data to be sent to an IC tag.

D1005 to D1008 Send data area
The head device stores the number of bytes for data to be sent.
Stores received data from an IC tag.

D1009 to D1016 Receive data area
The head device stores the number of bytes for the received data.
32 - 10 32.3 Actions

31
 Protocols and communication flow
The following dedicated protocol and nonprocedural protocol are available for communications between the GOT
and the RFID controller.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Protocol Reference
This section  (1) Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by

Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
32
Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.) This section  (2) Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S and ICU-
RFID FUNCTION
Dedicated protocol (ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO 215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)
SCIENCE Corp.)
Nonprocedural protocol This section  (3) Nonprocedural protocol
Select the dedicated protocol that corresponds to the RFID controller to be used.
With no dedicated protocol that corresponds to the RFID controller to be used, select the nonprocedural protocol. 33
For selecting a protocol, refer to the following.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
Works3
COMPUTER
The following shows devices used for each protocol and an handshake example.
(1) Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
Example: Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
• System signal 1-1 D10 • System signal 1-2 D11 • System signal 2-1 D12
34
• Device to be set D1000 • Receive data points 4 points
VNC(R) SERVER
(a) Control devices
FUNCTION
Device Item

RFID request signal (CH8) (System signal 1-2.b1),
System information
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6) 35
IC tag communication time, RFID reader/writer No.
VIDEO DISPLAY
RFID controller signal
RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area
FUNCTION
(b) Handshake

(IC tag communication time,
1.
'3','2'
36
RFID reader/writer No.)
8.
RFID request signal (CH8)
(System signal 1-2.b1) 2. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
GOT Sending data/

receiving data
3.
Receive data area 06h,00h,'A','B','1','2','3','4'
37
4. 7.
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
External device I/O signal

I/O FUNCTION
D1005
R1005 8.
External device I/O complete
signal (CH8) 38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 11

1. Set the RFID reader/writer No. and the time that the RFID reader/writer sends data to an IC tag.
Example) RFID reader/writer No.: 3, Time to send data to IC tag: two seconds
2. Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID reader/writer communicates with an IC tag.
3. Data of the IC tag read by the RFID reader/writer is stored in the receive data area.
4. The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8).
5. Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices.
6. Check that the data is moved, and then turn on the external device I/O complete signal (CH8).
7. The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).
8. Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).
(c) Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using the channel No.8)
After the GOT receives data from the RFID controller, make sure to turn off the external device I/O
complete signal and the RFID request signal.
When those signals are on, the GOT cannot send the next data read request to the RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the external device I/O complete signal and the RFID request signal
turn off.
POINT

• RFID reader/writer No.3 read command: M200
M200
Set the RFID reader/writer No. and the time that the
0 MOVP H302 D1001
RFID reader/writer sends data to an IC tag.
(RFID controller No.: 3, Time to send data to IC tag:
2 seconds)
SET D11.1 Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID
reader/writer communicates with an IC tag to read
data.
D12.6 D1000.F
24 BMOVP D1005 R1005 K4 The data is stored in the receive data area. Move
the data to any of the other devices after the
external device I/O signal (CH8) turns on.
SET D10.6 After moving the data, turn on the external device
I/O complete signal (CH8).
D12.6 D10.6
60 RST D11.1
Turn off the external device I/O complete signal
(CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).
RST D10.6
32 - 12 32.3 Actions

(2) Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S and ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
31
Corp.)
Example) Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
•System signal 1-1 D10 •System signal 1-2 D11 •System signal 2-1 D12
FUNCTION
BARCODE
•Device to be set D1000 •Send data points 30 points •Receive data points 30 points
(a) Controlling device
Device Item 32
RFID FUNCTION
System information
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
(b) Handshake
33
1.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
Receive data area 41h,01h,03h
8.
COMPUTER
RFID request signal (CH8)
Sending data/
GOT receiving data
3. 34
14h, 00h, 41h, 12h,
Receive data area 00h, 01h, 'A', 'B', to 'P'
VNC(R) SERVER
4. 7.
External device
FUNCTION
I/O signal (CH8)
D1036
External device
R1036 8. 35
I/O complete signal (CH8)
VIDEO DISPLAY
1.
FUNCTION
Set the data to be sent to the RFID controller in the send data area.
Set the data suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used.
Example) Reading record No.3 by "rf_read" command
2. Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID reader/writer communicates with an IC tag. 36
3. Data of the IC tag read by the RFID reader/writer is stored in the receive data area.
4. The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8). MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
5. Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices.
6. Check that the data is moved, and then turn on the external device I/O complete signal (CH8). 37
7. The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
8. Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 13

(c) Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using the channel No.8)
After the GOT receives data from the RFID controller, make sure to turn off the external device I/O
complete signal and the RFID request signal.
When those signals are on, the GOT cannot send the next data read request to the RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the external device I/O complete signal and the RFID request signal
turn off.
POINT

• Record No.3 read command M200
M200
0
MOVP K3 D1005 Make the setting to read the record.
Turn on the RFID request signal, and
then the RFID reader/writer communicates
MOVP H141 D1006 with an IC tag to read data.
MOVP H3 D1007
SET D11.1
D12.6 D1000.F
D1036
The data is stored in the receive data area.
28 BMOVP R1036 K10
Move the data to any of the other devices
after the external device I/O signal (CH8)
turns on.
SET D10.6 After moving the data, turn on the external
device I/O complete signal (CH8).
D12.6 D10.6
64 RST D11.1
Turn off the external device I/O complete
signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal
RST D10.6 (CH8).
32 - 14 32.3 Actions

(3) Nonprocedural protocol

31
Example: Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
• System signal 1-1 D10 • System signal 1-2 D11 • System signal 2-1 D12
• Device to be set D1000 • Send data points 5 points • Receive data points 8 points
FUNCTION
BARCODE
(a) Controlling device
Device Item
External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6), 32

System information
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
RFID FUNCTION
RFID receive signal

(b) Handshake
33
1.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
07h, 00h, 02h, '0',
Send data area '3', 'G', '0', '2', 03h
8.
COMPUTER
RFID request signal
(CH8)
2.
GOT Sending data
3.
Receiving data
34
External device I/O
signal (CH8)
4.
VNC(R) SERVER
RFID request signal
FUNCTION
(CH8)
0Dh, 00h, 02h, '0', '3', 'D', '*',
35
Receive data area 'A', 'B', '1', '2', '3', '4', '*', 03h
6. 8.
(RFID receive signal) 7.
VIDEO DISPLAY
D1010
FUNCTION
R2017
1. Set the data to be sent to the RFID controller in the send data area.
Set the data suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used. 36
Example) "07h, 00h, 02h, '0', '3', 'G', '0', '2', 03h"
2. Turn on the RFID request signal (CH8), and then the RFID reader/writer sends the data stored in the
send data area to the IC tag. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
4. Check that the external device I/O signal (CH8) is on, and then turn on the external device I/O
37
complete signal (CH8).
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).
OPERATION PANEL
Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8).

I/O FUNCTION
5. The IC tag sends data to the RFID reader/writer, and the data is stored in the receive data area.
7. Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices. 38
8. Turn off the RFID request signal (CH8) and the RFID receive signal.
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 15

(c) Sequence program example (For QCPU) (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using channel No.8)
Be sure to turn off the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal before the GOT sends the next
data read request to the RFID controller.
When the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal are on, the GOT cannot communicate with the
RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal turn off.
POINT

• Data send command M201
M201
0 MOVP H7 D1005
MOVP H3002 D1006
MOVP H4733 D1007 Write data to be sent in the send data area.
MOVP H3230 D1008
MOVP H3 D1009
Turn on the RFID request signal, and send

SET D11.1
the data.
D12.6 After the external device I/O signal (CH8)
31 SET D10.6 turns on, turn on the external device I/O
D12.6 D10.6 After the external device I/O signal (CH8)
55 RST D10.6 turns off, turn off the external device I/O
D1000.0 D1000.F
76 BMOVP D1010 R2017
When the RFID receive signal turns on,
K8
move the data stored in the receive data
area to any of the other devices.
RST D1000.0 Turn off the RFID receive signal.
RST D11.1 Turn off the RFID request signal.
32 - 16 32.3 Actions

31
 Errors during communications
The GOT detects errors when the errors occur while the GOT communicates with the RFID controller.
For the RFID controller signal, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
(1) With dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
When an error occurs, the error signal of the RFID controller signal turns on, the number of error occurrences is 32
counted, and an error code is stored in the error No.
Check if an error occurs with the error signal of the RFID controller signal.
RFID FUNCTION
The following shows error codes to be stored in the error No
Error code Description Corrective action
Check if the cable is unplugged and check the RFID controller status.
Take the following corrective actions.
FFH Time out • Connect the cable again.
• Correctly wire the cable. 33
• Turn on the RFID controller.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
Check the communication settings and communication environments
FEH SIO error surrounding controllers. Set the communication settings for the RFID
COMPUTER
controller suitable for those for the GOT
FDH Send setting error Set the station No. and time within the setting ranges.
FCH Receive overflow Set the receive data area suitable for the received data size.
14H Time out or no IC tags

Make the GOT send a data read request when communications are 34
available between an RFID controller and an IC tag.
VNC(R) SERVER
For error codes and corrective actions other than the above, refer to the manual for the RFID controller.
After removing error causes, manually turn off the error signal and send data again.
FUNCTION
(2) With dedicated protocol (ICU-60S or ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.) or nonprocedural protocol
When an error occurs, an error code is stored in the receive data area or the error No. of the RFID controller
signal. 35
(a) When GOT receives error reply from RFID controller
VIDEO DISPLAY
When the GOT receives an error replay from the RFID controller, an error code is stored in the receive data
area.
FUNCTION
Check if errors occur with data stored in the receive data area.
For errors and corrective actions, refer to the manual for the RFID controller. After removing error causes,
send data again.
(b) When GOT receives no error reply from RFID controller 36
When the GOT receives no error reply from the RFID controller, the GOT turns on the error signal of the
RFID controller signal, and the error code is stored in the error No.
Check if an error occurs with the error signal of the RFID controller signal. MULTIMEDIA
The following shows error codes to be stored in the error No. FUNCTION
Error code Description Corrective action
Check if the cable is unplugged and check the RFID controller

status. Take the following corrective actions. 37
FFH Time out • Connect the cable again.
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
• Correctly wire the cable.

OPERATION PANEL
• Turn on the RFID controller.

I/O FUNCTION
Check the communication settings and communication

FEH SIO error environments surrounding controllers. Set the communication
settings for the RFID controller suitable for those for the GOT.
FDH Send setting error Set the station No. and time within the setting ranges.
FCH Receive overflow Set the receive data area suitable for the received data size.
38
After removing error causes, manually turn off the error signal and send data again.
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
32.3 Actions 32 - 17


(1) Timing of starting communication
The RFID request signal is not used for directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input.
The GOT starts communication with the RFID controller after an object (numerical input or ASCII input) is
touched and a cursor appears.
Set data to be used for the communication with the RFID controller before displaying the cursor on the object
(numerical input or ASCII input).
The following shows the data used for each protocol communication.
Protocol Data to be used for the communication with RFID controller
Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial

RFID controller signal (IC tag communication time, RFID reader/writer No.)
Systems Co., Ltd.)
Nonprocedural protocol Send data area
For the RFID controller signal and send data area, refer to the following.
32.3 RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area
(2) RFID controller that cannot directly input data

When the following RFID controllers are used, data cannot be directly input to an object.
(a) Communication using dedicated protocols
• ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.
• ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.
(b) Communication using nonprocedural protocols
• RFID controller that receives data on the first time after sending or receiving data in multiple times
(3) Input completion notification
(a) When the input completion notification is disabled
Establishing a handshake is not required by using the External device I/O signal and the External device I/
O complete signal.
During displaying a cursor, data is sequentially read to an object, and old data is immediately overwritten by
new data in each time.
(b) When the input completion notification is enabled
Data cannot be input to the object until the External device I/O signal is turned off by the External device I/
O complete signal.
For the communication using nonprocedural protocols, turn off the RFID receive signal before starting the
following communication.
If the data input starts while the RFID receive signal is turned on, the GOT cannot determine whether the
data input is completed.
For the System signal action, refer to the following.
32.3 Protocols and communication flow
32 - 18 32.3 Actions

31
32.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the RFID function.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
(1) Number of RFID settings
Only one RFID setting is available for one project. 32
(2) Connecting RFID controller for operator authentication
To use the RFID controller for the operator authentication, the controller can be connected to only the RS-232
RFID FUNCTION
interface built in the GOT.
Set the channel No.8 for connecting the RFID controller.
(3) Applicable RFID controller
For applicable RFID controllers, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for
GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor. 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
(4) Setting system information
REMOTE PERSONAL
(a) System information
Make sure to set the following system signals according to the channel number used.
COMPUTER
For GT SoftGOT1000, set the system signals used for channel No.8.
The RFID function is unavailable without the settings.
Channel No. System signal 34
Channel No.8 System signal 1-1,System signal 1-2,System signal 2-1
VNC(R) SERVER
Channel No.5
FUNCTION
Channel No.7
For details of the system information, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting 35
VIDEO DISPLAY
(b) Operation of RFID function with control device status
FUNCTION
Depending on the status of the control device to be used, the GOT may not send or receive data to/from
the RFID controller.
For control devices for each protocol, refer to the following.
32.3 Protocols and communication flow 36

For using the RFID function, install the extended function OS (RFID) on the GOT.(Excluding GT SoftGOT1000)
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
(1) System configuration with RFID controller
For the system configuration with the RFID controller, refer to the following. 37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
Works3
I/O FUNCTION

(2) Communication in multiple RFID readers/writers connection
When connecting multiple RFID readers/writers, some controllers may communicate with each RFID reader/
writer.
For communicating the RFID controller with the each RFID reader/writer, set an interlock so that the RFID 38
controller does not communicate with RFID readers/writers until the executing communication is completed.
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

 Precautions for directly inputting data to the numerical input and ASCII input
(1) Setting required for objects
To directly input the data to an object by using the RFID function, the setting for objects (numerical input and
ASCII input) is required.
(2) During communication
Do not store or change send data after starting communication with the RFID controller.
The communication error may occur.
(3) Action when the GOT receives an error
When the GOT receives an error from the RFID reader/writer, the received error is directly input to an object
(numerical input or ASCII input).
For details of errors, refer to the following.
32.3 Errors during communications
(4) Receiving data that is divided into segments
When data is divided into segments and the segments of data are received, the segments of the received data
are not combined in one.
When the segments of data are received, each segment of data is directly input to objects (numerical input or
ASCII input) in each time.

31
33. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
BARCODE
33.1 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Serial) 32
RFID FUNCTION
The remote personal computer operation (Serial) enables to operate the mouse pointer on a personal computer by
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
touching the computer screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB display function.
REMOTE PERSONAL
The remote personal computer operation (Serial) enables to use a mouse using the USB mouse/keyboard function.
(Only the GT16)
COMPUTER
For details of the USB mouse/keyboard function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 10.5 Operating GOT with USB Mouse/Keyboard (USB Mouse/Keyboard
Function)
34
The GOT displays the personal
computer screen using the RGB
VNC(R) SERVER
display function.
FUNCTION
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
The coordinates of the position touched on the
GOT and the touch status are sent to the personal
computer for operating the mouse pointer.
POINT 36
Remote personal computer operation (Serial) setting
(1) RGB display function settings
The RGB display function is required for the remote personal computer operation (Serial). MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
For how to set the RGB display function, refer to the following.
• For RGB display function settings
37
• For system configurations and communication settings for the remote personal computer operation
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
connection
OPERATION PANEL

I/O FUNCTION
Works3
(2) Remote personal computer operation function driver
For the remote personal computer operation (Serial), install the remote personal computer operation driver on
the personal computer. 38
For how to install the driver, refer to the following.
33.1.1 Settings
RGB DISPLAY
(3) Extended function OS

FUNCTION
To use a USB mouse, install the extended function OS (USB Mouse/Keyboard) on the GOT.
33.1 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Serial) 33 - 1

33.1.1 Settings
The following shows how to configure the settings for the remote personal computer operation (Serial).
1. Configure the RGB display function setting and the remote personal computer operation (Serial) setting by GT
Designer3.
• RGB display function setting

• Remote personal computer operation (Serial) setting
PC Remote Operation dialog box
2. Connect a personal computer to the GOT.

Works3
3. Install the extended function OS, and write project data to the GOT.
(Fundamentals) 7. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
4. Install the remote personal computer operation driver on the personal computer, and configure the settings.
Settings for the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X)
 PC Remote Operation dialog box

Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC Remote Operation] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
PC Remote Operation (Serial) Set a GOT interface to communicate with a personal computer.
PC Remote Operation (Ethernet) No setting is required.
33 - 2 33.1 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Serial)

31
POINT
Device setting
FUNCTION
BARCODE
To send the touch status of the GOT screen to the personal computer, turn on the touch status communication
control signal (GS511.b0).
For the touch status communication control signal (GS511.b0), refer to the following.
32
RFID FUNCTION
 Settings for the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X)
The remote personal computer operation function driver is a mouse emulation software for operating the mouse
pointer on the personal computer with device data of the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and touch status sent by the
GOT.
The copyright of the software belongs to DMC Co., Ltd. 33
Use the software under the license agreement displayed when installing the software.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
(1) Software
Obtain the software with either of the following methods.
COMPUTER
• GT Works3 CD-ROM
The location where the software is stored is shown in the ReadmeJ.txt.
• Contact your local distributor.
(2) Operating environment
34
The following shows the operating environment for the personal computer.
VNC(R) SERVER
Item Description
FUNCTION
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack 4 (English version)
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 (English version)
OS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 (English version)
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 3 (English version) 35
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 3 (English version)
• Compatible with the operating environment for the above OS.
VIDEO DISPLAY
Computer
• Equipped with the RS-232 serial port (9-pin).
FUNCTION
(3) How to install the driver
For the remote personal computer operation (Serial), install the remote personal computer operation driver
(MES_2X) on the personal computer.
Refer to the following procedures. 36
1. Start Install.exe.
2. The Welcome to the Touch Screen Driver MES_2X Setup Wizard screen appears, and then click the [Next] MULTIMEDIA
button. FUNCTION
3. The License Agreement screen appears, and read the [license agreement]. Select [I Agree] to accept the
terms of the agreement, and then click the [Next] button. 37
4. The Select Installation Folder screen appears. Select a folder for installation. Select [Everyone] for anyone
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
who uses the computer or [Just me] for yourself, and then click the [Next] button.
I/O FUNCTION
5. The Confirm Installation screen appears. Click the [Next] button to start the installation.
6. The MES_2X Driver Select screen appears. Select [RS232C] and a communication port to be used, and
then click the [Next] button.
38
7. The MES_2X Driver EEPROM screen appears. Select [DO NOT USE], and then click the [Next] button.
8. The Hardware Installation screen appears during the installation. Click the [Continue Anyway] button.
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

9. The Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears, and then the [Installation Complete] screen appears.
Click the [close] button to exit the setup wizard.
10.After exiting the setup wizard, the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen appears. Set up the driver.
POINT
Before installing the driver
Before installing the remote personal computer operation driver (MES_2X), connect the personal computer to the
GOT by using the RGB display connection and the RS-232 connection.
After the driver is installed, the calibration setting screen appears automatically.
If the personal computer is not connected to the GOT, the calibration setting cannot be configured.
To configure the calibration setting, connect the personal computer to the GOT by using the RGB display
connection and the RS-232 connection.
(4) Settings
To calibrate the difference in the position of the coordinates between the GOT screen and the personal
computer screen, set the calibration for the remote personal computer operation driver (MES_2X).
Refer to the following procedures.
1. Set up the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X).

Refer to either of the following.
• Set up the driver on the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen automatically displayed after the driver
installation.
• Set up the driver on the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen opened by selecting [All Programs]
[Touch Screen Driver MES_2X] [TPControl] from the start menu.
2. Execute the calibration on the [Calibration] tab in the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen.
Select [5p] for the calibration points, and then click the [Calibration] button in the bottom of the screen.
• For the calibration points, [5p] is recommended.
3. The calibration points are displayed on the personal computer. Touch the calibration points of the personal
computer screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB display.
4. Click the [Test] button in the bottom of the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen.
The test screen appears. Touch the [Clear] button on the test screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB
display to check for the correct operation.
5. After checking, touch the left [End] button, and then touch the right [End] button to close the test screen.
6. Click the [OK] button in the bottom of the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen to close the screen.

33.1.2 Relevant Settings 31

The remote personal computer operation function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
32
RFID FUNCTION
Controlling whether to send or not the touch status to the personal computer. (Read
GS511.b0
device)
Notifying the position touched on the GOT (X-coordinate, Y-coordinate). (Write

GS654, GS655
device)
Notifying whether the screen is touched or not. (Write device) GS656
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
33.1.3 Actions
COMPUTER
When the GOT displays the personal computer screen using the RGB display, turning on the touch status
communication control signal (GS511.b0) sends the data in the touch status external notifications (X-coordinate
(GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655), touch status (GS656)) to the personal computer.
The following shows operations according to each touch status. 34
Touch status communication control signal:
VNC(R) SERVER
(GS511.0) = ON
Touch status external notification (X-coordinate): (GS654) = 391
FUNCTION
Touch status external notification (Y-coordinate): (GS655) = 301
Touch status external notification (touch status): (GS656) = 1
Touch status external notification function
X-coordinate = 391, Y-coordinate = 301, touch status =1 35
VIDEO DISPLAY
RGB display function
FUNCTION
POINT 36
GOT internal devices
For the GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
MULTIMEDIA
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 GOT internal devices FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

 Operation of mouse pointer

The following explains the operation of the mouse pointer according to the touch status.
(1) Touching the GOT screen
When the GOT screen is touched while the touch status communication control signal is on, the data in the
touch status external notifications (X-coordinate (GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655)) are sent to the personal
computer and the mouse pointer moves to the corresponding position.
The device value 1 is sent as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to the personal
computer, during touching the GOT.
As a result, the mouse pointer moves on the personal computer screen.
(2) Stopping GOT screen touch
When the touch operation is stopped while the touch status communication control signal is on, the device value
0 is sent only one time, as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to the personal
computer.
As a result, the mouse pointer clicks the personal computer screen one time.
(3) Turning off touch status communication control signal during touching GOT screen
When the touch status communication control signal turns off during touching the GOT screen due to cable
disconnection, GOT power disconnection, and others, the touch status external notifications (X-coordinate
(GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655)) hold the values right before the signal turns off.
The device value 0 is sent only one time, as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to
the personal computer.
As a result, the mouse pointer clicks the personal computer screen one time.
The following shows the operation timing.
Touch 1) Touch 2)
X:391, Y:301 X:199, Y:263
Touch operation (operator)
Touch status external

notification function
(Holding the coordinates of Touch 1)) (Holding the coordinates of Touch2))
X-coordinate (GS654) 391 199
Y-coordinate (GS655) 301 263
Touch status (GS656)

1 0 1 0
(Output for Touch 1)) (Output for Touch 2))
Touch status communication control function
Touch status communication

(OFF) (ON)
control signal (GS511.0)
Touch status external

notification function (Not outputting the coordinates of Touch 1)) (Holding the coordinates of Touch2))
X-coordinate (GS654) 199
0
Y-coordinate (GS655) 263

0
Touch status (GS656)

1 0
(No output for Touch 1)) (Output for Touch 2))

This section explains the precautions for using the remote personal computer operation (Serial).
FUNCTION
BARCODE
For the remote personal computer operation (Serial), install the extended function OS (Video/RGB, PC Remote
Operation(Serial)) on the GOT.
To use a USB mouse on the GOT, install the extended function OS (USB Mouse/Keyboard) on the GOT. 32
RFID FUNCTION
(1) Applicable GOT
The following GOTs are applicable to the remote personal computer operation (Serial).
GT1695M-X, GT1685M-S, GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V,
GT1585V-S, GT1575V-S
(2) USB mouse 33
A USB mouse is available for the GT16 only.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
(3) System configurations for remote personal computer operation (Serial)
For the system configurations for the remote personal computer operation (Serial), refer to the following.
COMPUTER
Works3

(1) Drag operation
VNC(R) SERVER
When dragging on the GOT screen, the touch status data is not correctly sent to the personal computer and the
mouse pointer operation may stop.
FUNCTION
For the remote personal computer operation (Serial), do not use the drag operation on the GOT screen.
(2) USB mouse/keyboard function
The remote personal computer operation (Serial) is not available for a USB keyboard.
A USB mouse is available for the left button only.
35
For the precautions of the USB mouse/keyboard function, refer to the following.
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
Function)
(3) Precautions for RGB display
For the precautions for the RGB display, refer to the following.
38.4 Precautions 36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

33.2 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Ethernet)
The remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) enables to operate a personal computer by using the GOT via
Ethernet.
The remote personal computer operation (Serial) enables to use a mouse using the USB mouse/keyboard function.
For details of the USB mouse/keyboard function, refer to the following.
Function)
By using a personal computer with the server OS, the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) enables to operate
multiple GOTs by using the terminal server function.
Operating the personal
The behavior is the same
computer screen displayed Mouse and
as that of the GOT.
on the GOT keyboard
operation
Personal
computer
GOT
screen
USB hub
Personal computer
USB keyboard USB mouse
POINT
Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) setting
(1) VNC server software or terminal server function
For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), install VNC server software or the terminal server
function on the personal computer.
For details of the VNC server software, refer to the following.
33.2.1 VNC(R) server setting
For details of the terminal server function, refer to the following.
33.2.1 Terminal server settings
(2) System configurations
For system configurations for the remote personal computer operation connection, refer to the following.
Works3
(3) Extended function OS
Install the extended function OS (PC Remote Operation(Ethernet)) on the GOT.
To use a USB mouse and USB keyboard, install the extended function OS (USB Mouse/Keyboard) on the
GOT.
(4) License number registration
For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), license number registration is required for the GOT.
For how to register the license number, refer to the following.
33 - 8 33.2 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Ethernet)

31
 Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with multiple GOTs
When a personal computer with the server OS is used, the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) is
available for multiple GOTs by enabling the terminal server function for the personal computer.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
When the personal computer screen appears on the GOT, the GOT logs on to the terminal server automatically.
After the logon, the terminal server displays each personal computer screen on the GOT.
32
Displaying each personal computer screen on each GOT
Terminal server
RFID FUNCTION
Display screen 1 Display screen 2 Display screen 3
Personal computer with the server
33
Display
OPERATION FUNCTION
Operation
REMOTE PERSONAL
Display screen 2 Display Operation
Operation
screen 1 screen 3
COMPUTER
34
GOT1 GOT2 GOT3
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
33.2 Remote Personal Computer Operation (Ethernet) 33 - 9

33.2.1 Settings
The following shows how to configure the settings for the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet).
1. Configure the controller setting and the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) setting by GT Designer3.
• Controller setting
Controller setting
• Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) setting
PC Remote Operation dialog box
2. Set a special function switch on the screen, and set [PC Remote Operation (Ethernet)] for the switch action setting.
For the settings of the special function switch, refer to the following.
3. For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with only one GOT, install the VNC server software on a
personal computer, and configure the settings.
No setting is required for the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with multiple GOTs.
VNC(R) server setting
4. For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with multiple GOTs, install the terminal server function on
No setting is required for the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with only one GOT.
Terminal server settings
5. Connect a personal computer to the GOT.

Works3
6. Write project data to the GOT.
7. Register a license number on the GOT.

31
 Controller setting
Any of the following Ethernet communication drivers must be set on the GOT.
• Gateway
FUNCTION
BARCODE
• Ethernet Download
• Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700
• Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700, Gateway
• Ethernet(FX), Gateway
• Ethernet(OMRON), Gateway
32
• Ethernet(TOSHIBA nv), Gateway
RFID FUNCTION
• Ethernet (YASKAWA), Gateway
• Ethernet(YOKOGAWA), Gateway
• EtherNet/IP(AB), Gateway
• Ethernet(SIEMENS S7), Gateway
• MODBUS/TCP, Gateway
• Ethernet(MICROCOMPUTER) 33
In the peripheral setting, set [Destination I/F] in [Ethernet Download] for the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
To connect controllers including a programmable controller to the GOT by using the Ethernet connection, no setting
is required.
COMPUTER
1. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC (Data Transfer)].
2. Set [Destination I/F] for [Ethernet Download].
(Fundamentals) 8.1.2 Interface setting of the GOT

34
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

 PC Remote Operation dialog box

Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC Remote Operation] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
PC Remote Operation (Serial) No setting is required.
Set the actions for the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet).
Click this button to display the description

dialog box.
Use PC Remote Operation (Ethernet) Select this item to enable the operation.
Window to be used for remote screen Select an overlap window that displays a
display personal computer screen on the GOT.
Select a method for how to display the

PC Remote Operation (Ethernet) mouse cursor on the GOT when a USB
mouse is used.
• GOT and server PC:
Displays both the GOT mouse cursor
Mouse Cursor Display and the personal computer mouse
cursor.
• GOT Only:
Displays the GOT mouse cursor only.
The personal computer mouse cursor is
not displayed.

31
 VNC(R) server setting
(1) Available VNC server software
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Name Manufacturer Version
UltraVNC UltraVNC team 1.0.5
Use the above version of the software.

If other than the above version of the software is used, the GOT may not operate properly. 32
RFID FUNCTION
For the operating environment of the software, refer to the following website.
http://www.uvnc.com/
(3) How to obtain software
Refer to the following website to download UltraVNC. (English only)
Download the Win32 Full version software.
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
Note that the above website may be changed without notification.
REMOTE PERSONAL
(4) How to install software
COMPUTER
1. Execute the downloaded file, and start the installer.
2. The setup window appears.

Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [License Agreement]. 34
In the screen, confirm the description, and select [I accept the agreement].
3.
VNC(R) SERVER
Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [Select Destination Location].
In the screen, select the location where the software is installed.
FUNCTION
4. The screen for [Select Components] appears.
Select [Full installation] or [UltraVNC Server Only].
5. The screen for [Select Start Menu Folder] appears.

35
Select a start menu folder to create a shortcut.
VIDEO DISPLAY
6. The confirmation dialog box appears to confirm whether to download the following software.
FUNCTION
• Optional non-GPL addons recommended for Vista
Download the software when using Windows Vista(R).
• Optional non-GPL Mirror Driver
Download the software. 36
7. The screen for [Select Additional Tasks] appears.
• Select [Register UltraVNC Server as a system service].
UltraVNC is registered in the system service. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
• Select [Start or restart UltraVNC service].
The UltraVNC service is available.
• To create a shortcut icon on the desktop, select [Create UltraVNC desktop icons].
• To open a file with the extension of .vnc by using UltraVNC Viewer, select [Associate UltraVNC Viewer 37
with the .vnc file extension].
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
8. The confirmation screen for installation appears.

I/O FUNCTION
Confirm the screen, and then click the [Install] button.

Installation of UltraVNC starts.
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(5) Settings
1. When UltraVNC does not start, click [UltraVNC] [UltraVNC Server] from the start menu to start
UltraVNC.
2. Right-click the UltraVNC icon ( ) on the system tray, and select [Admin Properties].
The setting window appears. Configure the settings as shown below.
No setting is required if items are not explained in the following.
Item Description Setting
Configure the connection settings between the GOT and the VNC server. -
Select this item to accept the socket connection.

Accept Socket Select this
Without selecting this item, the GOT cannot be connected to the VNC
Connection item.
server.
Incoming connections Set a port number to be used for the connection.
• Display: [Display]/
Display Number or Set a port number with a display number. [Port(Main)]
Ports to use A port number is set to the set value with 5900 added. (Port number:
• Ports(Main): 1024 to 65535)
Set a port number.
[Lock
When Last Client Set the action when the last connected VNC client (GOT) is disconnected.
Workstation
Disconnects (Do Nothing/Lock Workstation(W2K)/Logoff Workstation)
(W2K)]
Set the action when multiple VNC clients (GOTs) require to connect to the VNC server.
[Keep existing
Multi viewer connections (Disconnect all existing connections/Keep existing connections/Refuse the new connection/
connections]
Refuse all new connection)
Configure the authentication setting to connect the VNC server to the GOT. -
Authentication
VNC Password Set a password for the VNC server. Any password
Configure the settings other than the above. -
Select this item to disable Windows Aero during connecting to the

Remove Aero
viewers.
(Vista) Select this
Set this item when using Windows Vista.
Misc. item.
Remove Wallpaper Select this item not to display a wallpaper during connecting to the
for Viewers viewers.
Default Server Set a default value for the server screen display scale.
1
Screen Scale Set a value to 1.

31
3. Right-click the UltraVNC icon ( ) on the system tray, and then select [Properties].
The setting window appears. Select [Video Hook Driver].
FUNCTION
BARCODE
32
RFID FUNCTION
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
 Terminal server settings
REMOTE PERSONAL
For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) with multiple GOTs, use a personal computer with the
terminal server function.
COMPUTER
To enable the terminal server function, install the following software.
• Terminal server function for Windows(R)
• Encryption software (OpenSSL)
• Terminal service function software (RDPGateway(rdp2vnc))
34
(1) Terminal server function
VNC(R) SERVER
(a) Available terminal server function
FUNCTION
The terminal server function with the following OS is available.
• Windows Server 2003
(b) How to install software
1. Click [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel].

35
2. The [Control Panel] window appears.
VIDEO DISPLAY
Click [Add or Remove Programs].
FUNCTION
3. The [Add or Remove Programs] window appears.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. The [Windows Components Wizard] window appears. 36

Select [Terminal Server] and [Terminal Server Licensing] in the component list.
5. Click the [Next] button.

MULTIMEDIA
Installation of the software starts. FUNCTION
6. After the installation, the [Terminal Server Licensing] window appears.

Right-click a server name to be registered, and then select [Activate Server].
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(c) Settings
Set the following items by using the terminal server function.
For how to configure the terminal server setting, refer to the Windows(R) manual.
• User name and password
Register a user name and password to log on to the terminal server.
Set a user name with up to 20 characters, and set a password with up to 127 characters.
One-byte alphanumeric characters, one-byte space, and symbols (excluding "/[]:; | =,+*? <>) are
available for the user name.
One-byte alphanumeric characters, one-byte space, and the following symbols are available for the
password.
! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , ` - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { | }~
• Display setting for the logon screen
Configure the setting to display the logon screen when the GOT is connected to the personal computer
with the terminal server.
If the logon screen does not appear on the personal computer with the terminal server, unexpected
software operation or others may occur on the personal computer.
(2) Encryption software
(a) Available software
Win32OpenSSL The OpenSSL Project 0.9.8 or later
(b) Operating environment

(c) How to obtain software
Refer to the following website to download the updated Win32OpenSSL.
http://www.slproweb.com/products/Win32OpenSSL.html
(d) How to install software

Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [License Agreement].
In the screen, confirm the description, and select [I accept the agreement].
3. Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [Select Destination Location].

Select a start menu folder to create a shortcut.

Select a directory where the DLL file for OpenSSL is copied.

Installation of OpenSSL starts.
7. After the installation, the confirmation screen for donation appears.

Confirm the screen, and select or clear the check box.
(e) Setting
No setting is required.

(3) Terminal service function software

31
(a) Available software
Name Manufacturer
FUNCTION
BARCODE
RDPGateway(rdp2vnc) Hitachi Solutions, Ltd.
(b) How to obtain software

Download RDPGateway(rdp2vnc) from the following website. 32
http://mvnc.hitachi-solutions.co.jp/rdp2vnc/
(c) How to install software
RFID FUNCTION
1. Decompress the downloaded file.
2. Open the rdp2vnc folder, and execute the install2003jp.bat.

The command prompt starts.
33
3. Enter the name of the personal computer where RDPGateway(rdp2vnc) is installed.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
4. Enter a user name and password with administrator authority.
After entering the user name and password, installation of the software starts.
COMPUTER
5. After the installation, click the [Enter] key to exit the command prompt.
6. Select [Start] [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools] [Services].

34
The [Services] window appears.
Check that [rdp2vnc Server] is registered.
VNC(R) SERVER
7. Open the drive C to check that the folder for [rdp2vnc] is created.
FUNCTION
(d) Settings
1. Select [Start] [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools] [Services].

The [Services] window appears.
Right-click [rdp2vnc Server], and select [Properties].
35
2. The property setting window appears.
VIDEO DISPLAY
Click the [Recovery] tab to set [Restart the Service] for [First failure], [Second failure], and
FUNCTION
[Subsequent failures].
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

33.2.2 Actions
 Personal computer screen on the GOT

A personal computer screen on the GOT is displayed on an overlap window.
To use the overlap window, no setting is required.
(1) How to open a personal computer screen on the GOT
The GOT opens the personal computer screen on the GOT by using a special function switch.
For the settings of the special function switch, refer to the following.

(2) How to operate a screen
Touch this button to switch the buttons between the left-click and right-click.
Touch this button to change the display scales of a screen.

Touch the [+] button to zoom in the displayed screen.
Touch the [-] button to zoom out the displayed screen.
Touch this button to display the soft keyboard set on the special function switch.
The operation of touching this button is the same as that of holding down the [Ctrl] key and
the [ESC] key simultaneously.
The operation of touching this button is the same as that of holding down the [Ctrl] key, the
[ESC] key, and the [Del] key simultaneously.

(a) Mouse cursor operation 31

By touching a personal computer screen on the GOT, the click operation is available.
By touching the button, the GOT switches the left-click and the right-click.
The drag operation is available.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
If [Avoid input error] on [Touch detection mode] is set for [GOT setup], the drag operation is not available for
the following versions of the GOT.
• Hardware version
GT1695M-XTBA: F or earlier 32
GT1695M-XTBD: D or earlier
GT1685M-STBA: C or earlier
RFID FUNCTION
GT1685M-STBD: B or earlier
For how to check the hardware version and the BootOS version, refer to the following.

(b) Soft keyboard operation
33
By touching the button, the GOT displays the soft keyboard set on the special function switch.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
34
Japanese 106 keyboard English 101 keyboard
VNC(R) SERVER
While a button on the soft keyboard is touched, a character on the button is repeated.
The [Ctrl] button, the [Shift] button, the [Alt] button, and the [Caps] button are excluded.
FUNCTION
By touching the title bar, the soft keyboard as well as the key window can be moved.
By touching the button, the GOT closes the soft keyboard.
(c) USB mouse/keyboard operation 35
For the USB mouse/keyboard operation of a personal computer screen on the GOT, refer to the following.
VIDEO DISPLAY
Function)
FUNCTION
33.2.3 Precautions
 Precautions for drawing 36

(1) Restrictions on overlap windows
(a) Overlap window 2
MULTIMEDIA
A personal computer screen on the GOT and the test window cannot be used simultaneously. FUNCTION
The screen and the window are available by switching the screen and the window.
(b) Overlap window 5
When the locus display is set for the line graph, do not set the personal computer screen on the GOT for 37
the overlap window 5.
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
Doing so does not display the personal computer screen on the GOT.
OPERATION PANEL
(2) Login password setting

I/O FUNCTION
For the VNC server and the terminal server, set a login password with 8 characters or more that cannot be
easily guessed.
 Precautions for OS 38
For the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), install the extended function OS (PC Remote
Operation(Ethernet)) on the GOT.
To use the USB mouse/keyboard function, install the extended function OS (USB Mouse/Keyboard) on the GOT.
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION


(1) Applicable GOT
The following GOTs are applicable to the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet).
GT1695M-X, GT1685M-S, GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1655-V
(2) System configurations for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet)
For the system configurations for using the remote personal computer operation(Ethernet), refer to the following.
Works3
(3) Precautions for using USB mouse/keyboard
For the precautions of the USB mouse/keyboard, refer to the following.
Function)
(4) Mouse cursor display when installing or removing a USB mouse
When the USB mouse is installed or removed during displaying the personal computer screen on the GOT, the
mouse cursor is displayed as shown below.
To display the mouse cursors as set for GT Designer3, close the personal computer screen on the GOT, and
then open the screen again.
Mouse cursor display setting Mouse cursor display method
Both the mouse cursor on the GOT and the mouse cursor on the personal computer
Installing
are displayed.
GOT and server PC
Only the mouse cursor on the personal computer is displayed.
Removing
(The mouse cursor on the GOT is not displayed.)
Both the mouse cursor on the GOT and the mouse cursor on the personal computer
Installing
are displayed.
GOT Only The mouse cursors are not displayed.
Removing (Both the mouse cursor on the GOT and the mouse cursor on the personal computer
are not displayed.)

The GOT closes the personal computer screen on the GOT in the following cases.
• Starting the utility
• Starting the extended function or option function such as the ladder monitor screen by using a special
function switch
To use the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet) after the monitor screen appears, open the personal
computer screen on the GOT again by using the special function switch.

31
FUNCTION
BARCODE
32
RFID FUNCTION
The VNC® server function enables you to operate the GOT remotely from a personal computer at a distant location via
Ethernet by using Virtual Network Computing (VNC®).
The GOT is used as a VNC® server, and a personal computer is used as a VNC® client.
• VNC® server
The VNC® server refers to the GOT that is remotely operated from the personal computer by using this function. 33
• VNC® client
OPERATION FUNCTION
The VNC® client refers to the personal computer that is used to remotely operate the GOT by using this function.
REMOTE PERSONAL
VNC® client software must be installed on the personal computer.
COMPUTER
Operate the GOT on the The GOT operates as the operation
remote screen. on the personal computer.
34
Mouse/keyboard
VNC(R) SERVER
operation
FUNCTION
GOT screen GOT (VNC® server)
Personal computer (VNC® client) 35
VIDEO DISPLAY
POINT
FUNCTION
(1) System configuration
For the system configuration for the VNC® server function, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 36

(Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
(2) Installation of the extended function OS
Install the extended function OS (VNC Server) on the GOT. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
To use the VNC® server function, register a license number on the GOT.
For how to register the license number, refer to the following.
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
(4) Installation of VNC® client software

OPERATION PANEL
Install VNC® client software on the personal computer.

I/O FUNCTION
For the details of the VNC® client software, refer to the following.
34.1.2 Personal computer setting

38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
34 - 1

 Difference between the VNC® server function and the SoftGOT-GOT link function
To operate the GOT on the personal computer connected via Ethernet, two functions are available: VNC® server
function and SoftGOT-GOT link function.
(1) VNC® server function

With the VNC® server function, the remote screen of the personal computer displays the GOT screen.
You can view the data collected by the GOT, including alarm data and logging data, on the personal computer in
real time.
Even though an extended function or an option function is used, you can also remotely operate the GOT from
Remotely operating the GOT from the personal

computer (VNC® client)
Ethernet (The personal computer does not monitor the PLC.)
Monitoring
Remote operation
GOT screen display リモート操作中(10s)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
リモート操作中(10s)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
PLC
GOT Personal computer
(VNC® server) (VNC® client)
Since the VNC® server function increases the processing load on the GOT, the GOT can delay displaying data
and collecting data, including alarm data and logging data.
The GOT can also delay responding to an operation from the VNC® client (personal computer).
(2) SoftGOT-GOT link function
With the SoftGOT-GOT link function, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT each have a project data and monitor a
controller.
Since GT SoftGOT1000 displays the GOT screen on the personal computer, the processing load on the GOT is
reduced.
By using a GOT internal device for the screen switching device, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT can display
different screens.
The personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) and

the GOT each monitor the PLC independently.
Ethernet
Monitoring
Monitoring
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
The personal computer
B 348 B 348
reads project data and
resource data from
PLC the GOT.
GOT Personal computer
(GT SoftGOT1000)
The GOT and GT SoftGOT1000 each operate independently. Therefore, collecting data, including alarm data
and logging data, can make a difference in the collection result between the GOT and the personal computer.
The functions unavailable for GT SoftGOT1000, including extended functions and option functions, cannot be
used with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
For the details of the SoftGOT-GOT link function, refer to the following.
34 - 2

31
34.1 Settings
The following shows how to configure the settings for the VNC® server function.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
1. Configure the VNC® server function setting with GT Designer3.
For the VNC® server function setting, refer to the following.
34.1.1 GOT setting 32

2. Install VNC® client software on the personal computer, and configure the setting.
RFID FUNCTION
3. Connect the personal computer to the GOT.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

(Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 33
OPERATION FUNCTION
4. Write project data to the GOT.
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
5. Register a license number on the GOT.

34
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

34.1.1 GOT setting
Select [Common] → [Peripheral Setting] → [VNC Server] from the menu to display the [VNC Server] dialog box.
Use VNC Server Select this item to use the VNC® server function.
Configure the GOT connection setting.

Server Connection
Displays the description dialog box.
Setting
Port No. Set the GOT port number. (Setting range: 1024 to 65534)
Operation/Monitoring Set the password to remotely display the GOT screen and to operate the GOT on the
password personal computer.
Use exclusive password

Connecting Password*1 Select this item to only display the GOT screen on the personal computer.
for monitoring
Exclusive password for

Set the password to only display the GOT screen on the personal computer.
monitoring
Set the GOT load balance between the VNC® server function processing and the other processing (including
displaying screens, and collecting alarm data and logging data).
• Standard:
Sets the standard balance between the VNC® server function processing and the other processing.
• VNC Server Priority:
GOT processing
balance when VNC Assigns a higher priority to the VNC® server function processing.
server is in operation The update rate of the remote screen increases.
Select this item when the amount of the other processing is small.
• GOT Monitoring Priority:
Assigns a higher priority to the other processing.
The number of the processing delays caused by the VNC® server function decreases.
Select this item when the amount of the other processing is large.
Restrict simultaneous Select this item to disable simultaneous operations from the GOT and the remote screen of the personal computer.
operations of PC and Selecting the item enables the authorization control.
GOT 34.3.2 Authorization control
Set whether to display a video image displayed on the GOT on the remote screen of the personal computer.
Select this item to display the video image displayed on the GOT on the remote screen of the personal computer.
Display video/
Deselect this item not to display the video image displayed on the GOT on the remote screen of the personal
multimedia
computer.
The display area of the video image displays the objects, figures, and others that are placed behind the video image.
*1 For the password, one-byte alphanumeric characters, a one-byte space, and the following symbols are available.
!“#$%&‘()*+,`-./:;<=>?@[\]^_{|}~

31
POINT
(1) Number of the connecting password characters
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Up to 31 characters can be set for a connecting password.
Note that only the first eight characters are used for the password verification.
The other characters are not used for the verification.
(2) Effect by the GOT processing load balance 32
When [VNC Server Priority] is selected for [GOT processing balance when VNC server is in operation], the
GOT assigns a higher priority to the VNC® server function processing.
RFID FUNCTION
Therefore, if the number of monitoring objects is large or if background processing (including the alarm
functions and the logging function) is performed, the GOT can delay operating.
Consider the numbers of monitoring objects, alarm function settings, logging function settings, and others,
and then set the GOT processing load balance.
(3) Update rate of the remote screen when a video image is displayed 33
When the remote screen displays a video image displayed on the GOT, the update rate of the remote screen
OPERATION FUNCTION
decreases.
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
(1) Available VNC® server software 34

VNC(R) SERVER
1.0.8.2
UltraVNC UltraVNC team
recommended
FUNCTION
http://www.uvnc.com/ 35
(3) How to obtain software
Refer to the following website to download UltraVNC. (English only)
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
Download the Win32 Full version software.
Note that the above website may be changed without notification.
(4) How to install software

36
Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [License Agreement]. MULTIMEDIA
In the screen, confirm the description, and select [I accept the agreement]. FUNCTION
3. Click the [Next] button to display the screen for [Select Destination Location].
37
4. The screen for [Select Components] appears.
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
Select [Full installation] or [UltraVNC Viewer Only], and click the [Next] button.
I/O FUNCTION

Select a start menu folder to create a shortcut, and click the [Next] button.
6. The confirmation dialog box appears to confirm whether to download the following software. (When
[UltraVNC Viewer Only] is selected in the screen for [Select Components], the dialog box does not appear.) 38
• Optional non-GPL addons recommended for Vista
Download the software when using Windows Vista®.
RGB DISPLAY
• Optional non-GPL Mirror Driver

FUNCTION
Download the software.


• To create a shortcut icon on the desktop, select [Create UltraVNC desktop icons].
• To open a file with the extension of .vnc by using UltraVNC Viewer, select [Associate UltraVNC Viewer
with the .vnc file extension].
When [Full installation] is selected in the screen for [Select Components], the setting items other than the
above appear.
Set the items according to the personal computer used.

Installation of UltraVNC starts.
(5) Setting
After UltraVNC Viewer is started, set the GOT IP address.
34.3.1 Remote screen
POINT
Using the GOT as a VNC® client

By using the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), the GOT can be connected to the VNC® server as
the VNC® client.
For the setting of the remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), refer to the following.
33.2.1 Settings

31
The VNC® server function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
FUNCTION
BARCODE

32
(1) VNC® server function control (GS1792)
RFID FUNCTION
Bit number Signal name Description
Enables/disables communication from the VNC® client.

b0 VNC® client communication control signal • 0: Communication from the VNC® client enabled
• 1: Communication from the VNC® client disabled
33
Enables/disables operations from the VNC® client.
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
b1 VNC® client operation control signal • 0: Operations from the VNC® client enabled
• 1: Operations from the VNC® client disabled
COMPUTER
b2 to b7 Use prohibited -
Cancels the authorization guarantee time setting of the last operated equipment
and enables the other equipment to be operated.
b8 Authorization guarantee time cancel signal
• 0: Authorization guarantee time valid
• 1: Authorization guarantee time invalid
34
VNC(R) SERVER
(2) VNC® server operation status notification (GS1230)
FUNCTION
Bit number Signal name Description
Notifies the communication status of the VNC® client.

b0
VNC® client communication status
notification signal
• 0: VNC® client communication suspended 35
• 1: VNC® client communication in operation
Notifies the operation mode of the VNC® client.
VIDEO DISPLAY
VNC® client operation mode notification
b1 • 0: Only remote display enabled
signal
FUNCTION
• 1: Remote display and operation enabled
Notifies the equipment that holds the authorization.

b2 Authorized equipment notification signal • 0: VNC® server authorized
• 1: VNC® client authorized 36
(3) Communicating VNC® client information notification (GS1231 to GS1232)

This device stores the IP address of the communicating VNC® client in hexadecimal. MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
When the VNC® client does not communicate with the VNC® server, the device stores 0.
Example) When the IP address of the VNC® client is 192.168.3.10, the devices from GS1231 to GS1232 store
C0.A8.03.0A.
The IP address is stored as shown below. 37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
IP address of VNC® client : C0. A8. 03. 0A (Hexadecimal)

OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
GS1231 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS1232 b15 to b8 b7 to b0

Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
38
(4) VNC® server authorization guarantee status notification (GS1233)
This device notifies the remaining authorization guarantee time (second).
RGB DISPLAY
When the device stores 0, the unauthorized equipment can obtain the authorization.
FUNCTION
When the authorization control is disabled, the device stores 0.

34.3 Actions
34.3.1 Remote screen
The remote screen of the personal computer displays the GOT screen for operating the GOT.
 How to display the remote screen

Display the remote screen by using the VNC® client software installed on the personal computer.
1. Select [UltraVNC] → [UltraVNC Viewer] from the start menu to start UltraVNC Viewer.
2. In the setting dialog box, set the GOT IP address in the [VNC Server] field and click the [Connect] button.
3. Enter the password set in the [VNC Server] dialog box in the [Password] field, and click the [Log On] button.
4. The remote screen appears.
34 - 8 34.3 Actions

31
POINT
(1) When the remote screen does not display the GOT screen
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Even though the VNC® client is connected to the VNC® server on the VNC® client software, if the remote
screen does not display the GOT screen, make sure to configure the setting as shown below.
1. Start UltraVNC Viewer, and click the [Options] button. 32

2. The [Connection Options] window appears.
RFID FUNCTION
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
34
VNC(R) SERVER
FUNCTION
Check that [Full Colors] is selected in [Format and Encoding].
If [Full Colors] is not selected, deselect [Auto select best settings] and select [Full Colors].
(2) Compression format of the transferred image
The VNC® server function supports the following image compression formats. 35
Select an image compression format in [Format and Encoding].
Select [Hextile] ordinarily.
VIDEO DISPLAY
• Raw
FUNCTION
• Hextile
• ZRLE
ZRLE provides a high compression rate for images containing many repeated patterns.
However, for images containing few repeated patterns, such as photos, ZRLE provides a low compression
rate and a high processing load.
36
Select the image compression format according to the communication speed and the transferred screen
layout.
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
 How to operate the remote screen

Clicking the remote screen is recognized as touching the corresponding position on the GOT. 37
A keyboard operation on the remote screen is also recognized as a key input on the GOT.
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
34.3 Actions 34 - 9

34.3.2 Authorization control
Enabling the authorization control disables simultaneous operations from the personal computer and the GOT.
To enable the authorization control, select [Restrict simultaneous operations of PC and GOT] in the [VNC Server] dialog
box.
34.1.1 GOT setting
 Obtaining the authorization

When the authorization control is enabled, you can operate the GOT from only the equipment that holds the
authorization (personal computer or GOT).
The equipment, whose operation status popup display is clicked or touched when the authorization guarantee time is
0, obtains the authorization.
Once the personal computer or the GOT obtains the authorization, the authorized equipment holds the authorization
until the authorization guarantee time is passed.
While the personal computer holds the authorization, [The remote device is now in operation.] and [Wait time to
obtain operating authority: ****s] are alternately displayed on both equipment.
While the GOT holds the authorization, [The GOT is now in operation.] and [Wait time to obtain operating authority:
****s] are alternately displayed on both equipment.
(The asterisks indicate the authorization guarantee time (second).)
Example: When the personal computer holds the authorization

The remote device is now in operation.
Wait time to obtain operating authority: ****s
Personal computer
(VNC® client) GOT (VNC® server)
The remote device is now in operation. Ethernet The remote device is now in operation.
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
The GOT is being operated

remotely from the personal Operating the GOT
computer (VNC® client). (VNC® server) is prohibited.
POINT
Authorization guarantee time setting
Set the authorization guarantee time on the GOT utility.
For how to configure the setting on the GOT utility, refer to the following.
34 - 10 34.3 Actions

31
HINT
(1) How to identify the authorized equipment
FUNCTION
BARCODE
Check the GOT internal device to identify the authorized equipment. (Authorized equipment notification
signal, GS1230.b2)
34.2.1 GOT internal device 32
(2) Operation status popup notification function
This function notifies the authorized equipment and the waiting time for the unauthorized equipment to obtain
RFID FUNCTION
the authorization with a popup display.
The display position of the operation status popup display is the same as that set of the advanced alarm
popup display.
The operation status popup display appears on the bottom, center, or top of the screen.
If the base screen is switched while the operation status popup display is displayed, on the destination base
screen, the operation status popup display appears at the position where the advanced alarm popup display is
33
OPERATION FUNCTION
displayed.
REMOTE PERSONAL
Each touch of the leftmost portion of the operation status popup display switches its display position to the top,
center, and bottom, in that order.
COMPUTER
34
A 1254 A 1254 The remote device is nowAin1254
A 1254 operation. A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
A 1254
The remote device is nowAin1254
operation.
VNC(R) SERVER
Display the display area
Display
The remote device is now in operation. position position
FUNCTION
switching switching the display area
the display area
35
Configure the display setting on the GOT utility or GT Designer3.
For how to configure the setting on the GOT utility, refer to the following.
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
For how to configure the setting on GT Designer3, refer to the following.
11.8.2 Settings
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION
34.3 Actions 34 - 11

34.4 Precautions
 Setting required for the GOT
• Ethernet setting
Set [GOT IP Address] and [Ethernet Download Port No.] in the project data.

(1) Password setting
If the operation/monitoring password and the exclusive password for monitoring are the same, the password is
valid as the operation/monitoring password.
(2) Restrictions with the operation status popup display
When the GOT uses the operation status popup display of the VNC® server function, the GOT cannot display
the advanced alarm popup display.
When the SoftGOT-GOT link function and the VNC® server function are used, the GOT displays the operation
status popup display of the VNC® function and GT SoftGOT1000 displays that of the SoftGOT-GOT link
function.
Register a license number on the GOT.
When the OS for the VNC® server function is installed on the GOT, if a license number is not registered on the
GOT, the GOT displays [Your license key has not been registered yet. Register your license key in the utility
menu.].
(4) GOT internal device setting
If a touch switch that turns on the VNC® client communication control signal (GS1792.b0) or the VNC® client
operation control signal (GS1792.b1) is placed on the screen, set the touch switch not to be operated from the
personal computer. (Example: Set the trigger condition so that the touch switch is disabled while the GOT
communicates with the personal computer.)
If the signals are turned on while the GOT communicates with the personal computer, the following status is
made.
• If the VNC® client communication control signal is turned on
The communication with the personal computer is disconnected, and the GOT cannot communicate with the
personal computer until the signal is turned off on the GOT.
• If the VNC® client operation control signal is turned on
Though the communication with the personal computer is not disconnected, the remote operation from the
personal computer is not available.
For the GOT internal devices, refer to the following.

(5) RGB screen display
The remote screen of the personal computer cannot display the RGB screen.
When the RGB display is used, do not create a screen that displays only the RGB screen.
(Example: Screen where the RGB screen and a touch switch without a shape are placed)
Doing so makes the remote screen display nothing.
When the RGB screen is placed, also place an object with a shape together or use other methods so that the
remote screen displays something.
(6) Setting that adjusts the order of overlapped objects on the GOT to that set in GT Designer3
In the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box, do not select [Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT
Designer3].
Doing so disables the VNC® server function.
(Fundamentals) 4.1. GOT Type Setting

31
To use the VNC® server function, install the extended function OS (VNC Server) on the GOT.
FUNCTION
BARCODE
(1) Authorization control setting
Without the authorization control setting, do not operate the GOT and the remote screen of the personal
computer simultaneously. 32
Doing so causes a malfunction, resulting in an accident.
(2) Use of USB mouse
RFID FUNCTION
Even if a USB mouse is used on the GOT with the USB mouse/keyboard function, the remote screen of the
personal computer does not display the mouse cursor.
(3) Authorization control when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used
When the SoftGOT-GOT link function and the VNC® server function are used together, the authorization control
is as shown below. 33
: Available : Not available
OPERATION FUNCTION
REMOTE PERSONAL
Authorization control Operating the GOT
Authorized equipment
setting From GOT From VNC® client From GT SoftGOT1000
COMPUTER
GOT
Enabled VNC® client
GT SoftGOT1000
34
GOT
VNC(R) SERVER
Disabled VNC® client
FUNCTION
GT SoftGOT1000
35
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION
36
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION
37
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
OPERATION PANEL
I/O FUNCTION
38
RGB DISPLAY
FUNCTION

http://unlockplc.com PLC,HMI,Scada

GT Designer 3 Manual (Unlockplc - Com)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT Designer 3 Manual (Unlockplc - Com)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT Designer 3 Manual (Unlockplc - Com)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

http://unlockplc.com PLC,HMI,Scada System and more...

Unlock Crack password PLC HMI...

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

[Test operation precautions]

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

(c) Start position for filling patterns

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

2.4 Setting Word Switch ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 34

5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

6. ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

6.3.4 GOT internal device............................................................................................................ 6 - 19

8. HISTORICAL DATA LIST DISPLAY

9. DATE DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY

10. COMMENT DISPLAY

11.3.1 Before setting ................................................................................................................... 11 - 25

12.3 Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

14. LINE GRAPH

15. TREND GRAPH

16. BAR GRAPH

17. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH

18. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

19. SCATTER GRAPH

20. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

22. PARTS MOVEMENT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 2/2

24. LOGGING FUNCTION

26.2.1 GOT internal device............................................................................................................ 26 - 9

27. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

28. TRIGGER ACTION FUNCTION

29. TIME ACTION FUNCTION

30.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script..................................................................................... 30 - 123

32. RFID FUNCTION

33. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION FUNCTION

34. VNC(R) SERVER FUNCTION

35. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

36. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

37. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

38. RGB DISPLAY FUNCTION

39. REPORT FUNCTION

40. HARD COPY FUNCTION

41. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

 Screen creation software manuals

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

 Extended and option function manuals

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

 Transferring data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z2

Line Width12 Select the line width of the rectangle.